DataCAD LT

.Software for ABC Professionals sivwt l^g-f

Reference Manua
DATACAD LLC

20 Tower Lane

Avon, Connecticut 06001

USA

www.datacad.com

[email protected]

DataCAD® LT Reference Manual

Copyright © 2004 by DATACAD LLC. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of
America. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this
publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a data base
or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher.

DataCAD is a registered trademark of DATACAD LLC. All products mentioned herein are
registered trademarks of their respective companies. All artwork in this manual was created using
DataCAD.

First Printing July 2004

Printed in the United States of America

DATACAD License Agreement
This is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or an entity), the end user, and
DATACAD LLC ("DATACAD"). If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement, promptly
return the distribution media and the accompanying items (including written materials or other
containers) to DATACAD.

DATACAD Software License

Grant of License
This DATACAD software program ("the software") is licensed not sold. DATACAD grants you a
license for the software only in the country where you acquired the software. You obtain no rights
other than those granted to you under this license. DATACAD grants to you the right to use one
copy of the enclosed software on a single computer. The software is in "use" on a computer when
it is loaded into temporary memory (i.e. RAM) or installed into permanent memory (e.g. hard disk
or other storage device) of that computer. Installation of the software on a network server for the
sole purpose of distribution to one or more other computers is not permitted under this license. A
separate license is required for each copy of the software in a network installation.

Copyright
The software is owned by DATACAD or licensed from its owners and is protected by United
States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the software
like any other legally copyrighted material with the following exceptions. You may either make
one copy of the software solely for backup or archival purposes or transfer the software to a single
hard disk provided that you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes. You may
NOT copy the printed materials ("documentation") accompanying the software.

Other Restrictions
You may not rent, lease or assign the software. You may transfer the software and documentation
on a permanent basis provided that you retain no copies and the recipient agrees to the terms of
this Agreement. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the software. If the
software is an upgrade, any transfer must include the most recent upgrade and all prior versions.
Additional licenses are not transferable. You may not distribute, sublicense, or modify the
software.

Export Restrictions
You agree that neither you nor your customers intend to or will, directly or indirectly, export or
transmit: 1) the software or related documentation and technical data; or 2) your software product
as described in this license or any part thereof, or process, or service that is the direct product of
the software, to any country to which such export or transmission is restricted by any applicable
U.S. regulation or statute, without the prior written consent, if required, of the Bureau of Export
Administration of the U.S. Department of Commerce, or such other governmental entity as may
have jurisdiction over such export or transmission.

Limited Warranty
DATACAD warrants that the software will perform substantially in accordance with the
accompanying printed materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. Any
implied warranties on the software are limited to ninety (90) days. DATACAD does not warrant
that the functions contained in the software will meet your requirements or that the operation of
the software will be uninterrupted or error-free or that any software defects will be corrected.
II |

Some states/jurisdictions do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the
above limitation may not apply to you.

Customer Remedies
DATACAD's and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at DATACAD's
option, either 1) return of the price paid less shipping and handling charges if applicable or 2)
repair or replacement of the software that does not meet DATACAD's Limited Warranty and
which is returned to DATACAD with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if
failure of the software has resulted from accident, abuse or misapplication. Any replacement
software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Outside the United States of America, neither these remedies nor any product
support services offered by DATACAD are available without proof of purchase from an
authorized non-U.S. source.

No other warranties. To the maximum extent permitted by law, DATACAD and its suppliers
disclaim all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to, implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with regard to the software or
the accompanying documentation. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
have other rights which vary between different states/jurisdictions.

No liability for consequential damages. In no event shall DATACAD or its suppliers be liable for
any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages for loss of business profits,
business interruption, loss of business information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the
use of or inability to use this DATACAD product, even if DATACAD has been advised of the
possibility of such damages. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages, the above limitation may not apply
to you.

Federal Government
The software and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restriction as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of The
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or
subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR
52.227-19, as applicable. Manufacturer is DATACAD LLC, 20 Tower Lane, Avon, CT 06001.

If you acquired this product in the United States of America, this Agreement is governed by the
laws of the State of Connecticut. Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement, or if
you desire to contact DATACAD for any reason:

Tel: (860) 677-4004

Fax:(860)677-2610
E-mail: [email protected]
Write: DATACAD LLC, Product Development, 20 Tower Lane, Avon, CT 06001.
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents ................................................................................... iii

Up & Running........................................................................................... 1
How to Use This Manual......................................................................................................2
Getting Help in DataCAD LT 2
Installing DataCAD LT ........................................................................................................2
System Requirements 3
Before You Begin 3
Pre-installation Checklist 6
Running the Setup Program 6

The Drawing Board.................................................................................. 7

Opening a Drawing...............................................................................................................8
Opening an Existing Drawing 8
Creating a New Drawing 10
Importing a DWG or DXF Drawing File 10
Using Windows Explorer to Open Files 13
A Brief Tour..........................................................................................................................13
The Menu Bar 13
Toolbars 14
Dialog Boxes 22
The Menu Window 22
The Drawing Area 25
Customizing DataCAD LT.................................................................................................26
Customizing Pathnames 26
Customizing DataCAD LT’s Interface 28
Customizing File Translation 36
Customizing the Macros Menu 40
Customizing Miscellaneous Settings 41
Common Menus in DataCAD LT.....................................................................................43
Selection Menus 43
Value Menus 45
Color Menus 47
IV | TABLE OF CONTENTS

Working with Dual Monitors............................................................................................48

Planning Your Project.........................................................................................................49
Gathering Project Information 49
Planning Layers 49
Prioritizing Drawing Tasks 51
Drawing Efficiently 51
Sample Project 52
Basic Drawing and Editing ................................................................................................54
Drawing Using the Mouse 54
Drawing Using Coordinate Entry 55
Drawing with Line Types 57
Basic Editing Tools 59
Referencing Drawings........................................................................................................60
Inserting Images Directly into Drawings........................................................................61
Viewing Drawings ..............................................................................................................63
Zooming In and Out 64
Changing Your View Using the Keyboard 65
Changing Your View Using the Navigation Toolbar 65
Saving Drawings..................................................................................................................65
More About Working with Files 67
Backing Up and Recovering Files 70
Exporting Files 73
Launching External Applications.....................................................................................75

Tutorial: Drawing a Schoolhouse......................................................... 77

Setting Up a New Drawing................................................................................................78
Setting the Snap Grid for the Tutorial 78
Creating New Layers for the Tutorial 78
Naming Layers for the Tutorial 78
Moving Between Layers in the Tutorial 79
Assigning Colors to Layers in the Tutorial 79
Drawing Walls, Windows, and Doors.............................................................................80
Drawing the Schoolhouse Walls 80
Drawing the Schoolhouse’s Doors and Windows 96

Tutorial: Adding Dimensions, Notes, Symbols, and Hatching ........ 109

Adding Text to the Schoolhouse Drawing....................................................................110
 TABLE OF CONTENTS| V

Drawing Text Arrows in the Schoolhouse Drawing 113

Editing Text in the Schoolhouse Drawing 114
Dimensioning the Schoolhouse Drawing.....................................................................115
Drawing a String of Dimensions: 116
Automatic Dimensioning 118
Stretching Dimensions 120
Hatching the Schoolhouse Drawing..............................................................................122
Adding Symbols to the Schoolhouse.............................................................................124
Opening a Symbol Folder 125
Selecting and Placing Symbols 126
Selecting Another Symbol File 129
Copying Symbols 130
Drawing a Title Block and Border..................................................................................131
Moving the Border 132
Drawing a Title Block 133

Tutorial: Printing a Drawing................................................................ 137

Printing the Schoolhouse Drawing................................................................................138
Printing Options 140

Tutorial: Modeling ............................................................................... 143

Modeling the Schoolhouse..............................................................................................144
Adding Windows 144
Adding 3D Doors 146
Viewing the 3D Model 147
Adding a 3D Roof 147
Finishing the Schoolhouse Drawing 149
Viewing Your Drawing in 3D .........................................................................................150
Advanced 3D Viewing 151
Creating Elevations 155

Before You Draw.................................................................................. 157

Managing Your Project.....................................................................................................158
Setting Up Your Drawing Grids.....................................................................................158
Using the Snap Grid 159
Using the Display Grids 159
Changing Grid Size 159
VI | TABLE OF CONTENTS

Changing Display Grid Color 160

Setting the Snap Angle 161
Setting the Grid Angle 161
Setting the Grid Origin 162
Working With Layers........................................................................................................162
Creating Layers 163
Setting the Active Layer 164
Displaying Layers 164
Locking Layers 165
Renaming Layers 166
Changing Layer Color 166
Viewing a Layer 167
Deleting Layers and Their Contents 167
Selecting Layers Without Using Layer Names 168
Searching for Layers 169
Saving and Loading Layers 170
Using Layer Sets 171
Assigning Materials for a Layer 173
Setting Z-Base and Z-Height for a Layer 174
Using the Layer Manager.................................................................................................174
Accessing Layer Manager 175
Changing a Layer’s Number 176
Sorting the Layers 176
Changing Layer Settings 178
Using Other Layer Functions 181
Changing an Incorrect Layer Setting 185
Exiting from the Layer Manager 185
Customizing Drawing Settings.......................................................................................186
Setting a Password 186
Setting Scale and Angle Types 186
Editing Scale, Angle, and Distance Lists 188
Setting Cursor Accuracy 191
Setting Display Options 191
Setting the Panning Distance 192
Automatically Saving Your Drawing 193
Synchronizing the Distance Display 193
Customizing Display ........................................................................................................193
Customizing Colors 196
 TABLE OF CONTENTS| VII

Drawing Walls, Windows, & Doors..................................................... 199

Drawing Walls....................................................................................................................200
Using Wall Styles 204
Cutting Walls 206
Drawing Doors...................................................................................................................207
Removing a Door 211
Drawing Windows ............................................................................................................212
Removing a Window 215

Drawing Other Geometry.................................................................... 217

Drawing Polygons.............................................................................................................218
Drawing Rectangles 219
Drawing Curves.................................................................................................................220
Drawing 2-Point Arcs 220
Drawing 3-Point Arcs 221
Drawing Arcs By Center Angle 222
Drawing Arcs By Arc Length 222
Drawing Arcs By Chord Length 223
Drawing Arcs By Radius 224
Drawing Arcs By Included Angle 225
Drawing Arcs Using a Tangent Line 226
Drawing Tangent Arcs 227
Drawing Circles By Radius 228
Drawing Circles By Diameter 228
Drawing Circles By Points 229
Drawing Ellipses 230
Drawing Curves Using Control Points 230
Drawing Curves Using Surveyor’s Data 232
Drawing Polylines.............................................................................................................233
Voids in Polylines .............................................................................................................238

Other Ways to Draw............................................................................. 241

Copying Entities ................................................................................................................242
Copying Entities a Specified Distance and Angle 242
Copying Entites by Dragging 243
Copying Entities at the Perpendicular 244
Copying to Another Layer 245
Copying Using Arrays 246
VIII | TABLE OF CONTENTS

Mirroring Entities..............................................................................................................252
Sketching Your Plan..........................................................................................................253

Drawing Tools...................................................................................... 255

Setting Reference Points ..................................................................................................256
Object Snapping ................................................................................................................258
Snapping to the Nearest Point 259
Snapping to Dividing Points 260
Snapping to End Points 260
Snapping to the Midpoint of a Line 261
Snapping to Arc and Circle Centers 261
Snapping to Quadrant Points 262
Snapping to Intersections 262
Snapping to a Perpendicular 263
Snapping to Tangents 263
Using Get-Snap 264
Using Virtual Snapping 265
Identifying Entities ...........................................................................................................266
Measuring Entities ............................................................................................................267
Measuring Lengths and Angles 267
Measuring the Total Length of Lines 269
Measuring Areas, Perimeters, and Volumes 270
Working with Entities.......................................................................................................273
Dividing Entities 273
Marking Line Intersections 275
Matching the Snap Grid to an Entity 275

Editing Drawings ................................................................................. 279

Trimming, Welding, and Cleaning ................................................................................280
Trimming Corners 280
Trimming Entities 282
Welding Lines and Walls 284
Cleaning Wall Intersections 285
Changing Entities..............................................................................................................288
Changing Entity Attributes 289
Changing Text Attributes 290
Moving Entities..................................................................................................................291
Moving Entities to Absolute Zero 292
 TABLE OF CONTENTS| IX

Moving Entities by Specific Distance and Angle 292

Moving Entities by Dragging 294
Moving Entities to Another Layer 295
Moving SPB-Filled Entities 296
Rotating Entities ................................................................................................................298
Stretching Entities .............................................................................................................300
Enlarging Entities..............................................................................................................301
Erasing Entities ..................................................................................................................303
Editing Multiple Entities..................................................................................................304
Grouping Entities Together 304
Clipping and Cropping ....................................................................................................305

Text, Notes, and Labels....................................................................... 309

Drawing Text......................................................................................................................310
Justifying Text 312
Aligning Text 313
Fitting Text into Defined Areas 313
Importing and Exporting Text 314
Using Text Styles 315
Drawing Text Arrows 316
Using TrueType Fonts Instead of .CHR Fonts.............................................................318
Using Text Attributes for Symbols.................................................................................320
Adding Text Attributes for Symbols 320
Editing Text Attributes for Symbols 324

Dimensions.......................................................................................... 325
Drawing Linear Dimensions...........................................................................................326
Editing Linear Dimensions 333
Exploding Linear Dimensions 334
Drawing Dimensions for Angles and Curves..............................................................335

Hatch..................................................................................................... 339
Drawing Hatch Patterns ...................................................................................................340
Drawing Standard Hatch 340
Defining the Hatch Boundary 342
Using SPB Fills Instead of Standard Hatch Patterns 344
Drawing Associative Hatch 346
X | TABLE OF CONTENTS

Symbols, Images, and Objects........................................................... 349

Using the Symbol Browser ..............................................................................................350
Positioning the Symbol Browser on your DataCAD LT Desktop 350
Inserting Stamps................................................................................................................369
Importing BMP, JPEG, and Other Image Files.............................................................369
Calibrating Enlargements 370

Elevations and Sections ..................................................................... 373

Drawing Exterior Elevations............................................................................................374
Drawing Door Elevations.................................................................................................377
Drawing Window Elevations ..........................................................................................379
Drawing Cabinet Elevations............................................................................................382
Drawing Sections...............................................................................................................384

Printing Your Drawing......................................................................... 387

Printing Basics....................................................................................................................388
More About Previewing Your Plot 392
Printing a Check Plot ........................................................................................................393
Using Pen Tables...............................................................................................................394
More About Using Pen Tables 395
Saving and Using Pen Table Settings 396
Laying Out Your Drawing ...............................................................................................396
Using Quick Layout 396

Modeling Basics .................................................................................. 399

Z-Base and Z-Height .........................................................................................................400
Z By Layer 400
The Zero Plane 400
Changing 3D Settings.......................................................................................................403
3D Settings Toggles 403
Setting Primary and Secondary Divisions 403
Setting Z-Elevations 404
Drawing 3D Lines..............................................................................................................404
All about 3D Snapping.....................................................................................................405
Using Markers 408
 TABLE OF CONTENTS| XI

Modeling with 3D Polygons, Slabs, and Blocks ............................... 409

Drawing Rectangular 3D Polygons and Slabs .............................................................410
Drawing Horizontal 3D Polygons and Slabs................................................................410
Drawing Vertical 3D Polygons and Slabs.....................................................................412
Drawing Inclined 3D Polygons and Slabs....................................................................414
Adding Voids to Polygons and Slabs............................................................................419
Editing 3D Polygons and Slabs.......................................................................................420
Drawing Blocks..................................................................................................................423

Drawing Single-Curved Entities ......................................................... 425

Drawing 3D Arcs ...............................................................................................................426
Drawing Vertical Cylinders.............................................................................................428
Drawing Horizontal Cylinders .......................................................................................429
Drawing Cones and Truncated Cones...........................................................................432

Drawing Double-Curved Entities........................................................ 435

Drawing Spheres and Domes..........................................................................................436
Drawing Tori......................................................................................................................438
Drawing Surfaces of Revolution ....................................................................................439
Drawing Mesh Surfaces ...................................................................................................442

Site Modeling....................................................................................... 447

Site Modeling with Drop Mesh......................................................................................448
Drawing Topographical Maps with Contours.............................................................455

Editing 3D Entities............................................................................... 459

Rules for Editing 3D Entities...........................................................................................460
Moving 3D Entities ...........................................................................................................460
Copying 3D Entities..........................................................................................................463
Rotating 3D Entities..........................................................................................................464
Mirroring 3D Entities........................................................................................................465
Stretching 3D Entities.......................................................................................................465
Enlarging 3D Entities........................................................................................................466
XII | TABLE OF CONTENTS

Exploding 3D Entities.......................................................................................................467
Changing 3D Entities........................................................................................................468

Viewing Your Model............................................................................. 469

Creating Parallel Views....................................................................................................471
Creating an Isometric View 475
Creating Elevations 475
Creating Perspective Views.............................................................................................477
Establishing Perspective Settings 478
Creating a One-Point Perspective 479
Creating a Two-Point Perspective 480
Creating a Three-Point Perspective 480
Perspective Navigation Controls 481
Creating Oblique Views...................................................................................................481
Establishing Oblique Settings 481
Creating an Elevation Oblique View 481
Creating a Plan Oblique View 482
Creating a Hidden Line Removal...................................................................................482
Tips on Maximizing Performance 484
Saving the Hide Image 484
Increasing Hide Speed 485
Hide Options 485
Creating a Shaded Image .................................................................................................487
Saving and Using Shader Settings 491
Saving Your Shaded Image 492
Viewing Selected Entities in Your Model.....................................................................492
Saving a View.....................................................................................................................494
GoTo View 494
Walking Through Your Model........................................................................................496
Using the o2c-based Object Viewer ...............................................................................499
Rendering Settings............................................................................................................501

Framing Your Model............................................................................ 509

Framing Floors ...................................................................................................................510
Framing Walls ....................................................................................................................511
Framing Roofs....................................................................................................................513
 TABLE OF CONTENTS| XIII

Defining the Roof Boundary 516

Joining Roofs 518
Settings Options 520
Saving and Using Framing Settings...............................................................................522

Modeling Windows and Doors ........................................................... 523

Modeling Windows...........................................................................................................524
Modeling Doors.................................................................................................................529

Modeling Concrete Forms .................................................................. 535

Drawing Columns .............................................................................................................536
Drawing Inverted, Single and Double Tee Forms ......................................................536
Drawing Standard Beam Forms......................................................................................538
Drawing I-Beam Forms.....................................................................................................539

Modeling Stairs.................................................................................... 541

Drawing 3D Stairs.............................................................................................................542
Customizing Stair Settings..............................................................................................545
Stair Form 556
Saving and Using Stair Settings 556

Appendix.............................................................................................. 557
INI Settings.........................................................................................................................558
DWG/DXF Translation Tables........................................................................................560
Importing 560
Exporting 563
Creating Custom Toolbars...............................................................................................565
Standard Line types 569
Standard Hatch Patterns...................................................................................................570
Standard Keyboard Shortcuts 574
Creating Keyboard Shortcuts for Pull-down Menu Options 576
Standard Fonts....................................................................................................................578
Extended characters...........................................................................................................578
Inserting Symbols in Drawings without the Symbol Browser.................................580
Finding and Using Older Template and Symbol Files 581
XIV | TABLE OF CONTENTS

Creating and Editing Templates.....................................................................................583

Editing Templates 584
Creating and Editing Symbols........................................................................................584
Editing Symbols 585
Editing Information Fields 586
Replacing Symbols in Your Drawing 587
Deleting Symbols 588

Glossary............................................................................................... 591

Index..................................................................................................... 598
 Up & Running
Getting DataCAD LT up and running is a simple matter
with its flexible and interactive setup program. Use the In this chapter:
1
"System Requirements" and "Pre-Installation Checklist" in
this chapter to make sure you're ready to begin installing the How to use this manual
program. The setup instructions that follow take you step- System requirements
by-step through the installation process.
Pre-installation checklist
To get the most from this manual, please refer to “How to Installing DataCAD LT
Use This Manual” in this chapter.
If you have any questions about installing DataCAD LT,
you can contact DATACAD LLC Technical Support
Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. eastern time,
except during normally observed holidays, via phone at
(860) 677-2829, fax at (860) 677-2883, or e-mail at
[email protected].
2 | CHAPTER 1: UP & RUNNING

How to Use This Manual

This manual begins with two chapters introducing DataCAD LT to you. “The Drawing Board”
chapter covers such topics as opening and saving drawings, using coordinate entry, and common
menus in the program.
Following this introduction, four additional chapters guide you through a basic tutorial, designed
to quickly teach you how to use DataCAD LT’s basic functions to produce a plan drawing. All of
these exercises focus on a single project.
The remainder of the manual gives detailed explanations as well as step-by-step instructions on
how to use each DataCAD LT function and menu to complete drawing tasks. These instructions
may include typing words or characters, using keyboard shortcuts, selecting entities, and choosing
menu options.
Words or characters to be typed are printed in bold; type them exactly as they appear. Keys to be
pressed are shown just as they appear on your keyboard, with parentheses around the character(s),
as shown below:
Press (Enter).
Press (Ctrl) + (M).
Combinations like the second example above should be executed by pressing and holding down
the first key, pressing the second key, then releasing both simultaneously.
Some instructions ask you to "click" or "right-click" on a button or icon. To click on a button,
move your mouse until your cursor arrow is over the button and then press the left mouse button
once. To right-click, press the right mouse button once. Right-clicking generally doesn't require
specific placement of the cursor arrow; it must, however, be somewhere over the DataCAD LT
window.

Getting Help in DataCAD LT

DataCAD LT includes online help, accessible by pressing (Ctrl) + (F1) or using the Help Menu in
DataCAD LT. The online help contains the Reference Manual in .PDF format. To use the
Reference Manual, you need the Adobe Acrobat Reader. If you do not have the Adobe Acrobat
Reader on your computer, you can get a free copy of the Acrobat Reader by going to the Adobe
website at www.adobe.com.
You can also access the online help from outside of DataCAD LT. Use Windows Explorer to open
the DataCAD LT\Help folder and then double-click on DataCAD LT 11_Manual.PDF.

Installing DataCAD LT
To install DataCAD LT on your computer, first review the "System Requirements" and "Pre-
Installation Checklist" sections below to make sure you have everything you need to install the
program. Then follow the instructions in "Running the Setup Program" on the next page.
Information in this section requires you to be familiar with your computer hardware and your
computer's operating system (Microsoft Windows 98 or ME, Windows NT 4.0 or later, or
Windows 2000 or XP).
 INSTALLING DATACAD LT| 3

To check available free hard disk space prior to installation, double-click on the My Computer
icon on your Windows desktop. Right-click on the drive you want to install DataCAD LT on, and
select Properties. The hard disk space already in use will be displayed as well as the amount that is
still free.

System Requirements
Make sure you have the following minimum requirements to install and run DataCAD LT for
Windows:
• Personal or multimedia computer with a Pentium-based processor (Pentium II recommended)
• Windows 98 or later or Windows NT 4.0 or later (Windows 2000 or XP recommended)
• 64MB of memory for use on Windows 98 or Windows ME (128MB recommended); 128MB
for use on Windows NT workstation, Windows 2000, or Windows XP (256MB
recommended)
• Minimum of 100MB free hard disk space. 300MB is recommended for a complete
installation. If you do not have enough free disk space in your computer when you try to run
DataCAD LT, the message Not enough room to create swap files appears. Free up disk space
and then restart DataCAD LT.
To check available free hard disk space prior to installation, double-click on the My Computer icon
on your Windows desktop. Right-click on the drive you want to install DataCAD LT on, and select
Properties. The hard disk space already in use will be displayed as well as the amount that is still
free.

• CD-ROM drive
• SVGA (800X600), or better, resolution graphics card capable of displaying 16-bit color
(65,536) or better for using the Shader (1024X768, 24 bit recommended)
• Microsoft-compatible mouse or digitizer (3-button mouse recommended)
Before You Begin

DataCAD LT 11 includes some of the most significant enhancements to the program in years.
These consist of changes to file format, directory structure, file and folder names, and program
default settings, as well as many feature enhancements. The Whats_New.HTM file on your
DataCAD LT CD-ROM has more details about the new features and enhancements. Due to the
fundamental nature of these changes, DataCAD LT 11 must be installed into a new program folder.
The installation program will not allow DataCAD LT 11 to be installed in the same folder as a
previous version.
If you are installing DataCAD LT 11 on a computer with a previous DataCAD LT version, you
may have existing data files and/or customized support files like hatch patterns and line types. If
you chose to search for an existing version, some of your support files and settings can be copied
into your DataCAD LT 11 program folder automatically during installation. You will need to copy
other support files manually. Data files (such as drawings, XREF drawings, default drawings,
symbols, and templates) are not automatically copied into your DataCAD LT 11 folder during
installation. You need to decide which data files (if any) you will copy into your DataCAD LT 11
folder.
4 | CHAPTER 1: UP & RUNNING

These instructions will help you update your DataCAD LT software to version 11. We recommend
that you make a complete backup of your data and support files before you install this upgrade and
before you modify, copy, or convert any data or support files. If you don’t make a backup, you
may not be able to recover from an error or program failure.

New Directory Structure

Previous versions of DataCAD LT were installed in a folder named DataCAD LT on your C drive
(C:\DataCAD LT). The folders shown in the Older Versions column have been replaced by the
folders in Version 11.
Version 11 Older Versions
Bitmaps BMP
Default Drawings Default
Drawings DWG
Fonts CHR
Help Help
Layer Files LYR
Macros DCX
Materials Materials (for o2c files)
o2c Objects o2c
Plot Files PLT
Report Forms FRM
Support Files SUP
Symbols SYM
Templates TPL
Temporary Files TEMP
Textures Textures (for o2c files)
Transfer XFER
Drawing Files
DataCAD LT drawing files have a new file format. This is primarily due to the enhancement to a
double-precision database. All existing DataCAD LT drawing files (*.DC5) are automatically
converted to the new format when you open them with DataCAD LT 11. When you close the
drawing files, they are saved in the new format with the .AEC extension. Once you have converted
your drawings, all future edits should be performed in the .AEC file. This applies to all DataCAD
LT drawing files.
You can convert several drawing files at once by selecting multiple .DC5 files in the File\Open
dialog. Once they are open, select File\Close All. The resultant .AEC files will automatically be
saved at the same location as the .DC5 files. DataCAD LT 11 will convert .DC5 files to .AEC
files, but it will not convert .AEC files to .DC5 files.

Default Drawings
DataCAD LT 11 cannot use your existing .DC5 default drawings until they are converted to .AEC
files. Therefore, we recommend that you convert your existing default drawings, if any, before you
create any new drawings in DataCAD LT 11.
 INSTALLING DATACAD LT| 5

Symbols
DataCAD LT 11 has a powerful new feature called the Symbol Browser. This toolbar lets you
view and use all of your symbol folders. The symbol libraries that are included with DataCAD LT
have been organized into a logical directory structure, making symbols easy to find.
DataCAD LT 11 symbol files have a new file format and use the file extension .DSF. DataCAD LT
11 can read existing symbol files (with the .SM3 extension) as well as the new .DSF file format.
You can access your existing symbol libraries with the Symbol Browser by seting the path to your
existing symbol folder. DataCAD LT 11 automatically creates .DSF files when you save symbols.

Support Files
DataCAD LT has a variety of support files used for different purposes; you can customize many of
these files. You may have modified some of your DataCAD LT support files in a previous version
or installed add-on products for DataCAD LT which updated them.
The DataCAD LT 11 installation program allows you to search for a previous version of DataCAD
LT. Many potentially customized files will then automatically be copied into DataCAD LT 11. If
you chose to search for an existing version, the following support files are copied into your
C:\Program Files\DataCAD LT\Support Files\ folder during installation.
Support File Type Original Location Filename
Hatch Pattern Definition File DATACAD LT\SUP\ DCADWIN.PAT
Hatch Pattern Preview Settings File DATACAD LT\SUP\ DCADWIN.PAT.INI
Line type Definition File DATACAD LT\SUP\ DCADWIN.LIN
Keyboard Macro File DATACAD LT\SUP\ DCADWIN.MCR
Text Style File DATACAD LT\SUP\ TEXT.STL
Wall Style File DATACAD LT\SUP\ WALL.STL
Command Line Alias File DATACAD LT\SUP\ DCADWIN.DCA
Spell Checker User Dictionary File DATACAD LT\SUP\ USERDIC.TLX
Dimension Style Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ *.DIMSTYLE
o2c Rendering Settings Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ *.DMF
Plotter Pen Settings Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ *.PEN
Palette Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ *.RGB
DWG Translator Color Mapping Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ *.TBL
DWG Translator Settings Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ *.INI
Shader Light Settings Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ *.LIT
Toolbar Files DATACAD LT\SUP\ MENUPOF\*.*
Text Fonts
DataCAD LT supports both DataCAD LT .CHR fonts and Windows TrueType fonts. Earlier
versions of DataCAD LT only supported .CHR fonts. If you installed additional .CHR fonts for
DataCAD LT, you can copy those files into your C:\Program Files\DataCAD LT\Fonts\ folder for
use with DataCAD LT 11. If you are using TrueType fonts in DataCAD LT, you don’t need to copy
those font files since Windows manages your TrueType fonts from a central location on your
computer.
6 | CHAPTER 1: UP & RUNNING

DCAL Macros
If you have additional DCAL Macros installed with your previous DataCAD LT version, you can
copy those files into your C:\Program Files\DataCAD LT\Macros\ folder. DCAL Macros have the
file extension .DCX. Some macros may have additional support files or settings files that need to
be copied along with them. In previous versions, macros resided in the \DataCAD LT\DCX\
folder.
The following macros are no longer included with DataCAD LT:
• LyrUtil (Layer Utility)
• SymExp (Symbol Explode)
• EstLink (Estimator Link)
• ViewMast (View Master)
Functionality from LyrUtil and SymExp is built into Layers, LayerSets, and 3D Explode menus,
respectively. Do not copy LyrUtil, SymExp, EstLink, or ViewMast macros into the new DataCAD
LT\Macros folder.

Pre-installation Checklist
• Do you have the minimum system requirements for DataCAD LT?
• Have you made a copy of your DataCAD LT folder to back up all your files? This is simply a
precaution against losing any of your drawing files or customized settings.
• Remember to register online at www.datacad.com/register to qualify for technical support
benefits and to receive new product information as it becomes available.
Running the Setup Program
The DataCAD LT setup program guides you step-by-step through installing DataCAD LT. Please
exit all Windows applications completely before running the DataCAD LT setup program. If your
computer uses Windows NT, 2000, or XP Pro, you must have Administrative Privileges to run this
setup program. (This means you must be logged on as the Administrator.)
1. Place the DataCAD LT CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive; the setup program should start
automatically. If it doesn’t, click on Run in the Start menu. In the Open input box, type
e:\setup, where “e” is the letter of your CD-ROM drive. Press (Enter) or click on OK. To
cancel the installation at any time, press (Esc) or click Cancel.
2. The setup program begins. Simply follow the instructions on the screen. This version of
DataCAD LT must be installed in a new program folder. Because of the many changes,
you cannot install it in the same folder as a previous version of DataCAD LT.
3. Once setup is complete, you can view the ReadMe file, which contains important
information about DataCAD LT that is not documented anywhere else. Click Finish to
complete the setup program and open the ReadMe file.
The setup program will ask you to enter your serial number. Your serial number is printed on the
back of the CD case and looks similar to LTXIW12345. Be sure not to substitute the letter “O” for
a zero when entering your serial number.
 The Drawing Board
A user-oriented menu system makes DataCAD LT easy to
learn and convenient to use. Because it was developed by In this chapter:
2
architects for architecture, the program focuses on design,
not computer technology. Even draftsmen and designers Creating drawings
with no previous computer experience can learn DataCAD Opening drawings
LT quickly.
Importing and exporting
DataCAD LT’s dual menu system combines familiar drawings
Windows menus in the Menu Bar with a comprehensive, The DataCAD LT screen
nested menu structure in the Menu Window. This unique
Common menus found
system, along with toolbars and numerous keyboard throughout DataCAD LT
shortcuts, allows constant access to the tools you use to
draw, instead of covering your drawing area with menus Planning your drawing
project
that are only temporarily visible.
Basic drawing and
From your initial design work, massing studies, and interior editing
perspectives to your final set of construction drawings,
DataCAD LT provides you with the tools you need to Viewing your project
produce quality work quickly, accurately, and with greater Naming and saving files
flexibility than ever before.
8 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

Opening a Drawing
DataCAD LT 11 drawings have an .AEC file extension. When you create a new drawing,
DataCAD LT adds the .AEC extension automatically. When you open a .DC3 or .DC5 file in
DataCAD LT 11 for the first time, it is automatically converted to an .AEC file. This conversion
process takes a few moments longer than usual. In the process, the drawing file is cleaned up and
purged of unused entities and the database is converted from single-precision to double-precision.
DataCAD LT 11 uses double-precision floating point math to calculate and store values in the
drawing database. Prior versions of DataCAD LT had an effective accuracy of ~7 decimal places.
DataCAD LT 11 has an effective accuracy of ~14 decimal places. That means DataCAD LT 11 is
now as accurate as AutoCAD® and you can work on much larger projects without running into
rounding issues, especially when importing large drawings.
DataCAD LT has five options for opening a drawing:
• opening an existing DataCAD LT drawing
• creating a new DataCAD LT drawing
• importing a DWG or DXF drawing file
• double-clicking on DataCAD LT drawing files in Windows Explorer
If DataCAD LT does not start, review Chapter 1 to make sure you meet all system requirements.
See the first page of Chapter 1 for details on how to contact us.
If someone on your network is still using the file that you want to open, DataCAD LT can
determine whether it is “in-use.” Every time you open a drawing, DataCAD LT records the date,
time, username, and workstation name in a corresponding user (.U$R) file. If you try to open a
drawing file that is “in-use,” DataCAD LT will only allow you to open a copy of the file.
If you exit a file abnormally, DataCAD LT will automatically try to recover the most recent
version of your file without prompting you with unnecessary warnings and options.
For more information about file formats, see “More About Working with Files” near the end of
this chapter. For more information about recovery files, see “Backing Up and Recovering Files”
near the end of this chapter.

Opening an Existing Drawing

You can open a DataCAD LT drawing when you first start DataCAD LT, while you’re working on
another DataCAD LT drawing, or after you exit all drawings on your screen.

To open an existing DataCAD LT drawing:

1. Start DataCAD LT. If DataCAD LT is already running, click Open in the File pull-down
menu. A dialog box opens, listing all files in the current folder.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (O) to open an existing drawing file.

2. Select the type of file you want to open from the Files of Type drop-down box. You can
open any DataCAD LT, DataCAD Plus, backup, or autorecover files.
 OPENING A DRAWING | 9
3. Click on the drawing you want to open to highlight it. If the Show Preview option is
checked, a bitmap version of this drawing will be displayed in the preview window on the
right side of the dialog box. If you don’t want to see a preview of an existing drawing,
simply click in the Show Preview box to remove the checkmark.

Figure 2.1: The preview window displays a bitmap version of the drawing

4. Click on Open or press (Enter) on your keyboard. The drawing is opened. If a message
displays alerting you to orphaned reference files, see the “Referencing Drawings” section
in this chapter for instructions on resolving these orphaned files.

Working with Folders in DataCAD LT’s Save and Open Dialog Boxes
You’ll probably want to store your DataCAD LT drawings for each project in separate folders. If
you have two projects, you might, for example, create two folders named PROJECT1 and
PROJECT2 in DataCAD LT’s \Drawings folder.

To create a new folder in DataCAD LT:

1. Start DataCAD LT or click on New in the File pull-down menu.
2. Click on the Create New Folder icon in the Enter name of drawing file to edit dialog box.
The Create New Folder icon is at the top of the dialog box. A new folder appears in the
dialog box.
3. Type the name of the folder and press (Enter).
Obviously, a new folder has nothing in it when you create it. Only after you save drawings to that
folder will the drawing filenames appear in the dialog box.
You’ll also want to save files to - or open files in - a different folder than what’s displayed in the
dialog box. To do this, you’ll first have to change folders.

To change folders in a dialog box:

• Click on the arrow for the “Look in:” drop-down box and select a new folder; or
• Click on the Up One Level icon and select a new folder from the list; or
• Double-click on a folder to open it.
10 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Creating a New Drawing
You must name your new drawing before DataCAD LT will open it.

To create a new drawing:

1. Start DataCAD LT; if DataCAD LT is already running, click on New in the File pull
down menu. A dialog box appears with the title Enter name of drawing file to create.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (N) or press (Alt) + (N) to start a new drawing.

2. Type a name for your new drawing in the Filename input box. The drawing name can be
up to 255 characters long and consist of spaces, letters, numbers, and any other characters
except the following: + / \ [ ] ; : . ,

3. Click on Create or press (Enter). The new drawing is opened.

Importing a DWG or DXF Drawing File

DataCAD LT’s drawing translator can import DWG and DXF files compatible with AutoCAD 12,
13, and 14 as well as AutoCAD 2000. You can choose an automatic translation or an interactive
one, where you can decide how each line type and font should be translated and displayed in
DataCAD LT.
Symbol Attributes appear as Block Attributes when you open a DWG file.

To import a DWG or DXF file and open it in DataCAD LT:

1. Select Open from the File pull-down menu. The Enter name of drawing file to open
dialog box appears.
2. Select DWG or DXF from the Files of type drop-down box. Choose DWG to display all
DWG files or select DXF to display all DXF files.
 OPENING A DRAWING | 11

Figure 2.2: DWG, DXF, and other types of files can be opened

3. Select a file to import from the list or type the name of the file to import in the File name
input box. By default, DataCAD LT looks for DXF and DWG files in your DataCAD
LT\Transfer folder. If your DXF or DWG files are in a different folder, change to that
folder and then click on the file you want to import.
You can open multiple files at the same time. Just highlight the first file, then press (Ctrl),
and continue highlighting other files you want to open. DataCAD LT adds all the files you
selected to the Filename field and will open all of them when you click on Open or press
(Enter).

4. Click Open. The DWG Import Entity Assignments dialog box appears if the Import
section of the DXF/DWG tab of the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog shows that
“Interactively assign . . .” is toggled on. The options in the DWG Import Entity
Assignments dialog box allow you to choose how DataCAD LT will translate line types
and fonts.
5. Look at the options in the Line Type Assignments box; this lists each AutoCAD line type
used in the file and suggests a DataCAD LT equivalent. To change any of these
assignments, click on the line type to change. The line type you selected appears
immediately below the Assignment list box with the translation line type in a drop-down
box. Choose a new line type from the drop-down box; your selection appears in the
preview window. When you click on the line type in the list box again, the name of the
line type changes to reflect your choice.
12 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
6. Repeat step 5 for the Font Assignments. You can specify DataCAD LT-supplied or
TrueType fonts.
7. Click on OK to close the dialog box and begin importing the file. Progress is noted in the
Message toolbar. Or click on Cancel to stop the import process and close the dialog box.

Figure 2.3: The DWG Import Entity Assignments dialog box

More About Importing Files Into DataCAD LT

The settings and assignments that are displayed in the DWG Import Entity Assignments dialog
box are contained in a file called TRANSFER.INI in your DataCAD LT\Support Files folder. If
you change any of the settings in the DWG Import Entity Assignments dialog box, you have the
option to save those settings in a new .INI file to use when translating other files. This new .INI
file is saved in the \Support Files folder. You can affect how importing files and the DWG Import
Entity Assignments dialog box work through settings on the DXF/DWG tab in the Tools/Program
Preferences Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box.
This could be useful if you normally exchange files with several different offices. If you change
the settings and save a separate .INI file for each office, then you can easily switch between .INI
files without having to go through entity assignments over and over again.

To save entity assignments:

1. Change settings and assignments in the DWG Import Entity Assignments dialog box as
described in the step-by-step instructions on importing DWG files.
 A BRIEF TOUR | 13
2. Click on Save As. The Save Settings As dialog box appears.
3. Type a filename for the new .INI file and click on Save. Or click on Cancel to stop the
save. When you save the .INI file, the setting for the Translator Settings File on the
DXF/DWG tab of the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box is changed to that file.
4. Continue with step 7 in the instructions for importing a DWG or DXF file and opening it
in DataCAD LT.

Using Windows Explorer to Open Files

When DataCAD LT is running (turned on), you can launch drawings from the Windows Explorer
file browser. Just double-click on the drawing file you want to use and DataCAD LT will open it.

A Brief Tour

Title bar
Icon toolbar
Menu bar
Viewer toolbar

Status Symbol Browser

toolbar

Menu
window
Drawing window

Multi-view
Navigation windows
toolbar
Projection Icon I toolbar
toolbar
Context toolbar

Message
toolbar Coordinates/hint
s toolbar
SWOTHLUDFB
toolbar
Attention toolbar

Figure 2.4: The DataCAD LT screen

The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar is located along the top of the DataCAD LT screen and contains the File, Edit,
View, Insert, Create, Tools, Toolbox, Window, and Help pull-down menus. These menus give you
quick access to standard Windows functions as well as many of DataCAD LT’s most used
features.
14 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Notice that some menu options have keyboard shortcuts associated with them. For instance, the
Open option in the File menu has (Ctrl) + (O). Instead of using the mouse to choose a menu
option, you can simply press the keyboard shortcut to quickly do the same thing.

To choose an option from the Menu Bar:

1. Click on the menu name in the Menu Bar. The menu will drop down, displaying all the
options in it.
2. Move your mouse down the menu to the option you want. Notice that each option
highlights as your mouse passes over it.
3. Click on the option you want to select.
We've added hints for pull-down menu options in the MNU file. Hints appear on the
Coordinates/Hints Toolbar when you highlight a pull-down menu item.
You can create keyboard shortcuts for any of the 250+ pull-down menu selections by editing the
DCADWIN.MNU file. Refer to the Appendix for further information on creating keyboard
shortcuts for the DataCAD LT menu items.

Toolbars
Toolbars surround the DataCAD LT Drawing Window. They give you quick access to a variety of
DataCAD LT functions, no matter where you are in the program. In addition to the standard
DataCAD LT toolbars, you can also use context-sensitive toolbars that appear when you perform
various functions.
Icons, representing various DataCAD LT options, make up the toolbars. If you move your cursor
over an icon, a description or ToolTip pops up nearby. The description is also displayed in the
Coordinates/Hints toolbar.
DataCAD LT’s toolbars can be moved to a different screen position; you can even put them on
your desktop to give you a larger Drawing Window. You can also reposition the DataCAD LT
Menu Window.
Using Toolbar Icons to Access Menu Functions
You can click on an icon in any of the toolbars to quickly perform many drawing and editing tasks.

For example, the icon opens the Architect menu and displays the context-sensitive toolbar

that contains popular tools to help you draw

walls, doors, and windows. Clicking on the door icon opens a further context-sensitive toolbar

that offers door swing alternatives.

Notice that as you click on different icons, the menu for that function appears in the Menu
Window. Accessing menus using the toolbars instead of the Menu Window reduces the number of
steps to get to a menu and, thus, saves you time.
 A BRIEF TOUR | 15
For more information on how to turn off display of the toolbars or how to choose which toolbar
appears, see Toolbars Dialog” and “Customizing DataCAD LT” in this chapter. There are even
icons in some toolbars that let you switch to a new toolbar.

Toolbars Dialog
The Toolbars dialog box appears when you select Toolbars from the View pull-down menu. This
lets you select the toolbars you want to display. Toolbars you don’t want to display have no
checkmark in the box.

Figure 2.5: The Toolbars dialog box

Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar provides direct access to common Windows-based functions and to some
frequently used DataCAD LT ones.

Figure 2.6: The Standard Toolbar

Going from left to right, the Standard Toolbar icons give quick access to these functions: create a
new file; open an existing file; save changes to the current file; output your drawings to printer or
plotter; check file for spelling errors; select entities to cut, copy, or paste; cut selected entities;
copy selected entities to the clipboard; paste entities from the clipboard; undo utility; redo;
reference DataCAD LT files; reference bitmaps; hyperlink a web URL, file, or go-to-view; change
the order of entities; and open the reference manual.
16 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

Figure 2.7: You can change the order of entities in your drawing from the Standard Toolbar

You can add the following entry to the [KeyFile] section of the DCADLT.INI file to automatically
append the toolbar (.DTB) of your choice to the DataCAD LT Standard toolbar.
[KeyFile]
Standard=My_Toolbar.DTB
Navigation Pad Toolbar
The Navigation Pad Toolbar helps you quickly move about in your Drawing Window. It provides
an easy way to view your model and access the Identify and Zoom menus. You can display this
toolbar lengthwise or in the traditional square format. Traditionally, the second configuration is
used so that the arrows are more ergonomically correct.
The icons in this toobar (from left to right on the lengthwise version) do the following: zoom view
in; pan view up; identify (accesses the Identify menu so that you can display the properties of an
entity); pan view to left; zoom view to drawing extents; pan view to right; zoom view out; pan
view down; and zoom to area (accesses the Zoom menu).

or
Figure 2.8: The Navigation Pad Toolbar

You can also use the keyboard arrow keys in the same way you use the Navigation Pad Toolbar
arrows. The pan distance, or how much the display shifts each time you use one of the arrow keys,
can be set to any value by selecting Scroll Dist. in the Settings menu. See “Setting the Panning
Distance” in the “Settings” section of the “Before You Draw” chapter.

Projection (view) Toolbar

The nine icons in the Projection Pad Toolbar control the type of view that appears in your Drawing
Window. The functions these icons initiate are also available from the View pull-down menu. You
can display this toolbar lengthwise or in the traditional square format. The icons in this toolbar
(from left to right on the lengthwise version) display the following types of views: parallel; front
elevation; perspective; left elevation; plan; right elevation; isometric; back elevation; and oblique
(axonometric).
 A BRIEF TOUR | 17

or
Figure 2.9: Two versions of the Projection Pad Toolbar

View-sensitive Viewer Toolbar

The Viewer Toolbar changes based on the type of view you select in the Projection Pad.
If you are displaying the plan or oblique (axonometric) view of your drawing, the Viewer Toolbar
contains the following icons (from left to right): refresh display; display model in object viewer;
display shaded view of model; remove hidden lines from 3D view; save current view; update
selected view based on current view; set a new clip cube; and enable (on) or disable (off) clip
cube.

Figure 2.10: Viewer Toolbar for plan or oblique (axonometric) view

If you display the parallel, elevation (front, back, right, left), or isometric view of the model, the
Viewer Toolbar adds several rotation icons to the basic eight: rotate +X; rotate –X; rotate +Y;
rotate –Y; rotate +Z; and rotate –Z.

Figure 2.11: Viewer Toolbar for parallel, elevation, or isometric view

If you display the perspective view of the model, the basic options remain, but the clip cube and
rotational options are replaced by others with different functions (from left to right following the
basic options): walk forward; walk backward; step left; step right; step up; step down; look up;
look down; turn left; and turn right.

Figure 2.12: Viewer Toolbar for perspective views of your model

Context-sensitive Toolbar
Context-sensitive Toolbars appear when you perform various functions. To determine what
function each icon performs, place your cursor on it for a few seconds to display a tool tip.
18 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

Cleanup options:

Architect options:

Door swing options:

Window options:

Polygon options:

Polyline options:
Modeling options:

Figure 2.13: Options shown as icons in context-sensitive toolbars perform the same functions as those in
the traditional left-hand menu

Status Panel Toolbar

The Status Panel Toolbar provides quick access to color, layer, line type, scale, go-to-views, and
input mode. An icon located to the left of each drop-down list accesses the related menu (i.e., the
Layer Manager icon appears next to the layer list). If you click on the icon, the appropriate dialog
box or left menu appears so that you can make your selection. Pull-down arrows on the right offer
other options for each icon (e.g., the input modes are displayed on the pull-down menu in the
example).
When you are working on a drawing, this toolbar provides information on the current settings. See
Customizing Display” in the “Before You Draw” chapter for more information on Display menu
options.
You can set the number of pixels to add (positive value) to or subtract (negative value) from the
status toolbar. In the DCADLT.INI, you can adjust the drop-down width:
[StatusArea]
DropDownWidth=
 A BRIEF TOUR | 19
Open Layer Manager Current Layer

Open Color Palette

Current color

Open Line Type menu Current line type

Layer search toggle Current display scale

Open Go To View
Last Go To View selected
Input mode

Figure 2.14: The Status Panel Toolbar

Hotspots
The Status Panel Toolbar gives you one-click access to the Layer Manager, Color Palette, Line
Type, and Go To View menus. In the Status Panel Toolbar, just left-click on the item (text, color
swatch, or square) you want to change. DataCAD LT instantly takes you to the appropriate menu
or dialog box so you can make your new selection. For example, if you click on the active layer’s
name, the Layer Manager dialog box appears. Clicking on a hotspot in the Status Panel Toolbar
has the following results:
• Active layer’s color swatch – the Color Palette appears
• Active layer’s icon – the Layer Manager appears
• Current line type – the Line Type menu appears
Changing the Active Layer
In a drawing with multiple layers, pressing (Tab) changes the active layer by scrolling through all
the layers that are on. You’ll see the active layer name in the Status Panel Toolbar change each
time you press (Tab). Press (Shift) + (Tab) to scroll backward through your drawing’s layers.

Toggling Layer Search On or Off

You can click on the layer search toggle in the Status Panel Toolbar to quickly toggle layer search
on or off. If the toggle is depressed, layer search is on; if the toggle button is raised, layer search is
off. The Attention Toolbar lets you know if layer search is on or off. We’ll discuss DataCAD LT’s
layer search option in Selection Menus” later in this chapter.

Shortcut: Press the apostrophe key (‘) to toggle the layer search option on or off.

SWOTHLUDFB Toolbar
SWOTHLUDFB settings affect how a drawing is plotted as well as how it appears on the screen.
The [S]nap, [W]alls, [O]rtho, [T]ext, [H]atch, [L]ine weight, [U]ser-line, [D]imension, [F]ills, and
[B]itmap toggles are located on their own toolbar.

Figure 2.15: Toggles that are off appear as lower-case letters

20 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Coordinates/Hints, Attention, and Message Toolbars
The Attention, Message, and Coordinates/Hints Toolbars supply you with helpful warnings, input
requirements and fields, and coordinate information. The information that appears in each toolbar
depends on the function you are currently performing and the location of your cursor. If your
cursor is on a symbol in the Symbol Browser, the Coordinates/Hints Toolbar displays information
about the location of the symbol file. The Coordinates/Hints Toolbar can be resized when you
dock it.

Figure 2.16: Helpful information and hints appear in these toolbars

The Pause Hint Toolbar appears to remind you of information you need to supply or displays the
appropriate left menu.

Figure 2.17: DataCAD LT reminds you to supply information when you use a macro

MultiView Windows (a.k.a. MVTOTB™ MultiView Tear-Off Toolbars) in toolbar

The visual Go To View Windows can be displayed in a toolbar that is turned on or off from the
View/MultiView pull-down menu.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (W) to turn the MultiView Windows toolbar on and off.

To use MultiView Windows:

1. Create and name several Go To Views.
2. Set the number of MultiView windows you want by selecting Toolbars from the View
pull-down menu and checking the appropriate number of Window boxes.
3. Select MultiView from the View pull-down menu.
4. Right-click within a window, select Go To View, and choose a view that you created in
step 1. The view appears in the window.
 A BRIEF TOUR | 21

Figure 2.18: Docked MultiView Windows Toolbars

5. Close the windows that do not display Go To Views.

You can display up to 10 Go To View windows plus undock and resize them to meet your needs.
Once displayed, right click on the Go To View window for options. These windows may be torn
off, re-sized, and repositioned. When docked, they return to their original size.

Figure 2.19: Undocked MultiView Windows

 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
22 Classic Desktop
If you prefer the way your screen looked in DataCAD LT versions 10 and prior, you can use the
Classic Desktop portion of the Toolbars dialog box in conjunction with a few other changes to
recreate that traditional combined menu window, navigation pad, projection pad, and status area.
For detailed information, see “Going Back to the Traditional Menu Window Setup” later in this
chapter.

Dialog Boxes
Many times when you select a menu option or click on a toolbar icon, an associated dialog box
will appear on your screen. Some dialog boxes are informational and just require you to click OK
to verify that you saw the message. Other dialog boxes ask for more input (such as color selection,
layer names, or file names) before DataCAD LT performs a specific function.
If you want all dialog boxes to be centered, you can add an entry (CenterDialogBoxes=TRUE) to
the DCADLT.INI file. By default, dialog boxes are not centered.

To center dialog boxes within an application:

1. Open the DCADLT.INI file. This document contains instructions for various aspects of
the DataCAD LT software.
2. Scroll to the end of the [General] section.
3. Add the following line at the end of the [General] section:
CenterDialogBoxes=TRUE
4. Select Save from the File pull-down menu or press (Ctrl) + (S).
5. Close DCADLT.INI by selecting Exit from the File pull-down menu. The dialog boxes
will be centered within the DataCAD LT applications.
If you later decide that you do not want dialog boxes to be centered, just change that line in the
DCADLT.INI file to read:
CenterDialogBoxes=FALSE
The Menu Window
While DataCAD LT’s pull-down Menu Bar has menus that contain shortcuts to many of DataCAD
LT’s most used functions as well as basic Window options, the majority of DataCAD LT’s menus
are displayed in the Menu Window.
There are two main menus in the Menu Window: the Edit menu and the Utility menu. To switch
between these two menus, click on the menu option in the Menu Window or simply right-click
anywhere in the DataCAD LT window. Open a drawing in DataCAD LT and try right-clicking a
few times; notice the menu selection changes between the Edit and Utility menus.
Both 2D and 3D menus are displayed in the Menu Window, but these menus are not
interchangeable. For example, the Move command in the Edit menu should not be confused with
the Move option in the 3D Menus.
Menus in the Menu Window are nested; there are many submenus available from the Edit and
Utility menus. Each of these submenus may, in turn, contain additional submenus and menu
options. When a submenu is being displayed, right-clicking exits the submenu and displays the
previous menu in the Menu Window.
 A BRIEF TOUR | 23
Shortcut: Press (PgUp) and (PgDn) to scroll forward and backward through menu lists. This only
works when you’re in a menu with Scroll Fwrd and Scroll Back options. At all other times, these
shortcuts are used to change your drawing display scale.

The Menu Window lists the options in the currently selected menu. If a menu contains more items
than can be shown in a single list, a scroll forward option (Scroll Fwrd) appears at the bottom of
the menu and will be available until you reach the end of the list. Once you scroll forward in a list,
a scroll back option (Scroll Back) will also be available. As you move through DataCAD LT’s
menu structure, the selections in the Menu Window change to reflect the different commands
associated with each option.
Some DataCAD LT menu options are toggles, switches that can be turned on or off. When a toggle
is on, the button appears depressed. When a toggle is off, the button appears raised. To make it
more obvious that a toggle is on or off, you can select Program Preferences from the Tools pull
down menu, click on the Interface Settings tab in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box,
and change the colors in the Toggle On Button and Toggle Off Button areas.

Used to edit or
change your
drawing Used to organize
your drawing

Used to change
system settings

Used to draw
objects and text

Go to 3D menus

Use a DataCAD LT
macro

Figure 2.20: The Edit (left) and Utility menus

24 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
12-Character Menu Option Labels and Tool Tips
The menu option labels use up to 12 characters. DataCAD LT versions prior to 11 had an 8-
character limit. Menus such as Architct and Dmension now read Architect and Dimension,
respectively. The logic used to calculate the default width and height of menu buttons has been
adjusted to make them more compact. A “Classic” option has been provided so you can restore the
8-character labels if you wish. For information on restoring the 8-character labels, go to the
“Customizing DataCAD LT” section in this chapter.
Tool tips for each menu item have been added to help you use each option. Just resting your cursor
briefly on a menu item displays the tool tip. The same tip also appears in the Coordinates/Hints
toolbar. Menu items in macros do not have tool tips.
Choosing Menu Options
There are four ways to choose a menu option:
• click on it using your mouse
• press the corresponding function key
• use a keyboard shortcut or command line alias
• click on an icon in one of the toolbars (described earlier in the “Toolbars” section of this
chapter)
Many of the most productive DataCAD LT users employ keyboard shortcuts to enter values and
choose menu options while using the mouse to draw and enter other drawing information. With
one hand on the keyboard and the other on the mouse, you can draw in DataCAD LT very
efficiently and quickly.

To choose a menu option using the mouse:

1. Move the cursor over the option in the Menu Window that you’d like to use. The menu
option highlights as the mouse cursor passes over it.
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Right-click (click the right mouse button) when you are finished using the function; this
lets you exit the menu.
Notice that immediately to the left of each menu option in the Menu Window is a label
corresponding to the function keys on your keyboard. Function keys are usually located across the
top or on the left side of your keyboard and are labeled as “F1,” “F2,” “F3,” etc. To choose a menu
option, simply press the corresponding function key. If a menu option’s function key label is S1
through S0, press (Shift) + (F1) through (Shift) + (F10).
Using Keyboard Shortcuts to Access Menu Options
Keyboard shortcuts let you access a variety of functions quickly just by pressing one or two keys.
For example, you can press (A) on the keyboard to open the Architect menu from anywhere in
DataCAD LT instead of using the mouse to choose the option from the Draw Toolbar or Menu
Window.
 A BRIEF TOUR | 25
In this manual, all keyboard shortcuts are described exactly how they should be executed. If a
shortcut requires a lowercase letter, you will be instructed to press only that letter. If a shortcut
requires an uppercase letter, you will be instructed to press (Shift) and that letter simultaneously.
For instance, the snap grid can be toggled on and off by pressing (X) (a lowercase “x”); however,
to open the Object Snap menu via the keyboard, you must use an uppercase “X,” so you must
press (Shift) + (X).
There are several shortcuts that will be particularly useful to you as you draw:
SHORTCUT FUNCTION
(Home) Centers a drawing or view on the screen at the cursor’s current position. To reposition a
drawing, move the cursor to the new center and press (Home).
(,) Deletes only the last entity you drew.
(<) Deletes the last group you drew; you can also use Undo in the Edit pull-down menu.
(.) Restores only the last entity you deleted. This shortcut does not undo your previous
actions; it just restores the deleted entity.
(>) Restores the last group you deleted; you can also use Redo in the Edit pull-down menu.
This shortcut does not redo your previous actions; it just restores the deleted group.
(Esc) Refreshes the screen using the information in Display List.
(End) Terminates the screen refresh on the active layer only. To terminate the screen refresh on
additional layers, press (End) once for each additional layer. (End) does not affect the
drawing file, only that portion of it which appears. Save time on large drawings. Once the
part of the drawing you want to edit is redrawn, press (End) to cancel the rest of the
refresh.
(Delete) Terminates the screen refresh on all layers simultaneously.
(PgUp), (PgDn) Changes the display scale in increments specified in the To Scale menu. To zoom out,
press (PgUp); to zoom in, press (PgDn).
(P) Restores the previous view and returns to the previous scale in one keystroke. DataCAD
LT remembers up to 25 previous views.
(U\u) Redraws the screen using the most recent information in the drawing file database.

Some keyboard shortcuts can yield unexpected results if you don’t clearly understand what the
command does. For example, there’s a difference between Undo/Redo and Restore commands.
The results you get with the keyboard shortcuts (,), (<), (.), and (>) are not the same as what
happens when you use Undo or Redo. The keyboard shortcut for Undo (which negates the last
command you used) is (Ctrl) + (Z); this produces the same results as selecting Undo from the Edit
pull-down menu or clicking the Back button on the Undo/Redo Toolbar. The keyboard shortcut for
Redo (which reinstates the last command undone by using Undo) is (Ctrl) + (Y); this produces the
same results as selecting Redo from the Edit pull-down menu or clicking the Redo button on the
StandardToolbar.
The Appendix has a complete list of all keyboard shortcuts in DataCAD LT plus instructions on
how to program your own shortcuts.

The Drawing Area

The Drawing Area, the largest in the DataCAD LT window, displays drawing contents. Lines, arcs,
walls, fixtures, and anything else you design are displayed. Although drawings in DataCAD LT are
drawn at full scale in an infinite field, you can display any portion of a drawing at any scale. In
other words, you can zoom in and out on your drawing, as needed. To do this, you can use the
Disp. Scale and Zoom options in the Utility menu. See “Viewing Drawings” later in this chapter
for more information on zooming in and out on your drawing.
26 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

Figure 2.21: The Drawing Area is the largest part of the DataCAD LT window

Customizing DataCAD LT
The Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box (available from the Tools/Program Preferences
pull-down menu) lets you customize folders for each DataCAD LT file type, how the DataCAD
LT screen looks, how the DWG/DXF translator works, and the macros available in the Toolbox
pull-down menu, as well as several miscellaneous settings.

Customizing Pathnames
The Pathnames tab in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box lists the default folders that
files are stored in.
To reset all folder names to their defaults, click Defaults in the bottom right corner of the
Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box.
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 27

Figure 2.22: The Pathnames tab on the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box

To change a path:
1. Choose Program Preferences from the Tools pull-down menu.
2. Click in the input box of the folder path you’d like to change and type a new path; or
click on the folder icon at the right of the path to be changed and browse for a new path.
2. Click on OK to save your changes and close the dialog box; click on Defaults to reset all
paths to their DataCAD LT defaults.
If you enter a folder name that doesn’t exist, clicking on OK will simply highlight the incorrect
folder.
DataCAD LT tries to resolve invalid reference file paths. It does this by checking the current
drawing file folder for valid references. If a valid reference file is found in the current drawing file
folder, it will be used instead of the file designated in the original path; however, the original path
will be retained.
28 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Customizing DataCAD LT’s Interface

Figure 2.23: The Interface Settings tab of the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box

DataCAD LT 11 features a program interface that provides Windows 2000-style properties and
support for Windows XP Themes. You can position toolbars and menus where you want by tearing
them off and docking them to the top, bottom, left, or right side of the application window. You
can also place toolbars and menus outside of DataCAD LT to "float" on your desktop, allowing
you to resize the drawing area without adversely affecting the user interface. In addition, all of the
interface elements in DataCAD LT 11 will inherit the visual style of your current desktop theme.
For more information about Windows XP Themes, go to http://www.themexp.org.

Setting the Screen Calibration

You can access the Screen Calibration dialog box by clicking on the Screen Calibration button on
the Interface Settings tab. You can measure the test pattern in either decimal inches or millimeters
to adjust both the screen scaling and aspect ratio.

To calibrate your screen:

1. Select Program Preferences form the Tools pull-down menu. The Configure DataCAD LT
Settings dialog box appears.
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 29
2. Click on the Interface tab.
3. Click on the Screen Calibration button. The Screen Calibration dialog appears.

Figure 2.24: The Screen Calibration dialog box

4. Indicate which unit of measurement you are using by selecting either Inches or mm in the
Units section.
5. Measure the horizontal and vertical lines inside the elipse and enter their lengths in the
boxes provided at the bottom of the Screen Calibration dialog. Click on Ok or press
(Enter) when you are finished.

Customizing Menu Labels

You can easily change menu and toolbar options to customize your DataCAD LT desktop.
Have you been a long-time DataCAD LT user? If so, you may prefer the old-fashioned set-up that
was in effect from version 10 and prior. In DataCAD LT version 10 and prior, the menu options,
navigation pad, projection pad, and status area was “glued” together (instead of the newer Toolbar
elements that you can position anywhere). You can get this classic appearance by making a few
changes in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box and the Toolbars dialog box.
30 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

.
Figure 2.25: Comparison of 12-character (left) and Classic 8-character (right) menu labels

To change the menu labels and/or buttons:

1. Select Program Preferences from the Tools pull-down menu. The Configure DataCAD LT
Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Interface Settings tab and go to the Menus area.
3. Change the appearance of Menu Window labels and buttons:
• To use the traditional 8-character labels that were standard with DataCAD LT
versions prior to 11, click in the Classic Labels box to insert a checkmark.
• To use the newer, 12-character labels, make sure there is no checkmark in the Classic
Labels box.
• To use the traditional button shape for menu options that was a standard feature of
DataCAD LT versions prior to 11, click in the Classic Buttons box to insert a
checkmark.
• To use the newer, button-free menu, make sure there is no checkmark in the Classic
Buttons box.
4. Click on OK to close the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box.

To change the colors of the Drawing Area, menu buttons, function key labels, and tool tips:
1. Click on Program Preferences in the Tools pull-down menu. The Configure DataCAD LT
Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Interface Settings tab, if it’s not already showing.
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 31
3. Position your cursor on the color swatch that you want to change.
4. Click to open a Color dialog box.

Figure 2.26: The Color dialog box lets you select new colors for the function key labels, buttons, drawing
area background, and tool tips

5. Choose a new color from the basic or custom colors available or mix your own on the
right side of the Color dialog box. Click on OK to close the Color dialog box.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to change the colors shown on any of the other swatches on the
Interface Settings tab.
7. Click on OK to close the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box. The colors you
selected are in effect.

To change the font used on the menu buttons in the Menu Window or the font used in the
toolbars:
1. Click on Program Preferences in the Tools pull-down menu. The Configure DataCAD LT
Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Interface Settings tab, if it’s not already showing.
3. Click on the Font button in the top left corner of the Interface Settings tab to change the
type on the menu and toolbars. Click on the Font button in the Drawing Area section of
the Interface Settings tab to change the type in that portion. The Font dialog box appears.
32 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

Figure 2.27: The Font dialog box

4. Choose a new font, font style, and size; then click on OK. The Fonts dialog box closes.
5. Click on OK to close the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box. The fonts you
selected are in effect.

Going Back to the Traditional Menu Window Setup

You can get the “classic” look that was standard prior to DataCAD LT version 11 by making a few
simple changes.

To glue the Menu Window, Navigation Pad, Projection Pad, and Status Area together to
produce the traditional (DataCAD LT version 10 and prior) appearance:
1. Select Toolbars from the View pull-down menu. The Toolbars dialog box appears.
2. Eliminate the checkmarks in the Projection Pad, Navigation Pad, and Status Panel boxes
in the upper portion of the Toolbars dialog box.
3. Click in the three boxes in the Classic Desktop portion of the Toolbars dialog box. When
these three boxes in the Classic Desktop portion are checked, these elements will be
“glued” together with the Menu Window to produce the traditional (DataCAD LT version
10 and prior) appearance.
You could have duplicate toolbar elements if checkmarks still appear in the Projection
Pad, Navigation Pad, and Status Panel boxes in the upper portion of the Toolbars dialog
box and you added checkmarks to the three options in the Classic Desktop portion. This
will not affect DataCAD LT’s performance, but it will add unnecessary clutter on your
computer desktop.
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 33

Figure 2.28: The Classic Desktop elements are activated

4. Click OK to close the Toolbars dialog box. The menu, navigation, projection, and status
elements are “glued” together.
34 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

Figure 2.29: The traditional “glued” together menu, complete with buttons, 8-character menu labels,
navigation pad, projection pad, and status panel

Selecting Default Icon Toolbars

There are two default user-defined toolbars that can be active simultaneously. You can configure
these toolbars by selecting the Interface Settings tab in Program Preferences from the Tools pull
down menu.
You can select any of the available toolbars from the pull-down menu for the two default toolbars.
Your options are: Architect, Cleanup, Doorswing, Draw, Edit, Model, Polygon, Polyline, and
Windows.
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 35
In this example, the default toolbars are Edit and Draw.

Figure 2.30: The default Draw Toolbar with pull-down menu for one icon

In the Draw Toolbar, the icons (from left to right) are: Architect menu – draw walls, doors, and
windows; draw lines; draw walls; cleanup intersections of lines and walls; place doors in walls;
place windows in walls; draw 2D polygon shapes; draw rectangular shapes; draw arcs, circles, and
polylines (with additional options available from a pull-down menu); add text to the drawing;
draw arrow or select arrow settings; dimension entities in the drawing; hatch entities in the
drawing; and browse symbol directories.

Figure 2.31: Default Edit Toolbar showing one of three pull-down menus

In the Edit Toolbar, the icons (from left to right) are: move drawing entities (with additional
options available from a pull-down menu); make copies of drawing entities (with additional pull
down menu options); rotate drawing entities around a point; rotate and keep the original entities;
mirror drawing entities about a line; mirror drawing entities about a line and keep the original
entities; scale the size of the entities (with additional pull-down menu options); offset (copy
entities parallel to existing entities); delete entities from the drawing; identify (display the
properties of an entity); identify/set all (change current settings to match those of an existing
entity); change the properties of existing entities; change the properties of existing entities to
match those of another entity; and measure drawing entities and perform takeoffs.

Changing Other Interface Settings

You can personalize other aspects of the DataCAD LT graphical interface to suit your needs
(especially helpful if you are colorblind) or your tastes (eclectic versus conservative).
36 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
To change other interface settings:
1. Select Program Preferences from the Tools pull-down menu. The Configure DataCAD LT
Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Interface Settings tab. The settings affect the left menu and message lines;
pull-down menus cannot be changed.
3. Decide what colors you want to change, click on the appropriate sample swatch, and
select the color you want from the Color Palette dialog box.
Function key label Located at the left edge in the left-hand menu.
Buttons Each menu button has a highlight, text, and text highlight color that you can
change. Highlight Color appears when you run your cursor over a regular
(not a toggle) menu button; Text Color affects the text on the nonhighlighted
menu button (the TestBtn shows a sample); Text Highlight Color appears on
a highlighted button as your cursor passes over it.
Normal Clicking on a normal button calls up a submenu or requests input.
Active Layer Affects only the active layer, not the inactive ones.
Toggle ON Affects just the active menu functions (the button is depressed).
Toggle OFF Affects just the inactive menu functions (the button is raised).
Background Drawing window color.
Tooltips Background color of tooltip.
4. Decide what fonts you want to change, click on the appropriate Font button, and select
font, style, and size from the Font dialog box:
Display Affects text that appears in the left-hand menu and in the message, error, and
coordinate toolbars.
Drawing Window Affects text you add to the file displayed in your Drawing Window.
5. Use the slider bars to set how long tooltips should appear.
Display Delay Affects how fast a tooltip appears from the moment your cursor hovers on a
function.
Hide Delay Affects how quickly the tooltip disappears.
6. Click on OK to make your changes take effect. If you click on Defaults, DataCAD LT
ignores your changes and asks you to confirm your decision before it restores the original
interface settings.

Figure 2.32: This warning appears if you click on Defaults to restore DataCAD LT’s original interface
settings

Customizing File Translation

The DXF/DWG tab on the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box (via Program Preferences
from the Tools pull-down menu) lets you choose an import method, translator default settings, and
3D entity export method. DXF/DWG supports solid fills, TrueType fonts, polylines with voids,
and complex hatch patterns (such as StoneCAD).
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 37

Figure 2.33: The DXF/DWG tab on the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box

You can choose between two import methods: the first method allows you to interactively
(manually) assign line types and fonts, while the second makes these assignments automatically,
according to the Default Import Settings in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box. The
interactive option is the default method and uses the DWG Import Entity Assignments dialog box.
The DWG Import Entity Assignments dialog box appears during the import process only if the
interactive option is checked.
There are several Default Import Settings you can change as well. Set the default font, line type,
base unit, enlargement factor, and translator settings file to use during import. These defaults will
be used as assignment suggestions if you opted for the interactive import method; however, with
automatic translation, they will be used when DataCAD LT has no equivalent for an existing entity
in the DWG or DXF file. To change any of these settings, click on the arrow to the right of the
drop-down box and select another setting. You can also check the “Move drawing to origin”
option to move drawing geometry to absolute 0 during import. This option is unchecked (off) by
default.
38 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
During export, the line definitions and shape codes for DataCAD LT line types are stored in a
.SHX file. If you export a DataCAD LT drawing named MYDRAWING.AEC, the translator will
create two files: MYDRAWING.DWG and MYDRAWING.SHX. In order for the line types in the
DWG file to display properly, the .SHX file must be placed in the \SUPPORT folder in the
AutoCAD folder. The AutoCAD user may also place the .SHX file in the same folder as the .DWG
file. A .SHX file is only created if line types other than Solid, Dashed, Dotted, or Dot-Dash are
used.
If you’re not concerned with line types displaying exactly as you drew them, check the User-
defined Line Type Export box in the Tools/Program Preferences Configure DataCAD LT Settings
dialog box. This will convert all user-defined line types (any line type except Solid, Dotted,
Dashed, and Dot-Dash) to Continuous when exporting a DataCAD LT drawing to a DWG or DXF
file. In this case, a shape file will not be created because none is needed; instead, all user-defined
line types in MYDRAWING.AEC will be permanently translated to the Continuous line type. The
User-defined Line Type Export toggle in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box is off by
default.
Both DataCAD LT and AutoCAD define colors in terms of their place in each program’s internal
color list. For instance, in DataCAD LT's code, Color 1 = White, Color 2 = Red, Color 3 = Green,
etc. While we see white, red, and green colors on screen, DataCAD LT recognizes these only as
Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3, respectively. AutoCAD works similarly, except AutoCAD displays
Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3 as red, yellow, and green, respectively.
So if you don’t have the Import/Export Color Translation toggle checked when you export a
DataCAD LT file, the resulting DWG/DXF file will only associate “Color 1,” “Color 2.” etc., with
each entity. When the file appears in AutoCAD, the program recognizes “Color 1” and displays the
entity as red, instead of white as it was drawn in DataCAD LT. With the Import/Export Color
Translation toggle on, the table file corrects for this, so that white entities in DataCAD LT are
displayed as white when exported to a DWG/DXF file and vice versa.
The Import/Export Color Translation toggle (which is on by default) tells DataCAD LT to use a
table (.TBL) file so that colors translate properly when exported to or imported from a DWG/DXF
file. An easy way to create a table file is to simply save DEFAULT.TBL under a new name that
matches the custom RGB file. You can select DXF/DWG Color Map from the Tools pull-down
menu to create a TBL file to match the currently selected RGB file. You must create this file for
each custom RGB file. It should be given the same filename as the currently selected RGB file and
saved in the DataCAD LT\Support Files folder.
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 39

Figure 2.34: The DXF/DWG Color Map File

The 3D Entity Export option, located near the bottom of the DXF/DWG tab, is unchecked (off) by
default. Any 3D entities in a DataCAD LT (.AEC) file will be translated as a polyface mesh when
exported to a DXF or DWG file; this polyface mesh is a single entity. However, by checking the
“Decompose 3D entities as 3D faces” option, each facet of a 3D entity will be turned into an
individual polyface; thus, a single sphere in DataCAD LT can be translated into many separate
entities arranged in a sphere shape in a DWG or DXF file.
Checking the Decompose option can make translation faster and the translated entities will look
the same after a shade or hidden line removal. However, editing may be more difficult since these
translated 3D entities are made up of many smaller and separate entities.
Check the “Automatically export reference files” option in the Reference Files section of the
DXF/DWG tab to export any XREFs you’ve used in your drawing at the same time you export the
drawing itself. Each reference file is exported as a separate .DWG file. This option is checked by
default; if you uncheck it, XREFs will not be exported along with your drawing. If you send your
drawing to a co-worker or client, be sure to send all of the exported reference files as well so your
drawing will be viewed as you intended.
You can toggle on “Expand exported stamps to values” in the final section of the DXF/DWG tab.
When this box is unchecked, the stamp will export in its raw token format (i.e., @PLTTIME).
When this box is checked, the stamp will export as it appears in DataCAD LT (i.e., 12:00 P.M.).
40 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Customizing the Macros Menu
The Macros tab in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box (Tools pull-down menu) lets
you choose which macros you want to be displayed in the Toolbox pull-down menu. To add
macros to the menu, click on the macros in the Available Macros list box, then click on the Add
button. To delete macros from the menu, click on the macros in the Macros in Menu list box and
then click on the Remove button.
The Available Macros list box contains all macros that you have installed (normally found in the
DataCAD LT\Macros folder). It is possible to add macros that are located in other folders: click on
the file folder button above the Available Macros list box to browse different folders and select
macros to add to the list.
You aren’t uninstalling macros when you remove them from the Toolbox pull-down menu. Macros
removed from the Macros in Menu list simply won’t be displayed as options in the pull-down
menu.

Figure 2.35: The Macros tab in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box
 CUSTOMIZING DATACAD LT | 41
Customizing Miscellaneous Settings
The Misc tab on the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box (select Program Preferences from
the Tools pull-down menu) lets you customize DataCAD LT’s functionality.

Figure 2.36: The Misc tab in the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box

Default Character Set

You can select a default font for text that you enter into your drawing. Simply click in the CHR
drop-down box to choose a default DataCAD LT font. Also use the TrueType drop-down box to
select the default Windows font.
Copy to Clipboard
The Copy to Clipboard section has three options, “Copy entity color,” “Copy entity line weight,”
and “Expand exported stamps to values.” The first two options are both checked (on) by default.
When you select a DataCAD LT entity to copy, these options cause the entity’s color and line
weight to be copied as well. Then when the entity is pasted into another document, the entity
displays as it did in the original drawing.
42 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
The “Expand exported stamps to values” option lets you determine the format of stamps when
they are either copied to the clipboard or exported via DXF/DWG. When this box is unchecked,
the stamp will export in its raw token format (i.e., @PLTTIME). When this box is checked, the
stamp will export as it appears in DataCAD LT (i.e., 12:00 P.M.).

Previous View
DataCAD LT can remember up to 25 previous views (at set scales) of your drawing. If you’d like
Free Zooms and pans and scrolls to be included in these previous views, check Remembers
FreeZooms and Remembers Pans/Scrolls in the Previous View section of the Misc tab.
Shortcut: Press (P) to return to the previous view.

Auto-recover Save Iinterval

You can press the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the minutes between auto-recovery of your
drawing file.

Display List
You can activate the Display List to increase display speeds in DataCAD LT. The display list is a
sort of internal list that DataCAD LT keeps of all entities in your drawing. The speed of redrawing
the geometry in the Drawing Area when you pan, change views, or press (Esc) to update the
drawing is increased when this option is checked. Display List is toggled on by default.
Shortcut: Press (U) at any time to update the Display List. Note that this is different than pressing
(Esc) in that (Esc) simply redraws the geometry in the current display list while (U) updates the
display list itself and then redraws all entities.

To find out how many entities and line segments are in the Display List, as well as how much
memory is being used to maintain the Display List, choose Status in the Utility/Display/Display
List menu.
Although the Max Acceleration toggle next to Display List is unchecked (off) by default, you can
check this to increase display speeds even more. To accomplish this, DataCAD LT takes a few
minor shortcuts when redrawing your geometry. For instance, arcs may appear segmented and
object snap points may appear enlarged when you zoom in on them. Please note that your
geometry has not actually been changed in any way; it is merely a display shortcut. To avoid any
display shortcuts, keep Max Acceleration toggled off.

And Copy Toggles

The And Copy Toggles option determines whether the status of the And Copy toggles in such
menus as Move, Rotate, Enlarge, and Mirror is remembered by DataCAD LT. By unchecking
Remember On/Off Status, the And Copy option in the menus will always be toggled off when the
menu is opened.

Clip Cube
There is also an option to display the boundary of a clip cube. Check Display On in the Clip Cube
section of the Misc tab. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter for more information on using clip
cubes.
 COMMON MENUS IN DATACAD LT | 43
Scroll Wheel Zoom
The Scroll Wheel Zoom section of the Misc tab controls how you zoom in and out using your
mouse wheel. As a default, “Requires Ctrl key” is checked. This means that you must press (Ctrl)
while you move the mouse wheel to zoom in and out on your drawing. The zoom factor is +/-
25%.

Symbol Preview
DataCAD LT displays a preview of selected symbols when you insert symbols using the Insert
pull-down menu. Using the Symbol Preview setting on the Misc tab, you can choose to display
this preview in orthographic or isometric view. You can also change this setting on the Insert
Symbol dialog box; check the Isometric View option below the preview window to display
symbols in isometric view or uncheck it to display them in plan view. Symbol previews appear in
orthographic view by default.

Drawing Iindicators
There are three options you can activate in this section of the Misc tab. Click in the appropriate
box to Show current reference point and to Show Object Snap point. You can also set the drawing
origin indicator by checking Absolute Zero.

Nested XREFs
You can disable XREF nesting on a global basis. To do this, make sure there is no checkmark in
the Allow Nesting box.
When “Inherit current highlight setting” is unchecked in the Nested XREF section, the nested
XREFs will retain their highlight settings if you insert them in another drawing file. If the box is
checked, the drawing file’s current settings will be used for XREF highlighting.

Common Menus in DataCAD LT

There are several types of menus that appear frequently as submenus throughout DataCAD LT,
including selection, value, and color menus.

Selection Menus
Selection menus appear frequently in submenus throughout DataCAD LT. Selection refers to the
way you mark drawing entities for editing purposes. There are three primary ways to select
drawing entities: by Entity (one at a time), by Group (when multiple entities have been associated
with one another), or by Area (an editing box stretched around entities).

Figure 2.37: From left to right, examples of Entity, Group, and Area selection

Along with Entity, Group, and Area, selection menus include several other methods for selecting
parts of the drawing to edit. All of the options are not available in every selection menu; selection
menus are tailored for each editing option. Selection menu options can include:
44 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Entity Select drawing entities one at a time; this is the default selection method.
Group Select entities that are associated as a group.
Point Select entities by a single point; available only when using Stretch.
Area Select geometry wholly contained within an area that you define with a rubber band box.
Fence Select geometry wholly contained within a fence that you define with a temporary polygon
boundary.
Crossing Select any entity that crosses an area or fence boundary.
Layer Search Editing operations search all layers that are toggled on.
More About Selection Menus
An entity is a straight or curved geometric element defined by two end points. A line, a circle, an
ellipse, and an arc are all entities. A B-spline or Bezier curve or a line of text is also an entity, as is
a symbol, associative dimensions, and associative hatching. There are also 3D entities, such as
slabs, spheres, and cylinders. Entities can be edited alone or as a group.
A group is a set of any number of entities, linked together logically but not necessarily graphically.
Entities that do not touch may be part of the same group, and entities that are contiguous may be
part of different groups.
Entities are linked as a group in a number of ways. A group of entities drawn in succession without
disconnecting the cursor are linked as one group. Similarly a series of lines of text entered at the
same time are linked as one group. You can link entities or groups of entities using the Group
option in the Edit menu. Entities are also grouped when they are created at the same time with the
Copy option. If the And Copy option is toggled on when you use Move, then the copies will be a
single group. When an existing entity is edited, with the Change or Move options for example, it
retains the same group associations.
The grouping together of entities in DataCAD LT allows you to edit many related items without
affecting other entities in the same portion of a drawing. Because groups are also easily redefined,
the designer can organize a drawing as a series of elements composed of logically related pieces or
entities.
You can also select entities by area or fence. Area selection uses a box, which is temporarily drawn
around the entities you want to select. All entities and groups enclosed completely within this area
box are included in the area selection. Any entities and groups partially enclosed or not enclosed
within the area box are not included in the area.
Similar to an area but allowing more flexibility, fence selection uses a polygon with up to 36 sides,
which is temporarily drawn around the entities you want to select. The fence polygon can be
concave or convex and must be closed to complete the selection process.
Crossing is a toggle available during area and fence selection that you can enable after selecting
the first point of the rubber band box. Using Crossing, you can select any entity that crosses the
rubber band box, along with any entities fully within the box. Crossing works with all editing
commands except Stretch.
Layer Search controls whether or not DataCAD LT scans all layers during selection operations. If
you toggle Layer Search on, you can select entities on all layers that are on (being displayed).
When the Layer Search toggle is off, you can select entities only on the active layer (the layer
you’re currently working on). We’ll cover layers in more depth later in this chapter.
Shortcut: Press the apostrophe (‘) - single quotation mark - to toggle layer search on or off.
 COMMON MENUS IN DATACAD LT | 45
In addition to the button in the Menu Window, a Layer Search Status Toggle is located in the
Status Panel of the DataCAD LT window. If the Layer Search icon is depressed, layer search is on;
if it’s raised, layer search is off. Click on the toggle button to turn Layer Search on or off with a
single mouse click.

More About 3D Selection Menus

The 3D selection menu options are identical, with a few exceptions for Area and Fence. When
using Area and Fence for 3D entities, most entities are selected when all the end points of each
displayed line segment and all displayed markers (such as center points for cylinders) lie within
area or fence boundaries.
When using 3D Fence selection, however, it’s possible to select some 3D entities by enclosing
their end points but not enclosing other parts of these entities. If your fence polygon is concave,
for instance, you could enclose the end points of a slab and still have the middle part of the slab lie
outside the polygon. The entity is still considered in the fence if the end points lie within the fence.
But if any end point of an entity lies outside the fence, the entity is considered outside the fence
and is then not selected.
Selection by Area and Fence is independent of the current Z-base and Z-height settings. You can
think of the region enclosed by the area or fence as going back into the screen infinitely. If you can
see the region and it falls inside the boundary, the region is selected when you enclose it with an
area or fence.
The following list includes the portions of an entity that must lie within the boundaries of the area
or fence to be selected:
3D Lines Entire line.
Polygons End points of all displayed edges, including end points of void edges.
Blocks End points of all edges which directly determine the shape of the block.
Slabs End points of all displayed edges, including end points of void edges.
3D Arc Entire arc.
Cylinder Entire cylinder
Symbol The symbol reference point.
Cone Entire cone.
Truncated Cone Entire truncated cone.
Sphere Entire sphere.
Torus Entire torus.
Mesh Surface Any control points; the surface and the control grid are ignored.
Surface of Rev. Entire surface of revolution.
Value Menus
Some DataCAD LT functions require you to enter a numerical value. When you choose one of
these functions from a menu, a list of values appears in the Menu Window, followed by these
options:
Match Matches an existing value, entity, or angle; click on Match, then click on the entity to
match.
Add/Subtract Adds or subtracts one or more values from a given value; click on the option and then the
number to add or subtract
Clear Returns the given value to zero and starts again (Clear does not function like Undo);
choosing Clear and then pressing (Enter) will accept a value of 0.
To Layer Puts an entity on more than one layer or on a different layer than you are currently working
on; available when you have more than one layer in the drawing.
46 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

You can select a value from the list, use the options on the previous page, or type any value and
press (Enter). The total appears in the prompt line in the Message Area but is not entered until you
press (Enter).
The decimal separator for all displayed dimensions and numbers is determined by the value of the
Windows Decimal Separator. To set this value, click on Control Panel in the Start/Settings menu
on your Windows desktop. Double-click on Regional Settings. On the Number tab, set the
Decimal symbol value.

DataCAD LT’s Online Calculator

DataCAD LT’s online calculator is available anytime you need to enter a value, such as a distance
or angle. Any time DataCAD LT prompts you to enter a value, you can simply type = and your
equation; DataCAD LT will automatically calculate the value. The online calculator supports pi;
you can type pi in any equation.
Distances must be entered in decimal units; however, the results will be displayed according to the
Scale Type setting. For instance, the default setting, Architectural (Imperial) units, will display in
feet/inches/fractions of inches. See “Setting Scale and Angle Types” in the “Before You Draw”
chapter for more information on the Scale Type and Angle Type options.
The online calculator assumes angles are entered in radians, but you can enter an angle in degrees
simply by typing d immediately after the value. Results for angle calculations will be displayed
according to the Angle Type setting, with the default being Normal (in degrees/minutes/seconds).
The calculator can do the following kinds of operations:
OPERATION EXAMPLE CALCULATED VALUE
Addition =4.5+5 9.6 (9’-6”)
Subtraction =7-2.5 4.6 (4’-6”)
Multiplication =6*4.5 27.0 (27’)
Division =45/3 15.0(15’)
Parenthetical =(4+3.5)*(8/2) 30.0 (30’)
Square =SQR(3) 9.0(9’)
Square Root =SQRT(16) 4.0 (4’)
Cosine =COS(35d) 0.9.27/32 (9 27/32”)
Sine =SIN(35d) 0.6.7/8 (6 7/8”)
Tangent =TAN(35d) 0.8.13/32(8 13/32”)
Arc Tangent =ATAN(12,16) 0.6435 radians (36.87°)
Natural Logarithm =LN(9.3) 2.23 (Base 2.71828)

Following are two examples to illustrate how to use the online calculator to quickly figure scales
and angles.

To define a new plotting scale:

1. Click on Edit Defs. in the Settings menu.
2. Click on Scales in the Edit Defs. menu.
3. Click on Change to modify an existing scale.
4. Select the scale to change from the menu.
 COMMON MENUS IN DATACAD LT | 47
5. Look at the prompt to Enter new string for this scale. Enter 1/32 for the menu button
name.
6. Respond to the prompt to Enter new scaling value for this scale by typing =(1/32)/12 and
pressing (Enter) to get the result 0.002604167.
7. Press (Enter) to accept this value as a new scale factor.

To calculate an angle:
1. Respond to the prompt to enter an angle by typing =ATAN(6,12), where 6 is the rise and
12 is the run.
2. Press (Enter) to calculate an angle of 26.33.54, or 26° 33’ 54”.

Color Menus
When an option requires you to assign a color, a list of colors appears in the Menu Window along
with the options Custom, Match, and No Change.

Figure 2.38: A sample color menu

Custom opens the Color Palette dialog box so you can select a color from those swatches shown.
Notice that the Edit and Save As buttons as well as the color name field are greyed out. In
addition, you cannot change the RGB values because access to that field is available only to users
of the full version of the DataCAD software.
48 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
To change the color of one or more entities in your drawing:
1. Click on Custom in any color menu. The Color Palette dialog box appears.

Figure 2.39: The Color Palette dialog box

2. Choose a color swatch, excluding the ones in the top row. (The top row contains the 15
standard colors DataCAD LT uses.) If you are satisfied with one of the colors in the
dialog box, double-click on the swatch to activate that color and dismiss the Color
Palette. You return to the drawing where you are prompted to Select entity to
<CHANGE>.
3. Click on the entity whose color you want to change. DataCAD LT substitutes the new
color for the old one.

To change the color of one entity to match that of another entity:

1. Click on Match in the color menu.
2. Select the entity whose color you would like to match.
3. Select the entity whose color you would like to change. You can select multiple entities or
groups without repeating steps 1 and 2. Click on No Change to exit the color menu
without making a change.

Working with Dual Monitors

Many people find it easier to work with two monitors. In effect, this just expands your desktop. To
increase the size of your DataCAD LT drawing area, you could move many of your toolbars (such
as the menu, navigation pad, projection pad, symbol browser, etc.) to the second monitor. You can
even expand your DataCAD LT drawing area across the two monitors. DataCAD LT will
remember your last setup on this expanded desktop (across the two monitors) so that you won’t
have to make a lot of changes the next time you open the program.
 PLANNING YOUR PROJECT | 49
Working with dual monitors is easy once you have your hardware (the two monitors) and software
(usually accessed through the Windows Control Panel, Display Properties, Settings tab) set up
properly. This may require you to upgrade your hardware and/or software.
For expert advice on setting up dual monitors, consult your system administrator or a local
computer guru. Once the dual monitors are set up and working properly, you’ll discover all sorts
of ways to change how DataCAD LT appears on your equipment and to increase your productivity.

Planning Your Project

Much of your work will be editing drawings under design development. DataCAD LT is a flexible
program in terms of allowing you to change what you have drawn. Nevertheless, the more
information you have when you first draw something, the less time you’ll spend making revisions.
With traditional manual design development, you first do a rough sketch of the project and then
gradually refine this idea into a drawing that is dimensionally and materially specific. Computer-
aided design (CAD), however, produces a drawing with precise dimensions the first time it is
drawn.
This suggests that the ideal process of CAD development might be the opposite of manual design
development. With CAD, it’s important to know such things as the exterior wall construction
before you start to draw, so your drawing will be accurate from the beginning. If you finalize your
floor plan before you decide on exterior wall construction materials, you’ll have to go back and
change the thickness of all exterior walls to do automatic dimensioning or wall sections and
details. In turn, this wall thickness change would impact the interior dimensions of rooms and may
affect the modular grids of ceiling and floor tile, lighting, etc. Some well-thought out planning
before you start to draw can save you valuable time.

Gathering Project Information

Practically speaking, it’s impossible to predict the exact dimensions and materials of everything in
the building before you finalize the design. But a realizable goal is to gather as much information
as possible about the construction of the building before you begin the design development or
construction documents phases of the project. This keeps time-consuming changes to a minimum
and allows the building to be drawn and dimensioned accurately.
You need to have as much information as possible on the following:
Scope of Work How much do you need to draw? In what detail? What information can be reused for
several drawings?
Dimensions What are the basic dimensions of the structural grid, columns, and load-bearing
partitions? What size are the interior partitions? Doors and windows? Sill and jamb
conditions? Floor and ceiling heights? Joist sizes?
Materials What are the walls and foundation made of? What floor and roof systems are you
using?
Existing Elements Which parts of the drawing can be used to create other drawings for this project?
Which typical details can be used for this project? Which drawings from the schematic
design phase can be reused?
Planning Layers
The concept of layering drawings has been used in designing, drawing, and drafting long before
computers. In the past, it was referred to as overlay (or pin register) drafting.
50 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
With overlay drafting, drawings were developed in layers on trace paper, each aligned with the
others. Each sheet contained related information that you could separate and reproduce
individually or in any combination. You could also use this layering of drawings during the design
process to overlay and quickly trace, change, and rework drawings. This same procedure is easily
accomplished using DataCAD LT to form a highly productive drawing process.
The key to efficient CAD is the well-planned use of the almost unlimited number of layers
available in each drawing file to isolate related entities, details, and text. By organizing the
information displayed on each layer according to type or content, you can perform editing
functions on one building component without affecting components on other layers.
There are many layering methods; however, it is important to devise a well thought out strategy
based on office standards for the type of work you do. A drawing file with a good layer structure
could (and probably should) contain all the drawings for a single project.
Just as your drawing can contribute to the drawings of others, what others in your office have
already drawn can help you. As you plan your drawing layers, make a note of where you can get
some of the basic information needed for your particular task. There’s no need to redraw all those
toilets for the third floor if they’ve already been drawn for the first floor or if you already have an
appropriate toilet symbol in a plumbing symbol folder.
Before you begin drawing, it is a good idea to sit down and make a list of all the layers you intend
to create, noting what you expect each layer will contain. Although creating layers is easy with
DataCAD LT, you will find it helpful to have a reference list as you draw to help you prioritize
and chart your drawing process. See “Working with Layers” in the “Before You Draw” chapter for
more information on how to set up layers in DataCAD LT.
In DataCAD LT, you can toggle each layer you create on or off at any time; only layers toggled on
will be displayed and only one of these layers is active. To continue our parallel with overlay
drafting, the active layer can be thought of as the top piece of trace paper; it is the layer you’re
currently drawing on. The remaining layers of trace paper in the overlay stack are all the layers
toggled on. Existing layers not currently in the stack are all the layers toggled off (not displayed).
The process of drawing from the most general to the most specific is opposite the process of
gathering information to prepare for drawing. You want to understand the building in the greatest
detail possible before you draw it. But once you start drawing, you want to document all that
information gradually, arriving at the most specific drawing (the detail) only after you have
graphically described all the general conditions.
 PLANNING YOUR PROJECT | 51

Figure 2.40: The image on the left is how your drawing is organized using layers. On the right is how you
see your drawing in DataCAD LT.

Prioritizing Drawing Tasks

In addition to making a list of all your layers, make a flow chart of your drawing process: what
you will draw first, second, third, etc. To keep drawing redundancy to a minimum, you will want
to draw those parts of your drawing which are the most general first, then proceed to detail your
drawing, gradually making it more specific. Along the way, make copies of those parts of your
drawing that can be used for other drawings.

Drawing Efficiently
A drawing will, of necessity, contain many entities. The idea behind CAD is to have the computer
automatically draw as many of those entities as possible. DataCAD LT incorporates several
functions that make this automation possible; entities may be copied or mirrored; symbols and line
types may be added as well.
Any entity, group, or area in your drawing can be copied one or several times automatically or
flipped and copied at once to produce a mirror image next to the original image. For example, you
only need to draw one side of a corridor of rooms if you use Mirror to create the opposite side. For
more information on using Mirror, see “Mirroring Entities” in the “Other Ways to Draw” chapter.
Any entity, group, or area in your drawing can be stored as a symbol. You can draw a tree once,
save it as a symbol, then place trees all over your site plan just by selecting with the mouse all the
places in your drawing where you want the trees to appear.
Many material symbols shown in sections and details can be drawn automatically by selecting the
proper line type or by creating one of your own. DataCAD LT has line types for materials like
insulation, brick, plywood, and roof shingles. For example, you could produce a line of insulation
running up a wall just by choosing the Insul1 line type and entering the two end points of the line.
DataCAD LT’s Edit menu provides you with many ways to modify anything you draw without
redrawing it, including moving or stretching entities or changing their attributes.
Use Stretch to select an area or point and move it to a new location, automatically stretching or
shrinking everything attached to what you are moving. For example, you can move a window to a
new place in the wall; the wall will be stretched to match the new position of the window. For
more information on using Stretch, see “Stretching Entities” in the “Editing Drawings” chapter.
52 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Move is different from Stretch since only the entity, group, selection set, or area you select is
moved to a new location in the drawing; everything connected to those items stays where it is. So
if you have two cased openings, one of which contains a door, you can move the door to the other
cased opening without moving all the wall and jamb lines attached to the door. For more
information on using Move, see “Moving Entities” in the “Editing Drawings” chapter.
Use Change to alter the characteristics or attributes of any entity, group, area, or selection set
you’ve created. For example, you can change a wall from double-weight solid lines to single-
weight dashed lines, alter its height from 8 to 10 feet, change its color from green to blue, etc. For
more information on using Change, see “Changing Entities” in the “Editing Drawings” chapter.

Sample Project
This is an example of how to use DataCAD LT by outlining a detailed strategy for completing a
project; it is not intended to be a tutorial or replace DataCAD LT training. The drawing files for
this sample project are on your DataCAD LT CD-ROM.
If you do a Typical installation, the files for this sample project will not be installed. To install
them after doing a Typical installation, insert your DataCAD LT CD in your CD-ROM drive,
select Custom installation, and then select Sample Drawings.
Scope of Work
Following is a summary of what is known about the building for which you will produce working
drawings:
Description A 12,300 s.f. YMCA facilities building, two stories, flat roof, sloping site, with parking
for 34 cars.
Materials Structure: Clear-span metal frame with steel column grid, 25’ x 20’, lightweight steel
floor and bar joists @ 2’-0” O.C.
Exterior Walls: Metal panel over metal framing with batt insulation, CMU block veneer
wall with metal framing, batt insulation and GWB interior.
Interior Walls: Metal studs with fire-rated GWB.
Dimensions Plan: 100’ x 68’-8” exterior limits of building.
Elevation Hgts Lower Level Floor @ 83.00’
Lower Level Ceiling @ 91.00’
Upper Level Floor @ 95.00’
Upper Level Ceiling @ 106.75’
Top of Roof @ 107.00’
Top of Parapet @ 108.75’
Summary of Available Personnel and Drawings Needed
PERSONNEL DRAWINGS
Job Captain Site Plan
Draftsman 1 Foundation Plan
Draftsman 2 Lower Level Plan
Upper Level Plan
Four Exterior Elevations
North/South Building Section
Lower Level Electrical Plan
Upper Level Electrical Plan
Lower Level Plumbing Plan
Upper Level Plumbing Plan
Door, Window, and Finish Schedules
Door and Window Types
 PLANNING YOUR PROJECT | 53
Planning the Drawing Time
1. Summarize drawings needed; plan final sheet layout.
2. Draftsman 1 develops base plans while Draftsman 2 begins work on typical details.
3. Draftsman 1 gives Draftsman 2 the plan information. Draftsman 2 begins developing
elevations and sections.
4. When plans, elevations, and sections have been developed, develop schedules and details on
both workstations using completed drawings as a base for detail drawings.
5. When all drawings have been completed, assemble individual drawings into “sheets” for
plotting.

How Draftsman 1 Drew the First Floor Plan

Draftsman 1 first spent some time with the Job Captain, learning what the project involved and the
assigned tasks. Then Draftsman 1 sat down and prepared two outlines:
• an outline of the layers required and their names
• a strategy of what to draw first, second, third, etc.
LAYER NAME DESCRIPTION
A2-BLK Lower Level Conc. Block
A2-COL Upper Level Columns
A2-DIM Upper Level Dimensions
A2-DRS Upper Level Doors
A2-FND Upper Level Foundation
A2-HCH Upper Level Hatch
A2-LAV Upper Level Lavatories
A2-LBL Upper Level Labels
A2-NOT Upper Level Notes
A2-ROM Upper Level Room Numbers
A2-STR Upper Level Stair
A2-TIL Upper Level Tile
A2-TXT Upper Level Text
A2-WIN Upper Level Windows
A2-WLS Upper Level Walls

Draftsman 1’s drawing process outline is as follows:

1. Create drawing file YMC-MSR1.AEC.
2. Create and name drawing layers listed above.
3. Load sheet border from symbol file.
4. Input all existing site information.
5. Draw Columns, Column Grid, Perimeter, and building elements on appropriate layers.
6. Separate drawing layers needed for first floor by saving them out to the hard disk on separate
layer files.
7. Create a detailed elevation drawing called YMC-ELV1.AEC.
8. Create and name the required drawing layers.
54 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
9. Load basic first floor plan drawing layers from layer files.
10. Draw interior partitions.
11. Place windows in perimeter wall.
12. Save modified plan layers to a layer file called YMC-PLN1.DLF. This layer will become the
exterior wall for the second and third floors, which have identical windows to the first floor.
13. Place doors and windows in perimeter wall and in interior partition walls.
14. Zoom in on lobby area and draw lobby details.
15. Zoom in on restroom area and draw fixture layout and details.
16. Draw reflected ceiling plan.
17. Add dimensions, labels, and notes to drawing.
18. Create a new detail elevation file for the Second Floor Plan called YMC-ELV2.AEC.
Notice that Draftsman 1’s outlines do not detail how to best draw each part of the drawing. This
strategy simply gives an outline of what to do next while leaving Draftsman 1 free to choose the
best drawing method for each part of the drawing. Copy, Mirror, and Stretch will be used to
produce, respectively, the column grid, two halves of a symmetrical parking layout, and two
handicapped parking spaces that are larger than the other parking spaces.

Basic Drawing and Editing

DataCAD LT is ready to draw lines immediately upon opening a drawing; notice that in the Create
pull-down menu, Line is checked by default. You can even draw with custom line types to
represent such things as insulation, telephone and electrical lines, and siding. Editing lines or
anything else you draw is easy with DataCAD LT’s many editing features.

Drawing Using the Mouse

To draw a line by selecting two points:
1. Move the cursor anywhere in the Drawing Area and click. You’ve just selected the first
end point of your first line. In addition to simply clicking to select a point and begin
drawing, you can snap to a point on another entity and begin drawing from there. See
“Object Snapping” in the “Drawing Tools” chapter for more information.
2. Move the cursor to the point where you want the line to end and click. The line is drawn.
Notice, however, that if you move your cursor, it is still connected to the end of the line.
This allows you to continue drawing lines, using the end of the previous line as the
beginning of the next one.
3. Repeat step 2 to continue drawing lines until your last end point meets the first end point
you selected in step 1.
4. Right-click to disconnect the cursor from the last line.
 BASIC DRAWING AND EDITING | 55
Drawing Using Coordinate Entry
Coordinate entry lets you draw lines more precisely by entering the exact coordinates of each end
point of a line. In DataCAD LT, you have a choice of five coordinate entry methods or input
modes:
• Relative polar requires that you enter a distance and an angle relative to the last point
entered.
• Absolute polar requires that you enter a distance and an angle from absolute 0.
• Relative Cartesian requires that you enter an X and Y distance relative to the last point
entered.
• Absolute Cartesian requires that you enter an X and Y distance from absolute 0.
• Distance-Direction requires that you indicate the direction with the mouse and then enter a
distance relative to the last point entered.

Figure 2.41: Polar and Cartesian coordinate entry methods

Once you select a coordinate entry method, it remains active until you choose a different one. The
coordinate entry method you’re using is always checked in the Tools pull-down menu’s Input
Mode. (Coordinates are only displayed when your cursor is in the Drawing Area.)
Four additional coordinate entry methods are available only while in the 3D Views/Controls menu:
relative and absolute cylindrical (enter distance, angle, and Z coordinate) and relative and absolute
spherical (enter distance, plan angle, and rise angle). These methods provide additional variables
to the Z component of coordinate entry, which may be helpful in specialized modeling
applications like entering a 3D line that represents a solar angle.

To choose a coordinate entry method, either:

• press (Insert) until the name of the method you want appears in the Attention toolbar or
• click on Input Mode in the Tools pull-down menu and select a coordinate entry method
from the list.

To draw a line using relative or absolute polar coordinate entry:

1. Click in the Drawing Area to select the line’s first end point.
2. Press (Spacebar).
3. Type the length of the line (the distance from the end point you entered in step 1 to the
next end point) and press (Enter).
56 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
4. Type the angle of the line from the X axis and press (Enter). The line is drawn, with your
cursor still attached to the end point of the line.
5. Continue drawing lines by repeating steps 2-4. Right-click to disconnect the cursor from
the line.

To draw a line using relative or absolute Cartesian coordinate entry:

1. Click in the Drawing Area to select the line’s first end point.
2. Press (Spacebar).
3. Type the relative or absolute X distance from the first end point and press (Enter).
4. Type the relative or absolute Y distance from the first end point and press (Enter). The
line is drawn, with your cursor still attached to the end point of the line.
5. Continue drawing lines by repeating steps 2-4. Right-click to disconnect the cursor from
the line.

To draw a line using direction-distance coordinate entry:

1. Click in the Drawing Area to select the line’s first end point.
2. Drag the cursor in the direction you want to draw the line.
3. Press (Spacebar).
4. Type the length you want the line to be, and press (Enter). The line is drawn, with your
cursor still attached to the end point of the line.
5. Continue drawing lines by repeating steps 2-4. Right-click to disconnect the cursor from
the line

More About Coordinate Entry

You can enter distances and angles either by typing a value or by using a value menu. See “Value
Menus” earlier in this chapter for more information on how to use them. Depending on the scale
type you are using, there may be several different methods you can use to enter coordinates. See
“Setting Scale and Angle Types” in the “Before You Draw” chapter for more information. For
instance, in the architectural scale type, which is DataCAD LT’s default, you must enter distances
as feet.inches.fractions of inches.
TO ENTER: TYPE:
4’ 4
6” 0.6 or .6 or (Spacebar)6
3/16” 0.0.3/16 or ..3/16 or ..3.16 or (Spacebar)(Spacebar)3(Spacebar)16
4’-6” 4.6 or 4(Spacebar)6
4’-6 3/16” 4.6.3/16 or 4.6.3.16 or 4(Spacebar)6(Spacebar)3(Spacebar)16

Notice in this example that 3/16” is entered as 0.0.3/16, indicating 0 feet, 0 inches, and 3/16 of an
inch. Notice also that you can leave out the zeros when you enter distances, as long as the decimal
points remain as placeholders; so you could type ..3/16. Further, slashes, decimal points, and
spaces are interchangeable, so you could replace the slash with another decimal point and type
..3.16.
 BASIC DRAWING AND EDITING | 57
Angles are entered in a similar fashion, except the (Spacebar) method can’t be used. For instance,
using relative polar coordinate entry, angles are entered as: degrees.minutes.seconds
TO ENTER: TYPE:
38° 38
12’ 0.12 or .12
30” 0.0.30 or ..30
38°-12’-30” 38.12.30
Drawing with Line Types
DataCAD LT has four standard line types (solid, dotted, dashed, and dot-dash) along with many
more custom line types that you can use in your current drawing file.

To draw a line using a line type:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window; click on Line Type. A list of the four most
common line types (solid, dotted, dashed, and dot-dash) plus other optional lines appears
in the Menu Window, along with options to modify a chosen line type’s weight, color,
spacing, or overshoot.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (L) to access the Line Type menu.

2. Look at a preview of a line type before you use it by moving the mouse cursor over the
line type option in the Menu Window. If the line type you need is not included in the list,
you can click on Scroll Fwrd or Scroll Back to see more options.
3. Click on a line type in the Menu Window to use that line type.
4. Click on the Spacing, Line Weight, Color, or Overshoots options to change the settings
for the line type you chose. See “Line Type Settings” in this chapter for details on
changing line type settings.
5. Begin drawing lines as described in “Drawing Using the Mouse” or “Drawing Using
Coordinate Entry” earlier in this section.

Line Type Settings

You can use the following options to customize a line type:
Line Weight Sets the thickness of a line type. The most common line thickness is 1. To set the line weight,
click on a line weight in the value menu or type a line weight value, and press (Enter). For
line weights to display, Show Weight must be toggled on in the Display menu.
Color Changes the color of a line type. Any new lines that you enter into the drawing appear in the
new color.
Spacing Changes the size of the line type pattern. Keep in mind that DataCAD LT defines units in
absolute world coordinates. For example, to set dashed lines to repeat every 1” on a 1/4”=1’-
0” scale drawing, set the spacing to 4’-0”. To set line spacing, click on a value in the value
menu or type a spacing value, and press (Enter).
Overshoots Displays extensions (or punch) at line intersections, giving drawings an architectural look.
DataCAD LT always dimensions to the actual length of a line, ignoring any displayed
overshoot.

You must set the overshoot before you draw a line; previously drawn lines are not affected.
58 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
By default, DataCAD LT lets you apply line overshoot selectively to individual entities in your
drawing. However, you can change this and globally apply line overshoot to all lines in your
drawing. Of course, you must toggle Overshoots on in the Display menu to view and/or plot the
overshoots either globally or selectively.

To set the overshoot:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Line Type. The Line Type menu
appears.
2. Click on Overshoots in the Line Type menu. The Overshoot menu appears.
3. Decide whether you want to apply line overshoot to entities selectively or to all lines
throughout your drawing. These two options are mutually exclusive:
• By Entity – by default, this is toggled on so that you apply line overshoot selectively
to particular entities in your drawing.
• Globally – by default, this is toggled off. If you want all lines throughout your
drawing to overshoot, toggle this option on. This affects all future lines you draw in
this file; it does not affect lines you drew prior to toggling this option on. The global
line overshoot is scale-independent; it is defined as a real-world, plotted distance.
4. Choose or type an overshoot length by clicking on New Distance, selecting a value, and
pressing (Enter).

To display line overshoot in your current drawing on your monitor and on your
plots:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Display. The Display menu appears.
2. Toggle Overshoot on.
You can add line overshoot to an existing line in your drawing by using the Change menu.
Depending on the option you choose in the selection portion of the menu, you can change one line
at a time (Entity) or several at once (Group, Area, or Fence).

To display overshoot for existing lines in your drawing:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Change. The Change menu
appears.
2. Toggle on Overshoot, select a value for the length of the overshoot, and press (Enter).
You are prompted to Select entity to <CHANGE>.
3. Click on the line you want to overshoot in your drawing. If you want to overshoot more
lines, simply continue clicking on them. When you are finished using the overshoot,
right-click to exit the Change menu.
 BASIC DRAWING AND EDITING | 59
Basic Editing Tools
DataCAD LT’s Edit pull-down menu provides easy access to most editing functions, including
primary editing menus such as Move, Copy, Rotate, Mirror, Stretch, Enlarge, Erase, Change,
Partial Erase, Line Cleanup, and Wall Cleanup. Choose any of these editing options to display that
menu in the Menu Window. See the “Editing Drawings” chapter for details on these options.
The Edit pull-down menu also includes unlimited, global undo/redo options and cut, copy, and
paste. The Undo option reverses the last action, including any drawing or editing, changes made
using macros, or the deletion of layers. The Redo option restores the last action. To undo an action,
click on Undo in the Edit pull-down menu or press (Ctrl) + (Z); to redo an action, click on Redo in
the Edit pull-down menu or press (Ctrl) + (Y). You can also use the Undo/Redo icons in the
Standard Toolbar.
Cut, Copy, Paste, and Paste Special are four more Edit pull-down menu options you can use to edit
drawings or share parts of drawings between documents. Cut removes entities from the drawing to
the clipboard, Copy copies entities in the drawing to the clipboard, Paste adds entities previously
cut or copied to the active drawing, and Paste Special lets you choose the format (metafile, text,
etc.) for entities previously cut or copied and then adds them to the active drawing. To cut or copy
DataCAD LT entities, you must first use the Clipboard Select option in the Edit pull-down menu
to select the entities to be cut or copied. You can choose whether to copy just the entity or the
entity with its current color and line weight. Check the Copy to Clipboard options on the Misc tab
of the Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box as appropriate.

To move or copy entities from one drawing to another:

1. Click on Clipboard Select in the Edit pull-down menu. A selection menu appears. See
“Selection Menus” in this chapter for more information.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (E) to access the Clipboard Select selection menu.

2. Toggle Ins. Point on to enter an insertion point for the entities. This point can then be
used to paste the entities into another drawing. Toggle Ins. Point off to enter entities
relative to absolute zero.
3. Choose a selection method by clicking on one of the selection menu options.
4. Select the entities to be moved or copied.
1. Click on Cut in the Edit pull-down menu to remove the entities from the drawing or click
on Copy to simply copy them. If Ins. Point was toggled on in step 2, you are prompted to
Enter the insertion point. If Ins. Point was toggled off, skip to step 7.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (X) to cut entities or press (Ctrl) + (C) to copy entities.

2. Click in the Drawing Area to select a reference point. Your cursor will be attached to this
reference point when you paste the entities into another drawing.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (V) to paste entities.

7. Paste them into another DataCAD LT drawing or into a document in another application:
60 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
• Open the drawing you’d like to add the entities to and click on Paste in the Edit pull
down menu. Toggle By Center on to paste the entities by the center of their extents;
toggle it off to paste the entities by their insertion point (if Ins. Point was toggled on)
or at absolute zero.
• Open the drawing you’d like to add the entities to, click on Paste Special in the Edit
pull-down menu, and select a format for the entities.
• Open the Windows application document that you’d like to add entities to and use
that application’s paste function.
You can preserve the exact position of an entity (as measured from absolute zero) when copying it
from one drawing to another. For example, if a marker was placed at x=16’, y=16’ (as measured
from absolute zero) in the original file, then pasting it into a new file using Abs. Zero will place
the marker at x=16’, y=16’ from absolute zero in the new file.

Referencing Drawings
You cannot reference (or link) drawings to your current drawing in DataCAD LT. However, you
may import referenced drawings (also called XREFs) into your current DataCAD LT drawing.
XREFs could be included in drawings that were originally created using the full version of
DataCAD or another CAD package.

Resolving Orphaned Reference Files

Reference files can be orphaned if you move the file to another folder on your computer or if you
delete the referenced file. You can resolve the broken link between your current drawing and the
referenced file by either deleting the link or by redefining the path to where you moved the
reference file. Clicking on the Redefine button allows you to redefine XREF files that became
orphaned when they were renamed. Redefined XREFs retain the previous XREF’s position, scale,
and rotation.
The path between the current drawing and the reference file is limited to 160 characters. This
allows you to use the full pathname that includes Drive + Path + Filename.
When you open a file that contains orphaned reference files, you will see a Warning dialog box.
Click on Ok and then deal with the orphan.

Figure 2.42: Orphaned XREFs appear in a drawing

To resolve orphaned reference files:

1. Click on the XREFs tab in the Ofphaned Reference Files dialog box to list all the
orphaned reference files in your current drawing.
2. Click on a reference file in the list to select it.
 INSERTING IMAGES DIRECTLY INTO DRAWINGS | 61

Figure 2.43: The Orphaned Reference Files and the Confirm dialog boxes

3. Resolve the orphaned file in one of these two ways:

• Click on Delete to delete the reference file from your current drawing.
• Click on Redefine or on Redefine Path to reestablish the link between your current
drawing and the reference file. A dialog box appears, allowing you to browse for the
file; find the referenced file and click on OK.
4. Click on Yes in the Confirm dialog box.
5. Click on Done to close the Orphaned Reference Files dialog box.

Inserting Images Directly into Drawings

You can insert a variety of images into your DataCAD LT drawings. The images you can insert
include .BMP, .JPG, .GIF, .TIF, .TGA, .PNG, .PCX, and .PCD files.

To insert an image directly into your drawing:

1. Click on Insert in the pull-down menu bar.

Figure 2.44: The Insert pull-down menu

62 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
2. Select the type of file you want to insert into your drawing.
Text File Opens the Enter the name of the text file to import dialog box, giving you accesss to
.TXT files.
Bitmap Opens the Select Image dialog box, giving you access to file formats that include
.BMP, .JPG, .GIF, .TIF, .TGA, .PNG, .PCX, and .PCD.

Figure 2.45: The Select Image dialog box

3. Highlight the file you want to insert into your drawing. The highlighted image appears in
the Preview Window of the dialog box and the file’s name appears in the Filename input
field.
4. Click Open or press (Enter). DataCAD LT closes the dialog box and inserts the file you
selected into your drawing.
Much like XREFs, bitmaps can become orphans. If your drawing contains one or more orphaned
bitmaps, you will see this Warning dialog box.

Figure 2.46: Files can contain orphaned bitmaps

 VIEWING DRAWINGS | 63
To resolve orphaned bitmap files:
1. Click on Ok in the Warning dialog box. The Orphaned Reference Files dialog box
appears.
2. Click on the Bitmaps tab. The orphaned bitmaps contained in that file appear.

Figure 2.47: The orphaned bitmap can be redefined

3. Highlight an orphaned bitmap file. Then redefine the path or the file or delete the orphan
entirely by clicking on the appropriate button.
Redefine Path A Browse box appears, allowing you to select a new path for the orphed bitmap
file. After selecting the path, click on OK to close the box.
Delete Select this option if you want to eliminate the bitmap entirely.
Redefine The Select Image dialog box appears, allowing you to replace the orphaned
bitmap with another file. After selecting the appropriate bitmap file, click on
Open. The file you selected appears in the Orphaned Bitmap box on your
screen.
4. Click Done to close the Orphaned Reference Files dialog box.

Viewing Drawings
Viewing is simply the way you look at your drawing when you work on it. Compare viewing a
drawing on the computer with looking at a drawing on your drafting board. As you draft on the
board, your eyes are always moving and refocusing, allowing you to concentrate on small details
or view the entire drawing sheet quickly and easily. At the computer, you need to consciously
decide what you want to focus on and to what degree. To say this in CAD terms, you will zoom in
on an area of your drawing when you have to focus on a detail; and when you want to see the
entire drawing, you will zoom out to the extents or outermost edges of the drawing.
Go-to-views, hyperview linking, and multi-view windows are three additional viewing features
that allow you to jump quickly to preset views of your drawing. See the “Viewing Your Model”
chapter for more information.
 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
64 Zooming In and Out
The Zoom menu in DataCAD LT lets you zoom in on an area by displaying the drawing in a larger
scale. When you zoom out, you are actually looking at your drawing in a smaller scale, which
allows you to see more of your drawing. The scales that the Zoom menu uses are predefined in the
Utility/ Settings/Edit Defs./Scales menu.

To zoom in on your drawing:

1. Click on Zoom in the Utility menu.
2. Click above and to the left of the area you want to scale.
3. Move the mouse downward and to the right to stretch the box around the area you want
to zoom in on.
4. Click to complete the box. The drawing rescales automatically.
Shortcuts: Press (/) to display the Zoom menu in the Menu Window.
To return to the previous view (essentially undoing the zoom), press (P). DataCAD LT
remembers up to 25 previous views.
Press (PgUp) and (PgDn) to quickly zoom in and out on your drawing. To use PgUp and
PgDn on your numeric keypad, first make sure NumLock is off.

To zoom to your drawing’s extents:

1. Click on Zoom in the Utility menu.
2. Click on Extents in the Zoom menu. Your drawing appears at the largest scale possible
while still displaying the drawing in its entirety. If you’ve made significant changes to
your drawing, click on Re-Calc. instead of Extents. DataCAD LT will review your
drawing and update the extents of the drawing accordingly.

To zoom in on your drawing and display the area to its extents:

1. Click on Zoom in the Utility menu.
2. Toggle Free Zoom on or off in the Zoom menu, depending on your preference. When it is
toggled on, DataCAD LT can show a nonstandard display scale. When it is toggled off,
DataCAD LT can only use the predefined display scales from the Utility\Disp. Scale
menu.
3. Click at one corner of the area you want to zoom in on and move the mouse diagonally to
stretch a rubber band box around this area. The area appears at its extents.
Shortcut: Press (Home) to center your drawing at the current cursor position in the
Drawing Area.
 SAVING DRAWINGS | 65

Figure 2.48: Zooming in on your drawing.

Changing Your View Using the Keyboard

You can use the arrow keys to scroll or pan in different directions around the screen. Your view of
your drawing changes each time you press an arrow key. Pressing the up arrow key lets you look
up toward the top of your drawing by moving the drawing down. The scroll distance (the distance
that the drawing moves each time you press an arrow key) is defined using the Scroll Dist. option
in the Utility/Settings menu. See “Setting the Panning Distance” in the “Before You Draw”
chapter for more information on setting the scroll distance.

Changing Your View Using the Navigation Toolbar

Several icons on the Navigation toolbar let you quickly change the way you focus on your
drawing. If the Navigation toolbar is not currently on your computer monitor, select Toolbars from
the View pull-down menu and check Navigation Pad. The following icons affect your view of the
drawing:

Zoom view in

Zoom view out

Zoom to the drawing’s extents

Zoom to an area that you define with a rubber band

Pan arrows to look up, left, right, and down

Saving Drawings
It is a good idea to save your drawing periodically, especially when you walk away from the
computer or when you’ve made several changes. There are four ways to save your drawing in
DataCAD LT.
• Press (Shift) + (F); if Caps Lock is on, just press (F). This shortcut is a great way to quickly
save your drawing with minimal interruption.
66 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
• Click on Save in the File pull-down menu.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save your drawing.

• Click on Save As in the File pull-down menu to save your changes under a different drawing
filename.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (Shift) + (S) to save your drawing with a different filename.

• Click on Save All in the File pull-down menu to save changes to all open drawings.
Warning: If you close your drawing without saving it, any changes you’ve made since you last
saved it will be lost. If it’s a new drawing that has not yet been saved, all references to the drawing
in DataCAD LT will be erased.

Save Image As...

Shaded images and the drawing window can be saved to .BMP, .JPG, .TIF, .TGA, .PNG, .PCX, or
.EPS, format.

To save a drawing or image in a different file format:

1. Select Save as Bitmap from the File pull-down menu. The Save Image As dialog box
appears.
2. Choose the file format you want for the saved image from the Files of type drop-down
box.

Figure 2.49: The Save Image As dialog box

3. Supply a name for the image in the File name field. If you want, you can keep the name
of the original file that appears in the File name field because the file extension will be
different based on the choice you made in step 2.
 SAVING DRAWINGS | 67
4. Click on Save to save the file in the format you specified. The Save Image As dialog box
closes.

More About Naming Your Files

Naming your drawings is an important step to meaningful and efficient file organization. Ideally,
the names of your drawings and the folders you store them in will reflect the contents of the file as
well as the project they pertain to.
Identifying your drawings and layers with names like “florplan” or “bricks” or “Dimensions”
becomes confusing and redundant. Which floorplan? What kind of bricks? Dimensions of what?
Despite the fact that everyone would rather read names than numbers, a naming system based on
numbers can eliminate confusion between files. How you structure this numbering system is up to
you ⎯ only you know the specific needs of your office.
In the sample project outlined earlier in this chapter, we used a different naming system. In the
filename YMC-MSR1, “YMC” is the job name abbreviation, “MSR” is the drawing type, and “1”
is the drawing version number. A similar convention is used for naming layer files in that project.
The system described below is a typical numbering system that has worked well in several
architectural offices.
• The first three characters of the filename = the last three digits of the office job number.
• The next two characters of the filename = the letter and number of the type of drawing. (See
the following drawing type list.)
• The last two characters of the filename = the chronological revision number of the drawing.
A suggested system for identifying types of architectural drawings follows:
A0 = General (index, symbols, location plan, 3D views)
A1 = Existing and temporary conditions, site work, demolition
A2 = Plans, detail plans, roof plan
A3 = Exterior elevations, detail elevations
A4 = Building sections, wall sections
A5 = Interior elevations, toilet elevations
A6 = Reflected ceiling plan, floor patterns, furnishings
A7 = Schedules, door and window types
A8 = Details
A9 = Alternates

Structural, mechanical, HVAC, and civil drawings can be identified by type in a similar fashion.
Under the above system, the drawing of the fourth elevation in job number 85236 would be named
236A304.AEC.

More About Working with Files

Although not very glamorous, directory/folder and file maintenance have a big impact on
DataCAD LT’s compatibility with other programs and on your productivity.
The program directory holds the .INI file, allowing you to run an older version (DataCAD LT 10
or earlier) on the same computer. Expanded folder/directory names help you navigate quickly to
the directory you want to use. For more information about .INI settings, refer to “INI Settings” in
the Appendix.
 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
68 Drawing Files
DataCAD LT 11 AEC drawings are nearly twice the size (due to the double-precision database), of
the DC5 files you created in previous versions.
Because of database changes, several DataCAD LT file extensions have changed. Most of
DataCAD LT’s file types are now registered with the operating system during installation.
DataCAD LT includes some unique file type icons to distinguish them from other programs’ files.
The following list describes the DataCAD LT 11 file extensions. Items marked with an asterisk
apply to DataCAD LT 11 and later versions.
AEC* DataCAD LT Drawing File
ANG DataCAD LT Angle File
ARB* DataCAD LT Auto-recover Backup File
ARF* DataCAD LT Auto-recover File
CHR DataCAD LT Font File
CST* DataCAD LT Context Toolbar Configuration File
DBK* DataCAD LT Drawing Backup File
DCA DataCAD LT Command Alias File
DCX DataCAD LT Add-On Macro File
DEC DataCAD LT Decimal File
DIMSTYLE DataCAD LT Dimension Style File
DIS DataCAD LT Distance File
DLF* DataCAD LT Layer File
DMF DataCAD LT Material File
DOR DataCAD LT Door Style File
DPF* DataCAD LT Pen Table File
DRF* DataCAD LT Drawing Recovery File
DSF* DataCAD LT Symbol File
DTB* DataCAD LT Toolbar File
EDB Estimator Link Database File
FRM DataCAD LT Symbol Report Form File
GUI* DataCAD LT Graphical User Interface File
LBL DataCAD LT Menu Label File
LIN DataCAD LT Line Type Definition File
LIT DataCAD LT Shader Light Source File
 SAVING DRAWINGS | 69
MCR DataCAD LT Keyboard Macro File
MNU DataCAD LT Pull-Down Menu File
MSG DataCAD LT Message File
O2C Object To See File
PAT DataCAD LT Hatch Pattern File
RGB DataCAD LT Color Palette File
SCH DataCAD LT Report Schedule File
SCL DataCAD LT Scale File
SHP DataCAD LT Font Definition File
STL DataCAD LT Text Style File
STR DataCAD LT Stair Style File
$WP* DataCAD LT Drawing Swap File
SYM DataCAD LT Symbol File
TAG* DataCAD LT Drawing Tag File
TBL DataCAD LT DXF/DWG Color Map File
TPL DataCAD LT Template File
U$R* DataCAD LT User File
WIN DataCAD LT Window Style File

DataCAD LT User File

\DataCAD LT\drawings\my_drawing.U$R
The user file is a temporary file that stores the last date, time, username, and workstation name of
the operator who last opened the drawing successfully. DataCAD LT uses this data to provide you
with helpful information and appropriate options when you try to open a file that is marked “in-
use.” Under normal conditions, the user file is only present when a drawing file is open. However,
if you exit a drawing abnormally (e.g., in the case of a program error), the user file remains and
DataCAD LT queries it to determine an appropriate course of action the next time you attempt to
open the file.

DataCAD LT Drawing Backup File

\DataCAD LT\drawings\my_drawing_(backup).DBK
70 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD
Backup drawings (with a DBK extension) are created each time a drawing is saved. The DBK
extension distinguishes DataCAD LT’s backup files from other programs’ generic BAK extension.

DataCAD LT Drawing Swap File

\DataCAD LT\temporary files\my_drawing.$WP
The drawing swap file is a temporary copy that is created when you open your drawing. This is the
file DataCAD LT modifies when you edit your drawing.

DataCAD LT Auto-recover File

\DataCAD LT\drawings\my_drawing.ARF
The auto-recover file is an emergency backup copy of your drawing that DataCAD LT creates at
regular time intervals that you set. Auto-recover files are also created when you execute forced file
saves.

DataCAD LT Auto-recover Backup File

\DataCAD LT\drawings\my_drawing.ARB
The auto-recover backup file is a copy of the auto-recover file. This file is automatically created
the second and subsequent times you perform an auto-recover file save.

DataCAD LT Drawing Recovery File

\DataCAD LT\recover archive\my_drawing_(recovered-01).DRF
Drawing recovery files are incrementally-named copies of the drawing file that are created
automatically when you opt to restore an auto-recover (ARF) file. This file quarantines copies of
recovered files that our technical support staff may use when all attempts to restore the original
drawing fail.

Backing Up and Recovering Files

Whenever you exit a drawing abnormally, DataCAD LT will automatically try to recover the most
recent version of your file without prompting you with unnecessary warnings and options. The
following story about Joe User summarizes the file creation, backup, and recover process.

File Open, Backup, and Recover Process

1. Joe User creates a new drawing. A corresponding swap file is created in the temporary files
folder along with a corresponding user file in the drawings folder.
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R (User File)

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP (Swap File)

 SAVING DRAWINGS | 71
2. Joe User continues to work in the new file for 15 minutes when DataCAD LT saves an auto-
recover file in the drawings folder.
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R (User File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARF (Auto-recover File)

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP (Swap File)

3. Joe User continues to work in the new file for another 15 minutes when DataCAD LT saves an
auto-recover file for the second time. The current auto-recover file is renamed to serve as a backup
and a new auto-recover file is created.
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R (User File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARF (Auto-recover File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARB (Auto-recover File Backup)

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP (Swap File)

4. A few minutes later, Joe User presses (Shift) + (F) to save his drawing for the first time. At this
point, DataCAD LT creates a drawing file, copies the ARF to an ARB, saves a new ARF, and
resets the auto-recover timer to zero.
\drawings\My_Drawing.AEC (Drawing File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R (User File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARF (Auto-recover File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARB (Auto-recover File Backup)

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP (Swap File)

5. About ten minutes later, Joe User completes an extraordinary modeling feat and decides to do a
forced file save just to be safe. DataCAD LT copies the AEC file to a backup file for the first time
and updates the auto-recover files as previously described.
\drawings\My_Drawing.AEC (Drawing File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.DBK (DataCAD LT Backup File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R (User File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARF (Auto-recover File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARB (Auto-recover File Backup)

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP (Swap File)

6. Another auto-recover save occurs and the auto-recover files are updated. However, the drawing
and its corresponding backup are not updated.
\drawings\My_Drawing.AEC (Drawing File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.DBK (DataCAD LT Backup File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R (User File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARF (Auto-recover File)
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARB (Auto-recover File Backup)

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP (Swap File)

7. Then Joe user performs a forced file save. The drawing and its corresponding backup are
updated, the auto-recover files are updated, and the auto-recover timer is reset to zero.
\drawings\My_Drawing.AEC
\drawings\My_Drawing.DBK
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R
\drwaings\My_Drawing.ARF
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARB
72 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP
Exit/Save and Crash/Recover Scenarios
Several things can happen to Joe User’s files. For example, he can successfully exit and save his
files, he can suffer a crash and recover his files by himself, or his files can crash and be recovered
by another user.
A. Exit and Save
Joe User exits and saves the changes to his drawing. DataCAD LT updates the drawing and its
corresponding backup; then, it deletes the swap and auto-recover files.
\drawings\My_Drawing.AEC
\drawings\My_Drawing.DBK

B. Crash and Recover (Same User)

The power goes out on Joe User. When his computer is back up and running, he tries to re-open
the file he was using previously. DataCAD LT checks the user file and determines Joe was the
previous user. Then DataCAD LT checks for the presence of an ARF, determines that one is
present, and notices it is newer than the AEC file.
DataCAD LT informs Joe he exited the drawing abnormally and gives him the option to proceed
and automatically recover the most recent version. Joe User accepts (his only choice) and
DataCAD LT copies the AEC file to a "Recover_Archive" folder.
The ARF file is copied to a new AEC file, the ARB file remains, the semaphore file is updated,
and the recovered drawing is opened.
\drawings\My_Drawing.AEC
\drawings\My_Drawing.DBK
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARB

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP

\Recover_Archive\My_Drawing_(Recovered-01).DRF
Note: Each time My_Drawing is recovered, a new DRF file is created sequentially (i.e.,
My_Drawing_(Recovered-01).DRF, My_Drawing_(Recovered-02).DRF, My_Drawing_(Recovered-
03).DRF).

C. Crash and Recover (Different User)

The power goes out on Joe User. He goes home for the day without trying to re-open the file. In
the meantime, Jill tries to open the file that Joe just crashed out of.
DataCAD LT checks the user file and determines Joe was the previous user. A message pops up
telling Jill that Joe was the last person to open the file and that DataCAD LT will perform a check
to see if Joe is still in the file.
Jill selects OK, then DataCAD LT tries to interrogate Joe's computer to see if he has the file open.
There is no response (Joe is not running DataCAD LT at the moment), so DataCAD LT then
checks for the presence of an ARF and determines one is present and that it is newer than the AEC
file.
 SAVING DRAWINGS | 73
DataCAD LT informs Jill that the file was exited abnormally and her only option is to proceed and
automatically recover the latest version. Jill accepts and DataCAD LT copies the AEC file to a
"Recover_Archive" folder.
The ARF file is copied to a new AEC file, the ARB file remains, the semaphore file is updated,
and the recovered drawing is opened.
\drawings\My_Drawing.AEC
\drawings\My_Drawing.DBK
\drawings\My_Drawing.U$R
\drawings\My_Drawing.ARB

\temporary files\My_Drawing.$WP

\Recover_Archive\My_Drawing_(Recovered-01).DRF
Exporting Files
You may need to export your DataCAD LT drawings to other file formats, so that you or other
offices and/or consultants you work with can use them in other applications. You can export DWG
files compatible with AutoCAD releases 12, 13, and 14 as well as AutoCAD 2000. You can also
export an o2c object. It’s generally a good idea to purge your drawing file before exporting it. For
details, see “Purging Files” in this chapter. See “Customizing File Translation” in this chapter for
more information about how entities are translated during export.
During export, line definitions and shape codes for DataCAD LT line types are stored in a .SHX
file. If you export a DWG file of the DataCAD LT drawing MYDRAWING.AEC, the translator
will create two files: MYDRAWING.DWG and MYDRAWING.SHX. For line types in the DWG
file to display correctly, the .SHX file must be placed in the \SUPPORT folder in the AutoCAD
directory.

To export your drawing to a DXF or DWG file:

1. Save your drawing before starting the export function. This is especially important if
you’ve made any changes to your drawing.
2. Click on Export in the File pull-down menu. A submenu appears.
3. Click on DWG or DXF in the submenu. Two export options appear in a submenu: All
Layers and On Layers.
74 | CHAPTER 2: THE DRAWING BOARD

Figure 2.50: File export options

4. Click on All Layers to export all the layers in your drawing. Click on On Layers to export
only those layers that are toggled on or are currently being displayed. The Export dialog
box appears.
5. Go to the File name input box and type a name for the file.
6. Choose a file type from the Save As Type drop-down box. If you chose DWG in step 3,
the default file type is R14-DWG file (*.dwg); if you chose DXF in step 3, the default file
type is R14-DXF file (*.dxf).
7. Click on Save; the export begins. The export’s progress appears in the Attention toolbar.
To cancel the translation, press (End). If the filename you entered in step 4 already exists,
a dialog box will be displayed, giving you the choice to overwrite (replace) the existing
file. Also if the DWG/DXF file you’re attempting to overwrite is open, a message
explaining that the file is currently in use will be displayed. By default, DataCAD LT
saves all exported files to the DataCAD LT\Transfer folder.

To export an o2c object:

1. Click on Export in the File pull-down menu. A submenu appears.
2. Click on o2c in the submenu. A dialog box appears.
3. Type a name for the o2c object that you’d like to export.
 LAUNCHING EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS | 75
4. Decide what folder you want to use for the o2c object. By default, o2c objects are saved
to your DATACAD LT\RAY folder. If you’d like to save your o2c objects to another
folder, use the Save In drop-down box or the Up One Level icon button to change to
another folder.
5. Click on Save to export your model as the named o2c object.

More About o2c Objects

You can export your DataCAD LT model as an o2c object. o2c, an acronym for Objects to See, is
a highly compressed 3D format that is optimized for Internet-based communication.
Simply export your DataCAD LT model as an o2c object and then either distribute it to your client
as an e-mail attachment or embed it into one of your web pages.
Using the easy-to-use o2c player, your clients can freely rotate or walk through a fully rendered
architectural model. They can view models in wire-frame, hidden-line, flat-shaded, textured, or
ray-traced modes. The o2c objects can even contain animated elements that can be played in
conjunction with the 3D viewing commands. And because you can generate a high-resolution,
photorealistic rendering of the model right in the o2c player, you don't need to transmit
excessively large images via email; your clients can simply create their own. While the o2c player
provides comprehensive and powerful viewing controls, objects can’t be modified.
For more information about o2c, see “Using the o2c-based Object Viewer” in the “Viewing Your
Model” chapter.

Launching External Applications

A toolbar code lets you launch external applications. You can use the new “P” code to launch an
external program (such as WordPad) from a DataCAD LT toolbar icon.
To launch an external program from a DataCAD LT toolbar, use the following syntax:
[Launch_WordPad]
Hint=Launch WordPad
Icon=WordPad_Icon
P=c:\program files\windows nt\accessories\wordpad.exe
If the external program supports command line parameters, you can include them as well. The
following example lauches WordPad and automatically opens my_document.txt.
[Open_My_Document]
Hint=Launch WordPad and open My_Document.txt
Icon=My_Document_Icon
P=c:\program files\windows nt\accessories\wordpad.exe
c:\my_documents\my_document.txt
 Tutorial: Drawing a
Schoolhouse In this chapter:
3
In this chapter, you’ll learn how to customize both
DataCAD LT and your drawing before you ever draw a line. Drawing walls
Then you’ll draw the exterior and interior walls of the Drawing windows
schoolhouse and add doors and windows to it.
Drawing doors
78 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

Setting Up a New Drawing

DataCAD LT contains many options for customizing the way your system operates. In this
tutorial, you will make only two modifications: adding layers to a new drawing and changing the
snap grid setting.
To begin this tutorial, start DataCAD LT and start a new drawing, as described in “The Drawing
Board” chapter.

Setting the Snap Grid for the Tutorial

First, you’ll need to change the snap grid setting.

To set the snap grid:

1. Press (S) on your keyboard. Make sure Caps Lock is off. In the Message toolbar, you are
prompted to Enter X-snap grid.
2. Type .1 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter Y-snap grid.
3. Type .1 and press (Enter).
You just set the accuracy of the cursor movement to one inch. Move your cursor around the
drawing screen and look at the X and Y snap grid values in the Coordinates/Hints toolbar.

Creating New Layers for the Tutorial

When you start a new drawing in DataCAD LT, it contains only one layer (called Layer001),
which is also the active layer. Any settings in the active layer will automatically be used in new
layers when you create them. For example, the snap grid setting you entered above will be
assigned to each layer you add to your drawing; so you won’t have to set the snap grid in every
new layer.

To add layers to this drawing:

1. Right-click to return to the Utility menu from the previous exercise.
2. Click on Layers in the Utility menu.
3. Click on New Layer in the Layers menu.
4. Type 8 and press (Enter). You’ve just added eight layers to the drawing for a total of nine
layers.

Naming Layers for the Tutorial

You’ll be given the layer names for this exercise, but you should develop your own plan for
naming layers based on the type of work you do.

To rename your layers:

1. Make sure you’re in the Layers menu. If you’re not, click on Layers in the Utility menu.
2. Click on Rename in the Layers menu. The Rename menu contains a list of all your layers.
3. Click on Layer001. You are prompted to Enter new name.
 SETTING UP A NEW DRAWING | 79
4. Type Walls and press (Enter). Look at the list of layers in the Menu Window; notice that
Layer001 has been changed to Walls.
5. Click on Layer002. You are prompted to Enter new name.
6. Type Doors and press (Enter). Notice that Layer002 is now named Doors in the layer list
in the Menu Window.
7. Rename the rest of your layers as follows: Layer003 to Windows, Layer004 to Plumb,
Layer005 to Dim, Layer006 to Hatch, Layer007 to Notes, Layer008 to Misc, and
Layer009 to Border.
8. Right-click twice to return to the Utility menu.

Moving Between Layers in the Tutorial

Now that you’ve created and named your new layers, you can move among them. To draw walls
on the Walls layer and doors on the Doors layer, you have to change to the corresponding layer
before you begin drawing. In DataCAD LT terms, before you place a wall on your drawing, you
will make the Walls layer the active layer.
The Status Panel toolbar shows the active layer or the layer that you are drawing on. As you
change active layers, the Status Panel toolbar is updated with the corresponding layer name. You
can only draw on the active layer.

Active layer name can be

Active layer color can be changed using (Tab) or the
changed using (K) or the pull-down arrow or the Layer
pull-down arrow or the color Manager icon
swatch

Figure 3.1: Check the Status Panel toolbar for active layer name and color.

To change the active layer:

1. Press (Tab) on your keyboard. Notice that the active layer name in the Status Panel
toolbar changes.
2. Keep pressing (Tab). Eventually you’ll return to the beginning of the layer list. Pressing
(Shift) + (Tab) cycles backwards through your layers.

Assigning Colors to Layers in the Tutorial

You can assign different colors to layers, so that any entities you add to a layer will be drawn in
that layer’s color. You’ll be able to tell at a glance what layer an entity is on simply by its color.
That color is the active color for that layer until you change it.
 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE
80 To assign layer colors:
1. Make sure you’re in the Layers menu. If you’re not, click on Layers in the Utility menu.
2. Press (Tab) until the Doors layer is the active layer. Check the Status Panel toolbar to see
which layer is active.
3. Click on Color in the Layers menu.
Shortcut: Press (K) to change the color of the active layer. Pressing (K) will cycle through
the colors; pressing (Shift) + (K) cycles backwards through the layers.

4. Click on Green. The color assigned to the Doors layer is now Green. The layer color
swatch in the Status Panel toolbar is also green.
5. Press (Tab), so that the Windows layer is active.
6. Click on Color in the Layers menu.
7. Click on Cyan. The color assigned to the Windows layer is now Cyan.
8. Use this same procedure to assign colors to the rest of your layers. Make the Plumb layer
Lt. Grey, the Dim layer Lt. Grey, the Hatch layer Brown, the Notes layer Lt. Red, the
Misc layer Red, and the Border layer Lt. Green.
9. Right-click to return to the Utility menu.

Drawing Walls, Windows, and Doors

This part of the tutorial introduces you to using DataCAD LT as an architectural tool. You will
learn how to use the wall menu options to begin drawing architectural plans. This tutorial uses
Arch units. See “Customizing Drawing Settings” in the “Before You Draw” chapter for more
information on how to change drawing units.

Drawing the Schoolhouse Walls

Each wall that you draw will have two or more lines, rather than just one. In the following
exercises, you will draw walls using both the mouse and the keyboard.

Figure 3.2: Examples, from left to right, of 2-line walls, 3-line walls, and 4-line walls
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 81
The Architect menu is used for drawing walls as well as doors and windows.

Menu title
Turns Walls on/off. Draws parallel lines when on, single lines when off.

Choose type of multi-line wall: 2,

3, or 4 lines

Set wall thickness (the distance between the parallel lines)

Automatically cleans T-intersections as you draw walls

Enters the Door Swing menu to insert doors in walls

Enters the Windows menu to insert windows in walls

Exits the Architect menu. You can also right-clic to exit.

Figure 3.3: The Architect menu is used for drawing walls, windows, and doors.

Drawing the Schoolhouse’s Exterior Walls

Before you draw the exterior walls of the schoolhouse, you should make sure your wall settings
are correct.

To set up for drawing exterior walls:

1. Continue with the drawing you started in the previous section of this tutorial.
2. Make sure you’re in the Edit menu in the Menu Window; click on Architect. The
Architect menu appears.
3. Click on Walls in the Architect menu to toggle it on; walls will be drawn instead of single
lines. Notice that the “w” in the SWOTHLUDFB toolbar is now uppercase. This
indicates that you will draw walls instead of single lines.
4. Click on 2 Line Walls in the Architect menu if it’s not already toggled on.
5. Click on Width in the Architect menu to set the width of the wall. A value menu appears;
you are prompted to Enter wall width. For more information on using value menus, see
“Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
6. Click 1’-0” in the value menu and then right-click or type 1; then, press (Enter).
7. Click Outside in the Architect menu; any walls you draw will be defined by the outside
line of the wall.
 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE
82 8. Right-click to return to the Edit menu.
9. Look at the Status Panel toolbar to make sure that Walls is your active layer. If it’s not,
press (Tab) until it is.
Now you are ready to draw the exterior walls.

To draw exterior walls:

1. Use the mouse to draw the first wall. Notice that the prompt in the Message toolbar reads
Select first end point of new line/wall. Move the cursor to the lower left of the Drawing
Area and click to enter the first end point of the new wall. You are prompted to Select
next end point of line/wall.
2. Move the cursor to the right until the coordinate readout shows an X measurement of 28’-
0” and a Y measurement of 0 and click. This defines the exterior line of the wall. You are
prompted to Select a point to define the inside of the wall.
3. Move the cursor to a position anywhere above the displayed line and click. The wall is
immediately drawn. You are prompted to Select next end point of line/wall.

Figure 3.4: Drawing the first wall

Leave the cursor

connected to the wall
line.

Figure 3.5: The wall is drawn.

4. Draw a second wall using coordinate entry. Press (Insert) until the Attention toolbar reads
Current input mode = Relative Polar (distance, angle). You can also use coordinate entry
to enter points. See “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter
to review coordinate entry methods.
5. Press (Spacebar) to activate coordinate entry. You are prompted to Enter relative
distance.
6. Type 40.6 and press (Enter); 40.6 means 40 feet 6 inches in architectural units. You are
prompted to Enter relative angle.
7. Type 90 and press (Enter). The wall is drawn and the corner is automatically cleaned. If
the new wall extends beyond your view of the Drawing Area, use the arrow keys to move
your drawing into view.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 83

The cursor is connected to the outside

corner.

The corners automatically clean up as

you draw.

Figure 3.6: The second wall is drawn and the corner is cleaned.

8. Click on the icon in the Navigation Pad toolbar to zoom out to the extents of the
drawing.
9. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
10. Type 28 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
11. Type 180 and press (Enter).
12. Move the cursor close to the inside line of the corner where you originally began and
click. The last corner is cleaned, leaving a clean outline of the schoolhouse exterior walls.

Bring cursor close to the inside wall line.

Figure 3.7: Ending your exterior wall

84 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

The final corner is automatically cleaned up.

Figure 3.8: The exterior walls are complete.

Drawing the Schoolhouse’s Interior Walls

Now you will draw the interior walls. You’ll change the wall thickness for the interior walls to
four inches.

To set up for drawing the interior walls:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window; click on Architect. The Architect menu
appears.
Shortcut: Press (A) to access the Architect menu at any time.

2. Click on Width in the Architect menu. You are prompted to Enter wall width.
3. Type .4 and press (Enter).
4. Click on Inside in the Architect menu to define the wall by the inside line.
5. Click on Clean to toggle on automatic T intersection cleaning. Walls and 2 Line Walls
should still be toggled on.
6. Right-click once to return to the Edit menu.

To draw interior walls:

1. Click on the Navigation Pad toolbar to open the Zoom menu. You are prompted to
Select first corner of the Zoom window.
2. Position your cursor outside the lower-left corner of the plan and click. You are prompted
to Select second corner of the Zoom window.
3. Move the mouse diagonally, stretching the rubber band box until it encloses the lower
half of the plan as in the next figure and click. Your drawing now appears larger.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 85
3
Click the left mouse button to close the
rubberband box.

2
Click the left mouse button to start the
rubberband box.

Figure 3.9: Zooming in on the lower half of the plan.

4. Right-click to return to the Edit menu.

5. Press (`) on the keyboard to set X and Y to 0. You are prompted to Select reference point.
The accent key (`) is located in the upper-left corner of your keyboard, just below (Esc)
and to the left of (1) on most keyboards.
6. Move the cursor close to the inside left corner of the bottom wall and either click the
middle mouse button or press (N) on the keyboard. This sets this corner as the new
reference point to work from. Steps 6-9 are the equivalent of placing one end of an
architect’s scale at a corner and marking a point at 10’-2”.

6
New reference point

Figure 3.10: Setting a reference point

7. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

8. Type 10.2 (the inside dimension of the office) and press (Enter). You are prompted to
Enter relative angle.
9. Type 0 for the relative angle and press (Enter). Notice that your cursor is now attached to
the wall exactly 10’-2” to the right of the corner you used as your reference point. This
will be the first point of the interior wall.
86 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE
Cursor still attached to a point.

Referenced corner

Figure 3.11: Starting your interior wall

10. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

11. Type 10.8 (the inside dimension of the office) and press (Enter). You are prompted to
Enter relative angle.
12. Type 90 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select a point to define the Outside of the
wall.
13. Move the cursor to the right of the displayed line and click to indicate the outside of the
wall.
You remain connected to the wall.

13
Click the left mouse button.

Figure 3.12: Defining the outside of the wall

14. Move the cursor close to the inside line of the left exterior wall and click.

14
Click the left mouse button close to the inside line
of the exterior wall.

Figure 3.13: Drawing the last office wall

15. Right-click to disconnect from the line. The office area is complete and all intersections
are automatically cleaned.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 87
To draw the remaining interior walls:
1. Press (`) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Select reference point.
2. Move the cursor close to the inside right corner of the bottom wall and click the middle
mouse button. Remember, if you don’t have a three-button mouse you can also press (N)
on the keyboard.

2
New reference point

Figure 3.14: Selecting a new reference point

3. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

4. Type 10.2 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
5. Type 180 and press (Enter). The cursor connects to a point on the inside line of the
exterior wall.
6. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
7. Type 10.8 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
8. Type 90 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select a point to define the Outside of the
wall.
9. Move the cursor to the left of the new wall and click to define the outside of the wall.
10. Move the cursor to the right just before the inside line of the exterior wall and click.
11. Right-click to disconnect from the wall line. The wall is drawn and your intersections are
cleaned.

T intersection cleaned up automatically

Figure 3.15: The wall is drawn and the intersections are cleaned.

12. Press (`). You are prompted to Select reference point.

13. Move the cursor near the inside corner of the wall you just drew and click the middle
mouse button.
88 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

13
New reference point

Figure 3.16: Selecting a new reference point

14. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

15. Type 5.2 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
16. Type 270 and press (Enter). The cursor connects to a point on the inside line of the
exterior wall.
17. Move the cursor to the left, close to the inside line of the wall, and click. You are
prompted to Select a point to define the Outside of the wall. It is important in step 17 to
select a point closer to the inside, not the outside, line of the room you just drew so that
the correct wall line will be cleaned.
18. Move the cursor below the displayed line and click to define the outside of the wall.

17
Click mouse closer to the
inside line of the room just
drawn.

18
Click mouse here to define outside
of wall.

Figure 3.17: Drawing the dividing wall between the bathrooms

19. Right-click to disconnect from the wall.

20. Click on in the Navigation Pad toolbar to view the drawing extents.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 89

Figure 3.18: The walls of the schoolhouse floor plan

21. Press (Ctrl) + (S) on the keyboard to save the drawing. This is a good habit to get into.
You should do it after you enter several items or make a lot of changes to your drawing.
You have now completed all the walls of the schoolhouse plan and saved your drawing. If any of
the walls did not clean and your drawing doesn’t look like the figure above, the next section will
help you straighten up your plan.

Cleaning the Schoolhouse’s Wall Intersections

As you insert walls, DataCAD LT automatically cleans intersections. If you right-click by accident
and disconnect from a wall prematurely or your intersections clean at the wrong wall line, you will
need to clean them.
90 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

1
If you disconnected from a wall and
reattached to continue the remaining
walls, the corner you reattach to will not
clean.

2
If you become disconnected from a wall,
when you attempt to complete the last
intersection, the “L” intersection will not
clean up properly.

3
If you were too close to the outside line of
this wall when drawing the dividing wall,
the wrong line will clean.

Figure 3.19: Examples of wall intersections that were improperly drawn

If an L intersection doesn’t clean properly, despite Clean being toggled on when you drew the
walls, it may be because you disconnected your cursor from the end of one wall and then started
drawing the next wall. In such a case, you may have to use 2 Line Trim in the Cleanup menu so
the wall lines intersect properly; then use Erase to remove any unwanted lines within the
intersection.

To fix the error shown in example 1:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window; click on Cleanup.
2. Click on L Intersect in the Cleanup menu. You are prompted to Select 1st corner around L
intersection (wall lines only).
3. Click above and to the right of the intersection.
4. Diagonally drag the cursor to the lower left of the intersection, stretching the rubber band
box, and click.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 91

The corner is
Place a rubberband box
automatically
around the corner to
cleaned.
clean.

Figure 3.20: Cleaning an L intersection

To fix the error shown in example 2 on the previous page:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window; click on Cleanup.
2. Click on L Intersect in the Cleanup menu. You are prompted to Select 1st corner around L
intersection (wall lines only).
3. Click above and to the right of the intersection.
4. Drag the cursor diagonally to the lower left of the intersection, stretching the rubber band
box around the intersection, and click.

Place a rubberband box

The corner is
around the corner to
automatically
clean.
cleaned.

Figure 3.21: Cleaning an L intersection

To fix the error shown in example 3 on the previous page:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window; click on Cleanup.
2. Click on 1 Line Trim in the Cleanup menu. You are prompted to Select first point of line
to clip to.
3. Click on Entity in the 1 Line Trim menu. You are prompted to Point to line to trim to.
4. Click on the inside wall line, shown in Figure 3.22. The line you select becomes dashed.
You are prompted to Point to outside.
5. Click to the left of the dashed line. You are prompted to Select entity to trim.
6. Click on the two wall lines to select them as the lines to trim. The lines are trimmed.
92 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

4
Click the left mouse button
5 to define this line as the line
Click the left to clip to; the line becomes
mouse button to dashed.
define the outside.

6
Click the left mouse button to select
these two lines as the lines to trim.
Figure 3.22: Completing a 1-line trim

7. Right-click once to return to the Cleanup menu.

The lines are trimmed to the

correct wall, but there is still a
break in the wall.

Figure 3.23: Trimming wall lines to the correct wall

8. Fix the break in the outside wall by clicking on Weld Line in the Cleanup menu. You are
prompted to Select first line to weld.
9. Click on one of the lines of the broken wall to select it; it becomes dashed. You are
prompted to Select second line to weld.
10. Click on the other line of the broken wall to select it. The line mends and becomes a
single entity.
9
Click the left mouse button to
define the first line to weld. It
becomes dashed.

10
Click the left mouse button to
define the second line to weld.
The line is mended.

Figure 3.24: Selecting lines to be welded

11. Right-click once to return to the Cleanup menu.

 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 93

The lines are

trimmed to the
inside wall.

Figure 3.25: The wall line is welded.

12. To clean up the T intersection in the wall, click on T Intersect in the Cleanup menu. You
are prompted to Select 1st corner around “T” intersect (wall line ends only).

13. Click at the lower left of the intersection you want to clean. You are prompted to Select
2nd corner around “T” intersect (Wall line ends only).

14. Move the cursor above and to the right of the intersection to enclose the corner to clean
and click. You are prompted to Point to a wall line to trim to.
15. Click on the inside line to select it as the line to trim to.
16. Right-click twice to return to the Edit menu.

13-14
Place a rubberband box
around the corner to clean.

15
Click the left mouse button to
define this line as the line to
trim to.

Figure 3.26: Completing a T intersection

94 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

The wall is cleaned and

the T intersection is
complete.

Figure 3.27: The wall intersection is cleaned.

Drawing Countertops in the Schoolhouse

While the 3-line walls function is usually used for drawing walls, we’ll use it here to quickly draw
parallel lines representing countertops.

To set up to draw countertops:

1. Click on Architect in the Edit menu.
2. Click on 3 Line Walls in the Architect menu to toggle on the 3-line wall option. This
allows you to draw three parallel lines at once. The two outer lines will define the edges
of the counter and the centerline will be a dashed line to represent the upper cabinets.
Walls should still be toggled on.
3. Click on Center Line in the Architect menu to set the attributes of the centerline of the
two parallel lines. This will represent the upper cabinets.
4. Click on Line Type in the Center Line menu. All available line types are listed in the
Menu Window.
5. Click on Dashed in the Line Type menu to make the centerline dashed.
6. Right-click once to return to the Architect menu.
7. Click on Width in the Architect menu. You are prompted to Enter wall width.
8. Type 2 and press (Enter). This sets the width of the countertop at two feet.
9. Click on Outside in the Architect menu; the wall will be defined by the outside line.
10. Click on Cap in the Architect menu to automatically cap the end of the parallel lines (or
in this case, countertops).
11. Right-click to return to the Edit menu.

Now you are ready to draw the countertops.

 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 95
To draw countertops on the plan:

1. Click on the Navigation Pad toolbar to open the Zoom menu. You are prompted to
Select first corner of the Zoom window.
2. Click near the lower-left corner of the bottom wall. You are prompted to Select second
corner of the Zoom window.
3. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box encloses the lower half of the plan
and click. The plan now appears larger.
4. Right-click once to return to the Edit menu.
5. Move the cursor to the corner marked 6 in Figure 3.28 and click the middle mouse button
to select it as your first reference point.

6
Click the middle mouse
button to connect to this
point.

Figure 3.28: Selecting the starting point of the countertop

6. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

7. Type 10.2 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
8. Type 180 and press (Enter).
9. Move the cursor above the displayed line and click to define the other side of the counter.

9
Click the left mouse button to
define the other side of the
countertop.

7-8
The length of the countertop
is defined.

Figure 3.29: Drawing the countertop

10. Right-click to disconnect from the counter. The countertop lines are drawn and the end is
capped.
96 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

Figure 3.30: The first countertop is drawn.

11. Repeat steps 5 - 10 for the counter on the opposite side. Remember that the relative angle
for this counter will be 0.

Figure 3.31: The second countertop is drawn.

12. Click on the Navigation Pad toolbar to view the extents of the drawing.
13. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save the drawing.

Drawing the Schoolhouse’s Doors and Windows

Now that you have drawn the walls for the schoolhouse plan, you are ready to insert doors and
windows.

To set up to draw a door:

1. Press (Tab) until the Doors layer is the active layer in the Status Panel toolbar.
2. In the Edit menu in the Menu Window, click on Architect.
3. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 97

Door entry method. Sides (jambs) is toggled on. If Sides is

toggled off, doors are drawn by centers.

Adjusts settings to
determine what doors
will look like

Removes doors and cut-outs in walls

Draws temporary marks to help you place a door

Figure 3.32: The Door Swing menu

4. Click on Draw Marks in the Door Swing menu to toggle the Draw Marks option on.
5. Click on One Layer to toggle it on. (If One Layer is already toggled on, click on it to
toggle it off; then toggle it back on again.) You are prompted to Select layer to search for
walls; a list of your layers appears in the Menu Window.
6. Click on Walls. DataCAD LT now knows where to find your walls when it needs to cut
them for doors and windows.
There are two methods to draw a door: by defining both of its sides and by defining one side and
its center. You’ll draw the first door by sides. To position and begin drawing a door, you need to
reference and measure from an existing point on the drawing.

To draw a door by sides:

1. Click on the Navigation Pad toolbar to go to the Zoom menu. You are prompted to
Select first corner of the Zoom window.
2. Click at the lower-left corner of the bottom wall. You are prompted to Select second
corner of the Zoom window.
3. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box encloses the lower half of the plan
and click. The plan now appears larger.
98 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

3
Click the left mouse button to close the
rubberband box.

2
Click the left mouse button to
start the rubberband box.

Figure 3.33: Zooming in on the plan

Figure 3.34: The result of zooming in on your drawing

4. Right-click once to return to the Door Swing menu.

5. Press (`) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Select reference point.
6. Click the middle mouse button near the upper-right corner of the first room you drew, as
shown in Figure 3.35. Stay close to the inside of the corner. This will be your reference
point. You are prompted to Select hinge side of door.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 99

6
Click the middle mouse button to set this corner
as the reference point.

Figure 3.35: Setting a reference point.

7. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

8. Type .3 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
9. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select strike side of door.
10. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
11. Type 3 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
12. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select direction of door swing.
13. Click anywhere inside the office (on the left side of the wall); this defines the direction of
the swing. The wall is cut and you are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the
wall.
14. Click to the right of the outside wall to define the nonprinting snap point location. The
door is drawn.

7-9
The hinge side of the door.

A non-printing center
snap point.

. 14
Click the left mouse button to define the
outside of the wall.

10-12
The strike side of the door.

13
Click the left mouse button to define the
direction of door swing.

Figure 3.36: Drawing the door

 | CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE
100 To draw a second door by center:
1. Click on Sides in the Door Swing menu to toggle off the Sides option. Now you can
define doors by entering their center and strike side.
2. Move the mouse to the location shown in Figure 3.37. Click the middle mouse button to
snap to the midpoint of the inside front wall. You are prompted to Select strike side of
door.

2
Click the middle mouse
button to connect to the
midpoint of the line.

Figure 3.37: Defining the center of the front door

3. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

4. Type 1.6 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
5. Type 0 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select direction of door swing.
6. Click inside the hall (above the wall) to define the direction of the door swing. The wall
is cut. You are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the wall.
7. Click anywhere on the outside of the exterior wall where you want to locate the
nonprinting snap point. The door is drawn.
6
Click the left mouse button to define the
direction of the door swing.

2
The center of the door.

3-5
The strike side of the door.

7
Click the left mouse button to define the
outside of the wall.

Figure 3.38: The front door is drawn.

8. Click on Sides to toggle on the Sides option.

 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 101
9. Press (`) to set a new reference point.
10. Click the middle mouse button near the upper-left corner of Room A, shown in Figure
3.39. You are prompted to Select hinge side of door.

10
Click the middle mouse button to
define the new reference point.

Room A

Room B

Figure 3.39: Locating the next door

11. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

12. Type .3 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
13. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select strike side of door.
14. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
15. Type 3 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
16. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select direction of door swing.
17. Click anywhere inside Room A (on the right side of the wall) to define the direction of
the swing. The wall is cut. You are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the
wall.
18. Click inside the hall to define the outside of the wall. This defines the nonprinting snap
point location. The door is drawn.
19. Repeat steps 9-18 to create a door for Room B.
20. Right-click twice to return to the Edit menu.

Figure 3.40: The remaining schoolhouse doors are drawn.

102| CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

21. Click on the Navigation Pad toolbar to zoom to the extents of the drawing.
22. Press (Ctrl) + (S) on the keyboard to save the drawing.
You have now completed entering all the doors for this exercise and saved them to your drawing
file.

To set up to draw windows:

1. Before you begin to draw windows, press (Tab) until the Windows layer is the active
layer in the Status Panel toolbar.
2. In the Edit menu in the Menu Window, click on Architect.
3. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.

Window entry method is by sides (jambs) if this is toggled

on or by centers if Sides is toggle off.

Adjusts settings that

determine what windows will
look like.

Removes windows and cut-outs in walls.

Draws temporary marks to help you place windows.

Figure 3.41: The Windows menu

To draw the first window by sides:

1. Click on the Navigation Pad toolbar to open the Zoom menu. You are prompted to
Select first corner of the Zoom window.
2. Click at the lower-left corner of the bottom wall. You are prompted to Select second
corner of the Zoom window.
3. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box encloses the lower half of the plan
and click to zoom in on your plan.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 103

3
Click the left mouse button to close the
rubberband box.

2
Click the left mouse button to start the rubberband box.

Figure 3.42: Zooming in on the lower half of your drawing

4. Right-click once to return to the Windows menu.

5. Press (`) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Select reference point.
6. Click the middle mouse button near the lower left corner of the interior wall shown in
Figure 3.43. This will be your reference point. You are prompted to Select one jamb of
window.

6
Click the middle mouse button
to set the reference point.

Figure 3.43: Setting a reference point

7. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

8. Type 3.7 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
9. Type 0 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select one jamb of window.
10. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
11. Type 3 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
12. Type 0 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the wall.
13. Click anywhere on the outside of the exterior wall. The window is drawn.
104| CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE

7-9
First window jamb

10-12
Second window jamb

13
Click left mouse button for the outside of the wall.

Figure 3.44: Drawing the first window

14. Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of Room B and repeat steps 6 - 14 for the
window on the opposite side. Remember that the relative angles will now be 180.

15. Click on the Navigation Pad toolbar to view the extents of the drawing.

To draw multiple windows:

1. Click on Sides in the Windows menu to toggle Sides off; you can now define windows by
the center and one side or jamb.

2. Click on the Navigation Pad to open the Zoom menu. You are prompted to Select
first corner of the Zoom window.
3. Click at the upper-right corner of the top wall. You are prompted to Select second corner
of the Zoom window.
4. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box encloses the upper half of the plan
and click to zoom in on the plan.

3
Click the left mouse button to start the
rubberband box.

4
Click the left mouse button to close the
rubberband box.

Figure 3.45: Zooming in on the upper half of your drawing

 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 105
5. Right-click once to return to the Windows menu.
6. Press (`) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Select reference point.
7. Move the cursor to the top left corner of the interior wall, as shown in Figure 3.46 and
click the middle mouse button to set the reference point. You are prompted to Select
center of window.

7
Click the middle mouse button to set the
reference point.

Figure 3.46: Setting a reference point

8. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.

9. Type 7.8 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
10. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select one jamb of window.
11. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
12. Type 1.6 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
13. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the
wall.
14. Click anywhere on the outside of the exterior wall. The wall is cut and the window is
drawn.

8-10
The center of the window

11-13
14 The window jamb

Click the left mouse button

to define the outside of the
wall

Figure 3.47: The wall is cut and the window is drawn.

15. Press (`) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Select reference point.
106| CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE
16. Move the cursor to the center snap point of the window you just drew and click the
middle mouse button to set the reference point. You are prompted to Select center of
window.
17. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
18. Type 5.6 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
19. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select one jamb of window.
20. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
21. Type 1.6 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
22. Type 270 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select any point of the outside of the
wall.
23. Click anywhere on the outside of the exterior wall. The wall is cut and the window is
drawn.

16
Click the middle mouse button to set this point as
the new reference point

17-20
The center of the window

21-23
24 The window jamb
Click the left mouse button to
define the outside of the wall

Figure 3.48: The wall is cut and the window is drawn.

24. Repeat steps 15 - 23 for the last window on this wall.

25. Repeat these steps to create the windows on the other wall.

26. Click on the Navigation Pad to view the extents of the drawing. Your plan should
look like Figure 3.49.
 DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, AND DOORS | 107

Figure 3.49: The Schoolhouse floor plan.

28. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save the drawing.

108| CHAPTER 3: TUTORIAL: DRAWING A SCHOOLHOUSE
 Tutorial: Adding
Dimensions, Notes, In this chapter:
4
Symbols, and Hatching Drawing notes and
This part of the tutorial covers those functions that other text
transform a drawing into an architectural construction
Dimensioning the
document. You will add text notes and arrows, dimension drawing
the drawing, add a tile hatch to the hallway, and insert
plumbing symbols in the bathrooms as well as a sink in one Adding hatch to areas
of the drawing
of the countertops. Finally, you’ll draw a title block and
border around the drawing. Inserting symbols
Drawing title blocks
110 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING

Adding Text to the Schoolhouse Drawing

As you enter text, the schoolhouse floor plan will start to take shape. Depending on the size,
placement, and font being used, your drawing can develop into something that looks very
professional.

To set text attributes:

1. If you are not already working in DataCAD LT, open the program now. Open the drawing
you worked on in the previous chapter.
2. Press (Tab) until the Notes layer is the active layer, as displayed in the Status Panel
toolbar.
3. Click on Text in the Edit menu in the Menu Window or click on Text in the Create pull
down menu. The Text menu appears.

Adjusts settings
that determine
what the text will
look like.

Saves text settings for later use

Draws arrows

Aligns text in
paragraphs

Figure 4.1: The Text menu

4. Set the size of the text by clicking on Size. A value menu appears. The text cursor
graphically represents the current size of the text.
5. Click on 1’-0” and right-click or type 1 and press (Enter).
6. Set the aspect ratio of the text by clicking on Aspect. A value menu appears. An aspect
ratio below 1.0 creates wider and fatter characters, while an aspect above 1.0 creates
thinner characters.
7. Type .75 and press (Enter).
 ADDING TEXT TO THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 111
8. Click on Font to select a new font. The Set Text Parameters dialog box appears so that
you can select CHR or TTF fonts.

Figure 4.2: The Set Text Parameters dialog box

9. Click on ARCWY2HC.CHR. This font has a nice hand-drawn style. Then click on OK to
close the dialog box.
10. Click on Alignment in the Text menu to display the Alignment menu.
11. Click on Center to center the text within an area on the drawing. Then right-click to
return to the Text menu.

To insert room names:

1. Move the cursor to the center of the large room. You are prompted to Position text using
cursor, then ‘ENTER’.
2. Click to set the position of the text.
112 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING

2
Click the left mouse button to set
the text cursor position.

Figure 4.3: Positioning the text cursor

3. Press (CapsLock) if it isn’t already on.

4. Type CLASSROOM. The text appears in the drawing as you type.
5. Right-click to exit this command and return to the Text menu.
6. Repeat steps 1 - 5 for the office, but type OFFICE in the room to the lower left instead of
typing CLASSROOM.

Figure 4.4: Room labels for the classroom and office are added

To insert notes:
1. Set the size of the text by clicking on Size. A value menu appears.
2. Type .6 and press (Enter).
3. Click on Aspect. A value menu appears.
4. Type 1.25 and press (Enter). This sets the aspect ratio to create a thinner text.
 ADDING TEXT TO THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 113
5. Click on Alignment. Then click on Right in the Alignment menu to align the text on the
right side of the indicated placement point.
6. Click in the center of the room, between the text CLASSROOM and the countertops. To
zoom in closer to the drawing, press (PageDown). Press (PageUp) to zoom out.
7. Type the following note, pressing (Enter) after each line:
PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP
36” ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR WITH
ADJUSTABLE SHELVES BELOW

8. Right-click to exit this command and return to the Text menu.

6
Text cursor location, with
text justified to the right

Figure 4.5: The note is placed on the drawing

Drawing Text Arrows in the Schoolhouse Drawing

To draw text arrows:

1. Click on Arrows in the Text menu.
2. Click on Size to change the arrow size. You are prompted to Enter arrow size.
3. Type .6 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Draw arrow.
4. Click near the right side of the paragraph of text you just entered. This defines the tail end
of the arrow.
5. Click to define any bends in the tail of the arrow.
6. Click to define the arrowhead location.
114 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING

4
Click the left mouse button to define the
beginning of the tail.

5
Click the left mouse button to define
the bend of the tail.

6
Click the left mouse button to define
the point of the arrow.

Figure 4.6: Placing an arrow in the drawing

7. Right-click once. The arrow is drawn.

8. Right-click twice to return to the Edit menu.

Editing Text in the Schoolhouse Drawing

To correct existing text:

1. Click on Change in the Edit menu.
2. Click on Text to set the text attribute you want to change.
3. Click on Contents to change or edit the words in existing text.
4. Click on Area to select the text with a window box.
5. Click below and to the left of the text paragraph.
6. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box completely encloses the entire note
and click. The first line of text appears in the Message Area.
 DIMENSIONING THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 115

6
Click the left mouse button to close the
rubberband box.

5
Click the left mouse button to start the
rubberband box.

Figure 4.7: Changing text

7. Type over the text to make the following correction, pressing (Enter) when you’re
finished:
CERAMIC TILE COUNTERTOP
The first line of text is corrected and the second line of text appears in the prompt.
8. Press (Enter) to accept the second line as it is. The third line of text appears in the
prompt.
9. Press (Enter) to accept the third line as it is.
10. Right-click twice to return to the Edit menu.

11. Click on to view the extents of the drawing.

12. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save your drawing.

Dimensioning the Schoolhouse Drawing

In an architectural office, there are many factors that determine the type of dimension used for a
project. In this section of the tutorial, you will insert standard linear dimensions in the schoolhouse
floor plan.

To set up to dimension:
1. Press (Tab) until the Dim layer is the active layer in the Status Panel toolbar.
116 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING
2. Click on Dimensions in the Utility menu to display the Dimensions menu in the Menu
Window.
3. Draw linear dimensions by clicking on Linear. The Linear menu appears.

Draw horizontal, vertical,

aligned, or rotated
dimensions.

Set the text, line, and arrow styles

for dimensions.

Figure 4.8: Linear dimension menu

4. Click on Text Style to change the current text style or settings.

5. Click on Font in the Text Style menu to change the font.
6. Click on ARCWY2HC in the FontName list in the Set Text Parameters dialog box to
match the font style of the notes. Then click on OK or press (Enter) to leave the dialog
box.
7. Right-click to return to the Linear menu.

Drawing a String of Dimensions:

To draw a dimension string:

1. Click on Vertical to draw vertical dimensions. You are prompted to Select first point of
distance to dimension.
2. Move the cursor to the lower left corner of the exterior wall and click the middle mouse
button or press (N) on the keyboard to object snap to the corner. You are prompted to
Select second point of distance to dimension.
3. Move the cursor to the snap point of the window shown in Figure 4.9 and click the
middle mouse button to snap to it. You are prompted with Dimension which side of line?
 DIMENSIONING THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 117

3
Click the middle mouse button to
.
define the second point of distance
to dimension.

2
Click the middle mouse button to set
the start of the dimension line.

Figure 4.9: Placing the first dimension on the drawing

4. Move the cursor to the outside of the wall and click.

5. Click on String Line to continue drawing dimensions in a stringline. You are prompted to
Select next point to dimension to.
6. Move to the snap point of the middle window and click the middle mouse button to snap
to the next point to dimension to. You are prompted to Select next point to dimension to.
7. Move to the snap point of the last window and click the middle mouse button to snap to
the next point to dimension to.
8. Click the middle mouse button to select the corner of the wall, which is also the end of
the stringline.
9. Right-click to exit the String line menu and return to the Linear menu.
118 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING
8
Click the middle mouse button to
end the stringline.

7
Click the middle mouse button to
define the next point to dimension
to.

6
Click the middle mouse button to
define the next point to dimension
to.

4
Click the left mouse button to define
the outside of the wall. The first line
is drawn.

Figure 4.10: Defining a stringline of dimensions

10. Click on Overall in the Linear menu to place an overall dimension of the stringline.
11. Right-click twice to return to the Utility menu.

Figure 4.11: The stringline and overall dimensions are drawn

Automatic Dimensioning
You can also use automatic dimensioning; follow the steps below to use this second method of
adding dimensions to your drawing.
 DIMENSIONING THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 119
To use automatic dimensioning:
1. Click on Dimensions in the Utility menu. The Dimensions menu appears.
2. Click on Linear. The Linear menu appears.
3. Click on Auto Style to change the current automatic dimension settings.
4. Click on Only Points to search and dimension to points only.
5. Click on Layer Search to enable layer searching. All of the layers will be searched for
points to dimension.
6. Click on Miss Dist. to set the distance to look for snap points. 7. Click on 1” and
right-click or type .1 and press (Enter).
8. Right-click to exit the Auto Style menu and return to the Linear menu.
9. Click on Horizontal to draw horizontal dimensions.
10. Click on Auto Dim. You are prompted to Select first endpoint of line to dimension along.
11. Move the cursor to the bottom left corner of the exterior wall and click the middle mouse
button or press (N) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Select second endpoint of line
to dimension along.
12. Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the exterior wall and click the middle
mouse button. You are prompted with Dimension which side of line?

11
Click the middle mouse button
to define the beginning of the
dimension line.

12
Click the middle mouse button to
define the end of the dimension line.

Figure 4.12: Selecting the points of your automatic dimension line

13. Move the cursor below the bottom wall and click. The dimension string is drawn
automatically.
14. Right-click to return to the Linear menu.
120 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING
15. Click on Overall to place an overall dimension. The front wall is dimensioned. (See
Figure 4.13)
16. Right-click three times to return to the Edit menu.

Figure 4.13: The front wall is dimensioned

Stretching Dimensions
To stretch dimensions:
1. Click on Stretch in the Edit menu. You are prompted to Select the first point of distance to
stretch.
2. Click anywhere on the drawing window to locate the first point of the distance to stretch.
You are prompted to Select the second point of distance to stretch.
3. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative distance.
4. Type 1.6 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative angle.
5. Type 270 and press (Enter). The distance and angle to stretch appear in the Attention
toolbar.
6. Click on Area as the selection method. You are prompted to Select first corner of box to
<STRETCH>.
7. Make sure Layer Search is on.
8. Click outside the upper-left corner of the plan.
9. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box encloses the rear wall and part of
the left and right walls. (See Figure 4.14)
10. Click to close the rubber band box. The walls are shortened by 1’-6” and the dimensions
are automatically adjusted.
 DIMENSIONING THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 121

10
Click the left mouse button to
close the rubberband box.

8
Click the left mouse button to
start the rubberband box.

Figure 4.14: Stretching the rear wall

11. Click on Invert to stretch the same distance in the opposite direction. The new angle
appears in the Attention toolbar. You are prompted to Select first corner of box to
<STRETCH>. You can use Invert for most editing commands. It uses the inverse of the
defined angle.
12. Repeat steps 8 - 10 to return the wall to its previous shape.

Figure 4.15: The plan is dimensioned

13. Right-click to return to the Edit menu.

14. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save the drawing.
122 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING
You have dimensioned the schoolhouse plan. Floor plans for construction of a real building would
require more dimension lines as well as lines from many different angles. You can use DataCAD
LT to create them all.

Hatching the Schoolhouse Drawing

Hatching is adding lines to your drawing that are in patterns, such as square boxes that represent
floor tile, for example. As you will soon find out, there are many hatch patterns to choose from.

To set up to draw a tile hatch pattern:

1. Press (Tab) until the Hatch layer is the active layer in the Status Panel toolbar.
2. Click on Hatching in the Utility menu.

Define a boundary, point by point, to infill

with hatch.

Settings that affect the

appearance of the hatch

Figure 4.16: The Hatching menu

3. Click on Associative to toggle associative hatching on. This creates the entire hatch as a
single entity. See “Drawing Associative Hatch” in the “Hatch” chapter for details.
4. Choose Pattern to set the type of hatch pattern. You are prompted to Enter hatch pattern
name. A preview window appears.
 HATCHING THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 123
5. Move the cursor over the buttons in the Menu Window. Notice the different patterns
displayed in the preview window.
6. Choose Scroll Fwrd three times to scroll to the end of the list.
7. Choose 12x12til for a 12” x 12” tile pattern.
8. Choose Scale to set the scale of the pattern. You are prompted to Enter hatch scale (1 to
9999).
9. Type 1 and press (Enter).
10. Choose Angle to set the angle of the pattern. You are prompted to Enter hatch angle.
11. Type 0 and press (Enter).

To draw a tile hatch pattern:

1. Click on from the Navigation Pad toolbar to go to the Zoom menu. You are
prompted to Select first corner of the Zoom window.
2. Click below and to the left of the exterior wall. You are prompted to Select second corner
of the Zoom window.
3. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box encloses the lower half of the plan
and click. The plan now appears larger.
4. Right-click to return to the Hatching menu.
5. Click on Origin to start the hatch pattern at a defined point. You are prompted to Select
hatch pattern origin.
6. Move the cursor to the lower-left corner of the hall and click the middle mouse button.
7. Click on Boundary to define a boundary for the hatch. You are prompted to Select first
point on boundary to hatch to.
8. Use object snapping to select points for the hatch boundary. To select the first point of the
boundary, move the cursor to the lower-left corner in the hall and click the middle mouse
button. You are prompted to Select next point on boundary to hatch to. For more
information on object snapping, see “Object Snapping” in the “Drawing Tools” chapter.
Shortcut: Press (N) to object snap to a point.

9. Move the cursor upward and click the middle mouse button to object snap to the corner
marked A with. (See Figure 4.17)
10. Move the cursor close to the corner marked B and click the middle mouse button to
object snap to that point.
11. Move the cursor close to the corner marked C and object snap to that point.
12. Right-click to close the hatch boundary. Right-click to return to the Hatching menu.
124 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING

9-12
A Click the middle mouse button to
B select these three points. After
object snapping to the corner
marked C, click the right mouse
button to close the boundary.

C
8
Click the middle mouse button
to start the hatch boundary.

Figure 4.17: Selecting a hatch boundary

13. Click on Begin to draw the hatch pattern. The pattern will fill the boundary you defined
in the previous steps.

14. Click on to recalculate the extents of the drawing.

15. Right-click to return to the Utility menu.
16. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save the drawing.

Figure 4.18: The tile hatch is drawn

You have now created a hatch pattern and saved your updated drawing file.

Adding Symbols to the Schoolhouse

Symbols are one of the most powerful features of DataCAD LT. You can build symbol libraries
from the drawings you create and reuse them in other drawings. The symbols can be sections,
details, notes, furniture, fixtures, or any part of a drawing that will be drawn repetitively.
 ADDING SYMBOLS TO THE SCHOOLHOUSE | 125
Opening a Symbol Folder
To open a symbol folder:

1. Click on in the Navigation Pad toolbar to open the Zoom menu. You are prompted to
Select first corner of the Zoom window.
2. Click at the lower-left corner of the exterior wall. You are prompted to Select second
corner of the Zoom window.
3. Drag the mouse diagonally until the rubber band box encloses the lower half of the plan
and click. The plan is now displayed larger.
4. Make sure the Symbol Browser toolbar is displayed. If it isn’t, just select Symbol
Browser from the View pull-down menu or use the shortcut (Ctrl) + (T).

5. Click on in the Symbol Browser and select Folder from the drop-down options. The
Browse dialog box appears, listing the contents of your DataCAD LT\Symbols folder.
6. Double-click on the Plumbing folder to list the plumbing fixture symbols subfolders.
7. Click on the Commercial folder. The symbols contained in this folder appear in your
Symbol Browser. Each box in the browser contains a symbol. Then click on OK to close
the Browse dialog box so you can use the plumbing symbols in your drawing.
8. Move the cursor over the symbols; as you move the cursor over a symbol, a description
of it appears in the Coordinates/Hints toolbar.
126 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING

Figure 4.19: The Browse dialog box and Plumbing/Commercial symbol folder opened in the Symbol
Browser toolbar

Selecting and Placing Symbols

To select and place symbols:
1. Press (Tab) until Plumb is the active layer in the Status Panel toolbar.
 ADDING SYMBOLS TO THE SCHOOLHOUSE | 127

2. Click on in the Symbol Browser toolbar to display the Options drop-down menu.
Then click on Rotate and make sure a check appears in front of it to toggle dynamic

rotation on . This lets you preview a symbol’s

position before you place it in the drawing.
3. Move the cursor over the toilet with grab bar on the right. You will see

in the Coordinates/Hints toolbar. Click to select the symbol.

4. Move the cursor into the Drawing Area. A boxed outline representing the toilet and grab
bars is now attached to your cursor. The insertion point is at the upper-left corner of the
symbol, the point the cursor is connected to. Remember, you can use the arrows on the
keyboard to pan around your drawing.
5. Position the cursor near the upper-right corner of the room that is in the lower-right
corner of the plan and click the middle mouse button. This is the insertion point and the
center of rotation for the symbol. If you move your cursor slightly up or down, you will
see the boxed outline rotate around the insertion point.
6. Position the cursor near the lower-right corner of the bathroom and click the middle
mouse button. The toilet with grab bars is drawn. If you place the toilet incorrectly, click
on Undo Place Symbol in the Edit pull-down menu to delete it and then place the toilet
again.

5
Click the middle mouse button to
define the insertion point.

6
Move the cursor down and to the right away
fromthe insertion point, and click the middle
mouse button to set the symbol into place.

Figure 4.20: Placing the toilet on your plan

7. Right-click to cancel the toilet symbol.

128 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING

Figure 4.21: The toilet and grab bars are placed on the drawing

8. Move the cursor over the WALL-HUNG SINK (probably the top left symbol in the
Symbol Browser toolbar) and click on it to select it.
9. Move the cursor into the Drawing Area. A boxed outline representing the sink is now
attached to your cursor. The insertion point for this symbol is in the back center of the
sink.
10. Position the cursor at the center point, between the window and hallway wall, as shown
in Figure 4.22. Click the middle mouse button.

10
Click the middle mouse
button to define the
insertion point for the sink.

Figure 4.22: Placing the sink in your drawing

11. Rotate the symbol by dragging the cursor away from the insertion point and clicking
when it is in place. The sink is drawn. If you place the sink incorrectly, click on Undo
Place Symbol in the Edit pull-down menu to delete it and then place the sink again.
 ADDING SYMBOLS TO THE SCHOOLHOUSE | 129

Figure 4.23: The sink is drawn

12. Right-click to cancel the sink symbol.

13. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save the drawing.

Selecting Another Symbol File

To select another symbol file:

1. Click on in the Symbol Browser toolbar and select Folder from the drop-down
menu. The Browse dialog box appears so that you can select another symbol folder.
2. Double-click on the Kitchen folder to view a list of Kitchen subfolders.
3. Click on Equipment folder in the Browse dialog box and click on OK. The kitchen
equipment symbols appear in the Symbol Browser toolbar.
4. Select the bar sink (upper left in the Symbol Browser toolbar) and place it as shown in
the figure below. Refer to the previous section if you need help placing this sink.

Place the kitchen sink, and

rotate into place.

Figure 4.24: The kitchen sink is drawn

5. Right-click to go to the Edit menu.

 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING
130 Copying Symbols
To copy symbols:
1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. You are prompted to Select first
point of the distance to copy.
2. Move the cursor to the upper-right corner of the bathroom you just placed fixtures in and
click the middle mouse button to define the first point to copy from. You are prompted to
Select second point of distance to copy.
3. Move the cursor to the upper-right corner of the room directly above the bathroom and
click the middle mouse button. The distance and angle you just defined appear in the
Attention toolbar.

3
Click the middle mouse button to define
the second point of distance to copy
from.

2
Click the middle mouse button to
define the first point of distance to
copy from.

Figure 4.25: Defining a distance to copy

4. Click on Area if it’s not already active. You are prompted to Select first corner of area to
<COPY>.
5. Click on Layer Search to toggle layer searching off and search only the active layer for
items to copy.
6. Click at the lower left of the bathroom sink. You are prompted to Select second corner of
area to <COPY>.
7. Drag the mouse diagonally to the upper right of the toilet and grab bars, until the area box
encloses all bathroom fixtures and their insertion points.
8. Click to close the box. The sink, toilet, and grab bars are copied into the other bathroom.
 DRAWING A TITLE BLOCK AND BORDER | 131

8
Click the left mouse button to close the
area box.

6
Click the left mouse button to start the
area box.

Figure 4.26: Selecting the bathroom fixtures to copy

9. Click on to recalculate the extents of the drawing.

Figure 4.27: The bathroom fixtures are copied to the other bathroom

10. Right-click to return to the Edit menu.

11. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save the drawing.

Drawing a Title Block and Border

To complete the schoolhouse plan, you will create a simple border that will plot with the floor
plan. The paper size will be 8 1/2” x 11”.

To draw a title block and border:

1. Press (Tab) until Border is the active layer in the Status Panel toolbar.
2. Press (=) to toggle the Walls option off. Note the w in SwOTHLUDFB in the Status Panel
toolbar is now lowercase.
3. Click on Polygons in the Edit menu in the Menu Window.
4. Click on Rectangle to draw a rectangle.
5. Move the cursor to the lower-left corner of the drawing where you want the border to
start and click. If necessary, press (PageUp) once to zoom out and give yourself more
space to work around your drawing.
132 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING

5
Click the left mouse button to define the first
corner of the border.

Figure 4.28: Creating a border

6. Press (Insert) until the prompt in the Attention toolbar reads Current input mode =
relative Cartesian (x, y).
7. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative X-distance.
8. Type 80 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative Y-distance.
9. Type 60 and press (Enter). The border is drawn.
10. Right-click to return to the Edit menu.

11. Click on to view the extents of the drawing.

Moving the Border

To move the border:

1. Click on Move in the Edit Menu.
2. Click on Drag.
3. Click on Group. You are prompted to Select group to <MOVE>.
 Move the cursor to the center of the rectangle you just created
DRAWINGand clickBLOCK
A TITLE the middle
AND BORDER | 133
4.
mouse button. The rectangle appears in dashed lines to indicate its selection. You are
prompted to Select the point to drag from.
5. With the cursor still at the center of the rectangle, click the middle mouse button. Notice
that you can now move the border by moving the mouse.
6. Press (O) to turn off ortho mode. This allows free movement when you place the border.
Note the “o” in SwoTHLUDFB in the Status Panel toolbar is now lowercase.
7. Use (PageUp) or (PageDown) for a better view if you need to, then move the border over
the floor plan so the plan appears centered within it.
8. Click to set the border into place.
9. Right-click twice to return to the Edit menu.

10. Click on to recalculate the extents of the drawing.

PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP

36” ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR WITH
CALL BAM.NET (BAM RULES!)

Figure 4.29: The border is placed

Drawing a Title Block

To draw a title block:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu. You are prompted to Select first point of the distance to
copy.
2. Move the cursor to the lower right corner of the border and click the middle mouse
button. You are prompted to Select second point of the distance to copy.
134 | CHAPTER 4: TUTORIAL: ADDING DIMENSIONS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND HATCHING
3. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative X-distance.
4. Type -5 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative Y-distance.
5. Type 0 and press (Enter). The distance and angle to copy appear in the Attention toolbar.
6. Click on Entity in the Menu Window. You are prompted to Select entity to <COPY>.
7. Select the right vertical line of the border by clicking on it. The line is copied.
8. Right-click to return to the Edit menu.
9. Press (`) to set a new reference point.
10. Move the cursor to the lower right outside corner of the border and click the middle
mouse button to set a new reference point.

7
Click the left
mouse button to
copy this line.

PLASTIC LAMINATE
COUNTERTOP
36” ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
WITH ADJUSTABLE SHELVES
BELOW

10
Click the middle
mouse button to
set a new
reference point.

Figure 4.30: Completing the title block

11. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative X-distance.

12. Type 0 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative Y-distance.
13. Type 5 and press (Enter). You connect to a point on the right line of the border.
14. Press (Spacebar). You are prompted to Enter relative X-distance.
15. Type -5 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative Y-distance.
16. Type 0 and press (Enter). A line is drawn.
17. Right-click to disconnect from the line and return to the Edit menu.
18. Click on Move in the Edit menu.
19. Click on Drag.
 DRAWING A TITLE BLOCK AND BORDER | 135
20. Click on And Copy. You are prompted to Select entity to <MOVE>.
21. Select the line you just drew by clicking on it. The line becomes dashed. You are
prompted to Select the point to drag from.
22. Select an end point of the dashed line with the middle mouse button.
23. Press (O) to toggle ortho mode on.
24. Move the cursor upwards and click to place the line in a few different locations to section
off the title block, as in Figure 4.31.
25. Right-click three times to return to the Edit menu. The title block is drawn.

PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP

36” ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR WITH
ADJUSTABLE SHELVES BELOW

Figure 4.31: The drawing with title block

26. Press (Ctrl) + (S) to save the drawing.

Tutorial: Printing a Drawing
DataCAD LT has many options available for plotting or
printing your drawing. This chapter will focus on printing In this chapter:
5
your plan on an 8 1/2” x 11” sheet of paper.
Printing the schoolhouse
drawing
Setting printing options
138 | CHAPTER 5: TUTORIAL: PRINTING A DRAWING

Printing the Schoolhouse Drawing

If you are not in DataCAD LT, start DataCAD LT now. Choose the drawing you worked on in the
previous tutorials. Before plotting the schoolhouse floor plan, make sure:
• a printer or plotter is either connected to your computer or available via a network connection
• the printer or plotter is turned on and is online or ready to receive data
• you have the corresponding Windows driver for your printer installed on your computer (see
your printer’s manual for more information about installing a printer driver)

To plot the schoolhouse:

1. Choose Print from the File pull-down menu in the Menu Bar or choose Print/Plot from
the Utility menu in the Menu Window. The following message appears: A printer has not
yet been selected for this drawing. Please click OK to assign a printer and select a paper
size for this drawing. Since this is the first time you’ve printed this drawing, DataCAD
LT requires you to choose a printer, paper size, and orientation before you assign pens,
complete a print layout, and plot your drawing. To accept the default settings, click OK
and skip to step 5; otherwise, continue with step 2 below.

Prints the curent drawing layout

Accesses the Pen Table dialog box

Calls up a multi-scale plotting sheet

Accesses the Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box

Figure 5.1: The Print/Plot menu

2. Choose a printer from the Printer Name drop-down box in the Printer/Plotter Settings
dialog box.
 PRINTING THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 139
3. Choose a paper size. The sizes available are read from your printer driver. If a size you
want is not displayed in the drop-down box, your printer may not support it. Choose the
closest appropriate size, or use the User-Defined option if available, or use a different
printer.
4. Click OK to close the Settings dialog box. The Print/Plot menu appears. You can exit
DataCAD LT and open the printer driver to see the supported paper sizes. Many times,
the default settings of the driver do not include all supported sizes. You must check them
to activate them.

Figure 5.2: The Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box

5. Choose Scale to set the plotting scale. The current plotting scale appears in the Message
Window.
6. Choose 1/8” if it’s not already the current plotting scale.
7. Choose Quick Layout from the Print/Plot menu. A dashed box appears representing the 8
1/2” x 11” sheet. If you move the cursor over the Drawing Window, you will find a
movable copy of this box. You are prompted to Locate sheet of paper using cursor,
“ENTER” to end.
140 | CHAPTER 5: TUTORIAL: PRINTING A DRAWING
8. Center the box over the drawing and click the middle mouse button. This object snaps to
the center of the title block (the centered point of the rectangle) and centers the title
block. You can also move the box anywhere you want and click with the left mouse
button.
9. Choose Print/Plot to see a preview copy of the plot.
10. Click on Plot to send the drawing directly to the plotter or printer. The schoolhouse floor
plan is plotted.

Printing Options
There are many printing options that help you get the plotted output you want.

Assigning Pens
Use Pen Assignments in the Pen Table dialog box to set a hierarchy of line weights, which help
add line definition to your drawings. For example, if your walls were a heavier line weight than
your doors and windows, the door and window openings would appear clearer. This difference in
line weight helps define the content of your drawing.

To set the pens for printing the schoolhouse drawing:

1. Choose Print/Plot.
2. Choose Pen Table to open the Pen Table dialog box. In the Pen Assignments section, you
will assign pen numbers to match the colors used in the drawing. You’ll notice that the
first color in the Pen Assignments list box is highlighted.
The Pen Table dialog box also includes a Pen Settings section that allows you to choose
the pen width, color, and color density for each pen you assigned in the Pen Assignments
portion of the dialog box. See “Using Pen Tables” in the “Printing Your Drawing” chapter
for detailed information on using the Pen Table.
 PRINTING THE SCHOOLHOUSE DRAWING | 141

Figure 5.3: The Pen Table dialog box

3. Select White in the Pen Assignments box if it’s not already highlighted. Notice that just
below this list box is a small box displaying the highlighted color, followed by a number
in a small input box. This number is the pen that will be used to plot all white lines in
your drawing.
4. Type 1 in the input box. The color white is now set for pen number 1.
5. Select Red in the Pen Assignments box or press (Down Arrow) to highlight Red.
6. Type 3 in the input box. The color red is now set for pen number 3.
7. Set the remainder of the colors: for Green use pen 1, for Cyan use 3, for Magenta use 3,
for Brown use 4, for Lt. Grey use 4, for Lt. Red use 2, for Lt. Green use 3, and for Yellow
use 2.
142 | CHAPTER 5: TUTORIAL: PRINTING A DRAWING
8. Click OK to save the pen assignments and close the Pen Table dialog box.
9. Right-click to return to the Utility menu.
 Tutorial: Modeling
This chapter guides you through some of the more
commonly used macros to help you complete the In this chapter:
6
schoolhouse. In order to keep this exercise simple and to
help you understand a little about 3D spatial relationships, Adding 3D windows and
you will work in orthographic (plan) view and then use the doors
3D Views menu to view your work. Adding a roof
Viewing the model in 3D
144 | CHAPTER 6: TUTORIAL: MODELING

Modeling the Schoolhouse

You will create five new layers for the 3D items that you are going to add to the drawing. This
enables your drawing file to contain both your plan drawings (used for construction
documentation) and 3D drawings (used to present your designs).
If you are not in DataCAD LT, start DataCAD LT now.

To add layers to your drawing:

1. Choose the drawing file that you worked on in the previous chapters.
2. Add five new layers to your drawing file.
3. Name the new layers: 3DWalls, 3DDoors, 3DWindows, 3DRoof, and 3DMisc.
4. Go to the Layers menu.
5. Turn off Doors, Windows, Plumb, Dim, Hatch, Notes, Misc, and Border.
6. Press (Esc) on the keyboard to refresh the drawing display.
7. Zoom in on the lower half of the plan.

Adding Windows
You will work with the walls, doors, and windows that you have already placed in your drawing.
Do not erase them; they are an essential part of your drawing file.

To add windows:
1. Make the 3DWindows layer the active layer.
2. Click on the Toolbox pull-down menu. If AEC_MODL is not one of the options, click on
Configure, click on AEC_MODL, click on Add. This makes the AEC_MODL macro
appear in the Toolbox pull-down menu. Click on OK to close the Configure DataCAD LT
Settings dialog.
3. Choose AEC_MODL from the Toolbox pull-down menu. You are prompted to Select
building component to model.
4. Choose Windows to go to the WindPlan menu.
5. Choose In Plan to draw the windows in plan view.
6. Choose UnitType. You are prompted to Select type of window unit.
7. Choose DblHung to draw double-hung windows.
8. Return to the WindPlan menu.
9. Choose Glass to go to the Glass menu.
10. Choose PaneHorz to define the number of glass panes (divisions) across the window. You
are prompted to supply the Number of panes in the horizontal direction.
11. Choose 3.
 MODELING THE SCHOOLHOUSE | 145
12. Choose PaneVert to define the number of glass panes top to bottom in the window. You
are prompted to supply the Number of panes in the vertical direction.
13. Choose 2.
14. Return to the WindPlan menu. You are prompted to Enter a point on first inside corner of
window.
15. Click the middle mouse button on an inside corner of the front window opening in the
office. You are prompted to Enter a point on second inside corner of window.
16. Click the middle mouse button the other inside corner of the window opening. You are
prompted to Enter a point on outside surface of wall.
17. Click the middle mouse button on the outside of the wall. The window is created.

15
Click the middle mouse
button to define the first
inside corner of the
window.

16
Click the middle mouse
button to define the other
inside corner of the window.

17
Click the middle mouse
button to define the
outside corner of the
window.

Figure 6.1: Placing windows

18. Repeat steps 15 - 17 to create the remaining windows. Remember that you can use the
arrow keys on the keyboard to move around the drawing.

Figure 6.2: The 3D windows are drawn.

19. When you are finished placing windows, return to the AEC_MODL menu.
 | CHAPTER 6: TUTORIAL: MODELING
146 Adding 3D Doors
To add doors:
1. Make 3DDoors the active layer.
2. Choose Doors from the AEC_MODL menu to go to the DoorPlan menu. You are
prompted to Enter a point on first inside corner of door.
3. Move the cursor to an inside corner of the door opening in the office and click the middle
mouse button. You are prompted to Enter a point on second inside corner of door.
4. Move the cursor to the other inside corner of the door and click the middle mouse button.
You are prompted to Enter a point on outside surface of wall.
5. Move the cursor to the outside corner of the wall and click the middle mouse button. The
first door is created.
6. Choose Door. You are prompted to Select door data to change.
7. Choose HingLft to change the hinge side of the front door to the left side.
8. Return to the DoorPlan menu.
9. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for the remaining doors.

3
Click the middle mouse
button to define the first
inside corner of the door.

4
Click the middle mouse
button to define the other
inside corner of the door.

5
Click the middle mouse
button to define the
outside surface of the
wall.

Figure 6.3: Placing the first door

10. Return to the Edit menu.

11. Recalculate the extents of the drawing.
 MODELING THE SCHOOLHOUSE | 147

Figure 6.4: The doors are drawn.

There are many other options you can use when placing doors and windows.

Viewing the 3D Model

Choose Isometric from the View menu on the Menu Bar. You will learn more viewing techniques
later in this chapter.

Figure 6.5: An isometric view of the schoolhouse walls, windows, and doors

Adding a 3D Roof
As mentioned throughout this book, layers allow you more control over your drawing. Later in
this section of the Tutorial you will use these different layers to switch between viewing
construction plans and presentation graphics.
 | CHAPTER 6: TUTORIAL: MODELING
148 To add a roof:
1. Change to the 3DRoof layer.
2. Change the color of the 3DRoof layer to Magenta.
3. Click on the Toolbox pull-down menu. If ROOFIT is not one of the available options,
click on Configure, add it to the list of available macros, and close the dialog box.
4. Choose ROOFIT from the Toolbox pull-down menu to go to the RoofIt menu.
5. Choose Gable to create a gable roof.
6. Choose Settings.
7. Set the wall thickness to 1 foot.
8. Return to the RoofIt menu. You are prompted to Pick the 1st point of roof boundary. It is
important to select the points of the roof boundary in a clockwise direction to ensure that
the roof will be placed correctly.
9. Select the lower-left corner of the exterior wall with the middle mouse button. You are
prompted: Enter second point of roof length.
10. Select the upper-left corner of the exterior wall with the middle mouse button. You are
prompted: Enter second point of roof width.
11. Select the upper-right corner of the exterior wall with the middle mouse button. The roof
appears on top of the walls.
12. Return to the Edit menu.
13. Choose Isometric from the View menu on the Menu Bar to view the drawing in isometric.

Figure 6.6: An isometric view of the schoolhouse with the new roof
 MODELING THE SCHOOLHOUSE | 149
Finishing the Schoolhouse Drawing
Notice that in the isometric view, portions of the wall above and below the windows are missing.
You will fix them in the next exercise, but these wall segments are going to be put on a different
layer than the existing Walls layer. Later in this chapter, you will see the reason for having two
wall layers.

To finish the drawing:

1. Choose Plan from the View pull-down menu or click on in the Projection Pad toolbar
to see the schoolhouse in plan view.
2. Choose Layers from the Utility menu in the Menu Window.
3. Make 3DWalls the active layer, with only the Walls layer turned on. All other layers
should be off.
4. Change the 3DWalls layer color to yellow.
5. Go to the Architect menu and toggle the Walls option on.
6. Toggle the 2-line wall option on.
7. Set a new wall width of 1 foot.
8. Toggle Outside on.
9. Toggle Cap off, if it is on.
10. Press (Z) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Enter new Z-base.
11. Type 0 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter new Z-height.
12. Type 3.4 and press (Enter). You have just established a new 3D setting for all new items
you draw. All lines will now be drawn with a Z-base of 0 and a Z-height of 3’-4”.
13. Zoom in on the lower half of the plan.
14. Return to the Edit menu. You are prompted to Select first end point of new line/wall.
15. Move the cursor to an outside corner of the window opening in the office and click the
middle mouse button. You are prompted: Select next end point of line/wall.
16. Move the cursor to the other outside corner of the window and click the middle mouse
button. You are prompted: Select a point to define the Inside of the wall.
17. Move the cursor anywhere on the inside of the plan and click. The cutout is filled.
18. Right-click to disconnect from the wall you just drew.
19. Repeat steps 15 - 18 for the remaining exterior window openings. Be sure to disconnect
from each wall segment you draw, before drawing the next. Remember to use the arrow
keys on the keyboard to move around the drawing.
20. Press (Z) on the keyboard. You are prompted to Enter new Z-base.
21. Type 6.8 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter new Z-height.
150 | CHAPTER 6: TUTORIAL: MODELING
22. Type 8 and press (Enter). You have just established a new 3D setting for all new items
you draw. All lines will now be drawn with a Z-base of 6.8 and a Z-height of 8’-0”.

17
Click the first mouse
button to define the inside
of the wall.

16
Click the middle mouse
button to define the next end
point of the new wall.

15
Click the middle mouse
button to define the first
end point of the new wall.

Figure 6.7: Placing headers and sills

23. Repeat steps 15 - 18 to fill in over top of the sills to create window headers. You are
prompted to Select first end point of new line/wall.
24. Click the middle mouse button at the outside corner of the front door opening. You are
prompted to Select next end point of line/wall.
25. Move the cursor to the other outside corner of the door and click the middle mouse
button. You are prompted to Select a point to define the Inside of the wall.
26. Move the cursor anywhere on the interior of the plan and click. The door header is drawn.
27. Press (=) on the keyboard. The Attention toolbar reads Walls will NOT be drawn.
28. Press (=) again. You are prompted to Enter new wall width.
29. Type .4 and press (Enter). You are now set to draw the headers above the interior doors.
30. Move the cursor to an outside corner of the interior door opening in the office.
31. Repeat steps 24 - 26 to complete this header and the remaining interior headers.
32. Choose Isometric from the View pull-down menu on the Menu Bar to see the isometric
view.
33. Toggle the 3DDoors, 3DWindow, and 3DRoof layers on.
34. Return to the Utility menu.
35. Recalculate the extents of the drawing.

Viewing Your Drawing in 3D

Perhaps one of the most exciting features of DataCAD LT is that everything you draw has 3D
parameters.
 VIEWING YOUR DRAWING IN 3D | 151
To change your view:
1. Choose 3D Menus from the Edit menu and click on 3D Views to go to the 3D Views
menu.

2. Choose Isometric. If your drawing is not centered choose from the Navigation Pad
toolbar. The lines that you drew earlier now appear in 3D.
3. Return to the Edit menu.
4. Choose Plan from the View pull-down menu in the Menu Bar to view your drawing in
plan view.
5. Choose Isometric to view the isometric view.
6. Choose Plan to view your drawing again in plan view. Switching between 2D and 3D
helps you better understand what you are drawing.
7. Press (Ctrl) + (S) on the keyboard to save the drawing.

Advanced 3D Viewing
Throughout this tutorial, you moved around the drawing using a few of DataCAD LT’s different
viewing methods. One of the most exciting features of DataCAD LT is viewing your work in 3D.
This section steps you through a few viewing exercises of 2D (orthographic or plan) and 3D.

To use advanced viewing techniques:

1. Choose GoTo View from the Utility menu.
2. Choose 3D Menus and then click on 3D Views.
152 | CHAPTER 6: TUTORIAL: MODELING

Figure 6.8: The View pull-down menu

Each time you start a new drawing, the Parallel and Perspective options in the 3D Views menu do
not do anything. They become active after you set the viewing parameters for each button. When
you selected Isometric when working with hatch earlier in the tutorial, you could choose Plan and
Parallel and view 3D Views. If you chose Perspective, nothing happened.
Perspective Viewing

To create a perspective view:

1. Press (PageUp) twice to zoom out.
2. Choose Set Persp. from the 3D Views menu. You are prompted to Select position of eye
point for perspective view.
3. Click at the lower left corner of the screen. A perspective view of the schoolhouse
appears.
 VIEWING YOUR DRAWING IN 3D | 153

Figure 6.9: A perspective view of the completed schoolhouse drawing

4. Choose Walk Through from the 3D Views menu. This displays a menu used for moving
around the 3D model. You can also use the Viewer toolbar (select Toolbars from the View
pull-down menu, then make sure Viewer is checked in the Toolbars dialog box) to display
options for walking through perspective views.
5. Choose Walk Back. You just stepped away from the model.
6. Experiment with a few of the other options in this menu.
7. Exit the 3D menu and choose Plan from the View pull-down menu on the Menu Bar to
view the drawing in plan.
8. Choose Perspective from the View pull-down menu on the Menu Bar to view the
perspective again.
9. Choose Isometric from the View pull-down menu on the Menu Bar to view the isometric.
10. Choose Plan from the View pull-down toolbar to view the plan view again.
Once you establish the viewing options, all of these options display a different image of the
drawing. This is an easy way to change the view of a drawing during any stage of a project.

Hidden Line Removal

As you become more experienced with DataCAD LT, you will be adding more complex 3D
elements to the drawing. The more you add to a drawing, the harder it can be to understand a 3D
view. The Hide option in the 3D Menus menu is used to hide the lines in your model that would
not be visible if it were an actual building. This 3D view can be saved as a layer and edited.

To hide lines in your model:

1. Choose 3D Menus from the Edit menu to enter DataCAD LT’s 3D menus: 3D Menus, 3D
Views, and 3D Entity.
2. Choose Perspective from the View pull-down menu on the Menu Bar to display the
perspective of the schoolhouse.
3. Choose Hide.
154 | CHAPTER 6: TUTORIAL: MODELING
4. Choose Begin. The hidden line removal generates a new image without most of the
unwanted lines.
5. Wait until the hidden line removal is finished, then choose New Layer. You are prompted
to Enter name of new layer to be added.
6. Type Hide1 and press (Enter). You are asked Do you want the new layer ON or OFF?
7. Choose Off. You will toggle this layer on later in the chapter. The hidden line removal is
complete and you have added a new layer to the drawing.
8. Choose Plan from the View pull-down menu to see the schoolhouse in plan view.
9. Choose Layers from the 3D Menus
10. Select Active Only from the Layers menu.
11. Choose Hide1. You’ll notice that there are still a few lines visible that should not be there,
such as the vertical lines above and below windows and doors. You can erase these lines
from this view without adversely affecting your drawing.
12. Choose Erase from the 3D Menus menu.
13. Choose Entity as the selection method for erasing lines.
14. Use your mouse to select any lines on the perspective that should not be there.
15. Return to the Utility menu. If you choose Perspective from the View pull-down menu on
the Menu Bar, you will see that the image is flat. This is because the hidden line removal
created a flat line drawing from the perspective. This drawing has no connection to the
original 3D model.

Figure 6.10: The perspective view after a hidden line removal

16. Choose GoTo View.

17. Choose 3DPlan.
18. Choose Plan to see the schoolhouse in plan view.
 VIEWING YOUR DRAWING IN 3D | 155
Creating Elevations
This section shows you how to create elevations from the work you have already completed. You
will use the same procedure discussed in the Hide section for creating your elevations.

To create elevations:
1. Choose Elevation from the View pull-down menu; then select Front to display the front
elevation of the schoolhouse. Alternatively, click on in the Projection Pad toolbar
2. Recalculate the extents of the drawing.

Figure 6.11: The front elevation of the schoolhouse

3. Choose 3D Menus from the Edit menu.

4. Choose Hide.
5. Choose Begin. The hidden line removal process generates a new image with everything
behind the front wall not shown.

Figure 6.12: The elevation after a hidden line removal

156 | CHAPTER 6: TUTORIAL: MODELING
6. Wait until the hidden line removal is completed. Then choose New Layer. You are
prompted to Enter name of new layer to be added.
7. Type FrntElev and press (Enter). You are asked Do you want the new layer ON or OFF?
8. Choose Off. You will turn this layer on later in the tutorial. The hidden line removal is
complete and a new layer has been added to the drawing.
9. Choose Plan from the View pull-down menu.
10. Choose 2D Menus to return to the Edit menu.
11. Choose Layers from the Utility menu.
12. Choose Active Only. You are prompted to Select layer to be the only layer on.
13. Choose Scroll Fwrd to view the end of the layer list.
14. Choose Elevation/Front from the View pull-down menu to display the schoolhouse front
elevation.
15. Return to the Edit menu.
16. Recalculate the extents of the drawing.
17. Choose Erase from the Edit menu.
18. Choose Entity as the selection method for erasing lines.
19. Select any lines on the front elevation that should not be there.
20. Return to the Utility menu.
Experiment with a few symbols, hatch patterns, etc.

Figure 6.13: The schoolhouse elevation with symbols and hatch

This completes the DataCAD LT Tutorial. For additional instruction, please contact DATACAD
LT LLC for information on training materials and support options or visit us online at
www.DataCAD LT.com.
 Before You Draw
There are many settings that you can use to customize how
you’ll draw in DataCAD LT. You can keep track of time In this chapter:
7
spent on a drawing and enter other administrative
information directly into the drawing. The Settings menu Setting the snap grid
has a variety of options to customize your work session, Setting the display grids
including setting scale and angle types, creating drawing
Creating and naming
passwords, setting cursor accuracy, adjusting the time delay
new layers
for creating autosave files, and editing the definitions of
DataCAD LT’s scale, angle, and distance lists. Moving between layers
Setting the active layer
You can also set the size and angle of both the snap grid and
the two display grids and choose whether the display grids Assigning colors to
layers
are visible. And, perhaps most importantly, you can create
and name new layers for your drawing, choose which of Entering project costing
these will be displayed, assign different colors for each, and information
even save them to a separate file. Selecting the scale type
and angle type
Creating passwords
158 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW

Managing Your Project

The Project Directory provides the basis for a comprehensive management system based on actual
computer usage and application. You can use Directory to review and enter project information
directly into the drawing file. You can also save the project information and time data to a text file
and even purge unused symbol information from your drawing. Simply click on Directory in the
Utility menu in the Menu Window or click on Directory in the Tools pull-down menu in the Menu
Bar to display the Directory dialog box. Even if you delete a symbol from your drawing, the
symbol’s name will still be listed in the Directory. To purge the names of all unused symbols from
your drawing, click on Purge Symbols in the Directory dialog box.
In the Billing Rate, Department Number, Phase Number, and Service Number text input boxes,
you can enter a number from 0 to 32,000. In the Project text input box, you can enter up to nine
alpha-numeric characters; in the Employee text input box, you can enter up to seven alpha
numeric characters.

Figure 7.1: The Directory dialog box

Setting Up Your Drawing Grids

There are three separate grids in DataCAD LT: a snap grid and two display grids. The snap grid
controls cursor movement while drawing. The two display grids, used primarily for visual
reference while drawing, are shown as a series of dots and help you create drawings quickly and
accurately. Each layer in DataCAD LT has its own snap and display grids as well as grid origin
and sizes. This lets you move quickly between layers without having to change grid sizes or toggle
grids on or off.
 SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING GRIDS | 159
Using the Snap Grid
Although the snap grid doesn’t display in the Drawing Area, it helps you draw more precisely. The
snap grid causes the cursor to jump (or snap) from one point of the snap grid to the next as you
move the mouse across the Drawing Area. See “Changing Grid Size,” “Setting the Snap Angle,”
and “Setting the Grid Angle” later in this chapter for more information about the snap grid.
Look at the X and Y coordinate display in the Coordinates/Hints toolbar to see the exact
coordinates of the cursor as you move it over the Drawing Area. With the snap grid toggled on,
notice the coordinate display reflects the cursor’s “jumps” from one invisible snap point to the
next across the snap grid. When you toggle the snap grid off, the cursor advances freely across the
Drawing Area, without snapping to grid points.

To toggle the snap grid on or off:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
Shortcut: Press (G) or (Shift) + (G) to access the Grids menu.

2. Click on Grid Snap.

Shortcut: Press (X) to toggle the snap grid on or off. Note that the “S” in SWOTHLUDFB
in the Status Panel toolbar appears in lowercase when snap grid is toggled off and
uppercase when it’s toggle on.

Using the Display Grids

There are two display grids in DataCAD LT. One is a series of white dots in the Drawing Area,
while the second display grid is a series of small yellow crosses. These grids are visual aids only
and can’t be printed. The display grid colors are white and yellow by default. However, you can
change these colors; see “Changing Display Grid Color” later in this chapter.

To toggle display grid 1 on or off:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Disp. Grid 1.
Shortcut: Press ([) to toggle Disp. Grid 1 on and off.

To toggle display grid 2 on or off:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Disp. Grid 2.
Shortcut: Press (]) to toggle Disp. Grid 2 on and off.

Changing Grid Size

The snap grid’s default setting is 4”, display grid 1’s is 4’-0”, and display grid 2’s is 16’-0”. You
can change any or all of these grid sizes for each layer in your drawing. To change a grid size for
another layer, simply change the active layer before following the step-by-step instructions in the
next paragraph.
160 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
To set the snap grid’s size for the active layer:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Grid Size in the Grids menu. The Grid Size menu appears.
3. Click on Set Snap in the Grid Size menu. A value menu appears.
3. Use the value menu to select a new value or click Custom; type a new snap grid value
and press (Enter).
Shortcut: Press (S) to set the snap grid size.

To set display grid 1’s size for the active layer:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Grid Size in the Grids menu. The Grid Size menu appears.
3. Click on Set Grid 1 in the Grid Size menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to select a new value, type a new display grid value, and press
(Enter). For more information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.

To set the display grid 2’s size for the active layer:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Grid Size in the Grids menu. The Grid Size menu appears.
3. Click on Set Grid 2 in the Grid Size menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to select a new value or click Custom; type a new display grid value
and press (Enter).
You can use the Custom option to enter a new value for any of these grid settings. For more
information on how to use the Custom option, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board”
chapter.

Changing Display Grid Color

You can change the color of both of the display grids; however, this setting is global, meaning the
colors will change on every layer in your drawing. You can’t set separate grid colors on each layer.

To change the color of display grid 1:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Grid Color in the Grids menu. The Grid Color menu appears.
3. Click on Set Grid 1 in the Grid Color menu. A color menu appears.
4. Choose a new color from the Grid Color menu. For more information on using color
menus, see “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
 SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING GRIDS | 161
To change the color of display grid 2:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Grid Color in the Grids menu. The Grid Color menu appears.
3. Click on Set Grid 2 in the Grid Color menu. A color menu appears.
4. Choose a new color from the Grid Color menu.

Setting the Snap Angle

The snap angle is the angle increment that you can draw lines at when ortho (plan) mode is on.
When you’re drawing a line or wall, once you click to place the first end point, you can move the
cursor around that point. Notice though that your cursor jumps (or snaps) in increments around
that first end point. These increments are set with the snap angle. With the snap angle set to 4, your
cursor moves in 90° increments. If you change the setting to 36, the cursor snaps to 10°
increments. If you toggle ortho (plan) mode off, your cursor will move freely and you’ll be able to
draw at any angle.
Shortcut: Press (O) to toggle ortho (plan) mode on or off. The “O” in SWOTHLUDFB in the Status
Panel toolbar will display as lowercase when ortho (plan) mode is off and uppercase when ortho
(plan) mode is toggled on.

To set the snap angle:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Snap Angle in the Grids menu. A value menu appears.
3. Use the value menu to set a new snap angle or type a new value and press (Enter). The
maximum setting for the snap angle is 36.

Setting the Grid Angle

Rotating the snap grid and both display grids can make it easier to draw in some situations. The
Angle option will rotate all three grids. You can’t rotate each grid separately.

To rotate all three grids:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Angle in the Grids menu. A value menu appears.
3. Choose or type a new angle value (from 0° to 90°) and press (Enter).

To rotate the grids to the same angle as an entity in your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Angle in the Grids menu. A value menu appears.
3. Click on Match: in the Angle menu.
4. Click on an entity to match its angle; the angle of this entity appears in the Attention
toolbar. Check the Attention toolbar as you choose different options; it will display the
angle associated with each of the options in step 5.
162 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
5. Decide which angle to use. To use this angle, right-click to exit the menu. To use the
inverse of this angle, click on Invert. To use the complementary angle of the original
angle, click on Complement. To use the supplementary angle of the original angle, click
on Supplement. Click on Original to go back to the original angle.
6. Right-click to return to the value menu and press (Enter) to accept the angle value. The
grid rotates to the Angle setting.

Setting the Grid Origin

You can change the origin for the snap grid and both display grids on each layer or for all layers
simultaneously. The grid origin is not the drawing origin, which is a fixed point. The grid origin is
changed on all layers, whether they’re toggled on (and currently being displayed) or not.

To change the grid origin on all layers in your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Grid Origin in the Grids menu. The Grid Origin menu appears.
3. Look at the Grid Origin menu to make sure Set All is toggled on.
4. Click anywhere in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to set the new grid origin.
The display grids realign themselves based on your new origin. For more information on
using coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board”
chapter.
To display the grids at their new origin, you may have to press (Esc) to refresh the Drawing Area.
You can press (Esc) at any time while you work in DataCAD LT to refresh your drawing. Use
object snapping to more precisely choose the point in your drawing for the new grid origin. See
“Object Snapping” in the “Drawing Tools” chapter.

To change the grid origin on the active layer only:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Grids. The Grids menu appears.
2. Click on Grid Origin in the Grids menu. The Grid Origin menu appears.
3. Look at the Grid Origin menu to make sure Set All is toggled off.
4. Click anywhere in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to set the new grid origin.
The display grids realign themselves based on your new origin.
5. Change the grid origins on other layers in your drawing if necessary. Just press (Tab) to
change the active layer and repeat steps 2 through 4.

Working With Layers

You can organize your drawing into groups (or layers) of related information to help increase your
editing speed and productivity. By organizing the information on each layer according to type or
content, you can display only the information that you need for the current drawing task. See
“Planning Layers” and “Sample Project” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for an introduction to
planning your layering system.
 WORKING WITH LAYERS | 163

Figure 7.2: The Layers menu

Creating Layers
When you create a new drawing, only one layer exists, named Layer001. But you can create up to
32,768 layers in every drawing, either one at a time or in groups.
Save time when you create new drawings by using a default drawing that contains all the layer
names and settings you’d normally use. Your new drawings will automatically have all the layers
in your default drawing and you can start drawing right away. See “Creating a New Drawing
Using a Default Drawing” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.

To create layers in your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
Shortcut: Press (L) or (Shift) + (L) to access the Layers menu.

2. Click on New Layer in the Layers menu. A value menu appears.

3. Use the value menu to enter the number of new layers you’d like to create or type a value
and press (Enter). The number of layers created appears in the Attention toolbar, along
with the total number of layers now in your drawing.

More About Creating Layers

The active layer in your drawing acts as a seed layer for any new layers you create. When you
create a new layer, it takes on the settings of the active layer. To save time and avoid redefining
settings for each new layer, change the active layer to the layer in your drawing whose settings
most closely match those you want your new layer to have.
164 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
Each layer has several independent settings that you can customize. These include grid size, grid
angle, whether the snap grid is toggled on or off, whether ortho (plan) mode is toggled on or off,
and layer color. See “Setting Up Your Drawing Grids” earlier in this chapter for more information
on grid settings.
A seed layer is a layer that is used as a basis for subsequent layers. For example, you might have a
basic perimeter plan of a multi-story building you’re drawing. This plan might contain the
perimeter and bearing walls, the columns, the column centerlines, and the common core elements,
each on a different layer. These layers could be used as seed layers for the partitioning layout on
the third floor; in turn, that could be used as the seed layer for the reflected ceiling plan or HVAC
layout for the third floor. Any layers you want to use as seed layers should be kept as generic and
uncluttered as possible.

Setting the Active Layer

The active layer is the layer on which you’re currently drawing. To quickly check which layer is
your active layer, check the Status Panel toolbar.

To change the active layer:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Set Active in the Layers menu. A list of layers appears.
3. Click on a layer in the list to make it your active layer or type the layer name and press
(Enter). The active layer changes and the active layer name is updated in the Status Panel
toolbar.
Shortcut: You can also use the keyboard to change the active layer. Press (Tab) to scroll
through all the layers in your drawing that are toggled on. To scroll backward through the
layers, press (Shift) + (Tab). Notice the active layer name in the Status Panel toolbar
changes as you scroll through the layers.

To change the active layer and simultaneously toggle all other layers off:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Active Only in the Layers menu. A list of layers appears.
3. Click on a layer in the list to make it your active layer or type the layer name and press
(Enter). The active layer name is updated in the Status Panel toolbar.

Displaying Layers
One of the most useful things about using layers in your drawings is that you can view only those
layers that you need at any given time. For instance, you don’t need to see the site plan while
you’re working on a reflected ceiling plan. In DataCAD LT, you simply toggle layers on to display
them or off to hide them.
You can toggle certain layers on to view them in the Drawing Area. You can then use go-to-views
to save that view of your drawing. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter.
 WORKING WITH LAYERS | 165
To toggle a layer on or off:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears. The Menu
Window displays up to 15 layer names at one time; when there are more than 15 layers in
your drawing, options to scroll forward (Scroll Fwrd) and scroll backward (Scroll Back)
through the list are available.
2. Click on On/Off in the Layers menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears.
3. Click on the layer you want to toggle on or off. You can’t toggle all layers off in
DataCAD LT. If the active layer is the only one toggled on, you can’t toggle it off until
you make a different layer active. If there’s at least one other layer toggled on besides the
active layer, you can toggle the active layer off; the next layer in the list automatically
becomes the active layer.

To toggle on all the layers in your drawing simultaneously:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers.
2. Click on All On in the Layers menu. In the Message toolbar, you are asked Are you sure
you want to turn on all layers?
3. Click on Yes. All layers are toggled on.

More About Displaying Layers

Refresh speed should also be considered when you plan and create the layers in your drawing.
While your computer’s speed determines the time it takes to refresh the display of your drawing,
you can dramatically increase refresh speed using some of the Layers options.

Shortcut: There are many reasons why you may want to refresh the display of your drawing during
your work session. Press (Esc) at any time to refresh your drawing.

As you toggle each layer on, DataCAD LT can automatically update (or refresh) your drawing in
the Drawing Area. To do this, toggle the layer refresh option (Layer Ref.) on in the Layers menu.
To quickly toggle several layers on without waiting for your drawing to refresh after each layer,
make sure Layer Ref. is toggled off before you begin toggling layers on. After you’ve finished
toggling layers on, press (Esc) to refresh the display of your drawing.
Each time you zoom in or out on your drawing or change the view (two things you’ll be doing
frequently), DataCAD LT must refresh the display of your drawing to reflect the change. Since
only those layers that are actually displayed are refreshed, toggling on only those layers that are
necessary for your current drawing task will speed up refresh rates. This is one of the many
reasons why planning and maintaining a good layer structure is important.
Additionally, controlling the number of entities on each layer will increase refresh rates. A drawing
containing many layers with a few entities on each will refresh faster than a drawing containing a
few layers with many entities on each. In other words, you can edit ten layers containing 100 lines
faster than one layer containing 1,000 lines.

Locking Layers
You can lock a layer to prevent others from editing the entities on that layer. In the list of layers in
the Menu Window, a line appears through the layer name of a locked layer.
166 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
You can’t modify the layer in any way when it’s locked. If you try to edit a locked layer, a
message saying that no entities are selected appears in the Message Area. The layer lock status is
saved with the layer when you export or import layers.

To lock a layer:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Lock in the Layers menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears in the
Menu Window.
3. Click on the layer you want to lock in the list or type the layer name and press (Enter).
DataCAD LT draws a line through that layer’s name; if you make that layer the active
layer, a small “X” appears over the layer color box in the Status Panel toolbar. The layer
can’t be edited until it’s unlocked.

To unlock a layer:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Lock in the Layers menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears.
3. Click on the layer you want to unlock in the list or type the layer name and press (Enter).
The line through the layer name disappears; the layer can now be edited.

Renaming Layers
When you create new layers, DataCAD LT assigns generic names to the layers in numerical order,
such as Layer001, Layer002, etc. You can either rename the layers when you create them or
rename them at some other time. Layer names support extended characters.

To rename an existing layer:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Rename in the Layers menu. A list of layers in your drawing appears in the
Menu Window.
3. Click on the layer you want to rename.
4. Type a new layer name (up to 88 characters) and press (Enter). You can use spaces;
however, you cannot use the following characters in layer names: , . * + / \ [ ] ; : .

Changing Layer Color

You can assign a color to a layer, so that all new entities you create on that layer appear in that
color. Assigning a different color to each layer gives you an easy way to tell at a glance what layer
an entity is on. If you assign yellow to your Walls layer, all entities drawn on the Walls layer will
display in yellow. By default, white is the color assigned to all layers.
When you change a layer’s color, entities already on that layer will not change to the new color. To
change these entities’ colors, you must use the Change menu. For more information, see
“Changing Entity Attributes” in the “Editing Drawings” chapter.
 WORKING WITH LAYERS | 167
To change the color assigned to a layer:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Color in the Layers menu. A color menu appears. See “Color Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter for more information on how to use them.
3. Click on a color in the list or use the color menu options Custom or Match to assign a
new color to the layer.
Shortcut: To change the color of the active layer, press (K) to scroll through available
colors; press (Shift) + (K) to scroll backwards through the color menu.

Viewing a Layer
When you’re working with your layers, you may need to temporarily view a specific layer.
Perhaps you need to quickly verify the contents of a layer before you toggle it on.

To temporarily view a layer:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on View Layer in the Layers menu. See “View Layer Menu Options” for more
information on these settings.
3. Make sure Extents, Layer Ref., and Border are toggled on in the View Layer menu.
4. Click on Select in the View Layer menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears in
the Menu Window.
5. Click on the layer you’d like to view or type the layer name and press (Enter). The
contents of that layer appear in the Drawing Area.
6. Press (Esc) when you’re finished viewing layers. This will refresh the Drawing Area and
return to the original view of your drawing, before you entered the View Layer menu.

View Layer Menu Options

Select Lists the layers in your drawing; click on the layer name in the list or type the layer name and
press (Enter).
Extents Toggle on to display the layer at its extents; toggle off to display the layer at the current scale.
Layer Ref. Toggle on to refresh the Drawing Area as you select each layer.
Border Toggle on to use an invisible border to display each layer in.
Image Size Sets the percentage of the Drawing Area to use to display layers; only available when border is
toggled on.
Deleting Layers and Their Contents
When a layer is no longer useful to your project, you can erase only the contents of the layer or
delete the actual layer as well as its contents.

To erase the contents of a layer:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Clear Layer in the Layers menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears
in the Menu Window.
168 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
3. Click on the layer that contains the entities you want to erase or type the layer name. You
are asked Are you sure you want to erase: <layer name>.
4. Click on Yes to erase the layer’s contents. The layer itself is not deleted and isn’t changed
in any other way. Click on No to exit the Clear Layer menu without erasing the layer’s
contents.

To delete a layer and its contents from the drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers.
Warning: As a precaution, use Export Layer to save a copy of the layer before you delete
it. If you find you still need the layer later, you can then use Import Layer to copy it back
into your drawing.

2. Click on Delete Layer in the Layers menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing
appears.
3. Click on the layer that you want to delete or type the layer name. The prompt Are you
sure you want to delete layer <layer name> appears in the Message toolbar.
4. Click on Yes to delete the layer. Click on No to exit the Delete Layer menu without
deleting a layer. You cannot delete the active layer.

Selecting Layers Without Using Layer Names

You may have noticed the Match option in several of the Layers submenus. Match is used to select
a layer by selecting an entity on that layer instead of having to find the correct layer name in a list.
You can set the active layer, move entities from one layer to another, or point DataCAD LT to a
specific layer, all without having to remember layer names.
You can use Match with any of the following Layers menu options: On/Off, Set Active, Active
Only, Lock, Rename, Clear Layer, Delete Layer, View Layer/Select. It is also available when using
To Layer in the Move or Copy menus or when using Layer Search.

To set the active layer using Match:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Set Active in the Layers menu. The Set Active menu appears.
3. Click Match in the Set Active menu. You are prompted to Select entity on layer to match.
4. Click on an entity in the Drawing Area to select the layer it is on. The active layer setting
is changed to that layer.

To move entities to another layer using Match:

1. Go to the Edit menu and click on Move.
2. Click on To Layer in the Move menu. You are prompted to Select layer to move to in the
Message toolbar. The To Layer option is only available if your drawing has more than
one layer. See “Creating Layers” earlier in this chapter for more information on creating
additional layers.
 WORKING WITH LAYERS | 169
3. Click Match in the To Layer menu. You are prompted to Select entity to match in the
Message toolbar.
4. Click on an entity in the Drawing Area to select the layer to move the entity to. You are
prompted to Select entity to move in the Message toolbar.
5. Click on the entity you want to move. The entity is moved to the layer you selected in
step 4.

To point DataCAD LT to a specific layer using Match:

1. Indicate the Walls layer. When drawing doors or windows on a different layer from walls,
you must tell DataCAD LT which layer your walls are on so they can be cut properly.
Make the Doors layer your active layer and click on Architect in the Edit menu. See
“Setting the Active Layer” earlier in this chapter for more information.
2. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu.
3. Toggle Layer Search on in the Door Swing menu. If it’s already toggled on, toggle it off
and then back on again to display the list of layers in your drawing.
4. Respond to the prompt to Select layer to search for walls in the Message toolbar. Click on
Match at the bottom of the list of layers.
5. Respond to the prompt to Select entity on layer to match in the Message toolbar. Click on
a wall in your drawing to select the layer that your walls are drawn on.
6. Draw your door. The wall will be cut properly on the Walls layer. This same procedure
can be used with the Windows or Cut Wall options. For details on how to draw doors and
windows, see the “Drawing Walls, Windows, and Doors” chapter.

Searching for Layers

You may have noticed the Filter option in several of the Layers submenus. Filter is used to search
for layers with similar names. For example, if you’ve put your plumbing and electrical drawings
on separate layers, you might have layers named 1FLPLUMB, 2FLPLUMB, 3FLPLUMB,
1FLELECT, 2FLELECT, and 3FLELECT. To search for a plumbing layer, you’d use Filter and
enter ???plumb. Or you could search for first floor layers by entering 1fl* or 1fl?????.
Use an asterisk (*) in place of any number of characters and a question mark (?) in place of each
character you’re unsure of. The filter disregards any characters following an asterisk. Therefore, if
you enter *plumb to search for plumbing layers, DataCAD LT recognizes only * as the search
parameter and all of your layers will be displayed.

To search for layers:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on the Layers option you want to use (for example, On/Off).
3. Click on Filter in the Layers option submenu to toggle Filter on.
4. Type the search parameter, including any wildcard character(s), for the layers you want to
find. Your search results appear in a list in the Menu Window.
5. Choose the layer(s) you want to use.
170 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
More About Searching for Layers
DataCAD LT groups layers with affixes (prefixes or suffixes) similar to what you entered. If your
search doesn’t find the layer you want, you can scroll through these groups to find the appropriate
layer using the Filter Back and Filter Fwd. options that appear at the bottom of the Menu Window,
below your search results.
DataCAD LT remembers the last search you did using Filter. When you next use Filter, the search
parameter you used last appears in the Attention toolbar and your search results appear in the
Menu Window.

Saving and Loading Layers

You may occasionally need to copy a layer from one drawing to another, you may simply want to
save a copy of a layer before you delete it in case you find you need it again, or perhaps you’d like
to save a hidden line removal of your model to a layer file to avoid increasing your drawing file
size. The Export Layer and Import Layer options in the Layers menu can help you do all of these
things. Export Layer saves a layer to a layer (.DLF) file; Import Layer pastes a layer file into a
drawing.

To save a layer:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
2. Click on Export Layer in the Layers menu. A list of layers appears in the Menu Window.
3. Click on the layer you want to save. A dialog box appears.

Figure 7.3: Export Layer produces this dialog box

4. Type the name of layer file and click on Save or press (Enter). DataCAD LT saves the
layer with a .DLF extension. If you already have a layer file by that name, DataCAD LT
prompts you to verify that you want to overwrite the existing file (replace the old version
of the file with this new one). Press (Enter) to overwrite the file. You are returned to the
Layers menu. By default, files are saved in your DataCAD LT\Layer Files folder. You can
change the folder that layer files are saved to using the Pathnames tab in the
Tools/Program Preferences Configure DataCAD LT Settings dialog box.
 WORKING WITH LAYERS | 171
To load a layer into a drawing:
1. Go to your drawing and change the active layer to the layer that you want to copy the
layer file onto.
2. Go to the Utility menu and click on Layers. The Layers menu appears.
3. Click on Import Layer in the Layers menu. You are asked Delete active layer?” in the
Message toolbar.
4. Click on Yes in the Menu Window to erase anything on the active layer. Click on No to
add the entities on the layer you will load to the entities already on your active layer. A
dialog box appears, listing all your layer files.
Warning: If you choose Yes to delete the active layer, you cannot restore those entities.

5. Click on the layer file you want to load or type the filename in the File name input box.

Figure 7.4: Import Layer produces this dialog box

6. Click on Open or press (Enter). The layer file is copied to the active layer in your
drawing.

More About Naming a Layer File

Just as you planned how to name the layers in your drawing, you should also plan a logical, useful
naming scheme for your layer files. To keep track of where the layer came from, the layer
filename should be as similar as possible to the name of the drawing file from which it originated.
One way to name layer files is to use the drawing filename followed by a descriptive name for the
layer. For example, if you saved the layer that contained a hidden line removal from the drawing
file HOUSE.AEC, you might name the layer file HOUSE_HL.DLF.

Using Layer Sets

In the Layers menu, Layer Sets replaces the layer utility macro from DataCAD LT versions 10 and
prior. Layer Sets controls settings on a per drawing basis and retains them with the drawing file.

To create a layer set:

1. Select Layers from the Utility menu. Then choose Layer Sets from the Layers menu. The
Layer Sets menu appears.
172 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
2. Click on Create and toggle on the options you want in the current layer set.
All Layers Creates a layer set with all layers.
On Layers Creates a layer set with only the layers that are on.
Views Includes saved views in the layer set.
Details Includes multi-scale plot details in the layer set.

3. Click on Begin. A dialog box appears so that you can enter the name of the layer set you
want to create.

Figure 7.5: Supply a name for the Layer Set file you want to create

4. Click in the File name input box, supply a name, and click Open or press (Enter).

To load a layer set:

1. Select Layers from the Utility menu. Then choose Layer Sets from the Layers menu. The
Layer Sets menu appears.
2. Select Load from the Layer Sets menu. A dialog box appears, prompting you to enter the
name of the layer set you want to load.

Figure 7.6: Select a .DLS file to load

3. Select the layer set you want to load from the *.DLS files in the list and click on Open or
press (Enter).
 WORKING WITH LAYERS | 173
To delete a layer set:
1. Select Layers from the Utility menu. Then choose Layer Sets from the Layers menu. The
Layer Sets menu appears.
2. Select Delete Set from the Layer Sets menu. A dialog box appears, prompting you to
enter the name of the layer set you want to delete.

Figure 7.7: Select the .DLS file you want to delete

3. Select the layer set you want to delete from the *.DLS files in the list and click on Open
or press (Enter). If you want to delete another layer set, repeat this step. If you do not
want to delete another layer set, click Cancel.

Assigning Materials for a Layer

You can assign materials on a per-layer basis to control your rendered drawing when you use the
Object Viewer or export your file to o2c format. This global setting is stored in the DCADLT.INI
file.

To define materials on a per-layer basis:

1. Select Rendering Settings from the View pull-down menu. The Rendering Settings by
Layer dialog box appears.
174 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW

Figure 7.8: The Rendering Settings by Layer dialog box

2. Click on the Layer button.

3. Select a layer from the pull-down list in the Layer area of the dialog box.
4. Make changes in other portions of the dialog box to control the appearance of the
rendering. For more information about rendering settings, see “Using the o2c-based
Object Viewer” in the “Viewing Your Model” chapter.

Setting Z-Base and Z-Height for a Layer

Each layer can have different Z-base and Z-height settings.

To specify Z-base and Z-height settings for each layer:

1. Select Settings from the Utility menu. The Settings menu appears.
2. Toggle on Z By Layer. The Z-base and Z-height will be remembered for each layer.

Using the Layer Manager

The Layer Manager gives you control over each layer’s number, status (on, off, locked, and
unlocked), color, and name. It displays the number of entities on each layer in the Count column.
 USING THE LAYER MANAGER | 175

Figure 7.9: The Layer Manager dialog box

Accessing Layer Manager

To open the Layer Manager, use one of these options:

• Select Layers from the Utility menu and click on Manage in the Layersmenu. The Layer
Manager dialog box appears.
• Or select Layer Manager from the Tools pull-down menu. The Layer Manager dialog box
appears.
• Or use the keyboard shortcut (L) for Layer and (S8) for Manage. The Layer Manager
dialog box appears.
• Or use the keyboard shortcut (Ctrl) + (L). The Layer Manager dialog box appears.
• Or click on the active layer’s name in the status window.
Initially, the only active buttons are All On, New, Ok, and Cancel. When you highlight the layer
you want to work with, other buttons will become active.
176 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
Changing a Layer’s Number
To change a layer’s number:
1. Click on the number of the layer you want to change. The layer you selected is
highlighted in the Layer Manager dialog box. Notice that in addition to All On and New,
the Set Active, ActiveOnly, Erase, Delete, MoveUp, and MoveDn buttons are active.
Hint: To select several successive layers (for example, layers 3 through 6) click on the
first one, press down and hold (Shift), and click on the last layer. Release the (Shift) key
when you have highlighted the successive layers you want to work with in the Layer
Manager dialog box.

To select several layers that are not in consecutive order (for example, layers 3, 5, and 7),
you select the first one, press down and hold (Ctrl), and click on the other layers. Release
the (Ctrl) key when you have highlighted the nonconsecutive layers you want to work
with in the Layer Manager dialog box.
2. Click on the MoveUp or MoveDn button until you are satisfied with the layer’s new
position. Alternatively, you can use the mouse to reposition the layer with drag and drop.
Just click on the number, drag your mouse, and release the left mouse button when you
reach the desired new number to dynamically reposition the layer.
Hint: When you make changes to the position of the layers by using the MoveUp or
MoveDn buttons or the drag-and-drop method, DataCAD LT automatically inserts a
checkmark in the Save new layer order box. If this box does not contain a checkmark,
your changes will not be saved and the layers will return to their original positions when
you leave the Layer Manager dialog.

3. Click on the Apply or Ok button when you finish rearranging the layers. This saves your
layers in the new arrangement and deactivates the Revert button. When you click the Ok
button, the Layer Manager dialog box disappears and you return to the drawing window.

To return the layers you moved to their original positions, use one of these options:
• Click on the Revert button if this option is available. If you selected Apply, the Revert
button will not be active. If you selected Ok, the Layer Manager dialog box will not be
displayed on your screen.
• Or click on the Undo arrow once if the Layer Manager dialog box is not on your screen to
return to the positions that were last active.
• Or press (Ctrl) + (Z) for Undo if the Layer Manager dialog box is not on your screen.

Sorting the Layers

Use Layer Manager to sort your drawing’s layers by clicking on the column titles. Clicking the
same column title twice will reverse the sorting order. For example, you may want to sort the
layers alphabetically A-Z by the information in the Name column. If you click the Name column a
second time, the layers will appear alphabetically Z-A.
Hint: Sorting your layers by clicking on the column titles does not automatically place a checkmark
in the Save new layer order box. If you want to save the layers in the newly sorted order, make
sure you click in the Save new layer order box so that a checkmark appears before you exit from
the Layer Manager dialog box.
If you just want to quickly check the on/off or lock/unlock status of the layers,
USINGyou may not
THE LAYER want | 177
MANAGER

to store the layers in that order. In these cases, you probably wouldn’t want to put a checkmark in
the Save new layer order box. Leaving the box unchecked means that DataCAD LT will return the
layers to the order they were in when you last opened the Layer Manager dialog box.

Figure 7.10: Layers sorted alphabetically

This is what happens when you use the column titles to sort your layers:
• LayerNum: Layers are arranged in numerical order. Clicking LayerNum again reverses the
layers.
• On: Layers that are On will appear first. Clicking On again makes the Off layers appear first.
• Lock: Layers that are locked will appear first. Clicking Lock again makes the unlocked layers
appear first.
• Color: Layers will be sorted from white through the darkest shades. Clicking Color again will
sort layers from darkest shades to white.
• Name: Layers will be sorted alphabetically from A to Z. Clicking Name again will sort layers
from Z to A.
• Count: Layers will be sorted numerically from the smallest to the largest number. Clicking
Count again will sort layers from the largest to the smallest numbers.
Hint: Count indicates the number of entities contained on a particular layer. You can sort by count
to quickly find the layers that do not contain any drawing entities. This makes it easy for you to
delete empty layers from your file.
 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
178 Changing Layer Settings
Each layer has different settings that you can change. These settings are on/off, lock/unlock, color,
and name.

On/Off
A solid yellow light bulb in the On column indicates that a layer is on; a clear bulb means that a
layer is off. The green bulb designates the active layer. Only one bulb in the layer list can be green
(meaning that layer is on and active); however, any number of bulbs may be yellow (on) or clear
(off).

To change the on/off setting for one layer:

1. Click on the light bulb of the layer you want to change. If the bulb was originally yellow,
it changes to clear and vice versa.
2. Click on Apply if you want to make other changes in the Layer Manager or click Ok to
return to the drawing window, where your change is in effect.

To change the on/off setting for several layers:

1. Highlight the layers you want to change by using (Shift) for successive or (Ctrl) for
nonconsecutive layers.
2. Click on the light bulb for one of the highlighted layers. All the bulbs in the highlighted
layers are changed to the same setting.

Hint: This is true even if some of the bulbs in the layers you selected were on and others
were off. For example, if you highlighted layers 3 (on), 5 (off), and 6 (on) before you
clicked on the bulb in layer 3, DataCAD LT would switch all three bulbs off.

3. Click on Apply if you want to make other changes in the Layer Manager or click Ok to
return to the drawing window, where all your changes are in effect.

Figure 7.11: Changing the On/Off status of a layer

To turn all the layers on:

1. Click the All On button.
2. Click on Apply if you want to make other changes in the Layer Manager or click Ok to
return to the drawing window, where all the layers are on.
 USING THE LAYER MANAGER | 179
To designate the active layer:
1. Select the layer you want to change to active status.
2. Click on the Set Active button. The bulb for the highlighted layer changes to green and its
name is underlined. The bulb for the layer that was previously active changes to yellow
(on) and its name is no longer underlined.
3. Click on Apply if you want to make other changes in the Layer Manager or click Ok to
return to the drawing window. Notice that the layer you selected is active in the status
box in your drawing window.

To display only the layer you designate as active:

1. Highlight the layer you want to designate as active.
2. Click the ActiveOnly button. The highlighted layer’s bulb is green (indicating it is on and
active); all other bulbs are clear (off). The layer’s name is also underlined.
3. Click on Apply if you want to make other changes in the Layer Manager or click Ok to
return to the drawing window. Notice that the active layer is the only one that appears in
the drawing window.
Lock/Unlock
You can edit unlocked layers, which are designated by an open padlock. Locked layers (red,
closed padlock) are protected and cannot be edited.

To lock or unlock one layer:

1. Click on the padlock you want to change. DataCAD LT changes that layer’s lock status
accordingly.
2. Make changes to other layers in the Layer Manager if necessary. Remember that if you
locked a layer, DataCAD LT will not allow you to make any changes to it.
3. Click Ok to return to the drawing window.

To lock or unlock several layers simultaneously:

1. Highlight successive layers by using (Shift) or several nonconsecutive layers by using
(Ctrl) to select the padlocks you want to change.
2. Click on a padlock in one of the selected layers. If the padlock you clicked was originally
unlocked, DataCAD LT will lock it and all the others in the layers you selected in step 1.
3. Click Ok to return to the drawing window.

Color
In the Layer Manager, the color of each layer appears in a square swatch. Changing the color that
applies to entities on a layer is easy. Keep in mind that the color change will apply only to the
entities you create on that layer; the new color doesn’t affect the entities that were on the layer.
180 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
To change the color of a layer:
1. Click on the square swatch in the Layer Manager for the layer you want to change. The
Color Palette dialog box appears.

Figure 7.12: The Color Palette dialog box

2. Select a new color from the sample swatches in the palette.

3. Click OK. Notice that the new color you selected appears on the swatch in the Layer
Manager.
If you do not like any of the available colors, you can easily mix your own.
Caution: Make sure that the color you want to edit is unique among the layers in your drawing. If
several layers use the same color, change the selected layer’s color as shown in the previous steps
so that it is different from the others. If the color of the layer you want to change is not unique, all
other layers sharing that color will also be changed in the editing process.

If you want to mix your own color for a layer, refer to the section on “Customizing Colors” at the
end of this chapter.

Name
DataCAD LT allows you to use up to 88 characters (including spaces) for meaningful layer names.
You can change a layer’s name in several ways with the Layer Manager. When you click on a
layer’s name once, that layer is highlighted or selected; however, you cannot edit the name.
 USING THE LAYER MANAGER | 181
To change a layer’s name use one of these methods:
• Double-click on the layer name you want to change, type the new name (up to 88
characters long), and press (Enter). The new name appears on the list in the Layer
Manager.

Figure 7.13: Double-clicking on the layer name lets you type a new name

• Press (Enter) when a layer is highlighted, type the new name, and press (Enter).
• Press (F2) when a layer is highlighted, type the new name, and press (Enter).

Using Other Layer Functions

With the Layer Manager, you can add new layers, erase all the entities on a layer, delete a layer, or
revert to previous layer settings. To access these basic functions, you use the buttons on the right
side of the layer list.

Figure 7.14: Buttons to the right of the layer list show options for changing settings

Add New Layer

The Layer Manager makes it easy to add new layers to your drawing. While you add the layer, you
also set its name, on/off and lock/unlock status, and color. Initially, the new layer will not contain
any drawing entities; those accumulate in the Count column as you use the layer.
182 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
To add a new layer to your drawing file:
1. Highlight the layer that should appear before or above the new one you are creating.
DataCAD LT adds the new layer after the highlighted one. For example, if you want the
new Brick layer to come before Stucco, you would highlight Metal.

Figure 7.15: Highlight the layer above the position where you want the new layer to appear.

2. Click on the New button to the right of the layer list. The Create New Layer(s) dialog box
appears and you are prompted to Enter the number of new layers to create.

Figure 7.16: The Create New Layer(s) dialog box

3. Input the number of layers you want to add to your drawing and press (Enter) or click Ok.
The new layer appears above the one you initially highlighted.

Figure 7.17: The new layer appears below the layer you highlighted in step 1.

4. Type a name for the new layer and press (Enter). Notice that Count contains a zero
because there are no entities in this layer yet.
 USING THE LAYER MANAGER | 183

Figure 7.18: Type the new layer’s name.

5. Continue adding new layers by repeating steps 1 through 4.

6. Click in the box at the bottom of the Layer Manager to put a checkmark, indicating that
you want DataCAD LT to save the new layer order. When you are finished adding new
layers to your drawing file, click on Apply (if you want to continue working in the Layer
Manager) or Ok (if you do want to leave the Layer Manager and return to your drawing
window now).

Figure 7.19: Check the “Save new layer order” box.

Erase Entities from a Layer

You can quickly eliminate all the entities on a layer. This can help you save time when you want to
make major changes on a particular layer of your drawing.

To erase entities from a layer:

1. Highlight the layer that contains the entities you want to eliminate.
2. Click on the Erase button to the right of the layer list. A Warning box appears.

Figure 7.20: Warning box

3. Click on the Yes button or press (Enter). DataCAD LT puts an eraser in the Count column
to signify that you are eliminating all of the entities on that particular layer.
184 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
Hint: The entities will be erased from your drawing when you click Apply or Ok (to exit the
Layer Manager dialog box), but DataCAD LT gives you a chance to change your mind and
keep those entities. To change your mind, simply select either the Revert or Cancel
button.

Figure 7.21: An eraser appears in the Count column to show that entities will be erased from that
particular layer.

4. Click on Apply if you want to have the entities erased while you continue working in the
Layer Manager. Click Ok if you want to have the entities erased and return to your
drawing window. DataCAD LT erases the entities on the layer.

Figure 7.22: Entities were eliminated from the layer.

Delete a Layer
You can eliminate an entire layer from your drawing. It doesn’t matter whether the layer contains
hundreds of entities or none.

To delete a layer:
1. Highlight the layer you want to eliminate from your drawing file.
2. Click on the Delete button to the right of the layer list. A warning box appears, giving you
a chance to change your mind.

Figure 7.23: Warning box

3. Select Yes or press (Enter) to indicate that you want to continue. The layer disappears
from the list.
Oh No! What if you accidentally deleted the wrong layer? Don’t panic because DataCAD
LT gives you two more chances to change your mind. You can click Revert to restore the
layer immediately; the other alternatives are to select Cancel or use the Undo function.
 USING THE LAYER MANAGER | 185
Changing an Incorrect Layer Setting
There are three ways for you to change settings if you made a mistake in the Layer Manager
dialog box. Depending on when you notice the mistake, you can select Revert or Cancel or use the
Undo button if you don’t catch the error until you leave the Layer Manager dialog box.

Revert to Previous Settings in the Layer Manager

If you accidentally do something to a layer (such as eliminate all its entities, turn a layer off, or
eliminate the layer entirely), you can go back to the previous settings with Revert.
Revert is available after you do something on the Layer Manager’s list and only applies to what
you just did. For example, if you change a layer’s status to Off and then give the layer a new
name, Revert will give you a chance to return to the older name but will not turn the status to On.
If Revert is unavailable (the button is gray), it’s too late to change your mind about a previous
decision.

Cancel
If Revert is not available (the button is gray) or you notice a previous error (such as eliminating all
the entities in the wrong layer) you made during the current Layer Manager session, you can use
the Cancel button. Selecting Cancel closes the Layer Manager and puts you back in the drawing
window, ignores all the changes you made since you entered the dialog box, and returns all layer
settings to those that existed previously in your drawing file.
Cancel affects all the settings you changed in the Layer Manager dialog box since you opened it.
You can’t selectively eliminate some changes and retain others. If selecting Cancel eliminated
settings that you wanted to keep, you must reopen the Layer Manager dialog box, make the
changes again, and save them when you exit the dialog by choosing the Ok button.

Undo
Use the Undo arrow on your button bar or select Undo Layer Manager from the Edit pull-down
menu if the Layer Manager dialog box is not active on your screen. This eliminates all the things
you changed the last time you used the Layer Manager dialog box. If you restored your old layer
settings with Undo but want to keep them after all, just click on the Redo button or select Redo
Layer Manager from the Edit pull-down menu.

Exiting from the Layer Manager

The buttons on the bottom of the Layer Manager dialog box give you several exit options:

Figure 7.24: Exit options

• Apply. When you click on this button, the changes you make in the layer list take effect in
your drawing while the Layer Manager dialog box remains open.
• Save new layer order. This check box is available if any of your changes involved the
original layer order or if you added or deleted layers. By default, when this box is initially
active, it contains a checkmark. Remember to uncheck this box if you want to go back to the
layer order that was in effect before you opened the Layer Manager.
186 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
• Cancel. This disregards everything you did since opening the Layer Manager dialog box.
Clicking this button returns you to the drawing window and retains your layer settings to
those that were in effect before you opened the Layer Manager.
• Ok. Clicking this button returns you to your drawing screen and makes all the layer setting
changes take effect in your drawing file.

Customizing Drawing Settings

Passwords, scale and angle types, and a variety of display options can be set and modified at any
time during your work session.

Setting a Password
A password can provide a level of security to individual drawing files. DataCAD LT’s password
option requires that the password be entered correctly to open the drawing.
Warning: There is no way to circumvent this setting if you forget your password. Use a password
you can easily remember or store a reminder of it in a safe place.

To set a password for your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Password in the Settings menu. A Password dialog box appears.
3. Enter a password (from 1 to 11 characters long) and press (Enter) or click OK. DataCAD
LT prompts you to Verify password by re-entering.
The password is case-sensitive. If you used “12mydrawing” as the password, you cannot
open the file with “12Mydrawing,” 12MyDrawing,” or any other combination of upper-
and/or lower-case letters. The file can only be opened if you use “12mydrawing” as the
password.

4. Type the same password again and press (Enter) or click OK. The password is set. Make
sure you save your drawing before closing it so that the new password is saved with the
drawing file.
5. Repeat these steps if you need to change the password.
After you save and close a drawing file that is password-protected, it can only be opened if you
know the password. Even though you can see the drawing in the Preview Window of the Enter
name of drawing file to open dialog box, you cannot open it without the password.
You can remove the password from a file after you open it. Just select Password from the Settings
menu and press (Enter) twice. This enters a blank password.

Setting Scale and Angle Types

You can change the scale and angle types your drawing uses. When you change the scale type, all
associative dimensions in your drawing will be updated.

To change the scale type:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings.
2. Click on Scale Type in the Settings menu.
 CUSTOMIZING DRAWING SETTINGS | 187
3. Click on the scale type you want: architectural, engineering, decimal, inch fractions,
decimal inches, metric, meters, centimeters, millimeters, DIN standard, or AS 1100
standard.
4. Choose how dimensions are displayed, using the Units, Do Float, Sig. Digits, and Stack
Frac. options. Toggle these on or off, as you like. See “Scale Type Menu Options” later in
this section for details on these settings.
5. Right-click to exit the Scale Type menu when you’re finished.

To change the angle type in your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings.
2. Click on Angle Type in the Settings menu.
3. Click on the angle type you want: normal, bearings, decimal degrees, radians, or
gradients. See “Angle Type Menu Options” later in this section for details on these
settings.
4. Choose how angles are used. You can do this by using the Compass, Clockwise, and
Start. Angle options.
5. Right-click to exit the Angle Type menu when you’re finished.

90° 0°

180° 0° 270° 90°

n n
io io
at at
rot rot
Positive Positiv e

270° 180°
Normal Compass

Figure 7.25: The Normal angle type as is (left) and with Compass applied (right).

Scale Type Menu Options

Arch. Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in the architectural scale or Imperial units
(feet, inches, and fractions of inches); this is DataCAD LT’s default scale type.
Eng. Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in the engineering scale (feet and decimal
inches).
Decimal Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in decimal feet.
Inch/Frac. Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in inches and fractions of inches.
Inch/Decimal Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in decimal inches.
Metric Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in meters, centimeters, and millimeters.
Meters Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in decimal meters.
Centimeter Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in decimal centimeters.
Millimeter Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in decimal millimeters.
DIN Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in the form meters.centimeters with
superscripted millimeters.
188 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
AS 1100 Uses and displays dimensions and coordinates in millimeters with a space separating
thousands, hundred thousands, millions and so on; input is done in meters.
Units Toggle on to use and display dimensions and coordinates with unit abbreviations.
Do Float Toggle on so that distance readouts use a floating decimal point; only available with the
Decimal, Inch/Decimal, Meters, Centimeter, or Millimeter scale types. When Do Float is
toggled off, the Sig. Digits option becomes available.
Sig. Digits Sets the number of decimal places or significant digits (0 to 3) to display; only available
with the Decimal, Inch/Decimal, Meters, Centimeter, or Millimeter scale types, when Do
Float is toggled off.
Stack Frac. Toggle on so that fractions of an inch appear “stacked” (with the numerator over the
denominator) rather than inline; available only with the Arch. scale type. Some third-party
fonts have improper character definitions, which may cause the fraction to overwrite the
nonfractional portion of the dimension when using Stack Frac. Should this occur, try using a
different font.
Angle Type Menu Options
Normal Toggle on to set zero degrees equal to the positive X axis, a horizontal line to the right.
Bearings Toggle on to enter angles using bearings.
Dec. Degrees Toggle on to enter angles in decimal degrees.
Radians Toggle on to enter angles in radians.
Grads Toggle on to enter angles in gradients.
Compass Sets zero degrees equal to the positive Y axis, a vertical line pointing north; this is not a
toggle, but simply clicking on it activates it.
Clockwise Toggle on to increase the angle in a clockwise direction; toggle off to increase the angle in a
counterclockwise direction. When you click on Compass, Clockwise is automatically toggled
on.
Start. Angle Sets zero degrees equal to two specified points.
Editing Scale, Angle, and Distance Lists
With some functions, DataCAD LT will list scale, angle, or distance values for you to choose
from. You can modify these scale, angle, and distance lists associated with your drawing. You can
list the current values, add new values, change existing values, or delete values you don’t use.

To list scale, angle, or distance definitions:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Edit Defs. in the Settings menu. The Edit Defs. menu appears.
3. Click on the definition list you’d like to edit: Scales, Angles, or Distances. Each of these
options contains a submenu that includes List, Add, Change, Delect, Save File, and Load
File choices.
4. Click on List. The definitions appear in the Menu Window.
5. Right-click anywhere on the screen or press any key on your keyboard to exit the list.

To add a value to a definition list:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Edit Defs. in the Settings menu. The Edit Defs. menu appears.
3. Click on the definition list you’d like to edit: Scales, Angles, or Distances. You are
limited to 18 definitions in a scale, distance, or angle list. If you already have 18 in the
list you want to add to, you must either delete or change an existing one.
 CUSTOMIZING DRAWING SETTINGS | 189
4. Click on Add. If you’re adding a new angle or distance, you are prompted to enter the
new definition in the Message toolbar. If you’re adding a new scale you are first
prompted to Enter new string for this scale. Supply the text that will appear in the list and
press (Enter) before continuing with the next step.
5. Type a new definition and press (Enter). The new value is added to the definition list. You
can save your customized scale, angle, or distance lists to a separate file (with a .SCL,
.ANG. or .DIS file extension, respectively) and load them into DataCAD LT at any time
for use in your drawings.

To delete a value from a definition list:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Edit Defs. in the Settings menu. The Edit Defs. menu appears.
3. Click on the definition list you’d like to edit: Scales, Angles, or Distances.
4. Click on Delete. In the Message toolbar, you are prompted to select the definition to
delete.
5. Click on the definition in the list that you want to delete. Instantly, DataCAD LT deletes
the definition you selected.

To change a value in a definition list:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Edit Defs. in the Settings menu. The Edit Defs. menu appears.
3. Click on the list to be edited: Scales, Angles, or Distances.
4. Click on Change. You are prompted to select the definition that you want to change.
5. Click on the definition you want to change. If you’re changing an angle or distance, you
are prompted to enter the new definition in the Message toolbar. If you’re changing a
scale, you are prompted to Enter new string for this scale; enter the text that will appear
in the list and press (Enter) before continuing with the next step.
6. Enter a new definition to replace the existing one and press (Enter).

To save your customized definition list:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Edit Defs. in the Settings menu. The Edit Defs. menu appears.
3. Click on the definition list you’d like to edit: Scales, Angles, or Distances.
4. Click on Save File. A Save dialog box appears.
5. Type a name for the customized list file and click on Save or press (Enter). The
customized list is saved.

To load a customized definition list for use in your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
190 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
2. Click on Edit Defs. in the Settings menu. The Edit Defs. menu appears.
3. Click on the definition list you’d like to edit: Scales, Angles, or Distances.
4. Click on Load File. A Load dialog box appears.
5. Click on the name of the customized list file that you want to load and click on Open or
press (Enter). The customized list is loaded into DataCAD LT.

More About Architectural Scales

To calculate additional scales, you can use DataCAD LT’s online calculator. For example, to
calculate the scale value for 1/4”=1’-0”, type =(1/4)/12 when you’re prompted for a new scaling
value. Or type =.25/12 to get the same result: 0.02083333”. For more information on the
calculator, see “DataCAD LT’s Online Calculator” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
An architectural scale list example follows:
SCALE DECIMAL FORM
1/32”=1’-0” .00260416
1/16”=1’-0” .00520833
3/32”=1’-0” .00781250
1/8”=1’-0” .01041666
3/16”=1’-0” .01562500
1/4”=1’-0” .02083333
3/8”=1’-0” .03125000
1/2”=1’-0” .04166666
3/4=1’-0” .06250000
1”=1’-0” .08333333
1 1/2”=1’-0” .12500000
2”=1’-0” .16666666
3”=1’-0” .25000000
6”=1’-0” .50000000
12”=1’-0” 1.00000000
24”=1’-0” 2.00000000
More About Engineering Scales
To calculate additional scales, you can use DataCAD LT’s online calculator. For example, to
calculate the scale value for 1:20, type =(1/20)/12 and press (Enter) when you’re prompted for a
new scaling value. The calculated value is .00416666. An engineering scale list example follows:
SCALE DECIMAL FORM
1:10 .00833333
1:20 .00416666
1:33 .00250000
1:40 .00208333
1:50 .00166666
1:80 .00104166
1:100 .00083333
1:200 .00041666
1:400 .00020833
1:600 .00013888
1:1000 .00008333
 CUSTOMIZING DRAWING SETTINGS | 191
More About Metric Scales
To calculate additional scales, simply type the ratio in decimal form. To use DataCAD LT’s online
calculator for this, type =1/20 and press (Enter) to get the new scale value 0.05000000. For more
information on the calculator, see “DataCAD LT’s Online Calculator” in “The Drawing Board”
chapter.
A metric scale list example follows:
SCALE DECIMAL FORM
1:1 1.00000000
1:2 0.50000000
1:5 0.20000000
1:10 0.10000000
1:20 0.05000000
1:50 0.02000000
1:100 0.01000000
1:200 0.00500000
1:500 0.00200000
1:1000 0.00100000
1:2000 0.00050000
1:5000 0.00020000
1:10000 0.00010000
Setting Cursor Accuracy
Your cursor’s miss distance is the length (in pixels) extending from the center of your cursor’s
crosshairs outward. The smaller the miss distance, the closer you’ll have to place your cursor to an
entity to select it. This distance affects object snapping and other editing commands where you use
your cursor to select a point or entity. The default miss distance is 10.

To set your cursor’s miss distance:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Miss Dist. in the Settings menu. A value menu appears. For more information on
using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
3. Choose a new distance value from the list or type a new value and press (Enter).

Setting Display Options

There are several display options that you can customize in DataCAD LT, including grid display,
reference mark display, cursor size, and information displayed in the Message toolbar.
When you zoom out from your drawing, the grid spacing becomes smaller. The grid can become
so small that it’s difficult to work with and even distracting. You can use the Small Grid option in
the Settings menu to turn off the display grids when it reaches a specific pixel spacing. A good
setting is usually between 15 and 20 pixels.
Shortcut: Press (PgDn) and (PgUp) to zoom in and out on your drawing,

To set the smallest grid size at which the display grid will still display:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
192 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
2. Click on Small Grid in the Settings menu. A value menu appears. For more information
on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
3. Choose a new value from the list or type a new value for the smallest grid size that will
display and press (Enter).
Another display option is the Draw Marks toggle in the Settings menu. Toggle Draw Marks on to
have DataCAD LT automatically draw temporary visual references for every point and entity you
draw. These small Xs do not plot and you can't snap to them. When you refresh the Drawing Area,
the marks disappear.
Shortcut: Press (Esc) to refresh the display of your drawing in the Drawing Area.

You can also toggle the Big Cursor option on in the Settings menu to display a large cursor that
spans the Drawing Area; toggle it off to display a smaller cursor. When you toggle Big Cursor off,
you can specify the size of the cursor.

Shortcut: Press (+) to toggle between large and small cursors.

To set the size of a small cursor:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Big Cursor to toggle it on. If it’s already toggled on, skip to step 3.
3. Click on Big Cursor to toggle it off. A value menu appears. For more information on
value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Use the value menu or type a new value for the cursor size (in pixels) and press (Enter).
In the Settings menu, Neg. Dist. allows you to customize the Message toolbar display. To allow
the display of negative coordinates in the Message toolbar, toggle Neg. Dist. on.

Setting the Panning Distance

You can adjust the distance the screen scrolls when you use the arrow keys to pan around your
drawing. For example, a setting of 50% scrolls 50% of the Drawing Area width each time you
press an arrow key.
Shortcut: Press the arrow keys to pan around your drawing.

To adjust the scroll distance:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Scroll Dist. in the Settings menu. A value menu appears. For more information
on value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
3. Choose a new scroll distance from the list or type a new value and press (Enter).
 CUSTOMIZING DISPLAY | 193
Automatically Saving Your Drawing
DataCAD LT’s automatic save feature creates an auto-recover (.ARF) file that you can use to
recover your drawing file should DataCAD LT unexpectedly close before you’re able to save the
changes you’ve made to your drawing. The Save Delay option in the Settings menu determines
how often DataCAD LT updates the auto-recover (.ARF) file. When an autosave is finished, Auto-
recover file created appears in the Attention toolbar. If there are a lot of entities on a layer, you
may want to adjust this save delay to a higher setting to avoid frequent interruptions until you’re
finished working on that layer.
Warning: Autosave is not a substitute for saving your file. Autosave does not mean that DataCAD
LT automatically saves your file. If you chose No when you close the drawing, DataCAD LT will not
automatically save your changes.
The moral of the story: Use File Save often while you are drawing and when you are closing a file.

The autosave function does not permanently save your drawing, so your drawing (.AEC) file is not
updated. See “Backing Up and Recovering Files” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for information
on how to use autosave files.

To adjust the time interval between automatic saves:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Settings. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Save Delay in the Settings menu. A value menu appears. To turn off the
automatic save function, set Save Delay to zero. However, DataCAD LT does not
recommend this because it leaves you no way to recover work done since you last saved
your drawing (.AEC) file.
3. Use the value menu to choose a value for the time interval or type a new time value and
press (Enter).

Synchronizing the Distance Display

In DataCAD LT, you can rotate the grids along with your cursor to make it easier to draw at an
angle. The Dist. Sync. option in the Settings menu is toggled on by default so that the coordinate
display in the Coordinates/Hints toolbar matches the rotated cursor position. If you are working
with a rotated cursor but want to view the distance relative to standard X and Y coordinates, toggle
Dist. Sync. off.

Customizing Display
You can use the Display menu options to toggle the text, dimensions, hatching, or certain drawing
attributes on or off. Because the text, dimensions, and hatching that you add to your drawing are
made up of many entities, you may want to toggle one or all of these options off to speed up the
refresh time while you draw. Toggle these options on again before you plot the drawing.

To customize the display of your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Display. The Display menu appears.
194 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
2. Decide what you want to display in your drawing. You can display all the text, associative
dimensions, and hatch patterns that you’ve added to your drawing or you can choose not
to display them while you work to decrease drawing refresh times. Toggle Show Text on
to display text; toggle it off to display text as boxes. Toggle Show Dim. on to display
associative dimensions; toggle it off to hide associative dimensions. Toggle Show Hatch
on to display hatch patterns; toggle it off to hide hatch patterns.
Some DataCAD LT menu options are toggles, switches that can be turned on or off. When a toggle
is on, the button appears depressed. When a toggle is off, the button appears raised.
You can quickly identify on and off toggles by color. DataCAD LT uses green as the default for
toggles that are on; red is the default for toggles that are off. You can easily change the on and off
colors by selecting Program Preferences from the Tools pull-down menu, clicking on the Interface
Settings tab in the Configure DataCAD LT for Windows dialog box, and choosing different colors in
the Toggle ON Button and Toggle OFF Button areas. For more information, see “Customizing
DataCAD LT’s Interface” in “The Drawing Board” chapter as well as “Customizing Colors” later in
this chapter.

Figure 7.26: Show Text toggle on

Figure 7.27: Show Text toggle off

3. Look at the toggles that change how the lines in your drawing are displayed. Toggle
Show Weight on to display line weights you’ve applied to your drawing; toggle it off to
display lines with a weight greater than 1 as single solid lines. You can also toggle on
User Line to display any user-defined line types you’ve added to your drawing. If User
Line is toggled off, user-defined lines (such as insulation, hedge, and shingles) appear as
single solid lines. When User Line is toggled off causing user-defined lines to display as
solid, these lines are not changed in any way; they are merely represented on screen by a
simple solid line. Toggle Overshoot on to display line overshoots.
 CUSTOMIZING DISPLAY | 195
4. Change display settings for symbols as well. Toggle Show Ins. on to display symbol
insertion points; toggle it off to hide symbol insertion points. You can also click on Small
Symbol to set the smallest displayable symbol size. Any symbol smaller than the Small
Symbol setting will be displayed as a box. A setting of 0 displays all symbols, regardless
of size. See “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information on
using value menus.
5. Change settings for displaying text by clicking on Small Text or Box Color. Small Text
sets the smallest text size displayable on screen; any text smaller than the Small Text
setting appears as a box. A setting of 0 displays all text, regardless of size. Box Color sets
the color of the boxes that replace small text or that replace all text if Show Text is
toggled off. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information
on using color menus. You can select a global text box color or click on No Change to
display the text boxes in the same color as the text they replace.
6. Display control points of associative dimensions by toggling Dim. Points on.
7. Display the center points of 2D curves by toggling Curve Center on.
8. Display visible attributes added with a macro by toggling Show Attrib. on.
9. Click on Layer Order to assign the order in which to refresh drawing layers. In the Layer
Order menu, toggle First on to refresh the active layer first; toggle Last on to refresh the
active layer last; or toggle In Order on to refresh the layers in the order you created them.
Only one of these three options can be toggled on at any one time.

If Display List is on, Display List is also available in the Utility / Display menu. Click Display
List, click on Statistics in the Display menu, and look at the Attention toolbar to see how
many entities and line segments are in the Display List and how much memory is used to
maintain the list. For more information about Display List, see “Customizing Miscellaneous
Settings” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.

10. Look at the Arc Factor option; it changes how arcs and curves are displayed. The higher
the setting, the smoother curves appear. Use a lower setting while drawing to increase
refresh speeds; then increase the setting when drawing is complete (see Figure 7.28).
11. Display bitmaps in your drawing using the Bitmap On toggle. Turn this toggle off if you
want to suppress bitmaps to increase speed and refresh rates.
11. Right-click to exit when you’ve finished changing Display menu settings.
196 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW

Display with arc factor set to a value of 0.5

Display with arc factor set to a value of 5.0

Figure 7.28: Arc factor settings

Customizing Colors
You can use any customized palette by loading it in the Color Palette dialog box.

To use a standard palette:

1. Click on Color Palettes in the Tools pull-down menu. The Color Palette dialog box
appears.
 CUSTOMIZING DISPLAY | 197

Figure 7.29: The Color Palette dialog box

2. Select a palette from the drop-down box. You can choose from Default, DXFDWG,
Munzell, Prizma, RGB_BMKR, RGB_CBGK, RGB_CWBM, RGB_KRGY,
RGB_MWRY, RGB_WCYG, Sepia, and White. The color swatches in the palette you
selected appear in the dialog box.
3. Click on OK or press (Enter) to use that palette in subsequent drawing sessions.

To mix your own custom color:

1. Click on Color Palettes in the Tools pull-down menu to display the Color Palette dialog
box.
2. Select a palette from the drop-down box.
The Prizma palette is good to use for developing custom colors. Using the blank swatches
below the colored ones can help you keep your custom colors separate from the supplied
ones.

3. Click on the swatch you want to customize in the Color Palette dialog box.
4. Supply a name for the color you want to create. In this example, the new color will be
called “Mint.” Then click on the Edit button to display the Color Picker dialog box.
198 | CHAPTER 7: BEFORE YOU DRAW
5. Use your mouse in the RGB (red, green, blue) and/or HSB (hue, saturation, brightness)
window to mix the color you prefer. Since the original and new colors appear at the
bottom of the Color Picker dialog box, it is easy to compare the two.

Figure 7:30: The Color Picker dialog box lets you mix custom colors for your color palette

6. Select OK when you are satisfied with the new color. The Color Palette now contains
your custom color in the swatch.
7. Click OK to exit the Color Palette dialog box.
 Drawing Walls, Windows, &
Doors In this chapter:
8
The Architect menu includes the three most basic drawing
elements. It offers options for drawing 2-line, 3-line, and 4- Drawing 2-line, 3-line,
line walls. Door Swing and Windows open subsequent and 4-line walls
menus that allow you to choose the door styles and windows Drawing and removing
you want, along with a variety of customizable options. doors
With a single choice from the Architect menu, you can begin Drawing and removing
drawing walls whose intersections can be cleaned windows
automatically. Windows, doors, and other wall openings can Drawing and removing
then be inserted with just a few clicks and, if necessary, openings in walls
removed just as easily.
200 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS

Drawing Walls
Walls can be drawn by simply toggling on the Walls option in the Architect menu. DataCAD LT
automatically cleans wall intersections, including the last intersection where the first and last walls
drawn meet.
You can draw 2-line walls using the 2 Line Walls option, 3-line walls using the 3 Line Walls
option, or 4-line walls using the 4 Line Walls option. Two line walls draw an inside and an outside
line, 3-line walls add a centerline, and 4-line walls add two cavity walls. The 2 Line Walls, 3 Line
Walls, and 4 Line Walls toggles are mutually exclusive; when one is toggled on, the others are
automatically toggled off.

2 Line Wall
Inside wall

3 Line Wall Center line

4 Line Wall Cavity walls

Figure 8.1: DataCAD LT’s wall types

You can also use the Walls option in the DCAD_AEC macro to draw walls. This Walls option
works the same way that Walls in the Architect menu does, although it does have fewer settings to
customize wall display.
When you select Architect from the Edit menu, the Architect context-sensitive toolbar appears.

The first eight icons can be used to draw and edit walls: .
From left to right, these icons let you draw 2-line walls, 3-line walls, or 4-line walls; select and
manage wall styles; set the wall width; draw walls by the outside; draw walls by the center; and
clean up wall intersections.
 DRAWING WALLS | 201
To draw walls:
1. Make sure you are in Ortho or Plan mode. You can toggle Plan on in the View pull-down

menu, click on the plan icon in the Projection Pad toolbar, or toggle on Ortho Mode
in the View pull-down menu. Walls can only be drawn in plan (or orthographic) view.
2. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect. Alternatively, you can

click on in the Icon DRAW toolbar. (For information about defining the two Icon
toolbars, see “Selecting Default Icon Toolbars” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.) A third
option is to select Wall from the Create pull-down menu and indicate the type of wall you
want to draw in the submenu; if you use this method, skip to step 5.
Shortcut: Press (A) to access the Architect menu. Press (=) to quickly toggle Walls on or
off from anywhere in DataCAD LT.

3. Click on Walls in the Architect menu to toggle it on; Wall is checked in the Create pull
down menu. You can now draw walls instead of lines.
4. Click on 2 Line Walls to draw 2-line walls, click on 3 Line Walls to draw 3-line walls, or
click on 4 Line Walls to draw 4-line walls.
5. Set the wall attributes using the Highlight option along with Width for 2-line walls,
Center Line for 3-line walls, and Exterior, Interior, and Cavity for 4-line walls. See
“More About Setting Wall Attributes” later in this chapter.
6. Select two points to draw a wall. When you do this, the line connecting those two points
becomes the outside wall, inside wall, center of the wall, or center of the wall cavity,
depending on whether Outside, Inside, Center Wall, or Center Cav. is toggled on,
respectively. Outside defines walls by the outside of the wall; Inside defines them by the
inside of the wall; Center Wall by the center of the wall; or Center Cav. by the center of
the wall cavity. When drawing 2-line walls or 3-line walls, Center Wall and Center Cav.
work the same way. You can choose either option to create walls based on the wall center.
7. Click on Clean to automatically clean wall intersections as you draw your walls; click on
Cap to cap wall ends as you draw your walls. For more information on using Clean and
Cap, see “More About Finishing Walls” later in this chapter.
8. Click anywhere in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to start drawing your walls.
9. Move the cursor using your mouse and click again or use coordinate entry to specify the
end of the first wall.
10. Click anywhere on the inside or outside of the wall, depending on what you did in step 6.
If you chose Outside, Center Wall, or Center Cav. in step 6, click anywhere on the inside
of the wall; if you chose Inside in step 6, click anywhere on the outside the wall.
11. Notice that your cursor is still connected to the end of your first wall. You can continue
selecting wall end points, as you did in step 9; all intersections will be automatically
cleaned.
12. Finish drawing walls by right-clicking to disconnect your cursor from the wall or clicking
near the first endpoint of your first wall to close your wall plan. Your cursor is
automatically disconnected.
202 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS
Sometimes, you may need to fix wall intersections that didn’t clean properly when they were
drawn. Use the Cleanup menu’s T Intersect, L Intersect, and X Intersect options to clean wall
intersections. Use the Cleanup menu’s Weld Line and Weld Wall options to mend openings in
walls. See “Cleaning Wall Intersections” and “Welding Lines and Walls” in the “Editing
Drawings” chapter.

More About Setting the Width of Walls

When toggling on the Walls option in the Architect menu, you are prompted for a new wall width.
A wall width is the distance between the inside and outside wall. You can also change wall width
anytime while drawing 2-line or 3-line walls.

To change the width of walls to be drawn:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.

2. Click on Width in the Architect menu. You can also click on in the context-sensitive
Architect toolbar. A value menu appears. The Width option is not available when 4 Line
Walls is toggled on.
Shortcut: Press (=) to set the wall width.

3. Use the value menu to enter a new width or type a new width and press (Enter).
DataCAD LT sets the new wall thickness and subsequent walls will be drawn with that
thickness. For more information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.

More About Setting Wall Attributes

You can assign different attributes to outside or inside walls, including colors, line types, and line
weights by using the Highlight option in the Architect menu. Other attribute options apply only to
3-line or 4-line walls.

To draw walls with either the outside or inside wall in a different color, line type, or line
weight:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Highlight in the Architect menu. The Highlight menu appears.
You can only set Highlight options for either the inside wall or the outside wall. For
example, you can’t assign a color to the outside wall and a line type to the inside wall. If
the Highlight menu does not appear, click on Highlight in the Architect menu twice.

3. Click on Outside in the Highlight menu to highlight the outside of your walls. Click on
Inside to highlight the inside of your walls.
4. Click on Color to choose a highlight color, click on Line Weight to choose a line weight
to highlight your walls with, or click on Line Type to choose a line type as a highlight.
5. Right-click to return to the Architect menu.
6. Begin drawing your walls. Notice that DataCAD LT applies the color, line type, or line
weight attributes you set as you draw walls.
 DRAWING WALLS | 203
To set attributes for the center line when drawing 3-line walls:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Center Line in the Architect menu. The Center Line menu appears. The Center
Line option is only displayed when 3 Line Walls is toggled on.
3. Click on Color to choose a highlight color, click on Line Weight to choose a line weight
to highlight your walls with, click on Line Type to choose a line type as a highlight, or
click on Spacing to set the spacing for the center line. The Spacing setting lengthens both
the lines and the spaces in a line type, so that the aspect ratio of the line type is preserved.

To set the distance from the exterior wall to the exterior cavity wall when drawing 4-line
walls:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Exterior in the Architect menu. A list of width values appears.
3. Use the value menu or type a new value and press (Enter) to set the exterior wall
thickness. For more information about how to use value menus, see “Value Menus” in
“The Drawing Board” chapter.

To set the distance from the interior wall to the interior cavity wall when drawing 4-line walls:
1. Click on Architect in the Edit menu.
2. Click on Interior in the Architect menu. A list of width values appears.
3. Use the value menu or type a new value and press (Enter) to set the interior wall
thickness.

To set the attributes for the cavity wall when drawing 4-line walls:
1. Click on Architect in the Edit menu.
2. Click on Cavity in the Architect menu. The Cavity menu appears.
3. Click on Width to set the width from the exterior cavity wall to the interior cavity wall;
click on Color to choose a color for cavity walls; click on Line Weight to set the line
weight of cavity walls; click on Line Type to set the line type for cavity walls; click on
Spacing to set the spacing for cavity walls.

More About Finishing Walls

As you saw in the tutorial in this manual, DataCAD LT always cleans the intersections of walls as
you draw them, as long as you don’t disconnect your cursor from the last wall you drew. For T
intersections, you can toggle on Clean in the Architect menu to automatically trim the interior wall
lines as you draw the walls so that your walls look continuous, without internal lines at corners.
Sometimes you may need to fix wall intersections that didn’t clean properly when they were
drawn. Use the Cleanup menu’s T Intersect, L Intersect, and X Intersect options to clean wall
intersections. Use the Cleanup menu’s Weld Line and Weld Wall options to mend openings in
walls.
Shortcut: Press (\) to toggle Clean on or off.
204 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS
The Cap option in the Architect menu can be toggled on to insert a wall cap or closure on the end
of a wall. When you draw walls, DataCAD LT automatically caps the ends instead of leaving them
open.
The Clean and Cap toggles are mutually exclusive; when one is toggled on, the other is
automatically toggled off.

Using Wall Styles

You can save wall styles for 2-line, 3-line, or 4-line walls with the wall attributes you use most
often, and then use them in any drawing file. The following attributes are saved in a wall style:
• line color, line type, line spacing, and line weight of wall lines. The line spacing setting
lengthens both the lines and the spaces in a line type, so that the aspect ratio of the line type is
preserved.
• whether you want to highlight the inside or outside line of your walls using color, line weight,
and line type.
• wall widths and center line and cavity wall attributes.
To save a new wall style:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.

2. Click on Wall Style in the Architect menu, or click on in the context-sensitive

Architect toolbar, or select Wall Style from the extended Create/Wall pull-down menu.
The Wall Style Manager dialog box appears.
DataCAD LT provides several default wall styles in the drop-down box in the Wall Styles
Available portion of the dialog box. You can also use the arrow buttons beside the drop
down box to scroll through the available default wall styles.

Figure 8.2: The Wall Style Manager dialog box

 DRAWING WALLS | 205
3. Click on SaveAs in the Wall Styles Available section at the bottom of the dialog box.
Supply a name (up to nine characters long) for the wall style and press (Enter) or click on
OK. The wall style is saved and now appears in the drop-down list in the bottom left
corner of the dialog box.

Figure 8.3: New style name dialog box

4. Type a name for your new wall style and press (Enter) or click on OK. The wall style is
saved and now appears in the drop-down list in the bottom left corner of the dialog box.
5. Make decisions about the lines, colors, spacing, line weight, and other options available
in the Wall Style Manager dialog box.
6. Click on Save to store your decisions and then click on OK. Now, you’re ready to draw
walls using your new style.

To save changes to a wall style:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Wall Style in the Architect menu. The Wall Style Manager dialog box appears.
3. Use the drop-down list in the Wall Styles Available section at the bottom of the dialog
box or click on the arrow buttons to select the wall style you want to modify.
4. Change wall settings as necessary.
5. Click on Save in the Wall Styles Available section at the bottom of the dialog box. The
wall style is saved with any changes you made to wall settings. Click on OK to exit the
dialog box.

To use a wall style:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Wall Style in the Architect menu. The Wall Style Manager dialog box appears.
3. Use the drop-down list or the arrow buttons in the Wall Styles Available section at the
bottom of the dialog box to select the wall style you want to use. Wall settings in the
dialog box are changed to those of the wall style you selected.
4. Click on OK to close the dialog box.

To delete a wall style:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Wall Style in the Architect menu. The Wall Style Manager dialog box appears.
206 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS
3. Use the drop-down list or the arrow buttons in the Wall Styles Available section at the
bottom of the dialog box to select the wall style you want to delete.
4. Click on Delete. By asking Are you sure you want to delete filename?, DataCAD LT
gives you a chance to change your mind. Click on Yes to complete the process. The
selected wall style is deleted.
5. Click on OK to close the Wall Style Manager dialog box.

To display the settings for a wall style:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Wall Style in the Architect menu. The Wall Style Manager dialog box appears.
3. Use the drop-down list in the Wall Styles Available section at the bottom of the dialog
box to select the wall style whose settings you want to view. Wall settings in the dialog
box are changed to those of the wall style you selected.
4. Click on OK to use those wall style settings and close the dialog box or click on Cancel
to close the dialog box without changing wall settings.

Cutting Walls
You can use Cut Wall in the Architect menu to remove sections of walls.

To cut openings in walls using the mouse:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.

2. Click on Cut Wall in the Architect menu or click on in the context-sensitive

Architect toolbar. The Cut Wall menu appears.
3. Determine which layer your walls are on. If your walls are on a layer other than the active
layer, click on Layer Search to toggle it on. If Layer Search is already on, toggle it off
and then back on again to choose your walls layer. The layers in your drawing are listed
in the Menu Window.
4. Click on the layer your walls are drawn on.
5. Select one side of the opening by clicking on a point on the wall or using coordinate entry
to specify the exact coordinates. To choose a coordinate entry method, use the Input
Mode option in the Utility pull-down menu.
6. Select the other side of the opening by moving the mouse along the wall and clicking on
any point or by using coordinate entry. The wall is cut and the wall ends are capped
automatically.
If the wall opening is a result of adding a door or window when Cutout (an option in the Door
Swing and Windows menus only) was toggled off, you must use Erase in the Edit menu to erase
the framed opening. You will then need to use Weld Wall in the Edit/Cleanup menu to weld the
wall.
 DRAWING DOORS | 207
To remove an opening from your drawing:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.

2. Click on Cut Wall in the Architect menu or click on in the context-sensitive

Architect toolbar. The Cut Wall menu appears.
3. Determine which layer contains your walls.
• If you don’t want to search for the wall layer, toggle on Any Layer.
• If you want to cut walls that appear on a specific layer, toggle on One Layer to list
the layers in your drawing. Then select the layer you want from the list.
4. Click on Remove in the Cut Wall menu.
5. Click to one side of the opening and move your mouse diagonally to stretch the rubber
band box around it, completely enclosing all elements of the opening. You can stretch the
box around multiple openings to remove them all at once.
6. Click to complete the box. DataCAD LT removes the opening and welds the wall. If any
remnant of the opening remains, click (Esc) to refresh the drawing.

Drawing Doors
Not only can you draw walls using the Architect menu, you can also use it to draw doors,
complete with door swings, in a few quick steps. DataCAD LT places a jamb into the wall, erases
the wall between the jambs, draws the door at the specified thickness, and draws the door swing in
the direction you designated and the angle you selected.
You can draw doors by selecting the sides of the door or by selecting the center and strike side of
the door. When toggled on, the Sides option lets you draw doors by indicating the door sides (door
jambs). When Sides is toggled off, doors are drawn by indicating their center and strike side.
You can use the One Layer toggle if you want to select the specific layer (from those listed) that
contains the walls you want to cut for the doors. If you toggle on Any Layer, DataCAD LT will
search all the “on” layers for the walls that can hold your doors.

To draw a door using the mouse:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu. The Door Swing menu appears. You can also
access the Door Swing menu in the Edit/Architect menu using the Doors option in the
DCAD_AEC macro in the Toolbox pull-down menu. In addition, you can click on the

icon if you loaded the Draw toolbar.

3. Set the door jamb, angle, style, thickness, head height, and swing style as necessary. See
the following pages for more information on setting these door options.
4. Look at the Sides toggle switch. If Sides is toggled on, you are prompted to Select hinge
side of door. If Sides is toggled off, you are prompted to Select center of door. To enter
the point you’re prompted for, click on a wall or use coordinate entry. You are prompted
to Select strike side of door.
208 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS
5. Click on the wall or use coordinate entry to enter the strike side of the door. You are
prompted to Select direction of door swing. See “Drawing with Coordinate Entry” in
“The Drawing Board” chapter.
6. Click either inside or outside the wall to indicate which direction the door should swing.
You are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the wall.
7. Click anywhere outside the wall. The door and doorjamb are drawn.

Figure 8.4: Drawing a door

More About Door Styles

The Door Style menu allows you to choose from six door styles: single, double, bi-fold, sliding,
pocket, and overhead. See Figure 8.5 for examples of door styles. Single creates single-leaf,
hinged doors of any size. This is the default setting for the Door Style menu. Click on Double to
draw two opposing doors hung on a single frame. Bi-fold creates simplified folding doors, while
Sliding creates 2-panel sliding doors, and Pocket creates pocket doors. Click on Overhead to
create overhead garage doors. A dotted line representing the overhead door in a raised position will
be drawn, with the dimensions equaling the width and head height of the door.
 DRAWING DOORS | 209

Single Double Bi-Fold

Sliding Pocket Overhead

Figure 8.5: Options in the Door Style menu

More About Door Jambs

Some of the Door Swing menu options affect how the door is drawn in the wall. Click on Draw
Jamb, In Wall, or Cutout to toggle the option on.The Draw Jamb option draws door jambs for each
wall opening, while In Wall precisely centers door openings between the two wall faces, and
Cutout removes the wall segment between the two jambs. An added benefit to drawing doors with
Cutout toggled on is that the walls will automatically weld themselves if you use Remove to erase
the door. If you toggled on One Layer, DataCAD LT presents a list of the layers in your drawing
so that you can choose the wall layer where the doors should be drawn.
Jamb In is a toggle that determines whether the door will be drawn by rough opening or finished
opening. Rough opening means that the door jamb is drawn inside the opening specified; finished
opening means the door jamb will be drawn outside the opening specified. By default, Jamb In is
toggled off, meaning the door will be drawn by finished opening. When Jamb In is toggled on,
DataCAD LT draws the door by rough opening.
To explain further, when using Sides to draw a door with Jamb In off, the two points you select
mark the inside of the finished opening; therefore, the jamb will be drawn outside the two points
specified. If you toggle Jamb In on and draw another door, the two points you select mark the
rough opening in the wall and the jamb is drawn inside the two points.
You can also change the jamb width for your doors.

To set a new jamb width:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu. The Door Swing menu appears.
3. Click on Jamb Width in the Door Swing menu.
4. Choose or type a jamb width value and press (Enter).
210 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS
Match Wall in the Door Swing menu is toggled on by default, causing jamb depth to automatically
match the wall width. When Match Wall is toggled off, the Jamb Depth option becomes available;
you can use Jamb Depth to set the jamb depth independently of the wall width. Jamb Depth is only
available from the menu when Match Wall is toggled off.

More About Door Angles

Click on Angle in the Door Swing menu to determine the door opening. An angle set to 0-0’ will
result in the doors being drawn closed, while a 90-0’ angle will result in the doors being drawn
fully open. For bi-fold doors, a 90° angle creates a right angle at the intersection of each door.
When an angle between 0-0’ and 90-0’ is entered, DataCAD LT will draw single and double doors
open to varying degrees.
DataCAD LT will draw sliding and pocket doors open to varying degrees when an angle between
10-0’ and 90-0’ is chosen. When any angle 90-0’ or greater is chosen, sliding and pocket doors will
be drawn fully open. When fully open, sliding doors will be drawn to one side and at the first point
chosen for the door opening, making the opening at the second point. When doors are drawn
closed, the door overlap is equal to double the door thickness. The Angle setting does not affect
Overhead doors; they are always drawn the same, regardless of angle.

To set the angle of the door opening:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu. The Door Swing menu appears.
3. Click on Angle in the Door Swing menu.
4. Use the value menu to enter a new angle or type an angle value and press (Enter). An
angle of 0-0’ draws doors closed. An angle of 90-0’ draws most doors fully open. See
“Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information on how to use
them.

More About Door Swing

The Swing Style option in the Door Style menu lets you choose the type and color of the door
swing. From the Swing Style menu, you can choose to draw either a line or arc swing style or to
have no door swing drawn at all. The Line option draws a straight line from the corner of the
doorjamb to the corner of the open door to represent the door swing. The Arc option draws a curve
from the corner of the jamb to the corner of the door.
With both Line and Arc, you can toggle Match Door on in the Swing Style menu to match the door
swing color to the door color. This option is toggled on by default. When Match Door is toggled
off, the Swing Color option is available in the menu. Click on Swing Color to choose a color for
the door swing, independent from the door color.

More About Other Door Settings

Regardless of which way you draw a door, you can use Center Point to add a point in the center of
the door. Then you can use the automatic dimensioning feature to find and dimension to this center
point. See “Drawing Linear Dimensions” in the “Dimensions” chapter.
 DRAWING DOORS | 211
The Draw Marks option in the Door Swing menu is another helpful, visual drawing aid. With
Draw Marks toggled on, DataCAD LT draws small crosses on the screen where you’ve selected
points in the Drawing Area. These marks are a temporary visual reference only; they disappear
when you press (Esc) to refresh the screen. They don’t plot and you can’t object snap to them.
This Draw Marks option is independent of Draw Marks in the Utility/Settings menu and affects
only doors and windows. See “Setting Display Options” in the “Before You Draw” chapter for
more information on the Settings menu’s Draw Marks option.
The Door Swing menu also has options to set the door thickness and head height.

To set the door thickness:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu. The Door Swing menu appears.
3. Click on Thickness in the Door Swing menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to enter a door thickness or type a thickness value and press (Enter).
See “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information on how to use
them.

To set the door head height:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu. The Door Swing menu appears.
3. Click on Head Height in the Door Swing menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to enter a door thickness or type a height value and press (Enter).

Removing a Door
You can quickly remove any door from your drawing and automatically weld the wall with the
Remove option in the Door Swing menu. Keep in mind that Remove only erases the door if
Cutout was toggled on in the Door Swing menu when the door was drawn. If you didn’t use
Cutout when you drew the door, use Erase to erase the door as a group. You will then need to use
Weld Wall in the Edit/Cleanup menu to weld the wall. See “Erasing Entities” and “Welding Lines
and Walls” in the “Editing Drawings” chapter.

To remove a door from your drawing:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Door Swing in the Architect menu. The Door Swing menu appears.
3. Click on Remove in the Door Swing menu. You are prompted to Select first point of box
around door or window to remove.
4. Click above and to the left of the door to be removed.
5. Move your mouse diagonally, completely enclosing all elements of the door, and click.
DataCAD LT removes the door. You can stretch the box around multiple doors to remove
them all at once.
212 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS
Drawing Windows
The Windows option draws windows with cased openings in walls, either by selecting the sides of
the window or by selecting the center and strike side of the window. You can customize the detail
of the windows by changing basic window components, including jamb size, sill projection, glass
thickness, sill height, and head height.

To draw a window:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Set the window jamb, exterior and interior sill projections, thickness of glass, and sill
height and head height as necessary. See the following pages for more information on
setting window options.
4. Toggle Sides on to draw windows by selecting the window sides (jambs); toggle Sides off
to draw windows by selecting their center point and one side. If Sides is toggled on, you
are prompted to Select one jamb of window. If Sides is toggled off, you are prompted to
Select center of window.
5. Click on a wall to enter one side of the window jamb or the center of the window. You are
prompted to Select second jamb of window or Select one jamb of window, depending on
the status of the Sides toggle.
If One Layer is toggled, you may encounter the error message No walls found to cut.
Please check search layer. Toggle One Layer on (if it’s already on, toggle it off and then
on again) to display the layers in your drawing. Choose the layer your walls are drawn on
from the list in the Menu Window.
6. Click on the wall to enter the side of the window jamb. You are prompted to Select any
point on the outside of the wall.
7. Click outside the wall. The window is drawn.

Figure 8.6: Drawing a window with Sides toggled on

 DRAWING WINDOWS | 213
More About Window Jambs
Some of the Windows menu’s options affect how the window is drawn in the wall. The Draw
Jamb option draws window jambs for each wall opening, while In Wall precisely centers window
openings between the two wall faces, and Cutout removes the wall segment between the two
jambs. Click on Draw Jamb, In Wall, or Cutout to toggle the option on. An added benefit to
drawing windows with Cutout toggled on is that the walls will automatically weld themselves if
you use Remove to erase the window. You may need to use One Layer with this if you’re drawing
windows on a different layer than your walls are on; click on One Layer and then click on the
layer your walls are on.
Jamb In is a toggle that determines whether the window will be drawn by rough opening or
finished opening. Rough opening means that the window jamb is drawn inside the opening
specified; finished opening refers to the window jamb being drawn outside the opening specified.
By default, Jamb In is toggled off, meaning the window will be drawn by finished opening. When
Jamb In is toggled on, DataCAD LT draws the window by rough opening.
To explain further, when using Sides to draw a window with Jamb In off, the two points you select
mark the inside of the finished opening; the jamb will be drawn outside the two points specified. If
you toggle Jamb In on and draw another window, the two points you select mark the rough
opening in the wall; the jamb is drawn inside the two points.
Match Wall is toggled on by default, causing the jamb depth of the window to automatically match
the wall width. When this option is toggled off, you can use Jamb Depth to set the jamb depth
independently of the wall width. Jamb Depth is only available from the menu when Match Wall is
toggled off.
You can also change the jamb width for your windows.

To set a new jamb width:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Click on Jamb Width in the Windows menu.
4. Use the value menu to enter a jamb width or type a jamb width value and press (Enter).

More About Sill and Glass Settings

Other Windows options you’ll want to set include distances for the exterior and interior sill
projections, the thickness of the glass, and the sill height and head height.

To change the distance of the exterior sill projection:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Click on Out Sill in the Windows menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to enter a new exterior sill projection or type a sill projection value
and press (Enter).
214 | CHAPTER 8: DRAWING WALLS, WINDOWS, & DOORS
To change the distance of the interior sill projection:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Click on In Sill in the Windows menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to enter a new interior sill projection or type a sill projection value
and press (Enter).

To change the thickness of the glass:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Click on Glass Thk. in the Windows menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to enter a new thickness or type a new value and press (Enter). If you
enter a thickness of 0”, DataCAD LT draws a single sheet of glass.

To enter a new window sill height relative to the current Z-base elevation:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Click on Sill Height in the Windows menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to enter a new exterior sill projection or type a new height value and
press (Enter).

To enter a new window head height relative to the current Z-base elevation:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Click on Head Height in the Windows menu. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu to enter a new exterior sill projection or type a new height value and
press (Enter).

More About Other Window Settings

Regardless of which way you draw a window, you can use Center Point to add a point in the center
of the window. You can use DataCAD LT’s automatic dimensioning feature to find and dimension
to this center point.
The Draw Marks option in the Windows menu is another helpful, visual drawing aid. With Draw
Marks toggled on, DataCAD LT draws small crosses on the screen when you select points in the
Drawing Area. This Draw Marks option is independent of Draw Marks in the Utility/Settings
menu and affects only doors and windows. These marks are a temporary visual reference only;
they disappear when you press (Esc) to refresh the screen. They don’t plot and you can’t object
snap to them.
 | 215
Removing a Window
You can quickly remove any window from your drawing and automatically weld the wall with the
Remove option in the Windows menu. Keep in mind that Remove only erases the window if
Cutout was toggled on in the Windows menu when the window was drawn. If you didn’t use
Cutout when you drew the window, use Erase to erase the window as a group. You will then need
to use Weld Wall in the Edit/Cleanup menu to weld the wall.

To remove a window from your drawing:

1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Architect.
2. Click on Windows in the Architect menu. The Windows menu appears.
3. Click on Remove in the Windows menu. You are prompted to Select first point of box
around door or window to remove.
4. Click above and to the left of the window to be removed.
5. Move your mouse diagonally, completely enclosing all elements of the window, and
click. DataCAD LT removes the window. You can stretch the box around multiple
windows to remove them all at once.
 Drawing Other Geometry
DataCAD LT offers several additional drawing tools outside
of the Architect menu. The Polygons and Curves menus in In this chapter:
9
the Edit menu allow you to draw a number of geometric
shapes, from simple rectangles to Bezier curves. The Drawing polygons
DCAD_AEC macro has options to automate drawing stairs Drawing curves
and elevators.
Drawing polylines
Drawing stairs
Drawing elevators
218 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY

Drawing Polygons
With the Polygons menu, you can draw rectangles or polygons with up to 36 sides. DataCAD LT
uses a temporary circle to define a polygon. The relationship between this circle and the resulting
polygon is dependent on the Inscribe option (see Figure 9.1). The points you select to draw the
polygon will determine the orientation of the polygon in your drawing.

To draw a polygon:
1. Go to the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click on Polygons. You can also click on

the icon in the Draw toolbar. The Polygons menu appears.

2. Look at the toggle switches. The Dynamic, Center Point, Vertex, Diameter, and Inscribe
options are toggled on by default. Change these settings as necessary. See “Polygon
Menu Options” below for more information.
3. Click on No. of Sides in the Polygons menu. A value menu appears and you are prompted
to Enter number of sides.
4. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select first
point on polygon.
5. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to select the first point for the polygon,
as prompted. See “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter to
review coordinate entry methods.
6. Click to select the second point on the outside of the temporary circle used to define the
polygon. With Diameter toggled off, the distance between these two points defines the
radius of the temporary circle; with Diameter toggled on, the distance between the points
is the diameter of the circle. The polygon is drawn.

Polygon drawn with Inscribe on Polygon drawn with Inscribe off

Figure 9.1: Polygons are actually defined by two points on a circle. These circles are not displayed.
 DRAWING POLYGONS | 219
Polygon Menu Options
When you create polygons with both Vertex and Diameter toggled on, the two points you specify
are vertices opposite each other on the polygon. With Vertex on and Diameter off, you specify the
center point and one vertex. With Vertex off and Diameter on, you specify the mid-point of two
sides of the polygon that are opposite each other.

Dynamic Toggle on to see the size and shape of the polygon you’re drawing before you choose the
second point; Dynamic is toggled on by default.
Center Point Toggle on to display a snapping point, marking the center of the polygon; Center Point is
toggled on by default.
Vertex Toggle on to draw polygons by defining two vertices of the polygon; toggle off to define
polygons by the mid-points of opposite sides of the polygon; Vertex is toggled on by default.
Diameter Toggle on to draw polygons by defining the diameter of the polygon (two points opposite each
other); toggle off to define the radius of the polygon (the center point and one side or vertex);
Diameter is toggled on by default.
Inscribe Toggle on to draw polygons as though they were inscribed within a circle; toggle off to draw
polygons as though a circle was inscribed within them (see Figure 9.1); Inscribe is toggled on
by default. See Figure 9.1 for more information about using Inscribe.
Drawing Rectangles
To draw a rectangle, you must select two diagonally opposite corner points. The X and Y
coordinates of these diagonal corners appears in the Message Area as you draw the rectangle.

To draw a rectangle:

1. Click on Polygons in the Edit menu. You can also click on the icon in the Draw
toolbar.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (R) to access the Polygons menu.

2. Click on Rectangle in the Polygons menu.

3. Toggle Center Point on to automatically add a snap point marking the center of the
rectangle. If Walls are toggled on and the Outside or Inside option in the Architect menu
is toggled on as well, you will be prompted to indicate the inside or outside of the wall,
respectively, after you enter the second point for your rectangle.
4. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to select the first point of the rectangle.
For more information on using coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
5. Move the cursor diagonally and click or use coordinate entry to enter the second point of
the rectangle. The rectangle is drawn.
220 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY

Drawing Curves
You can draw circles, arcs, ellipses, and other curvilinear entities using a wide variety of methods.

Selecting from the Menu Window is the traditional method. You can also click on in the
Draw toolbar to open the drop-down menu that offers many curve-drawing alternatives:

Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (A) to access the Curves menu.

Drawing 2-Point Arcs

Two-point arcs are drawn by indicating the radius of the arc and then defining the length of the
arc.

Second Point

First Point
Center Point

Figure 9.2: 2-point arc

To draw a 2-point arc:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu.

Alternatively, click on in the Draw toolbar, select

from the drop-down
options to display the 2 Pt. Arc menu, and skip to step 3.
2. Click on 2 Pt. Arc in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on 2-Point Arc in the submenu. The 2 Pt. Arc menu
appears.
 DRAWING CURVES | 221
3. Toggle Dynamic on in the 2 Pt. Arc menu to preview the arc before you enter the final
point. With Dynamic toggled on, you can move your mouse around the center point to
preview the arc at various angles before selecting the second point. You are prompted to
Select center of arc.
4. Select the center point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. You are prompted to Select start point of arc.
5. Select the first point on the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry.
The Clockwise option is now available in the menu. You are prompted to Select end point
of arc.
6. Toggle Clockwise on to draw the arc clockwise from the first point; toggle it off to draw
the arc counterclockwise.
7. Select the second point on the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. This point is used only to determine the angle of the arc, so it doesn’t have to be
exactly on the arc. The arc is drawn.

Drawing 3-Point Arcs

Three-point arcs are drawn by selecting the end points of the arc as well as one other point on the
arc.

Second Point

Third Point

First Point
Figure 9.3: 3-point arc

To draw a 3-point arc:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu.

Alternatively, click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options.
2. Click on 3 Pt. Arc in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on 3-Point Arc in the submenu. The 3 Pt. Arc menu
appears.
3. Toggle Dynamic on in the 3 Pt. Arc menu to preview the arc before you enter the final
point. With Dynamic toggled on, you can move your mouse to preview the arc at various
angles before selecting the third point. You are prompted to Select first end point of arc.
222 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY
4. Select the first end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. You are prompted to Select second end point of arc. For more information on
coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board”
chapter.
5. Select the second end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using
coordinate entry. Keep in mind when selecting the second end point that the arc will be
drawn in a counterclockwise direction. You are prompted to Select any point on the arc.
6. Select the third point on the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. The arc is drawn, along with its center point.

Drawing Arcs By Center Angle

You can draw arcs based on a center angle that you define.

Figure 9.4: An arc defined by selecting an end point, the center point, and an angle

To draw an arc by defining the center angle:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on Cent. Angle in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on Center Angle Arc in the submenu. The Cent. Angle
menu appears and you are prompted to Select starting point of arc.
3. Select the first end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Keep in mind when selecting this starting point that the
arc will be drawn in a counterclockwise direction. You are prompted to Select center of
arc.
4. Select the center point of the arc by click in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry.
You are prompted to Enter included angle; a value menu listing angle values appears.
5. Type an angle or use the value menu to enter an angle and press (Enter). For more
information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
The arc is drawn.

Drawing Arcs By Arc Length

You can draw arcs by defining their length.
 DRAWING CURVES | 223

Figure 9.5: An arc defined by the starting point, center point, and length of the arc

To draw an arc based on the arc’s length:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on Cent. Arc in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on Center Arc in the submenu. The Cent. Arc menu
appears and you are prompted to Select starting point of arc.
3. Select the first end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Keep in mind when selecting this starting point that the
arc will be drawn in a counterclockwise direction. You are prompted to Select center of
arc.
4. Select the center point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. You are prompted to Enter arc length; a value menu appears.
5. Type a length or use the value menu to enter a length, and press (Enter). For more
information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
The arc is drawn.

Drawing Arcs By Chord Length

You can draw arcs by defining the length of a chord, measuring from the starting point of the arc
to an end point.
224 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY

Figure 9.6: An arc defined by selecting the starting point of the arc, its center point, and the length of a
chord from end point to end point.

To draw an arc based on chord length:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on Cent. Chord in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on Center Chord Arc in the submenu. The Cent. Chord
menu appears and you are prompted to Select starting point of arc.
3. Select the first end point of the arc by click in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Keep in mind when selecting this starting point that the
arc will be drawn in a counterclockwise direction. You are prompted to Select center of
arc.
4. Select the center point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. You are prompted to Enter chord length; a value menu appears. For more
information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
5. Type a length or use the value menu to enter a length and press (Enter). The arc is drawn.

Drawing Arcs By Radius

You can draw arcs by selecting two endpoints and then entering the length of the arc’s radius.
 DRAWING CURVES | 225

Figure 9.7: An arc defined by selecting a starting point and an ending point for the arc and then setting
an arc radius

To draw an arc based on a specified radius:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on End Pt. Rad in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on End Point Radius Arc in the submenu. The End Pt.
Rad menu appears and you are prompted to Select starting point of arc.
To properly define an arc, you must make the radius value larger than half the distance
between the starting and ending points. If the message These points do not define an arc
appears in the Attention toolbar, increase the radius length.

3. Select the first end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. Keep in mind when selecting this starting point that the arc will be drawn in a
counterclockwise direction. You are prompted to Select ending point of arc.
4. Select the end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry.
You are prompted to Enter radius of arc; a value menu appears.
5. Type a radius length or use the value menu to enter a radius and press (Enter). The arc is
drawn.

Drawing Arcs By Included Angle

You can draw arcs by selecting the end points of the arc and then entering an arc angle.
226 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY

Figure 9.8: An arc defined by selecting a starting point and an ending point and then entering the
included angle for the arc.

To draw an arc based on its included angle:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on End Pt. Ang. in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on End Point Angle Arc in the submenu. The End Pt.
Ang. menu appears and you are prompted to Select starting point of arc.
3. Select the first end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Keep in mind when selecting this starting point that the
arc will be drawn in a counterclockwise direction. You are prompted to Select ending
point of arc.
4. Select the end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry.
You are prompted to Enter included angle; a value menu appears.
5. Type an angle or use the value menu to enter an angle and press (Enter). For more
information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
The arc is drawn.

Drawing Arcs Using a Tangent Line

The Start Ang. option in the Curves menu uses a temporary tangent line to define the angle of the
arc.

Figure 9.9: An arc defined by selecting two end points and then setting the arc angle by placing a
temporary tangent line
 DRAWING CURVES | 227
To draw an arc using a temporary tangent line:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on Start Ang. in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on Start Direction of Arc in the submenu. The Start Ang.
menu appears and you are prompted to Select starting point of arc.
3. Select the first end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Keep in mind when selecting this starting point that the
arc will be drawn in a counterclockwise direction. You are prompted to Select ending
point of arc.
4. Select the end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry.
You are prompted to Select starting direction of arc. Notice that a line is now connected
to the starting point you entered and the line moves as you move your mouse.
5. Move your cursor until the line is positioned as a tangent line to the arc you want to draw.
6. Click to set the tangent line. The arc is drawn. If Ortho mode is toggled on in the Tools
pull-down menu, the tangent line will “jump” in increments equal to the snap angle
setting.

Drawing Tangent Arcs

You can draw arcs that are tangent to an existing line or arc by simply selecting the entity to be
tangent and then selecting an end point.

To draw arcs tangent to another entity:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu and

then click on Tangent. Or click on in the Draw toolbar, select

from the drop-down
options. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create pull-down menu and then click on
Tangent Arc in the submenu. The Tangent menu appears; Dynamic is toggled on by
default, allowing you to preview the arc before entering the final point. You are prompted
to Select line or arc from which to draw.
2. Move your cursor over the entity that will be tangent to the arc you’re drawing and click
to select it. You can also object snap to an entity at a particular point. For more
information on object snapping, see “Object Snapping” in the “Drawing Tools” chapter.If
you’ve selected the wrong entity, click on New Line in the Tangent menu (or simply
right-click using your mouse) to deselect the entity; you can then select another entity for
your tangent. You are prompted to Select ending point of arc.
228 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY
3. Select the end point of the arc by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry.
For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in
“The Drawing Board” chapter. The arc is drawn. Notice your cursor is still attached to the
arc. You can continue drawing tangent arcs by entering end points. Right-click to detach
your cursor from the last arc you drew.

Drawing Circles By Radius

You can draw a circle by defining its radius.

Figure 9.10: A circle defined by selecting a center point and a point on the circle

To draw a circle based on its radius:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu and

then click on Radius Circ. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select
. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on Radius Circle in the submenu. The Radius Circ. menu
appears with Dynamic toggled on by default, allowing you to preview the circle before
you select the last point. You are prompted to Select center of circle.
2. Select the center point of the circle by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Notice the radius (and, therefore, the circle) changes
size as you move your mouse. You are prompted to Select any point on circle.
3. Select a point on the circle by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry. The
circle is drawn.

Drawing Circles By Diameter

You can draw a circle by defining its diameter.
 DRAWING CURVES | 229

Figure 9.11: A circle defined by selecting two points opposite each other on the circle

To draw a circle based on its diameter:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on Dia. Circ. in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on Diameter Circle in the submenu. The Dia. Circ. menu
appears with Dynamic toggled on by default, allowing you to preview the circle before
you select the last point. You are prompted to Select first point on circle.
3. Select the first point on the circle by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. Notice the diameter (and, therefore, the circle) changes size as you move your
mouse. You are prompted to Select second point on circle.
4. Select the second point on the circle by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. The circle is drawn.

Drawing Circles By Points

You can draw a circle by defining three points on the circle.

Figure 9.12: A circle defined by selecting three points

230 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY
To draw a circle by selecting points:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on 3 Pt. Circ. in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on 3-Point Circle in the submenu. The 3 Pt. Circ. menu
appears with Dynamic toggled on by default, allowing you to preview the circle before
you select the last point. You are prompted to Select first point on circle.
3. Select the first point on the circle by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. You are prompted to Select second point on circle.
4. Select the second point on the circle by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. Notice the circle changes size as you move your mouse. You are prompted to Select
third point on circle.
5. Select the third point on the circle by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. The circle is drawn.

Drawing Ellipses
You can draw ellipses by simply selecting two diagonally opposed points, as though you were
selecting two diagonal corners of a rectangle.

To draw an ellipse:
1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu; then

click on Ellipse. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options;
then click on Ellipse in the Curves menu. In the Ellipse menu, Dynamic is toggled on by
default, allowing you to preview the ellipse before you select the last point. You are
prompted to Select first corner of ellipse rectangle.
2. Select the first point for the ellipse by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Notice the ellipse changes shape and size as you move
your mouse. You are prompted to Select second corner of ellipse rectangle.
3. Select the second point for the ellipse by clicking in the Drawing Area or using
coordinate entry. The ellipse is drawn.

Drawing Curves Using Control Points

You can draw more complex curves by selecting control points that affect how the curves are
drawn.
 DRAWING CURVES | 231

Figure 9.13: A Bezier curve with selected control points

Figure 9.14: A B-spline curve with selected control points

To draw a Bezier curve:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on Bezier in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create pull
down menu and then click on Bezier Curve in the submenu. The Bezier menu appears
with Dynamic toggled on by default, allowing you to preview the curve as you select
control points. You are prompted to Select Bezier control point.
3. Select a control point for the curve by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Continue selecting control points; you must select at least three but no more than eight
points.
5. Right-click to detach your cursor from the curve. The Bezier curve is drawn. If you enter
all eight control points, your cursor is detached automatically and the curve is drawn.
The formula used to create B-spline curves in DataCAD LT is specific to Third Order splines.
 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY
232 To draw a B-spline curve:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on B-Spline in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on B-Spline Curve in the submenu. The B-Spline menu
appears with Dynamic toggled on by default, allowing you to preview the curve as you
select control points. You are prompted to Select B-Spline control point.
3. Select a control point for the curve by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate
entry. For more information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry”
in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Continue selecting control points; you must select at least three but no more than eight
points.
5. Right-click to detach your cursor from the curve. The B-spline curve is drawn. If you
enter all eight control points, your cursor is detached automatically and the curve is
drawn.

Drawing Curves Using Surveyor’s Data

You can draw curves based on surveyor’s data that you enter. Based on this data and the options
you use, DataCAD LT can even extrapolate additional data. For instance, if you enter the radius
point of the curve, the central angle of the curve, and the starting point of the curve, DataCAD LT
can calculate the coordinates of the ending point and draw the curve. For more information on the
options noted in Figure 9.15, see “Curve Data Menu Options” on the following page.

Figure 9.15: An arc drawn by entering surveyor’s data

 DRAWING POLYLINES | 233
To draw a curve using surveyor’s data:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on in the Draw
toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Curves menu appears.
2. Click on Curve Data in the Curves menu. You can also click on 2D Curves in the Create
pull-down menu and then click on Curve from Data in the submenu. The Curve Data
menu appears.
3. Enter the surveyor’s data using Curve Data menu options. Once enough information has
been entered to draw the curve, an Add option appears in the Curve Data menu.
4. Click on Add. The curve is drawn.

Curve Data Menu Options

Raduis Point Defines the center (or radius point) of the curve.
Start Point Defines the starting point (or the point) of the curve.
End Point Defines the ending point (or point of tangency) of the curve.
Int. Point Defines the point of intersection, where the tangent line intersects the starting point of the
curve.
Angle Defines the central angle about the radius point.
Radius Defines the radius of the curve, or the distance between the radius point and the starting point
or the ending point of the curve.
Tangent Defines the distance from the starting point or ending point to the intersection of the tangent
lines to these two points.
Chord Defines the straight-line distance between the starting point and the ending point of the curve.
Arc Length Defines the distance along the curve from the starting point to the ending point.
Bearing In Defines the bearing of the line going into the starting point of the curve.
Bearing Out Defines the bearing of the line going away from the ending point of the curve.
Bearing P.C. Defines the bearing of the line from the radius point to the starting point of the curve.
Bearing P.T. Defines the bearing of the line from the radius point to the ending point of the curve.

Drawing Polylines
A polyline is a continuous series of lines and/or arcs that are treated by DataCAD LT as a single
entity. You can use the Rectangle option to quickly draw rectangular polylines or draw polylines,
segment by segment. You can use the Curves option to create polylines with curved rather than
straight line segments. Polylines can be open or closed, depending on whether you toggle Closed
off or on.
234 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY

Closed

Open
Figure 9.16: Examples of a closed polyline (drawn with Closed toggled on) and an open polyline (drawn
with Closed toggle off)

Closed polylines can be hatched; see the “Hatch” chapter for more information about hatching. If
your polyline (no matter how irregular) is not closed, you cannot hatch it. In addition, you can
measure the area or perimeter of a closed polyline or find its centroid; see “Measuring Areas,
Perimeters, and Volumes” in the “Drawing Tools” chapter for more information.

To draw a rectangular polyline:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu; then

click on Polyline. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options to display the Polyline menu. You

can also select Polyline from the Create pull-down menu; the Polyline menu appears.
2. Click on Rectangle in the Polyline menu. You are prompted to Select first corner of
rectangle.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or object snap to a point to select the first corner of the
polyline. Notice that the rectangle stretches as you move your cursor. You are prompted
to Select second corner of rectangle.
5. Click in the Drawing Area or object snap to a point to select the second corner of the
polyline. The polyline is drawn.
 DRAWING POLYLINES | 235
To draw a polyline, segment by segment:
1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu; then

click on Polyline. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options to display the Polyline menu. You

can also select Polyline from the Create pull-down menu; the Polyline menu appears.
Closed is toggled on by default, allowing you to draw a polyline that will automatically
be closed when you’re finished selecting points. You are prompted to Select first point on
polyline.
2. Toggle Closed on or off, depending on whether you want to draw a closed or open
polyline.
3. Toggle Covered on or off, depending on whether you want DataCAD LT to supply a top
and bottom covering (like a roof and floor) for a closed polyline. Covered is available if
you toggled Closed on in step 2; it is not offered as an option if you toggled Closed off in
step 2.
4. Decide how you want to begin drawing your polyline:
• To begin with a curve drawn without a 2-point or 3-point arc, click on Curves in the
Polyline menu.
When you click on Curves in the Polyline menu, the Curves submenu provides all the
options you need to construct curved polylines by using standard curve creation methods.
The options in the Polyline/Curves submenu are 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Cent. Angel, Cent.
Arc, Cent. Chord, End Pt. Rad., End Pt. Ang., Start Ang., Tangent, Radius Circ., Dia. Circ,
and 3 Pt. Circ. For more information about how to use specific options in the
Polyline/Curves menu, review the “Drawing Curves” section earlier in this chapter.
The Polyline/Curves options are exactly the same as those in the standard Curves menu.
In Version 10, DataCAD LT added them to the Polyline menu for your convenience.
Accessing these options through the Polyline menu makes it easier to draw curved
polylines because you don’t have to constantly right-click to back up to the main Curves
menu.

• To begin with a 2-point arc, select the first point for the polyline by clicking in the
Drawing Area or using coordinate entry. For more information on coordinate entry,
see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter. You are
prompted to Select next point on polyline. Click on 2 Pt. Arc in the Polyline menu.
Select a center point for the arc (toggle Clockwise off if you want to draw in a
counterclockwise direction). Either continue drawing 2-point arcs as part of the
polyline or right-click to exit that function.
If you only need the 2 Pt. Arc or 3 Pt. Arc polyline options, you do not need to select the
Curves submenu from the Polylines menu.Those two functions appear in the Polyline
menu if you click to select the first point on the polyline immediately, instead of opening
the Curves submenu.
236 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY
• To begin with a 3-point arc, select the first point for the polyline by clicking in the
Drawing Area or using coordinate entry. For more information on coordinate entry,
see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter. Click on 3
Pt. Arc in the Polyline menu. You are prompted to Select second end point of arc.
Click where you want the arc to end or use coordinate entry. You are prompted to
Select any point on the arc. Drag your mouse or use coordinate entry, then click to
select any other point on the arc. Either continue drawing 3-point arcs as part of the
polyline or right-click to exit that function.
• To begin with a straight line, select the first point for the polyline by clicking in the
Drawing Area or using coordinate entry. For more information on coordinate entry,
see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter. You are
prompted to Select next point on polyline. Indicate the second point of a straight line
segment by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate entry, or object snapping
to a point on an entity.
5. Continue drawing line segments, curves, or arcs until your polyline is complete.
Notice that Tangent appears in the Polyline menu after you finish drawing the first straight
line segment or after you right-click to exit the 2-point or 3-point arc functions. It also
appears in the Polyline/Curves menu. When you are prompted to Select next point on
polyline, you can draw a tangent arc in your polyline by clicking on Tangent. Move your
cursor until the arc displayed is the one you want drawn and then click to draw the arc. For
more information, see the “Drawing Tangent Arcs” section earlier in this chapter.

6. Click Backup any time to erase the last line segment or arc of your polyline. You can
click Cancel at any time to erase the polyline you’re drawing.
7. Right-click to finish the polyline. If Closed is toggled on, the polyline is automatically
closed. If Closed is toggled off, your cursor is detached from the last point of the open
polyline.

To draw a polyline that is both closed and covered:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu; then

click on Polyline. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options to display the Polyline menu. You

can also select Polyline from the Create pull-down menu; the Polyline menu appears.
Closed is toggled on by default, allowing you to draw a polyline that will automatically
be closed when you’re finished selecting points. You are prompted to Select first point on
polyline.
2. Toggle Covered on in the Polyline menu.
3. Draw the polyline. Right-click when you are finished.
4. Select Object Viewer from the View pull-down menu to look at the covered polyline from
all angles.

To convert a closed polyline to a polygon or slab:

1. Select 3D Menus from the Edit menu. This displays the 3D Menus.
 DRAWING POLYLINES | 237
2. Click on Explode. The Explode menu appears.
3. Select To Polygons if you want to convert the polyline to a polygon; alternatively, select
TTF-> Slab if you want to convert the polyline to a slab. These are mutually exclusive
toggle switches. Select entity to <EXPLODE> appears in the Message toolbar.
4. Click on the closed polygon you want to convert.

To connect two lines with an arc:

1. Click on Cleanup in the Edit menu in the Menu Window.
2. Choose Fillets from the Cleanup menu. The following options appear in the Fillets menu:
• Radius Sets the fillet radius. To join two nonparallel, nonintersecting lines,
accept the standard radius of zero. This extends the lines to
intersect.After you set the radius, DataCAD LT saves it with the
drawing file until you modify it again.
• Clip Trims (erases) the line segments extending past the intersection of
the selected lines; set Clip prior to selecting the entities to fillet.
• Layer Search Scans all layers during selection operations when toggled on.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (F) to access the Fillets menu.

3. Select the first line to trim. For more information on using selection menus, see
“Selection Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Select the second line to trim. DataCAD LT creates a fillet at the intersection.

To connect two lines with a line:

1. Click on Cleanup in the Edit menu in the Menu Window.
2. Choose Chamfer from the Cleanup menu. The following options appear in the Chamfer
menu:
• Distances Sets the first and second chamfer distance.
• Clip Trims (erases) the line segments extending the intersection of the
selected lines to chamfer.
• Layer Search Scans all layers during selection operations when toggled on.
3. Select the first line to trim. For more information on using selection menus, see
“Selection Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Select the second line to trim. A chamfer is created at the intersection of the two lines.
238 | CHAPTER 9: DRAWING OTHER GEOMETRY
Voids in Polylines
You can add voids to or erase voids from polylines as well as convert voids to polygons. To add a
polyline void, you must first draw the closed master polyline (to which you want to add the void);
then, draw the closed polyline that represents the void itself. For example, in a building elevation
that you want to hatch, you would create a master polyline around the perimeter of the elevation.
Then, you would draw closed polylines around each of the windows and doors; these would
become voids or areas that you wouldn’t want to hatch.

To add a void to a polyline:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu; then

click on Polyline. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options to display the Polyline menu. You

can also select Polyline from the Create pull-down menu; the Polyline menu appears.
2. Draw your master, closed polyline. Then, draw the closed polyline(s) that will become
your void(s) within that master polyline.
3. Click on Voids in the Polyline menu. You are prompted to Select master polyline to
process voids.
4. Click on the closed master polyline that you want to put the void in. DataCAD LT puts
dashed lines around that shape. You are prompted to Select entity to select polylines to
convert to voids.
5. Make sure Entity and Add Void are toggled on in the Voids menu.
6. Click on the polyline that will represent the void. The void is added. Dashed lines
surround the void.
7. Continue selecting other closed polylines within the master if necessary.
You could easily hatch the polyline with voids. Just select Hatching from the Utility menu; click
Pattern, choose one of the options, and press (Enter); then click on the polyline you want to hatch
and select Begin from the Hatching menu. The area within the master polyline is hatched, but the
voids are not. Alternatively, you could fill the master polyline with solid fills or bitmaps.

To erase a void polyline:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu; then

click on Polyline. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options to display the Polyline menu. You

can also select Polyline from the Create pull-down menu; the Polyline menu appears.
2. Click on Voids in the Polyline menu. You are prompted to Select master polyline to
process voids.
3. Click on the master polyline that contains the void(s) you want to erase. The Voids menu
appears.
4. Toggle Erase Void on. You are prompted to Select polyline to delete from drawing.
 | 239
5. Click on a void to erase it. If you want to eliminate more voids, click on them, too.

To convert a void to a polygon:

1. Click on Curves in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Curves menu; then

click on Polyline. Or click on in the Draw toolbar and select

from the drop-down options to display the Polyline menu. You

can also select Polyline from the Create pull-down menu; the Polyline menu appears.
2. Click on Voids in the Polyline menu. You are prompted to Select master polyline to
process voids.
3. Click on the master polyline. The Voids menu reappears.
4. Toggle Convert Void on. You are prompted to Select void convert to polyline.
5. Click on a void to convert it. The polyline remains, but the void is gone.
 Other Ways to Draw
Drawing lines and entering points directly in the Drawing
Area are the most common ways of drawing. However,
10
In this chapter:
DataCAD LT has other tools that can significantly increase
your productivity and even the accuracy of your drawings. Copying entities
The Copy and Mirror options in the Edit menu are two such Making multiple copies
of entities
tools that can add entities to your drawing with just a few
steps, freeing you from drawing similar things over and over. Mirroring entities

your
DataCAD
ideas LT
before
evenyou begina drawing.
offers tool that With
can be
theused
Freehand
to sketch
tool Sketching

in the Utility menu, you can sketch in a variety of line widths

and line types.
242 | CHAPTER 10: OTHER WAYS TO DRAW

Copying Entities
There are several ways to copy DataCAD LT entities. The Copy option in the Edit pull-down
menu (grouped with Cut and Paste) is a standard Windows command and can be used to quickly
copy entities to other DataCAD LT drawings or to other Windows applications. For details on how
to use Cut, Copy, and Paste, see “Basic Editing Tools” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
The Copy option in the Edit menu in the Menu Window (also available just below the Move
option in the Edit pull-down menu) duplicates entities at a specified distance within the same
drawing. With this option, you can:
• copy entities at a distance and angle that you set,
• copy entities by dragging them,
• copy entities to a different layer in your drawing, or
• make multiple copies of selected entities, arranged in rectangular or circular arrays.
To copy entities in the Z direction, use the Move Z option in the Move menu. See “Moving
Entities” in the “Editing Drawings” chapter for details.

You can also use the icon in the Edit toolbar to copy drawing entities. When you click on
this icon, three options appear in a drop-down menu:

Shortcut: To access the Copy menu, press (C) or (Shift) + (C).

Copying Entities a Specified Distance and Angle

When you use Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window, you are prompted to enter two points.
The distance between these two points will be the distance the copy is drawn from the original
entity you selected; the angle defined by these two points will be the angle the copy is drawn from
the original one.

To copy an entity a specified distance and angle:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window, or click on Copy (located just

below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu, or click on in the Edit toolbar and select

from the drop-down options. The Copy

menu appears and you are prompted to Select first point of the distance to copy. To use
the same distance and angle as the last time you used Copy, click on Prev. Dist.
2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. A directional
arrow appears; notice that moving your mouse changes the length and angle of the arrow.
You are prompted to Select second point of the distance to copy. The points you select in
steps 2 and 3 can be selected anywhere on the screen; they indicate the distance and angle
to copy only; these are not the beginning and ending points of the copy.
 COPYING ENTITIES | 243
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point. For more
information on using coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter. A selection menu as well as other Copy options appear.
4. Click on a selection method in the menu. For more information on using selection menus,
see “Selection Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter. You are prompted to select the
entities you want to copy.
5. Select the entities; they are copied in the drawing. You can continue selecting entities to
make additional copies at the same distance and angle.
6. Copy entities at the same distance and angle but in the opposite direction by clicking on
Invert and then selecting the entities to be copied (see Figure 10.1).
7. Enter a new distance and angle by clicking on New Distance and continuing with step 2
above.

Invert Original Copy

Figure 10.1: Inverting a copy

Copying Entites by Dragging

Instead of entering a specific distance and angle to copy entities, you can simply drag the copy any
distance and at any angle.

To copy entities by dragging them:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window, or click on Copy (located just

below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu, or click on in the Edit toolbar and select

from the drop-down options. The Copy

menu appears.
2. Click on Drag in the Copy menu. The Drag menu appears.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to copy are on a different layer than the
active layer.
4. Drag complex entities more smoothly by setting the maximum number of lines to be
displayed while dragging. Click on Max. Lines and use the value menu to enter the
number of lines. Press (Enter) or right-click to return to the Drag menu. When the entities
you selected to drag contain more lines than the Max. Lines setting, a rectangular box
representing the selected entities appears when you begin to drag them. The entities
reappear after you select the new location for them. When you set Max. Lines to 0, the
rectangular box is always displayed while dragging.
5. Toggle Multiple on to make multiple selections of entities to be copied.
244 | CHAPTER 10: OTHER WAYS TO DRAW
6. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to copy.
7. Select the entities to be copied. You are prompted to Select the point to drag from.
8. Check the button for Multiple. If it is toggled off, skip to step 9. If you toggled Multiple
on in step 5, click on Begin and continue with step 9.
9. Click on a point in the Drawing Area; you can also use coordinate entry or object
snapping to select this point. For more information on using coordinate entry, see
“Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter. You are prompted
to Select new position for these entities.
10. Move your mouse to drag the entities to their new position and click to place them. The
entities are copied in the drawing. You can copy the same entities and place them in
another position by repeating this step. Right-click when you are finished copying.

Copying Entities at the Perpendicular

You can copy an entity a specific distance from and perpendicular to the original. While you can’t
copy an entity at any angle, as you can with the Copy function described above, this is a very
straightforward way to quickly make one entity into an entire row.

To copy an entity perpendicular to the original:

1. Click on Geometry in the Tools pull-down menu and then click on Offset in the extended
menu. You can also click on Geometry in the Utility menu and select Offset in the
Geometry menu. Alternatively, click on the icon in the Edit toolbar. The Offset
menu appears.
2. Set the copy distance using one of the following methods:
• You can toggle Dynamic off (if it’s toggled on) and define the distance just as you
did in steps 2 and 3 in “Copying Entities a Specified Distance and Angle.” Click in
the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to select two points to define the distance.
• You can toggle Dynamic on (if it’s toggled off); you’ll be able to see the position of
the copy before you place it in your drawing.
• You can click on Perp. Dist. to display a value menu. Use the value menu or type
distance and press (Enter). If Perp. Dist. is already toggled on, toggle it off and on
again to display the value menu.
You are prompted to Select object of offset.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to copy are on a different layer than the
active layer.
4. Click on the entity you want to copy. The selected entity appears in dashed lines. If you
toggled Dynamic on in step 2, a copy of the entity is attached to your cursor. You are
prompted with Offset to which side?
5. Click to one side or the other of the original entity. The copy is placed.
 COPYING ENTITIES | 245
6. Continue copying entities by repeating steps 4 and 5; or if Dynamic is toggled on, simply
repeat step 5. To redefine the offset distance, click on New Distance and continue with
step 2 above.

Copying to Another Layer

When you have more than one layer in your drawing, the To Layer option appears in the Copy
menu. To Layer is used to copy entities from one layer to another in your drawing. You can copy
entities in the same position as the original layer (no distance and angle entered) or you can copy
entities to another layer at a specified distance and angle. For more information on creating layers,
see “Creating Layers” in the “Before You Draw” chapter.

To copy entities to another layer without changing their positions:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on Copy (located just

below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu. Or click on in the Edit toolbar and

select from the drop-down options. The

Copy menu appears.
2. Click on To Layer in the Copy menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears and
you are prompted to Select layer to copy to.
3. Click on the layer you’d like to copy entities to or type the name of the layer and press
(Enter). If your drawing has many layers, you can use the Match and Filter options in the
To Layer menu to select or find the layer you want to copy to. For details on how to use
these options, see “Selecting Layers Without Using Layer Names” and “Searching for
Layers” in the “Before You Draw” chapter.
4. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to copy.
5. Select the entities; they are copied to the layer you chose in step 3. You can continue
selecting entities to make additional copies.
6. Choose another layer to copy entities to by clicking on New Layer and continuing with
step 3 above.

To copy entities to another layer at a specific distance and angle:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on Copy (located just

below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu. Or click on in the Edit toolbar and

select from the drop-down options. The

Copy menu appears. You are prompted to Select first point of the distance to copy.
2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. A directional
arrow appears; notice that moving your mouse changes the length and angle of the arrow.
You are prompted to Select second point of the distance to copy. The points you select in
steps 2 and 3 can be selected anywhere on the screen; they indicate the distance and angle
to copy only; these are not the beginning and ending points of the copy. To use the same
distance and angle as the last time you used Copy, click on Prev. Dist.
246 | CHAPTER 10: OTHER WAYS TO DRAW
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point. A selection
menu as well as other Copy options appears.
4. Click on To Layer in the Copy menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears and
you are prompted to Select layer to copy to.
5. Click on the layer you’d like to copy entities to or type the name of the layer and press
(Enter). A selection menu as well as other Copy options appears. For more information on
using selection menus, see “Selection Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
6. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to copy.
7. Select the entities; they are copied to the layer you chose in step 5. You can continue
selecting entities to make additional copies.
8. Choose another layer to copy entities to if necessary. Just click on New Layer and
continue with step 5 above.

Copying Using Arrays

You can make multiple copies of an entity in a one-dimensional, rectangular, or circular array. A
one-dimensional array simply makes multiple copies in one direction. In a circular array, an entity
is copied a specified number of times at a specified angle of separation around a center of rotation.
A rectangular array repeats an entity a specified number of times at a specified angle. You can
copy an array of elements in the X direction, the Y direction, or in both directions at the same
time. The number of X and Y repetitions determines the total number of entities in the array. An
array of one X repetition and one Y repetition has only one entity, the original. A two-by-two array
has a total of four entities (see figures 10.2 and 10.3). You can also change the angle of the X and
Y axes to create a rectangular array at the specified angle.

X Repetitions =3
Y Repetitions =1

DistancetoCopy

Result

Figure 10.2: Creating a rectangular array in only the X direction. You can also use Array in the Copy
menu to make multiple copies in only one direction. See the instructions for copying an entity in a one-
dimensional array below.
 COPYING ENTITIES | 247

DistancetoCopy

YRepetitions
XRepetitions=1
=4

Figure 10.3: Creating a rectangular array in only the Y direction. You can also use Array in the Copy
menu to make multiple copies in only one direction. See the instructions for copying an entity in a one-
dimensional array below.

To copy an entity in a one-dimensional array:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on Copy (located just

below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu. Or click on in the Edit toolbar and
select from the drop-down options. The Copy menu
appears. You are prompted to Select first point of the distance to copy.
2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. A directional
arrow appears; notice that moving your mouse changes the length and angle of the arrow.
You are prompted to Select second point of the distance to copy. The points you select in
steps 2 and 3 can be selected anywhere on the screen; they indicate only the distance and
direction of each copy in the array; these are not the beginning and ending points of the
copy.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point.
If you used the icon from the Edit toolbar in step 1, a value menu appears; skip to step 5.
If you used selected Copy from either the Edit menu in the Menu Window or the Edit
pull-down menu, a selection menu as well as other Copy options appear in the Menu
Window; go to step 4.
4. Click on Array in the Copy menu. A value menu appears and you are prompted to Enter
the number of repetitions.
5. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). You are prompted to select the
entities you want to copy.
6. Select the entities; they are copied in the array you defined. You can continue selecting
entities to make additional copies.
248 | CHAPTER 10: OTHER WAYS TO DRAW
To copy an entity in a rectangular array:
1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on Copy (located just
below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu. The Copy menu appears. Go to step 2.

Or click on in the Edit toolbar and select

from the drop-down options. The Rect.
Array menu appears. You are prompted to Select first point of the distance to copy. Skip
to step 3.
2. Click on Rect. Array in the Copy menu. The Rect. Array menu appears and you are
prompted to Select first point of the distance to copy.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. Two bi
directional arrows appear, representing the X and Y axes. Notice that moving your mouse
changes the length and direction of the arrows; the length and direction of the arrows
indicates the distance and angle you want to copy entities at. You are prompted to Select
second point of the distance to copy. The points you select in steps 3 and 4 can be
selected anywhere on the screen; they indicate only the distance and direction of each
copy in the array; these are not the beginning and ending points of the copy. For more
information on using coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point. A value
menu appears and you are prompted to Enter number ofX-repetitions. For more
information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
5. Select the number of repetitions from the value menu or type a number and press (Enter).
You are prompted to Enter number of Y-repetitions.
6. Select the number of repetitions from the value menu or type a number and press (Enter).
The Rect. Array menu offers selection methods and other options.
7. Toggle Counter on in the Rect. Array menu to display on the Attention toolbar the
number of entities added each time you copy.
8. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to copy.
9. Select the entities; they are copied in the array you defined. You can continue selecting
entities to make additional copies.
10. Click on NewArray to define another rectangular array, then continue with step 3 above.
If you don’t want to define another array, right-click or click on Exit to return to the Edit
menu.
Keep in mind that an array is a separate group from the original copied entity. If you use Group in
the selection menu and select an entity in an array, the entire array will be copied.
 COPYING ENTITIES | 249

Original
'X'Distance
To Copy

XRepetitions= 4
'Y'Distance YRepetitions= 3
To Copy

Result

Figure 10.4: Creating a rectangular array

To copy an entity in a rectangular array set at an angle:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on Copy (located just
below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu. The Copy menu appears. Go to step 2.

Or click on in the Edit toolbar and select

from the drop-down options. The Rect.
Array menu appears. Skip to step 3.
2. Click on Rect. Array in the Copy menu. The Rect. Array menu appears.
3. Click on Angular in the Rect. Array menu. You are prompted to Select first point of the
distance to copy.
4. Enter the angle for the X axis for the copy by defining the beginning and end points of a
directional arrow. The points you select for directional arrows can be selected anywhere
on the screen; they indicate only the distance and direction of each copy in the array and
not the beginning and ending points of the copy. Click in the Drawing Area or use
coordinate entry to enter the beginning point. A directional arrow appears; notice that
moving your mouse changes the angle of the arrow. You are prompted to Select vector
indicating angle of array. For more information on using coordinate entry, see “Drawing
Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
250 | CHAPTER 10: OTHER WAYS TO DRAW
5. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. Two bi
directional arrows appear, representing the X and Y axes. Notice that moving your mouse
changes the length and direction of the arrows; the length and direction of the arrows
indicates the distance and angle you want to copy entities at. You are prompted to Select
the second point of the distance to copy. The points you select in steps 4 and 5 can be
selected anywhere on the screen; they indicate only the distance and direction of each
copy in the array; these are not the beginning and ending points of the copy. For more
information on using coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.
6. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point. A value
menu appears and you are prompted to Enter number ofX-repetitions. For more
information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
7. Select the number of repetitions from the value menu or type a number and press (Enter).
You are prompted to Enter number of Y-repetitions.
8. Select the number of repetitions from the value menu or type a number and press (Enter).
The Rect. Array menu offers selection methods and other options.
9. Toggle Counter on in the Rect. Array menu to display the number of entities added each
time you copy.
10. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to copy.
11. Select the entities; they are copied in the array you defined. You can continue selecting
entities to make additional copies.
12. Click on NewArray to define another rectangular array and continue with step 3 above. If
you don’t want to define another array, right-click or click on Exit to return to the Edit
menu.
Keep in mind that an array is a separate group from the original copied entity. If you use Group in
the selection menu and select an entity in an array, the entire array will be copied.

To copy an entity in a circular array:

1. Click on Copy in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. Or click on Copy (located just

below Move) in the Edit pull-down menu. Or click on in the Edit toolbar and
select from the drop-down options. The Copy menu
appears.
2. Click on Circ. Array in the Copy menu. The Circ. Array menu appears and you are
prompted to Select center point of array. For more information on circular array options,
see “More About Circ. Array Menu Options” later in this chapter.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the center point. A value menu
appears and you are prompted to Enter relative X-distance. For more information on
using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). Another value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter relative Y-distance.
 COPYING ENTITIES | 251
5. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). Another value menu appears and
you are prompted to Select angle between items (+=CCW, -=CW). If you enter a positive
angle, the array will be copied in a counterclockwise direction; if you enter a negative
angle, the array will be copied in a clockwise direction.
6. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). Another value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter number of objects in array.
7. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). The Circ. Array menu appears.
8. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to copy.
9. Select the entities; they are copied in the array you defined. You can continue selecting
entities to make additional copies. When you are finished, click on Exit or right-click to
return to the Edit menu.
Keep in mind that an array is a separate group from the original copied entity. If you use Group in
the selection menu and select an entity in an array, the entire array will be copied.

More About Using Z Elevations in Rectangular Arrays

The Z elevation can be increased or decreased incrementally with each repetition in a rectangular
array. In the Rect. Array menu, the Z Inc. X option sets the Z elevation in the X direction of an
array, while the Z Inc. Y option sets the Z elevation in the Y direction of an array. To set an
incremental Z elevation for an array that copies an entity in both the X and Y directions, set both
options.
The Z Inc. X and Z Inc. Y options are set using value menus. For more information on using value
menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
You can use the Z Inc. X and Z Inc. Y to generate such things as three-dimensional stairs with only
a few keystrokes (see Figure 10.5). You can also generate several three-dimensional floors of a
building by setting Z Inc. X or Z Inc. Y to the floor-to-floor height for the building and copying a
rectangular array with an X and Y distance of zero. This creates an array of floors, stacked one
above the other.

X Repetitions = 1 ZIncr X=0

Y Repetitions = 8 ZIncr Y=8"

Figure 10.5: Creating 3D stairs with the incremental Z elevation options

252 | CHAPTER 10: OTHER WAYS TO DRAW
More About Circ. Array Menu Options
You can change array settings, set a Z elevation for the array, and even rotate the entity copies
using the following Circ. Array menu options:
New Center Sets a new center for the array you are copying; click on New Center, select a new center point
for the array, and then select the entity to copy.
Obj. Center Sets a new center for the entity you are copying; click on Obj. Center, select a new center
point for the entity, and then select the entity to copy.
Sep. Angle Sets a new angle of separation between each entity in the array; click on Sep. Angle, enter a
new angle, and press (Enter).
No. Object Sets a new number of repetitions for the array; click on No. Object, enter a new number, and
press (Enter).
Z Increment Sets the Z elevation with each repetition in the array; click on Z Increment, enter a positive
value to increase the elevation or a negative value to decrease it, and press (Enter) (use this
option to draw 3D circular stairs).
Rotate Toggle on to rotate each copy in the array by an angle equal to the angle of separation; toggle
off to leave the orientation of each copy in the array the same as the original entity.

Mirroring Entities
In some projects, being able to copy and mirror part of your drawing would save you a lot of time.
For instance, it would be far more efficient to draw only one side of a hotel corridor and mirror
that side to create the full corridor than it would be to draw both sides. The Mirror option in the
Edit menu allows you to do just that, mirroring geometry across a reflection line that you define.

To mirror entities:
1. Click on Mirror in either the Edit menu in the Menu Window or the Edit pull-down

menu. Or click on the icon (mirror only) in the Edit toolbar if you want to mirror the

entity and move it to the opposite side of the line of reflection. Or click on the icon
(mirror and copy) in the Edit toolbar if you want to mirror the entity, copy it to the
opposite side of the line of reflection, and keep the original entity in its place. The Mirror
menu appears and you are prompted to Select first point along the line of reflection.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (M) to access the 2D Mirror menu.
Hint: You can use the same reflection line as the last time you used Mirror. Instead of
defining a new reflection line, click on Prev. Line in the Mirror menu. This displays the
previous line of reflection. The Prev. Line option is only available if you have used Mirror
during the current drawing session. If you want to keep the previous line of reflection, skip
to step 5. If you want to change the previous line of reflection, go to step 4.

2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to select the first point of the reflection
line. You are prompted to Select second point along the line of reflection.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to select the second point of the
reflection line. DataCAD LT draws a temporary, dashed line representing the reflection
line. The Mirror menu appears.
4. Determine if the reflection line is not correct. If you want to change it, click on New
Line, then repeat steps 2 and 3 to create a new line of refelction.
 SKETCHING YOUR PLAN | 253
5. Mirror and copy the selected entities across the reflection line by toggling And Copy on.
Toggle And Copy off to mirror and move selected entities across the reflection line.

If you clicked on the icon, And Copy is toggled off; if you clicked on the icon,
And Copy is toggled on.

6. Toggle Fix Text on to mirror the position of text but not its orientation. When Fix Text is
toggled off, text is mirrored and rotated 180° (see Figure 10.6).
7. Click on a selection method. You are prompted to select the entities you want to mirror.
8. Select the entities; they are mirrored across the reflection line you defined. You can
continue selecting entities to mirror. When you are finished, click on Exit or right-click to
leave the Mirror menu and return to the Edit menu.

Figure 10.6: Mirroring text with Fix Text toggled on (left) and toggled off (right)

Sketching Your Plan

You can use the Freehand option to sketch lines in varying widths and line types. When using line
types such as dotted or dashed, you can give a rendered or weighted quality to the lines by varying
the speed that you move the cursor across the Drawing Area as you draw. Sketching with Freehand
works best if you toggle both grid snapping and ortho mode off. Press (X) to toggle grid snapping
off; press (O) to toggle ortho mode off.

To sketch:
1. Click on Freehand in the Utility menu. The Freehand menu appears.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (H) to access the Freehand menu.

2. Toggle Lines on to draw lines, toggle 3D Lines on to draw three-dimensional lines, or

toggle Polyline on to draw polylines. You can toggle only one of these three options on at
any given time.
3. Toggle Closed on to automatically close the shape when you finish drawing.
4. Click in the Drawing Area and then move your mouse to draw.
254 | CHAPTER 10: OTHER WAYS TO DRAW
5. Click to disconnect your cursor from the line when your sketch is complete. You can
continue drawing additional shapes.
6. Click on Exit or right-click to return to the Utility menu.
 Drawing Tools
There are many tools in DataCAD LT to aid in drawing.
Reference points can be set anywhere in your drawing, In this chapter:
11
giving you a precise way to position new entities. Object
snapping can help you add entities to existing geometry Setting reference points
quickly and accurately. Object snapping

You can also identify and measure entities in your drawing Identifying entities
to
drawn
retrieve
on, type and its length angle,
or even its its
information,
arealine such
or perimeter lineasweight,
what layer
measurements. the or
entity is Measuring entities
Dividing entities
Editing entity attributes
256 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS

Setting Reference Points

A reference point is used as a starting point for drawing. In DataCAD LT, there are two kinds of
reference points: floating and fixed.
Floating reference points are useful when you use relative coordinate entry methods to draw. They
can be set at any time, regardless of what menu appears or what you’re drawing. Floating
reference points are temporary and can be displayed and snapped to, but they can’t be plotted.
To see how floating reference points are used when drawing, see the “Tutorial: Drawing a
Schoolhouse” chapter, specifically the instructions on drawing interior walls and adding windows
and doors to the schoolhouse.
Fixed reference points are useful when you use absolute coordinate entry methods to draw.
Absolute coordinate entry uses absolute zero as a fixed point of reference: every time you enter a
point using absolute coordinate entry, the distances you enter are measured from absolute zero.
With a fixed reference point, you can use another point in your drawing, exactly as you would use
absolute zero.

To set a floating reference point:

1. Click on Reference Point in the Tools pull-down menu. The Ref. Point menu appears.
Shortcut: Press (`) [located in the upper-left corner of most keyboards, just below (Esc)]
to quickly access the Ref. Point menu and set a reference point. After selecting a point,
you are automatically returned to the menu you were working in before you set the point.

2. Click on Draw Marks to display a small “x,” representing the reference point.
3. Click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing
to select the reference point. The reference point is marked with a small “x.” Reference
points are displayed until you refresh your drawing by pressing (Esc).

To set a fixed reference point:

1. Click on Settings in the Utility menu. The Settings menu appears.
2. Toggle Draw Marks on in the Settings menu if you want the fixed reference point marked
with a small “x.” Toggle Draw Marks off if you don’t want the small “x” to appear.
3. Click on Fixed Ref. in the Settings menu. You are prompted to Select fixed reference
point using cursor.
4. Click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing
to select the reference point. If Draw Marks was toggled on in step 2, the reference point
is marked with a small “x.” Reference points are displayed until you refresh your drawing
by pressing (Esc).
5. Right-click to exit the Settings menu. You can now continue drawing, using your fixed
reference point.
6. Use absolute zero again if necessary. Instead of your fixed reference point, click on
Settings in the Utility menu, toggle Fixed Ref. off and then on again (click on the option
twice); next, click on Abs. Zero. Right-click to exit the Settings menu and continue
drawing.
 SETTING REFERENCE POINTS | 257
More About Setting Reference Points
Reference points can give you a quick way to draw very precisely. For example, to insert a
window in a wall 3’-0” from the corner of a room, you could create a reference point at that corner
and then, using relative Cartesian for coordinate entry, simply enter the distance (in this case, it is
3’-0”) from the reference point.

To use a reference point, using this example:

1. Make sure the current input mode is Relative Cartesian. You can do this in several ways:
click on Input Mode in the Tools pull-down menu and make sure Relative Cartesian is
checked; check the input mode in the Status Panel toolbar; or press (Ins) until Current
input mode = Relative Cartesian (x, y) appears in the Attention toolbar.
2. Click on Window in the Create pull-down menu, or select Windows in the Edit/Architect

menu, or click on the icon in the Draw toolbar. The Windows menu appears.
3. Press (`); the Ref. Point menu appears.
Shortcut: To set a reference point using the mouse, press (Ctrl) and click. To set a
reference point at a specific point on an entity by object snapping to it, press (Ctrl) and
click the middle mouse button or press (Ctrl) + (Shift) and click the left mouse button.

4. Toggle Draw Marks on to display the reference point.

5. Object snap to the inside left corner of the wall to place your reference point exactly at
the corner intersection. You are prompted to Select one jamb of window. For more
information on object snapping, see “Object Snapping” in this chapter.
6. Press (Spacebar) to activate coordinate entry. You are prompted to Enter relative X-
distance.
7. Type 3 and press (Enter). You are prompted to Enter relative Y-distance.
8. Type 0 and press (Enter). Your cursor is connected to a point on the wall that is 3’-0”
from the corner of the room. You are prompted to Select second jamb of window.
9. Press (Spacebar) to activate coordinate entry and enter the X and Y coordinates for the
other side of the window. You are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the wall.
10. Click anywhere outside the wall. The window is drawn, exactly 3’-0” from the corner of
the room.
Using reference points with direction-distance coordinate entry is even easier and faster.

To use a reference point and direction-distance mode, using the same example:
1. Make sure the current input mode is Direction-Distance. You can do this in several ways:
click on Input Mode in the Tools pull-down menu and make sure Direction/Distance is
checked; check the input mode in the Status Panel toolbar; or press (Ins) until Current
input mode = Direction, Distance appears in the Attention toolbar.
2. Click on Window in the Create pull-down menu, or select Windows in the Edit/Architect

menu, or click on the icon in the Draw toolbar. The Windows menu appears.
258 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
3. Press (`); the Ref. Point menu appears.
4. Toggle Draw Marks on to display the reference point.
5. Object snap to the inside left corner of the wall to place your reference point exactly at
the corner intersection. You are prompted to Indicate the reference angle, which is the
direction that will be used in the following steps.
6. Make sure Ortho mode is on, then drag your cursor to the right and click. You are
prompted to Select one jamb of window.
Shortcut: To toggle Ortho mode on or off, press (O).

7. Press (Spacebar), type 3, and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select second jamb of
window.
8. Drag your cursor to the right. Press (Spacebar), type the width of the window, and press
(Enter). You are prompted to Select any point on the outside of the wall.
9. Click anywhere on the exterior side. The window is inserted in the wall.

Object Snapping
Object snapping is a precise way of selecting a point on an existing entity or selecting a snap point
that you’ve set. Depending on what drawing function is in progress, this point may simply be
entered to complete the task or your cursor may be attached to that point so you can begin drawing
from there.
You can object snap to drawing entities and snap points in several ways. You can use one method
or any combination of the object snapping methods described in this chapter.
Shortcut: Press (N) or (Shift) + (N) to use object snapping.

Object Snap Menu Options

Most object snapping options are in the Utility/Object Snap menu; however, a related function
called Get-Snap also uses snapping to help you draw. See “Using Get-Snap” later in this chapter
for details.
None Toggles all object snap methods off.
Fast Symbol Toggle on to snap only to symbol insertion points rather than end points within the symbol.
Increases object snapping speed. See “More About Increasing Snapping Speed” in this chapter.
Fast 3D Toggle on to snap to the center marker of circular 3D entities. Increases object snapping speed.
See “More About Increasing Snapping Speed” in this chapter.
Miss Dist. Set the distance your cursor can be from a point while still being able to snap to it.
Layer Snap Toggle on to snap to entities on all displayed layers; toggle off to snap to entities only on the
active layer.
Search Hatch Toggle on to snap to hatch lines; toggle off to ignore hatching when object snapping and
increase snapping speed.
Quick Toggle on to snap to the first entity you drew; toggle off to snap to the nearest point according
to the snapping methods you have toggled on. Increases object snapping speed. See “More
About Increasing Snapping Speed” in this chapter.
Sel. Set Toggle on to snap only to entities in the active selection set. Increases object snapping speed.
See “More About Increasing Snapping Speed” in this chapter.
Aperture Toggle on to display a box representing the miss distance. Toggle Aperture on to make sure
the point you want to snap to is inside the miss distance.
 OBJECT SNAPPING | 259
More About Snapping Points
You can add snapping points anywhere in your drawing; these points are displayed as dots in the
Drawing Area but can’t be plotted.

To add a snapping point to your drawing:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Measures.
2. Click on Snap Point in the Measures menu.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the snapping point. The point
appears in the Drawing Area.

More About Using Your Mouse for Snapping

If you’re using a three-button mouse, set your middle mouse button to Middle Button; do not set it
to Double Click, because you will not be able to use it for object snapping. If your middle mouse
button doesn’t seem to be snapping to points, check your mouse settings.

To check your mouse settings:

1. Close DataCAD LT if it is running. From the Windows Start menu, click on Settings and
then on Control Panel.
2. Double-click on Mouse in the Control Panel window to open the Mouse Properties dialog
box.
3. Click on the Devices tab and make sure you have a three-button mouse driver installed.
4. Click on the Buttons tab and make sure the left button is set to Click Select, the middle
button is set to Middle Button, and the right button is set to Alternate Menu/Click Select.
If there is no Middle Button setting, set the middle mouse button to Unassigned or
Default. Another option is to use Auto-Scroll.
5. Click on OK to close the dialog box.

More About Increasing Snapping Speed

There are several options you can use to increase object snapping speed. Use Sel. Set, Search
Hatch, and Fast Symbol to more precisely target the geometry you want to snap to.
The Fast 3D option can also increase snapping speed when your drawing has many circular 3D
entities, such as 3D arcs, cylinders, cones, domes, tori, or contour curves. When you toggle on
Fast 3D and then select entities using the area or fence selection method, only those entities whose
center axis markers or control points are within the defined area or fence are selected.

Snapping to the Nearest Point

You can snap to the point nearest your cursor, regardless of what other object snap options are
toggled on. For instance, even if you don’t have Mid Point toggled on, it is still possible to snap to
the midpoint of a line using the Nearest option, as long as that midpoint is the point nearest to your
cursor.
260 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
To snap to the nearest point:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears. Press (PageDown) to zoom in on your drawing and place your cursor
more accurately.
Shortcut: Press (Shift) +(X) to access the Object Snap menu.

2. Click on Nearest in the Object Snap menu.

3. Move your cursor close to the point you’d like to snap to and press (N) or click the
middle mouse button. The nearest point on any entity is snapped to.

Snapping to Dividing Points

You can divide an entity in a specified number of sections, with each section separated by a
snapping point. These snapping points are only visible if Draw Marks is toggled on in the Settings
menu and after you snap to them.

Figure 11.1: Snapping to a point on a divided entity

To snap to a dividing point:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears.
2. Click on No. Points in the Object Snap menu. A value menu appears.
3. Set the number of divisions for an entity by use the value menu or typing a number. Then
press (Enter).
4. Move your cursor close to the point you’d like to snap to and press (N) or click the
middle mouse button. The nearest division point is snapped to.

Snapping to End Points

You can snap to the end points of entities in your drawing.

Figure 11.2: Snapping to an end point of a line

 OBJECT SNAPPING | 261
To snap to the nearest end point:
1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears. You can also snap to end points of lines in unexploded symbols and nested
symbols. For more information on symbols, see the “Symbols, Images, and Objects”
chapter.
2. Click on End Point in the Object Snap menu.
3. Move your cursor close to the point you’d like to snap to and press (N) or click the
middle mouse button. The nearest end point is snapped to.

Snapping to the Midpoint of a Line

You can snap to the nearest midpoint of a line.

Figure 11.3: Snapping to the midpoint of a line

To snap to the nearest midpoint of a line:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears.
2. Click on Mid Point in the Object Snap menu.
3. Move your cursor close to the point you’d like to snap to and press (N) or click the
middle mouse button. The nearest midpoint is snapped to.

Snapping to Arc and Circle Centers

You can snap to the center point of an arc or circle.

Figure 11.4: Snapping to the center point of a circle

To snap to the nearest center point:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears.
262 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
2. Click on Center in the Object Snap menu.
3. Move your cursor close to the point you’d like to snap to and press (N) or click the
middle mouse button. The nearest center point of any arc or circle point is snapped to.

Snapping to Quadrant Points

You can snap to points marking the north, south, east, or west quadrants of a circle or arc.

Figure 11.5: Snapping to a quadrant point on a circle

To snap to the nearest quadrant point:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears.
2. Click on Quadrant in the Object Snap menu.
3. Move your cursor close to the point you’d like to snap to and press (N) or click the
middle mouse button. The nearest quadrant point is snapped to.

Snapping to Intersections
You can snap to the intersection of lines, arcs, and circles.

Figure 11.6: Snapping to an intersection of two lines

To snap to the nearest intersection point:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears.
2. Click on Intersect in the Object Snap menu.
3. Move your cursor close to the point you’d like to snap to and press (N) or click the
middle mouse button. The nearest intersection point is snapped to.
 OBJECT SNAPPING | 263
Snapping to a Perpendicular
You can use perpendicular snapping to draw a line that is perfectly perpendicular to another line,
arc, or circle.

90°

Figure 11.7: Snapping to a point that forms a perpendicular to a line

To draw a line perpendicular to another entity:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears.
2. Click on Perp. in the Object Snap menu.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (O) to toggle Perp. object snapping on and off.

3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first end point of the line.
4. Move your cursor close to the entity you’d like to draw the line perpendicular to and
press (N) or click the middle mouse button to snap to it. The nearest perpendicular point
on that entity is snapped to.

Snapping to Tangents
You can use tangent snapping to draw a line that is tangent to an arc or circle.

Figure 11.8: Snapping to a point that forms a tangent with a circle

To draw a line that is tangent to an arc or circle:

1. Go to the Utility menu and click on Object Snap. You can also click on Settings in the
Tools pull-down menu and then click on Object Snap in the submenu. The Object Snap
menu appears.
2. Click on Tangent in the Object Snap menu.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first end point of the line.
4. Move your cursor close to the arc or circle you’d like to draw the line tangent to and
press (N) or click the middle mouse button to snap to it. The nearest tangent point on the
arc or circle is snapped to.
 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
264 Using Get-Snap
Get-Snap allows you to input distances relative to other objects in the drawing. Instead of
inputting a distance, you can simply object snap to a point; the distance between your original
point and the point you snapped to is automatically entered. So you can quickly create, move,
copy, or stretch entities that align with other objects without having to draw guidelines or markers
first.
Hint: You can only access Get-Snap functions with the middle mouse button, not with the object
snap keyboard shortcut (N) or (Shift) + (N).

To use snapping to enter a horizontal or vertical distance:

1. Enter a point in your drawing. This may be one end point of a wall or the first point in the
distance to move an entity.
2. Press and hold down (Shift) while you click the middle mouse button for object snap. The
Get-Snap pop-up menu appears.

Figure 11.9: The Get-Snap pop-up menu

3. Click on either Get X or Get Y and begin to type a number. A value menu appears and the
number you are typing appears in the input field in the Message toolbar that prompts you
to Enter relative X-distance.
4. Continue typing the X distance value and press (Enter). Another value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter relative Y-distance. If you want to enter a negative value, type
the “-” (minus) sign at the beginning of the input field.
5. Type the Y distance value and press (Enter). If you want to enter a negative value, type
the “-” (minus) sign at the beginning of the input field. The line extends from your initial
point to the one you just designated. Since your cursor is attached to the last point you
designated, you can continue to input horizontal and vertical distances to extend the line.

To add to or subtract from the Get X distance:

1. Enter a point in your drawing. This may be one end point of a wall or the first point in the
distance to move an entity.
2. Press and hold down (Shift) and object snap to a point in your drawing. The Get-Snap
pop-up menu appears.
3. Click on Get X + Distance to enter a horizontal distance; click on Get Y + Distance to
enter a vertical distance. A value menu appears and you are prompted to Enter relative
distance.
 OBJECT SNAPPING | 265
4. Type a positive value to add to the distance between your original point and the point you
snapped to; type a negative value to subtract from the distance between your original
point and the point you snapped to.
5. Press (Enter). The distance is entered.

To use snapping to define an angle:

1. Enter a point in your drawing. This may be one end point of a wall or the first point in the
distance to move an entity.
2. Press and hold down (Shift) and object snap to the point that lies along the angle. The
Get-Snap pop-up menu appears.
3. Click on Get Angle from the pop-up menu. A value menu appears and you are prompted
to Enter relative distance.
4. Use the value menu or type a length for your line and press (Enter). The line is created at
the referenced angle and length.

To use snapping to define an angle, and then add or subtract from it:
1. Enter a point in your drawing. This may be one end point of a wall or the first point in the
distance to move an entity.
2. Press and hold down (Shift) and object snap to the point that lies along the angle. The
Get-Snap pop-up menu appears.
3. Click on Get Angle + Angle in the pop-up menu. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to Enter angle from the origin.
4. Use the value menu to enter the angle to add to the reference angle or type an angle and
press (Enter). The default is 90°. A value menu appears and you are prompted to Enter
relative distance.
5. Use the value menu to enter the length of the line or type a value and press (Enter). The
line is created at the referenced angle and length.

Using Virtual Snapping

In the Object Snap menu, the Virtual option applies only to Nearest, Intersect, and Perp. snapping
methods. When Virtual is turned off, DataCAD LT's object snapping mechanism will only return
points that lie on line segments passing through the current Miss Dist. (the snap aperture) and will
not return either intersections or perpendiculars that lie beyond the endpoints of these lines.

By default, Virtual is toggled off. If you want Virtual to be toggled on when you open drawings
created prior to DataCAD LT 10 for the first time, you can add the following entry to the [General]
section of the DCADLT.INI file:

Virtual Snapping=TRUE

To use virtual snapping:

1. Click on Object Snap in the Utility menu. The Object Snap menu appears.
266 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
2. Make sure that one of the options Nearest, Intersect, and Perp. is active.
3. Toggle Virtual on.

Identifying Entities
You can review the attributes of any entity in your drawing.

To identify an entity:
1. Click on Identify in the Tools pull-down menu; or click on Identify in the Edit menu in

the Menu Window; or click on the icon in the Edit toolbar. The Identify menu
appears.
Shortcut: Press (Shift) + (I) or (Alt) + (I) to access the Identify menu.

2. Click on the entity in your drawing that you want to identify. The selected entity is
temporarily displayed as dashed lines and a list of its attributes appears in the Menu
Window. It may be necessary to change the view of your drawing, so that you have a
clear view of the entity you want to identify. Click on 3D Views in the Identify menu to
display the 3D Views menu and change the view of your drawing, choose a view from the
View pull-down menu, or simply zoom in on your drawing.

To identify an entity with the pop-up menu:

1. Place your cursor on the entity you want to identify.
2. Hold down the (Ctrl) key while you right-click with the mouse. The entity appears as a
dashed line and a pop-up menu appears.

Figure 11.10: The pop-up menu

3. Click on Identify in the pop-up menu to look at the properties of the entity you selected.

More About Entity Attributes

The attributes displayed when you identify an entity can vary, depending on the type of entity. For
example, if you identify a line, the following information might be displayed:
LINE (entity type) Click on the entity type to display all of that entity’s attributes in the
Coordinates/Hints and Attention toolbars.
Walls (layer entity is on)
White (entity color)
 MEASURING ENTITIES | 267
Solid (line type)
Spacing (line spacing) Click on Spacing, Line Weight, Overshoot, Z-Base, or Z-Height to display
that information in the Attention toolbar.
Line Weight (line weight)
Overshoot (line overshoot)
Z-Base (z-base of line)
Z-Height (z-height of line)

If you select text, the following information might be displayed:

TEXT (entity type)
Text (layer entity is on)
Red (entity color)
Romans (font)
Size (text size) Click on Size, Angle, Weight, Slant, or Aspect to display that information in
the Attention toolbar.
Angle (text angle)
Weight (text weight)
Slant (text slant)
Aspect (text aspect ratio)

Measuring Entities
You can measure the length or angle of entities or measure the distance between two points
without dimensioning them. You can also calculate areas and perimeters as well as the total length
of lines in your drawing. And most measurements can be added as text to your drawing.

Measuring Lengths and Angles

You can take a variety of measurements of lines, arcs, and angles in your drawing.

To measure the length of a line:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Line in the
extended menu. Or click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Line in the
Measures menu. You are prompted to Select line.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (X) to access the Measures menu.

2. Click on the line in your drawing that you want to identify. The line appears as a dashed
line and the measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
3. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

To measure the angle of a line:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Line Angle. Or
click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Line Angle in the Measures menu.
You are prompted to Select line.
2. Click on the line. The angle measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
3. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.
268 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
To measure the distance between two points in your drawing:
1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Pnt. To Pnt. Or
click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Pnt. To Pnt. in the Measures menu.
You are prompted to Select first point of distance to measure.
2. Click on the first point, object snap to a point, or use coordinate entry to select a point.
You are prompted to Select second point of distance to measure.
3. Click on the second point, object snap to a point, or use coordinate entry to select a point.
The measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
4. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

To measure the diameter of a curve:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Diameter. Or click
on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Diameter in the Measures menu. You are
prompted to Select curve.
2. Click on the curve in your drawing that you want to identify. The curve appears as a
dashed line and the measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
3. Add this measurement in text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

To measure the radius of a curve:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Radius. Or click on
Measures in the Utility menu and click on Radius in the Measures menu. You are
prompted to Select curve.
2. Click on the curve in your drawing that you want to identify. It’s displayed in a dashed
line and the measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
3. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

To measure the chord length of an arc::

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Chord. Or click on
Measures in the Utility menu and click on Chord in the Measures menu. You are
prompted to Select curve.
2. Click on the curve in your drawing that you want to identify. It’s displayed in a dashed
line and the measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
3. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.
 MEASURING ENTITIES | 269
To measure the arc length of a curve:
1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Arc Length. Or
click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Arc Length in the Measures menu.
You are prompted to Select curve.
2. Click on the curve in your drawing that you want to identify. It’s displayed in a dashed
line and the measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
3. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

To measure the circumference of a circle:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Circ. Or click on
Measures in the Utility menu and click on Circ. in the Measures menu. You are prompted
to Select curve.
2. Click on the circle in your drawing that you want to identify. It’s displayed in a dashed
line and the measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
3. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

To measure the included angle between two lines:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Incl. Angle. Or
click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Incl. Angle in the Measures menu.
You are prompted to Select first line of angle to measure.
2. Click on the first line. You are prompted to Select second line of distance to measure.
3. Click on the second line. The measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
4. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

To measure the excluded angle between two lines:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Excl. Angle. Or
click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Excl. Angle in the Measures menu.
You are prompted to Select first line of angle to measure.
2. Click on the first line. You are prompted to Select second line of distance to measure.
3. Click on the second line. The measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
4. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing, setting the text
options as necessary, and clicking in the drawing where you want to place the text.

Measuring the Total Length of Lines

You can calculate the total length of lines in a drawing according to color, line type, and line
weight. You can use the Color, Line Type, and Weight filters individually or in any combination.
270 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
To measure total length of lines:
1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Takeoffs. Or click
on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Takeoffs in the Measures menu. The
Takeoffs menu appears.
2. Decide which lines you want to include:
• To include all lines of a specific color in the measurement, click on Color in the
Takeoffs menu and then select a color from the color menu. For more information on
using color menus, see “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
• To include all lines of a specific type, click on Line Type in the Takeoffs menu and
then select a line type from the menu.
• To include all lines of a specific weight, click on Weight in the Takeoffs menu and
then select a weight from the value menu. For more information on using value
menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
• To include lines on all displayed layers, toggle Layer Search on. Toggle it off to
include only those lines on the active layer.
3. Click on Begin. The measurement appears in the Attention toolbar.
4. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing; choose to add
the area, the perimeter, or both to your drawing; set the text options as necessary; and
click in the drawing where you want to place the text.

Measuring Areas, Perimeters, and Volumes

You can calculate the area, perimeter, and volume of an existing polyline or circle in your drawing,
or you can define a temporary polyline to measure an area or arc in your drawing.

To measure the area, perimeter, and volume of an existing polyline or circle:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Area/Perimeter. Or
click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Area/Per. in the Measures menu. The
Area/Per. menu appears.
2. Click on Scale Type; a list of scale types appears. This Scale Type setting is independent
from the drawing scale type set in the Settings/Scale Type.
3. Click on a scale type to select it and right-click to exit the scale type list. If you selected
Decimal, Inch/Decimal, Meters, Centimeter, Millimeter, DIN, or AS1100 for the scale
type, the Area Prec. option is available in the scale type menu if Do Float is toggled off.
Use this option to set the number of digits of precision to be displayed for area
calculations.
4. Right-click to return to the Area/Per. menu and toggle Add Snap on to add a snapping
point to your drawing at each vertex of the polyline you select.
5. Click on Select. You are prompted to Select polyline or circle for area/perimeter
calculation.
 MEASURING ENTITIES | 271
6. Click on the polyline or circle you want to measure. The area and perimeter
measurements appear in the Attention toolbar and additional Area/Per. menu options
appear. If you select Arch., Eng., Decimal, Inch/Frac., or Inch/Decimal for the scale type,
the Acres option is available in the Area/Per. menu, which you can toggle on to display
area units in acres.
7. Display the centroid of the polyline by clicking on Centroid; then click on Show It to
display a cross marking the centroid of the polyline or click on Add to add a snapping
point at the centroid. Right-click to return to the Area\Per menu.
8. Add or subtract the next area or perimeter measurement from the total. Click on Perim. +
to add the next perimeter measurement, click on Perim. - to subtract the next perimeter
measurement, click on Area + to add the next area measurement, or click on Area - to
subtract the next area measurement. Repeat step 6 as necessary to add or subtract an area
or perimeter measurement. Click on Volume in the Area/Per menu to display the volume
of the selected polyline. If you select Decimal, Inch/Decimal, Meters, Centimeter,
Millimeter, DIN, or AS 1100 for the scale type, Area Prec. is available in the scale type
menu. Click on Area Prec. and use the value menu to set the number of digits of precision
to be displayed for area calculations.
9. Add the measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing; choose to add
the area, the perimeter, the volume, or both area and perimeter to your drawing; set the
text options as necessary; and click in the drawing to place the text.

To measure the area, perimeter, and volume of a polyline you define:

1. Go to the Tools pull-down menu, click on Measure, and then click on Area/Perimeter. Or
click on Measures in the Utility menu and click on Area/Per. in the Measures menu. The
Area/Per. menu appears.
2. Click on Scale Type. A list of scale types appears.
3. Click on a scale type to select it and then right-click to exit the scale type list. If you
select Arch., Eng., Decimal, Inch/Frac., or Inch/Decimal for the scale type, the Acres
option is available in the Area/Per. menu, which you can toggle on to display area units in
acres.
4. Toggle Add Snap on to add a snapping point to your drawing at each vertex of the
polyline you select.
5. Define the polyline to measure using one of these methods:
• Trace the closed polyline by clicking in the Drawing Area or using object snap to
precisely select the first point for the polyline. You are prompted to Select next point
on polyline. Continue selecting points as necessary, until the area you want to
measure is enclosed by the polyline. You can also trace around arcs. See “More
About Tracing Polylines” on the following pages for details.
• Use Rectangle to define a rectangular polyline.
• Use Cont. Search to define any type of closed polyline.
272 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
6. Click on Close in the Area/Per. menu to automatically connect the last point on the
polyline you selected with the first one. Your cursor is detached from the polyline, and
the area and perimeter measurements appear in the Attention toolbar. Additional Area/Per.
menu options appear in the Menu Window. Click on Volume in the Area/Per. menu to
display the volume of the selected polyline.
7. Display the centroid of the polyline if necessary. Click on Centroid; then click on Show It
to display a cross marking the centroid of the polyline, or click on Add to add a snapping
point at the centroid. Right-click to return to the Area/Per. menu.
8. Add or subtract the next area or perimeter measurement from the total. Click on Perim. +
to add the next perimeter measurement, click on Perim. - to subtract the next perimeter
measurement, click on Area + to add the next area measurement, or click on Area - to
subtract the next area measurement. Repeat step 5 and 6 as necessary to add or subtract
an area or perimeter measurement. To measure a rectangular area or perimeter, simply
click on Rectangle in the Area/Per. menu and enter two, diagonally opposite points.
9. Add this measurement as text to your drawing by clicking on To Drawing; choose to add
the area, the perimeter, the volume, or both area and perimeter to your drawing; set the
text options as necessary; and click in the drawing to place the text.

More About Tracing Polylines

Besides tracing straight sides for your polylines, you can also trace around 2-point arcs, 3-point
arcs, and tangent arcs. The 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, and Tangent options are available in the Area/Per.
menu after you select the first point for your polyline.

To trace 2-point arcs:

1. Begin your polyline anywhere on the shape and continue it until you select one end point
of the 2-point arc.
2. Click on 2 Pt. Arc in the Area/Per. menu. You are prompted to Select center of arc.
3. Click on the center of the arc or object snap to it. You are prompted to Select end point of
arc.
4. Click or object snap to the other end point of the arc. For more information on how to
object snap, see “Object Snapping” earlier in this chapter.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to immediately trace around another 2-point arc or right-click to exit
the 2 Pt. Arc menu.
6. Continue tracing your polyline and click on Close when finished. The area and perimeter
measurements appear in the Attention toolbar.

To trace 3-point arcs:

1. Begin your polyline anywhere on the shape and continue it until you select one end point
of the 3-point arc.
2. Click on 3 Pt. Arc in the Area/Per. menu. You are prompted to Select second end point of
arc.
 WORKING WITH ENTITIES | 273
3. Click on the second end point of the arc or object snap to it. You are prompted to Select
any point on the arc.
4. Click anywhere on the arc.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to immediately trace around another 3-point arc or right-click to exit
the 3 Pt. Arc menu.
6. Continue tracing your polyline and click on Close when finished. The area and perimeter
measurements appear in the Attention toolbar.

To trace tangent arcs:

1. Begin your polyline anywhere on the shape, making sure you trace the line the arc was
drawn tangent to before you reach the first end point of the tangent arc.
2. Select the first end point of the tangent arc, then click on Tangent in the Area/Per. menu.
You are prompted to Select ending point of arc.
3. Click on the other end point of the arc or object snap to it.
4. Repeat step 3 to immediately trace around another tangent arc or right-click to exit the
Tangent menu.
5. Continue tracing your polyline and click on Close when finished. The area and perimeter
measurements appear in the Attention toolbar.

Working with Entities

The Geometry menu has three options that may help you work with the entities in your drawing.
You can mark divisions or intersections of entities as well as rotate the snap grid and even the X
and Y axes to match an entity.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (G) to quickly access the Geometry menu.

Dividing Entities
You can calculate equal divisions of lines and arcs and mark those divisions with snap points. This
feature is useful for such things as dividing a stair run into equal tread lengths.
You can also divide a line using the Golden Mean proportion. Golden Mean divides a line into two
segments, one longer than the other, so that the smaller section is to the larger section as the larger
is to the whole. The exact ratio is 1:1.618, a proportion considered harmonic by ancient Greeks.

To divide a line:
1. Click on Geometry in the Tools pull-down menu or select Geometry from the Utility
menu and then click on Divide. The Divide menu appears.
2. Click on Divisions. A value menu appears and you are prompted to Enter number of
divisions.
3. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter).
274 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
4. Decide how you want to divide the line. If you simply want to divide the line into equal
parts, skip to step 5. However, to divide the line into sections of a specific distance as
well, click on Div. + Dist. A value menu appears and you are prompted to Enter distance
between division points. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). You are
prompted to Select first point.
5. Click in the Drawing Area to select the first end point of the line or use object snap to
select it. You are prompted to Select second point. Click in the Drawing Area to select the
second end point of the line or use object snap to select it. The line is divided and a snap
point appears at each division.
If you clicked on Div. + Dist. in step 4, you are prompted to Indicate direction of arrows.
Drag your cursor to pull the arrow in the direction you want. Then click. DataCAD LT
breaks the line into the number of divisions you selected in step 3; however, each division
is the length you specified in step 4. If the sum of the lengths of the divisions is less than
the total length of the line, DataCAD LT will mark off only the number of divisions you
specified. If the sum of the lengths of the divisions is more than the total length of the
line, some markers will extend past the end of the line.

To divide an arc, circle, or line:

1. Click on Geometry in the Tools pull-down menu or select Geometry from the Utility
menu and then click on Divide. The Divide menu appears.
2. Click on Divisions. A value menu appears and you are prompted to Enter number of
divisions.
3. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter).
4. Decide how you want to divide the line, arc, or circle. If you simply want to divide the
entity into equal parts, skip to step 5.
However, to divide the entity into sections of a specific distance as well, click on Div. +
Dist. A value menu appears and you are prompted to Enter distance between division
points. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). Div. + Dist. can be used
on straight lines only, not on arcs or circles. You are prompted to Select first point. Skip
to the second paragraph in step 6.
5. Click on Entity. You are prompted to Select line, arc, or circle to divide.
6. Select the entity you want to divide by clicking on it in the Drawing Area. The line is
divided and a snap point appears at each division.
If you clicked on Div. + Dist. in step 4, click at the beginning of the line you want to
divide. You are prompted to Indicate direction of arrows. Drag your cursor to pull the
arrow in the direction you want. Then click. DataCAD LT breaks the line into the number
of divisions you selected in step 3; however, each division is the length you specified in
step 4. If the sum of the lengths of the divisions is less than the total length of the line,
DataCAD LT will mark off only the number of divisions you specified. If the sum of the
lengths of the divisions is more than the total length of the line, some markers will extend
past the end of the line.
 WORKING WITH ENTITIES | 275
To divide a line using Golden Mean:
1. Click on Geometry in the Tools pull-down menu or select Geometry from the Utility
menu and then click on Divide. The Divide menu appears.
2. Click on Golden Mean. You are prompted to Select first point.
3. Select the two end points of the line or simply select the line itself.
If you select the two end points of a line, the longer segment will start at the first end
point.
If you want to select the line itself, click on Entity. You are prompted to Select line to be
divided for Golden Section. When you select the line using Entity, the longer segment
will appear on the side of the line that you clicked on.
4. Click in the Drawing Area to select the entity you want to divide. The line is divided and
a snap point appears at the division between the two segments.
A B C

Figure 11.11: When you divide the line AC at point B using Golden Mean, the ratio of AB:AC is equal to
1:1.618

Marking Line Intersections

You can identify the precise point where two lines intersect and mark the intersection with a
snapping point.

To mark the intersection of two lines:

1. Click on Geometry in the Tools pull-down menu or select Geometry from the Utility
menu and then click on Intersection. The Intersection menu appears.
2. Determine if the two lines are on different layers. If so, toggle Layer Search on. You are
prompted to Select first line.
3. Click on one of the lines to select it. You are prompted to Select second line.
4. Click on the other line to select it. The intersection is marked with a snapping point.

Matching the Snap Grid to an Entity

You can rotate the snap grid to match the angle of an entity, making it easier to draw. This does not
rotate the X and Y axes.
276 | CHAPTER 11: DRAWING TOOLS
To match the snap grid to an entity:
1. Click on Geometry in the Tools pull-down menu or select Geometry from the Utility
menu and then click on Tangents. The Tangents menu appears. DataCAD LT
automatically changes to orthographic (plan) view when you use Tangents.
2. Set the number of cursor snap angles by clicking on Tan. Div. A value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter number of cursor snap angles.
3. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select the
line to draw tangent to.
4. Select an entity to match its angle or select two lines and align the snap grid with the line
that bisects the angle between them. You can also select an arc or circle; the cursor is
rotated to match the angle of the entity at the point you selected.
• To match an entity’s angle, click on a line to select it. The cursor and snap grid are
rotated to match the angle of the line.
• To match a bisected angle between two lines, click on Bisect. Click on the two lines
to select them. The cursor and snap grid are rotated to match the angle of the line
bisecting the selected entities (see Figure 11.13).
• To align the X and Y axes with the tangent entity, toggle Dist. Sync. on in the
Utility/Settings menu (see Figure 11.12).
90°

0°
Original cursor orientation

tangent to
Linetodraw

Before Tangents mode

90°
screen coordinates coordinates
0° 90°screen
cursororientation cursor orientation
0°
New New

selected selected
Line Line

After Tangents mode enabled After Tangents mode enabled

(DistSync OFF in 2D settings menu) (DistSync ON in 2D settings menu)
Figure 11.12: Rotating the cursor and snap grid with Tangents, both with and without Dist. Sync. toggled
on
 WORKING WITH ENTITIES | 277

t
bisec tion
to ta
tline orien
irs curs or
F
New

bisect
line to
Second

Tangents mode using Bisect

Figure 11.13: Rotating cursor and snap grid to match bisecting angle
 Editing Drawings
Tools included in Edit (in both the Menu Window and the
pull-down menu) can change the visible characteristics of In this chapter:
12
entities as well as their position in the drawing. You can
clean wall and line intersections, weld breaks, and trim lines Cleaning intersections
to another entity or to an intersection in your drawing. Welding lines and walls

In addition to repairing drawing mistakes, you can also use Trimming lines
a number of features to edit entities. Not only can you Changing entity
change such attributes as the color or line type of an entity, attributes
you can also move, rotate, or stretch an entity or even an
Moving entities
entire room.
Rotating entities
Erasing entities
Enlarging entities
Stretching entities
Clipping entities
280 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS

Trimming, Welding, and Cleaning

There are several tools you can use to trim corners and lines, weld lines and walls, and clean up
intersections in your drawing.

Trimming Corners
You can connect any two nonparallel lines with either an arc or a line. The Fillets option connects
two lines with an arc and can then trim them to make a smooth curve. The Chamfer option
connects two lines with a line and can then trim the two lines to the chamfer. These two lines do
not have to be connected prior to using Fillets or Chamfer. They can be two lines that form the
corner of a room or they can be two completely separate lines in your drawing.

To connect two lines with an arc:

1. Click on Cleanup in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Cleanup menu; go

to step 2. Alternatively, click on in the Draw toolbar and click on in the

Context toolbar to display the Fillets menu; go to step 3.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (F) to access the Fillets menu.

2. Click on Fillets in the Cleanup menu. The Fillets menu appears.

3. Change the fillet radius if necessary. The default setting for the fillet radius is 1’-0.” To
change the radius of the fillet arc, click on Radius. A value menu appears. Use the value
menu or type a radius and press (Enter). The radius remains at this setting for this
drawing until you change it. In fact, this setting is saved with the drawing, so that every
time you open the drawing, the Fillets radius is automatically set to the value you enter in
these steps.
4. Toggle Clip on or off. To trim the ends of the selected lines to the ends of the arc, toggle
Clip on. To draw the arc but leave the ends of the lines unaffected, toggle Clip off (see
Figure 12.1).
5. Connect lines on two different layers by toggling Layer Search on. You are prompted to
Select first line to fillet.
6. Click on one of the lines to select it. You are prompted to Select second line to fillet.
7. Click on the other line to select it. The two lines are connected by an arc.
You can use Fillets to extend two nonparallel, nonintersecting lines until they intersect. Simply set
the Radius to 0 and select the two lines. The lines are lengthened until they intersect.

Figure 12.1: Lines trimmed to fillet (Clip on) and lines left untrimmed (Clip off)
 TRIMMING, WELDING, AND CLEANING | 281
To connect two lines with a line:
1. Click on Cleanup in the Edit menu in the Menu Window to display the Cleanup menu; go

to step 2. Alternatively, click on in the Draw toolbar and click on in the

Context toolbar to display the Chamfer menu; go to step 3.
2. Click on Chamfer in the Cleanup menu. The Chamfer menu appears.
3. Set the chamfer distance for each line by clicking on Distances. The chamfer distance is
the distance from the intersection of the two lines to the chamfer point on each line. A
value menu appears. You are prompted to Enter first chamfer distance. See Figure 12.2
for an illustration of chamfer distances and how they relate to the lines you select.
4. Use the value menu or type a chamfer distance for the first line you will select and press
(Enter). Another value menu appears. You are prompted to Enter second chamfer
distance.
5. Use the value menu or type a chamfer distance for the second line you will select and
press (Enter).
6. Toggle Clip on or off. To trim the ends of the selected lines to the ends of the chamfer
line, toggle Clip on. To draw the chamfer but leave the ends of the lines unaffected,
toggle Clip off.
6. Connect lines on two different layers by toggling Layer Search on. You are prompted to
Select first line to chamfer.
7. Click on one of the lines to select it. You are prompted to Select second line to chamfer.
8. Click on the other line to select it. The two lines are connected by a line.
Lines may be shortened or lengthened to meet the ends of the chamfer.

Figure 12.2: The first chamfer distance entered corresponds with the first line you select and the second
chamfer distance entered corresponds with the second line you select.
 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
282 Trimming Entities
Trimming entities involves either shortening or lengthening selected lines or arcs. You can trim
existing entities to a temporary line that you draw, you can trim two lines so they intersect cleanly,
or you can specify not only what entities you want trimmed, but exactly how to trim them. Two-
line trim can handle line/arc and arc/arc conditions.

To trim entities so they end at a line you specify:

1. Click on Line Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on 1 Line Trim in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click

on 1 Line Trim in the Cleanup menu. Alternatively, you can click on in the Draw

toolbar and click on in the Context toolbar. The 1 Line Trim menu appears.
2. Select a trim line, a line that entities will be trimmed to. Entities in your drawing will
either be shortened or lengthened to meet the trim line. This line can either be an existing
line in your drawing or it can be a temporary line that you draw.
• To use an existing line in your drawing as the trim line, click on Entity in the 1 Line
Trim menu. Toggle Layer Search on if your trim line is on a different layer. Click on
the line in your drawing to select it as the trim line. Skip to step 4.
• To draw a temporary trim line, click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to
enter the first end point of your trim line. Click in the Drawing Area or use
coordinate entry to enter the second end point of your trim line. A dashed line
representing the trim line appears.
3. Click anywhere on the outside of the trim line; this will be the side that will be trimmed
(see Figure 12.3).
4. Choose a selection method and then select the entities you want to trim. The entities are
trimmed to the trim line. For more information on using selection menus, see “Selection
Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.

Figure 12.3: Trimming entities to a trim line

To trim two lines to their intersection:

1. Click on Line Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on 2 Line Trim in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click

on 2 Line Trim in the Cleanup menu. Alternatively, you can click on in the Draw

toolbar and click on in the Context toolbar. The 2 Line Trim menu appears
 TRIMMING, WELDING, AND CLEANING | 283
2. Toggle Layer Search on if the lines you want to trim are on different layers. You are
prompted to Select first line to trim.
3. Click on one of the lines you want to trim. You are prompted to Select second line to trim.
4. Click on the other line you want to trim. The lines are trimmed at their intersection. The
lines you select do not have to intersect; if they don’t, they will be lengthened when they
are trimmed.

Figure 12.4: Trimming two intersecting lines

To specify the entities to be trimmed and how to trim them:

1. Click on Line Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on Free Trim in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click
on Free Trim in the Cleanup menu. The Free Trim menu appears. Free Trim only trims to
or between selected entities; therefore, you must select not only the entity you want to
trim, but also all the entities that it intersects with.
2. Choose a selection method and then select the entities you want to trim as well as any
intersecting entities. All selected entities are displayed in dashed lines.
3. Click on Begin in the Free Trim menu. You are prompted to Select entity section to be
trimmed.
4. Click on the line or arc segment that you want trimmed (removed). DataCAD LT
searches for the nearest intersections and trims to the intersection points (see Figure
12.5).
5. Continue selecting segments to be trimmed or leave the Free Trim menu by clicking on
Exit or right-clicking once.
If you get unexpected results after using Free Trim, click on Undo Free Trim in the Edit pull-down
menu or press (Ctrl) + (Z).
284 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS

Figure 12.5: Selecting the line segment you want trimmed (removed)

Welding Lines and Walls

You can repair lines and walls that have breaks in them, making a single, straight, continuous line
or wall.

To weld lines:
1. Click on Line Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on Weld Line in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and click

on Weld Line in the Cleanup menu. Alternatively, you can click on in the Draw

toolbar and click on in the Context toolbar. The Weld Line menu appears.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (W) to access the Weld Line menu.

2. Toggle Layer Search on if the lines you want to weld together are on different layers. You
are prompted to Select first line to weld.
3. Click on one of the lines you want to weld. You are prompted to Select second line to
weld.

To weld walls:
1. Click on Wall Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on Weld Wall in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and then

click on Weld Wall. Or you can click on in the Draw toolbar and click on in the
Context toolbar. The Weld Wall menu appears.
If you have already cut the walls by inserting a window or door, you must first erase the
window or door before you can weld the walls.
2. Toggle Layer Search on if the walls you want to weld together are on different layers.
You are prompted to Select first point on box around wall opening to weld.
 Select the walls to be welded by drawing a rubber band box around
TRIMMING, the twoAND
WELDING, ends you| 285
wallCLEANING
3.
want to weld. There must be only two wall ends within the rubber band box in order for
the walls to be welded. To select the first corner of this box, click above and to the left of
the wall ends you want to weld. You are prompted to Select second point on box around
wall opening to weld.
4. Move your mouse diagonally to stretch the rubber band box around the two wall ends
you want to weld and click. The walls are welded. If the two walls are not in line with
each other, an error message will be displayed in the Attention toolbar, saying Unable to
weld these walls.

Figure 12.6: Welding two wall ends

Cleaning Wall Intersections

You can clean the wall intersections of 2-line, 3-line, or 4-line walls that meet in an L, T, or X
shape.

Figure 12.7: T-shaped intersections with different wall types

286 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS

Figure 12.8: L-shaped intersections with different wall types

Figure 12.9: X-shaped intersections with different wall types

To clean wall lines meeting in a T intersection:

1. Click on Wall Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on T-Intersection in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and then

click on T-Intersect. Or you can click on in the Draw toolbar and click on in
the Context toolbar. The T Intersect menu appears.
2. Toggle Layer Search on if the wall intersection you want to clean is on a different layer
than the active layer. You are prompted to Select first corner around T intersect (wall line
ends only).
3. Select the intersection to be cleaned by drawing a rubber band box around it. To select the
first corner of the box, click above and to the left of the intersection. You are prompted to
Select second corner around T intersect (wall line ends only).
 TRIMMING, WELDING, AND CLEANING | 287
4. Move your mouse diagonally to stretch the rubber band box around the intersection and
click. You are prompted to Point to wall line to trim to. Make sure you include only one
intersection within the rubber band box.
5. Click on the wall line to trim to (see Figure 12.10). The intersection is cleaned.

Figure 12.10: Cleaning a T-shaped intersection

To clean wall lines meeting in a L intersection:

1. Click on Wall Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on L-Intersection in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and then

click on L-Intersect. Or you can click on in the Draw toolbar and click on in
the Context toolbar. The L Intersect menu appears.
2. Toggle Layer Search on if the wall intersection you want to clean is on a different layer
than the active layer. You are prompted to Select first corner around L intersect (wall line
ends only).
3. Select the intersection to be cleaned by drawing a rubber band box around it. To select the
first corner of the box, click above and to the left of the intersection you want to clean.
You are prompted to Select second corner around L intersect (wall line ends only).
4. Move your mouse diagonally to stretch the rubber band box around the intersection and
click. The intersection is cleaned.
288 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS

Figure 12.11: Cleaning L-shaped intersections

To clean wall lines meeting in a X intersection:

1. Click on Wall Cleanup in the Edit pull-down menu and then click on X-Intersection in the
submenu. You can also select Cleanup from the Edit menu in the Menu Window and then

click on X-Intersect. Or you can click on in the Draw toolbar and click on in
the Context toolbar. The X Intersect menu appears.
2. Toggle Layer Search on if the wall intersection you want to clean is on a different layer
than the active layer. You are prompted to Select first corner around X intersect (0 line
ends).
3. Select the intersection to be cleaned by drawing a rubber band box around it. To select the
first corner of the box, click above and to the left of the intersection you want to clean.
You are prompted to Select second corner around X intersect (0 line ends).
4. Move your mouse diagonally to stretch the rubber band box around the intersection and
click. The intersection is cleaned.

Box

Original Resulting "X" Intersection

Figure 12.12: Cleaning an X-shaped intersection

Changing Entities
You can change an entity’s attributes, such as line type, line weight, color, line spacing, overshoot,
Z-base, and Z-height. You can also change the size, weight, slant, aspect, and font of text.
 CHANGING ENTITIES | 289
In addition to attributes, some entities have information associated with them; you can also edit
this information. There’s even a macro that you can use to convert lines to walls or walls to lines.

Changing Entity Attributes

The line type, line weight, line spacing, overshoot, Z-base, and Z-height attributes can all be
changed using value menus. Line spacing settings apply only to nonsolid line types. Use a color
menu to change an entity’s color.

To change entity attributes:

1. Click on Change in either the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or click on

in the Edit toolbar. The Change menu appears.

Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (C) to access the Change menu.

2. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to change are on a different layer than the
active layer.
3. Click on the attribute you want to change: Line Type, Line Weight, Spacing (line
spacing), Overshoot (line overshoot), Z-Base, or Z-Height. A value menu appears.
4. Use the value menu or type a number and press (Enter). For more information on using
value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
5. Change the color of the entity by clicking on Color. Select the color you want to use from
the color menu. For more information on using color menus, see “Color Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.
6. Choose the selection method you want to use. You are prompted to select the entities you
want to change.
7. Select the entities you want to change. The attributes of these entities are modified.

Figure 12.13: Changing the overshoot of lines

To change entity attributes to match those of another entity:

1. Click on Change in either the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. The Change

menu appears. Or click on in the Edit toolbar and skip to step 3.

2. Click to toggle Match on.
290 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to change are on a different layer from
the entities you want to match.
4. Choose which attributes to change by toggling on any of the following options: Line
Type, Line Weight, Color, Spacing, Overshoot. Z-Base, and Z-Height. Or click on All to
toggle all of these attribute options on.
5. Choose the selection method you want to use. You are prompted to select the entity you
want to change. For more information on selection menus, see “Selection Menus” in
“The Drawing Board” chapter.
6. Select the entity you want to change. You are prompted to select the entity whose
attributes you want to match.
7. Select the entity to match. The attributes of the entities you selected in step 6 are
modified.

Changing Text Attributes

You can change the attributes of a single line of text or of all text in your drawing, depending on
what selection method you use.

To change the attributes of text:

1. Click on Change in either the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or click on

in the Edit toolbar. The Change menu appears.

2. Click on Text in the Change menu.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the text you want to change is on a different layer than the
active layer.
4. Change the appearance of text in your drawing. You can change the size, weight, slant,
aspect, contents, capitalization, font name, and matching characteristics in the
Change\Text menu. For more information on text parameter settings, see the “Text,
Notes, and Labels” chapter.
• To change the font, click on Font. The Set Text Parameters dialog box appears.
Select a font in the Font Name list box. Keep in mind that the fonts displayed under
Font Name are determined by the Font Type selection in the lower-left corner of the
dialog box. You can display TrueType fonts (TTF), DataCAD LT fonts (CHR), or
both in the list. Make other changes in the dialog box if necessary.
• To change the text’s size, use the Size button and type the new value. Alternatively,
you can click Font to open the Set Text Parameters dialog box; then enter the new
size in the Height field or select a value from the Height list box.
• To change the angle of the lines of text, type an angle value or click on one in the
Angle list box.
• To change the height of each character relative to its width, type an aspect ratio value
or click on one in the Aspect list box.
 MOVING ENTITIES | 291
• To change the slant of text when using a DataCAD LT CHR font, type a slant value
or click on one in the CHR Slant list box.
• To change the line weight of text when using a DataCAD LT CHR font, type a
weight value or click on one in the CHR Weight list box.
• To change the font style when using a TrueType font, click on a style in the TTF
Style list box.
• To change the text properties when using a TrueType font, select Fill, Outline, or
Both and then set the colors for the Fill and Outline, as necessary.
5. Click on OK to save the text parameter changes and close the dialog box.
6. Change the text itself by clicking on Contents. (Otherwise, skip to step 9.) You are
prompted to select the text you want to change.
7. Choose a selection method from the menu and then select the text. It appears in the
Message toolbar. For more information on selection menus, see “Selection Menus” in
“The Drawing Board” chapter.
8. Type the new text and press (Enter).
9. Choose the selection method you want to use. You are prompted to select the text you
want to change.
10. Select the text you want to change. The attributes of the text are modified.

To change text attributes to match those of another text block:

1. Click on Change in either the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. The Change

menu appears. Or click on in the Edit toolbar and skip to step 3.

2. Click on Match.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the text you want to change is on a different layer from the text
you want to match.
4. Choose which attributes to change by toggling on any of the following options: Size,
Weight, Slant, Aspect, and Font. Or click on All to toggle all of these attribute options on.
5. Choose the selection method you want to use. You are prompted to select the text you
want to change.
6. Select the text you want to change. You are prompted to select the text whose attributes
you want to match.
7. Select the text to match. The attributes of the text you selected in step 6 are modified.

Moving Entities
You can move an entity to a different position in your drawing by either specifying the distance
and angle to reposition it or by dragging it to the new location. You can also move entities to
another layer in your drawing.
If an entity is linked to others in a group or selection set, it remains linked when you move it.
292 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
You can use object snapping to align a point on the entity you move with a point on another entity
in your drawing. Simply snap to the entity to move at the point you want to align and then snap to
the other entity at the point to align. The first entity is moved and aligned at the points you
snapped to.

Moving Entities to Absolute Zero

To move entities to absolute zero:

1. Select Input Mode from the Tools pull-down menu and choose Absolute Cartesian. You
can also select Abs. Cartesian from the drop-down list in the Status Panel toolbar. Or
click (Ins) until you see Current input mode = Absolute Cartesian (x, y) in the Attention
toolbar.

2. Recalculate the extents of the drawing by clicking on in the Navigation Pad toolbar.
Then press (PgUp) to zoom out.
3. Select Move from the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down

list. The Move menu appears. You are prompted to Select first point of the distance to
move.
Shortcut: Press (M) to access the Move menu.

4. Select the first point near the center of the drawing. You are prompted to Select second
point of the distance to move.
5. Press (Spacebar) to use coordinate entry. The press (Enter) twice to accept the
coordinates 0, 0 as the distance from absolute zero.
6. Toggle Layer Search on.
7. Make sure that no layers are locked.

Hint: Click on in the Status Panel toolbar to display the Layer Manager dialog box;
then check the Lock column and click on any locked icons to change them to unlocked
status. Then click on Ok to close the dialog box.

8. Click on Area in the selection portion of the Move menu. You are prompted to Select first
corner of area to <MOVE>.
9. Draw an area box around the entire drawing. To do this, click at the upper left of the
drawing, drag your mouse diagonally downward until the rubber band surrounds the
entire drawing, and click again in response to the prompt to Select second corner of area
to <MOVE>. DataCAD LT moves all the entities in your drawing to absolute zero.

Moving Entities by Specific Distance and Angle

When you use Move, you are prompted to enter two points. The distance between these two points
will be the distance the entity is moved from the original position; the angle defined by these two
points will be the angle of the move from the original position.
 MOVING ENTITIES | 293
To move an entity a specified distance and angle:
1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down

list. The Move menu appears. You are prompted to Select first point of the distance to
move.
2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. A directional
arrow appears; notice that moving your mouse changes the length and angle of the arrow.
You are prompted to Select second point of the distance to move. To use the same
distance and angle as the last time you used Move, click on Prev. Dist.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point. A selection
menu as well as other options appear in the Move menu. The points you select in steps 2
and 3 can be selected anywhere on the screen; they indicate the distance and angle to
move only, not the beginning and ending points of the move.
4. Move the selected entities in the Z direction if necessary. To do this, click on Move Z and
use the value menu to enter the distance to move the entities in the Z direction. Press
(Enter) or right-click to return to the Move menu.
5. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to move are on a different layer than the
active layer.
6. Toggle And Copy on to copy the selected entities the specified distance and angle.
7. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to move. For more information on using selection menus, see “Selection Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.
8. Select the entities; they are moved in the drawing. You can continue selecting entities to
move them at the same distance and angle.
• To move entities at the same distance and angle but in the opposite direction, click on
Invert and then select the entities to be moved.
• To enter a new distance and angle, click on New Distance and continue with step 2
above.
294 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS

Figure 12.14: Specifying the distance and angle to move a polygon

Moving Entities by Dragging

One advantage to dragging entities is that you have the option to select multiple entities before
moving them.

To move entities by dragging them:

1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. The Move menu

appears. Or you can click on in the Edit toolbar and select

from the drop-down list and skip to step
3.
2. Click on Drag in the Move menu. The Drag menu appears.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to move are on a different layer than the
active layer.
4. Toggle And Copy on to copy the selected entities as you drag them.
5. Change the maximum number of lines to be displayed if your entities are complex and
you want a smoother drag. Click on Max. Lines and use the value menu to enter the
number of lines. Press (Enter) or right-click to return to the Drag menu. When the entities
you selected to drag contain more lines than the Max. Lines setting, a rectangular box
representing the selected entities appears when you begin to drag them. The entities
reappear after you select a new location for them. When you set Max. Lines to 0, the
rectangular box is always displayed while dragging.
6. Toggle Multiple on to make multiple selections of entities to be moved.
7. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to move.
8. Select the entities to be moved. You are prompted to select a point to drag from.
 MOVING ENTITIES | 295
9. Skip to step 10 if Multiple is toggled off. If you toggled Multiple on in step 6, click on
Begin and continue with step 10.
10. Click on a point in the Drawing Area; you can also use coordinate entry or object
snapping to select this point. For more information on using coordinate entry, see
“Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
11. Move your mouse to drag the entities to their new position and click to place them. The
entities are moved in the drawing.
12. Continue dragging and placing copies of the selected entities if And Copy is toggled on.

Moving Entities to Another Layer

When you have more than one layer in your drawing, the To Layer option appears in the Move
menu. To Layer is used to move entities from one layer to another in your drawing. You can move
entities in the same position as the original layer (no distance and angle entered) or you can move
entities to another layer at a specified distance and angle. For more information on creating layers,
see “Creating Layers” in the “Before You Draw” chapter.

To move entities to another layer without changing their positions:

1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down

list. The Move menu appears.
2. Click on To Layer in the Move menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears and
you are prompted to Select layer to move to.
3. Click on the layer you’d like to move entities to or type the name of the layer and press
(Enter). The To Layer menu appears. Use Match and Filter to select or find the layer you
want to move to. For details on how to use these options, see “Selecting Layers Without
Using Layer Names” and “Searching for Layers” in the “Before You Draw” chapter.
4. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to move are on a different layer than the
active layer.
5. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to move.
6. Select the entities; they are moved to the layer you chose in step 3. You can continue
selecting entities to move them.
7. Choose another layer to move entities to by clicking on New Layer and continuing with
step 4 above.

To move entities to another layer at a different distance and angle:

1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down

list. The Move menu appears and you are prompted to Select first point of the distance to
move. To use the same distance and angle as the last time you used Move, click on Prev.
Dist.
296 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
Hint: The points you select in steps 2 and 3 can be selected anywhere on the screen;
they indicate the distance and angle to move only, not the beginning and ending points of
the move.

2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. A directional
arrow appears; notice that moving your mouse changes the length and angle of the arrow.
You are prompted to Select second point of the distance to move.
3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point. A selection
menu as well as other Move options appear. For more information on using coordinate
entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Click on To Layer in the Move menu. A list of all the layers in your drawing appears. You
are prompted to Select layer to move to.
5. Click on the layer you’d like to move entities to or type the name of the layer and press
(Enter). A selection menu plus other Move options appear.
6. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to move are on a different layer than the
active layer.
7. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to move. For more information on using selection menus, see “Selection Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.
8. Select the entities; they are moved to the layer you chose in step 5. You can continue
selecting entities to move them.
9. Choose another layer to move entities to by clicking on New Layer and continuing with
step 6 above.

Moving SPB-Filled Entities

You can change the order of entities that contain solid, pattern, and bitmap (SPB) fills – instead of
standard, vector-based hatch patterns – on a per-layer basis. You can move one SPB-filled entity in
front of or behind one another. If you have many of these entities, you can bring one to the front of
the group or move it all the way to the back. For more information on creating filled entities, see
“Using SPB Fills Instead of Standard Hatch Patterns” in the “Hatch” chapter.
In addition to moving the SPB-filled entities forward and backward, you can change their order
using Swap. The In Front, Behind, To Front, To Back, and Swap functions do not work with
entities containing standard, vector-based hatch patterns.
You can only move SPB-filled entities forward and backward if they are all on the same layer. If
you try to move SPB-filled entities that are on separate layers, the message Both entities must
reside on the same layer! appears in the Attention toolbar.

To move one SPB-filled entity in front of another on the same layer:

1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. The Move menu

appears. Or you can click on in the Edit toolbar and select

from the drop-down list and skip to step
3.
 MOVING ENTITIES | 297
2. Click on In Front. The In Front menu appears and you are prompted to Select entity to
move.
3. Click on the SPB-filled entity you want to move in front of another. The entity is
surrounded by dashed lines and you are prompted to Select entity to move in front of.
4. Click on the entity that you want to follow the one you selected in step 3. The first SPB-
filled entity you selected is now in front of the second.

To move one SPB-filled entity behind another on the same layer:

1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. The Move menu

appears. Or you can click on in the Edit toolbar and select

from the drop-down list and skip to step 3.
2. Click on Behind. The Behind menu appears and you are prompted to Select entity to
move.
3. Click on the SPB-filled entity you want to move behind another. The entity is surrounded
by dashed lines and you are prompted to Select entity to move behind.
4. Click on the SPB-filled entity that you want to precede the one you selected in step 3.
The first entity you selected is now behind the second.

To move an SPB-filled entity to the front of its layer:

1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down

list. The Move menu appears.
2. Click on To Front. The To Front menu appears and you are prompted to Select entity to
move to front of layer.
3. Click on the SPB-filled entity you want to move to the front of the layer. The entity you
selected is moved.

To move an SPB-filled entity to the back of its layer:

1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down

list. The Move menu appears.
2. Click on To Back. The To Back menu appears and you are prompted to Select entity to
move to back of layer.
3. Click on the SPB-filled entity you want to move to the back of the layer. The entity you
selected is moved.
298 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
To exchange the order between two SPB-filled entities on one layer:
1. Click on Move in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down

list. The Move menu appears.
2. Click on Swap. The Swap menu appears and you are prompted to Select first entity to
swap.
3. Click on the first SPB-filled entity you want to swap. The entity is now surrounded by
dashed lines and you are prompted to Select entity to swap database positions with.
4. Click on the second SPB-filled entity. The positions of the two entities are swapped.

Rotating Entities
You can turn an entity around a rotation center and position it at a specific angle. Or you can
dynamically rotate an entity, so that you can preview the rotated position before you place the
entity.

To rotate an entity:
1. Click on Rotate in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar. The Rotate menu appears and you are prompted to Select center
of rotation.

Shortcut: Press (R) or (Shift) + (R) to access the Rotate menu.

2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the center of rotation. A
selection menu as well as other Rotate options appear.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to rotate are on a different layer than the
active layer.
4. Enter an angle of rotation by clicking on NewAngle. A value menu appears. The default
angle of rotation is 90°. Use the value menu or type an angle and press (Enter).
5. Toggle And Copy on if you want to both rotate and copy the selected entities.
6. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to rotate.
7. Select the entities; they are rotated in the drawing. You can continue selecting entities to
rotate them at the same angle and around the same center.
• To rotate entities around the same rotation center but at the opposite angle, click on
Invert and then select the entities to be rotated.
• To return to the original angle, click on Invert again.
• To enter a new center of rotation, click on New Center and continue with step 2
above.
 ROTATING ENTITIES | 299
To rotate and copy an entity from the Edit toolbar:

1. Click on in the Edit toolbar. appears in the

Drawing Area.
2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the center of rotation. A
selection menu as well as other Rotate options appear. Notice that And Copy is already
toggled on.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to rotate are on a different layer than the
active layer.
4. Enter an angle of rotation by clicking on NewAngle. A value menu appears. The default
angle of rotation is 90°. Use the value menu or type an angle and press (Enter).
5. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to rotate.
6. Select the entities; they are rotated in the drawing. You can continue selecting entities to
rotate them at the same angle and around the same center.
• To rotate entities around the same rotation center but at the opposite angle, click on
Invert and then select the entities to be rotated.
• To return to the original angle, click on Invert again.
• To enter a new center of rotation, click on New Center and continue with step 2
above.

To rotate an entity dynamically:

1. Click on Rotate in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or you can click on

in the Edit toolbar. The Rotate menu appears and you are prompted to Select center
of rotation.
2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the center of rotation. A
selection menu as well as other Rotate options appear.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to rotate are on a different layer than the
active layer.
4. Click on NewAngle to enter an angle of rotation. A value menu appears. Use the value
menu or type an angle and press (Enter).
5. Toggle And Copy on to both rotate and copy the selected entities.
6. Click on Dynamic to preview the rotation before you place the entity. The Max. Lines
and Multiple options appear.
7. Set the maximum number of lines to be displayed while rotating for smoother rotating of
complex entities. Click on Max. Lines and use the value menu to enter the number of
lines. Press (Enter) or right-click to return to the Rotate menu.
300 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
8. Toggle Multiple on to select multiple entities to be rotated.
9. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to rotate.
10. Select the entities; they are rotated in the drawing. You can continue selecting entities to
rotate them at the same angle and around the same center.
• To rotate entities around the same rotation center but at the opposite angle, click on
Invert and then select the entities to be rotated.
• To enter a new center of rotation, click on NewCentr and continue with step 2 above.

More About Setting an Angle of Rotation

Not only can you set the angle of rotation using the NewAngle value menu, but you can also use
other options when you click on Match in the value menu to get exactly the angle you want. You
can:
• click on an entity to match its angle of rotation
• select two points which define an angle of rotation to match
• enter an angle of rotation and then use the inverse of that angle
• enter an angle of rotation and then use the complement of that angle
• enter an angle of rotation and then use the supplement of that angle
For instance, when your original angle is 30°, clicking on Invert in the Match menu gives you an
angle of rotation of –30°. The complement angle is 60° and the supplement angle is 150°.

Stretching Entities
You can increase or decrease the length of an entity –- or even an entire room --- while
maintaining connections to adjacent entities. For example, you can stretch a wall or closet without
breaking it from connected walls.

To stretch an entity:
1. Click on Stretch in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. The Stretch menu
appears and you are prompted to Select first point of the distance to stretch.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (S) to access the Stretch menu.

2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point. A directional
arrow appears; notice that moving your mouse changes the length and angle of the arrow.
You are prompted to Select second point of the distance to stretch.
To increase the possible angles of the directional arrow, press (O) to toggle ortho mode
off.

3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point. A selection
menu as well as other Stretch options appear.
4. Toggle Layer Search on if any of the entities you want to stretch are on a different layer
than the active layer.
 ENLARGING ENTITIES | 301
5. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to stretch.
6. Select the entities; they are stretched in the drawing. You can continue selecting entities
to stretch them at the same distance and angle.
• To stretch entities at the same distance and angle but in the opposite direction, click
on Invert and then select the entites to be stretched.
• To enter a new stretch distance and angle, click on New Distance and continue with
step 2 above.

Figure 12.15: Stretching a wall

Enlarging Entities
You can increase or decrease the size of an entity by entering specific enlargement values for the
X, Y, and Z axes.
You can enlarge or reduce imported bitmap and vector graphics to real-world scale. For example,
if you import a site map, you can use the Calibrate Distance function to enlarge the plan to real-
world dimensions. For more information about this, refer to “Calibrating Enlargements” in the
“Symbols, Images, and Objects” chapter.

To enlarge an entity:

1. Click on Enlarge in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. Or click on the
icon in the Edit toolbar and select from the drop-down
options. The Enlarge menu appears and you are prompted to Select center of enlargement.
302 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
2. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the center of enlargement. A
selection menu as well as other Enlarge options appear; the enlargement factor and line
spacing setting appear in the Attention toolbar.
3. Click on Enlarge Z to enter a Z elevation for the center of enlargement. Use the value
menu to enter a Z elevation and press (Enter).
4. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to enlarge are on a different layer than the
active layer.
5. Click on Enlargement in the Enlarge menu to change one or all of the enlargement
factors. The X Enlargmnt., Y Enlargmnt., Z Enlargmnt., Line Factor, and Set All options
appear.
6. Click on any enlargement factor option to display a value menu that you can use to set
these factors:
• To enlarge entities along the X axis, click on X Enlargmnt.
• To enlarge entities along the Y axis, click on Y Enlargmnt.
• To enlarge entities along the Z axis, click on Z Enlargmnt.
• To set the line spacing enlargement factor for nonsolid line types, click on Line
Factor. The Line Factor setting affects how line types like Dashed are enlarged. A
setting matching those of the X, Y, and Z enlargement factors will maintain the line
type’s spacing. The Line Factor setting cannot be applied to the geometry of
referenced files.
• To set all of these options to the same setting and enlarge the entity equally in all
directions, click on Set All.
7. Use the value menu or type an enlargement setting and press (Enter).
8. Right-click to return to the Enlarge menu.
9. Toggle And Copy on if you want to both enlarge and copy the selected entities.
10. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to enlarge.
11. Select the entities; they are enlarged in the drawing. You can continue selecting entities to
enlarge them by the same factor and around the same center.
• To enlarge entities around the same enlargement center but at different enlargement
factors, click on Invert and then select the entities to be enlarged. Invert
mathematically inverts all of the current enlargement factors and displays the new
factors in the Attention toolbar. For example, if your enlargement factor is 2.0,
clicking on Invert sets it to 0.5.

• To enter a new center of enlargement, click on Center and continue with step 2
above.
 ERASING ENTITIES | 303

You can use the options in the drop-down list

when you click on in the Edit toolbar to enlarge entities by set amounts. If you select the
option , you must first indicate an enlargement center; then
the Set All value menu appears, prompting you to Enter enlargement factor.

Erasing Entities
You can remove entities from your drawing by simply using the selection menu in the Erase menu
to select the entities. You can also erase a specific segment of a line, circle, or curve.
All entities in an array are identified as a single group. To erase entities within an array, use the
Entity or Area selection method.

To erase an entity:
1. Click on Erase in the Edit pull-down menu or the Menu Window. You can also click on

in the Edit toolbar. The Erase menu appears.

Shortcuts: Press (E) or (Shift) + (E) to access the Erase menu. Press (,) to erase the last
entity you drew. Press (<) to erase the last group of entities, such as an entire array.

2. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to erase are on a layer other than the
active layer.
3. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to erase.
4. Select the entities; they are erased from the drawing. You can continue selecting entities
to erase them.
Avoid choosing an entity where it crosses another entity because it may be difficult for
DataCAD LT to know which one you want to select. Zoom in on your drawing or change
your view to select entities more precisely.

5. Right-click when you’re finished erasing entities to exit the Erase menu.

To erase a selected piece of an entity:

1. Click on Partial Erase in the Edit pull-down menu or select Erase in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window. You can also click on in the Edit toolbar. The Erase menu appears.
2. Click on Partial in the Erase menu. The Partial menu appears.
3. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to erase are on a layer other than the
active layer. You are prompted to Select entity to modify.
4. Click on the entity. It appears in dashed lines to indicate that you selected it. You are
prompted to Select first point of line segment to remove.
You cannot partially erase a B-spline or Bezier curve, polyline, or contour.
304 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
5. Object snap or click on one point of the segment you want to remove. You are prompted
to Select second point of line segment to remove.
6. Object snap or click on the other end point of the segment you want to remove.
• When erasing the end of an entity, select the second point slightly beyond the end of
the segment to avoid leaving a single point at the end of the line.
• If you’re erasing part of a line, the line segment you selected is removed; skip to step
8.
• If you’re erasing part of a curve or circle, you are prompted to Select point on arc to
clip out.
7. Click between the two points you selected to remove that segment of the curve or circle
or click outside the two points you selected to remove the rest of the curve or circle.
8. Repeat steps 4 – 7 as necessary to continue erasing entities. When you’re finished erasing
entities, right-click to exit the Erase menu.

Editing Multiple Entities

You can associate entities in DataCAD LT to simplify editing groups of entities, making your
drawing process more efficient and productive. Simple linking groups selected entities together,
while selection sets associate entities and groups based on their attributes.

Grouping Entities Together

You can combine entities, groups, areas of your drawing, or even multiple selection sets into a
single group to make editing easier.
Caution: When you group entities, DataCAD LT moves all entities in the group to the same layer.
By definition, all entities in a group must be on the same layer.

To group or link entities:

1. Click on Group in the Edit menu in the Menu Window or click on Group Entities in the
Tools pull-down menu. The Group menu appears.
Shortcut: Press (Alt) + (K) to access the Group menu.

2. Toggle Layer Search on if the entities you want to group together are on different layers.
Note: When you select entities that are on other layers, DataCAD LT moves all entities to
the current layer. By definition, a group resides on one layer.

3. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to link together into a group.
4. Click on the entities you want to group; they are displayed in dashed lines as you select
them.
5. Right-click when you’re finished selecting entities. This groups or links the selected
entities together.
6. Click on Exit or right-click again to exit the Group menu.
 CLIPPING AND CROPPING | 305
To ungroup or separate entities:
1. Click on Group in the Edit menu in the Menu Window or click on Group Entities in the
Tools pull-down menu. The Group menu appears.
2. Toggle Layer Search on if the groups you want to separate are on different layers.
3. Toggle Un-Group on in the Group menu.
4. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to separate.
5. Click on the entities you want to separate; they are displayed in dashed lines as you select
them.
6. Right-click when you’re finished selecting entities. This removes the selected entities
from the group.
7. Click on Exit or right-click again to exit the Group menu.

Clipping and Cropping

The ClipIt macro can be used to erase, move, or copy 2D and 3D lines, 2D arcs, or 2D circles.
ClipIt is especially useful for editing hatched areas in elevation drawings or for copying large
portions of your drawing. Entities that are clipped or cropped retain such attributes as line type and
line color. Circles, 2D arcs, and 2D lines all retain their Z-base and Z-height settings. The Z values
for the new end points for 3D lines are recalculated based on the slope of the line.
ClipIt only works in orthographic (plan) view. So if you are using a perspective view, DataCAD
LT will automatically switch to plan view for ClipIt functions and then switch back to perspective
view when you exit ClipIt.
Caution: Make sure you leave the ClipIt macro by clicking the Exit button in the Menu Window.
This macro creates a temporary file that it uses as an undo buffer. If you exit the ClipIt macro by
right-clicking, this temporary undo buffer is not deleted. That can lead to file corruption in future
drawing sessions. When you click on the Exit button to leave the ClipIt macro, you delete the
temporary undo buffer.

You can choose whether to clip or crop the selected portion of your drawing. Clipping selects
entities inside the selection boundary, while cropping selects entities outside the selection
boundary.
306 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS

Figure 12.16: Clipping vs. cropping

You can also choose to erase the selection from your drawing, move the selection to another place
in your drawing, or copy the selection to another place in your drawing.

Figure 12.17: Different results from cutting, cutting and copying, and copying

To clip or crop entities in your drawing:

1. Click on ClipIt in the Toolbox pull-down menu. The ClipIt menu appears. If ClipIt is not
listed as a macro, click on Configure in the Toolbox pull-down menu and add ClipIt to
the Macros in Menu list.
2. Toggle one of the four boundary types (Area, Fence, Radius Circ., or DiaCirc) on. The
ClipIt boundary separates a selected area from the rest of your drawing, allowing you to
select entities either inside or outside of it.
• Area lets you draw a rectangular boundary by selecting two diagonal corners of the
rectangle.
 CLIPPING AND CROPPING | 307
• Fence lets you draw a polygonal boundary with up to 36 sides that can be concave or
convex as long as its lines don’t cross. If you select less than 36 points for the
boundary, right-click to finish the polygon.
• Radius Circ. lets you draw a circle by defining its radius (select its center point and a
point on the circle).
• DiaCirc lets you draw a circle by defining its diameter (select two points opposite
each other on the circle).
Generally, ClipIt processes entities most quickly when the boundary is a rectangle or a
simple polygon with only three or four sides. A circular boundary will process more slowly
and a more complex polygon will have the slowest processing time.

3. Click on Cut to erase entities, click on CutCopy to move entities, or click on Copy to
copy entities. You can clip or crop entities from multiple layers, but you can only copy
entities to the active layer.
4. Click on Clip to select entities inside the boundary you will draw or click on Crop to
select entities outside the boundary.
5. Click on 2D Line, 3D Line, 2D Arc, or Circle to specify the type of entity you want to
select. You can select one or any combination of these four entity types.
6. Toggle Boundry on to leave the outline of the boundary in your drawing. (See “After
Clipping” for Cut and CutCopy in Figure 12.17 for an example of a boundary outline.)
7. Toggle LyrSrch on to clip or crop entities on all layers that are toggled on; toggle LyrSrch
off to clip or crop entities on only the active layer.
To decrease processing time, click on Layers in the ClipIt menu and toggle off all the
layers that don’t have entities that you want to clip or crop. This Layers option accesses
the Layers menu in DataCAD LT without exiting ClipIt.

8. Select points as prompted to draw the boundary. After you select the last point for the
boundary:
• If you toggled Cut on, selected entities are clipped or cropped. Skip to step 11.
• If you toggled CutCopy or Copy on, you are prompted to Enter point to drag from.
9. Click in the Drawing Area to enter the point where your cursor will attach to the copy.
You are prompted to Enter point of insertion on [the active layer].
10. Place the copy in your drawing. To do this, move your mouse and click in the Drawing
Area, use coordinate entry, or object snap to an existing entity. Repeat this step to
continue placing copies.
11. Repeat steps 2 – 10 to continue clipping or cropping. When you are finished, click on
Exit to close the ClipIt macro.
If your drawing is very complex, the percentage of entities clipped/cropped (not the percentage of
processing time) appears in the Attention toolbar. When processing is complete, the total time is
also displayed.
308 | CHAPTER 12: EDITING DRAWINGS
You can change the layer to copy to – without changing the active layer setting – by clicking on
To Layer in the ClipIt menu and selecting the layer you want to copy to. To create new layers to
copy to, use the Layers option in the ClipIt menu to quickly access the Layers menu without
exiting ClipIt.
 Text, Notes, and Labels
You can add notes, labels, and other text to your drawing
using DataCAD LT’s Text tool. You can control text In this chapter:
13
appearance and justification, save these settings as a text
style that you can use in any drawing, and check for Drawing text and arrows
spelling errors. To place text in your drawing, simply click Editing text
in the Drawing Area to select a justification point or define
Importing and exporting
an area to fit the text into. With either method, you can text
position notes quickly and precisely.
Using TrueType fonts
Text can be imported into your drawing or even exported
from it. DataCAD LT uses text (.TXT) files in each of these
processes.
You can use Windows TrueType fonts to enter text in your
drawings.
310 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS

Drawing Text
Text can be entered and edited anywhere in your plan. DataCAD LT has 23 text fonts you can use,
and you can add your own fonts to your DATACAD LT\Fonts folder. You can also use any
TrueType fonts (TTF) that you have installed on your computer.
When the Text menu appears, the text cursor replaces the standard drawing crosshairs. This cursor
appearance represents the current text height, angle, slant, and aspect ratio settings. To change the
appearance of text already in your drawing, you must select Change\Text\Font to open the Set Text
Parameters dialog box. This lets you change text parameters. See “Changing Text Attributes” in
the “Editing Drawings” chapter.

To add text to your drawing:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Customize the appearance of text by clicking on each setting option in the Text menu or
by clicking on Font to change all the settings at once. If you click on Font, the Set Text
Parameters dialog box appears.
Note: Using the Set Text Parameters dialog box saves time and lets you see a sample of
the font in the preview window before you click OK.

Figure 13.1: The Set Text Parameters dialog box

• Click on a font in the FontName list box. Keep in mind that the fonts displayed under
FontName are determined by the Font Type selection in the lower-left corner of the
dialog box. You can display TrueType fonts (TTF), DataCAD LT fonts (CHR), or
both in the list.
 DRAWING TEXT | 311
Note: Each drawing has its own 0.5MB swap space for CHR fonts. DataCAD LT also has
an indexed list of fonts (both TTF and CHR) you used; this list is limited to 64 fonts. This
means you can display up to 64 fonts simultaneously.

• To set the text’s actual size in your drawing, type a height value or click on one in the
Height list box. With Text Scale toggled on, text is entered in the drawing relative to
the current plot scale setting. For example, if you set Height to 1” and the plotting
scale to ¼”, text entered in your drawing would appear 4’ high.
• To set the angle of the lines of text, type an angle value or click on one in the Angle
list box.
• The aspect ratio of text is the height relative to the width of each character. An
aspect ratio of 1 represents the normal character style, while an aspect ratio of 5
produces text that is taller and narrower. To set the height of each character relative
to its width, type an aspect ratio value or click on one in the Aspect list box.
• When using a DataCAD LT CHR font (not a TTF font), you can set the angle of each
character of text, as measured from the base of the character to its top. Type a slant
value or click on one in the CHR Slant list box.
• When using a DataCAD LT CHR font (not a TTF font), you can set a text weight
from 1 to 99, with “1” being the default weight setting. For example, to triple the
weight of text, set Weight to 3. To set the line weight of the text, type a weight value
or click on one in the CHR Weight list box. Another way to produce heavy text on a
drawing is to place it on a separate layer and then define a unique color for that layer.
When you plot the drawing, you can assign a thicker pen to that layer. See “Using
Pen Tables” in the “Printing Your Drawing” chapter for details on how to set pens for
plotting.
• When using a TrueType font, you can select a font style. Click on a style in the TTF
Style list box.
• When using a TrueType font, you can set the properties for the font using the TTF
Properties options. Select Fill, Outline, or Both and then set the colors for the Fill
and Outline, as necessary.
3. Click on OK to save the text parameter changes and close the dialog box.
4. Set the space between lines of text by clicking on Factor in the Text menu. Use the value
menu or type a factor for your text; right-click to return to the Text menu. DataCAD LT
calculates the amount of space between lines of text by multiplying the text height by the
factor.
5. Toggle Dynamic on to enter text directly into the drawing as you type it. Toggle Dynamic
off to enter the text only in the Message toolbar; you will have to press (Enter) to add the
text to the drawing.
Hint: With Dynamic on, your cursor must remain in the drawing window if you want
carriage return to work when you press (Enter).

6. Toggle All Caps on to enter your text in capital letters; toggle All Caps off to enter text as
you typed it.
312 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS
7. Decide on how you want to align the text. Use the Alignment button to set text
appearance before entering text. To left align text, toggle Left on; to center align text,
toggle Center on; to right align text, toggle Right on.
If you want to align text that has already been entered, use the Justify button.

8. Click in the Drawing Window or use coordinate entry to select the point where text
should be entered in your drawing. This is the point of justification for the text you enter.
9. Type the text. If you toggled Dynamic on in step 5, the text appears in the drawing as you
type; if Dynamic is toggled off, the text appears in the Message toolbar and you must
press (Enter) to add the text to the drawing.
Text can include many other characters in addition to those found on the keyboard. These
extended characters are typed by pressing (Alt) + a character number. See the Appendix
for a complete list of extended characters.

10. Click on Exit or right-click when you’re finished entering text.

Justifying Text
You can change the justification of text after you enter it in your drawing. Text can be justified to
the left, center, or right of a justification line that you define.

To justify text in your drawing:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Justify in the Text menu. You are prompted to Select first point on justification
line.
The justification line should be vertical, not horizontal.

3. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point of the
justification line. You are prompted to Select second point on justification line.
4. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point of the
justification line. The Justify menu appears.
5. Decide how you want to justify the text. To left justify text, toggle Left on; to center
justify text, toggle Center on; to right justify text, toggle Right on.
6. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the text you want to
justify. For more information on using selection menus, see “Selection Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter.
7. Select the text you want to justify. The text is aligned with the justification line, according
to the justification setting you chose in step 5.
8. Continue selecting text to justify it to the same justification line; click on NewLine to
define a new justification line and continue with step 3 above; or right-click to return to
the Text menu.
 DRAWING TEXT | 313
Aligning Text
You can control the alignment of the text you use in your drawing. There are nine text alignment
points:
• Top - Left
• Top – Center
• Top – Right
• Middle – Left
• Middle – Center
• Middle – Right
• Bottom – Left
• Bottom – Center
• Bottom - Right
To set the alignment for the text you enter into your drawing:
1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Alignment in the Text menu. The Alignment menu appears.
3. Use the toggles to control the way your text will be inserted.
Left Text inserted from left to right.
Center Text inserted from the center.
Right Text inserted from right to left.
Top Cursor is at the top of the characters you input.
Middle Cursor is at the midpoint of the characters you input.
Bottom Cursor is at the bottom of the characters you input.
Aligned Adjusts text to fit between two given points.
Fit Adjusts text to fit a certain width and height.
Reversed Draws each character backward from right to left.
Mirrored Draws each character upside down from left to right.

4. Right-click to return to the Text menu.

The text cursor coincides with the current text alignment setting. A “+” marker is incorporated into
the carat as a visual indicator of the current alignment setting.

Fitting Text into Defined Areas

Another way to enter text in your drawing is to define the height and width of the area where
you’d like to place a line of text. The text size and aspect ratio are automatically calculated so that
the text you type fits into the area you defined.

To fit text into an area:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Alignment in the Text menu. You are prompted to Set text alignment method.
314 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS
3. Toggle Fit on. Then right-click to display the Fit Text menu. You are prompted to Select
text start point.
4, Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the point where you want the
text to begin. You are prompted to Select text end point.
5. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the point where you want the
text to end. You are prompted to Select point to mark text height.
6. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter a point; this point and the end
point you selected in step 5 define the height of the area. You are prompted to Enter text.
7. Type the line of text that you want to fit in the defined area. Then press (Enter). DataCAD
LT calculates the aspect ratio and size so that it can fit the text you typed into the area you
defined. This changes the Aspect and Size settings in the Text menu.
To return Aspect and Size to their previous settings (before you used Fit), change them in
the Text menu.

8. Enter additional lines of text using the same aspect ratio and size calculated in step 7 by
simply typing them. Since DataCAD LT does not support word wrapping, you must press
(Enter) at the end of each line.

Figure 13.2: Three words fit in the parameters set in steps 3 through 5

9. Stop fitting text within the defined area by right-clicking to return to the Fit Text menu,
selecting Alignment to go to the Alignment menu, clicking on Aligned, and right-clicking
to go to the Aligned Text menu. Then you can select the text start point and type the
information. If you right-click again, you return to the Edit menu.
If you do not toggle Aligned on, DataCAD LT will continue using the Fit criteria the next
time you type text. In the Alignment menu, Aligned and Fit are mutually exclusive toggles.

Importing and Exporting Text

You can export text in your drawing to a text (.TXT) file as well as import a text file into your
drawing. Uusing this method to import text only supports MS-DOS Text (*.TXT) files. To import
other text formats, open the text file in its native program (for example, MS Word or Word
Perfect), then use Copy and Paste to bring the text into DataCAD LT.
 DRAWING TEXT | 315
To import text into your drawing:
1. Click on Text File in the Insert pull-down menu. In the dialog box that appears, find the
text files you want to insert into your drawing. If necessary, you can search in other
folders (not just those listed in the Plot Files folder).
2. Click on the text (.TXT) file you want to import; then click on Open. The dialog box
closes and the FromFile menu appears.
3. Use the menu options (as described earlier in this chapter in the instructions on adding
text to your drawing) to customize the appearance of the text you want to import. You are
prompted to Select point to position text.
4. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the upper-left point of the
block of text being imported. The text is added to the drawing.
The Wrap Length option uses a value menu to set the number of characters allowed per
line; characters over this number are wrapped to the next line.

5. Continue selecting points to copy the imported text to other parts of your drawing or
right-click to return to the Text menu.

To export text from your drawing:

1. Click on Export in the File pull-down menu; then click on TXT in the submenu. The
dialog box prompts you to Enter the name of the text file to create.
2. Type a name for the text file that you want to export text to; then click on Save. The
dialog box closes and a From File selection menu appears.
3. Click on a selection method in the From File menu. You are prompted to select the text
you want to add to the text file. For more information on using selection menus, see
“Selection Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
4. Select the text you want to export. DataCAD LT exports the text you selected to the text
file you created in step 2.
5. Continue selecting text to export to the text file. Alternatively, you can right-click to
display the dialog box again and save information in another text file. If you don’t need to
save another text file, click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Using Text Styles

You can save your Text menu settings as a text style. Then, you can use them later to quickly apply
those settings before adding text to a drawing.

To save a text style:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Text Style in the Text menu. The Text Style menu appears.
3. Click on Save Current in the Text Style menu. A list of existing text styles appears,
including the default style. You are prompted to Enter name to save current text style to.
316 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS
4. Type a name (eight characters or fewer) for your new text style and press (Enter).
DataCAD LT saves the text style.

To use a text style:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Text Style in the Text menu. The Text Style menu appears.
3. Click on Load in the Text Style menu. A list of text styles appears and you are prompted
to Enter name of the text style to load.
4. Click on a text style in the list. Settings for Text menu options are changed to those of the
text style you chose; any text you draw now will use those settings.

To delete a text style:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Text Style in the Text menu. The Text Style menu appears.
3. Click on Delete in the Text Style menu. A list of existing text styles appears and you are
prompted to Enter name of text style to delete.
4. Click on the name of the text style you want to delete. The text style is deleted.
5. Right-click to return to the Text Style menu or click on Exit in the Menu Window.

To display the settings for a text style:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Text Style in the Text menu. The Text Style menu appears.
3. Click on Show Values in the Text Style menu. A list of text styles appears and you are
prompted to Enter name of text style to show.
4. Click on the name of the text style you want to view. The values of the selected text style
appear in the Attention toolbar.
5. Right-click to return to the Text Style menu or click on Exit.

Drawing Text Arrows

You can draw arrows from text in your drawing to the parts of the drawing the text refers to. It is
easy to customize the size, style, aspect, weight, and color of the arrowheads.
 DRAWING TEXT | 317

Figure 13.3: Examples of different arrowhead styles (left) and aspect ratios (right)

To draw a text arrow:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears.
2. Click on Arrows in the Text menu. The Arrows menu appears.
3. Choose an arrowhead style. Click on Style in the Arrows menu. A list of five arrowhead
styles appears (see Figure 13.3 for examples).
4. Click on the name of the arrowhead style you want to use and right-click to return to the
Arrows menu.
For Closed and Dot arrowheads, you can fill the space with a color or leave it blank. Use
the Filled toggle to fill (On) or to leave the arrowhead blank (Off). The Filled toggle is not
available if you select Open, Bridge, or Tick arrowhead styles.

5. Indicate the size of the arrowhead. The size of the arrowhead is the measurement of its
widest point. Arrowhead size is relative to text size; if the Size setting in the Text menu is
1 and the Size setting in the Arrows menu is 3, the arrowhead size will be three times the
height of your text. To set the size of the arrowhead, click on Size. A value menu appears.
For Open and Closed arrowheads, Size sets the length of the arrowhead base. For Bridge
arrowheads, Size sets the radius of the curve of the arrowhead. For Dot arrowheads, Size
sets the diameter of the dot. For Tick arrowheads, Size sets the length of the tick mark.

6. Use the value menu or type a number for the size and press (Enter). This setting, Relative
arrow size, appears in the Attention toolbar whenever you are in the Arrows menu.
7. Set the aspect ratio for arrowheads by clicking on Aspect in the Arrows menu. A value
menu appears.
318 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS
8. Use the value menu or type a number for the aspect ratio and press (Enter). See Figure
13.3 for examples of aspect settings. An ANSI-standard arrowhead has an aspect ratio of
6.
9. Set the line weight for arrowheads by clicking on Weight. A value menu appears.
10. Use the value menu or type a number for the line weight and press (Enter).
11. Set the color for arrowheads by clicking on Color. A color menu appears. For more
information on using color menus, see “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
12. Use the color menu to select a color for arrowheads. You are prompted to Draw arrow.
13. Draw arrows. Arrows are drawn from the end of the arrow to the point of the arrowhead.
Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the end of the arrow.
14. Continue entering points to draw bends or angles in the arrow if necessary. The last point
you enter will be the point of the arrowhead.
15. Right-click to complete the arrow; the arrowhead is drawn according to the settings you
specified in previous steps.

Using TrueType Fonts Instead of .CHR Fonts

In addition to single and multi-stroke, vector-based DataCAD LT .CHR fonts, you can use
Windows TrueType fonts in your drawings. You can convert TrueType fonts to 3D for signage in
architectural models. If you are using an earlier version than DataCAD LT 10, any font definitions
that cannot be found or that are not supported will be replaced by the default DataCAD LT CHR
font.

To use TrueType fonts:

1. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears. Then, click
on Font in the Text menu. The Set Text Parameters dialog box appears.
 USING TRUETYPE FONTS INSTEAD OF .CHR FONTS | 319

Figure 13.4: Control the appearance of TrueType fonts

2. Type something in the small box at the lower right corner of the Font Preview area. For
example, in Figure 13.4, HapPenInc is the name of the Hap company that manufactures
pens. The larger display shows what the text will look like, depending on the font you
highlight in the FontName section of this dialog box.
3. Go to the Font Type section and click Only TTF if you want to display just the TrueType
fonts in the Font Name section of this dialog box.
4. Change the settings in the Font Name, Height, Angle, Aspect, CHR Slant, CHR Weight,
and TTF Style sections until the sample in the Font Preview window is correct.
5. Control the color of the font’s fill and outline in the TTF Properties section. Color choices
appear in the Font Preview window.
• To choose colors, click Fill, Outline, or Both in the TTF Properties section.
• To use the active layer’s color for the fill and/or outline, check the Fill using current
color and/or the Outline using current color boxes.
• To specify your own colors for the fill and/or outline, uncheck the boxes. Then click
on the color swatch to the left of the unchecked box to display the Color Palette
dialog box, where you can either select a standard color or mix your own. For more
information on using the color palette, see “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board”
chapter and “Customizing Colors” in the “Before You Draw” chapter.
6. Click OK when you are satisfied with your text parameters. When you return to the
Drawing Window, the cursor changes to a text tool and you are prompted to Select point
to position text.
7. Click where you want the text to appear in your drawing.
8. Type the text in your drawing. Notice that all your font settings are in effect.
320 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS
9. Right-click when you are finished typing text.

Figure 13.5: Results of TrueType font decisions in the drawing

To convert TrueType fonts to 3D:

1. Go to the 3D Menus menu and select Explode.
2. Click on TTF->P-Line in the Explode menu to convert the TrueType fonts to covered
polylines.
You can create 3D signage by exploding the polylines to slabs. To do this, use the TTF-> Slab
option in the Explode menu.

Using Text Attributes for Symbols

Text attributes can be defined and added to symbols. This lets you use the same symbol multiple
times, supplying a unique text string for each one. For example, you could use one desk symbol
several times and label them “Jim’s desk,” “Nancy’s desk,” and “Bob’s desk.”

Adding Text Attributes for Symbols

When you create a text attribute for a symbol, you use the Drawing Window as a scratch pad.
There are several ways to create these attributes: using Sym Attrib in the Text menu, choosing
Create Attribute in the Symbol Browser’s Options menu, or selecting Symbol Attributes from the
Create pull-down menu. You control the appearance of the attribute by selecting options from the
Text menu.
You associate the text attribute you created with an exploded symbol by using Save Symbol from
the Symbol Browser’s Options menu. Make sure Explode is off when you place the symbol back
into your drawing.

To create a symbol attribute from the Text menu:

1. Place an exploded symbol in your Drawing Window.
2. Click on Text in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Text in the Edit menu in the

Menu Window, or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Text menu appears. Make
decisions about the text’s appearance by using the Size, Angle, Weight, Slant, Aspect,
Factor, Font, Text Style, Text Scale and All Caps options.
 USING TEXT ATTRIBUTES FOR SYMBOLS | 321
Hint: Save time by selecting Font from the Text menu and use the Set Text Parameters
dialog box to control many of your options and view a sample in the Font Preview window.

3. Click on Alignment and use the toggles to control the way your text will be inserted; then
right-click to return to the main Sym Attrib menu.
Left Text inserted from left to right.
Center Text inserted from the center.
Right Text inserted from right to left.
Top Cursor is at the top of the characters you input.
Middle Cursor is at the midpoint of the characters you input.
Bottom Cursor is at the bottom of the characters you input.
Aligned Adjusts text to fit between two given points.
Fit Adjusts text to fit a certain width and height.
Reversed Draws each character backward from right to left.
Mirrored Draws each character upside down from left to right.

Note: The text cursor coincides with the current text alignment setting. A “+” marker is
incorporated into the carat as a visual indicator of the current alignment setting. There are
nine text alignment points.

4. Click on Sym Attrib. The text cursor appears and you are prompted to Select point to
position text. Once you position your cursor, the Create Symbol Attribute dialog box
appears for a symbol.
Attribute Name Name of the attribute.
Prompt Reminder question.
Value Information that should appear on the symbol. This can include constant text.
Value Properties
Invisible Information that appears in the Value field will be invisible if you check this
box. If there is no check in the box, the Value text will appear in your
drawing. This can be applied to either Locked or Preset.
Variable Supply new information when prompted.
Preset Add new information. This allows you to use constant text either before or
after the new information.
Locked Supply information that cannot be changed.
Create multiple
attributes If this is checked, you can supply more symbol attributes. Each symbol can
have many attributes.
322 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS

Figure 13.6: A symbol can have multiple attributes if the Create multiple attributes box is checked

5. Click on Ok or press (Enter) to leave the Create Symbol Attribute dialog box. If you
enabled (the box is checked) Create multiple attributes, repeat steps 4 and 5. When you
are finished creating attributes for this symbol, make sure you disable Create multiple
attributes (the box is not checked).

Figure 13.7: The last (or only) symbol attribute should not have a check in the Create multiple attributes
box
 USING TEXT ATTRIBUTES FOR SYMBOLS | 323
6. Turn off Explode in the Symbol Browser’s Options pull-down menu. Then save the
symbol and its attribute by following the directions under “Creating New Symbols” in the
“Symbols, Images, and Objects” chapter. Make sure you use Area in the Save Symbol
menu rather than Group. (Group ignores the attribute.) DataCAD LT creates a .DSF file
for the symbol. When you are finished saving the symbol and its attribute, right-click to
leave the Sym Attrib menu.
7. Place the symbol into your drawing as often as necessary.

Figure 13.8: You can place several symbols in your drawing and modify the attributes

8. Select Edit Symbol Attributes from the Symbol Browser’s Options pull-down menu.
Then click on the symbol. The Edit/Customize Symbol Attribute dialog box appears.

Figure 13.9: The Edit/Customize Symbol Attribute dialog box prompts you for the value that should
appear on the symbol in your drawing

9. Supply the information in the Value column and click on Ok. (In this example, “’s Desk”
and “PD-1-” were constants; “Michelle” and “936” were added to these constant values.)
If you placed the same symbol into your drawing several times and want to use different
values, repeat steps 8 and 9 as often as necessary.
324 | CHAPTER 13: TEXT, NOTES, AND LABELS

Figure 13.10: Several personalized desks were placed in the drawing

Editing Text Attributes for Symbols

If you selected Locked in the Value Properties portion of the Create Symbol Attribute dialog box,
you cannot edit the value. If you selected Variable, you supply new information when responding
to the Prompt question.
What if some of the information in a symbol changes. For example, what if Harry leaves the
company and his desk is reassigned to MaryJane?

To edit an existing symbol attribute for a symbol:

1. Select Edit Symbol Attributes from the Symbol Browser’s Options menu.
2. Click on the symbol attribute you want to edit. (In this case, Harry.) The Edit/Customize
Symbol Attribute dialog box appears.
3. Change only the relevant information. (In this case, change Harry to MaryJane.) Then
click on OK.

Figure 13.11: Notice that the inventory control number stayed the same, but MaryJane replaced Harry as
the desk’s owner.

4. Edit other existing symbol attributes by repeating steps 2 and 3.

Symbol Attributes appear as Block Attributes when you open a DWG file.
 Dimensions
Dimensions in DataCAD LT can measure the distance
between two points, the diameter or radius of curves, or the
14
In this chapter:
angle between two entities. You have full control over how
the dimension text, lines, and arrows look as well as where Dimension text and line
they are placed in your drawing. styles
Adding dimensions to
Stringline and baseline dimensions can be drawn by simply your drawing
selecting a series of points; they can even be drawn
automatically, with the distance between every end point Editing dimensions
along a wall measured and added to the series of
dimensions. Associative
dimensioning

You can even draw associative dimensions. These

dimensions are linked to the entity they measure; whenever
that entity changes size, the dimension is automatically
updated.
326 | CHAPTER 14: DIMENSIONS

Drawing Linear Dimensions

Linear dimensions (the most common type) measure the distance between two points. You can
draw standard stringline or baseline linear dimensions, which require you to select the end points
for each dimension, or you can automatically create a stringline or baseline dimension by simply
selecting the two end points of the entire series of dimensions. In addition, you can edit
dimensions or explode them into separate entities.

To dimension between two points in your drawing:

1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Linear Dimension in

the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Linear from the Dimensions menu. The Linear menu
appears.
2. Choose one of the following options to position dimensions:
• To dimension a single line, arc, or circle, simply click on Entity and follow the
prompts.
You can toggle only one of the following options on at any time: Horizontal, Vertical,
Aligned, and Rotated.

• To draw horizontal linear dimensions, toggle Horizontal on.

• To draw vertical linear dimensions, toggle Vertical on.
• To draw linear dimensions that are parallel to the dimensioned entity, toggle Aligned
on.
• To set the angle to draw linear dimensions, click on Rotated and use the value menu
to enter a rotation angle. For more information on using value menus, see “Value
Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.

Figure 14.1: Examples of the four available positions for linear dimensions
 DRAWING LINEAR DIMENSIONS | 327
3. Decide whether you want to use associative dimensions. Associative dimensions are
connected to the entity they measure; so if you were to stretch that entity, its dimension
would automatically be updated. Toggle Associative on if you want to draw associative
dimensions. Another advantage to using associative dimensions is that if you change
drawing scales (for example, from architectural to engineering), all associative
dimensions would automatically be updated with the new scale.
4. Customize the way dimension text is drawn by clicking on Text Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Text Style Options for Linear Dimensions” on the following
pages for details.
5. Customize the way dimension lines are drawn by clicking on Dim. Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Line Style Options for Linear Dimensions” on the following
pages for details.
6. Customize the way dimension arrows are drawn by clicking on Arrow Style and setting
the options as necessary. See “Arrow Style Options for Linear Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.
7. Respond to the prompt to Select first point of distance to dimension. For greater accuracy,
object snap to one end point of the distance you want to dimension. You can also select
this point by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry. You are prompted to
Select second point of distance to dimension. For more information on how to object snap
to an entity, see “Object Snapping” in the “Drawing Tools” chapter.
8. Object snap to the second end point of the distance you want to dimension. The
dimension lines appear; notice if you move your mouse cursor to the other side of the
entity you’re dimensioning, the dimension lines flip to that side. You are asked,
Dimension which side of line?
9. Click to one side of the line to place the dimension on that side. If the dimension text fits
between the extension lines, the dimension is drawn; skip to step 12 to continue.
If the dimension text doesn’t fit between the extension lines, only the dimension lines are
drawn and you’re prompted with Text does not fit. Enter new text position.
10. Place dimension text that doesn’t fit between the extension lines by using any of the
following options:
You can use any combination of the Rotate, Draw Leader, and Text Style options to
customize dimension text.

• Click on Rotate and use the value menu to set an angle for the text; click in the
Drawing Area to place the text.
• Click on Draw Leader to draw a leader from the dimension line to the text. Click in
the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to draw the leader, and then right-click to
place the dimension text.
• Click on Text Style to change the text style settings so that the text will fit between
the extension lines; click in the Drawing Area to place the text.
328 | CHAPTER 14: DIMENSIONS
11. Draw stringline dimensions from the dimension you just drew by clicking on String Line.
To draw baseline dimensions, click on Baseline. Follow the prompts to draw the series of
dimensions. Using String Line or Baseline to dimension along an entire wall of your plan
can save you time because you only have to enter the second point of each dimension.
Whether this series of dimensions is stringline or baseline depends on the settings in the
Auto Style menu.
12. Finish drawing the dimension series. Then right-click to return to the Linear menu.
13. Complete drawing stringline dimensions. Then click on Overall in the Linear menu to
dimension the entire stringline.
14. Continue with step 8 above to enter additional dimensions.

To automatically create a series of dimensions:

1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Linear Dimension in

the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Linear from the Dimensions menu. The Linear menu
appears.
2. Indicate which of these four options you want use to position dimensions:
• To draw horizontal linear dimensions, toggle Horizontal on.
• To draw vertical linear dimensions, toggle Vertical on.
• To draw linear dimensions that are parallel to the dimensioned entity, toggle Aligned
on.
• To set the angle to draw linear dimensions, click on Rotated and use the value menu
to enter a rotation angle.
See Figure 14.2 for examples of these options.
3. Decide whether you want to use associative dimensions. Associative dimensions are
connected to the entity they measure; so if you were to stretch that entity, its dimension
would automatically be updated. Toggle Associative on if you want to draw associative
dimensions. Associative dimensions can be exploded or changed to standard dimensions
that aren’t connected to the entity. See “Exploding Linear Dimensions” later in this
chapter for more information.
4. Customize the way dimension text is drawn by clicking on Text Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Text Style Options for Linear Dimensions” on the following
pages for details.
5. Customize the way dimension lines are drawn by clicking on Dim. Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Line Style Options for Linear Dimensions” on the following
pages for details.
6. Customize the way dimension arrows are drawn by clicking on Arrow Style and setting
the options as necessary. See “Arrow Style Options for Linear Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.
 DRAWING LINEAR DIMENSIONS | 329
7. Customize the way automatic dimensions are drawn by clicking on Auto Style and setting
the options as necessary. See “Automatic Dimension Style Options for Linear
Dimensions” on the following pages for details.
8. Click on Auto Dim. You are prompted to Select first end point of line to dimension along.
9. Object snap to one end point of the distance you want to dimension for greater accuracy.
You can also select this point by clicking in the Drawing Area or using coordinate entry.
You are prompted to Select second end point of line to dimension along.
10. Object snap to the second end point of the distance you want to dimension. The
dimension lines appear; notice if you move your mouse cursor to the other side of the
entity you’re dimensioning, the dimension lines flip to that side. You are asked,
Dimension which side of line?
11. Click to one side of the line to place the dimension on that side. The series of dimensions
is drawn.
12. Continue using automatic dimensioning by going back to step 9.

Stringline dimensions

Stringline with an overall dimension

Baseline dimensions

Figure 14.2: Examples of stringline, stringline with overall, and baseline dimensions
330 | CHAPTER 14: DIMENSIONS
Text Style Options for Linear Dimensions
Use the following options in the Text Style menu to customize dimension text styles:
Text Size Set the dimension text’s actual size in your drawing. The Text Size, Weight, Slant, Aspect,
Color, Text Scale, and Font options work exactly like equivalent options in the Text menu. See
the “Text, Notes, and Labels” chapter for more information. For more information on using
value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter. The decimal separator for
all dimensions and numbers is determined by the Decimal Symbol setting. In your Windows
Start menu, click on Settings, click on Control Panel, click on Regional Settings, and click on
the Number tab.
Weight Set the line weight of dimension text, from 1 to 99 with “1” being the default weight setting;
to triple the weight of text, for instance, set Weight to 3.
Slant Set the angle of each character of text, as measured from the base of the character to its top.
Aspect Set the height of each character relative to its width; an aspect ratio of 1 represents the normal
character style, while an aspect ratio of 5 produces text that is taller and narrower.
In Horiz. Toggle on to place dimension text horizontally in your drawing (independent of the orientation
of the dimension lines); the dimension line is “broken” to accommodate the text.
Out Horiz. Toggle on to place dimension text horizontally in your drawing (independent of the orientation
of the dimension lines) and at the end of the leader; this option is only used with the Draw
Leader option, which is available only if the text is too large to fit between the dimension’s
extension lines.
Above Toggle on to draw the dimension text parallel to and "above" the dimension line; if InHorz is
also toggled on, then the dimension text will be drawn horizontally but the dimension line will
not be "broken"
Offset Set the distance of text from the dimension line.
Auto Toggle on to automatically place text, according to the Text Style menu settings; toggle off to
place the text for each dimension manually, using Rotate, Draw Leader, or Text Style as
described in the instructions for drawing dimensions earlier in this chapter; when Auto is off,
right-clicking to place the dimension text will place the text as if Auto were toggled on.
Color Set the color of dimension text. For more information on using color menus, see “Color
Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
Font Set the font used for dimension text (see Figure 14.3).
 DRAWING LINEAR DIMENSIONS | 331

Figure 14.3: Selecting a font, with a preview of the selection

Line Style Options for Linear Dimensions

Each dimension in a stringline shares its extension lines with the next dimension in the series, so
you see only a single line displayed on screen. But when you plot your drawing, your plotter reads
two lines – the second extension line for one dimension and the first extension line for the
following dimension. If your plotter prints both these lines, extension lines in a stringline can
appear to have a double thickness. To avoid this, toggle either Line 1 or Line 2 off when you draw
stringline dimensions.
Use the following options in the Dim. Style menu to customize dimension line styles:
Line 1 Toggle on to draw the first extension line.
Line 2 Toggle on to draw the second extension line.
Offset Set the distance between the entity being dimensioned and the beginning of the extension
lines of the dimension (see Figure 14.4).
Overlap Set the distance extension lines are drawn past dimension lines (see Figure 14.4).
Increment Set the distance between dimension lines when drawing baseline dimensions; this option
has no effect on stringline dimensions unless set to 0, which results in a running dimension
without the first arrow (see Figure 14.4).
Overrun Set the distance dimension lines are drawn past extension lines; a setting of 0 results in the
dimension line ending at the extension lines (see Figure 14.4).
Fixed Incr. Toggle on to draw dimension lines a fixed distance away from the entity being
dimensioned; toggle off to enter the distance yourself when you click to select which side of
the entity to draw the dimension on (see Figure 14.4).
DIN Standard Toggle on to use the DIN Standard, set by the German Institute for Standardization (see
Figure 14.5).
Rounding Set rounding for dimension text; toggle RoundIt on and choose from rounding up or down
or banker’s rounding; click on Precsion to set the fractional rounding value for rounding up
or down.
Limits Set the upper and lower limit for the size of entities to dimension (see Figure 14.6).
Tolerance Set positive and negative geometric tolerances (see Figure 14.6).
332 | CHAPTER 14: DIMENSIONS
B

E C

Figure 14.4: Dimension settings: A = Offset, B = Overrun, C = Overlap, D = Increment (with Fixed
Incr. toggled on), E = Text Offset

Figure 14.5: DIN standard dimension

Figure 14.6: Dimensions with Limit and Tolerance settings

Arrow Style Options for Linear Dimensions

Use the following options in the Arrow Style menu to customize dimension arrow styles:
Only one of the three options Arrows, Tick Marks, and Dots can be toggled on at a time.

Arrows Toggle on to draw arrows at the ends of dimension lines.

Tick Marks Toggle on to draw tick marks at the ends of dimension lines.
Dots Toggle on to draw dots at the ends of dimension lines.
 DRAWING LINEAR DIMENSIONS | 333
Size Set the size of dimension arrows, tick marks, or dots; this setting is relative to the dimension
text size, so if Size is set to 2, dimension arrows will be drawn twice the size of dimension
text. The dimension text size is set using the Text Size option in the Linear/Text Style menu.
Weight Set the line weight of tick marks; not available if Arrows or Dots is toggled on.
Aspect Set the aspect ratio of the dimension arrows; this aspect ratio setting is the length of the
arrowhead divided by the height, so a setting of 1 draws arrowheads with a 90° angle; not
available when Tick Marks or Dots is toggled on.
Filled Toggle on to fill the arrowhead or dot.
Color Set the color of arrows, dots, or tick marks. For more information on using color menus, see
“Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
Automatic Dimension Style Options for Linear Dimensions
Use the following options in the Auto Style menu to customize automatic dimension styles:
Baseline Toggle on to draw a series of dimensions that all have one end point in common.
String Line Toggle on to draw a series of dimensions, each of which uses the last end point of the previous
dimension as the first end point of the next dimension.
Just one of the two options Only Points and No Points one can be toggled on at a time.
Only Points Toggle on to dimension to center points only; useful for dimensioning window and door
openings.
No Points Toggle on to dimension to every center and end point that is greater than the minimum
distance to dimension (set with the Min. Dist. option).
Min. Dist. Set the minimum distance to dimension; a setting of zero (0) results in all distances, no matter
how small, being dimensioned.
Miss Dist. Set the search distance for points to dimension; the miss distance is perpendicular to the line
you want to dimension. For more information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in
“The Drawing Board” chapter.
Layer Search Toggle on if any of the entities you want to dimension are on layers other than the active layer.
Direct Dim. Toggle on to automatically go directly to the Auto Dim. menu when you click on Linear
Dimension in the Create pull-down menu.
Editing Linear Dimensions
You can edit any linear dimensions in your drawing by changing the text styles, lines styles, or
arrow styles of the dimension. You can also change the position of dimension text.

To edit linear dimension text, lines, or arrows:

1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Linear Dimension in

the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Linear from the Dimensions menu. The Linear menu
appears.
2. Click on Change in the Linear menu. The Change menu appears.
3. Click on Text Style to change the dimension text settings, click on Dim. Style to change
the dimension line settings, or click on Arrow Style to change the dimension arrow
settings. The Text Style, Dim. Style, and Arrow Style options in the Change menu are the
same as those in the Linear menu. See “Text Style Options for Linear Dimensions,” “Line
Style Options for Linear Dimensions,” and “Arrow Style Options for Linear Dimensions”
earlier in this chapter for details.
4. Click on a selection method in the Change menu. You are prompted to select the
dimension you want to change.
334 | CHAPTER 14: DIMENSIONS
5. Click on the dimension you want to edit. The dimension is changed to match the text,
line, and arrow style changes you made in step 3.

To move dimension text:

1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Linear Dimension in

the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Linear from the Dimensions menu. The Linear menu
appears.
2. Click on Change in the Linear menu. The Change menu appears.
3. Click on Text Pos. in the Change menu. You are prompted to Select associative dimension
to change text position.
4. Click on the dimension text you want to move. A box representing the text is connected
to your cursor and the Rotate option appears in the menu.
5. Rotate the text before repositioning it in your drawing by clicking on Rotate and using
the value menu to enter a rotation angle. Otherwise, continue with step 6.
6. Move your cursor to the new location and click to place the text in its new position or use
coordinate entry to enter a new location for the text. For more information on using
coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board”
chapter.
7. Move dimension text back to its default position by clicking on Default and then clicking
on the dimension text. The text is returned to its default angle and position.

Exploding Linear Dimensions

While you can freely edit nonassociative dimensions, there may also be times that you need to edit
an associative dimension measurement. Associative dimensions are connected to the entity they
measure, so these measurements automatically adjust when the entity changes size. To edit an
associative dimension, you first must explode the dimension or disconnect it from the entity it’s
associated with.
When you explode dimensions, their appearance is not affected.

To explode an associative dimension:

1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Linear Dimension in

the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Linear from the Dimensions menu. The Linear menu
appears.
2. Click on Explode in the Linear menu. The Explode menu appears.
3. Click on a selection method in the Explode menu. You are prompted to select the
dimension you want to explode.
 DRAWING DIMENSIONS FOR ANGLES AND CURVES | 335
4. Click on the associative dimension(s) you want to explode. The dimensions you selected
are exploded or disassociated from the entities they measure. They become 2D lines and
text.

Drawing Dimensions for Angles and Curves

You can dimension the angle between two lines as well as the diameter or radius of a curve.

To dimension the angle between two lines:

1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Angular Dimension

in the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Angular from the Dimensions menu.. The Angular menu
appears.
2. Customize the way dimension text is drawn by clicking on Text Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Text Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.)
3. Customize the way dimension lines are drawn by clicking on Dim. Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Line Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.
4. Customize the way dimension arrows are drawn by clicking on Arrow Style and setting
the options as necessary. See “Arrow Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on
the following pages for details.
5. Toggle Layer Search on if the lines that form the angle you want to dimension are on
different layers. You are prompted to Select first line.
6. Click on one of the lines in your drawing that forms the angle you want to dimension.
The line appears as dashed to indicate its selection. You are prompted to Select second
line.
7. Click on the other line in your drawing that forms the angle you want to dimension. The
line appears as dashed to indicate its selection. Also notice that your cursor is connected
to a curve representing the angle dimension line; moving your cursor changes the
position of the dimension line.
8. Position the angle dimension line and click to place it in your drawing. You are prompted
to Enter angle.
9. Press (Enter) to accept the actual angle measurement or type an angle and press (Enter).
The dimension line is drawn and a small box representing the dimension text is connected
to your cursor.
10. Place the dimension text next to the dimension line by positioning your cursor and
clicking. To place the text in its default position, simply right-click. The dimension is
completed.
336 | CHAPTER 14: DIMENSIONS
To dimension a curve’s diameter:
1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Diameter Dimension

in the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Diameter from the Dimensions menu. The Diameter menu
appears.
2. Customize the way dimension text is drawn by clicking on Text Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Text Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.
3. Customize the way dimension lines are drawn by clicking on Dim. Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Line Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.
4. Customize the way dimension arrows are drawn by clicking on Arrow Style and setting
the options as necessary. See “Arrow Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on
the following pages for details.
5. Toggle Layer Search on if the curve you want to dimension is on another layer. You are
prompted to Select arc or circle to dimension.
6. Click on the curve you want to dimension. You are prompted to Enter diameter.
7. Press (Enter) to accept the actual diameter measurement or type a diameter and press
(Enter). The dimension is drawn.

To dimension a curve’s radius:

1. Click on Dimension in the Create pull-down menu and then click on Radius Dimension

in the submenu. You can also click on in the Draw toolbar or click on Dimensions in
the Utility menu, then select Radius from the Dimensions menu The Radius menu
appears.
2. Customize the way dimension text is drawn by clicking on Text Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Text Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.
3. Customize the way dimension lines are drawn by clicking on Dim. Style and setting the
options as necessary. See “Line Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on the
following pages for details.
4. Customize the way dimension arrows are drawn by clicking on Arrow Style and setting
the options as necessary. See “Arrow Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions” on
the following pages for details.
5. Toggle Layer Search on if the curve you want to dimension is on another layer. You are
prompted to Select arc or circle to dimension.
6. Click on the curve you want to dimension. You are prompted to Enter radius.
7. Press (Enter) to accept the actual radius measurement or type a radius and press (Enter).
The dimension is drawn.
Text Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions
DRAWING DIMENSIONS FOR ANGLES AND CURVES | 337

Use the following options in the Text Style menu to customize dimension text styles:
Text Size Set the dimension text’s actual size in your drawing. The Text Size, Weight, Slant, Aspect,
Color, Text Scale, and Font options work exactly like equivalent options in the Text menu. See
the “Text” chapter for more information.
Weight Set the line weight of dimension text, from 1 to 99 with “1” being the default weight setting;
to triple the weight of text, for instance, set Weight to 3. For more information on using value
menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
Slant Set the angle of each character of text, as measured from the base of the character to its top.
Aspect Set the height of each character relative to its width; an aspect ratio of 1 represents the normal
character style, while an aspect ratio of 5 produces text that is taller and narrower.
Auto Toggle on to automatically place text, according to the Text Style menu settings; toggle off to
place the text for each dimension manually, using Rotate, Draw Leader, or Text Style as
described in the instructions for drawing dimensions earlier in this chapter.
Color Set the color of dimension text.
Font Set the font used for dimension text (see Figure 14.3).

The decimal separator for all dimensions and numbers is determined by the Decimal Symbol
setting. In your Windows Start menu, click on Settings, click on Control Panel, click on Regional
Settings, and click on the Number tab.

Line Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions

Use the following options in the Dim. Style menu to customize dimension line styles:
Offset Set the distance between the entity being dimensioned and the beginning of the extension lines
of the dimension. See Figure 14.4 for an example of Offset and Overlap settings.
Overlap Set the distance extension lines are drawn past dimension lines.
Center Mark Toggle on to draw center marks for diameter and radius dimensions.
Rounding Set rounding for dimension text; toggle Round It on; and choose Round Up or Round Down or
Bankers rounding; click on Precision to set the fractional rounding value for rounding up or
down.
Limits Set the upper and lower limit for the size of entities to dimension (see Figure 14.6).
Tolerance Set positive and negative geometric tolerances (see Figure 14.6).
Arrow Style Options for Angle and Curve Dimensions
While the Arrows, Tick Marks, and Dots toggles appear only in the Arrow Style menu for linear
dimensions, they affect all four dimension types: Linear, Angular, Diameter, and Radius. Use the
following options in the Arrow Style menu to customize dimension arrow styles:
Size Set the size of dimension arrows, tick marks, or dots; this setting is relative to the dimension
text size, so if Size is set to 2, dimension arrows will be drawn twice the size of dimension
text.
Weight Set the line weight of tick marks; not available if Open or Dots is toggled on in the Arrow
Style menu for linear dimensions.
Aspect Set the aspect ratio of the dimension arrows; this aspect ratio setting is the length of the
arrowhead divided by the height, so a setting of 1 draws arrowheads with a 90° angle; not
available when Tick Marks or Dots is toggled on in the Arrow Style menu for linear
dimensions.
Filled Fill in the arrowhead when Open or Dots is toggled on.
Color Set the color of arrows, dots, or tick marks. For more information on using color menus, see
“Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.
338 | CHAPTER 14: DIMENSIONS
 Hatch
Hatch patterns can add detail as well as visual information
to your drawings. In DataCAD LT, there are two types of
15
In this chapter:
hatch: standard and associative. Standard hatch is a group
of entities inserted in your drawing according to Hatching Drawing hatch
menu settings. Associative hatch is a single entity and will Hatch boundaries
update itself as necessary when you edit your drawing. Both
Associative hatching
types require you to define polyline boundaries for the
hatch pattern.
340 | CHAPTER 15: HATCH

Drawing Hatch Patterns

You can fill areas of your drawing with repetitive patterns, called hatch patterns, to distinguish
between building materials or to highlight parts of your drawing. However, standard hatch can
increase file size and refresh times dramatically. To control file size as well as save time while
editing your drawing, use associative hatch. See the Appendix for a list of the hatch patterns that
come with DataCAD LT.

Drawing Standard Hatch

The lines in hatch patterns are separate entities that are linked as a group, so you can move or edit
the entire area of hatch using the Group option in selection menus. However, you can also edit
individual lines in the hatch pattern using the Entity selection method.

To draw a standard hatch pattern:

1. Click on Hatch in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Hatching in the Utility menu,

or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Hatching menu appears.

Shortcut: Press (H) or (Shift) + (H) to access the Hatching menu.

2. Click on Hatch Type to set the hatching type. Select one of the three options available and
then right-click to return to the main Hatching menu.
• Normal – toggle this on to alternate hatching within defined boundaries (see Figure
15.1).
• Outermost – toggle this on to hatch only the first boundary (see Figure 15.2).
• Ignore – toggle this on to hatch within the outermost boundary and ignore all other
boundaries (see Figure 15.3).

Figure 15.1: Hatching using the Normal hatching type

 DRAWING HATCH PATTERNS | 341

Figure 15.2: Hatching using the Outermost hatching type

Figure 15.3: Hatching using the Ignore hatching type

3. Click on Pattern. A list of the hatch patterns you appears, along with a preview window.
Notice that as you move your cursor over each hatch pattern name in the list, an example
of the highlighted hatch pattern appears in the preview window. Click on Scroll Fwrd to
scroll forward through the list of patterns; click on Scroll Back to scroll back through the
list. Choose a pattern by clicking on its name in the list and pressing (Enter). You are
returned to the Hatching menu.
5. Change the scale or angle of the hatch pattern you selected if necessary.
• Scale – change this setting by clicking on Scale. A value menu appears. Use the
value menu or type a scale and press (Enter).
The Scale setting in the Hatching menu affects only the scale of the hatch pattern; it does
not change the drawing scale. For example, the pattern Line is based on 1/32”
increments. To draw the Line pattern with 4” spacing, set Scale to 128 (128 X 1/32”=4”).

• Angle - change this setting by clicking on Angle. A value menu appears. Use the
value menu or type an angle and press (Enter). (The default setting is 0°.)
5. Set the point where the hatch pattern will begin by clicking on Origin. You are prompted
to Select hatch pattern origin. Click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate entry, or object
snap to an entity to select the origin for the hatch pattern.
342 | CHAPTER 15: HATCH
6. Define a boundary for the hatch pattern. A boundary is a polyline that defines the area of
your drawing that will be hatched. Click on Boundary. The Boundary menu appears. You
can define a rectangular boundary, have DataCAD LT automatically create it with Cont.
Search, generate a unique one that may include curves/arcs as well as straight line
segments, or create voids within the polyline that will not be hatched. These different
boundary definition methods are described in “Defining the Hatch Boundary.”
Notice that the Attention toolbar describes your hatch pattern, scale, angle, and type.

7. Click on Begin to hatch the area within the boundary. The hatch pattern is drawn. Click
on Clear to delete the boundary and return all hatch settings to their defaults.

Defining the Hatch Boundary

The hatch boundary is a closed polyline that surrounds the hatch pattern. One of the easiest ways
to define the hatch boundary is to let DataCAD LT perform a contour search. The next easiest
method is to hatch within a rectangular boundary. The most complex method is to define a
boundary that includes curves and/or arcs as well as straight line segments.

To define a rectangular boundary:

1. Click on Hatch in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Hatching in the Utility menu,

or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Hatching menu appears.

2. Click on Boundary. The Boundary menu appears.
3. Select Rectangle. The Rectangle menu appears and you are prompted to Select first
corner of rectangle.
4. Select the first point of the rectangle by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate
entry, or object snapping to an entity. For more information on coordinate entry, see
“Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing Board” chapter. You are prompted
to Select second corner of rectangle.
5. Drag your mouse toward the diagonally opposite corner of the rectangular area you want
to hatch. Click once when you get to the opposite corner of the rectangle. The rectangular
boundary is drawn.
6. Right-click to return to the Hatching menu.

To define a boundary that includes curves and/or arcs:

1. Click on Hatch in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Hatching in the Utility menu, or

click on in the Draw toolbar. The Hatching menu appears.

2. Click on Boundary. The Boundary menu appears and you are prompted to Select first
point on boundary to hatch to.
3. Select the first point of the boundary by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate
entry, or object snapping to an entity. The options 2 Pt. Arc and 3 Pt. Arc appear in the
Boundary menu. You are prompted to Select next point on boundary to hatch to. For more
information on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing
Board” chapter.
 DRAWING HATCH PATTERNS | 343
4. Add a line segment, 2-point arc, or 3-point arc to your polyline boundary:
• To select the second point of a straight line segment, click in the Drawing Area, use
coordinate entry, or object snap to a point on an entity. After you select the second
point of the boundary, the Tangent option is added to the menu.
• To add a 2-point arc to the boundary, click on 2 Pt. Arc in the Boundary menu. Select
a center point for the arc, toggle Clockwise on (if you want to draw the boundary in a
clockwise direction) or off (if you want to draw the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction), and select an end point. You can continue drawing additional 2-point arcs
or you can right-click to exit the 2-point arc function.
• To add a 3-point arc to the boundary, click on 3 Pt. Arc in the Boundary menu. Select
a second end point for the arc (with the first end point being the point you selected in
the previous step) and then select any other point on the arc. You can continue
drawing additional 3-point arcs or you can right-click to exit the 3-point arc function.
• To add a tangent arc to the boundary, click on Tangent in the Boundary menu. (The
Tangent option appears in the Boundary menu after you select the second point of
the polyline boundary.) Move your cursor until the arc displayed is the one you want
drawn and then click to draw the tangent arc.
You can click Backup any time to erase the last straight line segment or arc of your
boundary. You can click Cancel any time to erase the entire boundary you’ve drawn.

5. Continue selecting points for line segments or arcs, as outlined in step 4, until your
polyline boundary is complete.
6. Click on Close in the Boundary menu and click on Exit in the next menu that appears.
Alternatively, just right-click twice to leave both Boundary menus. The Hatching menu
appears.

To hatch a master polyline that contains voids (or areas that you do not want to hatch):
1. Create the master polyline. This will contain the hatch pattern. For details on creating the
master polyline, see “Voids in Polylines” in the “Drawing Other Geometry” chapter.
2. Create the polylines that will serve as voids (areas that will not be hatched).
3. Click on Voids in the Polyline menu. You are prompted to Select master polyline to
process voids.
4. Click on the closed master polyline that you want to put the void in. DataCAD LT puts
dashed lines around that shape.
5. Make sure Entity and Add Void are toggled on in the Voids menu. You are prompted to
Select entity to convert to voids.
6. Click on the polyline that will represent the void. The void is added. Dashed lines
surround the void.
7. Continue selecting other closed polylines within the master if necessary.
8. Click on Hatch in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Hatching in the Utility menu,

or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Hatching menu appears.

344 | CHAPTER 15: HATCH
9. Click on Pattern and choose one of the options. Make other adjustments to the pattern if
necessary. For example, you may want to change the scale or the angle. The decisions
you make for the pattern, scale, angle, and hatch type are shown in the Attention toolbar.
10. Click the polyline you created in steps 1 through 7. This selects the polyline.
11. Click on Begin. The hatch pattern you selected appears within the master polyline
boundary; however, the voids you created are empty.

Using SPB Fills Instead of Standard Hatch Patterns

Instead of using the standard vector-based hatch patterns (saved as .PAT files), you can use solid,
pattern, and bitmap (SPB) fills. Unlike hatch patterns, solid fills will display and print with the
same density, no matter what the viewed or plotted scale is.

To use solid, pattern, and bitmap fills:

1. Click on Display in the Utility menu or select Settings from the Tools pull-down menu
and click on Display. Make sure Fill On and Bitmap On are toggled on in the Display
menu. Then, right-click to return to the Utility menu. There is now an upper-case F in
SWOTHLUDFB, indicating that Fill is on (lower-case f means it’s off).
2. Select Hatching from the Utility menu.
3. Choose SPB-Fill from the Hatching menu.
4. Click on Settings to choose the colors and patterns you want in your drawing. The Select
Fill Color/Pattern dialog box appears.

Figure 15.4: Control the solid, pattern, and bitmap (SPB) fills.

5. Make decisions about the solid, pattern, and/or bitmap fills for your drawing. Your
choices appear in the Preview window of the Select Fill Color/Pattern dialog box.
 DRAWING HATCH PATTERNS | 345
6. Click in the box beside Solid Pattern Fill or Bitmap Fill. These are mutually exclusive.
Use the Fill Settings options to make decisions about solid pattern details.
• Control the fill and pattern colors by clicking on the rectangular swatch and making
your selections from the Color Palette dialog box. For more information, see
“Customizing Colors” in the “Before You Draw” chapter.
• Select the pattern you prefer from the drop-down box. The outline boundary, pattern,
and fill may have different colors. Your choices are shown in the Preview window.
• Check the Entity box if you want the fill to display with the color of the polyline
entity in the drawing.
Use the Bitmap/JPEG options to make decisions about bitmap fills.
• Click the file folder button to select the image you want to use. Supported file types
are listed in the drop-down box in the Select Image dialog box. After you select the
image, click on Open or press (Enter) to return to the Select Fill Color/Pattern dialog
box.
• Uncheck the Maintain Aspect box if you want to change the X/Y aspect of the
original image.

Figure 15.5: Select the image you want for the fill.

7. Click OK on the Select Fill Color/Pattern dialog box when you are satisfied with your
choices. The dialog box disappears.
346 | CHAPTER 15: HATCH
8. Click on an existing polyline boundary that you want to fill. If none exists yet, select
Boundary from the Solid Fill menu and draw one.
You can reposition SPB-filled entities that are on the same layer. For example, you can move one
in front of another, move one behind another, move one to the top, move one to the bottom, or
swap two of them. For more information, see “Moving SPB-Filled Entities” in the “Editing
Drawings” chapter.
You can control whether solid fills and bitmaps print behind or in front of lines by using the Print
first or Print last options in the Pen Table. For more information about using the Pen Table, see
“Using Pen Tables” in the “Printing Your Drawing” chapter.

Drawing Associative Hatch

Associative hatch treats hatch patterns as a single entity, instead of a group of entities as standard
hatch does. You can associatively hatch only 3D polygons and 2D polylines. When you use
associative hatch:
• You can stretch walls in your drawing and the hatch will update automatically.
• You can rotate your drawing without changing the angle of the hatch pattern.
• Your drawing file size is usually smaller because the hatch pattern is a single entity instead of
a group of entities.
• You can’t edit individual lines in the hatch pattern.
• The hatch is drawn the same color as your entity. If you use standard hatch (Associative is
toggled off), the hatch is drawn in the current layer’s color.
• You have different hatch type options: OutLine draws an outline around the hatching, while
NoOutLin does not.
To draw associative hatching:
1. Click on Hatch in the Create pull-down menu, or click on Hatching in the Utility menu,

or click on in the Draw toolbar. The Hatching menu appears.

2. Click on Hatch Type to set the hatching type.
3. Toggle Outline on to draw an outline around the hatching; toggle No Outline on to draw
only the hatching. Right-click or click on Exit when you are done.
4. Toggle Associative on in the Hatching menu.
5. Set the hatch pattern, scale, and angle. For more information, see “Drawing Standard
Hatch” in this chapter.
6. Set the point where the hatch pattern will begin by clicking on Origin.
7. Define the boundary for the hatch pattern.
8. Click on Begin in the Hatching menu to draw the associative hatch.
After the hatching is drawn, you can click on Del. Assoc. to remove the associative
hatching, without clearing the boundary you traced. Click Clear to delete the boundary and
return the hatch settings to their defaults.
| 347
 Symbols, Images, and
Objects
16
In this chapter:
A symbol is a group of lines and arcs that is treated as a
single entity. The Symbol Browser makes it easy to work Using the Symbol
with and manage these entities. Browser
SymbolsBrowser.
Symbol in DataCAD
You LT
cancan
enter
be organized
symbols in
and
your drawing,
displayed in Working with symbols
Creating symbols
revise symbol descriptions as well as the symbols Importing images
themselves, and even create new symbols from geometry in
your drawing. Each symbol can have an unlimited amount Inserting o2c objects
of information associated with it. And one of the biggest
advantages to using symbols in your drawings, instead of
separate lines and arcs, is that you can use this information
to generate a variety of reports.
In addition to symbols, you can also import many types of
images into your drawings or insert o2c objects.
350 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS

Using the Symbol Browser

DataCAD LT makes it easy to use symbols in your drawings. With just a few mouse clicks, you
can open the appropriate folder, display the symbols in the browser, and select the ones you want
to use into your drawing. If you developed custom templates with DataCAD LT 10 and prior
versions, you can open them in the Symbol Browser, too. In effect, the subfolders in the DataCAD
LT\Symbols folder contain collections of symbols that you can access via the Symbol Browser.
Shortcut: The hotkey (Ctrl) + (T) toggles the Symbol Browser on and off.
Note: In the Symbol Browser and Insert Symbol dialog, .DSF files supersede .SM3 (used in
DataCAD LT 10 and prior versions) files.

Positioning the Symbol Browser on your DataCAD LT Desktop

When you first open DataCAD LT, the Symbol Browser is docked along the right side of your
Drawing Window. Since it is actually a toolbar, you can undock the Symbol Browser and position
it anywhere on your desktop or hide it from view altogether.

To undock the Symbol Browser:

1. Place the cursor along the upper margin of the Symbol Browser. Move the cursor until it
is shaped like a cross with arrows at its tips.
2. Click and keep the mouse button depressed to grab the Symbol Browser.
3. Drag the Symbol Browser away from the side of the Drawing Window and position it
elsewhere. Notice that “Symbol Browser” appears in the title bar at the top of this toolbar.
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 351

Folder lets you find Click to remove the Symbol Browser

the right symbol from your desktop
files
Pull-down options are
available for working with
Turn automatic symbols
divisions in Symbol
Browser on or off
X and Y divisions are set to
automatically show all symbols in
the folder at the same time if
“auto division” is “on.” If “auto
division” is “off,” you can
manually set X and Y divisions
with the pull-down menus.
Each symbol
appears in its own
division box

Elevator bar helps you scroll

through large symbol folders

Figure 16.1: Undocked Symbol Browser

You can dock the Symbol Browser at either the right or left edge of the Drawing Window;
however, you cannot dock it at the top or bottom edge. When you originally open DataCAD LT,
the Symbol Browser is docked at the right edge.

To dock the Symbol Browser:

1. Click and hold on the title bar near Symbol Browser.
2. Drag the Symbol Browser to the right or left margin of the Drawing Window until the
title bar disappears. To dock the Symbol Browser to the left of the Edit/Utility menu bar,
simply continue dragging it leftward until it pops into place.
352 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS

Describes the symbol as

you pass over it with
your cursor

Figure 16.2: Symbol Browser docked at the leftmost edge of the screen

DataCAD LT automatically calculates the divisions to display all the symbols in the folder you
selected. This occurs when the lock on the Symbol Browser menu bar is “on” (or depressed) and
the pull-down number menus are grayed (this means you cannot change them).

To specify the number of X and Y divisions for the Symbol Browser:

1. Click on the auto divisions icon on the Symbol Browser menu bar. When the drop-down
arrows appear next to the X and Y division numbers, you can change these values
manually to suit your needs.
2. Select the number of X divisions you want the Symbol Browser to display.
3. Select the number of Y divisions you want the Symbol Browser to display.
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 353

Figure 16.3: X and Y divisions can be set manually

Selecting and Placing Symbols

Symbols that you can use in your drawing are contained in DataCAD LT’s Symbols folder or
directory.
Clicking the arrow to the right of the folder gives you three options:
• Folder shows you all the symbol files in the DataCAD LT Symbols directory or folder.
• Template displays the files in the DataCAD LT Templates directory or folder. The templates
were either supplied older versions of DataCAD LT (version 10 and prior) or were created in
your office to meet specific clients’ needs. Templates hold collections of symbols. You will
probably find it more efficient to create new subfolders containing collections of symbols in
your Symbols folder rather than using the more cumbersome, old-fashioned templates.
• Drawing contains just the symbols you placed in the current drawing. DataCAD LT
remembers this information so that you can have quick access to the symbols you’ve already
used and may want to re-use elsewhere in your drawing.
To open a collection of symbols:
1. Click on the arrow to the right of the folder in the Symbol Browser.
2. Select Folder, Template, or Drawing from the pull-down list.
• If you select Folder, the Browse dialog box opens. Notice that as you click on
different folders, their contents appear in the Symbol Browser. Click OK when you
find the folder that contains the symbol(s) you want to use in your drawing.
354 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS

Figure 16.4: Symbols contained in the folder in the Browse window simultaneously appear in the Symbol
Browser

• If you pick Template, the Select Template File to Browse dialog box opens. When
you click on a file in the list, its collection of symbols is displayed in the Symbol
Browser. Click Open when you find the file that contains the symbol(s) you want to
use in your drawing. For information about accessing Template files from DataCAD
LT versions prior to 11, refer to “Finding and Using Older Template and Symbol
Files” in the Appendix.
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 355

Figure 16.5: Template file contents are displayed in the Symbol Browser

• If you choose Drawing, DataCAD LT displays the symbols you used already in the
current drawing.
3. Open the file that contains the symbols you want to use in your drawing. Once you open
a file, the Browse or Select Template File to Browse dialog box closes, allowing you to
work directly with the symbols.
You are now ready to place the symbols into your drawing. Basically, you select a symbol from
the Symbol Browser and place it into your drawing where you want it to appear.

To look at an object you are considering placing in your drawing:

1. Move your cursor over the symbol you want to examine.
2. Right-click to display a pop-up menu.
3. Select Object Viewer from the menu. The item appears in the Object Viewer window,
where you can examine it.
356 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS

Figure 16.6: The symbol appears in the Object Viewer so that you can examine it

4. Click on the X in the upper right corner to close the Object Viewer.

To insert a symbol into your drawing:

1. Click on the symbol you want in the Symbol Browser. This attaches a particular symbol
to your cursor.
2. Position your cursor where you want the symbol to appear in your drawing. Notice that
the symbol assumes a rectangular shape until you decide where you want to place it.

Figure 16.7: The symbol assumes a rectangular shape as you drag it into your drawing
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 357
3. Click when the rectangular shape is positioned where you want to place the symbol into
your drawing. Notice that a rectangular shape is still attached to your cursor. This allows
you to “place” many copies of a symbol into your drawing. (For chairs, replication may
be a convenient feature, but most houses only require one kitchen.)

Figure 16.8: You can place many copies of the symbol into your drawing

4. Right-click when you are finished placing the symbol(s) into your drawing. The cursor
returns to its normal shape, allowing you to continue working in your drawing or to select
and place other symbols.

Controlling Symbols
You don’t have to live with the symbols as they are; you can change them in several ways by using
the Options pull-down menu. For example, you can enlarge, offset, or rotate them.
358 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS

Figure 16.9: The Options menu lets you further control the symbols you add to your drawing. The left
menu offers related options when you insert a symbol.

The Attention toolbar tells how the symbol will behave within the drawing. In the following
example, the desk symbol will be rotated, enlarged, and offset based on the options that you set.
These settings remain in effect for placing all future symbols until you change one of the options.
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 359

Figure 16.10: The Attention toolbar summarizes settings you selected through the Options menu

To rotate a symbol:
1. Select Rotate from the Symbol Browser’s Options pull-down menu. The Edit menu
appears and you are prompted to Position symbol on drawing.
2. Decide whether you want to rotate the symbol dynamically with your cursor or use a
fixed rotation angle. When Rotate is on, you can place the symbol dynamically; when
Rotate is off, you are prompted to specify the angle you want.
If you opted for a fixed angle instead of dynamic rotation, remember to set the angle back to zero.
If you don’t do this, all future symbols will be placed at the rotation angle you specified. For
example, if you set a 30-degree rotation angle while placing a desk symbol and neglect to change
it back to zero, the next symbol (perhaps a conference table) will also appear at a 30-degree angle.

To enlarge a symbol:
1. Select Enlarge from the Symbol Browser’s Options pull-down menu. The Enlarge menu
appears and you are prompted to Select symbol enlargement factor to change.
2. Choose X Englargmnt., Y Enlargmnt., Z Enlargmnt., Line Factor, or Set All from the
Enlarge menu; select an enlargement value from the list or type your own; and press
(Enter). Notice that the enlargement factor(s) you entered are displayed on the Attention
toolbar.
Hint: If you want to reduce the size of a symbol, use a decimal value (such as .25). If you
want to mirror the symbol, enter a negative value (such as –1).

3. Right-click, or click on Exit, or press (Shift) + (F10) to leave the Enlarge menu.
360 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS
4. Click on the symbol that you want to drag into your drawing.
5. Drag the symbol into your drawing with your mouse. You are prompted to Position
symbol on drawing.
6. Click the left button when the symbol is in the correct place. The enlarged symbol
appears in the drawing. Continue placing additional copies of the symbol by repeating
this step.
7. Right-click to stop placing additional copies of the symbol into your drawing.

To offset the insertion height of symbols:

1. Select Z Offset from the Symbol Browser’s Options pull-down menu. The Z Offset menu
appears and you are prompted to Enter Z Offset for symbols.
2. Supply the value and press (Enter). Notice that the Z Offset you entered is displayed on
the Attention toolbar.
3. Click on the symbol that you want to drag into your drawing.
4. Drag the symbol into your drawing with your mouse. You are prompted to Position
symbol on drawing.
5. Click the left button when the symbol is in the correct place. The symbol appears in the
drawing at the Z Offset you supplied in step 2. Continue placing additional copies of the
symbol by repeating this step.
6. Right-click to stop placing additional copies of the symbol into your drawing. You can
use the Object Viewer in the View pull-down menu to see the effect of the Z Offset you
applied.

Editing Symbols
If you want to edit or change the symbol, you must first convert it into separate lines and/or arcs.
In other words, you will “explode” the symbol back into its component drawing elements. You can
do this when you insert the symbol into your drawing or after the symbol has been inserted. Once
the symbol has been edited, you can reform the symbol lines and arcs into a single symbol entity
and save it back into the Symbol Browser and then update the symbols already in your drawing.

To explode a symbol:
1. Click on the Options icon in the Symbol Browser.
2. Select Explode. When this function is “on,” a checkmark appears to the left of the word
“Explode.”
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 361

Figure 16.11: When Explode is activated, you can convert a symbol into lines and/or arcs

3. Click on the symbol you want to use and drag it into your drawing.
4. Click the left mouse button to place it. The exploded symbol appears in your drawing.
You can repeat this step to continue placing copies of the exploded symbol.
5. Right-click to stop placing copies of this symbol.
6. Make changes to the exploded symbol.
362 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS

Figure 16.12: In this exploded version of the desk symbol, the upper left drawer was erased

7. Select and place other symbols you want to drag into your drawing as exploded lines
and/or arcs.
8. Deactivate Explode in the Symbol Browser’s Options menu when you are finished. Until
the checkmark to the left of Explode disappears, all symbols that you place will be
converted to lines and/or arcs in your drawings.
When you activate Explode in the Symbol Browser’s Options menu, the left Layers menu includes
an Explode button. This is how you explode a symbol when you place it. If you want to explode a
symbol that you previously placed in your drawing, select Explode from the 3D Edit menu.

Creating New Symbols

You can create and save your own symbols in a new or existing folder.

To create and save a symbol:

1. Draw something that you want to use as a symbol.
2. Select Save Symbol from the Options pull-down menu in the Symbol Browser. The
contents of the active symbol folder appear in a window and you are asked to Enter name
of symbol file to be saved.
3. Type a name for the item you drew in step 1. Then press (Enter) or click on Save. The
Save Symbol menu appears.
The file name is limited to 255 characters.
You could save the item in another folder or create a new folder by using the icons at the
top of this window.

4. Select the entities you drew in step 1. The items you selected are highlighted. You are
prompted to Select an insertion point for symbol.
5. Click once in the Drawing Window to create a “handle” that will help you place your
symbol. A symbol descriptor window appears.
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 363

Figure 16.13: Describe the item you are saving as a symbol

6. Fill in the fields with information about the item. Double-click in a field and supply
information in the Name or Value columns. When you double-click on the Type column,
you can select Text, Decimal, or Integer for the information that should appear in the
Value column.
7. Click on Ok when you have finished describing the item. The object you created appears
in the Symbol Browser. Once an item you created is designated as a symbol, you can put
clones of it anywhere in the drawing on your screen.
364 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS

Figure 16.14: The new item appears in the Symbol Browser

Editing Symbols
What if you want to edit information about a symbol or get rid of it in your Symbol Browser?
That’s easy.

To edit information about a symbol:

1. Move your cursor in the Symbol Browser to the symbol you want to edit.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 365

Figure 16.15: The Symbol Browser’s pop-up menu

3. Select Edit Fields. The symbol descriptor box appears.

4. Double-click in the field you want to change and supply the new information in the Name
or Value columns. When you double-click on the Type column, you can select Text,
Decimal, or Integer for the information that should appear in the Value column.
5. Click on Ok when you have finished editing the description of the symbol.

To delete a symbol from the Symbol Browser:

1. Move your cursor in the Symbol Browser to the symbol you want to delete.
2. Right-click to display a pop-up menu.
3. Click on Delete. Then click on Yes or press (Enter) to confirm that you really want to
eliminate the symbol. The undesirable symbol disappears from the Symbol Browser and
from your computer’s hard drive.

To replace one symbol with another in your drawing:

1. Select Replace from the Options pull-down menu in the Symbol Browser. You are
prompted to Select symbol to replace.
2. Click on the symbol in your Drawing Window that you want to replace with another one
that appears in your Symbol Browser. You are prompted to Select symbol to replace with.
3. Click on the symbol you want in your Symbol Browser. You are prompted to Select entity
to replace.
4. Click on the undesirable symbol in your Drawing Window again. The undesirable symbol
disappears and its replacement that you selected in step 3 appears in your Drawing
Window. Continue using the replacement symbol by clicking on other undesirable
symbols in your Drawing Window.
5. Right-click in your Drawing Window to discontinue the replacement process.
366 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS
If you select Reload All from the Options pull-down menu, DataCAD LT gets the most recent
definition of a symbol from the hard drive. Otherwise, it goes to the drawing itself for the
definition.
Once you place a symbol in your drawing, DataCAD LT will no longer read the definition from
your hard drive. That’s why Reload All is important.
Symbols you insert “travel” with your drawing. If you insert symbol A into drawing 1, then
redefine symbol A from drawing 2, symbol A will look different in drawings 1 and 2. You can use
Reload All to make symbol A look the same in drawings 1 and 2.

Generating Reports About Symbols

You can generate reports based on the symbols that appear in your drawing.

To generate reports about symbols used in your drawing:

1. Select Reports from the Options pull-down menu. The Report Forms dialog box appears.

Figure 16.16: The Report Forms dialog box

2. Click in the box to the left of the items you want to include in your report. If you want
reports on all the items, click on Select All. If you want to start over with a clear slate,
click on Select None. Symbols that are not currently used in your drawing but still “live”
in your drawing’s database are grayed out or unavailable for reports.
3. Use the drop-down box in the right corner to select the type of report you want to
generate. If you want to use forms that are in another folder, click on the browse icon and
make your selection.
4. Decide which layer(s) you want to include in your reports by clicking on the appropriate
option in the Layer Search box.
5. Choose an output option in the lower left portion of the Report Forms dialog box:
 USING THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 367
• If you select To File, you are asked to supply a file name. The file will be in .TXT
format.
• If you select To Printer, the report goes to your default text printer.
• If you select To Drawing, you are prompted to Select point to position text. You can
change the appearance of the text by selecting Size, Angle, Weight, Slant, Aspect,
Factor, or Font from the left menu. Place the text insertion icon where you want the
report to appear in your Drawing Window.
Hint: To keep report column spacing consistent, use a fixed-width font (such as
ARCWY2FW).

Figure 16.17: Reports you generate can be placed in your drawing

6. Right-click to return to the Report Forms dialog box. You can generate other reports and
select the appropriate output option by following steps 2 through 5.
7. Click Close when you are finished generating reports.

Purging Unused Symbols

DataCAD LT remembers all the symbols you used even though you may have already erased some
of those symbols from the drawing on your screen. When you add a symbol to your drawing,
DataCAD LT stores that symbol with your drawing. This definition is not deleted when you erase
the symbol and continues to take up drawing file space. When you erase symbols from your
drawing, it’s important to purge the symbol if you don’t plan to use it again.
368 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS
To eliminate unused symbols from your drawing:
1. Select Purge Unused Symbols form the Options pull-down menu. A confirmation box
appears.

Figure 16.18: You can change your mind about purging unused symbols

2. Press (Enter) or click on Yes to continue the purge. Another warning box appears.

Figure 16.19: You can still change your mind at this point

3. Click on Yes or press (Enter). All the unused symbols as well as all prior actions (such as
erased entities) are eliminated from your Undo buffer.

Text Attributes for Symbols ,

Text attributes can be defined and added to symbols. This lets you use the same symbol multiple
times, supplying a unique text string for each one. For example, you could use one desk symbol
several times and label them “Jim’s desk,” “Nancy’s desk,” and “Bob’s desk.” For more
information on creating and editing text attributes, see “Using Text Attributes for Symbols” in the
“Text, Notes, and Labels” chapter.

Layers in Symbols
Symbols retain layer information. This lets you customize on/off layer settings for each symbol.
When a symbol is exploded, its constituent entities are returned to their proper layers or new
layers are created automatically if necessary.

Symbol Browser Settings

The Symbol Browser retains the following settings between DataCAD LT sessions.
• Last browse type (folder, template, or drawing)
• Last path browsed for symbols (independent from Templates and Insert Symbol menus)
• Last path browsed for templates (independent from Templates menu)
• Auto-divisions On/Off status
Shortcut: You can use (Ctrl) + (Click) on either the Folder or Templates menu item in the browse
pull-down menu to bypass the folder/file dialog. This lets you go directly to browsing the last symbol
folder or template file.
 INSERTING STAMPS | 369

If the Symbol Browser is not displayed, you can click on in the Draw toolbar. The Symbol
Browser will appear.

Inserting Stamps
You can choose from more than a dozen pre-formatted date-, time-, and file-related stamps to
insert into your drawing. The examples shown in the stamp selection menu are based on the
current date, time, and file settings as they will appear in the drawing. The values are updated
when the display is regenerated and when the drawing is printed. Since a stamp is really an
ordinary DataCAD LT text entity that contains a special formatting string, it has all the font,
sizing, and style options of ordinary DataCAD LT text strings. You can further customize how you
want stamps to appear in your drawing by doing a change/text/content and adding text around the
special strings. Stamp text can be used in XREFs and symbols. The values update automatically,
making stamps very flexible.

To add a stamp to your drawing:

1. Select Stamp form the Insert pull-down menu.
2. Select the stamp you want to use from the extended menu.

Importing BMP, JPEG, and Other Image Files

You can import bitmap (.BMP), JPEG (.JPG), GIF (.GIF), Tagged Image (.TIF), Targa (.TGA),
Portable Network Graphics (.PNG), Z-Soft (.PCX), and Kodak (.PCD) files into your DataCAD
LT drawing. Import any number of black and white, grayscale, and 8- to 32-bit color images. You
can trace scanned drawings, display site maps, or show digital photos of existing building facades
when you import bitmaps into your drawing.
Imported bitmaps are referenced, not inserted into your drawing file. That means your drawing file
size will not increase.

To import an image:
1. Click on Bitmap in the Insert pull-down menu. The Select Image dialog box appears.
2. Click on the .BMP, .JPG, .GIF, .TIF, .TGA, .PNG, .PCX, or .PCD file you want to insert
in your drawing and click Open. The Bitmap menu appears and you are prompted to
Enter first point of bitmap rectangle.
3. Toggle Outline on if you want to draw a visible polyline boundary around the inserted
image. Toggle No Outline on if you do not want a visible boundary around the image.
These are mutually exclusive toggles.
4. Toggle the Fixed Ratio option on to preserve the original dimensions of the image; toggle
it off to dynamically stretch the X and/or Y ratios while you are inserting the bitmap.
After you insert the image, you cannot change the ratio if Fixed Ratio was turned on;
therefore, for future flexibility, you may want to turn Fixed Ratio off.
370 | CHAPTER 16: SYMBOLS, IMAGES, AND OBJECTS
While working in your drawing, you can toggle off Bitmap On in the Display menu to
decrease drawing refresh times by not displaying all the bitmaps in your drawing. Toggle
it on again to display all images in your drawing as well as allow printing of them. Notice
that SWOTHLUDFB in the Status Window contains an upper-case letter B if BmpOn is
active; but it turns to a lower-case b if BmpOn is not active.
5. Enter the first corner of the image’s extents by clicking in the Drawing Area, using
coordinate entry, or object snapping to an existing point in your drawing. Notice that if
you move your cursor diagonally away from that point, a rectangular box (representing
the extents of your image) stretches with it. You are prompted to Enter second point of
bitmap rectangle.
6. Enter the corner diagonally across from the first corner by clicking in the Drawing Area,
using coordinate entry, or object snapping to an existing point in your drawing. The
image is inserted in your drawing. If Bitmap On is toggled off in the Utility/Display
menu, only a rectangular box representing the extents of the image appears in your
drawing. To display your image, toggle Bitmap On in the Display menu.
7. Use the Calibrate options in the Enlarge menu to scale bitmaps to real-world size. For
more information about this, see “Calibrating Enlargements” in this chapter.
You can control whether bitmaps or JPEGs print behind or in front of lines by using the Print first
or Print last options in the Pen Table. For more information, see “Using Pen Tables” in the
“Printing Your Drawing” chapter.

Calibrating Enlargements
You can enlarge or reduce imported bitmap and vector graphics to real-world scale. For example,
if you import a site map, you can use the Calibrate Distance function to enlarge the plan to real-
world dimensions.

To calibrate imported bitmaps or vector graphics and enlarge to real-world size:

1. Select Enlarge from the Edit menu. You are prompted to Select CENTER of enlargement.
2. Click on the graphic you want to resize. Options appear in the Enlarge menu.
3. Select Enlargement to display the calibration options.
4. Click on Cal. Dist.
5. Show the length of an entity or a known distance in the bitmap by clicking on your
imported graphic at the first point to begin drawing a measuring line. Extend the line and
click again when you reach the end of the entity or known distance in the graphic. You
are prompted to Enter new distance. The current distance follows this prompt.
6. Replace that value with what it should be in the “real world.” For example, the current
value may be 0.8, but in reality, it should be 6 feet; therefore, you would type 6 in the
input field. Press (Enter). DataCAD LT calculates the enlargement factor.
7. Right-click to go to the Enlarge menu. You are prompted to Select entity to
<ENLARGE>.
8. Select the entity or entities that you want to enlarge by that factor.
 | 371
Cal. Dist. automatically calculates an equal X/Y enlargement factor. Instead of Cal. Dist., you can
use the Cal. X and Y, Cal. X, or Cal. Y options to enlarge entities independently or unequally in
the X and Y directions.
 Elevations and Sections
With the EZ Tools macro, you can parametrically draw
residential or commercial elevations and sections quickly
17
In this chapter:
and easily. This set of tools eliminates the need for the
tedious linework and calculations otherwise required to Drawing exterior
elevations
create basic elevations. All angles, lines, offsets, and line
lengths are done automatically, leaving you free to Drawing door elevations
concentrate on the drawing aesthetics. Drawing window
The Elevations tool assists in drawing exterior and interior elevations
residential elevations (including door, window, and cabinet Drawing cabinet
elevations); the Sections tool draws cabinet outline sections. elevations
Drawing cabinet
sections
374 | CHAPTER 17: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS

Drawing Exterior Elevations

Exterior elevations are defined by selecting two points along the line of the subfloor. The exterior
elevation will be drawn relative to those two points, based on the Exterior menu settings.

Figure 17.1: A sample exterior elevation with default exterior elevation settings noted. EZ Tools draws
only those lines represented above by extra line thickness.
 DRAWING EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS | 375
To draw an exterior elevation:
1. Click on EZTOOLS in the Toolbox pull-down menu. The EZ Tools menu appears. If
EZTOOLS is not listed in the Toolbox pull-down menu, click Configure in the Toolbox
menu and add EZTOOLS to the Macros in Menu list.
2. Click on Elev in the EZ Tools menu. The Elev menu appears.
3. Click on Exterior in the Elev menu. The Exterior menu appears.
4. Choose between a full or partial elevation. Full exterior elevations are drawn by assuming
that the points you will select are on two opposite walls of the structure. Partial elevations
are drawn by assuming that the first point you select will be on a wall and the second
point will be at the mid-point of the structure. To draw a full elevation, toggle Full on; to
draw a partial elevation, toggle Partial on. These two toggles are mutually exclusive; only
one can be toggled on at any given time.
5. Set the roof style for your elevation by clicking on Style. The Style menu appears and
you are prompted to Select roof style.
6. Decide what type of roof you want to use by selecting one of the four mutually exclusive
toggles:
• Toggle Gable on to draw a gable roof in your elevation.
• Toggle Hip on to draw a hip roof in your elevation.
• Toggle Boston on to draw a Boston-style roof in your elevation.
• Toggle Shed on to draw a shed roof in your elevation.
You are returned to the Elev menu.
7. Set the height of the top plate on which the rafters rest by clicking on PlateHgt. A value
menu appears and you are prompted to Enter plate height. The default PlateHgt setting is
8’-0”. For more information on using value menus, see “Value Menus” in “The Drawing
Board” chapter.
8. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
9. Set the rise of the roof for every one foot of run by clicking on Pitch. A value menu
appears and you are prompted to Enter rise per foot for roof.
10. Use the value menu or type a pitch value and press (Enter). The default Pitch setting is
6”.
11. Set the width of the rafters by clicking on RoofThck. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to Enter the roof thickness.
Notice that the roof thickness is drawn relative to the plate height and the roof line is
always drawn an additional 1/2” from the top surface of the rafter.

12. Use the value menu or type a thickness and press (Enter). The default RoofThck setting is
9 1/2”.
13. Set the length of the roof overhang by clicking on Overhang. A value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter the roof overhang.
376 | CHAPTER 17: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
Notice that the roof overhang is measured from the wall exterior framing surface to the
back surface of the fascia.

14. Use the value menu or type a length and press (Enter). The default Overhang setting is 1’-
0”.
15. Set the wall thickness by clicking on WallThck. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to Enter the wall thickness.
Notice that the wall thickness is drawn relative to the first point you will select to draw the
elevation.

16. Use the value menu or type a thickness and press (Enter). The default WallThck setting is
3 1/2”.
17. Set the fascia width by clicking on Fascia. A value menu appears and you are prompted to
Enter the width of the fascia.
Notice that the fascia width is measured across the back surface of the fascia; the fascia
thickness is set to 3/4” and can’t be changed.

18. Use the value menu or type a width and press (Enter). The default Fascia setting is 7 1/2”.
19. Set the rake board width by clicking on Rake Brd. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to Enter the width of the rake board.
Notice that the rake board width is measured from the roof line.

20. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter). The default Rake Brd setting is 7
1/2”.
21. Set the corner board width by clicking on CornrBrd. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to Enter the width of the corner board.
Notice that the corner board width is measured relative to the exterior wall line.

22. Use the value menu or type a width and press (Enter). The default CornrBrd setting is 5
1/2”.
23. Set the cladding thickness by clicking on CladThck. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to Enter the cladding thickness.
Notice that the thickness of the cladding is measured from the wall framing out to the
exterior wall line.

24. Use the value menu or type a thickness and press (Enter). The default CladThck setting is
1 1/2”.
25. Set the grade elevation by clicking on GradElev. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to Enter sub-floor distance above the grade.
Notice that the grade elevation is measured relative to the subfloor.

26. Use the value menu or type a distance and press (Enter). The default GradElev setting is
2’-0”. The distance between the top surface of the subfloor and the bottom edge of the
cladding is 1’-0” and can’t be changed. For best results, set the grade elevation to 1’-0” or
greater.
 DRAWING DOOR ELEVATIONS | 377
27. Set the color of the outside lines of the elevation by clicking on Out Colr. A color menu
appears and you are prompted to Select outer color.
28. Use the color menu to set the outside line color. The default Out Colr setting is White.
29. Set the color of the inside lines of the elevation by clicking on In Colr. A color menu
appears and you are prompted to Select inner color. The default In Colr setting is Red.
30. Use the color menu to set the inside line color.
31. Select the two points along the top surface of the subfloor. The first point should be
located on the outside surface of the wall framing. To select the first point, click in the
Drawing Area, use coordinate entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing. You are
prompted to select the other side of the elevation.
32. Select the second point by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate entry, or object
snapping to a point in your drawing. The elevation is drawn, aligned with the two points
you just selected. You can click on Defaults at any time to restore all default settings in
the Exterior menu.

Drawing Door Elevations

Door elevations are defined by selecting two points along the subfloor line. The door elevation
will be drawn relative to those two points, based on the Door menu settings.

To draw a door elevation:

1. Click on EZTOOLS in the Toolbox pull-down menu. The EZ Tools menu appears. If
EZTOOLS is not listed in the Toolbox pull-down menu, click Configure in the Toolbox
menu and add EZTOOLS to the Macros in Menu list.
2. Click on Elev in the EZ Tools menu. The Elev menu appears.
3. Click on Door in the Elev menu. The Door menu appears.
4. Toggle on the door type: Single or Double. These are mutually exclusive toggles; only
one can be toggled on at any given time. The Single and Double toggles do not apply to
Garage A, Garage B, or Sliding door styles.
5. Set the door style for your elevation by clicking on Style. The Style menu appears and
you are prompted to Pick style of door to draw.
378 | CHAPTER 17: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS

Figure 17.2: Door styles available for door elevations

6. Click on a door style in the list. You are returned to the Door menu. See “Door Styles for
Elevations” below for details.

Figure 17.3: Door elevation settings

7. Set the head height of the door by clicking on Head Hgt. A value menu appears and you
are prompted to Enter door head height.
8. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
 DRAWING WINDOW ELEVATIONS | 379
9. Toggle on Trim or SideLght; these are mutually exclusive toggles, so you can select only
one. Draw door trim in your elevation by toggling Trim on; draw the door sidelight by
toggling SideLght on. The Stop option appears. The default setting for Trim is 2 1/2”, the
style for the SideLght option is automatically set, and the Stop option default is 3/4”.
10. Toggle Stop on to draw the door stop if you toggled either Trim or SideLght on in the
previous step.
11. Set the trim color by clicking on TrimColr. A color menu appears and you are prompted
to Select the trim color.
12. Use the color menu to set the trim color. The default TrimColr setting is White.
13. Set the door color by clicking on DoorColr. A color menu appears and you are prompted
to Select the door color.
14. Use the color menu to set the door color. The default DoorColr setting is Red.
15. Enter the first point for the door elevation. You can click in the Drawing Area, use
coordinate entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing. You are prompted to enter a
point for the other side of the door.
16. Enter the second point for the door. You can click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate
entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing. The door elevation is drawn. You can
click on Defaults at any time to restore all default settings in the Door menu.

Door Styles for Elevations

Flush Flush door style.
HalfLght Half light door style.
Patio Patio door style.
French French door style.
Leaded Leaded glass door style.
HalfLead Half leaded glass door style.
SixPanel Six panel door style.
Bifold Bifold door style.
Accord Accordian door style.
Vented Vented door style.
NarLtRt Door drawn with a narrow light on the right side of the door.
NarLtLft Door drawn with a narrow light on the left side of the door.
StorFrnt Storefront door style.
Garage A Garage door style, with four panels; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
Garage B Garage door style, with four panels and four windows in the second panel from the top; Single
and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
Sliding Sliding door style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.

Drawing Window Elevations

Window elevations are defined by selecting two points along the subfloor line. The window
elevation will be drawn relative to those two points, based on the Window menu settings.

To draw a window elevation:

1. Click on EZTOOLS in the Toolbox pull-down menu. The EZ Tools menu appears. If
EZTOOLS is not listed in the Toolbox pull-down menu, click Configure in the Toolbox
menu and add EZTOOLS to the Macros in Menu list.
380 | CHAPTER 17: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
2. Click on Elev in the EZ Tools menu. The Elev menu appears.
3. Click on Window in the Elev menu. The Window menu appears.
4. Toggle on either Single or Double; these are mutually exclusive toggles. Draw single
windows by toggling Single on; draw double windows by toggling Double on.
5. Set the window style for your elevation by clicking on Style. The Style menu appears and
you are prompted to Pick style of window to draw. The Single and Double toggles do not
apply to the casement and sliding window styles.

Figure 17.4: Window styles available for window elevations

6. Click on a window style in the list. You are returned to the Window menu. See “Window
Styles for Elevations” below for details.
7. Set the head height of the window by clicking on Head Hgt. A value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter window head height.
8. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
9. Set the sill height of the window by clicking on Sill Hgt. A value menu appears and you
are prompted to Enter window sill height.
10. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
11. Toggle one of the five mutually exclusive sill, capstone, and shutter options on to draw
brick sills, capstones, or shutters with your window elevations.
• Toggle BrkSillA on to draw brick sills along the bottom of the window.
• Toggle BrkSillB on to draw brick sills along the bottom and top of the window.
• Toggle Capstone on to draw a bottom and top sill with a capstone.
 DRAWING WINDOW ELEVATIONS | 381
• Toggle ShutterA on to draw a single shutter on either side of the window.
• Toggle ShutterB on to draw a double shutter on either side of the window.
• To draw window elevations without brick sills, capstones, or shutters, click on
whatever option is toggled on to toggle it off again.

Figure 17.5: Sill and shutter styles for window elevations

12. Set the frame color by clicking on FramColr. A color menu appears and you are prompted
to Select the frame color.
13. Use the color menu to set the frame color. The default FramColr setting is White.
14. Set the window sash color by clicking on SashColr. A color menu appears and you are
prompted to Select the sash color.
15. Use the color menu to set the sash color. The default SashColr setting is Red.
16. Enter the first point for the window by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate
entry, or object snapping to a point in your drawing. You are prompted to enter a point for
the other side of the window.
17. Enter the second point for the window by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate
entry, or object snapping to a point in your drawing. The window elevation is drawn. You
can click on Defaults at any time to restore all default settings in the Window menu.

Window Styles for Elevations

Picture Picture window style.
Pict 4x8 Picture window style with four columns and eight rows of panes.
Pct3x6 Picture window style with three columns and six rows of panes.
PictLead Picture window style with leaded glass.
DH 1/1 Double-hung window style with no panes.
DH 4/4 Double-hung window style with four panes in each window.
DH 6/6 Double-hung window style with six panes in each window.
DH 6/4 Double-hung window style with six panes in the top window and four panes in the bottom
window.
DH 9/6 Double-hung window style with nine panes in the top window and six panes in the bottom
window.
382 | CHAPTER 17: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
CasemntA Casement window style with no panes; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
CasemntB Casement window style with three panes of equal size; Single and Double toggles do not
apply to this style.
CasemntC Casement window style with four panes of equal size; Single and Double toggles do not apply
to this style.
CasemntD Casement window style with three panes, with the center pane larger and the two side panes of
equal size; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
CasemntE Casement window style with four panes, two center panes larger and of equal size and the two
outside panes of equal size; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
HSliderA Horizontal sliding window style with two panes of equal size; Single and Double toggles do
not apply to this style.
HSliderB Horizontal sliding window style with three panes of equal size; Single and Double toggles do
not apply to this style.

Drawing Cabinet Elevations

Cabinet elevations are defined by selecting two points along the subfloor line. The cabinet
elevation will be drawn relative to those two points, based on the Cabinet menu settings.
Click on Section in the Elev menu to display the Section menu and draw cabinet sections.

To draw a cabinet elevation:

1. Click on EZTOOLS in the Toolbox pull-down menu. The EZ Tools menu appears. If
EZTOOLS is not listed in the Toolbox pull-down menu, click Configure in the Toolbox
menu and add EZTOOLS to the Macros in Menu list.
2. Click on Elev in the EZ Tools menu. The Elev menu appears.
3. Click on Cabinet in the Elev menu. The Cabinet menu appears.
4. Toggle on Single or Double; these two options are mutually exclusive. Draw cabinets
with one door by toggling Single on; draw cabinets with double doors by toggling Double
on. The Single and Double toggles do not apply to the drawer, desk, pantry, or oven
cabinet styles.
5. Set the cabinet style for your elevation by clicking on Style. The Style menu appears and
you are prompted to Pick style of cabinet to draw.
 DRAWING CABINET ELEVATIONS | 383

Figure 17.6: Cabinet elevation styles

6. Click on a cabinet style in the list. You are returned to the Cabinet menu. See “Cabinet
Styles for Elevations” below for details.
7. Set the wall height of the cabinet by clicking on WCab Hgt. A value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter wall cabinet height.
8. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
9. Set the splash height of the cabinet by clicking on SplshHgt. A value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter wall splash height.
10. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
11. Toggle on either PullRt or PullLft to draw cabinet pulls; these are mutually exclusive
toggles. If you toggle Pull Rt on, cabinet pulls are drawn on the right; if you toggle
PullLft on, cabinet pulls are drawn on the left. These options only affect cabinet
elevations when Single is toggled on in the Cabinet menu; they have no effect when
Double is toggled on.
12. Set the counter color by clicking on CntrColr. A color menu appears and you are
prompted to Select the counter color.
13. Use the color menu to set the counter color.
14. Set the cabinet color by clicking on Cab Colr. A color menu appears and you are
prompted to Select the cabinet color.
15. Use the color menu to set the cabinet color. The default Cab Colr setting is Red.
16. Enter the first point for the cabinet. You can click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate
entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing. You are prompted to enter a point for the
other side of the cabinet.
384 | CHAPTER 17: ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS
17. Enter the second point for the cabinet. You can click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate
entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing. The cabinet elevation is drawn. You can
click on Defaults at any time to restore all default settings in the Cabinet menu.

Cabinet Styles for Elevations

Std Wall Standard wall cabinet style.
Std Base Standard base cabinet style.
Std Drwr Standard drawer cabinet style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
Std Sink Standard sink cabinet style.
Std Desk Standard desk cabinet style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
Van Base Vanity base cabinet style.
Van Drwr Vanity drawer cabinet style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
Van Sink Vanity sink cabinet style.
HC Wall Handicapped wall cabinet style.
HC Drwr Handicapped drawer cabinet style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
HC Sink Handicapped sink cabinet style.
HC Desk Handicapped desk cabinet style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
Pantry Pantry cabinet style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.
Oven Oven cabinet style; Single and Double toggles do not apply to this style.

Drawing Sections
The Section tool gives you a quick way to create an outline section cut through cabinets, baths,
and showers. Click on Elev in the Section menu to display the Elev menu and draw elevations.

Figre 14.6: A sample cabinet section with default settings noted

To draw a cabinet section:

1. Click on EZTOOLS in the Toolbox pull-down menu. The EZ Tools menu appears. If
EZTOOLS is not listed in the Toolbox pull-down menu, click Configure in the Toolbox
menu and add EZTOOLS to the Macros in Menu list.
2. Click on Section in the EZ Tools menu. The Section menu appears.
3. Click on Cabinet in the Section menu. The Cabinet menu appears.
 | 385
4. Set the cabinet style for your section by clicking on Style. The Style menu appears and
you are prompted to Select the type of section to draw. See “Cabinet Styles for Sections”
below for details.
5. Click on a style in the list. You are returned to the Cabinet menu.
6. Set the soffit height of the cabinet by clicking on Soff Hgt. A value menu appears and you
are prompted to Enter soffit height.
7. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
8. Set the wall elevation of the cabinet by clicking on WCabElev. A value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter wall cabinet elevation.
9. Use the value menu or type a value and press (Enter).
10. Set the wall height of the cabinet by clicking on WCab Hgt. A value menu appears and
you are prompted to Enter wall cabinet height.
11. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
12. Set the back-splash height of the cabinet by clicking on SplshHgt. A value menu appears
and you are prompted to Enter back-splash height.
13. Use the value menu or type a height and press (Enter).
14. Set the section color by clicking on SectColr. A color menu appears and you are prompted
to Select the section color.
15. Use the color menu to set the section color. The default SectColr setting is White.
16. Set the element color (for bathtubs and showers) by clicking on ElemColr. A color menu
appears and you are prompted to Select the element color.
17. Use the color menu to set the element color. The default ElemColr setting is Red.
18. Enter the first point for the cabinet section. You can click in the Drawing Area, use
coordinate entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing. You are prompted to enter a
point for the other side of the section.
19. Enter the second point for the cabinet section. You can click in the Drawing Area, use
coordinate entry, or object snap to a point in your drawing. The cabinet section is drawn.
You can click on Defaults at any time to restore all default settings in the Cabinet menu.

Cabinet Styles for Sections

Standard Standard cabinet style.
HandiCap Handicapped cabinet style.
Vanity Vanity cabinet style.
PassThru Pass-through cabinet style.
BarTop Bar top style.
Bathtub Bathtub style.
Shower Shower style.
 Printing Your Drawing
Printing in DataCAD LT offers you many different options,
so you can always get the result you need. You can set the In this chapter:
18
plotting scale for your drawing, customize pen widths for
plotting, and assign colors and weights to different plotter Assigning colors and
pens. You can plot your entire drawing or just part of it by plotter pen widths
using a quick layout. DataCAD LT’s print preview allows Laying out your drawing
you to visually check your plot before you send it to your on sheets
plotter. You can quickly check to make sure your final plot Previewing your print
will be correct.
Checking your print
Printing details and
drawings
388 | CHAPTER 18: PRINTING YOUR DRAWING

Printing Basics
Make sure you first set up the printer(s) you intend to use in Windows so that you can plot your
DataCAD LT drawings. You can check the printers attached to your computer locally or available
on your office network with Windows. Simply click on the Start button, select Settings, and click
on Printers. If the printer(s) or plotter(s) you intend to use are not displayed in the Printers dialog
box, click on the Add Printer icon. Follow the instructions in Windows to set up the printer(s) you
want to use. If you want to use a printer that is connected to your office network, but it doesn’t
appear in the listing in the Printers dialog box, ask your Network Administrator for assistance. If
you occasionally use a printer in your home, make sure you add that to the list, too.
The first time you print a drawing, you need to set several printing options, including the
printer/plotter you’ll use, the paper size and orientation, and the layout orientation of the drawing.
These settings become part of your drawing when you save the file and DataCAD LT will use
them the next time you print that particular drawing. You can always change these settings later by
using the Print Setup option in the File pull-down menu.
DataCAD LT stores printing information on a per-drawing file basis. For each subsequent drawing
file, you must again establish that file’s printing/plotting criteria.
Printing your DataCAD LT drawing is a simple process. Just display the drawing on your screen
as you want to print it. Then go to the Print/Plot menu. Use the options in this menu to set the
criteria for the plotter, control the plotting scale and the pens (including the width, density, and
color), and lay out the drawing on the sheet(s). You can preview the drawing before you commit it
to paper. Finally, you send the drawing to the printer/plotter or to a file.

To print a drawing:
1. Display in the Drawing Window exactly what you want to print. Decide if you want to
print the text, dimensions, hatching, and line weights in your drawing. If you do, make
sure Show Text, Show Dim., Show Hatch, and Show Weight, respectively, are toggled on
in the Utility/Display menu. Keep in mind that the printed version of your drawing will
contain only what is displayed on your screen. If something isn’t visible in the Drawing
Window, it will not appear on paper either.
2. Click on Print in the File pull-down menu, click on Print/Plot in the Utility menu, or click

on in the Standard toolbar. Depending on whether you’ve printed this drawing

before or not, one of two things may happen now:
• If you’ve printed this drawing before, the Print/Plot menu appears. Click on Setup in
the Print/Plot menu to display the Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box.
• If this is the first time you’ve printed this drawing, DataCAD LT tells you A printer
has not yet been selected for this drawing. Please click OK to assign a printer and
select a paper size for this drawing. Click on OK to close the message box and
display the Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box.
Shortcut: Press (Ctrl) + (P) to print your drawing.
 PRINTING BASICS | 389

Figure 18.1: The Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box

3. Indicate the printer/plotter settings for this drawing file. Make your decisions using the
Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box. These settings will be stored as part of your file so
that you can use them the next time you want to print this particular drawing. Of course,
you can change any of the settings the next time you want to print your drawing.

• Printer section - use the Name drop-down box to select the printer you’d like to use.
Clicking the Properties button displays details about the printer you selected.
• Paper section - use the Size drop-down box to select a paper size. The paper sizes
available in the Size drop-down box are read from your Windows printer driver. If a
size you want is not listed, then your printer doesn’t support it or the driver may not
be configured to display it. You can change the driver properties by closing
DataCAD LT and opening the Printers dialog box from the Control Panel in
Windows. Choose the next closest appropriate size, select User-Defined if listed, or
use a different printer.
Notice that the Effective plotting area dimensions (displayed directly below the Size drop
down box) change depending on the Size of paper you choose. The effective plotting area
is the printable area for the paper size you’ve selected, as defined by the printer
manufacturer’s driver. Any part of the drawing extending outside this area will not be
printed (see Figure 18.2).

• Paper Orientation at Device section - click on Normal or Rotated.

390 | CHAPTER 18: PRINTING YOUR DRAWING
• User Defined Paper Size section – indicate the units of measurement (English for
inches or Metric for millimeters) for your printer. Then indicate the width and length
of the paper you want to use. Some printer drivers (such as LaserJets and older
plotters) don’t support user-defined paper sizes, even though that option remains
listed in the Size drop-down box. One way to check is to select User-Defined for the
paper size and enter a width and length for the paper size. If the Effective plotting
area dimensions don’t change based on the size dimensions, then the selected
printer’s driver doesn’t support user-defined paper sizes. Select another paper size
from the drop-down box.

Limits of 24”x36” sheet

Effective plotting area, as reported by Windows driver in
print set-up for the selected printer (23.6”x34.66”)
Limits of drawing must be within effective plotting area
Non-printing region
Figure 18.2: Example of printed sheet showing the edges of the sheet, the nonprinting area, the effective
plotting area, and the extents of the drawing

• Check Plot section – decide whether you want to print a test copy of your drawing on
your laser printer. If you do not want to print a test copy, click on None. If you want
to print a test copy, use the other options in this portion of the Printer/Plotter Settings
dialog box. For more information, see “Printing a Check Plot” later in this chapter.
• Copies section - enter the number of copies of each sheet you’d like to print.
• DataCAD LT Layout Orientation section - click on Normal to print the sheet as it
appears on screen or click on Rotated to rotate the sheet 90° for plotting. The Rotated
option in the DataCAD LT Layout Orientation section rotates the geometry for the
print only; it does not rotate the drawing itself.
4. Click OK to close the Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box. The Print/Plot menu appears.
 PRINTING BASICS | 391
5. Make decisions about the plotting scale, pen width and/or colors, and rotation for this
drawing.
• Scale - change the plotting scale by clicking on Scale. A value menu appears and you
are prompted to Select new scale. Use the value menu to select a new scale and press
(Enter).
• Pen Width - determine if you have lines in your drawing with a line weight above
“1.” If so, you can change the amount of space between pen passes when printing
these thicker lines (see Figure 18.3). Click on Pen Width in the Print/Plot menu and
use the value menu to enter a width.

Figure 18.3: Lines drawn with a line weight of 4 and printed with a pen width setting of 12 (left) and 95
(right)

• Pen Table - use Pen Table to assign each pen in your plotter to a line color in your
drawing as well as to set the width and color density for each pen. To change Pen
Table settings, click on PenTable in the Print/Plot menu; the Pen Table dialog box
appears. Change the settings as necessary and click on OK. See “Using Pen Tables”
later in this chapter for more information.
• Rotate – toggle this option on if you want to plot your drawing or detail at a rotation
angle, use the value menu to select an angle, and then press (Enter).
Depending on the plotting history for this drawing, one of two things may happen if you
toggle Rotate on:

If you haven’t plotted this drawing before or if you used the Quick Layout option the last
time you plotted it, you are prompted to Select CENTER of rotation. Click in the Drawing
Area to enter the center of rotation for your plot. You are prompted to Enter ANGLE of
rotation.

6. Lay out your drawing with the Quick Layout option. Use the Quick Layout option if you
want everything displayed in your Drawing Window to be printed as is on one sheet of
paper. See “Laying Out Your Drawing” later in this chapter for more information on
using the Quick Layout option.
7. Decide if you want to look at the plot before sending it to the printer/plotter. Toggle
Preview on to look at your plot before you actually send it to the plotter; toggle Preview
off to send the sheet directly to the plotter. (The Preview toggle can only be used with the
Plot and Partial options in the Print/Plot menu. See “More About Previewing Your Plot”
for details.)
8. Plot the sheet using one of the following options:
392 | CHAPTER 18: PRINTING YOUR DRAWING
• Print/Plot – send the sheet to your printer by clicking on Print/Plot in the Print/Plot
menu. If you toggled Preview off in the previous step, the sheet is plotted; if you
toggled Preview on, the DataCAD LT Plot Previewer opens, allowing you to see the
plot before sending it to your plotter. To interrupt a plot in progress, press (End).
• To File – send the sheet to a file by clicking on To File in the Print/Plot menu. A
dialog box appears. Type a name for your plot (.PLT) file and click on Save or press
(Enter). Plot files are saved by default in your DataCAD LT\Plot Files folder.
• Partial - plot only a part of your drawing by clicking on Partial. Choose a selection
method from the Partial menu and then select the part of your drawing you want
plotted. If you toggled Preview off in the previous step, the selection is plotted; if
you toggled Preview on, the DataCAD LT Plot Previewer opens, allowing you to see
the selection before sending it to your plotter.

More About Previewing Your Plot

Preview is a look-before-you-leap function. This is especially useful in large offices where several
people share a printer or plotter. It is also a convenient way to spare a tree.
Previewing a plotting sheet before actually printing it allows you to verify that you’re using the
proper paper size and plotting scale, that your drawing is positioned properly, and that such things
as hatching, dimensions, and line overshoot are displayed as you want them. From the DataCAD
LT Plot Previewer window, you can change the view of your preview and then plot, copy, or save
it.
 PRINTING A CHECK PLOT | 393
Copy an image of the preview to the Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Full Page let you see the preview
Windows clipboard. Then paste it into at different levels of detail. You can also click on the
another Windows application. preview to zoom in or press (Ctrl) or (Shift) and click to
zoom out.

Plot your drawing, just as it’s displayed in Close Plot Previewer without plotting your
the Plot Previewer window. preview and return to your drawing.

Figure 18.4: The DataCAD LT Plot Previewer window

Printing a Check Plot

You can use check plots to do a quick test print to your laser printer before sending the file to your
plotter. Check plots use separate settings for the printer, paper size, and paper orientation you
designated.

To do a check plot:
1. Click on Setup in the Print/Plot menu. The Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box appears. Go
to the Check Plot section and select the options you prefer.
2. Click on Fit to or Use this factor. These options are mutually exclusive.
• Fit to – select this if you want to fit the drawing to a single page. This option scales a
previously defined layout to fit on the selected paper size. It does not automatically
scale your drawing to fit on a defined paper size.
• Use this factor – select this to scale your drawing to a particular size for the check
plot. Select the scale factor percentage by clicking on the arrows. Your drawing and
pen widths (as set in the Pen Table) are scaled.
Notice that all the settings above the Check Plot section are now grayed and the settings
in the Check Plot section are now available.

3. Select a printer or plotter to use from the drop-down box in the To this printer area in the
Check Plot section.
394 | CHAPTER 18: PRINTING YOUR DRAWING
4. Choose a page size from the drop-down box in the Check Plot section.
5. Go to the Paper Orientation at Device area in the Check Plot section and select Normal
or Rotated. This setting works exactly like the one described in “Printing Basics” earlier
in this chapter.
6. Click on OK to close the Printer/Plotter Settings dialog box.
7. Continue with step 5 in the instructions under “Printing Basics” earlier in this chapter.

Using Pen Tables

Using pen tables will allow you to print the lines in your drawing in different colors than you drew
them, in greyscale, or in black, or all of these in a single print! Custom color names also appear in
the pen definition list. When you map a pen to a color, the color is remembered when you re-select
the color to map to. The “In order” option prints SPB fills in order instead of first or last.

First assign a pen number to the

on-screen line color in the Pen
Assignments list box.

Next, set the desired width, density,

and printed color for that pen number
in the Pen Settings table.

Checking a box prompts you

to select a printed color for
the pen. The checkbox is
surrounded with the color.

If the Map to Color box is not

checked, the pen number will
print in the on-screen color.

Overrides the above color

settings and prints all pens in
black.

Figure 18.6: In the Pen Assignments list box on the left, lines drawn in Lt Blue are assigned to pen number
7. In the Pen Settings table on the right, pen number 7 has been set to plot at .6mm width and at 100%
density (full color) in a blue color.
 USING PEN TABLES | 395
To use a pen table:
1. Click on PenTable in the Print/Plot menu. The Pen Table dialog box appears.
2. Go to the Pen Assignments list box and click on the color you want to assign to a pen.
The color and its name appear beneath the list box, along with the pen number that color
is currently assigned to.
3. Type the pen number you want to assign to that color. The pen assignment is changed in
the list.
4. Repeat steps 2 – 3 to continue changing pen assignments as necessary.
5. Go to the Pen Settings section and make decisions about the width, density, and colors for
the pens.
• Width - enter the width (in millimeters) for each pen that you assigned a color to.
• Percent Density - print screened colors. A setting of 100% prints full color; entering
a lesser percentage prints a screened color. This setting works only with printers that
accept RGB color definitions. For example, a LaserJet IV can print shades of grey
using screened black, but a LaserJet III can only print black.
• Map to Color - print lines in your drawing in a different color than they are on screen
by checking the box for the pen assigned to the color you used in your drawing. The
Color dialog box appears so that you can select the color (or create a custom color)
you’d like to print. After you click on OK in the Color dialog box, the new color
surrounds the Map to Color checkbox. The Map to Color checkboxes only affect
printing; they don’t change entity colors in your drawing.
Percent Density and Map to Color settings are used only for color and greyscale printing,
so they are only available when All Black is unchecked.

• All Black - print all lines in black (regardless of what color they are on screen or
what settings are entered in the rest of the pen table) by checking this option.
6. Click on OK to save the changes you made to the pen table.

More About Using Pen Tables

Here are some examples of how pen table settings affect plotting:
• If you set the Width for Pen 1 to .25 and the Percent Density to 20% and leave Map to Color
unchecked, all lines printed with Pen 1 will be printed .25mm wide in 20% of their full color
(i.e., with a 20% color screen). Full color is a color at 100% density.
• You can produce heavy text on a print by drawing all text in a specific color and then mapping
that color to a thicker pen using the Pen Table dialog box.
• To print in gray scale, check the Map to Color option for any pen you’d like to print as gray
scale. The Color dialog box appears. Since black is chosen by default, click on OK to accept
black as the color mapped to that pen. Then set the Percent Density option. For example, to
print a half-toned black color, change Percent Density to 50%. Some black and white printers
will automatically produce greyscale print when Map to Color and All Black are left
unchecked.
396 | CHAPTER 18: PRINTING YOUR DRAWING
• To print lines in a different color than they are on screen, click on the Map to Color checkbox.
Select a color from the Color dialog box; black is selected by default. Click on OK. All lines
using that pen will be reprinted in the selected color, regardless of their color on the screen.
The Map to Color options only affect printing; the actual colors of the entities aren’t changed.
Saving and Using Pen Table Settings
You can save a lot of time when setting up to plot your drawings if you save your Pen Table
settings in a .DPF file. You can then quickly load those settings when you want to use them,
instead of having to change all the Pen Table settings each time you print.
The name of the Pen Table file used in a drawing is always saved in that drawing. The default Pen
Table file is dcadwin.dpf, located in your DataCAD\Support Files folder.

To save pen table settings:

1. Click on Pen Table in the Print/Plot menu. The Pen Table dialog box appears.
2. Change the settings as necessary.
3. Click on Save As in the Pen Table dialog box. Another dialog box appears, prompting
you to Save pen file as.
4. Type a name for the Pen Table settings file and click on Save or press (Enter). The dialog
box closes.
5. Click on OK in the Pen Table dialog box to close it.

To use pen table settings that you’ve saved in a .DPF file:

1. Click on Pen Table in the Print/Plot menu. The Pen Table dialog box appears.
2. Click on Load in the Pen Table dialog box. Another dialog box appears, prompting you to
Load pen file.
3. Click on the pen file you want to use and click on Open or press (Enter). The dialog box
closes and the settings are loaded into the Pen Table dialog box.
4. Click on OK in the Pen Table dialog box to close it.

Laying Out Your Drawing

You can easily lay out your drawing at a single scale on a single sheet of paper with Quick
Llayout.
Whenever you change Print/Plot menu settings, make sure you check the layouts you’ve already
set up before you plot them. You can use the Preview option to check your sheets.

Using Quick Layout

As its name implies, quick layout is a fast, simple way to print all or part of your drawing on a
single sheet.
 LAYING OUT YOUR DRAWING | 397
To quickly lay out your drawing for plotting at a single scale:
1. Click on Quick Layout in the Print/Plot menu. The Layout menu appears. Notice that a
grid representing the plotting area of the selected paper size is now attached to your
cursor. (A dashed grid may also be displayed, representing the last defined quick layout.)
2. Position the grid over your drawing, so that the part you want to print is inside the grid. If
your drawing is too large or small for the grid, exit the Layout menu and change the
plotting scale; repeat steps 1–2.
3. Position the grid as you want it and click. The layout is defined and you can continue
with the plotting instructions given in “Printing Basics” earlier in this chapter.
 Modeling Basics
DataCAD has a comprehensive set of 3D modeling tools,
which can be used to complement the 2D tools. Since
19
In this chapter:
DataCAD is a true 3D modeling program, 2D and 3D data
can coexist in the same drawing, allowing the user to Z-base and Z-height
combine the flexibility and strengths of each method. For The zero plane
example, you can develop a 2D drawing that can then be Changing 3D settings
used to construct a 3D profile or perhaps a surface of
revolution. Drawing 3D lines
3D snapping
Using markers
400 | CHAPTER 19: MODELING BASICS

Z-Base and Z-Height

After using DataCAD as a 2D drafting tool, you’re probably familiar with the concept of Z-base
and Z-height as the “floor” and “ceiling” of entities you draw. When you use the 3D modeling
tools in DataCAD, however, Z-base and Z-height no longer have to be floor and ceiling values.
Instead, they’re measured from the zero plane. Normally, the zero plane is parallel to the floor of
your model; so in plan view, positive values for Z-base and Z-height extend toward you (out of the
screen) while negative Z values extend away from you (into the screen). See “The Zero Plane”
below for more information.
Z-base doesn’t have to be at a lower elevation than Z-height, although you may find it easier to
use them this way. Keep in mind, however, that entities are always constructed from Z-base to Z-
height.
Most 3D entities have some kind of thickness associated with them; for instance, slabs have
thickness while cylinders and cones have height. Because you can place the zero plane, Z-base,
and Z-height in any spatial orientation with respect to your model, DataCAD can use the Z-base
and Z-height settings to determine the thickness or height of a 3D entity. They can represent the
front and back walls of a building, the sides of a bookcase, or any other two values that, taken
together, create a depth to a drawing object.
In addition to Z-base and Z-height, you can use two auxiliary Z elevations as well: Z-User 1 and
Z-User 2. These elevations are two extra planes in space, placed somewhere between Z-base and
Z-height, that can be useful for creating 3D entities.

Z By Layer
Beginning with DataCAD version 11, you can set unique Z-base and Z-height values on each
layer. To do so, toggle Z By Layer on in the 2D Utility\Settings menu. Each time you set Z-base
and Z-height, those settings will affect the current layer only. Any new layers you create take on
the settings of the current layer, including its values.

The Zero Plane

The zero plane is the plane in your model where Z=0. In plan view, the zero plane is fixed at the
ground plane; however, in other views, you can change its position in relation to your model. It is
important to note that, regardless of how its position changes relative to your model, the zero
plane is always parallel to the screen. When you change its position, the zero plane doesn’t change
in relation to your screen; rather it changes in relation to your model. So when you change views
of your model, you can use the following methods to change the orientation of the zero plane as
well:
• Change the view of your model to orthographic (plan) view. The zero plane is changed to
equal the ground plane. This method is best used when changes to your model can be made in
plan view. Keep in mind that the model is temporarily displayed in plan view when you define
a new elevation.
• Create a new elevation (click on New in the View/Elevation pull-down menu). The zero plane
is changed to equal the elevation plane. This method is best used when changes to your model
can be made in elevation view.
 Z-BASE AND Z-HEIGHT | 401
• Change the view of your model to a parallel view; this is often an elevation but you can use
any parallel view. Use Edit Plane in the 3D Views menu to change the orientation of the zero
plane. See “More About Positioning the Zero Plane” for more information on using the Edit
Plane and Plane Snap options.
• Change the view of your model to an isometric or similar view. Using Plane Snap in the 3D
Views menu, change the orientation of the zero plane by selecting three points on the plane,
such as the corners of a slab. This method is useful when you want to change the zero plane to
match the plane of a roof or something similar.
• Using the Controls option in the 3D Views menu, change the view of your model to any
parallel view. The zero plane is changed so that it passes through the view center.
More About Positioning the Zero Plane
As described above, you can use both Edit Plane and Plane Snap to position the zero plane.
Following are specific instructions on using both options.

To position the zero plane using Edit Plane:

1. Change to a parallel view that will allow you to draw a line indicating where you want
the zero plane to be. This parallel view is usually an elevation of some kind.
2. Click on 3D Menus in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. The 3D Menus appears.
3. Click on 3D Views. The 3D Views menu appears.
4. Click on Edit Plane in the 3D Views menu. The Edit Plane menu appears.
5. Notice that a new view center is created when you define a new zero plane. To set the Z
coordinate (or height) of the view center, click on Center Z in the Edit Plane menu, enter
a Z value, and press (Enter). You are prompted to Select a point on the edit plane. The
Center Z setting automatically reverts back to its default of 5’-0” after you finish defining
the new zero plane.
6. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the first point of the new zero
plane. This point will also be the new view center. The cursor changes to a New
Elevation Indicator and you are prompted to Indicate the direction of the edit plane. See
“More About the New Elevation Indicator Cursor” in the “Viewing Your Model” chapter.
7. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to enter the second point of the new
zero plane. The view is changed based on the plane you just defined.
8. Save this new view. Click on Add View in the Edit Plane menu, type a name for the view,
and press (Enter). The view is added to your go-to-view list. Keep in mind that view
names can include up to eight characters but no spaces. If your model moves off screen,
click Reset in the Edit Plane menu. The view is changed back to the most recent plan
view.
There are a few rules when using Plane Snap that you should be aware of before you begin:
• When you select the three plane-defining points, be sure you snap to them in a clockwise
direction.
402 | CHAPTER 19: MODELING BASICS
• The first two points you snap to will align with the bottom of the screen in the new view; be
sure to select the points in such a way that the new view will make sense to you. Keep in mind
that if the new view is not what you wanted, you can always click on Reset in the Plane Snap
menu to revert back to your original view.
In the following example, we need to place a skylight in the roof. To do this, we must first
reposition the zero plane so it matches the plane of the roof. The easiest method for doing this is to
use Plane Snap to simply snap to three points of the roof.
Remembering to work in a clockwise direction, we snap to the first two points along the bottom
edge of the roof, rather than along the side. This bottom edge of the roof is aligned with the
bottom of the screen, making it easy for us to orient ourselves to the new view, shown on the right
of the example below.
3

Clockwise
2 3

2 1

This edge will align with the bottom of the screen.

Figure 19.1: An example of effectively using Plane Snap to define a new zero plane

To position the zero plane using Plane Snap:

1. Change to a parallel view that will give you easy access to three points that lie on the
plane that will be the new zero plane.
2. Click on 3D Menus in the Edit menu in the Menu Window. The 3D Menus appears.
3. Click on 3D Views in the 3D Menus menu. The 3D Views menu appears.
4. Click on Plane Snap in the 3D Views menu. The Plane Snap menu appears and the cursor
changes to a 3D world-snapping cursor. You are prompted to Select first point of
snapping plane. For details on the 3D world-snapping cursor, see “All About 3D
Snapping” later in this chapter.
5. Enter the first point on the new zero plane and snap to a point on your model. You are
prompted to Select second point of snapping plane.
6. Enter the second point on the new zero plane and snap to the point on your model. You
are prompted to Select third point of snapping plane.
7. Enter the third point on the new zero plane and snap to the point on your model. The
view is changed based on the plane you just defined. If your model moves off screen,
click Reset in the Plane Snap menu. The view is changed back to the most recent plan
view
 CHANGING 3D SETTINGS | 403
8. Save this new view. Click on Add View in the Plane Snap menu, type a name for the
view, and press (Enter). The view is added to your go-to-view list. Keep in mind that
view names can include up to eight characters but no spaces.

Changing 3D Settings
The 3D Settings menu has several toggles and other settings that affect the 3D menus. You can
either click on Settings in the 3D Menus menu or click on Settings in the Tools pull-down menu
and then click on 3D Settings in the submenu.

3D Settings Toggles
There are several toggles that affect drawing using 3D entities:
Layer Search Toggle on to scan all layers when you’re selecting entities; this option works exactly like the
one in 2D selection menus. See “More About Selection Menus” in “The Drawing Board”
chapter for more information on Layer Search.
Quick Search Toggle on to select curved 3D entities only by their center points; toggle off to select them by
any displayed edge
Layer Snap Toggle on to scan all layers when you’re snapping to entities; toggle off to snap to entities on
the current active layer only. See “More About 3D Snapping” later in this chapter for more
information on quick snap.
Quick Snap Toggle on to snap only to straight edges or center points of 3D entities; toggle off to snap to
these points as well as the endpoints of curved entities
Draw Marks Display (on) or suppress (off) control points. This letting also applies to control points on 2D
polylines.
Mesh Grid Display (on) control grid for mesh surfaces.
Mesh Point Display (on) control points for mesh surfaces.
Global Divs. Use fixed primary and secondary divisions for all curved entities (on).
Dynamic Display entities while rotating (on).
Slab Refs. Display slab reference points (on).
Setting Primary and Secondary Divisions
Primary divisions are the number of curve divisions in the plane of the screen, also known as the
sweep angle. Secondary divisions are those divisions that affect curves that bulge into or out of the
plane of the screen; these are known as rise or roll angles. You can set the primary and secondary
divisions for curved 3D entities using the 3D Settings menu.

To set the number of primary divisions:

1. Click on Settings in the 3D Menus menu. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Prim. Divs. in the Settings menu. A value menu appears and you are prompted
to Enter number of primary circle divisions.
3. Use the value menu or type a value and press (Enter). The primary divisions setting is
changed and you are returned to the Settings menu.

To set the number of secondary divisions:

1. Click on Settings in the 3D Menus menu. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on Sec. Divs.in the Settings menu. A value menu appears and you are prompted to
Enter number of secondary circle divisions.
404 | CHAPTER 19: MODELING BASICS
3. Use the value menu or type a value and press (Enter). The secondary divisions setting is
changed and you are returned to the Settings menu.

Setting Z-Elevations
You can change the Z-base and Z-height elevations in the 3D Settings menu, as well as two
alternative Z-elevation settings.

To change a Z-elevation:
1. Click on Settings in the 3D Menus menu. The Settings menu appears.
2. Click on the Z-elevation you want to change: Z-Base, Z-Height, or one of the two
alternative Z-elevations, Z-User 1 or Z-User 2. A value menu appears and you are
prompted to enter a new value for the Z-elevation.
3. Use the value menu or type a value and press (Enter). The Z-elevation is changed and you
are returned to the Settings menu.

Drawing 3D Lines
3D lines are like wires or threads in space; they can connect any two points in 3D space. They are
not constrained to lie in the XY plane; however, unlike 2D lines, 3D lines have no extrusion value.
When you draw 3D lines from Z-base to Z-height and select two points at exactly the same place
on the screen, you create a line that is perpendicular to the screen. Such a line looks like a dot from
the current view (a line viewed end-on). Although this method works, it is usually conceptually
easier to draw such lines flat across the screen in an appropriate elevation view.
You can specify the end points of 3D lines in the same way that you specify the end points of 2D
lines. You can select points with the left mouse button, snap to points with the middle mouse
button, or enter coordinates. You can also use the 3D cursor.
The first four options in the 3D Entity/3D Lines menu are toggles that specify one of the four
standard Z-elevations at which you can define entities. 3D lines can be drawn at Z-Base, Z-Height,
or one of two alternative Z elevations (Z-User 1 or Z-User 2), which are set using the Set Z User 1
and Set Z User 2 options in the 3D Lines menu, respectively.

To set the height of the Z-User 1 variable:

1. Choose Set Z User 1 from the 3D Lines menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a height value and press (Enter).

To set the height of the Z-User 2 variable:

1. Choose Set Z User 2 from the 3D Lines menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a height value and press (Enter).
You can also draw 3D lines that begin at Z-base (first point selected) and end at Z-height (second
point selected) by toggling the Base/Height option on in the 3DLine menu. See “Z-Base and Z-
Height” in the beginning of this chapter for more information on Z-elevations.
 ALL ABOUT 3D SNAPPING | 405
Further, you can toggle Chain on to create 3D lines that rubber band from the last point entered,
just like 2D lines. If you toggle Chain off, you must select both end points of each 3D line you
draw.

All about 3D Snapping

DataCAD 3D uses a different technique for object snapping than the two-dimensional DataCAD
editor.
The most important difference between normal 3D snapping and its 2D counterpart is that normal
3D snapping attaches the cursor to the projection of the model on the screen, not to the model
itself. A projection is a two-dimensional view of a three-dimensional object. If you want to attach
the cursor to points on the model, you need to orient the zero plane (screen plane) so that it
coincides with the part of the model you are snapping to.
Three-dimensional snapping is designed to work when the model appears in orthographic or any
parallel view. See “The Zero Plane” earlier in this chapter for more information.
Zero Plane not aligned with
the model.

Screen Snapping here attaches the cursor to the

projection on the screen, not to the model.

Figure 19.2: Normal snapping

406 | CHAPTER 19: MODELING BASICS
Zero plane aligned with
the model.

Snapping here attaches the cusor

directly to the model.
Screen

Figure 19.3: Zero plane alignment

In several menus in DataCAD 3D, you can use a 3D world-snapping cursor to snap to the end
points you see in the model. This 3D world-snapping cursor snaps to the entities themselves rather
than connecting to the projections of those entities. If the 3D cursor appears, then world snapping
is on; if you press the middle button on the mouse, you snap to points on the model and not the
projections of those points on the screen. World snapping works regardless of the location of the
zero plane.

Figure 19.4: 3D world-snapping cursor

 ALL ABOUT 3D SNAPPING | 407
Zero plane not aligned
with the model

World snapping here with

the 3-D cursor will attach
you directly to the model

Screen

Figure 19.5: World snapping with 3D cursor

More About 3D Snapping

If you toggle Fast 3D on in the 2D Utility/Object Snap menu or toggle Fast 3D Snap on in the 3D
Menus/Settings menu, you can only snap to the edges of straight-edged objects and the center axis
points of curved entities. If you toggle Fast 3D or Fast 3D Snap off, you can snap to the end points
of the circular divisions as well.
The following is a list of entities that you can snap to using Fast 3D and Quick Snap:
3D Lines Snap to either end of a 3D line
Polygons Snap to either end of any displayed edge (including the edges of voids)
Blocks Snap to either end of any edge
Slabs Snap to either end of any displayed edge (including the edges of voids)
3D Arc Snap to the arc center marker; with Fast 3D Snap off, you can snap to
the end points of the division segments that make up the arc itself
Horizontal or Vertical Cylinder Snap to any of the three center axis markers; with Fast 3D Snap off, you
can snap to the end points of the circular divisions of a cylinder
Cone Snap to any of the three center axis markers; with Fast 3D Snap off, you
can snap to the end points of the circular divisions of the cone
Truncated Cone Snap to any of the three center axis markers; with Fast 3D Snap off, you
can snap to the end points of the circular divisions of the truncated cone
Sphere Snap to any of the three center axis markers; with Fast 3D Snap off, you
can snap to any edge of the facets that make up the sphere
Torus Snap to the center marker of the sweep or the center markers at the
beginning and end of the roll; with Fast 3D Snap off, you can snap to
any edge of the facets that make up the torus
Contour Curve or Mesh Surface Snap to any control point; Fast 3D Snap has no effect on snapping to
contours or mesh surfaces
Surface of Revolution Snap to any control point; with Fast 3D Snap off, you can snap to any
edge of the single-curvature facets which make up the surface of
revolution, but you cannot snap to the edges of the double-curvature
facets
408 | CHAPTER 19: MODELING BASICS
Symbol Snap to any displayed edge of any portion of the symbol according to
the rules for each individual entity that makes up the symbol
Using Markers
A marker is a 3D snapping point. When you choose 3D Markers from the 3D Entity menu, the
following options appear:
Z-Base Places a marker at the current Z-base
Z-Height Places a marker at the current Z-height
3D Cursor Snaps to any object with world snapping enabled; for more information on world snapping.
See “All about 3D Snapping” earlier in this chapter for more information on world snapping.
3D Views Accesses the 3D Views menu
 Modeling with 3D Polygons,
Slabs, and Blocks
20
In this chapter:
DataCAD’s 3D polygons, slabs and blocks are closely
related entities with a few important differences. A 3D Drawing horizontal and
polygon is a single entity with no thickness (unlike a 2D vertical 3D polygons
polygon, which is a group of lines drawn from Z-base to Z- Drawing horizontal and
height). Slabs, usually the most common entity in a model, vertical slabs
are very similar to polygons, except that they have a Using inclined polygons
thickness that you can specify. Blocks are simple solids and slabs to draw roofs
with six rectangular or parallelogram-shaped faces. Because
the top of a block doen’t have to lie directly over its bottom, Adding voids to 3D
polygons and slabs
blocks are particularly useful for modeling support
members that lean to one side. Editing 3D polygons and
slabs
Another important distinction between 3D polygons and
Drawing blocks
slabs is that slabs have a reference face, which is the face of
the slab that orients the slab, controls the direction that you
can pass a void through the slab, and is important when
moving or adding vertices or voids to a slab. DataCAD
automatically assigns one face of a slab to be the reference
face, depending on what kind of slab you draw:
Horizontal: If you draw the slab from Z-base with the
specified thickness (Base+Thk toggle), the reference face is
at Z-base. If you draw the slab from Z-height with the
specified thickness (Height+Thk toggle), the reference face
is at Z-height. If you draw the slab from Z-base to Z-height
(Base/Height toggle), the reference face is at Z-base.
Vertical: When you draw a slab from the top of the screen
to the bottom, the reference face in on the left. When you
draw a slab from the bottom of the screen to the top, the
reference face in on the right.
Inclined: The reference face is always on the underside of
the slab.
If you forget which face of a slab is the reference face,
toggle Slab Refs. on in the 3D Menus/Settings menu. Dots
will be displayed on every vertice of each reference face,
along with an additional dot on one of the opposite vertices.
410 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS

Drawing Rectangular 3D Polygons and Slabs

To draw a rectangular 3D polygon:
1. Choose Rectangle from the 3D Entity/Polygons menu.
2. Choose a Z elevation (Z-Base, Z-Height, Z-User1, or Z-User2) at which to draw the
rectangle. To set the alternative Z elevations, choose Set Z User 1 to set the Z-User 1
elevation or choose Set Z User 2 to set the Z-User 2 elevation.
3. Select a point to start the rectangle.
4. Drag the cursor diagonally to size the rectangle and click. The rectangle is drawn. You
can also create rectangular polygons with Horizontal, but using Rectangle is faster and
easier.

To draw rectangular slabs:

1. Choose Rectangle from the 3D Entity/Slabs menu.
2. Choose a Z elevation at which to draw the rectangular slab: from Z-base to a thickness
(Base+Thk), from Z-height to a thickness (Height+Thk), or from Z-base to Z-height
(Base/Height).
3. Determine if you are using Base+Thk or Height+Thk to draw slabs. Set the thickness
value by choosing Thickness from the Rect. Slab menu and then choosing or typing a
value and pressing (Enter). As with all Z measurements, a positive thickness extends out
of the screen and a negative thickness extends into the screen.
4. Select a point to start the rectangle.
5. Drag the cursor diagonally to size the slab and click. The slab appears. You can also
create rectangular slabs with Horizontal, but using Rectangle is faster and easier.

Drawing Horizontal 3D Polygons and Slabs

To draw horizontal 3D polygons:
1. Choose Polygons from the 3D Entity menu. Then select Horizontal from the Polygons
menu.
2. Choose the elevation at which you want to draw the polygon: Z-Base, Z-Height, or one of
the two alternative Z elevations (Z-User 1 or Z-User 2). These alternative Z elevations are
set using the Set Z User 1 and Set Z User 2 options in the menu, respectively. To set the
height of an alternative Z elevation, choose Set Z User 1 or Set Z User 2 from the
Polygons menu and then choose or type a height value and press (Enter). See “Z-Base
and Z-Height” in the “Modeling Basics” chapter for details about Z-elevations.
3. Select the first point of the polygon. You can create polygons of up to 36 vertices this
way.
 DRAWING HORIZONTAL 3D POLYGONS AND SLABS | 411
4. Continue selecting points until you are ready to close the polygon. If you make a mistake
in placing a vertex, use Backup to erase the last selected point. Use Backup to erase the
last side of the polygon you drew. Backup is available as soon as you select the first point
of a polygon and until you close the polygon or right-click to disconnect from the
polygon you’re drawing. To cancel the polygon before the polygon is completed and
added to the drawing, choose Cancel. Use Cancel to erase the polygon you’re currently
drawing. Cancel is only available after you select the third point of the polygon and until
you close the polygon or right-click to disconnect from the polygon you’re drawing. You
can also choose Exit, which is available until you select the third point of the polygon,
when it becomes Close. Use Exit to stop drawing a polygon and erase what you’ve drawn
to that point.
If you create a 36-vertex polygon, DataCAD closes the polygon for you. To circumvent
this 36-vertex limitation, see “Editing 3D Polygons and Slabs” later in this chapter.
5. Connect the last point you selected with the first one and close the polygon by choosing
Close or right-clicking.
Hint: Do not place two points directly on top of one another. For example, to create a
square polygon, select four points, not five. When you right-click to close the polygon,
DataCAD automatically connects the first and last points. In this example, point four will be
automatically connected to point one.

To draw horizontal slabs:

1. Choose Slabs from the 3D Entity menu. Then select Horizontal from the Slabs menu.
2. Choose the elevation at which you want to draw the slab: Z-base extending to a thickness
(Base+Thk.), Z-height extending to a thickness (Height+Thk.), or Z-base extending to Z-
height (Base/Height). Backup is available as soon as you select the first point of a slab
and until you close the slab or right-click to disconnect from the slab you’re drawing.
3. Set a thickness for the slab by choosing Thickness from the Slabs menu. Then choose or
type a value and press (Enter). As with all Z measurements, a positive thickness extends
out of the screen and a negative thickness extends into the screen. Set Thickness when
you are drawing slabs with Base+Thk. or Height+Thk.; otherwise, the Thickness setting
is ignored.
4. Select the first point or vertex of the slab. You can create slabs of up to 36 vertices. If you
create a 36-vertex slab, DataCAD closes the slab for you. If you make a mistake in
placing a vertex, use Backup to remove the last vertex you entered and then continue to
place vertices. Use Exit to stop drawing a slab and erase what you’ve drawn to that point.
After you select the third point of the slab, the Exit option changes to Close. See “Editing
3D Polygons and Slabs” later in this chapter for more information about simulating
polygons or slabs with more than 36 sides.
5. Select a second corner point that, along with the first point, forms an edge for the base of
the block.
6. Choose Cancel if you want to cancel the slab before it is completed and added to the
drawing. Cancel is only available after you select the third point of the slab and until you
close the slab or right-click to disconnect from the slab you’re drawing.
412 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS
7. Use Close when you want to connect the last point you selected with the first one and
finish the slab.

Drawing Vertical 3D Polygons and Slabs

Vertical polygons and slabs are rectangular shapes drawn edge on. Vertical polygons are useful for
quickly creating forms that show some kind of extruded quality (like gutters or irregular curtain
walls); vertical slabs are useful for quickly creating free-standing walls. Draw the edge of the
vertical polygon or slab by selecting points on the screen; the height of the entity is determined by
the separation of Z-base and Z-height (or the two alternative Z elevations).

To draw a vertical 3D polygon:

1. Choose Polygons from 3D Entity menu. Then select Vertical from the Polygons menu.
The Vert. Poly menu appears.
2. Choose to draw the polygon from Z-base to Z-height (Base/Height) or from Z-User 1 to
Z-User 2 (Z1/Z2). These toggles set the height of the vertical polygon to run from one Z
elevation to the other (from Z-base to Z-height or from Z1 to Z2). To set the height of the
Z1 or Z2 elevation, choose Z-User 1 or Z-User 2 from the Vert. Poly. Menu, choose or
type a height value, and press (Enter).
3. Choose Chain to create vertical polygons in succession, with the first edge of each
polygon connected to the last edge of the previous polygon. This is similar to the way 2D
lines are drawn. When you toggle Chain off, DataCAD does not automatically connect
lines, so you must select both points of each polygon edge you draw.
4. Select two points on the screen creating one edge of the vertical polygon. The polygon is
drawn upright, into or out of the screen.

Figure 20.1: Vertical polygons

To draw a vertical slab:

1. Choose Slabs from the 3D Entity menu. Then select Vertical from the Slabs menu. The
Vert. Slab menu appears.
2. Choose to draw the slab from Z-base to Z-height (Base/Height) or from Z-alternative 1 to
Z-alternative 2 (Z1/Z2). These toggles set the height of the vertical slab to run from one Z
elevation to the other; they are mutually exclusive. To set the values of Z-alternative 1
and Z-alternative 2, choose Z-User 1 or Z-User 2 from the Vert. Slab menu, select a value
from the list, or type a value and press (Enter).
3. Set the thickness of the slab by choosing Thickness from the Vert. Slab menu. Then
choose or type a value and press (Enter). Do not confuse this setting with the Thickness
setting in horizontal and rectangular slabs. Thickness for vertical slabs refers to the short
dimension of the slab as seen across the screen, not the depth of the slab going into the
screen.
 DRAWING VERTICAL 3D POLYGONS AND SLABS | 413
4. Choose Left, Center, or Right to determine the side of the slab on which to attach the
cursor. The terms Left, Center, and Right refer to the slab as drawn from the top of the
screen toward the bottom. If you draw the slab from the bottom to the top with Left
toggled on, your cursor appears attached to the right side of the slab. These toggles are
mutually exclusive and can be activated at any time, even after you select the first point
of the slab.

Left Center Right

Figure 20.2: Cursor positions on vertical slabs

5. Select the first corner point of the vertical slab.

6. Move the cursor diagonally to the opposite point of the slab. The slab sizes dynamically
with the cursor. Click to complete the slab. The slab is drawn upright, between the two
elevations you selected in step 2.

Figure 20.3: Vertical slabs

Use Slab Refs. to display markers that indicate the reference face for a slab as well as the direction
of extrusion. The reference face of the slab is determined by the points selected on the screen. The
extrusion is determined by the relative Z-base and Z-height (or Z-User 1 or Z-User 2) settings you
have entered.
414 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS

D
B
E

Reference Face = ABCD Zbase =A When creating voids, the reference faces of the master and secondary
ExtrusionValue=AE Zheight =E slabsmustbein thesameplane, andtheir extrusionvaluesmust beequal.
Figure 20.4: Reference faces

Drawing Inclined 3D Polygons and Slabs

Inclined polygons can be used to create roof elements. Roofs that you create with this menu do not
have a thickness. To create roofs with thickness, use the Inclines menu in the 3DEntity/Slabs
menu, or use the RoofIt macro available from the Toolbox menu to create simple roofs
automatically.

To create roof elements using inclined polygons:

1. Use the 3D Views option from the 3D Entity/Polygons menu and then select Plans to
place the model in an orthographic view.
2. Set Z-Base to the height of the lowest point on the roof.
3. Set Z-Height to the height of the ridge line (peak) of the roof. DataCAD needs Z-base
and Z-height information about the roofs that you are going to create—information that is
easily calculated but not immediately at hand. Calculate the heights and breadths of roofs
before using the Inclines menu.
4. Choose Inclines from the Polygons menu.
5. Continue with the sections below to draw the three- or four-edged inclined polygon you
need.

To create roof elements using inclined slabs:

1. Place the model into orthographic (plan) view.
2. Choose Slabs from the 3D Entity menu. Then select Inclines from the Slabs menu.
3. Choose Thickness to set the depth of the roof element; choose or type a value and press
(Enter).
 DRAWING INCLINED 3D POLYGONS AND SLABS | 415
4. Choose whether to add the thickness perpendicularly or vertically. Vertical adds the
thickness of the slab to the roof element vertically or perpendicular to the ground. This
produces a plumb cut on the edge of the roof element. Perped. adds the thickness of the
slab to the roof perpendicularly to the roof slope.
5. Continue with the instructions below to draw the three- or four-edged inclined slab you
need.

To draw gable, A-frame, and shed roofs:

1. Choose 4 Edge Para. from the 3D Entity/Slabs/Inclines/Slabs menu.
2. Select the first corner point at the bottom edge of the slope.
3. Select the second corner point at the bottom edge of the slope.
4. Select the first corner point on the ridge of the roof. Enter this third point opposite the
first point, as shown below. Locate this point by snapping or with a reference point
shortcut and coordinate entry. The fourth corner point is automatically derived.

3 4 3

1 2 1

Figure 20.5: Four-edged parallelograms

To draw hip and mansard roofs:

1. Choose 4 Edge Trap. from the 3D Entity/Slabs/Inclines/Slabs menu.
2. Select the first corner point at the bottom edge of the slope.
416 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS
3. Select the second corner point at the bottom edge of the slope.
4. Select the first corner point on the ridge of the roof. Enter this third point opposite the
first point, as shown below. Locate this point by snapping or with a reference point
shortcut and coordinate entry. The fourth corner point is automatically derived.

34

1 2

Figure 20.6: Four-edged trapezoids

When a portion of a roof has four edges, but the opposite edges are not parallel due to unusual
intersections or valleys with other roofing elements, use the four-edged general inclined polygon
or slab option.

To draw dormers and other unusual roofs:

1. Choose 4 Edge Gen. from the 3D Entity/Slabs/Inclines/Slabs menu.
2. Select the first corner point at the bottom edge of the slope.
3. Select the second corner point at the bottom edge of the slope.
4. Select the first corner point on the ridge of the roof. Enter this third point opposite the
first point, as shown below. Locate this point by snapping or with a reference point
shortcut and coordinate entry.
5. Select the last corner point on the ridge of the roof.
 DRAWING INCLINED 3D POLYGONS AND SLABS | 417

4
2

3 1

Figure 20.7: Four-edged general incline

To draw the triangular pieces of hip roofs:

1. Choose 3 Edge Bot. from the 3D Entity/Slabs/Inclines/Slabs menu.
2. Select the first point at the bottom edge of the slope (at Z-base).
3. Select the second corner point at the bottom edge of the slope (also at Z-base).
4. Select the corner point on the ridge of the roof (at Z-height). Locate this point by
snapping or with a reference point shortcut and coordinate entry.

Figure 20.8: Three-edged bottom incline

To draw simple dormers:

1. Choose 3 Edge Top from the 3D Entity/Slabs/Inclines/Slabs menu.
2. Select the first corner point on the ridge of the roof (at Z-height).
3. Select the second corner point on the ridge of the roof (also at Z-height). Locate this point
by snapping or with a reference point shortcut and coordinate entry.
418 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS
4. Select the corner point at the bottom edge of the slope (at Z-base).

13

Figure 20.9: Three-edged top incline

The four-edged vertical incline is created edge on, very much like the vertical polygon or slab,
except that the incline has an independent thickness associated with it that controls the depth of the
beam.

To draw rafters using vertical inclined polygons or slabs:

1. Choose 4 Edge Vert. from the 3D Entity/Slabs/Inclines/Slabs menu.
2. Choose Thickness to set the depth of the polygon or slab (rafter). A list of values appears.
3. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
4. Select the location for the lower edge of the polygon or slab or the base of the incline,
including the thickness of the polygon or slab.
5. Select the location for the upper edge of the polygon or slab or the top of the incline. The
polygon or slab ends at the Z-height, including the thickness of the polygon or slab.
Z-Heightof 17'-0"

Z-Heightof 16'-0" 2

1 Z-Base of 9'-0"

Z-Base of 8'-0"

1
Plan Elevation
 ADDING VOIDS TO POLYGONS AND SLABS | 419
Figure 20.10: Four-edged vertical incline

To create three-edged vertical, inclined polygons or slabs:

1. Choose 3 Edge Poly. from the 3D Entity/Slabs/Inclines/Slabs menu.
2. Set the thickness of the slab using the Thickness option if you’re drawing a slab.
3. Snap to the first corner point on the incline. Use the 3D cursor to snap to the corners of
roof elements already in place. You don’t have to select the points in any particular order.
4. Snap to the second corner point on the incline.
5. Snap to the third corner point on the incline. The polygon or slab is drawn.

Adding Voids to Polygons and Slabs

The Voids menu in the Polygons and Slabs menus has options for creating and deleting holes in
polygons and slabs. You create a void by drawing a small polygon or slab (representing the void)
inside a larger (primary) polygon or slab. The smaller polygon or slab is then converted into a void
with the Add Void option.
When creating slabs, the reference face of each void must coincide exactly with the reference face
of the primary slab; in addition, the voids must be exactly as thick as the primary slab.

To add a void:
1. Draw a primary polygon or slab (the polygon or slab you will be adding a void to). Use
Plane Snap, Elevation/New Elev., or Edit Plane (in the 3D Views menu) to bring the
primary polygon or slab into the zero plane before adding voids. When you create both
the primary and void polygons or slabs without changing the view, they automatically lie
in the same plane.
2. Draw the void polygon or slab inside the primary polygon or slab in exactly the same
plane, at Z-base (or whatever Z elevation you drew the primary polygon or slab at) equal
to zero. You can draw more than one void polygon or slab at this time. Make sure the
void polygon or slab lies completely within the primary polygon or slab.
3. Choose Voids from the Polygons or Slabs menu.
4. Highlight the primary polygon or slab by selecting one of its edges.
5. Choose Add Void.
6. Select the void polygon(s) or slab(s) you drew in step 2. The void polygons or slabs are
highlighted as you select them. The primary polygon or slab now has voids in it.
When you add a void to a polygon or slab, you are left with one entity (a polygon or slab with a
hole in it) where separate polygons or slabs existed before. If you erase or move the primary
polygon or slab, the void moves with it, as you would expect of a single entity. The void polygons
or slabs no longer have an identity apart from the primary polygon or slab to which they belong.
Use Convert Void to convert voids back into the polygons or slabs from which they originated.
You must convert a void when you want to edit the void by adding, deleting, or moving vertices
using the Visibility menu.
 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS
420 To convert a void:
1. Select Voids from the Polygons or Slabs menu.
2. Select a primary polygon or slab by indicating one of its edges. The primary polygon or
slab and any voids are highlighted.
3. Choose Convert Void from the Voids menu.
4. Select the voids that you want to convert back into polygons or slabs. Any converted
voids now exist as individual, embedded polygons or slabs.
To add vertices to a void, convert the void back into a polygon or slab with Convert Void, add
vertices with Add Vertx from the Visibility menu, then use Add Void to turn the polygon or slab
back into a void. You can also move a void or resize it using 3D Menus/Stretch.
Once you add a void to a primary polygon or slab, the void polygon or slab no longer exists as an
independent entity; it becomes a hole in a larger object. Use Erase Void to remove these voids
from a primary polygon or slab.

To erase a void:
1. Choose Voids from the Polygons or Slabs menu.
2. Select the primary polygon or slab by indicating one of its edges. The polygon or slab
and any voids are highlighted.
3. Choose Erase Void from the Voids menu.
4. Select the voids that you want to delete from the polygon or slab. Selected voids
disappear entirely, sealing the hole.

Editing 3D Polygons and Slabs

With the Visibility menu options, you can edit (move, add, or delete vertices in) a polygon or slab.
You can also toggle the edges of a polygon or slab to visible or invisible.
To maintain its integrity, edit the polygon or slab in the same plane in which it was created or at
least in a plane parallel to the polygon or slab. Use Plane Snap, NewElev, or Edit Plane from the
3D Views menu. See the chapter on “Viewing Your Model” for more information about the
options for Plane Snap, Elevation/New Elev., and Edit Plane in the 3D Views menu.
To simulate polygons or slabs with more than 36 sides, you can create a 36-sided polygon or slab
and mark one of the edges as invisible. You can connect another polygon or slab with a shared
invisible edge to the first invisible edge. By hiding the seams, you can build a patchwork of
polygons or slabs that simulates a polygon or slab of an unlimited number of sides.

To add vertices to a polygon or slab:

1. Choose Visibility from the 3D Entity/Polygons or Slabs menu. Then select Add Vertex
from the Visibility menu. Make sure that the current editing plane is parallel to the
polygon or slab you want to edit.
 EDITING 3D POLYGONS AND SLABS | 421
Warning: Use caution with Move Vertex and Add Vertex. These commands can create
physically impossible shapes. The most common problems include letting edges cross
over one another and pulling vertices out of the plane of the polygon or slab, thus creating
a twisted and ambiguous shape.

2. Select the edge of the polygon or slab to which you want to add a vertex. Remember that
a polygon or slab can have no more than 36 vertices. Notice that this edge of the polygon
or slab becomes a rubber band line with your cursor attached to the edge.
3. Position the new vertex.

Add Here

Before After
Figure 20.11: Adding a vertex

To delete the vertices of a polygon or slab:

1. Choose Del. Vertex from the Visibility menu.
2. Select the vertex you want to delete. The vertex disappears and the two edges that led into
the deleted vertex now become a single edge. Because a polygon or slab can have no less
than three vertices, you cannot delete a vertex from a triangular-shaped polygon or slab.

Delete

Before After
Figure 20.12: Deleting a vertex
 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS
422 To reposition the vertex of a polygon or slab:
1. Choose Move Vertex from the Visibility menu. Make sure that your current editing plane
is parallel to the polygon or slab that you want to edit.
2. Select the vertex you want to move. Notice that this vertex is now attached to your cursor
and the two edges of the polygon or slab that lead to this vertex become rubber band
lines. You can also move a vertex with the Stretch option in the 3D Edit menu.
3. Select a new vertex position.

Moved

Before After
Figure 20.13: Moving a vertex

Use Show/Hide to change the visibility of individual edges of a polygon or slab. Selecting a
visible edge makes it invisible, while selecting an invisible edge makes it visible. Edges made
invisible are not erased; they are suppressed from view, usually to hide the seams between
adjacent polygons or slabs. Invisible edges remain invisible after hidden line removal, but the
polygon or slab is processed as if they were visible; invisible edges can obscure objects that lie
behind them.

To make an edge visible or invisible:

1. Choose Show/Hide from the Visibility menu.
2. Select the edge of the polygon or slab you want invisible.

Figure 20.14: Using MarkVis on one edge

 DRAWING BLOCKS | 423
To make all edges visible:
1. Choose Show All from the Visibility menu.
2. Select the polygon or slab that you want visible. The edges of the selected polygon or
slab become visible.

To make all edges invisible:

1. Choose Hide All from the Visibility menu.
2. Select the polygon or slab that you want invisible. The edges of the selected polygon or
slab become invisible.
Making a polygon or slab completely invisible with Hide All has obvious problems. The best way
to recover an invisible polygon or slab is to use Area or Fence from the selection menu with Show
All in the region where you think the polygon or slab exists.

Drawing Blocks
A block is a simple solid with six rectangular or parallelogram-shaped faces. Because the top of a
block is not constrained to lie directly over its bottom, blocks are particularly useful for modeling
supporting members that lean to one side.

To draw blocks:
1. Choose Blocks from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Select the shape of the base of the block: for a rectangular base, choose Rectangle; for a
parallelogram base, choose Parallel.
3. Choose Auto Height to automatically place the vertex at Z-height, centered over the
center point of the base; otherwise, you must place the vertex manually.
4. Choose to place the reference face of the block with one of the following:
• Base+Thk. At Z-base, extending up through a distance equal to the thickness
parameter set below
• Height+Thk. At Z-height, extending up through a distance equal to the thickness
parameter set below
• Base/Height At Z-base, extending up to Z-height
If you choose Base+Thk. or Height+Thk., you can use Thickness to set the thickness of
the block. (Otherwise, the Thickness setting is ignored.) As with all Z measurements, a
positive thickness extends out of the screen, and a negative thickness extends into the
screen. Choose Thickness from the Blocks menu; then choose or type a value and press
(Enter).
5. Continue with the sections below for either rectangular-based blocks or parallelogram-
based blocks.

To draw rectangular-based blocks:

1. Select the first corner of the block base.
424 | CHAPTER 20: MODELING WITH 3D POLYGONS, SLABS, AND BLOCKS
2. Move the mouse diagonally, expanding the base of the block to the proper size. Select the
second corner of the block base. If you selected Auto Height, DataCAD places the top of
the block directly over the bottom and the block is finished.
3. Turn Auto Height off and select a location of the top of the block; the sides of the block
are drawn, connecting the top and bottom faces.

Figure 20.15: Rectangular-based blocks

To draw parallelogram-based blocks:

1. Select a point to serve as one corner of the block.
2. Select a second corner that, along with the first point, forms an edge for the base of the
block.
3. Select a third corner point to form the parallelogram base of the block. Notice how
opposite sides of the base remain parallel but are not constrained to right angles. When
you select Auto Height, DataCAD places the top of the block directly over the bottom
and the block is finished.
4. Turn Auto Height off and select a location of the top of the block; the sides of the block
lean to connect the top and bottom faces.
 Drawing Single-Curved
Entities
21
In this chapter:
Unlike their 2D counterparts, all curved 3D entities in
DataCAD are actually drawn using a number of short line Drawing 3D arcs
segments to approximate true curves.
Drawing horizontal
Some 3D entities, such as cylinders, 3D arcs, cones, and cylinders
truncated cones, only curve in one direction, around the Drawing vertical
entity’s center point or central axis. For these entities, you cylinders
only need to set the number of primary divisions. Drawing cones
Entities that curve in more than one direction, such as Drawing truncated
domes and spheres, tori, surfaces of revolution, and mesh cones
surfaces, have both primary and secondary division settings.
See “Drawing Double-Curved Entities” for more
information on drawing entities with both primary and
secondary divisions.
426 | CHAPTER 21: DRAWING SINGLE-CURVED ENTITIES

Drawing 3D Arcs
3D arcs are essentially the same as their 2D counterparts, with the following exceptions:
• 3D arcs can exist at any orientation in space;
• 3D arcs can be specified as open or closed;
• 3D arcs have no extrusion value
• 3D arcs are approximations of arcs consisting of upt to 36 short line segments called
divisions.
The first eight options on the 3D Curves menu are quite common and are seen wherever there is a
curved 3D entity. Creating this 3D arc footprint is often the first step in creating a curved 3D
entity. This footprint defines the sweep angles for the entity.
3D two- and three-point arcs and radius, diameter, and three-point circles are drawn exactly as
their 2D counterparts. Use Clockwise (available only with 2 Pt. Arc) to create an arc in the
clockwise direction rather than counterclockwise. Use Closed to close the arc and perform a
hidden line removal. See “Drawing Curves” in the “Drawing Other Geometry” chapter for more
information about arcs and circles.

Figure 21.1: Open and closed arcs and circles

Use Tangent to draw arcs that are tangent to a specified line. This method is slightly different from
the way tangent arcs are created in 2D.

To draw a 3D tangent arc:

1. Choose Tangent from the 3D Curves menu.
2. Select the first point of the tangent line. This is the line that the 3D arc draws to.
3. Select the beginning point of the arc.
4. Select the end point of the arc.
 DRAWING 3D ARCS | 427
First point of Beginning of arc
tangent line

End of arc

Figure 21.2: Drawing a tangent arc

A dog-leg arc is defined by the two tangent points of the arc and the point at which those two
tangent lines cross (the knee point). You can use Dog-leg to create an arc that must be tangent to
two existing lines.

To draw a dog-leg arc:

1. Choose Dog-leg from the 3D Curves menu.
2. Select the first point of tangency, or the first point of the arc.
3. Select the knee point, the point where the two lines of tangency meet.
4. Select the second point of tangency or the end of the arc.
Beginning tangent point Knee point

Ending tangent point

Figure 21.3: Drawing a dog-leg arc

You can enter the arc at the current elevation of Z-base or Z-height. Choose Z-base or Z-Height,
respectively, and draw the arc.

To create 3D arcs that curve out of the screen:

1. Choose Vertical from the 3D Curves menu.
2. Select the center point of the arc.
428 | CHAPTER 21: DRAWING SINGLE-CURVED ENTITIES
3. Select a starting point for the arc. A list of values appears.
4. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
5. Type the angle of elevation for the first end point and press (Enter).
6. Type the angle of elevation for the second end point and press (Enter).

To set the number of divisions for 3D arcs:

1. Choose Divisions from the 3D Curves menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a division value and press (Enter).
24 Divisions 10 Divisions

Figure 21.4: Divisions examples

Drawing Vertical Cylinders

Vertical cylinders are drawn as columns or posts standing on end. The diameter of the column is
dynamically specified by drawing the footprint of the cylinder using one of the standard 3D arcs.
The height of the column is controlled by setting Z-base, Z-height, and thickness.

To draw a vertical cylinder:

1. Choose Vert. Cyls. from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Select one of these options: 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent, Dog-leg, Radius Circ., Dia.
Circ., and 3 Pt. Circ. These options are identical to those in the 3D Curves menu. Choose
one of these options to draw the footprint of the cylinder. A footprint is the shape of the
base of the cylinder. For example, to draw a full cylinder, choose Radius Circ., Dia. Circ.,
or 3 Pt. Circ. to draw a circular footprint.
3. Choose whether to draw the cylinder from Z-base to the thickness value (Base+Thk.),
from Z-height to the thickness value (Height+Thk.), or from Z-base to Z-height
(Base/Height).
4. Use Closed to create a closed cylinder for hidden line removals. The cylinder is processed
as a solid element with Closed on.
5. Follow the prompts in drawing the footprint of the cylinder. For more information on
using 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent, Dog-leg, Radius Circ., Dia. Circ., 3 Pt. Circ., and
Clockwise, see “3D Arcs” earlier in this chapter.
 DRAWING HORIZONTAL CYLINDERS | 429

Figure 21.5: Vertical columns

Set Thickness when you draw cylinders by Base+Thk. or Height+Thk.; otherwise the Thickness
value is ignored. As is true for all Z measurements, positive thickness extends out of the screen,
while negative thickness extends into the screen.

To set a thickness:
1. Choose Thickness from the Vert. Cyls. menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).

To set the number of divisions for the cylinders:

1. Choose Divisions from the Vert. Cyls. menu. A list of values appears. This setting is the
same as Prim. Divs. in the 3D Menus/Settings menu.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
The 3D Views option is a shortcut to the 3D Views menu. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter
for more information about the 3D Views menu.

Drawing Horizontal Cylinders

Horizontal cylinders draw flat across the screen.

To draw a horizontal cylinder:

1. Choose Horiz. Cyls. from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Select a radius for the cylinder.
3. Choose the extent of the sweep angles with Start Angle and EndAngle. Alternatively, you
can select one of the four presets: Full Circle, Top Half, Bottom Half, or Side Half.
For more control over the portion of the cylinder that appears, you can:
• Reorient the view to draw a vertical cylinder and use the 3D Curves menu to set the
portion of the cylinder needed
430 | CHAPTER 21: DRAWING SINGLE-CURVED ENTITIES
• Stay with horizontal cylinders and explicitly specify sweep angles for the cylinder
4. Select two points to represent the end points of the cylinder.
To create a cylinder section that covers from the 10:00 position to the 2:00 position on a clock,
decide which way you want to draw the cylinder across the screen. You can draw it from top to
bottom or bottom to top. When drawing from top to bottom, remember that cylinders are drawn
counterclockwise.

Figure 21.6: Horizontal cylinder

To specify the beginning angle of the cylinder sweep angle:

1. Choose Start Angle from the Horiz. Cyls. menu. A list of beginning sweep angles
appears.
2. Choose or type a beginning sweep angle and press (Enter).

To specify the ending sweep angle of the cylinder sweep angle:

1. Choose End Angle from the Horiz. Cyls. menu. A list of ending sweep angles appears.
2. Choose or type an ending sweep angle and press (Enter).
 DRAWING HORIZONTAL CYLINDERS | 431

Pick 1

Pick 2
Plan view
Ending angle Beginning angle
(135°) (45°)

Figure 21.7: Computing sweep angles

To control the radius of the cylinder:

1. Choose Radius from the Horiz. Cyls. menu. A list of radius values appears.
2. Choose or type a radius value and press (Enter).

To draw a full and complete cylinder:

1. Choose Full Circle from the Horiz. Cyls. menu.
2. Select the center point of one end of the cylinder.
3. Select the center point of the other end of the cylinder.

To draw the top half of a cylinder using a preset pair of sweep angles (much like a speed
bump):
1. Choose Top Half from the Horiz. Cyls. menu.
2. Select the center point of one end of the cylinder.
3. Select the center point of the other end of the cylinder.

To draw the bottom half of a cylinder using a preset pair of sweep angles (much like a
trough):
1. Choose Bottom Half from the Horiz. Cyls. menu.
2. Select the center point of one end of the cylinder.
432 | CHAPTER 21: DRAWING SINGLE-CURVED ENTITIES
3. Select the center point of the other end of the cylinder.

To draw half of a cylinder using a preset pair of sweep angles:

1. Choose Side Half from the Horiz. Cyls. menu.
2. Select the center point of one end of the cylinder.
3. Select the center point of the other end of the cylinder. When the two points used to
define the cylinder are drawn from the top to the bottom of the screen, the resulting half-
cylinder appears on the left.
Use Closed to create a closed cylinder for hidden line removals. The cylinder is processed as a
solid element when Closed is on.
Use the Z-Base toggle to set the centerline of the cylinder to lie at Z-base. If you draw a full circle
cylinder, half of the cylinder lies above Z-base and half lies below. Similarly, the Z-Height toggle
sets the centerline of the cylinder to lie at Z-height. If you draw a full circle cylinder, half of the
cylinder lies above Z-height and half lies below.

To set the number of divisions for the cylinders:

1. Choose Divisions from the Horiz. Cyls. menu. A list of values appears. This setting is the
same as Prim. Divs. in the 3D Menus/Settings menu.
2. Choose or type a value for the number of cylinder divisions and press (Enter).
3D Views accesses the 3D Views menu. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter for more
information about the 3D Views menu.

Drawing Cones and Truncated Cones

Cones are entities that are not used often in architectural modeling, but they are sometimes seen in
spires and pylons. You can create cones by drawing the base of the cone (at Z-base) using the
standard 3D Curves menu and placing the vertex of the cone at Z-height. DataCAD automatically
places the vertex, thus creating a right cylinder, or you can place the vertex yourself, creating a
skewed cylinder.

To draw a cone:
1. Choose Cones from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Choose Auto Height to automatically place the vertex of the cone at Z-Height, centered
over the center point of the base. Otherwise, you will have to manually place the vertex.
3. Use Divisions to set the number of divisions for the cone. (This setting is the same as the
Prim. Divs. setting of the 3D Menus/Settings menu.) To set the divisions of a cone,
choose Divisions from the Cones menu; then choose or type a value for the number of
divisions and press (Enter).
4. Toggle Closed on to close the bottom of the cone, creating a solid base. This base won’t
be visible unless you perform a hidden line removal or shade the image.
 Draw the footprint (sweep angle) of the cone. The base of theCONES
DRAWING cone AND
is always drawn
TRUNCATED at Z-| 433
CONES
5.
base and the vertex is always drawn at Z-height. See “Drawing 3D Arcs” earlier in this
chapter for more information about drawing the footprints of the cone or on using 2 Pt.
Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent, Dog-leg, Radius Circ., Dia. Circ., 3 Pt. Circ., Clockwise, and
Closed.
6. Place the vertex of the cone if you toggled Auto Height off. If you place the vertex to one
side, you create a skewed cone.
Vertex placed manually
(AutoHgt off)

Figure 21.8: Cones

See “Drawing 3D Arcs” earlier in this chapter for more information about drawing the footprints
of the cone or on using 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent, Dog-leg, Radius Circ., Dia. Circ., 3 Pt. Circ.,
Clockwise, and Closed.
Truncated cones have sheared off tops. Creating a truncated cone is similar to creating a regular
cone, except you must also specify the diameter of the top opening of the truncated cone.

To draw a truncated cone:

1. Choose Trunc. Cones from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Set the Z-base and Z-height appropriately. As with regular cones, you draw truncated
cones from Z-base to Z-height.
3. Toggle Closed on to close the bottom and top of the cone, creating a solid base and top.
This solid base and top won’t be visible unless you perform a hidden line removal or
shade the image.
4. Choose the footprint (sweep angle) of the truncated cone by drawing one of the 3D arcs.
5. Determine whether Auto Height is toggled on or off. If Auto Height is toggled on,
DataCAD prompts you for the diameter of the top part of the truncated cone. If Auto
Height is toggled off, DataCAD prompts you for the center point of the top circle, and
then the radius.

Figure 21.9: Truncated cones

434 | CHAPTER 21: DRAWING SINGLE-CURVED ENTITIES
The 3D Views option is a shortcut to the 3D Views menu. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter
for more information about the 3D Views menu.
 Drawing Double-Curved
Entities
22
In this chapter:
Unlike their 2D counterparts, all curved 3D entities in
DataCAD are actually drawn using a number of short line Drawing domes and
segments to approximate true curves. spheres

Some 3D entities, such as cylinders, 3D arcs, cones, and Drawing tori

truncated cones, only curve in one direction, around the Drawing surfaces of
entity’s center point or central axis. See “Drawing Single- revolution
Curved Entities” for more information on drawing entities Drawing mesh surfaces
with only primary divisions.
Entities that curve in more than one direction, such as
domes and spheres, tori, surfaces of revolution, and mesh
surfaces, have both primary and secondary division settings.
Primary divisions are the number of curve divisions in the
plane of the screen, also known as the sweep angle.
Secondary divisions are those divisions that affect curves
that bulge into or out of the plane of the screen; these are
known as rise or roll angles.
436 | CHAPTER 22: DRAWING DOUBLE-CURVED ENTITIES

Drawing Spheres and Domes

Spheres are any full sphere or section of a sphere. The menu combines features from both the
vertical and horizontal cylinder menus as well as the 3D arcs menu. See “Drawing 3D Arcs,”
“Drawing Vertical Cylinders,” and “Drawing Horizontal Cylinders” in the “Drawing Single-
Curved Entities” chapter for more information.

To draw a sphere:
1. Choose Spheres from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Choose a 3D curves option from the top part of the menu: 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent,
Dog-leg, Radius Circ., Dia. Circ., 3 Pt. Circ., or Clockwise to enter the footprint (sweep
angles) of the sphere. See “Drawing 3D Arcs” in the “Drawing Single-Curved Entities”
chapter for more information on using 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent, Dog-leg, Radius
Circ., Dia. Circ., 3 Pt. Circ., and Clockwise.
3. Set the rise angles with Start Angle or End Angle or use one of the presets: Full Circle,
Top Half, or Bottom Half. This determines exactly how much of the sphere curves out of
the plane of the screen.
4. Set the Z-Base or Z-Height properly to set the location of the sphere. The sphere is drawn
with its center point at either Z-base or Z-height, depending on which is toggled on.
5. Draw the footprint with 3D curves options. DataCAD generates the dome from the
footprint and the rise angles you supplied.

Figure 22.1: Spheres

For more control over the portion of the sphere that appears, you can specify rise angles. A rise
angle describes the angle by which something tilts out of the plane of the screen. Something that
lies exactly in the plane of the screen has a rise angle of 0°; something that extends straight out of
the screen has a rise angle of 90°.

To set the beginning rise angle for the sphere:

1. Choose Start Angle from the Spheres menu. A list of beginning rise angles appears.
2. Choose or type a beginning rise angle and press (Enter).
 DRAWING SPHERES AND DOMES | 437
To set the ending rise angle for the sphere:
1. Choose End Angle from the Spheres menu. A list of ending rise angles appears.
2. Choose or type an ending rise angle and press (Enter). When setting the rise angles for
the beginning and end of the sphere, remember that spheres are drawn counterclockwise.
Use Full Circle to create a sphere section encompassing both the north and south hemispheres.
Use Top Half to create a sphere section with just the northern hemisphere. Use Bottom Half to
create a sphere section with just the southern hemisphere. Use Z-Base to set the center of the
sphere at the Z-base. Use Z-Height to set the center of the sphere at the Z-height.

To set the primary (sweep) divisions of the dome:

1. Choose Prim. Divs. from the Spheres menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value for the number of primary divisions and press (Enter).

To set the secondary (roll) divisions of the dome:

1. Choose Start Angle from the Horiz. Cyls. menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value for the number of secondary divisions and press (Enter).
Secondary
divisions

Primary
divisions

Figure 22.2: Primary and secondary divisions

438 | CHAPTER 22: DRAWING DOUBLE-CURVED ENTITIES
Drawing Tori
A torus is a donut-shaped entity. Full tori are obviously very rare in architectural modeling, but
sections of tori are fairly common. Typical applications include turns in railings, elbow connectors
in pipes, and even children’s playground slides.

To draw a torus:
1. Choose Tori from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Choose a 3D curves option from the top of the menu: 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent, Dog
leg, Radius Circ., Dia. Circ., 3 Pt. Circ., Clockwise, or Radius for creating the footprint
(sweep angles) of the torus. See “Drawing 3D Arcs” in the “Drawing Single-Curved
Entities” chapter for more information on using 2 Pt. Arc, 3 Pt. Arc, Tangent, Dog-leg,
Radius Circ., Dia. Circ., 3 Pt. Circ., and Clockwise.
3. Set the roll angles for the tube part of the torus with Start Angle or End Angle. To use one
of the preset angles, click on Presets in the Tori menu and choose Full Circle, Top Half,
Bottom Half, In Half, or Out Half; then right-click to return to the main Tori menu.
4. Choose Z-Base or Z-Height. Center the torus at either the Z-base or the Z-height,
respectively.
5. Draw the 3D curves footprint of the torus. The torus (or toroidal section) is calculated
from the footprint and the roll angles.
For more control over how far the torus sweeps out of the plane of the sphere, you can specify roll
angles. A roll angle describes the angle by which something tilts out of the plane of the screen.
Something that lies exactly in the plane of the screen has a roll angle of 0°; something that comes
straight out of the screen has a roll angle of 90°.

To set the beginning roll angle for the torus:

1. Choose Start Angle from the Tori menu. A list of beginning roll angle values appears.
2. Choose or type a beginning roll angle and press (Enter).

To set the ending roll angle for the torus:

1. Choose End Angle from the Tori menu. A list of ending roll angle values appears.
2. Choose or type an ending roll angle and press (Enter). When setting the roll angles,
remember that tori are drawn counterclockwise as seen in a front elevation.
You can also use these preset options (available when you select Presets from the Tori menu) to set
the most common roll angles:
Full Circle Creates a full inner-tube torus section
Top Half Creates a torus section using only the top part of the torus roll
Bottom Half Creates a torus section using only the bottom part of the torus roll
In Half Creates a torus using only the inside part of the torus roll
Out Half Creates a torus using only the outside part of the torus roll
To indicate the radius of the tube section of the torus (not the radius of the torus itself):
1. Choose Radius from the Tori menu. A list of radius values appears.
 DRAWING SURFACES OF REVOLUTION | 439
2. Choose or type a radius value and press (Enter).

To set the primary (planar) divisions of the torus:

1. Choose Prim. Divs. from the Tori menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value for the number of primary divisions and press (Enter).

To set the secondary (roll) divisions of the torus:

1. Choose Sec. Divs. from the Tori menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value for the number of secondary divisions and press (Enter).

Figure 22.3: Torus connecting two cylinders

Drawing Surfaces of Revolution

Use Rev. Surface to create 3D solids with radial symmetry. Columns, lampshades, fountains, and
canopies are all examples of objects with radial symmetry that you can model using Rev. Surface.
Surfaces of revolution are so named because of the way you construct them: a polyline profile
revolved around an axis of revolution. As the profile revolves around a given axis, it “sweeps out”
a surface in its wake. This surface is the surface of revolution. To create any surface of revolution,
you must determine what profile and axis combination generates the surface you want.
Surfaces of revolution are single entities. To modify or edit a surface of revolution, you can
explode it and stretch it; alternatively, you can enlarge it to create complex shapes. If you’re trying
to model a shape that doesn’t have radial symmetry, but is close, try starting with a surface of
revolution. Then through enlargements, explosions, and stretches, shape the solid into the form
you need.
440 | CHAPTER 22: DRAWING DOUBLE-CURVED ENTITIES

Figure 22.4: Surface of revolution

To draw a surface of revolution:

1. Choose Rev. Surface from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Draw or select the profile to rotate. Create the cross section of the object as a polyline. If
you already have a polyline, you can use Select to select the polyline. You can use
Backup and Cancel to create polylines.
3. Choose Exit. The rise angle options appear.
4. Set the rise angles for the surface of revolution:
Start Angle Sets the beginning rise angle on the surface of revolution
End Angle Sets the ending rise angle on the surface of revolution
Full Circle Sets the rise angle to rotate the profile 360° around, thus creating a full solid
Top Half Sets the rise angle to rotate the profile 180° out of the screen, creating just the top
half of a full surface of revolution
Bottom Half Sets the rise angle to rotate the profile 180° into of the screen, creating just the
bottom half of a full surface of revolution
Side Half Sets the rise angle to rotate the profile 180° into and out of the screen, on whatever
side the contour appears, creating half of a full surface of revolution
5. Choose a surface of revolution:
Open With open ends and sides; no surfaces are generated for these parts of the surface of
revolution
Close Side With closed sides; sides are inside surfaces, the part of the surface of revolution you
see if you stand on the axis of revolution and look outward toward the profile or if
you stand outside the surface and look inward toward the axis
 DRAWING SURFACES OF REVOLUTION | 441
Close End With closed ends; ends refer to the top and bottom, the part of the surface of
revolution you see if you look along the axis of revolution
6. Choose Prim. Divs. to set the number of circular divisions along the roll of the surface of
revolution (the surfaces which curve out of or into the plane of the screen, which rotate
around the X or Y screen axes. Select Prim. Divs. from the Rev. Surface menu, choose or
type a value for the number circular divisions along the roll, and press (Enter).
7. Choose Sec. Divs. to set the number of circular divisions along the sweep of the surface
of revolution (the surfaces that show curvature in the plane of the screen, which rotate
around the Z screen axis). Select Sec. Divs. from the Rev. Surface menu, choose or type a
value for the number of circular divisions along the sweep, and press (Enter).
8. Choose Z-Base or Z-Height to create a surface of revolution whose axis of revolution is
at the Z-base or Z-height, respectively.
9. Choose Exit when you are done with the polyline cross section.

Figure 22.5: Polyline cross section

10. Select two points for the axis of revolution. The action here is to spin the polyline profile
around the axis of revolution, sweeping out a solid in the process.
442 1| CHAPTER 22: DRAWING DOUBLE-CURVED ENTITIES

Figure 22.6: Selecting the axis of revolution

Drawing Mesh Surfaces

A mesh surface is a smooth patch that you can mold into a variety of useful shapes including free-
form built structures, tents, and canopies. Mesh surfaces are the surface equivalents of Bezier
curves.
Like contours, mesh surfaces are created through a series of control points that you specify. The
greater the variation in the elevation of these control points, the more dramatic the curves in the
surface.
There are always exactly 16 control points to specify for a mesh surface, and these 16 control
points always form a 4x4 grid of points, although the spacing of these points may not be uniform.

Figure 22.7: Mesh surfaces

There are three ways to create a mesh surface:

 DRAWING MESH SURFACES | 443
• Specify all 16 control points individually, as four rows, with four points per row. The first
control point is numbered [1,1], meaning row 1, column 1 in the grid of points. The second
control point is numbered [1,2], then [1,3] followed by [1,4], then [2,1], etc. You can change
the Z-base or Z-height at any time during the entry of control points, thus creating a surface
that curves into and out of the screen. The resulting surface is a Bezier-like curved sheet that
curves into and out of the screen.
• Draw a rubber band box that forms the outer boundary of the mesh surface. The 16 control
points are equally spaced in this box. The resulting surface is a flat sheet.
• Place four points in the drawing that represent the four rows of a rectangular sheet surface that
go into the screen.

To manually draw a mesh surface:

1. Choose Mesh Surface from the 3D Entity menu.
2. Select the Z elevation of the first control point [1,1].
3. Select the first control point.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you enter all 16 control points.

Figure 22.8: Mesh grid and its corresponding control points

To create a rectangular mesh surface:

1. Choose Rect. Surf. from the Mesh Surface menu.
2. Select one corner of a rubber band box to contain the mesh surface.
3. Select the opposite corner of the rectangular region. The 16 control points are
automatically placed within the boundary rectangle, all at the same elevation and an equal
distance apart. To create a rolling surface, take an elevation view and use the stretch
command to move the control points.
444 | CHAPTER 22: DRAWING DOUBLE-CURVED ENTITIES

Figure 22.9: Rectangular mesh surface

To create a vertical mesh surface from Z-base to Z-height:

1. Choose Vert. Surf. from the Mesh Surface menu.
2. Select four points across the screen. DataCAD generates a mesh surface that runs from Z-
base to Z-height that fits the control points. For each control point you select on the
screen, DataCAD generates four points: one at Z-base at that location, one at Z-height,
and two more, equally spaced between these extremes.

Figure 22.10: Vertical mesh surface

To set the number of columns (divisions in the surface in direction 1):

1. Choose Divs. Dir. 1 from the Mesh Surface menu. A list of surface division values
appears.
 DRAWING MESH SURFACES | 445
2. Choose or type a value for the number of surface divisions in Direction 1 and press
(Enter).

To set the number of rows (divisions in the surface in direction 2):

1. Choose Divs. Dir. 2 from the Mesh Surface menu. A list of surface division values
appears.
2. Choose or type a value for the number of surface division in Direction 2 and press
(Enter).
Use Disp. Points to display the control points for the surface. When you edit a mesh surface,
toggle Disp. Points on. Toggle Disp. Points off for presentations.
Use Display Grid to connect the surface’s control points with lines. Toggle Display Grid off for
presentations.
As with Contours, you can specify an increment distance to add or subtract to the base elevation as
you enter control points. Set Index sets the index; Add Index and Sub. Index determine whether
you add to or subtract from the current Z elevation value. See “Drawing Topographical Maps with
Contours” in the “Site Modeling” chapter for more information about contours.

To specify and increment distance:

1. Choose Set Index from the Mesh Surface menu. A list of distance values appears.
2. Choose or type an increment distance and press (Enter).
These are the four standard elevations at which you can enter a mesh surface control point Use all
four to create a mesh surface with varying Z elevations. Use Add Index or Sub. Index to change
these values.

To set the values for Z-User 1 and Z-User 2:

1. Choose one of these elevation options from the Mesh Surface menu. A list of elevation
values appears.
2. Choose or type an elevation value and press (Enter).
 Site Modeling
DataCAD has a tool you can use for site modeling: the
Drop Mesh tool. The Drop Mesh tool creates a triangulated
23
In this chapter:
regular network (TRN) of 3D polygons and is an averaged
representation of data points. Drop Mesh produces a Using the drop mesh
accuracy rectilinear
"clean," is less of a result,
concernwhich
than the
mayvisual
be representation.
desirable when Using contours to create
topographical maps

Contours are curved 3D lines drawn through points that you

enter. These are particularly useful for drawing
topographical maps.
As with most tools in DataCAD, the Drop Mesh can be
used to create not only site models but also any surface in
your model. Contours can be used in other drawing
situations as well.
448 | CHAPTER 23: SITE MODELING

Site Modeling with Drop Mesh

One option in the 3D Entity/Polygons menu is Drop Mesh. It creates a regular, triangulated,
polygon mesh that lays over selected geometry or points, which can be created from a survey data
file. This mesh can then be shaded or processed through a hidden line removal to provide a model
of the building site.
A drop mesh is a group of triangulated polygons, not a single entity; thus, it can increase your
drawing file size substantially. A mesh with 100 X divisions and 100 Y divisions will add 20,000
polygons to your drawing (X divisions x Y divisions x 2 polygons per grid division, or
100x100x2), increasing your drawing file by 3MB. Additionally, since entities are not deleted
from the drawing database even after you delete them from the drawing itself, your drawing file
size can increase rapidly if you add a drop mesh, delete it, add another one, and so on. To remove
unused entities from the drawing database, use Manage in the Edit/Layers menu or select Layer
Manager from the Tools pull-down menu. DataCAD recommends that you only use as many
divisions as is necessary for a reasonably accurate model.
A drop mesh acts like a cloth dropped over the geometry. The way it drapes over the geometry can
be adjusted with the Divisions-X, Divisions-Y, Stiffness, Smooth, and Smooth Pass options. The
mesh is made up of a grid of polygon divisions, with lines running in both the X and Y directions.
These divisions are set with the Divisions-X and Divisions-Y options; increasing these values adds
flexibility to the mesh. Smooth adds points between the geometry to flatten the surface. Smooth
Pass increases the number of smoothing passes. Stiffness controls how closely the mesh coincides
with the actual geometry; in other words, the lower the stiffness setting, the more tightly it fits to
the geometry.

To drop a mesh:
1. Choose Drop Mesh from the 3D Entity/Polygons menu. Notice that the current settings
appear in the Attention toolbar.

Figure 23.1: The Drop Mesh dialog box

 SITE MODELING WITH DROP MESH | 449
2. Click on Options. The Drop Mesh dialog box appears.
3. Choose Divisions-X and Divisions-Y to set the number of X and Y divisions in the mesh
grid.
4. Choose Stiffness to set the stiffness of the mesh. Enter a number from 1 through 10,
where 1 is the stiffest, and press (Enter). The default setting is 5.
5. Choose Smoothing to toggle on smoothing. This setting will have no effect on points
created from an imported survey data file; it only works with vector geometry. Use of this
option increases the time it takes DataCAD to generate the mesh.
6. Determine if Smoothing is toggled on. If Smoothing is toggled on, the Smooth Pass
option becomes available on the Drop Mesh menu. Choose Smooth Pass to set the
number of smoothing passes. Enter a number from 1 through 10, where 1 is the minimum
number of passes; 1 is the default setting.
7. Toggle Drop Edge on to model the site edges. When Drop Edge is toggled on, Edge
Height becomes available on the menu. Choose Edge Height to set the distance below the
lowest, calculated point of the site model. The default edge height is 10 feet.
8. Toggle Show Diagonals on if you want to display the diagonal polygon edges of the
mesh.
9. Drop a mesh over either selected geometry or imported, survey points. To drop a mesh
over existing geometry, use the selection menu at the top of the Drop Mesh menu to
select geometry in your drawing. You can select all of the geometry or only a portion of
it. When selection is complete, continue with step 10. You can choose Clear at any time
to cancel your selections. To use survey data instead, skip to step 10. You can drop a
mesh over any geometry in the drawing except geometric primitives, such as spheres,
cones, or cylinders. To drop a mesh over geometric primitives, you must first explode the
entities.
10. Make sure survey data is in a text file formatted in columns. You must use one of five
data formats, including X-Y-Z, Y-X-Z, Horizontal Angle-Distance-Height (HorizAng-
Dis-Hght), Distance-Horizontal Angle-Height (Dist-HorizAng-Hght), and Horizontal
Angle-Vertical Angle-Distance-Elevation (HorizAng-VertAng-Dist-Elev). To import one
of these files, choose Import from the Drop Mesh menu. The Points File Settings dialog
box appears.
450 | CHAPTER 23: SITE MODELING

Figure 23.2: The Points File Settings dialog box

11. Set the scale for the data of the imported file in the Size of Points File Units input field.
Select one data format from the File DataType portion. Also select the Horizontal Angles
and Vertical Angles options. Click on Continue. The Open dialog box appears.
12. Select the file you want to use and press (Enter) or click on Open. Points based on the
survey data appear in the Drawing Window.
13. Choose Begin from the Drop Mesh menu to begin drawing the drop mesh. Press End to
cancel the mesh at any time.
 SITE MODELING WITH DROP MESH | 451
The following series of figures demonstrate the effect that the divisions, stiffness, and smoothing
options have on a drop mesh.

Figure 23.3: Site plan drawn using contours

Figure 23.4: Isometric view of contour line drawing.

452 | CHAPTER 23: SITE MODELING

Figure 23.5A: Model using 16 x 30 divisions, a stiffness setting of 5, and Smooth toggled off. The
isometric view to the right shows the results of these drop mesh settings. As you can see above, the mesh
(represented by the gray line) does not always meet the points on the contour lines (represented by the
darker line and dots). The result is a rougher approximation of the contour geometry.

Figure 23.6A: Divisions are increased to 32 x 60, while the stiffness and smooth settings remain the
same. A higher resolution mesh produces a stair-step effect with this stiffness setting.
 SITE MODELINGWITH DROPMESH | 453

Figure 23.5B: Isometric view of model using 16 x 30 divisions with stiffness set to 5 and Smooth toggled
off.

Figure 23.6B: Isometric view of model with divisions increased to 32 x 60.

454 | CHAPTER 23: SITE MODELING

Figure 23.5A: Divisions remain at 32 x 60 with Smooth toggled off, but stiffness is increased to 9. The
stiffness is adjusted to counter the stair-stepping effect, resulting in a closer relationship to the contour
points.

Figure 23.6A: Another way to smooth the drop mesh is to use the Smooth option. Here the divisions and
stiffness have been reduced to their original values of 16 x 30 and 5, respectively. However, Smooth has
been toggled on and SmthPass has been set to 5. The interpolation of the smoothing operation creates
smoother transitions between contour points.
 DRAWING TOPOGRAPHICAL MAPS WITH CONTOURS | 455

Figure 23.5B: Isometric view of model with stiffness increased to 9.

Figure 23.6B: Isometric view of model with Smooth toggled on and set to 5.

Drawing Topographical Maps with Contours

Contours are curved versions of 3D lines; like 3D lines, they have no thickness. Use contours to
create topographical maps.
Creating contours is similar to creating Bezier or B-spline curves. You place a number of control
points that define the curve. DataCAD accepts up to 36 control points. Unlike Bezier or B-spline
curves, the contour curve that DataCAD generates passes through the points that you draw.

To draw a contour:
1. Choose Contours from the 3D Entity menu. The Contours menu appears.
456 | CHAPTER 23: SITE MODELING
2. Choose the type of contour you want to draw: Natural, Cyclic, or Tangent. Natural creates
a contour that begins at the first control point you select and ends at the last point. Cyclic
creates a contour that connects the first and last control points with a smooth curve,
making a closed shape. Tangent creates a contour that connects two additional points to
the control points, making a tangency at the end of the contour.
3. Use the Stiffness option to determine the curvature as the contour passes through each
control point. A high stiffness forces the contour to remain flat as it passes through each
point. To set a stiffness for the contour, choose Stiffness from the Contours menu and
choose or type a stiffness value and press (Enter).
4. Choose Divisions and enter a value to indicate the number of line segments you want to
use in between each control point. The further apart your control points, the more
divisions you need. If you set too many divisions, your display regeneration time slows.
5. Choose the elevation at which you want to draw this contour. Z-Base, Z-User 1, Z-User
2, and Z-Height are the four standard elevations at which you can enter a contour control
point. You can use Add Index or Sub. Index to alter these values. To set the Z elevations,
Z-User 1 and Z-User 2, choose one of these elevation options from the Contours menu,
choose or type an elevation value, and press (Enter).
6. Determine if you are working with tangent contours. Only with tangent contours, select a
first tangent point, the point before the curve. This point determines the direction of the
curve as it enters the first control point.
7. Select the control points. You can choose up to 36 control points for any one contour. You
may select Add Index or Sub. Index to enter the next control point at a new elevation.
Choose Add Index to add the value of the Index setting to the current Z elevation value.
Choose Sub. Index to subtract the value of the Index setting from the current Z elevation
value.
• If you are working with tangent contours, specify the ending tangent point. This is
the point after the curve. It determines the direction that the curve heads as it enters
the last control point.

Natural Cyclic Tangent

Figure 23.7: Types of contours

Use 3D Cursor to attach a control point to a particular point on your model (vertex of a slab, center
of a sphere, etc.) by snapping in world coordinates with the 3D cursor.
You can force the contour to lie in a plane by specifying that the control points have a fixed Z
elevation. Use the Z-Base, Z-Height, Z-User 1, or Z-User 2 toggles to set the height.
 DRAWING TOPOGRAPHICAL MAPS WITH CONTOURS | 457
Use Set Index to help create a single contour that rises steadily in the Z direction. For example, to
create a series of concentric contours set at 10’ intervals, use Set Index to set the index to 10’.
After drawing the first contour at Z-base, select Add Index and draw the second contour, which
would be entered into the drawing 10’ higher than the first, and so on.

To draw a contour that steadily rises:

1. Choose Set Index from the Contours menu. A list of index distance values appears.
2. Choose or type an index distance and press (Enter).
 Editing 3D Entities
The 3D Menus menu looks similar to its 2D counterpart
and, in most cases, works the same way. In fact, the Erase,
24
In this chapter:
Layers, and Identify options in 3D Menus are actually
shortcuts to those menus in the (2D) Edit menu. However, Rules for editing 3D
keep in mind that the 3D Menu options should only be used entities
on 3D entities, unless otherwise noted. See the “Rules for Moving, copying,
Editing 3D Entities” section in this chapter for details. rotating, stretching,
Perhaps one of the most useful features of 3D entities is that mirroring, and enlarging
3D entities
you can edit them in any plan or parallel view. The 3D
Exploding 3D entities
Menus work closely with the 3D Views menu; all 3D
immediately
Menus submenus
to thehave
3D Views menu.option,
a 3D Views In addition, help you
whichtotakes Modifying 3D entity
attributes
move quickly from menu to menu, 3D Menus also includes
shortcuts to the Edit menu and the 3D Entity menu.
460 | CHAPTER 24: EDITING 3D ENTITIES

Rules for Editing 3D Entities

Keep in mind the following when editing 3D entities:

• You can’t erase edges. The lines that make up a 3D entity represent the edges of a single
entity; they are not an entity themselves. If you try to erase one edge of a slab, for instance,
the entire slab is deleted.
• Edit 2D entities with 2D editing options only. The Edit menu contains the 2D editing tools
you’ll need to edit 2D entities. However, the Erase, Change, and Explode options in the 3D
Menus can also be used on 2D entities.
• Many 2D editing options can be used on 3D entities. For example, the Stretch option in 3D
Menus can be used on a horizontal slab. However, keep in mind that most 2D editing options
work only in plan view. When you select such an editing option, DataCAD automatically
changes to plan view.
• Edit in plan or parallel views only. If your model is not being displayed in plan or parallel
view and you select a 3D editing option, DataCAD automatically changes to the last plan or
parallel view.
• Select entities in any view. However, when using Entity or Group in 3D selection menus, you
can select entities according to the following rules:
3D line Anywhere on the line
Polygon Any displayed edge (including the edges of voids)
Slab Any displayed edge (including the edges of voids)
Block Any displayed edge
3D arc The arc’s center marker
Cylinder Any of the three center axis markers
Cone Any of the three center axis markers
Truncated cone Any of the three center axis markers
Sphere The center marker
Torus The center marker of the sweep or the center markers at the beginning and end of the
roll
Contour Any control point (you can’t select the curve itself)
Mesh surface Any displayed edge of the control grid or any of the displayed control points (you
can’t select the surface itself)
Surface of Rev. Any control point
Symbol The insertion point
With Fast 3D Snap toggled off (3D Menus/Settings menu), you can select any circular division of
a 3D arc, cone, truncated cone, sphere, or torus; you can also select any edge of a single-curved
facet of a surface of revolution, but not an edge of a double-curved facet. With both Fast 3D Snap
and Fast 3D (Utility/Object Snap menu) toggled off, you can select any displayed edge of a
symbol, according to the rules for each entity in that symbol.

Moving 3D Entities
Use Move in 3D Menus to shift an entity to a different position on the screen. 3D Move works the
same as the 2D Move option, with the exception of the following:
 MOVING 3D ENTITIES | 461
• When specifying the two points of the distance to move, the model can be in any parallel or
orthographic view. DataCAD draws specific distances across the screen, but the distance and
direction is taken with respect to the model in the current view. For example, if you view the
model in an elevation view and specify a distance and angle to move (such as 10’ at 90°),
objects that you select move up, off the ground plane.
• The model displays in any view during the process of selecting entities to move. This makes
the precise selection of individual entities or collections of entities easier, especially in cases
where entities are stacked one upon another or when it is difficult to separate one entity from
another.
Elevation on Parallel view
screen on screen

2
Distance
to move
Side windows will
1 move up as well
when selected

Figure 24.1: Using the 3D Move option

Choose 3D Cursor from the Move menu to toggle on the world snapping cursor. The world cursor
lets you snap directly to the objects in the model rather than to their projections on the screen. See
“All About 3D Snapping” in the “Modeling Basics” chapter for more information on the world
snapping cursor.

To move an entity:
1. Choose Move from 3D Menus.
2. Toggle And Copy on to copy the entity at the same time you move it. If you toggle And
Copy off, the entities move to the new location but do not copy.
3. Select the first point of the distance to move.
4. Select the second point of the distance to move.
5. Choose Z Distance to move the entity in the Z-direction relative to the plane on the
screen. Positive distances indicate movement out of the screen; negative distances
indicate movement into the screen. You can also use Z-Only to set the move distance to
zero (0) in the X and Y directions. Then select the entities to move. Entities move relative
to the screen Z-axis. DataCAD resets the Z-distance to zero each time you choose Move
from 3D Menus.
6. Choose a selection method and select the objects to move. Use the 3D Views menu to
reorient your view to get the best vantage point for selecting objects. DataCAD moves
the selected entities relative to the plane of the screen.
7. Choose Invert if you make a mistake and select the wrong entity to move; then, reselect
the moved entity. The entity returns to its original position.
462 | CHAPTER 24: EDITING 3D ENTITIES
You can also use Prev. Dist. to use the last distance and direction specified in an editing option.
You can choose this option instead of specifying two points of the distance to move. Or use New
Distance to enter a new move distance. This does not change the Z distance. New Distance only
appears after you’ve entered a move distance.

To move an entity to another layer in your drawing file:

1. Choose To Layer from the Move menu.
2. Choose a layer from the list or use Match or Filter to indicate the layer to move to. See
the instructions below to use Match and Filter.
3. Choose a selection method and select the entity or entities to move.
Use Match to select a layer by selecting an entity on that layer. Set the active layer, move objects
to another layer, or point DataCAD to a specific layer, all without having to remember layer
names.

To move entities to another layer using Match:

1. Select To Layer from the Move menu. You are prompted to Select layer to move to.
2. Choose Match from the To Layer menu. You are prompted to Select entity to match. Use
Match with any of the following Layers options: On/Off; Set Active; Active Only; Lock;
Name; Clear Layer; Delete Layer; Export Layer; View Layer, Select. It is also available
when using To Layer under Move and Copy or when using Layer Search.
3. Select an entity to select the layer it is on. You are prompted to Select entity to move.
4. Select the entity you want to move to the selected layer. The entity is moved to the
selected layer.
Use the Filter toggle to scan or filter for layers with similar names. When you specify a prefix or
suffix that the filter searches for, a list of layers with that affix appears. To access a layer that you
don’t know the name of, use Filter to search for layers with a similar affix.
For example, if you specify layers by plumbing and electrical, you might have layers named
1FLPLUMB.LYR, 2FLPLUMB.LYR, 3FLPLUMB.LYR, and 1FLELECT.LYR, 2FLELECT.LYR,
and 3FLELECT.LYR. To search for a plumbing layer, use ???plumb. You can search for first floor
layers using a prefix of 1fl: 1fl* or 1fl?????.
Use the asterisk (*) in place of any number of characters and the question mark (?) in place of
each character you’re unsure of.
The Filter toggle only appears when you are prompted to select from the list of layers. The filter
disregards any characters following an asterisk. Therefore, if you entered *plumb to search for
plumbing layers, all layer names would be displayed.

To filter layers:
1. Choose Filter from the To Layer menu to toggle Filter on.
2. Type the affix, including the wildcard character(s), for the layer you want to find and
press (Enter). A list of layer files with this affix appears.
 COPYING 3D ENTITIES | 463
DataCAD also allows you to scroll through different layer groups with similar affixes. If
the group you initially searched for doesn’t contain the layer you wanted, you can scroll
through the remaining groups to find the appropriate layer.
Filter Back Scrolls back to a group of similarly named layers.
Filter Frwd Scrolls forward to a group of similarly named layers.
3. Choose the layers you want to use.
DataCAD remembers the last affix for which you filtered. The prefix name appears in the Message
Window and the layer names appear in the Menu Window when you re-enter the Filter function.

Copying 3D Entities
The 3D Copy option works identically to the 2D Copy option: specify the distance to copy from
any parallel or orthographic view, and then select the objects to copy in any view.

To copy 3D entities:
1. Choose Copy from 3D Menus.
2. Enter the first point of the distance to copy.
3. Enter the second point of the distance to copy.
4. Select the objects to copy using the Selection Menu. You can use the 3D Viewer to
reorient your view and get the best vantage point for selecting the objects. DataCAD
copies the selected entities relative to the plane of the screen.

Rectangular Arrays
Use Rect. Array to create three-dimensional rectangular arrays of 3D entities at any orientation in
space. This option works like the 2D rectangular array option, except that you can copy objects in
the X, Y, and Z directions simultaneously, each with its own spacing and number of repetitions.

To create a rectangular array:

1. Choose Copy from 3D Menus.
2. Choose Rect. Array from the Copy menu.
3. Set the Z distance to copy if you are creating an array of more than one element in the Z
direction.
4. Select the first point of the distance to copy each element of the array.
5. Select the second point of the distance to copy each element of the array.
6. Type the number of repetitions in the array in the X direction, Y direction, and Z
direction, pressing (Enter) after each value entered.
7. Choose a selection method and select the objects to copy in the rectangular array. You can
use the 3D Views menu to reorient your view to get the best vantage point in selecting
objects.
464 | CHAPTER 24: EDITING 3D ENTITIES

Figure 24.2: Original object to copy

3 copies in X
5 copies in Y
2 copies in Z

Figure 24.3: Resulting array

Choose 3D Cursor to toggle on the world snapping cursor. The world cursor lets you snap directly
to the objects in the model rather than to their projections on the screen. See “All About 3D
Snapping” in the “Modeling Basics” chapter for more information.

Rotating 3D Entities
Like all 3D editing options, you can use the Rotate option in any parallel or orthographic view.
Choose the center of rotation, and then select the objects to rotate. You can rotate the objects in
any order.

To rotate a 3D entity:
1. Choose Rotate from 3D Menus.
2. Choose And Copy to copy the entities at the same time you rotate them. To rotate entities
without copying them, leave And Copy toggled off.
3. Select a point that defines the center of rotation relative to the plane of the screen. If you
want the Z-coordinate of the center of rotation to be something other than zero, use
Center Z to enter the Z-coordinate. See the instructions below to set the Z-coordinate.
You can use New Center to re-enter the center of rotation relative to the current plane of
the screen. This option does not change the Z-coordinate of the center of rotation. New
Center only appears after you choose a center of rotation.
 MIRRORING 3D ENTITIES | 465
4. Choose which of the three axes (X, Y, or Z) you wish to rotate around, relative to the
screen. Use X-Axis to rotate selected entities about an axis parallel to the X axis of the
screen and passing through the center of rotation. Use Y-Axis to rotate selected entities
about an axis parallel to the Y axis of the screen and passing through the center of
rotation. Use Z-Axis to rotate selected entities about an axis parallel to the Z axis of the
screen and passing through the center of rotation.
5. Choose X Angle, Y Angle, or Z Angle to set the angle at which entities rotate around the
X, Y, and Z axis, respectively, relative to the plane of the screen at the time the center of
rotation is specified. The option you choose should match the axis that you selected in
step 3. Use X Angle, Y Angle, and Z Angle from the Rotate menu, then choose or type a
value, and press (Enter).
6. Choose a selection method and select the objects that you want to rotate. You can use the
3D Viewer to reorient your view to find the best vantage point in selecting objects.
7. Select Invert if you make a mistake and select the wrong entity to rotate. Then, reselect
the entity. The entity returns to its original position.

To set the Z-coordinate of the center of rotation relative to the plane of the screen:
1. Choose Center Z from the menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter). DataCAD resets Center Z to zero each time you
choose Rotate from 3D Menus.

Mirroring 3D Entities
Use Mirror to mirror entities about a plane in space. You can view a model from any angle in
space; the mirror plane is always perpendicular to the screen.
You define the mirroring plane the same way as with the 2D Mirror option.

To mirror a 3D entity:
1. Choose Mirror from 3D Menus.
2. Create the mirror line by responding to the prompts to Select first point of line about
which to mirror and then Select second point of line about which to mirror. The mirror
line appears.
3. Choose And Copy to copy entities at the same time you mirror them. To mirror entities
without copying them, leave And Copy toggled off. You can use New Line to re-enter the
mirroring plane perpendicular to the current plane of the screen. New Line only appears
after you create a mirror line.
4. Choose a selection method and select the objects that you want to mirror. You can use the
3D Viewer to reorient your view to find the best vantage point for selecting objects.

Stretching 3D Entities
3D Stretch lets you stretch three-dimensional entities similarly to 2D Stretch. As with other 3D
Entity menu options, you can specify the distance, direction, and entities to stretch from any
parallel or orthographic (plan) view.
466 | CHAPTER 24: EDITING 3D ENTITIES
• Explode curved 3D entities into polygons or lines before stretching them. See “Exploding
Entities” later in this chapter for instructions.
• Cylinders, 3D arcs, spheres, cones, truncated cones, and tori are nonstretchable entities. Use
Enlarge to increase or decrease their size in one direction by an appropriate factor;
alternatively, explode them into polygons and then stretch the polygons.
• 3D Stretch can only be used on 3D lines, polygons (and their voids, if any), blocks, slabs (and
their voids, if any), contour curves, and mesh surfaces. You can use Stretch to edit polygons,
slabs, and voids. You must define the distance to stretch in a plane parallel to the polygon or
slab you want to stretch; otherwise, the resulting polygon or slab may become nonplanar. To
make sure that the plane of the screen is parallel to the slab, you can use Plane Snap,
Elevation/ New Elev., or Edit Plane from the 3D Views menu.
• If the entity you select is contained completely within the limits of the selecting point, area, or
fence, DataCAD moves the entity the distance you indicated to stretch.

To stretch a 3D entity:
1. Choose Stretch from 3D Menus. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter for more
information.
2. Select the first point of the distance to stretch.
3. Select the second point of the distance to stretch.
4. Choose Z Distance to enter a distance to stretch portions of entities in the Z direction
relative to the plane of the screen. Positive distances indicate movement out of the screen;
negative distances indicate movement into the screen. You can use New Distance to re-
enter the distance to stretch in the X and Y directions. New Distance does not change the
distance to stretch in the Z direction.
5. Use Prev. Dist. if you want to deal with the last X and Y distance and direction you
specified in an editing option to stretch. You can use this option instead of specifying the
distance to stretch in steps 2 and 3.
6. Choose a selection method and select the objects that you want to stretch. You can use the
3D Viewer to reorient your view to get the best vantage point for selecting objects.
7. Choose Invert if you make a mistake and select the wrong entity to stretch. Then, reselect
the stretched entity. The entity returns to its original size. DataCAD resets the Z distance
to zero each time you choose Stretch from 3D Menus. Choose Z-Only to set the stretch
distance in the X and Y directions to zero. Then select the entities to stretch.

Enlarging 3D Entities
Use Enlarge to enlarge or scale entities to different sizes in the X, Y, and Z directions. Enlarge
works similarly to its 2D counterpart, except that you can set the center of enlargement in any
orthographic (plan) or parallel view. You can also select entities you want to enlarge in any view or
orientation once you enter the center of enlargement.

To enlarge a 3D entity:
1. Choose Enlarge from 3D Menus.
 EXPLODING 3D ENTITIES | 467
2. Choose And Copy to copy entities at the same time you enlarge them. To enlarge entities
without copying them, leave And Copy toggled off. After you choose a center of rotation,
you can use New Center to re-enter the center of enlargement. This option does not
change the Z coordinate of the center of enlargement. To set the Z coordinate relative to
the plane of the screen, choose Center Z from the menu, then choose or type a value, and
press (Enter).
3. Select a point that defines the center of enlargement relative to the plane of the screen.
4. Use X Enlargmnt., Y Enlargmnt., and Z Enlargmnt. to change the current value of the
enlargement factor in the X, Y, and Z directions of the screen, respectively. The
enlargement factor cannot be zero. Choose X Enlargmnt. from the menu, then choose or
type a value, and press (Enter). Use Reset to set all of the enlargement factors to 1.0. The
2.0x option sets all of the enlargement factors to 2.0. The 0.5x option sets all of the
enlargement factors to 0.5.
5. Choose a selection method and select the objects that you want to enlarge. You can use
the 3D Viewer to reorient your view to get the best vantage point for selecting objects.
6. Choose Invert if you make a mistake and select the wrong entity to enlarge. Then,
reselect the entity. The entity returns to its original size. DataCAD resets the Center Z to
zero each time you choose Enlarge from 3D Menus.

Exploding 3D Entities
Use Explode to separate 3D entities into their polygonal facets or into three-dimensional lines.
After you explode an entity into lines or polygons, it is not possible to reverse the operation and
recreate the original entity from these lines and polygons.
Explode can create a large amount of data in the drawing file. For example, take a single sphere
with 20 divisions in the sweep direction (primary divisions) and 10 divisions in the rise direction
(secondary divisions). After an explode operation, this single sphere produces some 200 polygons,
each of which occupies approximately as much drawing storage space as did the original sphere. A
mesh surface with 20 divisions in each direction would produce 800 polygons, which would
collectively require 364 times as much drawing storage space as the original mesh surface.
• Explode separates curved entities (cylinders, cones, truncated cones, tori, spheres, mesh
surfaces, and surfaces of revolution) into lines or polygons for subsequent editing operations
(like stretch).
• You can explode a text entity into 3D lines that you can then rotate in space. The lines then
respond to a hidden line removal.
• Explode determines the validity of exploding entities. For example, if you select a contour
curve to explode into polygons, DataCAD ignores the selection and does not explode the
curve because it has no polygonal components.
To explode a 3D entity:
1. Choose Explode from 3D Menus.
2. Toggle To Lines on to explode entities into 3D lines; alternatively, toggle To Polygons on
to explode entities into polygons.
468 | CHAPTER 24: EDITING 3D ENTITIES
3. Choose a selection method and select the objects that you want to explode. You can use
the 3D Views menu to reorient your view to get the best vantage point in selecting
objects.

Changing 3D Entities
3D Change lets you change the divisions of circular entities and the stiffness of contours as well as
colors, line types, line overshoots, and more.

To change an attribute of a 3D entity:

1. Choose Change from 3D Menus.
2. Choose the option you want to change.
3. Choose or enter a new value; follow the prompts in the Message Window.
4. Choose Closed to indicate whether 3D arcs, cylinders, cones, and truncated cones are
treated as closed solids or as open surfaces, then choose one of the following:
Yes 3D entities will be treated as closed shapes
No 3D entities will be treated as open shapes
5. Choose a selection method and select the objects that you want to change. You can use
the 3D Views menu to reorient your view to get the best vantage point for selecting
objects.
Use Prim. Divs. to change the number of segment divisions of circular entities. Prim. Divs. affects
3D arcs, cylinders, cones, truncated cones, spheres, tori, surfaces of revolution, contour curves,
and mesh surfaces. For spheres, surfaces of revolution, and tori, Prim. Divs. affects only the
number of segment divisions in the sweep direction (in the plane of the screen). For mesh
surfaces, it affects only the number of segment divisions in the first direction. For contour curves,
it affects the number of segment divisions between each control point of the curve.
Use Sec. Divs. to change the number of segment divisions of certain circular entities. This toggle
affects only spheres, tori, surfaces of revolution, and mesh surfaces. For spheres and surfaces of
revolution, it affects the number of segment divisions in the rise direction. For tori, it affects the
number of segment divisions in the roll direction. For mesh surfaces, it affects the number of
segment divisions in the second direction.
Use Stiffness to change the stiffness factor associated with contour curves. Stiffness affects only
contour curves. The stiffness can be any number except zero.
 Viewing Your Model
DataCAD gives you several ways to view your model to
help you draw and create views for plotting or
25
In this chapter:
presentations. While there are many different kinds of
views, only plan, parallel, perspective, and oblique are Creating and changing
views
commonly used for architectural models, and DataCAD lets
you customize each of these types of views. You must use a Shading your model
parallel or plan view for editing your drawing, while Performing hidden line
perspectives and obliques are most often used for removals on your model
visualization, rendering, and presentations.
Saving and linking to
Once you have a view defined, you can perform a hidden views
line removal of it or shade it. You can save any hidden-line, Creating walk-throughs
shaded, or standard 3D view and then link any entity in
your model to that view to easily display it. You can even Using the o2c-based
object viewer
create walk-throughs of your model.
The o2c-based object viewer provides real-time, dynamic,
shaded 3D views of DataCAD models. You can adjust many
of the o2c settings and save them as high-quality rendered
images.
470 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL

Front (Parallel View) Left (Parallel View)

Ortho (Plan View) Back (Parallel View) Right (Parallel View)

Parallel (Isometric View) Parallel (Isometric View)

Plan Oblique (Axonometric View) Elevation Oblique

Perspective (One point)

Perspective (Three point) Perspective (Two point)

Figure 25.1: Examples of views you can create in DataCAD
 CREATING PARALLEL VIEWS | 471
Creating Parallel Views
Parallel in the View pull-down menu restores the last parallel view you generated and displays the
globe. Elevations and isometrics are parallel views but by no means the only ones. Because these
two cases are used so frequently, they have their own menu selections. It may help, however, to
remember that these are just different kinds of parallel views. You can, in fact, choose any eye
point to create a parallel view. See “More About Changing the Eye Point for a View” later in this
chapter for more information on the globe display and how it affects parallel views.
Elevations and isometric views can be quickly created in DataCAD in just a few steps. Isometric
views can be created by simply choosing Isometric from the View pull-down menu or by choosing
Isometric from the 3D Views menu. You can use the Viewer Toolbar to work with any parallel
view. Choose Viewer Toolbar from the View pull-down menu. This toolbar will automatically
change when you change your view to any parallel view or to orthographic (plan) view.

More About Rotation Angles in 3D Views

In 2D, positive rotation angles go counterclockwise; in 3D, the concept is a bit more complex.
This rotation angle of -90° flips the model to the left. DataCAD uses the right-hand rule to indicate
the direction in which positive angles run. To understand the right-hand rule, point the thumb of
your right hand in the direction of the axis in question. Your fingers curl in the direction of
positive rotation. The Y-axis goes up, so when you point your thumb up, your fingers curl toward
you a counterclockwise direction. Negative angles run in a clockwise direction.

90°

POSITIVE AXIS OF ROTATION

Figure 25.2: Right-hand rule
472 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
More About Changing the View Center
When you create the first parallel view in a drawing, DataCAD calculates the view center by
examining the extents of the model. DataCAD generates all parallel views with the assumption
that the model is situated over a point called the view center or the point in space at which the
observer is looking. DataCAD places the view center in the middle of the extents, halfway
between Z-base and Z-height. Ideally, this is somewhere near the center of the model.
The view center is not attached to the model in any way, so if the model moves, the view center
does not change. Be careful when you use Globe. Sometimes, models spin off the screen
completely because the globe is always situated directly over view center. Reposition the view
center to somewhere inside the model to avoid this problem.
The view center in a perspective view is always the point of intersection between the picture plane
and the line of sight.

To reposition the view center:

1. Choose Reset from the 3D Views/Controls menu. Reset places the drawing in the last
orthographic view you generated. This helps you find a center of the model.
2. Choose View Center; an Auto option becomes available.
3. Select a new center point in one of the following ways:
• Select a point in the center of the model
• Choose Auto to calculate a view center with the center point halfway between Z-base
and Z-height
The new view center is set and you return to the Controls menu.
In the 3D Views menu, both the Elevation/New Elev. and Edit Plane options change the view
center implicitly. In both of these options, you select a point on the plane where Z=0. This point
becomes the new view center for parallel views. This point also becomes the new grid origin for
grid snapping. See “Creating Perspective Views” later in this chapter for more information on the
view center in a perspective view.

More About Changing the Eye Point for a View

The view sphere (known as the “globe” in versions 10 and prior) display is used to reorient your
eye point in a parallel or perspective view; it is automatically displayed on screen whenever you
choose a parallel or perspective view. Selecting a point inside the view sphere display indicates the
new observer position for viewing the model.
In perspective views, the view sphere changes the elevation of the observer’s eye point and the
direction from which you observe the model (north, south, east, or west), but it does not change
the view center, the distance to the object, or the cone of vision.
In a parallel view, the view sphere sets the observer’s eye point above or below the ground plane at
which the observer stands. The center of the view sphere represents a point directly over view
center and all points on the outer circle represent a point in space directly below the view center
looking up.
 CREATING PARALLEL VIEWS | 473

Figure 25.3: View sphere perspective

To visualize how the view sphere operates, imagine that the model sits inside a large sphere. Half
of the sphere is above the ground plane and half of it is below, with the ground plane cutting the
sphere at the equator. The equator of this sphere is represented as the inner circle. Therefore, all
points inside this circle are the upper half of the sphere (above ground) and all points outside the
inner circle are the lower half of the sphere (below ground).
While the view sphere display is in the upper-left corner of the screen by default, you can use the
View Sphere option in the 3D Views menu to reposition it on the screen. You can:
• Move the view sphere to a different location on the screen so that you can continue to work
on a part of the model without interference
• Change the size of the view sphere; a larger view sphere gives you finer control over the
rotation of a parallel or perspective view
To move the view sphere display:
1. Choose View Sphere from the 3D Views menu. The View Sphere menu appears:
Default Returns the view sphere to its customary position in the upper-left corner of the
Drawing Window
2. Select a new center for the view sphere. Move your mouse to dynamically size the View
Sphere display.
3. Select a point on the perimeter of the new view sphere. The view sphere moves to the
selected position.
Use 3D Views/Controls to specify a vantage point for a parallel view. You can think of the
Controls menu as a more accurate version of View Sphere and just another way of generating
parallel views. You can use the Controls menu to position the view center inside the model for
smoother operation of the view sphere.
When you choose Controls from the 3D Views menu, the Controls menu appears in the Menu
Window. In addition, the control buttons appear on the Viewer toolbar if that is currently
displayed. (To display the Viewer toolbar, select Toolbars from the View pull-down menu and
make sure there is a checkmark for Viewer in the Toolbars dialog box.)
The cursor you see while you are in the Controls menu displays the current orientation of the X, Y,
and Z world coordinate axes.
474 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
The model exists in
screen coordinates

World
Coordinates

The model is viewed

andeditedinthe
screen coordinate
system

The model is projected

onto the screen

Screen
Coordinates

Figure 25.4: Screen coordinates vs. world coordinates

The Screen option rotates the view around the screen coordinate axes. Screen coordinates refer to
the right-handed coordinate system that you worked with in 2D. The +X axis goes to the right, the
+Y axis goes up, and the +Z axis comes out of the screen. This does not change.
The World option rotates the view around the world coordinate axes. World coordinates refer to
the right-handed coordinate system associated with the model. Imagine that your model is in
orthographic view and you attach the screen coordinate axes to the model itself. What you have is
a set of three axes known as world coordinate axes. These do not change with respect to the
model, but they do change with respect to the screen.
When you choose any of the Rotate options, DataCAD rotates the view by a set number of degrees
around the axis you indicate.
Reset changes the current view to the last orthographic view taken. Reset also brings the model
back into view in case it moves off the screen. Use this option before using View Center.
Rot. Angle controls the number of degrees that the object rotates under any Rotate+ or Rotate-
options.
Four additional input modes are available in the Controls menu: relative and absolute cylindrical
(distance, angle, Z coordinate) and relative and absolute spherical (distance, plan angle, rise
angle). These modes provide additional variables to the Z component of coordinate entry, which
may be helpful in specialized modeling applications like entering a 3D line that represents a solar
angle.
Hint: You can access these modes by pressing the (Insert) key.

To set the rotation angle:

1. Choose Rot. Angle from the Controls menu. A list of rotation angles appears.
 CREATING PARALLEL VIEWS | 475
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
Add View adds the current parallel view to the list of saved views.

Creating an Isometric View

Isometric creates a true isometric view. Isometric views are a special parallel view where the X-
and Y-axes of the model form a 30° angle from the horizontal. To make sure that the angle is
precise, choose Isometric from the 3D Views menu or choose Isometric from the View pull-down
menu.

Creating Elevations
Elevations are a special kind of parallel view. When you view an elevation in plan, the front of the
model faces the bottom of the screen.
Use Front Elev. to view the front elevation of the model. Use Back Elev. to view the back
elevation of the model. Use Right Elev. to view the right elevation of the model. Use Left Elev. to
view the left elevation of the model.
In addition to the four preset elevations (Front Elev., Back Elev., Left Elev., and Right Elev.), you
can create nonorthogonal elevations. You can use New Elev. to generate views for rendering or to
orient the model for a side view in which you can precisely place the zero plane, Z-base, and Z-
height. If you choose a Front Elev., you cannot guarantee where Z-base and Z-height are in
relation to the new view.

To create a new elevation:

1. Choose New Elev. from the 3D Views/Elevation menu or choose Elevation/New from the
View pull-down menu. The view changes into plan view so that you can specify the
elevation line. Center Z appears in the Elevation menu.
2. Choose Center Z to set the height of the view center. You must choose this option before
you select the first point in the new elevation indicator. A list of values appears.
3. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
4. Select a point to lie on the new zero plane (such as the corner of a wall). This point also
serves as the new view center and grid origin.
Move the cursor and it changes into a New Elevation Indicator. There are several parts to
this cursor:
Z-base indicator
Z-height indicator
Zero plane (the plane at which Z = 0)
Direction of view
The Z-base and Z-height indicators may not be visible if their values appear off the
screen or if their values are set to zero, in which case these indicators coincide with the
zero plane.
476 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
Newviewcenter
and grid origin TheZeroplane(Z=0)

Z-Height
Z-Base

Out of the screen Into the screen

Figure 25.5: The new elevation indicator

5. Adjust Z-base and Z-height if necessary. The indicators change position to show you the
new location of Z-base and Z-height. Remember that negative distances go in the
direction of the view (into the screen).
6. Select a point in the direction of the view. The specified view appears on the screen.
Options for creating front, back, left, right, and new elevations are available from both the
View/Elevation pull-down menu and the 3D Views/Elevation menu in the Menu Window.

To add the current elevation to the list of saved views:

1. Choose Add View from the Elevation menu.
2. Type the name of the new view (up to eight characters) and press (Enter). The view is
added to the list of saved views.

More About the New Elevation Indicator Cursor

This cursor has an arrow indicating the direction of the new zero plane position and a tail
representing the current Z-base and Z-height settings. (The end of the tail nearest the crosshair is
Z-base and the end furthest from the crosshair is Z-height.) If Z-base is set to 0, the tail meets the
crosshair; if Z-height is set to 0, the end of the tail won’t be displayed.
 CREATING PERSPECTIVE VIEWS | 477

Figure 25.6: The New Elevation Indicator cursor with Z-base=0 and Z-height=8

Creating Perspective Views

DataCAD can generate one-, two-, and three-point perspectives. The differences between these
perspective types lie only in the location of the eye of the observer (Eye Point Z) and the point in
the model at which the observer is focusing (Focal Pnt. Z).
You can use the Viewer Toolbar to work with your perspective view. Choose Viewer Toolbar from
the View pull-down menu. This toolbar will automatically change when you change your view to
any parallel view or to orthographic (plan) view.
For each perspective type, you must select an eye point for the observer and a focal point to mark
the point in the model where the observer is looking. When you select the first point, the cone of
vision appears. See “More About Changing the Eye Point for a View” earlier in this chapter for
more information on the view sphere.
478 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL

Cone of Vision
Line of Sight
Eye Point
View Center

Figure 25.7: Cone of vision for perspective view

The line that cuts across the cone of vision is the picture plane. Things in front of this plane (on
the same side as you, the observer) appear larger than normal; things behind the picture plane
appear smaller.
The line that leads directly from the eye point to the view center is the line of sight. As with
parallel views, always place the view center somewhere inside the model so that the view sphere is
stable and predictable.

Establishing Perspective Settings

To set the elevation of the observer’s eye point:
1. Choose Eye Point Z from the Set Persp. menu. A list of perspective eye point values
appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).

To set the elevation of the center of the view:

1. Choose Focal Pnt. Z from the Set Persp. menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
The Reset option in the Set Persp. menu returns you to a perspective view using the current
settings in this menu.
Use Hither Clip to reduce the fisheye distortion that can appear in close-up perspectives. You can
also increase the hither clip distance to partially cut your model shown in perspective view and
then create a shaded “sectional perspective” with the Quick Shader menu. The hither clip plane
appears as a crosshair on the cone of vision.

To use Hither Clip:

1. Choose Hither Clip from the Set Persp. menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
 CREATING PERSPECTIVE VIEWS | 479
Line of Sight

Picture Plane
View Center

Hither-clip distance

60°

Cone of Vision

Eye Point
Figure 25.8: Cone of vision with hither clip

Toggle Fixed Cone on in the Set Persp. menu to fix the width of the cone of vision. The width of
the field of vision in a fixed cone is set using either Cone Angle or Camera.

To set the width of the field of vision to an angle using Cone Angle:
1. Choose Cone Angle from the Set Persp. menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value between 1 and 179 degrees and press (Enter).

To set the width of the field of vision using Camera:

1. Choose Camera from the Set Persp. menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter). Camera sets the width of the field of vision by
expressing it as the length of a camera lens. The longer the lens, the narrower the cone of
vision.

Creating a One-Point Perspective

Create one-point perspectives by choosing an eye point at the same elevation as the view center;
the observer is looking straight ahead, neither up nor down. A one-point perspective must have the
picture plane parallel to one of the frontal faces of the model.

To create a one-point perspective:

1. Choose Set Persp. from the 3D Views menu. When you choose Perspective from the 3D
Views menu for the first time in a drawing, the Set Persp. menu is automatically
displayed so you can set up the perspective view.
2. Set Eye Point Z to a reasonable value. When an observer is standing on the ground, 5’ is a
typical height for the observer’s eye.
480 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
3. Set Focal Pnt. Z to the same elevation you used in step 1.
4. Select a point for the eye point.
5. Select a point inside the model for the center point. Use ortho mode to make sure that the
line of sight is perpendicular to one of the faces of the model.

EyePntZ Line of Sight at 90

degrees to the front
plane of the model

CentPntZ
Figure 25.9: One-point perspective

Creating a Two-Point Perspective

Use two-point perspectives to relax one of the two constraints that you placed on one-point
perspectives. You can either:
• Set the eye point and center point at different elevations and keep the line of sight
perpendicular to one of the frontal faces of the model; or
• Keep the eye point and center point Z the same and set the line of sight at an angle other than
90°.

Figure 25.10: Two-point perspective

Creating a Three-Point Perspective

Three-point perspectives are generated when the eye point Z elevation is different from the center
point Z elevation and the line of sight is at an angle other than 90°. With these constraints, set the
eye point Z and the center point Z appropriately and choose these points in your model.
 CREATING OBLIQUE VIEWS | 481

Line of Sight not

perpendicular to
the front planes
of the model

EyePntZ = CentPntZ
Figure 25.11: Three-point perspective

Perspective Navigation Controls

Hotkeys and MouseWheel controls automate perspective setup and navigation by using video
game-style controls. For more detailed information about the navigation aids, see “Walking
Through Your Model” later in this chapter.

Creating Oblique Views

DataCAD can create both plan obliques (architectural axonometrics) and elevation obliques.
Choose Oblique from the 3D Views menu, then select Plan Oblique to create a plan oblique or
Elev Oblique to create an elevation oblique. If this is the first time you’ve chosen Elev Oblique,
follow the directions for selecting the New Elev. option in the Set Oblique menu. See “Creating
Elevations” earlier in this chapter for more information on the New Elev. option.

Establishing Oblique Settings

The Set Oblique option in the 3D Views menu (which is only available after you select Elev
Oblique) defines which elevation of the model you want to use as your frontal elevation in
constructing the oblique view. It works exactly the same way as the New Elev. option in the 3D
Views/Elevation menu.
Obliq.Angle controls the angle of rotation before the plan oblique is taken. Angles are usually
between 30° and 45°. For elevation obliques, this setting controls the angle at which the lines
sweep away from the elevation.

Creating an Elevation Oblique View

To create an elevation oblique view:

1. Select Set Oblique from the 3D Views menu.
2. Choose Elev Oblique from the Oblique menu.
482 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL

Oblq Ang Oblq Ang

45 degrees 30 degrees

Figure 25.12: Elevation oblique

Creating a Plan Oblique View

To create a plan oblique view:

1. Select Set Oblique from the 3D Views menu.
2. Choose Plan Oblique from the Oblique menu.

Oblq Ang Oblq Ang

30 degrees 45 degrees

Figure 25.13: Plan oblique

Creating a Hidden Line Removal

Use 3D Menus/Hide to perform hidden line removals in DataCAD. DataCAD’s hidden line
removal system is a two-pass system with an additional initialization step. The initialization step
performs a few simple and quick operations: allocating memory, calculating the limits of your
model for a specified view, and initializing the temporary hidden line removal database.
The hidden line removal process does not recognize text and associative dimensions; therefore,
they do not appear after a Hide. To display these entities after a Hide, convert them into 3D lines
with the 3D Edit, Explode command.
Pass one (the calculating pass of the hidden line removal system) scans through the entire model
and temporarily separates it into a series of polygonal faces or free lines, as follows:
• DataCAD breaks entities like 2D lines (having height), polygons, slabs, blocks, cylinders,
etc., into a series of polygons that the hidden line removal system can understand and
interpret.
• DataCAD breaks entities like 3D lines, contour curves, 3D arcs, etc., into a series of free line
segments. Free line segments are assumed to be infinitely thin.
• DataCAD also recognizes voids in polygons.
 CREATING A HIDDEN LINE REMOVAL | 483
Pass two of the hidden line removal process is where most of the work takes place; consequently,
it usually takes longer. Each line segment that is potentially a visible edge or a free line is
compared with each polygonal face. DataCAD uses the tests to determine if the line segment lies
completely in front of, completely behind, straddles, or pierces a given polygon.
Depending on the results of these tests, the line is either eliminated from consideration, split into
one or more pieces, or left intact to be tested later against the remaining polygons. If, after having
been compared against all of the possible polygons, some portion of the line segment remains,
DataCAD displays the segment and optionally adds it to a temporary database for the saved
image.
DataCAD uses a number of optimization techniques for reducing the computing time of the
display pass to a minimum.

To perform a hidden line removal:

1. Choose Hide from 3D Menus or choose Hidden Line Removal from the View pull-down
menu. Set the following options as necessary:
Begin Starts the hidden line removal process and displays operation’s progress in the
Message Window; press (Delete) or (End) to cancel the hide at any time
Save Image Save the image produced by a hidden line removal
Crop Image Performs a hidden line removal only on the portion of the model that is visible on
the screen
HLR Partial Divides the Drawing Window into smaller sub-areas for faster hides
Pierce Performs piercing calculations during hide, causing slower hidden line removals; to
speed up a hide, toggle Pierce off whenever piercing calculations are not necessary
Pierce Off Pierce On

Clip Cube Hides the portion of the model that is contained within the previously defined Clip
Cube; available only for parallel views of your model; to create a similar clipping
effect for perspective hidden line images, use Hither Clip in the 3D Views/Set Persp.
menu
All Performs hidden line removals on entities on all layers toggled on
Active Layer Performs a hidden line removal only on the entities on the active layer
Sel. Set Performs a hidden line removal only on the entities in the active selection set
Options Settings to perform different functions within a hidden line removal
3D Views Sets the view for the model prior to the hidden line removal; since the image created
by the hidden line removal process contains only 2D lines, the image is best viewed
in an orthographic view
2. Choose 3D Views from the Hide menu and orient the model so that you can see the
image.
3. Choose Exit to return to the Hide menu.
4. Choose Begin to start the hidden line removal process.
484 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
Tips on Maximizing Performance
• Use lines rather than polygons whenever possible. For example, if you want to draw some
rectangles on the faces of a slab block to schematically represent windows, use 3D lines
instead of polygons to outline the windows to increase performance. Since the rectangles are
simply inscribed on the face of the slab, polygons are not needed; there is nothing to hide.
• Use three-dimensional entities like blocks, cylinders, and slabs instead of collections of 2D
lines and simple polygons.
• Keep models as simple as possible. As the size of the model increases, the time required to
compute a given image increases at a faster rate. You may consider placing some of the detail
for a given model on separate layers so that you can temporarily toggle some layers off for
preliminary runs of the hidden line removal system. After you complete the modeling process,
you can then toggle on all applicable layers and perform this more complicated hidden line
removal analysis on the complete model.
Saving the Hide Image
If you toggle Save Image on before you choose Begin, DataCAD saves the hidden line removal
image for later use; if Save Image is toggled off, DataCAD does not save the image and only
displays it on the screen.
Once the hidden line removal process is complete, the Save Image menu appears:
Active Layer
New Layer
Layer File
Offset

To add a retained image to the active layer:

1. Use (Tab) and (Shift) + (Tab) to scan through the available layers to select the layer to
add the new image to. DataCAD saves the image to the active layer.
2. Choose Active Layer after the hidden line removal process is complete. DataCAD adds
the image to the active layer; you return to the Hide menu.

To add the retained image to a new layer in the drawing:

1. Choose New Layer at the completion of the hidden line removal process to create a new
layer for the drawing.
2. Enter a name for the new layer.
3. Indicate whether you want the new layer On or Off. If you plan to create a series of
images, leave the layer off to return directly to the Hide menu and create a new image.

To add the retained image to a layer file:

1. Choose Layer File at the completion of the hidden line removal process.
2. Enter the name of the layer file you want to create. DataCAD lists the layer files in the
current layer folder in a dialog box.
If you click Cancel in the dialog box without specifying a layer file, DataCAD deletes the image.
 CREATINGA HIDDEN LINE REMOVAL | 485
The image created by the hidden line removal process contains only 2D lines; you can use all of
the normal DataCAD editing operations on the resulting image such as erasing, trimming,
enlarging, moving, rotating, stretching, and hatching. Since the image contains 2D lines, an
orthographic view is the best.
Before you choose Active Layer or New Layer, you can offset the image in the XY-plane by some
distance. This helps you to create a composition of views by arranging them on the screen apart
from each other.

To offset an image:
1. Choose Offset after completion of the hidden line removal process.
2. Select the first point of a distance to offset the image in the plane of the screen.
3. Select the second point of a distance to offset the image in the plane of the screen.
4. Choose either Active Layer or New Layer and proceed with the instructions listed above
for adding the image to the drawing.
Choose Cancel to delete the retained image and return to the Hide menu. Remember that after the
hidden line removal process, if you toggle Save Image on, DataCAD saves the image before you
select a destination for it. If you choose Cancel, DataCAD deletes the previously saved image
from the drawing and makes this space available.

Increasing Hide Speed

Use HLR Partial to partition the Drawing Window into smaller sections, allowing for faster hides.
Hide treats each section separately, resulting in continuous lines being divided. It also allows you
to see sections in their entirety as the hidden line removal progresses.

To change Drawing Window partitions:

1. Choose HLR Partial from the Hide menu.
2. Choose X Segments.
3. Type a new value and press (Enter).
4. Choose Y Segments.
5. Type a new value and press (Enter).

Hide Options
Use Options in the Hide menu to perform different functions within a hidden line removal.

Editing Hidden Line Removal Images

If you use HLR Partial to partition your hidden line removal image, continuous lines will be
broken wherever they cross a partition. While these breaks aren’t visible, they can make editing
that image time-consuming, if not difficult. Using the Join option allows you to more easily edit
the hidden line removal image after it is complete. When you perform a hidden line removal with
HLR Partial on, toggle Join on in the Hide/Options menu to weld (reattach) lines on a model.
 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
486 Deleting Double Lines
The Delete Dbl. option in the Hide/Options menu deletes any double lines in the model that were
created as a result of performing a hide with Join and HLR Partial on.

Drawing Hidden Lines

If the Draw Hidden option in the Hide/Options menu is on before you choose Begin, DataCAD
draws hidden lines using the line color, line type, and line spacing you set by the Hidden Color,
Hidden Style, and Hidden Spac. options. If you toggle Draw Hidden off, DataCAD does not draw
the hidden lines.

Figure 25.14: Draw Hidden with a dashed line type

Disregarding Backfaces
Use the Backface option in the Hide/Options menu for a faster Hide performance. DataCAD calls
all polygonal faces facing away from the viewer backfaces. With this toggle on, DataCAD ignores
the backfaces for a hidden line removal. This decreases the amount of area to hide and the time it
takes to complete the hidden line removal.

Hidden Line Colors

Use the Hidden Color option in the Hide/Options menu to change the color used to draw the
hidden lines. This color menu works exactly like its 2D counterpart. See “Color Menus” in “The
Drawing Board” chapter for more information on the 2D options.

Hidden Line types

Use Hidden Style to change the line type used to draw the hidden lines. When you toggle Draw
Hidden off, Hidden Style is ignored. When you toggle Draw Hidden off, Hidden Color is ignored.

To change the hidden line type:

1. Choose Hidden Style from the Options menu. A list of line types appears.
2. Select a new line type for hidden lines.

Hidden Line Spacing

Use Hidden Space to change the line spacing used to draw hidden lines. When you toggle Draw
Hidden off, Hidden Spac. is ignored.

To change the hidden line spacing:

1. Choose Hidden Spac. from the Hide/Options/Hide menu. A list of spacing values appears.
 CREATING A SHADED IMAGE | 487
2. Choose or type a new spacing value and press (Enter).

Closing 2D Arcs
Unlike 3D arcs and 3D cylinders, ordinary 2D arcs do not have an option for being treated as
closed objects. If you toggle Close 2D Arc on in the Hide/Options menu, DataCAD treats 2D arcs
as closed, which makes them opaque to the hidden line removal process. 2D arcs that have a Z-
height work like cylinders with closed ends and sides. If you toggle Close 2D Arc off, during the
hidden line removal process, DataCAD treats 2D arcs as ordinary curved lines (arcs with no Z-
height) or open-ended cylinders (arcs having Z-height).
CloAr2 On CloAr2 Off

These are 2D circles, not cylinders.

Figure 25.15: 2D circles

Closing 2D Ellipses
If you toggle Close Ellip. on in the Hide/Options menu, DataCAD treats 2D ellipses as closed,
solid objects during the hidden line removal process. If you toggle Close Ellip. off, DataCAD
treats ellipses as ordinary curved lines (no height) or curved surfaces (having height) with no top
or bottom.

Displaying Outlines Only

Toggle No Prim Edge on in the Hide/Options menu to display the outline of tori and cylinders. No
Prim Edge does not display any other divisions of these entities.

2D Arc Divisions
During the hidden line removal process, DataCAD uses the current value of the circle divisions
setting. This Divisions option is duplicated on the Hide/Options menu for convenience in adjusting
the current value of this variable. Choose Divisions from the Hide/Options menu and set it to an
integer value from 4 to 36.

Creating a Shaded Image

DataCAD’s Shader creates a shaded image of your model by temporarily breaking it down into 3-
and 4-sided polygons and then shading the surfaces according to light source and shader settings.
You can define and place up to seven light sources in your model and use ambient light as well.
These light sources are specific points that radiate light out in all directions and can be toggled on
or off to create different lighting effects. Each surface of your model is illuminated independently
of the others, so one surface will not cast a shadow on its neighbor. The only factor that affects the
light on a surface is the distance of the light source from it. The Shader supports all 256 colors in
the DataCAD palette as well as a rendering palette of 16.8 million colors.
488 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
To create a shaded image of your model:
1. Go to the 3D Menus.
2. Click on Shader in 3D Menus. The Shader menu appears.
3. Click on Settings in the Shader menu. The Shader Settings dialog box appears, allowing
you to change light source settings, the background color or image of the shader window,
how edges are shaded, and more. The settings in the Shader Settings dialog box are also
available individually in the Shader menu. You can use either the dialog box or the menu
to change settings; all changes will be reflected both in the dialog box and the menu
options.

Figure 25.16: The Shader Settings dialog box

4. Change the Light Settings by choosing the light source whose settings you want to
change from the Light Source list box. Then, follow the instructions below. Repeat this
for each light source you want to customize.
• The light sources are named LtName1, LtName2, etc., by default. To rename the
light source, click in the Name input box and type a new name. The name will be
updated in the Light Source list box when you either click in the list box or click OK
to save the shader settings.
 CREATING A SHADED IMAGE | 489
You can also position a light source by simply clicking anywhere in the Drawing Window.
Click on the light source name in the Shader menu, click On/Off in the menu if the light
source has not yet been toggled on, and then choose Position from the menu. A 3D cursor
appears in the Drawing Window; note the cursor’s coordinates displayed in the
Coordinates/Hints toolbar. Click to place the light source. Please note that you cannot use
the light source settings in the Shader Settings dialog box to position the light using this
method.

• The light source’s intensity is the percent of white used in the light, with percentage
values ranging from 0 to 100. To set the intensity of the light source, use the up and
down arrows to increase or decrease the percent value, respectively.
• To enter specific coordinates for a light source, click in the X, Y, Z Coordinate input
boxes and type new coordinates. (The left input box is the X coordinate, the middle
input box is the Y coordinate, and the right input box is the Z coordinate.)
• To toggle a light source on or off, click in the On/Off checkbox.
• To give the light source the ability to cast shadows, toggle Cast Shadows on. Note
that shadows are not actually cast in the shaded image unless Cast Shadows in the
bottom right corner of the dialog is checked.
• The intensity of ambient light can be adjusted just as light source intensity was. To
set the ambient light intensity, use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease
the percent value, respectively.
5. Customize the sun light source settings.
• Turn the sun light source on by clicking in the On/Off box.
• Select the brightness by using the up and down arrows in the Intensity box.
• Click one of the eight buttons to show the sun’s position in relation to your drawing.
6. Customize the background color of the Shader window, change the size of the shaded
image, and change how you move from the shaded image back to your drawing:
• To change the background color, click on the colored rectangle in the Background
Color section. Click on a new color in the Color Palette dialog box and then click on
OK.
• Click on the Right-Click to Exit checkbox to check this option; this will allow you to
close the shader window by simply right-clicking. Uncheck this option to use a pop
up menu to quickly save your image, move between images and your drawing, or
import your shaded image into eZmeeting.
• The shaded image is created as a bitmap (.BMP) file. You can adjust Shader window
size by using the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the percent value,
respectively, with 100% being the full size of the Drawing Window. You can go as
high as 1,000%, depending on how much system memory you have available.
10. Go to the Edge Type section. Click on No Edge to shade only the surfaces of your model,
click on Show Edge to shade both the edges and surfaces, or click on Edge Only to shade
only the edges (similar to a hidden line removal with lights). The default setting is No
Edge.
490 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
11. Add edge and overshoot lines to your shaded image.
• To set the length of the overshoot, click in the Length input box and type a value.
The default length is 0.0.
• To set the width of the lines used for edges and overshoots, use the up and down
arrows to enter a width in pixels. The default is 1.
• To draw edge/overshoot lines in the same color as the entity’s surface, check the Use
Entity color checkbox. This is checked by default. If you’d like to use a different
color, uncheck the box, click on the color swatch to the right, and choose a new
color. The Edge/Overshoot properties section is only available when Show Edge is
toggled on.
12. Use the Highlight setting to produce a visible area of light around a light source, much
like a lamp throws on a wall and ceiling. This setting is off by default, but you can set it
to three intensities, with Large being the most intense.
13. Choose a background image for your shaded image by clicking on the folder icon in the
Background Image section and choosing a supported file format (.BMP, .JPG, .GIF, .TIF,
.TGA, .PNG, .PCX, and .PCD). Leave Maintain Aspect checked to ensure the background
image covers the entire Shader window. You cannot customize the size of the background
image.
14. Go to the bottom portionof the Shader Settings dialog box. Check Render both faces to
render both sides of a polygon, instead of rendering only the side with the positive
normal. When this option is unchecked, any negative normals of polygons that face you
will not be rendered, unless Normals toward viewer is checked in the following step.
15. Check Normals toward viewer to set the positive normals of all polygons so that they
face you. Uncheck this option to leave positive normals facing their original direction.
16. Cast shadows in your shaded image, according to the light sources you set for shadows in
step 4, by checking the Cast Shadows box in the lower portion of the dialog box. (Note
that you must still complete steps 19 – 21 to actually draw the shadows.)
17. Make sure the Show Lights checkbox is checked on. This option displays the light
sources as small symbols around your model, letting you see exactly where they are
positioned. These symbols do not print; they are only displayed for visual reference.
18. Click OK to save your new settings and close the Shader Settings dialog box.
19. Cast shadows in your shaded image by clicking on Shadow Plane in the Shader menu.
Then, toggle Recv. Shadow on. You are prompted to Select entity to receive shadow.
20. Select the entity on which the shadow will fall (for example, the polygon acting as the
floor or ground plane). Use the selection menu to select and highlight the entity. If you
select the wrong entity, toggle Recv. Shadow off and select that entity again. Repeat this
step to select the correct entity. An entity cannot cast a shadow and receive one (have a
shadow fall on it) at the same time.
21. Right-click to return to the main Shader menu.
 CREATING A SHADED IMAGE | 491
22. Click Shade in the Shader menu. Your model is shaded and the bitmap image appears in
the Drawing Area. You can now save the shaded image as a bitmap file or return to your
drawing file. You can save your settings and then use them later without having to change
all the Shader settings again. See “Saving and Using Shader Settings” later in this
chapter.

More About Polygon Normals

A characteristic of a polygon surface is its orientation or normal. Think of a polygon as a sheet of
paper that only allows you to write on one side. This side is the positive normal, while the other
side is the negative normal. In a visual sense, polygons are one-dimensional because they may
only be seen from one side in a rendered view.
To quickly shade your model without changing any Shader settings, click on Shade in the View
pull-down menu. Your model is shaded.
You can’t see polygon normals in DataCAD. While a normal is a condition of the coordinate
points that describe a particular polygon, they really don't matter much in the DataCAD world.
Whether you view, quick-shade, or hide a polygon from either side, it will look and display
exactly the same. The only way to know which way a normal faces is to remember how it was
created. Did you define the polygon right to left (counter clockwise) or left to right (clockwise)? If
you went counter clockwise, then the normal faces toward you, out of the screen. If you went
clockwise, then it faces away from you, into the screen. This method of orientation is known as the
right-hand rule. To further complicate things, if you mirror an entity, all of its normals will reverse.

Saving and Using Shader Settings

You can save your settings and then use them later without having to change all the Shader
settings again.

To save your shader settings:

1. Customize the options in the Shader Settings dialog box. See “Creating a Shaded Image”
earlier in this chapter for more information on customizing shader settings.
2. Click on the Save As button in the Shader Settings dialog box. A dialog box appears,
prompting you to Save light information to.
3. Change to the folder where you want to save your .LIT file, if necessary, and type a name
for the file.
4. Click on Save. The dialog box closes and your .LIT file is saved.

To use a .LIT file:

1. Click on Settings in the Shader menu. The Shader Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click on Load. A dialog box appears, prompting you to Load light information from.
3. Change to the folder where your .LIT file is stored if necessary. Then, click on the file.
4. Click on Open. The dialog box closes and the light settings are loaded into the Shader
Settings dialog box.
 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
492 Saving Your Shaded Image
You can save your shaded image or send the bitmap to an eZmeeting conference.

To save your shaded image:

1. Click on Save or Save As in the File menu or right-click in the bitmap window to display
a pop-up menu and click on Save Bitmap or Save Bitmap As. (Keep in mind that if you
use the Save option, the bitmap is saved in the last folder you used.) The Right-Click to
Exit option in the Shader Settings dialog box must be unchecked for the pop-up menu to
display when you right-click in the Shader window.
2. Determine if you used the Save As option in the previous step. If so, type a name for the
bitmap file and click Save.

Viewing Selected Entities in Your Model

Use Clip Cube in the 3D Views menu to restrict your view of the model so that only the entities
inside a rectangular region are visible. If an entity is only partially inside the clip cube, DataCAD
clips it at the point where it passes outside the cube. This reduces the visual clutter of a complex
model as it develops. You cannot edit entities outside of the clip cube.
There are two clip cubes you can use: one for orthographic and one for parallel views. These cubes
are independent of one another. When you begin the clip cube operation from orthographic view,
DataCAD uses the orthographic clip cube. When you use Clip Cube while in a parallel view, the
parallel clip cube is used.
The clip cube status is one of the attributes stored with the Add View function in the GoTo View
menu. Restoring a saved view also restores the clip cube that was in use when you saved the view.
The Arc Factor setting controls the smoothness of clipped arcs that use a solid line type.

To activate the clip cube:

1. Select Clip Cube from the 3D Views menu. The Clip Cube menu appears.
2. Toggle Clip On on.

To create a new clip cube:

1. Choose New Cube from the Clip Cube menu.
2. Set Z-Min and Z-Max so that they enclose the part of the model you want. First set the
height of the floor of the clip cube by selecting Z-Min from the Clip Cube menu,
choosing or typing a value, and pressing (Enter).
3. Set the height of the ceiling of the clip cube by selecting Z-Max from the Clip Cube
menu, and choosing or typing a value, and pressing (Enter).
4. Select the area with a rubber band box.
5. Right-click to exit or select two new corners to reset the rubber band box.
6. Choose Clip On to toggle the cube on.
 VIEWING SELECTED ENTITIES IN YOUR MODEL | 493

Drawing the Clip On

Clip cube
Figure 25.17: Clip cube

Refresh updates the screen after you activate the clip cube. When Refresh is off, press (Esc) to
refresh the screen yourself to see the effects of the new clip cube.
You can insert an XREF into your drawing and define a clip cube within it. Either you can do this
by using the Insert pull-down menu or by selecting XREF Clip from the 3D Views menu.

To define a clip cube in an XREF attached to your drawing with Reference File Management:
1. Open a new drawing or select an existing file.
2. Attach a reference file to it by selecting XREF from the Insert pull-down menu.
3. Double-click on the name of the file you want to insert. Your cursor is now loaded with a
boundary box that represents the extents of the reference file. Toggle on By Center in the
Insert XREF menu. You are prompted to Position XREF on drawing. Click the left mouse
button to place the reference file by its center. The reference file appears in your Drawing
Window.
4. Select Reference File Management from the Insert pull-down menu. Choose Clip Cubes
from the extended menu. You are prompted to Select XREF to modify ClipCube.
5. Click on the reference file you placed in your Drawing Window. Notice that the reference
file’s Z-base and Z-height appear in the Coordinates/Hints toolbar.
6. Select Z-Min in the Identify menu, choose or type a value that is below the floor or Z-
base of the model, and press (Enter). Similarly, select Z-Max to set the Z-height above
the roof of the model.
7. Click on New Cube. You are prompted to Select the first corner of the clipping cube.
8. Click where you want the clip cube to begin. Then, pull the rubber band out diagonally
and click when it encloses the area you want to display in the clip cube.
9. Select Clip On. This toggles the clip cube on.

To define a clip cube in an XREF attached to your drawing with XREF Clip:
1. Open a new drawing or select an existing file.
2. Attach a reference file to it by selecting XREF from the Insert pull-down menu.
494 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
3. Double-click on the name of the file you want to insert. Your cursor is now loaded with a
boundary box that represents the extents of the reference file. Toggle on By Center in the
Insert XREF menu. You are prompted to Position XREF on drawing. Click the left mouse
button to place the reference file by its center. The reference file appears in your Drawing
Window.
4. Make sure you are in the 3D Views menu. Select Clip Cube from the 3D Views menu.
The Clip Cube menu appears.
5. Select XREF Clip from the Clip Cube menu. You are prompted to Select XREF to modify
ClipCube.
6. Click on the XREF you placed in your drawing. The Identify menu appears.
7. Set Z-Min and Z-Max values so that they are respectively below and above the model’s
Z-base and Z-height.
8. Click on New Cube. You are prompted to Select the first corner of the clipping cube.
9. Click where you want the clip cube to begin. Then, pull the rubber band out diagonally
and click when it encloses the area you want to display in the clip cube.
10. Select Clip On. This toggles the clip cube on.

Saving a View
Use Save Image in the 3D Views menu to create a snapshot of the current view. The snapshot
consists of 2D lines and can be edited with normal 2D editing commands in orthographic view.

To save an image:
1. Choose Save Image from the 3D Views menu. The Save Image menu appears.
2. Make decisions about the image you want to save:
Active Layer Save the image to the active layer
New Layer Save the image to an automatically created new active layer
Layer File Save the image to an automatically created layer file
Offset Select the distance and direction to offset a saved image from the current geometry
3. Select the destination for the saved image.
4. Enter a name for the new destination layer (when you place the image on a new layer or
in a layer file). DataCAD generates the image. The image that this procedure creates is
made entirely of 2D lines with Z-base = 0 and Z-height = 0; therefore, DataCAD creates
the image flat on the ground plane and in orthographic view.

GoTo View
When you save a view using the GoTo View menu in the 3D Views menu, DataCAD stores
information about the current view including:
• viewing scale
• zoom location (what you have zoomed in on)
• view type (orthographic, parallel, perspective, or oblique)
• location and orientation of the zero plane
 SAVING A VIEW | 495
• location of the view center
• active and inactive layers
• size, location, and status (on or off) of the clip cube
Restoring these saved views actually restores all of these stored settings to their previous state.
However, restoring a view does not restore the values of Z-base and Z-height. The Layers On/Off
setting may or may not be restored, depending on whether Layer Set is on or off. The Layer Set
option in the GoTo View menu restores layers to their last saved condition (on, off, active). When
Layer Set is off, DataCAD uses the current state of the layers but restores all the other parameters.
The top part of the GoTo View menu displays the names of any saved views in the drawing. If
there are more than ten views for this drawing, Scroll Fwrd and Scroll Back appear on the menu to
let you scroll through your views. Selecting a view from the menu restores that view to the
Drawing Window.

To add the current view to the list of saved views:

1. Choose GoTo View from the View pull-down menu.
2. Choose Add View from the GoTo View menu.
3. Type the name of the new view (up to eight characters) and press (Enter). The view is
added to the list of saved views.

To add any changes you made to the view without creating a new view:
1. Choose GoTo View from the View pull-down menu.
2. Choose Update View from the GoTo View menu.
3. Choose the view that you want to update with the current settings. This update includes
active or inactive layers, scale, and location of the zero plane.

To delete a selected view from the menu:

1. Choose GoTo View from the View pull-down menu.
2. Choose Del. View from the GoTo View menu.
3. Choose the view that you want to delete. DataCAD deletes the view parameters only; the
entities in the drawing are not affected by this operation.

To move a view from one position in the menu to another:

1. Choose GoTo View from the View pull-down menu.
2. Choose Move View from the GoTo View menu.
3. Choose the view that you want to move from the list of saved views.
4. Choose the view you want to appear after the view selected in step 2. The moved view
appears before the view selected in step 3. This is useful for moving an often-used view
into one of the first ten positions on the menu so you can access it quickly and easily.
 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
496 To rename a saved view:
1. Choose GoTo View from the View pull-down menu.
2. Choose Rename View from the GoTo View menu.
3. Choose the view that you want to rename.
4. Type the new view name (up to eight characters) and press (Enter). The view is renamed.

To toggle between the previous and current views respectively:

1. Use (Ctrl) + Left Arrow.
2. Use (Ctrl) + Right Arrow.

Walking Through Your Model

With the Walk Through option in the 3D Views menu, DataCAD simulates an observer walking
through a perspective model. You can walk toward or away from the model, turn right or left, step
up or down or to one side, or look up or down or to one side. Before using the options that move
you around the model, you must set the distance or angle to control how far you will move with
each option.
Before you can use Walk Through, you must set up a perspective view. After you’ve set up a
perspective view, you can toggle on the Viewer toolbar in the View pull-down menu. This toolbar
contains the same functions as the 3D Views/Walk Through menu.

Perspective Navigation Controls

Use hotkeys and MouseWheel controls to help you walk through your model. You can use these
hotkeys in any perspective view.
(PageUp) Walk backward
(PageDn) Walk forward
MouseWheel Walk forward/backward
(Up Arrow) Walk forward
(Dn Arrow) Walk backward
(Right Arrow) Step right
(Left Arrow) Step left
(Shift) + (Up Arrow) Look up
(Shift) + (Dn Arrow) Look down
(Shift) + (Right Arrow) Turn right
(Shift) + (Left Arrow) Turn left

The Walk Through, Options menu lets you customize the way you navigate.

To start a walk-through session, use one of these alternatives to set up a perspective view:
• Select Set Perspective from the View pull-down menu; establish the eye point by clicking
in the drawing where you want to begin the walk-through; move your mouse until the
cone is positioned properly, then click. DataCAD remembers this eye point and uses it for
subsequent walk-throughs until you change it by selecting Set Perspective from the View
pull-down menu or choosing Set Persp. from the 3D Views menu.
• Select Perspective from the View pull-down menu.
 WALKING THROUGH YOUR MODEL | 497

• Click on in the Projection Pad toolbar.

• Click on Perspective in the 3D Views menu and use Set Persp. to define the eye point and
cone.

To customize walk-through options:

1. Go to the 3D Views menu, toggle on Perspective, and select Walk Through.
2. Select Options from the Walk Through menu.
3. Set the three toggle switches, keeping the following in mind:
• If Fixed Focal is toggled on, you will always look at the same point in your model
while navigating.
• If Fixed Focal is toggled off, your focal point will move the same distance as your
eye point while navigating.
• If both Fixed Focal and Fixed Dist. are toggled on, you will navigate spherically
around a fixed focal point.
• You cannot toggle off Fixed Focal and Fixed Dist. at the same time.
• If Pan View is toggled on, the walk-through controls are disabled. This means you
can pan and zoom your perspective view as if it were a two-dimensional drawing.

Walking
Walk Dist. controls how far forward or backward the observer walks with Walk Forward and Walk
Back.

To change the walking distance:

1. Choose Walk Dist. from the Walk Through menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
Now choose Walk Foreward or Walk Back from the Walk Through menu. Walk Foreward makes it
look as if the observer has stepped toward the model by a distance equal to the walk distance by
shifting both the eye point and the view center forward along the line of sight. Walk Back makes it
look as if the observer has stepped away from the model by a distance equal to the walk distance
by shifting both the eye point and the view center backwards along the line of sight.

Turning
Turn Angle controls how far the observer will turn with Turn Left and Turn Right.

To change the turning distance:

1. Choose Turn Angle from the Walk Through menu. A list of angles appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
498 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
Choose Turn Right or Turn Left from the Walk Through menu. Turn Right turns the observer’s
cone of vision to the right (clockwise) by an angle equal to the Turn Angle. Turn Left turns the
observer’s cone of vision to the left (counterclockwise) by an angle equal to the Turn Angle.

Stepping
Step Dist. sets the step distance used with Step Up, Step Down, Step Left and Step Right.

To change the stepping distance:

1. Choose Step Dist. from the Walk Through menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a step distance and press (Enter).
Step Up moves both the observer’s eye point and the view center upward, away from the ground
plane. Step Dist. controls the distance that the observer’s eye point is elevated. With StepDown,
both the observer’s eye point and the view center move downward, toward the ground plane. Step
Dist. controls the distance that the observer’s eye point is lowered.
Step Left shifts the view to the right, as if the observer took a step to the left. Technically, this
option causes both the observer’s eye point and view center to move to the left by a distance equal
to the Step Dist. In this context, left means the observer’s left, facing toward the view center. Step
Right shifts the view to the left, as if the observer took a step to the right by causing both the
observer’s eye point and view center to move to the right by a distance equal to the Step Dist. In
this context, right means the observer’s right, facing toward the view center.

Looking
Look Angle sets the angle that the line of sight changes using Look Up or Look Down.

To set the rotation angle of the observer’s line of sight:

1. Choose Look Angle from the Walk Through menu. A list of values appears.
2. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
Look Up changes the view to simulate looking up, away from the ground plane. The eye point
remains fixed while the view center moves up, away from the ground plane by an angle equal to
the Look Angle.
Look Down changes the view to simulate looking down, toward the ground plane. The eye point
remains fixed while the view center moves down, toward the ground plane by an angle equal to
the Look Angle.

Saving a View

To add the current perspective view to the list of saved views:

1. Choose Add View from the Walk Through menu.
2. Type the name of the new view (up to eight characters) and press (Enter). The view is
added to the list of saved views.
 USING THE O2C-BASED OBJECT VIEWER | 499
Using the o2c-based Object Viewer
The Object Viewer lets you see your model and enhance the image by controlling the rendered
colors and textures.
Hint: You can set interior (or positional) light sources by using the lights you named in the 3D
Shader menu.

To use the Object Viewer:

1. Select Object Viewer from the View pull-down menu. The o2c-based Object Viewer
window appears.

Figure 25.18: The Object Viewer

2. Use the toolbar icons to control the view:

• Sun – toggles sunlight on and off
• Ambient lights 1, 2, and 3 – toggles ambient lighting on and off
• Lamp – toggles interior lighting on and off
• Sun/moon – switches between day and night
• Parallel/perspective – switches between views
• Clockwise rotation – hold down to move around the Z axis
500 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
• Counter clockwise rotation – hold down to move around the Z axis
• Decrease field of view
• Increase field of view
• Plan view
• Elevation views – left, right, front, and back
• Isometric view
• Oblique or axonometric view
3. Depress and hold the left mouse button while you move the cursor to dynamically adjust
the view.
4. Depress and hold the right mouse button while you draw the cursor toward you or away
from you to zoom in and out. Alternatively, use the + and – buttons at the bottom right
corner of the Object Viewer to zoom in (+) and out (-).
5. Right-click to open the o2c pop-up menu. From here, you can further control the view or
save it to a file.
• Show all - makes the entire model fit in the screen. Or click on the “a” button at the
junction of the scroll bars.
When DataCAD calculates the extents of the model for the Object Viewer, it takes into
account the position of each light source you defined in the 3D Shader menu. If one of
these lights is far away from the model center, the model will be small and will not appear
to rotate around its center. To correct this problem, either turn off the lights in the 3D
Shader menu or position them closer to the center of your model.

Figure 25.19: The Save bitmap dialog box

• Start raytrace - renders the model. Or click on the R button at the right edge of the
horizontal scroll bar of the Object Viewer to raytrace the model.
 Save image - creates a permanent high-quality rendering. The Save bitmap dialog
RENDERING SETTINGS | 501
•
box lets you control the quality of the file while you save the view as a bitmap
image. In the Quality section, high produces the best results, but it takes longer to
process. Set the Width in pixels (try 320 for thumbnails, 640 for presentations, and
1024 for printing); DataCAD uses the width to automatically calculate the Height in
pixels. Check Raytrace if you want shadows and reflections in your saved image;
however, this takes a long time to process. Type the File name and select the
appropriate folder (shown in the Save in box). Click on the Save button when you
are finished and want to return to the Object Viewer.

Figure 25.20: The Background dialog box

• Background – controls what is behind the model in the Object Viewer. Use Load image to
access lists of available bitmap files; use Select color to choose from the Color dialog
box. If you selected Load image, you can also check “Tiled background picture” to put
many copies of the bitmap behind your model and further control the X and Y offset. If
you clicked Select color, all options except Monochrome are unavailable (greyed).
6. Exit the Object Viewer by clicking on the X in the right corner of the title bar.

Rendering Settings
Selecting Rendering Settings from the View pull-down menu lets you define materials for
rendering and assign them to specific colors in the DataCAD palette. Mapping entity colors to
material definitions controls rendered output. The material settings for a given drawing are stored
in a .DMF (DataCAD Material File) file. You can save custom material files for use in other
drawings. Also, you can save individual material definitions and load them one at a time. These
definitions are compatible with other o2c-based programs such as DCvis, ArCon, and o2c
Composer.
DataCAD lets you choose from a standard set of matte, glossy, and glass materials. By adjusting
the various settings and experimenting a bit, you'll be able create your own materials to produce
artistic, photo-realistic renderings of DataCAD models.

To use the Rendering Settings by Layer dialog box:

1. Access material settings for a given color by using (Ctrl)-right-click on an entity in the
DataCAD Drawing Window. A small pop-up menu appears. For this example, just the
STUCCO layer is active.
502 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL
2. Select Rendering Settings from the pop-up menu. This opens the Rendering Settings by
Layer dialog box that lets you precisely define the materials. The name of the active
material file appears in the title of the Layer portion of the dialog box.
3. Look at the Preview window to see the results of your choices in the rest of this dialog
box.

Figure 25.21: The decisions you make affect the Preview model.

4. Use the slider bars, input boxes, and check boxes in the various sections of the dialog box
to define the material.
• Layer – click on Color in the Layer portion and click on the rectangle to make your
selection from the Color Palette. Alternatively, click on the arrows on the right and
left sides of the color box to scroll through options in the palette. All entities that
have the same color will also have the same material properties. The first 15 colors
shown on the ColorPalette are most frequently used in DataCAD and are the most
popular; however, you can define up to 255 unique materials per drawing by using
custom colors (beyond yellow). If you click on Layer, select the layer name from the
drop-down list.
 RENDERING SETTINGS | 503
• Rendered Color – click on the rectangle to make your selection from the Color
Palette. Use the slider bars to further determine the proportion of diffuse and ambient
lighting properties of materials. A high diffuse proportion will cause the light from
defined light sources to reflect strongly into various nonspecific directions. Use low
diffuse values to simulate light-absorbing materials such as velvet. If the ambient
proportion is too high, the object will appear relatively pale (like plastic) because it
will very strongly reflect the environment’s light. Rendered Color is the material
color for all entities that are the current Layer Color. For example, if you choose
white in the Layer Color section, the Rendered Color you select for all white entities
could be Dahlia Purple or any other color in the Color Palette, including a custom-
mixed color that you define with the Color Picker dialog box.
• Reflection - defines both the color and the proportional degree for reflections. In
principle, the color defines the highlight on the objects. Higher reflection proportion
values simulate glossy surfaces, such as chrome.
• Highlight Size – determines the size of reflected highlights from light sources.
Adjustments to this value can only be seen in the o2c Player when using the raytrace
option; they are not shown in the Preview window. You must use a relatively high
reflective proportion to see the effect of changing this value. In principle, this value
measures the intensity of a highlight as a function of the angle. The higher the value
is, the smaller the highlight becomes. For matte-shining materials (such as
unpolished gold or anodized aluminum), use small values around 3; for high gloss
materials (such as polished gold or polished plastic), use large values.
• Opacity – the top slider bar determines the degree to which the material is opaque or
transparent. A value of 50% means that when examining an object with this material,
50% of the color behind the object shows through it and 50% of the object’s color is
visible. The bottom slider bar affects how refractive (or hard) the transparent material
is. To simulate glass, use a refractive index of 12; to simulate something like bubbles
in water, use a refractive index smaller than 10. To see how your selections affect the
material, you have to raytrace the object in the Preview window.
• Material File – mutually exclusive buttons apply preset Matte, Glossy, or Glass
properties to the material. When you first work with the color map, you may rely on
the presets; however, you will soon feel more confident about applying your own
definitions via the slider bars and other options in this dialog box to produce photo
realistic materials. These presets affect the slider bars throughout the dialog box that
keep the current rendered color, but change its reflective properties. Load lets you
select an o2c color that will appear in the rectangle in the Rendered Color section;
Save As lets you name and store your material definitions.
When simulating real-world elements using computer graphics, the surface properties of a
material are based on various parameters. The level of realism depends partly on how the
parameters are set. The o2c Player uses a standard computer material model known as
PHIGS PLUS. This model simulates real-world material properties, but real-time renderers
such as the o2c Player have limitations on how accurately they can be depicted in final
rendered output.
504 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL

The way an object (or surface) appears is affected by both the material properties and the
lighting (including all sources which light the object). A rendered material is made up of a
layering of different lighting properties (the diffuse portion simulates matte properties; the
ambient portion reflects light in the environment; the reflective portion simulates polished
material properties; and the opacity portion simulates transparent material properties.

By using bitmaps, you can also apply textures to enhance the material definition to
simulate real-world surfaces such as carpet, tile, wallpaper, and brick.The preview window
lets you see how a material will look before you apply it to your model.

Figure 25.22: The Load Material File dialog box

• Miscellaneous – check the boxes that apply: self-illuminate, render backface, and
allow smoothing. Select self-illuminate to see the material even without lights. This
causes an object to simulate a light source, but it will not illuminate its
surroundings. This material setting is ideal for neon and other low-level lighting that
is normally used in dark settings. Render backface forces the o2c Player to render
both sides of a surface. By default, render backface is on for all colors. Smoothing
blends a material across adjacent, noncoplanar polygons (such as a mesh surface).
Otherwise, each polygon will be rendered independently, revealing the creases
between adjacent polygons. This option is especially useful for rendering reflective
and transparent objects that are made up of many polygons (such as a sphere or a
cylinder). Without this option, shiny objects will reflect a fragmented view of the
surrounding environment.
• Texture – controls the interaction of textures and the defined material. Check Apply
Texture to activate other options. Experiment until you get the results you want in the
Preview window.
In some cases, you may want to mix the colors of the texture with the diffuse
color. This makes it possible to tint (or lighten or darken) a texture without
modifying the original bitmap.
 RENDERING SETTINGS | 505
If you check Apply texture as reflection map, textures appear to be reflected from,
rather than mapped onto, a given surface. This simulates optimum mirror images,
where the object’s texture, not its environment, is reflected in the object.

Figure 25.23: Select the background image for the o2c viewer.

• Rendering Settings File – affects your settings, saved in a .DMF (DataCAD Material
File). The Load button lets you access material assignments you created for other
models. Save As lets you give the current definition a unique name.
• Preview Object – lets you apply your material definitions to different shapes: sphere,
cube, cylinder, or teapot. One object may give you a better idea of how the material
definition will affect the entities in your drawing than another. For example, if you
wanted a velvety material, you probably would steer away from displaying it on the
teapot.
• Background – controls the color behind the image. This is a global setting,
independent from the material file. When you click on the rectangle, the Color
Palette appears so that you can select a color.
506 | CHAPTER 25: VIEWING YOUR MODEL

Figure 25.24: Select the background image for the object viewer.

• Preview window – lets you see your material assignments. This is a mini o2c object
viewer. Click on “R” to raytrace the material. Some material settings can only be
seen in a raytraced view. Although the default object is a sphere, you could change
this to a cube, cylinder, or teapot to give you a better idea of how the material will
look in your model.
5. Click on OK when you are satisfied with all the settings in the color mapping dialog box.
6. Select Object Viewer from the View menu. The Object Viewer appears. The decisions
that affect the STUCCO layer (see Figure 25.21) appear in the Object Viewer. If you are
unhappy with the way the material looks, you can return to step 1 and go through the
process again.
 RENDERING SETTINGS | 507

Figure 25.25: The results of decisions shown in Figure 25.22

 Framing Your Model
FrameIt is a utility that helps you frame 3D floors, walls,
and roofs. The RoofIt macro is used to create the outer
26
In this chapter:
portion of the 3D roof.
Framing floors
Framing walls
Framing roofs
Saving and using
framing settings
510 | CHAPTER 26: FRAMING YOUR MODEL

Framing Floors
Framing is easy when you use the FrameIt macro from your Toolbox pull-down menu. If the
FrameIt macro is not available, select Configure from the Toolbox pull-down menu and add it to
your list of active macros. For more information on adding FrameIt to your list, go to
“Customizing the Macros Menu” and “Customizing DataCAD” in “The Drawing Board” chapter.

To frame a floor:
1. Choose Floors from the FrameIt menu.
2. Verify settings for Plate, Joist, and SubFloor. See “Sill Plate, Joist, and Sub-Floor
Settings” in this chapter for more information.
3. Choose either Center or Sides to define the floor boundary from the center line of the
vertical member or from one side of the floor to the other.
4. Define the floor to frame by defining a floor boundary or by choosing Select and
selecting an existing floor boundary. To define the floor boundary, object snap to each
point of the floor boundary, tracing the floor. If you make a mistake, use the Backup
button to erase the last point you selected.
5. Choose Opening to define floor openings, such as chimneys or stairs. Select the first
point of the floor opening, move the mouse to stretch the rubber band box around the
opening, and select the second point of the rubber band box to define the floor opening.
6. Choose Beam to define beam style and location. Set the following options as necessary:
Single Models single beams
Double Models double beams
Custom Customizes the number of entities that make up a beam
Color Assigns a beam color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.
Size Sets a beam size (choose Change to change a standard lumber size in the menu)
Flush Positions the top of the beam flush or equal to the top of the joist
Below Positions the top of the beam equal to the bottom of the joist
Change Changes the current framing member attributes (those attributes set when you
selected or defined the floor boundary)
FileI/O Accesses file options to save the current framing settings in a file, load saved
settings, or delete or rename framing settings files
7. Make any changes before choosing Build. Choose Edit or Change to access DataCAD
editing options (including Move, Copy, Rotate, Mirror, Stretch, Enlarge, Erase, and
Layers) or to globally change any floor member attributes. If you choose Edit or Change,
you must choose Build again for those changes to take effect.
8. Save floor settings to a file by choosing Save File from the FileI/O menu.
9. Choose Build and select the boundary on which to generate a floor system. Build
generates a framing system based on the settings you defined above. See the “The
Drawing Board” chapter for more information on using the selection menu to choose the
boundary to frame.
Use the following toggles before you select the boundary to frame for added control over
the Build process:
 FRAMING WALLS | 511
SchemLyr Builds framing members on the schematic layer
ActvLyr Builds framing members on the active layer
FlrsOnly Builds only floors with the current settings; otherwise, DataCAD builds all
members; only available in the Floors/Build menu
WalsOnly Builds only walls with the current settings; otherwise, DataCAD builds all members;
only available in the Walls/Build menu
RfsOnly Build only roofs with the current settings; otherwise, DataCAD builds all members;
only available in the Roofs/Build menu
10. Finish framing. When framing is complete, you have access to the following DataCAD
options: 3D Views, Hide, and Layers. See the “Viewing Your Model” and “Before You
Draw” chapters for more information on 3D Views, Hide, and Layers.
11. Choose Exit to return to the Floors menu.

Sill Plate, Joist, and Subfloor Settings

Use Plate to set the following sill plate options:
DoPlate Models sill plates
Single Models single plates
Double Models double plates
Custom Customizes the number of entities that make up the plate
Color Assigns a plate color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.
Size Sets a plate size; choose Change to change a standard lumber size in the menu

Use Joist to set the following joist options:

DoJoist Models the joists
Size Assigns a joist size, or defines a custom joist size; choose Change to change a standard lumber
size in the menu
Spacing Assigns joist spacing (measure spacing from the center line of one joist to the center line of
the next joist)
Color Assigns a joist color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.
Angle Changes the angle in which your joist member will be modeled within the schematic

Use SubFloor to set the following subfloor options:

DoSubflr Models the subflooring
Single Models single layer subfloors
Double Models double layer subfloors
Custom Customizes the number of entities that make up a subfloor
Color Assigns a subfloor color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.
Thickness Sets the subfloor thickness for each layer

Framing Walls
To frame a wall:
1. Choose Walls from the FrameIt menu.
2. Verify the settings for WallHght, Plate, and Stud. See “Wall Height, Plate, and Stud
Settings” later in this chapter for more information.
512 | CHAPTER 26: FRAMING YOUR MODEL
3. Choose either Center or Sides to define the wall boundary from the center line of the
vertical member or from one side of the wall to the other.
4. Choose either Exterior or Interior. Use Exterior to create outside wall systems; DataCAD
assumes this will be a closed boundary. Use Interior to create inside wall systems;
DataCAD toggles Closed off and you are drawing a single or string-line wall that does
not close itself.
5. Define the wall to frame by defining a wall boundary or by choosing Select and selecting
an existing floor or wall boundary. If defining the wall by the boundary, object snap to the
first point of the wall boundary to frame and continue tracing the boundary from that
point. If you make a mistake, use the Backup button to erase the last point you selected.
6. Choose Opening to define wall openings. Choose either Window or Door (for Exterior)
or PassThru or Door (for Interior). If you choose Window or PassThru, verify the settings
for Sill Height, HeadHght, and HeadStyl. For Door, define only HeadHght and HeadStyl.
Window Defines window openings in the wall
Door Defines door openings in the wall
SillHght Defines the sill height; available only when Window is toggled on
HeadHght Defines the header height of the door
HeadStyl Defines the header style:
Cripple Member with smaller studs that run from the top of the header to the bottom of the
lower top plate; maintains stud spacing
Boxed Solid member that runs from the top of the header to the bottom of lower top plate
Change Changes any opening attributes
FileI/O Accesses file options to save the current framing settings in a file, load saved
settings, or delete or rename framing settings files
7. Make any changes before choosing Build. Choose Edit or Change to access DataCAD
editing options, including Move, Copy, Rotate, Mirror, Stretch, Enlarge, Erase, and
Layers, or to globally change any wall member attributes. If you choose Edit or Change,
you must choose Build again for those changes to take effect.
8. Save wall settings to a file by choosing Save File from the FileI/O menu.
9. Choose Build and select the boundary on which to generate a wall system. Build
generates a framing system based on the settings you defined above. See “The Drawing
Board” chapter for more information on using the selection menu to choose the boundary
to frame.
Use the following toggles before you select the boundary to frame for added control over
the Build process:
SchemLyr Builds framing members on the schematic layer
ActvLyr Builds framing members on the active layer
FlrsOnly Builds only floors with the current settings; otherwise, DataCAD builds all
members; only available in the Floors/Build menu
WalsOnly Builds only walls with the current settings; otherwise, DataCAD builds all members;
only available in the Walls/Build menu
RfsOnly Build only roofs with the current settings; otherwise, DataCAD builds all members;
only available in the Roofs/Build menu
10. Choose Exit when framing is complete to return to the Walls menu.
 FRAMING ROOFS | 513
Wall Height, Plate, and Stud Settings
Use WallHght to set wall height options. Choose a wall height from the list or type a wall height
and press (Enter).
Use Plate to set the following top and bottom plate options:
DoTop Models top plates
Single Models single top plates
Double Models double top plates
Custom Customizes the number of entities that make up a top plate
Color Assigns a top plate color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.
DoBottom Models bottom plates
Single Models single bottom plates
Double Models double bottom plates
Custom Customizes the number of entities that make up a bottom plate
Color Assigns a bottom plate color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.
Use Stud to set vertical framing member options:
DoStud Models the vertical stud member
Size Assigns a stud size or defines a custom stud size
Spacing Assigns stud spacing (measure spacing from the center line of one stud to the center line of the
next stud)
Color Assigns a stud color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.

Framing Roofs
Use Roof Framing to create three-dimensional roof framing systems. You can frame the following
roof types: Shed, Gable, Hip, and Gambrel. See “3D Roofs” later in this chapter for more
information on roof types

To frame a roof:
1. Choose Roofs from the FrameIt menu.
2. Choose the roof type to frame: Shed, Gable, Hip, or Gambrel.
3. Choose Settings to set the options for roof settings, including pitch, purlin height, rafters,
sheathing, and overhang. See “Settings” later in this section for more information.
4. Define the roof by defining a roof boundary or by choosing Select and selecting an
existing wall or roof boundary. To define the roof with an existing boundary, choose that
boundary and continue with step 6. To define the roof by a boundary, object snap to the
first and second corners of the roof boundary to define the length of the roof parallel to
the ridge. Make sure that you define the roof boundary at a Z-base set to the plate height
of the wall.
The following options appear on the menu:
Closed Models a closed roof boundary
Backup Backs up one roof corner so you can enter a new position
Cancel Returns you to the FrameIt menu without defining a roof perimeter
Close/Exit Stops defining the roof perimeter
514 | CHAPTER 26: FRAMING YOUR MODEL
5. Choose the third corner of the roof perimeter to define the width of the roof perpendicular
to the ridge if you define the roof by the boundary. The roof boundary is calculated and
closed.
6. Choose Opening to define roof openings, such as chimneys. Select the first point of the
roof opening, move the mouse to stretch the rubber band box around the opening, and
select the second point of the rubber band box to define the roof opening.
7. Make any changes before choosing Build. Choose Edit or Change to access DataCAD
editing options (including Move, Copy, Rotate, Mirror, Stretch, Enlarge, Erase, and
Layers) or to globally change any roof framing member attributes. If you choose Edit or
Change, you must choose Build again for those changes to take effect.
8. Save roof settings to a file by choosing Save File from the FileI/O menu.
9. Choose Build and select the boundary on which to generate a roof system. Build
generates a framing system based on the settings you defined above. When you define a
roof boundary, FrameIt bases the plate height on the current Z-Base setting. When you
use Select to select an existing wall boundary, FrameIt uses the plate height of the wall.
FrameIt always centers ridge boards when framing roofs
10. Choose Exit when framing is complete to return to the Roofs menu.

Settings
Use Pitch to set a pitch for Shed, Gable, and Hip roofs. Pitch is defined by rise and run; choose a
pitch from the menu, or choose Custom, type a pitch, and press (Enter). Use UprPitch and
LwrPitch to set the pitch for the upper and lower sections, respectively, of a Gambrel roof.
Use MidRdgHt to set the height for purlins for Gambrel roofs. Choose a height from the menu, or
choose Custom, type a height, and press (Enter).
Use Rafters to set the following rafter options:
DoRafter Models rafters; models collar ties every four feet
Size Sets a rafter size from the list, or defines a custom rafter size
Spacing Sets rafter spacing or defines custom rafter spacing (measure spacing from the center line of
one rafter to the center line of the next rafter)
Color Sets a ridge board and rafter color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for
more information about how to choose a color.
EaveSqr Models fascia square to the angle of the rafter
EavePlmb Models fascia parallel to the wall
BrdMouth Assigns a Bird’s Mouth dimension; choose a dimension from the menu, or choose Custom,
type a dimension, and press (Enter)
Use Sheathng to set the following roof sheathing options:
DoSheath Models roof sheathing
Single Models single layer roof sheathing
Double Models double layer roof sheathing
Custom Models a custom number of roof sheathing layers
Color Assigns a roof sheathing color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more
information about how to choose a color.
Thickness Assigns the thickness of the roof sheathing material or defines a custom thickness
Use the following OverHang options to set the overhang distance. Measure OverHang from the
outside face of the sheathing to the outside face of the rafter.
 FRAMING ROOFS | 515
EaveOhng Assigns an overhang distance at the eave
RakeOhng Assigns an overhang distance on the gable end
RoofIt automates the construction of 3D roof models. You define the roof boundary and RoofIt
automatically calculates and constructs a roof based on your settings.
The standard roof types available with RoofIt are Gable, Hip, Boston, Gambrel, Mansard, and
Shed. You can also create your own customized roof shape. You can vary the pitch, overhang, and
plate height settings, and specify the type of soffit and fascia you want to model. RoofIt also lets
you join a new roof to an existing roof. You can create dormers or other complex roof shapes
using this feature. A complete roof model is composed entirely of 3D polygons. Because of this,
you can easily process the model with DataCAD’s hidden line removal feature, Hide.

Figure 26.1: Standard roof types

To create a roof model:

1. Choose RoofIt from the Toolbox menu. The following options appear:
RectRoof Constructs an orthogonal (rectangular) roof with no variation in settings; RectRoof
is the easiest way to model a rectangular roof. RectRoof and PolyRoof are mutually
exclusive; only one option will be displayed in the menu at any given time. If
RectRoof appears in the RoofIt menu, clicking on it will change it to PolyRoof,
putting DataCAD in polygonal roof drawing mode; you can begin drawing
polygonal roofs. To change back to rectangular roof drawing mode, click on the
PolyRoof option to change it to RectRoof.
PolyRoof Constructs a polygonal roof that is not orthogonal or a roof that has varied pitch,
overhang, or plate height settings
Gable Available roof type
Hip Available roof type
Boston Available roof type
Gambrel Available roof type
Mansard Available roof type
Shed Available roof type
Join Defines a Gable, Hip, or Shed roof that connects to an existing roof plane; the roof
that you join onto may be any roof type you create using RoofIt
Settings Sets roof options depending on the type of roof you’re drawing. See “Setting
Options” later in this section.
516 | CHAPTER 26: FRAMING YOUR MODEL
PlatHgt Sets different plate height values for each roof line than what’s currently set in
Settings/PlatHgt during PolyRoof creation; when PlatHgt is on, RoofIt prompts you
for the plate height of each roof; only changes with Gable and Gambrel roofs
Pitch Sets different pitch values for each roof line than what’s currently set in
Settings/Pitch during PolyRoof creation; when Pitch is on, RoofIt prompts you for
the pitch of each roof side; only changes with Gable and Gambrel roofs
Overhng Sets different overhang values for each roof line than what’s currently set in
Settings/Overhng during PolyRoof creation; when Overhng is on, RoofIt prompts
you for the overhang of each roof side; only changes with Gable, Gambrel, and Shed
roofs
Layers Shortcut to the Utility/Layers menu without exiting RoofIt. See “Layers” in the
“Before You Draw” chapter.
Hide Shortcut to the 3DEdit/Hide menu without exiting Roof It. See the “Viewing Your
Model” chapter for more information about Hide, 3D Views, and 3D Entity.
3D Views Shortcut to the 3D Views menu and look at your 3D model in different orientations
without exiting RoofIt. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter for more information
about Hide, 3D Views, and 3D Entity.
3DEntity Shortcut to the 3DEntity menu without exiting RoofIt. See the “Viewing Your
Model” chapter for more information about Hide, 3D Views, and 3D Entity.
2. Choose RectRoof or PolyRoof to define a rectangular or polygonal roof. See “Defining
the Roof Boundary” later in this chapter for more information.
3. Choose one of the six standard roof types: Gable, Hip, Boston, Gambrel, Mansard, or
Shed.
4. Choose Join if you are defining a roof to join with an existing Gable, Hip, or Shed roof
plane.
5. Choose Settings to set roof options (if you don’t need to vary any values, skip to step 6).
Choose the option to set. These options vary depending on which roof type you selected
in step 3. See “Settings Options” later in this chapter for more information
6. Choose PlatHgt, Pitch, or Overhng from the RoofIt menu if you are creating a Gable,
Gambrel, or Shed polygonal roof. This lets you change that setting for each roof edge you
draw. Once you select the first point of the roof boundary, you can’t move the control
from one parameter to another. You can only change the value of one parameter as you
define the roof boundary.
7. Define a roof boundary by entering length and width values for a rectangular roof or by
entering a series of four points for a polygonal roof. See “Defining the Roof Boundary”
later in this chapter for more information.
8. Choose the roof plane to join to when prompted if you are defining a roof to join.

Defining the Roof Boundary

The method you use to define the roof boundary depends on whether the RectRoof or PolyRoof
option appears in the RoofIt menu. (The option that appears is the type of roof you’ll draw.)

Rectangular Roofs
When you model a rectangular roof, you define the roof shape by selecting points (in a clockwise
direction) that define its length and width. This results in an orthogonal roof shape.
 FRAMING ROOFS | 517
To define a rectangular roof boundary:
1. Choose PolyRoof if RectRoof is not displayed in the RoofIt menu. Then, toggle
RectRoof on.
2. Select the first point of the roof boundary; this point is the first point of the roof length,
which runs parallel to the ridge of the roof.
3. Select the second point of roof length.
4. Select the third point of the roof boundary to define the roof width. The roof width is the
distance from one side of the building to the other; this is perpendicular to the roof length
and roof ridge. On a Shed roof, this point locates the ridge (minus the overhang).

Figure 26.2: Defining a rectangular roof boundary

Polygonal Roofs
To model a nonorthogonal roof or one with varying parameters (PlatHgt, Pitch, or Overhng), use
PolyRoof.
When you define a polygonal roof, you enter a series of four points. These points trace the edges
of the roof boundary in a clockwise direction. The first and third edges of the boundary run
parallel to the ridge; and the ridge bisects the second and fourth edges. Because the roof shape
may be either orthogonal or nonorthogonal, the edges of the roof don’t have to be parallel and
perpendicular to the ridge.

To define a polygonal roof boundary:

1. Choose RectRoof if PolyRoof is not displayed in the RoofIt menu. Then, toggle
PolyRoof on.
2. Select the first point of the roof boundary. This is the first point of the roof length.
3. Enter the appropriate value if you’re drawing a Gable, Gambrel, or Shed roof and you
toggled PlatHgt, Pitch, or OverHng on in the RoofIt menu. RoofIt applies this value to
the first edge of the roof.
4. Select the second point of the first roof edge.
5. Enter a value if you’re drawing a Gable, Gambrel, or Shed roof and you toggled Overhng
on in the RoofIt menu. RoofIt applies this value to the second edge of the roof.
518 | CHAPTER 26: FRAMING YOUR MODEL
6. Select the third point of the roof boundary. The second edge of the roof boundary is
bisected by, but not necessarily perpendicular to, the ridge. The Shed roof is an exception;
on a Shed roof, this point locates the ridge (minus the overhang).
7. Enter a value if you’re drawing a Gable, Gambrel, or Shed roof and you toggled PlatHgt,
Pitch, or OverHng on in the RoofIt menu. RoofIt applies this value to the third edge of
the roof.
8. Select the fourth point of the roof; unless you toggled OverHng on in the RoofIt menu,
the boundary closes and the roof model is constructed.
9. Enter a value if you toggled Overhng on. RoofIt applies this value to the fourth edge of
the roof. After you enter the value, the boundary closes and the roof model is constructed.

Figure 26.3: Defining an orthogonal PolyRoof boundary

Figure 26.4: Defining a nonorthogonal PolyRoof boundary

Joining Roofs
Use Join to define a Gable, Hip, or Shed roof that connects to any one existing roof plane. The
roof that you join onto may be any roof type created with RoofIt.
The following example shows how to use RectRoof to join a Hip roof; you can also use PolyRoof.
Define the roof boundary in a clockwise manner regardless of which input mode you use:
RectRoof or PolyRoof.
 FRAMING ROOFS | 519
To join two roofs:
1. Model the first roof using the steps outlined at the beginning of this section.

Figure 26.5: Defining the first boundary

Figure 26.6: First boundary defined (plan view and perspective hidden-line image)

2. Toggle Join on in the RoofIt menu. This tells RoofIt that the next roof you define will
join onto an existing roof.
3. Define the boundary of the second roof. RoofIt prompts you to select the roof plane to
join onto. When defining the joining roof, if you selected any parameters to vary, RoofIt
prompts you for values as outlined in the previous sections.

Figure 26.7: Join: Defining the second boundary

4. Select a point within the perimeter of the roof plane to join to. RoofIt highlights the roof
plane and starts the join operation. The roof you defined extends to and clips at the
selected roof plane.
520 | CHAPTER 26: FRAMING YOUR MODEL

Figure 26.8: Selecting roof plane to join

Figure 26.9: Result of join (plan view and perspective hidden-line image)

Settings Options
The options that appear in the RoofIt/Settings menu depend on the type of roof you’re drawing.
The following table illustrates which settings appear for each roof type:
Gable Hip Boston Gambrel Mansard Shed
PlatHgt X X X X X X
Pitch X X X X X X
MidRidge X X
2ndPitch X X
RoofThck X X X X X X
Overhng X X X X X X
GblOffst X
WallThck X X X X X X
Fascia X X X X X
EndWall X X X

Settings options include:

PlatHgt Sets the roof plate height; this value is an absolute Z-value and is not relative to the
current Z-base and Z-height settings
Pitch Sets the roof pitch in rise and run values (4:12, 5:12, 6:12, etc.); or enter a Custom
pitch
MidRidge Sets the purlin height on a Gambrel or Mansard roof; mid-ridge is a Z distance relative
to the current PlatHgt setting
 FRAMING ROOFS | 521
2ndPitch Sets the second pitch on a Gambrel or a Mansard roof in rise and run values (4:12,
5:12, 6:12, etc.); or enter a Custom pitch
RoofThck Sets the plate thickness of the roof
Overhng Sets the roof overhang; measure overhang in the X, Y plane, from the roof definition
boundary to the outermost point on the fascia
GblOffst Sets the gable offset on a Boston roof; this distance is measured in the X, Y plane from
the roof definition boundary to the exterior face of the gable end wall; only available
when you choose to draw a Boston roof
WallThck Sets the exterior wall thickness; controls the distance in the X, Y plane from the roof
definition boundary to the intersection of the plate and the bottom plane of the roof
Fascia Sets the width of the fascia on roofs with plumb fascia and horizontal soffits; does not
affect the roof thickness (controlled by RoofThck); fascia width cannot exceed the
plumb distance through the roof thickness; only available when SoffHorz and FaciaPlb
are toggled on
SoffHorz/SoffIncl Toggles between SoffHorz and SoffIncl to define the shape of the soffit; toggle
SoffHorz on to draw the underside of the overhang (the soffit) horizontal, or parallel to
the ground; toggle SoffIncl on to draw the soffit inclined, or parallel to the roof plane
FaciaPlb/FaciaSqr Toggles between FaciaPlb and FaciaSqr to define the shape of the fascia; toggle
FaciaPlb on to draw the outside of the overhang (the fascia) plumb, or perpendicular to
the ground; toggle FaciaSqr on to draw the fascia is square, or perpendicular to the roof
plane
EndWall Toggles the construction of end walls as part of the roof model (end walls fill in the
gaps between the plate and the underside of the roof); when you toggle EndWall on,
RoofIt prompts you to enter the color of the end walls. EndWall only appears when
you select a Gable, Boston, Gambrel, or Shed roof type. RoofIt determines the
thickness of the end wall by using WallThck.

Figure 26.10: Roof parameters

Figure 26.11: 2ndPitch and MidRidge settings

522 | CHAPTER 26: FRAMING YOUR MODEL

Figure 26.12: Gable offset

Figure 26.13: Types of soffit and fascia

Saving and Using Framing Settings

Use FileI/O to access file options:
Load File Loads a previously saved file of floor, wall, or roof framing settings
Save File Saves the current framing settings in a file
DelFile Deletes an existing file of framing settings
Rename Renames an existing file of framing settings
 Modeling Windows and
Doors
27
In this chapter:
The AEC Modeler tool offers you simplified creation of 3D
door and window modeling. You can model doors and Modeling windows
windows in plan view or in elevation view. Modeling doors
524 | CHAPTER 27: MODELING WINDOWS AND DOORS

Modeling Windows
The Windows menu in AEC_MODL macro serves as the master level for accessing all three-
dimensional window component groups. You can access window data, load and save previously
designed windows, and select or enter window components and data. All windows open outward,
away from you.

Cutting Walls
Cut Wall is a toggle used to automatically create voids in slabs or polygons for windows. It is
available in the Windows menu when InPlan is toggled on. When Cut Wall is toggled on, a Layer
Search toggle also becomes available.

Window Files
The WndwFile option is a convenient way to expand on initial template designs, tailoring the
product to your needs. The files then become additional resources for quick recall. The WndwFile
menu options include:
LoadWind Loads window settings from saved files; select or type a window filename and press (Enter);
the window appears with all previously saved settings
SaveWind Saves window settings to a file; type the filename and press (Enter)
DelWind Deletes saved window files from the hard disk. To help prevent accidental deletions, the
system prompts you for the name of the file you want to delete. Select the file you want to
delete and press (Enter). Choose Yes to delete the window file; otherwise choose No.
RenWind Renames existing files; select a file to rename, type a new filename of up to eight characters
long, and press (Enter)
CopyWind Copies the contents of an existing window file to a new file; select the file to copy from and
press (Enter), then type the file to copy to and press (Enter)
Form Displays a window data form. To save Form settings, press (Esc)
Window Forms
With the WndwForm option, you can view the settings for the current window. The design form
offers a comprehensive view of the window parameters on one screen. These window parameters
are divided into ten major groups.

Saving Windows as Symbols

Use the Template option to create and save windows as symbols, developing a library of window
symbols that you can add quickly to new projects. See the “Symbols, Images, and Objects”
chapter for more information on templates and symbols.
This Template option is a shortcut to the Templates menu.

Window Height and Wall Thickness

You can set the head height and sill height of a window with the Head Hgt and Sill Hgt options, as
well as use the Wall Thk option to change the wall thickness. The Head Hgt and Sill Hgt options
only appear when In Plan is toggled on, while Wall Thk is only available when In Elev is toggled
on. When you choose Head Hgt, sill Hgt, or Wall Thk, a list of values appears. Choose or type a
new value and press (Enter). The Head Hgt and Sill Hgt settings are relative to Z-base.
Window Types MODELING WINDOWS | 525

The UnitType menu displays available window types. Hinged window types open outward, away
from the designer. Sliding windows, when viewed from the interior design position, have a fixed
sash on the right and a movable sash on the left.
Choose from the following window types:
Fixed Windows with fixed panes of glass
Casement Casement windows
Awning Awning windows, hinged at the top
Hopper Hopper windows, hinged at the bottom
DblHung Double-hung windows
Sliding Sliding windows
% open Determines the amount that the window appears open in the model, with 0% being fully
closed and 100% being fully open
Window Casings
The Casing option controls the casing or exterior window group. You can set any of the following
window casing options:
AtHead Models casing elements at the window header
Width Sets the casing width at the window header, the window jamb, and the sill across the window
plane; choose the Width option under AtHead, AtJamb, or AtSill, and then choose or type a
width and press (Enter)
Thickness Sets the casing thickness at the window header, the window jamb, and below the sill; choose
or type a thickness and press (Enter)
Extensn Sets the extension length past the outside edge of the vertical casing components (jamb casing)
and past the outside edge of the vertical jamb casing component to the sill. Choose or type an
extension length and press (Enter). For any extension, the measurement is always 0 when the
outside edge of the vertical casing and the extension end are aligned. Positive numbers
indicate an extension; negative numbers indicate a setback.
AtJamb Models the casing element at the jamb (Width and Thickness appear again below AtJamb)
AtSill Models the casing elements below the sill. (Width, Thickness and Extensn appear again below
AtSill)

Figure 27.1: Window casing

Window Trim
Use Trim to control the trim or interior window component group. You can vary elements, such as
the trim apron, according to aesthetic preference or design requirements:
526 | CHAPTER 27: MODELING WINDOWS AND DOORS
AtHead Models trim elements at the window header
Width Sets the trim width at the window jamb, across the window jamb; choose or type a value and
press (Enter)
Thickness Sets the trim thickness at the window jamb and the window sill; choose or type a value and
press (Enter)
Extensn Sets the trim extension length past the outside edge of the vertical jamb trim components
(jamb casing) or past the outside edge of the vertical jamb casing component of the sill;
choose or type a value and press (Enter). For any extension, the measurement is always 0
when the outside edge of the vertical casing and the extension end are aligned. Positive
numbers indicate an extension; negative numbers indicate a setback.
AtJamb Models trim elements at the jamb (Width and Thickness appear again below AtJamb)
AtSill Models trim elements at the sill (Width, Thickness and Extensn appear again below AtSill)

Figure 27.2: Window trim

Window Headers
The Head option lets you define the window header, or top of the frame. This area can become
exceedingly detailed in a model rendering, with the inclusion of its structural and aesthetic
elements in one master group. You can individually set the following components to provide a
clearer view:
Do Head Models the header component
HeadWdth Sets the header width. Measure through the wall, from the inner surface of the wall, outward.
This option appears when WalWdth is off. When you choose HeadWdth, a list of header width
values appears. Choose or type a header width and press (Enter).
Head Thk Sets the window header thickness. Measure from top, the wall opening, to bottom. When you
choose Head Thk, a list of header thickness values appears. Choose or type a header thickness
and press (Enter).
WalWdth Calculates the header width equal to the thickness of the wall. When WalWdth is off, the width
of the head is controlled by the header width setting.
 MODELING WINDOWS | 527

Figure 27.3: Window header

Window Jambs
Use the following Jamb options to define the window jamb:
Do Jamb Models jamb components
Jamb Width Sets the jamb width. Measure through the wall from the inner surface of the wall, outward.
This option appears when WalWdth is off. Choose Jamb Width, and then choose or type a
jamb width and press (Enter).
Jamb Thk Sets the jamb thickness. Measure from the void edge, or wall opening, inward toward the
window center along the wall plane. Choose Jamb Thk, and then choose or type a jamb
thickness and press (Enter).
WalWdth Sets the wall width. When this toggle is off, the width of the jamb is controlled by Jamb
Width.

Figure 27.4: Window jamb

Window Sills
Sill lets you define the window sill. The sill is not broken down into stool (interior) and finish
(exterior) sill components. Also, the sill horns are proportionate and do not carry different lengths
on the interior and exterior extensions.
Do Sill Models the sill
Thickness Sets the sill thickness from the bottom of the window opening, upward; choose Thickness, and
then choose or type a sill thickness and press (Enter)
In Extn Sets the inside sill extension away from the plane of the wall toward the center of the room;
choose In Extn, and then choose or type an inside sill thickness and press (Enter)
528 | CHAPTER 27: MODELING WINDOWS AND DOORS
Out Extn Sets the outside sill extension away from the plane of the wall outward; choose Out Extn, and
then choose or type an outside sill extension and press (Enter)
SideExtn Sets the inside and outside (sill horn) extensions from the sides of the window opening,
outward, along the plane of the wall; choose SideExtn, and then choose or type a side
extension and press (Enter)

Figure 27.5: Window sill

Window Sashes
Sash defines the window sash assembly. The sash is the frame that holds the muntins and glass;
without it, the muntins and glass would be suspended in 3D space. Single pane or double
thermopane windows, while not having muntins, must have Centred toggled on to function within
the confines of the wall plane.
Do Sash Models the sash components; when Do Sash is off, muntins and glass are not added to the
drawing even if DoMuntn and DoGlass are on
SashWdth Sets the sash width for all components (top and bottom rails and stiles); choose SashWdth, and
then choose or type a sash width and press (Enter)
SashThk Sets the sash thickness for all sash components; choose SashThk, and then choose or type a
sash thickness and press (Enter)
Centred Centers a sash within the window frame. Centred and Offset are mutually exclusive; only one
can be toggled on at any given time
Offset Determines the sash offset placement from the inside of the window jamb. The distance is
from the interior surface of the wall to the interior surface of the sash; choose Offset, and then
choose or type a sash offset and press (Enter)
Muntins
Use Muntins to define and place window pane dividers within the sash assemblies. You can also
set the number of window panes and their placement.
DoMuntn Models muntins, or window pane dividers
MuntWdth Sets the muntin width along the plane of the wall; the width applies equally to vertical and
horizontal muntins; choose MuntWdth, and then choose or type a muntin width and press
(Enter)
MuntThk Sets the muntin thickness, which is measured through the window; choose MuntThk, and then
choose or type a muntin thickness and press (Enter)
PaneHorz Sets the number of panes per window horizontally; choose PaneHorz, and then choose or type
a value and press (Enter). PaneHorz and PaneVert are also available in the Glass menu. They
are the same settings, so when you change either option in the Muntins menu, the new values
are also displayed for the PaneHorz and PaneVert options in the Glass menu.
PaneVert Sets the number of panes per window vertically; choose PaneVert, and then choose or type a
value and press (Enter)
Centred Centers a muntin within the sash; Centred and Offset are mutually exclusive; only oneDOORS
MODELING can be | 529

toggled on at any given time

Offset Sets the offset placement of the muntins from the interior surface of the sash to the interior
surface of the muntins; choose Offset, and then choose or type a muntin offset and press
(Enter); Centred and Offset are mutually exclusive; only one can be toggled on at any given
time
FullEdg Sets a full-edge muntin at the window sash
HalfEdg Sets a half-edge muntin at the window
No Edg Sets a no-edge muntin at the window sash
Slabs Constructs muntins as slabs; when Slabs is toggled off, muntins are constructed as 3D lines
Glass
Use Glass to define the number of glass panes horizontally and vertically. It also sets the glass
thickness for the window panes in the model. Since glass is represented as a slab or solid object, it
is often left out of a model so that a hidden line removal can be performed as if the glass were
transparent.
DoGlass Models window glass in the window panes
Glass Thk. Sets the glass thickness; choose Glass Thk., and then choose or type a glass thickness and
press (Enter)
PaneHorz Sets the number of horizontal panes per window; choose PaneHorz, and then choose or type a
value and press (Enter). PaneHorz and PaneVert are also available in the Muntins menu. They
are the same settings, so when you change either option in the Glass menu, the new values are
also displayed for the PaneHorz and PaneVert options in the Muntins menu.
PaneVert Sets the number of vertical panes per window; choose PaneVert, and then choose or type a
value and press (Enter)
Centred Centers a window pane glass in the muntin, through the window; Centred and Offset are
mutually exclusive; only one can be toggled on at any given time
Offset Sets the offset of the glass panes from the interior surface of the muntin to the interior surface
of the glass; choose Offset, and then choose or type a glass pane offset and press (Enter);
Centred and Offset are mutually exclusive; only one can be toggled on at any given time

Modeling Doors
The Doors menu in the AEC_Modl macro lets you access door data, load or save previously
designed doors, and select or enter door components and data.

Cutting Walls
Cut Wall is a toggle used to automatically create voids in slabs or polygons for doors. It is
available in the menu when InPlan is toggled on. When Cut Wall is toggled on, a Layer Search
toggle also becomes available.

Door File
Use the DoorFile option to load, save, delete, rename, or copy door files. Choose from the
following DoorFile options:
LoadDoor Loads door parameters from saved files; choose or type a door filename and press (Enter)
SaveDoor Saves door parameters to a file; type a filename and press (Enter)
Del Door Deletes saved door files from the hard disk. To help prevent accidental deletions, the system
prompts for the filename requested. To delete a door file, select a filename and press (Enter).
Choose Yes to delete the file; otherwise choose No.
Ren Door Renames existing files; select a file to rename, type a filename of up to eight characters long,
and press (Enter)
530 | CHAPTER 27: MODELING WINDOWS AND DOORS
CopyDoor Copies the contents of an existing door file to a new file; type the name of the file to copy
Form from
Displays door(Enter),
and apress then type the filename to copy to and press (Enter)
data form

All doors are created to open inward, toward you.

Door Forms
The DoorForm menu lets you view the settings for the door on which you are currently working.
The design form offers a comprehensive view of the door parameters on one screen.
Saving 3D Doors as Symbols
Use the Template option to create and save doors as symbols, developing a library of door symbols
that you can quickly insert into new projects. For more information, see “Templates and Symbols”
in the “Drawing Elements” chapter.

Door Heights and Wall Thickness

You can set the head height and sill height of a door with the Head Hgt and Sill Hgt options, as
well as use the Wall Thk option to change the wall thickness. The Head Hgt and Sill Hgt options
are available only when In Plan is toggled on, while Wall Thk is only available when In Elev is
toggled on. When you choose one of these options, a list of values appears in the Menu Window.
Choose or type a new value and press (Enter). The Head Hgt and Sill Hgt settings are relative to
Z-base.

Door Types
UnitType displays available door types. Doors swing inward (toward you), so you should build
designs from the interior of a structure.
Choose a door type from the following options:
Single Single door, hinged
Double Double doors, hinged
Bifold Bi-fold door
2xBifld Double bi-fold doors
Sliding Sliding door
Pocket Pocket doors
% open Determines the percentage that a door appears open in the model, with 0% being fully closed
and 100% being fully open
Door Casings
Use Casing to control the casing or exterior door component group. You can set any of the
following door casing options:
At Head Models casing elements in the door header model
Width Sets the casing width at the door header, across the door plane, and at the door jamb; choose or
type a value and press (Enter)
Thickness Sets the casing thickness at the door head and at the door jamb; choose or type a value and
press (Enter)
Extensn Sets the extension length past the outside edge of the vertical casing components (jamb
casing). Choose or type a value and press (Enter). For any extension, this measurement is
always 0 when the outside edge of the vertical casing and the extension end are aligned.
Positive numbers indicate an extension; negative numbers indicate a setback.
At Jamb Models casing elements in the door jamb model (Width and Thickness appear again after this
option)
 MODELING DOORS | 531

Figure 27.6: Door casing

Door Trim
Use Trim to control the trim or interior door component group. You can vary such elements as the
trim apron, according to aesthetic preference or design requirements.
At Head Models trim elements at the door header model
Width Sets the trim width at the door header and across the door jamb
Thickness Sets the trim thickness at the door header, through the door, and at the door jamb
Extensn Sets the trim extension length past the outside edge of the vertical jamb trim components
At Jamb Models trim elements in the door jamb model (Width and Thickness appear again after
AtJamb)

Figure 27.7: Door trim

 | CHAPTER 27: MODELING WINDOWS AND DOORS
532 Door Headers
Use Header to define the door header. This area can become exceedingly detailed in a model
rendering, including its structural and aesthetic elements in one master group. With Header you
can break down the various components to provide a clearer view.
Do Head Models the door header
HeadWdth Sets the door header width. Measure through the door, from the inner surface of the door
outward. This option appears when WalWdth is off; choose HeadWdth, and then choose or
type a header width and press (Enter)
HeadThk Sets the door header thickness. Measure from top (wall opening) to bottom. When you choose
HeadThk, a list of thickness values appears. Choose or type a header thickness and press
(Enter).
WalWdth Calculates a header width equal to the wall thickness; when WalWdth is off, the width of the
header is controlled by the header width (HeadWdth) setting

Figure 27.8: Door header

Door Jambs
The Jamb menu defines the door jamb, using the following options:
Do Jamb Models jamb components
Jamb Width Sets the door jamb width (measure from the inner surface of the door, outward through the
door); available only when WalWdth is off; choose Jamb Width, and then choose or type a
jamb width and press (Enter)
Thickness Sets the door jamb thickness (measure from the void edge, or wall opening, inward toward the
door center along the wall plane); choose Thickness, and then choose or type a jamb thickness
and press (Enter)
WalWdth Sets the jamb width equal to the wall width; when WalWdth is off, the width of the jamb is
controlled by Jamb Width; choose WalWdth, and then choose or type a jamb width and press
(Enter)
 MODELING DOORS | 533

Figure 27.9: Door jamb

Door Sills
The Sill menu defines the door sill, using the following options:
Do Sill Models the sill
Thickness Sets the sill thickness from the bottom of the door opening, upward at the sill middle; choose
Thickness, and then choose or type a sill thickness and press (Enter)
EdgeThk Sets the thickness of the tapered edge; choose EdgeThk, and then choose or type an edge
thickness and press (Enter)
InExtn Sets the inside sill extension away from the plane of the door toward the center of the room;
choose InExtn, and then choose or type an extension and press (Enter)
Out Extn Sets the exterior sill extension across the door plane from the exterior wall outward; choose
Out Extn, and then choose or type an extension and press (Enter)
SideExtn Sets the exterior sill extension along the wall plane from the outside edge of the trim outward
(also known as the “sill horns”); choose SideExtn, and then choose or type an extension and
press (Enter)

Figure 27.10: Sill thickness

Door Stops
Use Stop to place and size the door stops. The stop is drawn to the exterior of the door, whether
the door is flush or offset. Door stops are not created for sliding or pocket doors, regardless of
whether Do Stop is toggled on or not.
Do Stop Models the door stop
534 | CHAPTER 27: MODELING WINDOWS AND DOORS
StopWdth Sets the stop width for all components (measure the stop width in the same direction as the
jamb width and across the wall plane); choose StopWdth, and then choose or type a stop width
and press (Enter)
Stop Thk Sets the stop thickness dimension (measure the stop thickness in the same direction as the
jamb thickness and across the wall plane); choose Stop Thk, and then choose or type a stop
thickness and press (Enter)
Door Options
The Door menu sizes, positions, and hinges a door, using the following options:
Do Door Models the door
Door Thk Sets the door thickness; choose Door Thk, and then choose or type a door thickness and press
(Enter)
HingRht Hinges doors on the right; determine the right side of the door by standing inside the structure
and looking at the door
HingLft Hinges doors on the left; determine the left side of the door by standing inside the structure
and looking at the door
Flush Sets the door flush with the outside wall
Offset Sets the offset placement of the door from the interior wall surface across the wall plane;
choose Offset, and then choose or type a value and press (Enter)
Door Knobs
Use Knob to place, size, and identify the door knob; only round door knobs are available. When
Do Door is off, you can’t create a knob regardless of the Do Knob setting.
Do Knob Models the knob
Diameter Sets the diameter of the door knob; choose Diameter, and then choose or type a door knob
diameter and press (Enter)
Extnsion Sets the knob extension out from the door; choose Extnsion, and then choose or type a knob
extension and press (Enter)
Knob Hgt Sets the height of the knob from the bottom of the door; choose Knob Hgt, and then choose or
type a knob height and press (Enter)
Offset Sets the knob offset from the door edge; choose Offset, and then choose or type a knob offset
and press (Enter)
Inside Models a knob on the door interior
Outside Models the knob on the door exterior; Outside and Inside can be toggled individually or
together
 Modeling Concrete Forms
With the Concrete tool, you can add six different types of
28
preconstucted concrete forms to your model: columns, In this chapter:
inverted tee, single tee, double tee, standard, and I-beam
forms. These forms are actually slabs and can be edited the Drawing columns
same way you’d change regular DataCAD slabs, using the Drawing inverted, single
editing options in the 3D Menus. and double tee forms

With the exception of columns, all forms are drawn based Drawing standard forms
on a defining line, which is the line connecting the two Drawing I-beam forms
points you enter that represent the two ends of the form. In
plan view, this line can define the right, left, or center of the
form and can lie at Z-base or Z-height. This line can also be
defined in the Z direction. In addition, the form’s top,
bottom, or center can intersect the defining line in the Z
direction. These options give you 18 possible positions for
every form you draw.
536 | CHAPTER 28: MODELING CONCRETE FORMS

Drawing Columns
Columns begin as rectangular boxes. You can chamfer the vertical edges of the column and add up
to four seats to the column to support the girders and beams. The location of a column is defined
by two points, at opposite corners of a box, indicating the overall dimensions of the column. The
column extends vertically from the current value of Z-base to the current value of Z-height.

To draw columns:
1. Choose Column from the Toolbox menu’s Concrete submenu. The following options
appear:
Width Sets the column width
Depth Sets the column height
Rotate Enters columns that rotate about the entry point; you are prompted for the rotation
angle of the column
LoLeft Specifies the location of the column by its lower left corner
Center Specifies the location of the column by its center point
UpRight Specifies the location of the column by its upper right corner
TopSeat/
BotSeat/
LftSeat/
RhtSeat These four options indicate the side of the column where the column seat is. You are
prompted for the height of the column seat from the current value of Z-base (when a
toggle is off, column seats are not added for that particular side)
SeatOnly Adds column seats to an existing column or multiple sets of column seats to a single
column in a multiple-story structure with monolithic concrete columns. When this
toggle is on, you can add seats to a column, but you cannot add actual columns.
SeatWdth Sets the distance from the face of the column to the outside of the column seat
SeatHght Sets the distance from the top face of the column seat to the bottom edge of the
column seat
Chamfer Chamfers the edges of the column; otherwise, the column is angular in cross section
(the size of the column seats automatically adjusts)
ChamSize Sets the size of the column chamfers
2. Choose any options you want to set. When you choose Width, Depth, Rotate, TopSeat,
BotSeat, LftSeat, RhtSeat, SeatWdth, and SeatHght a list of values appears.
3. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
4. Select a point in the Drawing Window to place the column’s location.

Drawing Inverted, Single and Double Tee Forms

Inverted tees, or girders, are typically used for supporting single or double tees across a long span
such as a parking garage bay. Because they are in the shape of an inverted T, the beam portion of a
single, double, or quad tee can be placed on a tee’s shelf. You have a variety of options for
changing the overall dimensions of the beam and for its placement in your model.

To draw an inverted tee:

1. Choose InvrtTee from the Concrete menu. The following options appear:
OvrlHght Sets the overall height of the inverted tee; choose OvrlHght and then choose or type
a value and press (Enter)
 OvrlWdth Changes the overall width of the DRAWING
inverted tee;
INVERTED,
chooseSINGLE
OvrlWdth
AND DOUBLE
and thenTEE
choose
FORMS
or | 537

type a value and press (Enter)

NtchDpth Changes the depth of the notch in the inverted tee; choose NtchDpth and then
choose or type a value and press (Enter)
BeamThck Changes the thickness of the narrow portion of the inverted tee; choose BeamThck
and then choose or type a value and press (Enter)
Left Draws the form to the left of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Center Draws the form centered about the defining line in the X-Y plane
Right Draws the form to the right of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Top Draws the form with its top aligned with the defining line
Center Draws the form with its center aligned to the defining line
Bottom Draws the form with its bottom aligned to the defining line
Z-Base Sets the defining line at the Z-base
Z-Height Sets the defining line at the Z-height
Single Places a shelf on only one side of the inverted tee (to the left of the defining line) on
the end of the first inverted tee that is entered
Double Places shelves of identical size on both sides of the inverted tee
2. Select the first end of the defining line.
3. Select a second point that is the opposite end of the defining line.
Single tee concrete forms are used as combination beams and floor slabs. In applications where the
primary function is creating floors, a double tee form is generally used. Industrial buildings and
parking structures use double tees for upper floors that must support large floor loads. A double tee
form is easier to position and place because of the stability provided by having two beam sections.
Single tees are used in special cases, where spans are exceptionally long or floor loads are
exceptionally high. In these cases, the weight and size of double tee forms can make them too
large and heavy for practical fabrication, shipment, or placement.

To draw a single tee:

1. Choose SnglTee from the Concrete menu. The following options appear:
Width Sets the overall width of the single tee form (the location of the beam flanges of the
form are automatically adjusted); choose Width and then choose or type a width and
press (Enter)
Depth Sets the overall depth of the single tee form; choose Depth and then choose or type a
depth and press (Enter)
WebThck Sets the thickness of the floor slab portion of the single tee form; choose WebThck
and then choose or type a thickness and press (Enter)
BeamThck Sets the thickness of the two support beams for the single tee slab
Left Draws the form to the left of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Center Draws the form centered about the defining line in the X-Y plane
Right Draws the form to the right of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Top Draws the form with its top aligned to the defining line
Center Draws the form with its center aligned to the defining line
Bottom Draws the form with its bottom aligned to the defining line
Z-Base Places the defining line at Z-base
Z-Hght Places the defining line at Z-height
2. Set the size of cross-sectional dimensions of the single tee form.
3. Select the first end point of the defining line.
4. Select the second end point of the defining line.
 | CHAPTER 28: MODELING CONCRETE FORMS
538 To draw a double tee:
1. Choose DbleTee from the Concrete menu. The following options appear:
Width Sets the overall width of the double tee form (the location of the beam flanges of the
form are automatically adjusted); choose Width and then choose or type a width and
press (Enter)
Depth Sets the overall depth of the double tee form; choose Depth and then choose or type
a depth and press (Enter)
WebThck Sets the thickness of the floor slab portion of the double tee form; choose WebThck
and then choose or type a thickness and press (Enter)
BeamThck Sets the thickness of the two support beams for the double tee slab; choose
BeamThck and then choose or type a thickness and press (Enter)
Left Draws the form to the left of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Center Draws the form centered about the defining line in the X-Y plane
Right Draws the form to the right of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Top Draws the form with its top aligned to the defining line
Center Draws the form with its center aligned to the defining line
Bottom Draws the form with its bottom aligned to the defining line
Z-Base Places the defining line at Z-base
Z-Hght Places the defining line at Z-height
2. Set the size of the cross-sectional dimensions of the double tee form.
3. Select the first end point of the defining line.
4. Select the second end point of the defining line.

Drawing Standard Beam Forms

Standard beams have a simple rectangular cross section, but they can also have chamfers along the
four edges of the beam. You can vary the height and width of the beam. There are 18 possible
ways to position the beam relative to a defining line that extends from the first point entered to the
second point entered.

To draw a standard beam:

1. Choose Std Beam from the Concrete menu. The following options appear:
Width Sets the beam width
Depth Sets the beam depth
Chamfer Chamfers the beam on all edges; otherwise, the beam is rectangular in the cross
section. When Chamfer is on, you must enter the chamfer size.
Left Draws the form to the left of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Center Draws the form centered about the defining line in the X-Y plane
Right Draws the form to the right of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Top Draws the form with its top aligned to the defining line
Center Draws the form with its center aligned to the defining line
Bottom Draws the form with its bottom aligned to the defining line
Z-Base Sets the beam’s defining line at the Z-base
Z-Hght Sets the beam’s defining line at the Z-height
2. Choose any options you want to set. When you choose Width, Depth, and Chamfer, a list
of values appears. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
3. Select the first end of the defining line.
4. Select the second end of the defining line.
 DRAWING I-BEAM FORMS | 539
Drawing I-Beam Forms
I-beams are similar to standard beams, except that the beam is narrower at the middle of the cross
section than it is at either end of the cross section. For a typical application, the stresses in the
concrete are much higher at the top or bottom of the beam; therefore, an I-beam can be more
economical to use than a standard rectangular beam.

To draw an I-beam:
1. Choose I-Beam from the Concrete menu. The following options appear:
Width Sets the overall horizontal measurement of the cross section of the I-beam
Depth Sets the overall vertical measurement of the cross section of the I-beam
WebThick Sets the thickness of the narrower portion of the beam independently of the overall
width of the I-beam
FlngDpth Sets the vertical dimensions of the I-beam flange independently of all other I-beam
cross section dimensions
Left Draws the form to the left of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Center Draws the form centered about the defining line in the X-Y plane
Right Draws the form to the right of the defining line in the X-Y plane
Top Draws the form with its top aligned with the defining line
Center Draws the form with its center aligned with the defining line
Bottom Draws the form with its bottom aligned with the defining line
Z-Base Sets the beam’s defining line at the Z-base
Z-Height Sets the beam’s defining line at the Z-height
2. Choose any options you want to set. When you choose Width, Depth, WebThick, or
FlngDpth, a list of values appears. Choose or type a value and press (Enter).
3. Select the first end of the defining line.
4. Select the second end of the defining line.
 Modeling Stairs
The 3D Stairs tool gives you everything you need to create
any of seven predefined 3D stairs, including single-run,
29
In this chapter:
straight-run, double-back, L-shaped, open-well, curved, and
spiral stairs. Drawing 3D stairs
Customizing stair
For each stair type, you can customize settings for treads,
settings
risers, landings, stringers, handrails, balusters, and more.
These settings can then be reviewed on screen and even Saving and using stair
saved to a stair (.STR) file that will allow you to quickly settings
load customized settings for drawing additional stairs.
542 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS

Drawing 3D Stairs
The 3DStairs macro provides everything you need to create a set of three-dimensional stairs.
3DStairs creates real stairs, not stacked slabs, making this representation of stairs more accurate
than ever before. The 3DStairs macro has these main features:
• seven predefined stair types -- single-run, straight-run, double-back, L-shaped, open-well,
curved, and spiral
• a stair calculator, which makes it easy for you to calculate the values of stair settings and then
readjust the Settings menu values
With the stair forms and other settings, you can customize the shape and placement of stair
components. There are three ways to define the settings for the type of stairs you want to model:
• use the 3DStairs/Settings menu to select options and enter individual values for the various
stair components
• use StrForm to display the settings on the screen for reference and/or customization
• save your stair settings to a file through the StrFile menu; when you want to model that
specific stair type again, you can recall the file
Because of the interactive nature of stair components, changing one option can cause other options
to change automatically. For example, when you close stringers, you can’t have tread extensions.
The sections that follow describe how to create each stair type. You can only use the Stair
Calculator for single-run stairs. See the “More About Drawing Single-Run Stairs” later in this
chapter for more information.

To draw 3D stairs:
1. Choose 3DStairs from the Toolbox pull-down menu.
2. Choose a stair type.
 DRAWING 3D STAIRS | 543

Single Straight

Double Back Spiral L-Shaped

Open Well Curved

Figure 29.1: Stair types

3. Set the options for the stair style you want. You can use either the Settings menu, the Stair
Form, or load a stair file. When you model single-run stairs, you can use the Stair
Calculator to determine the settings. See “More About Drawing Single-Run Stairs” later
in this chapter for more information.
4. Choose Begin to place the stairs. The tool automatically changes to a plan view and a
boundary box appears representing the run of stairs. When Ortho mode is on, the
boundary box does not track with the cursor. Press (O) to toggle Ortho mode off.
5. Drag the stairs by the lower outside corner of the first run to the new stair position. The
boundary box rotates as you move your cursor.
6. Rotate the stairs to the angle you want. The box rotates as you move the cursor.
7. Click to place the stairs. The stair model appears in the selected location with the settings
you chose.
8. Change the results by erasing the last group by pressing (Shift) + (<) and repeat steps 2
through 6.

More About Drawing Single-Run Stairs

The Stair Calculator (Calculat) is available only when you create single-run stairs. Use it to
calculate one of six possible values: total rise, number of risers, riser height, total run, number of
treads, or tread depth.
544 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS
Use the Stair Calculator as you would use a desktop calculator; prompts appear in the Message
toolbar at the bottom of the screen. Save the answers to automatically update the 3DStairs/Settings
menu for single-run stairs.

To use the stair calculator:

1. Choose Calculat from the 3DStairs menu.
2. Select an option from the Calculat menu to calculate and modify:
TotlRise The number of risers times the riser height; same value regardless of whether
LandTop is on or off
# Risers The total rise divided by the riser height, including the rise of the top landing;
changing the number of risers automatically changes the number of treads and vice
versa
RiserHgt The vertical distance from the top of one tread to the top of the next tread; the total
rise divided by the number of risers
TotalRun The horizontal distance from the top of the run of stairs to the bottom of the stairs;
the number of treads times the tread depth (the distance can include landing depth
for the top and bottom landings when those toggles are turned on)
# Treads The number of treads in the stair run; changing the number of treads automatically
changes the number of risers and vice versa (you can set TreadDth from this menu to
recalculate the number of treads)
TreadDth The horizontal distance from the face of one riser to the face of the next riser; the
total run divided by the number of treads (you can change # Treads in this menu)
LandBtm When LandBtm is on, the total run value includes the bottom landing depth
LandTop When LandTop is on, the total run value includes the top landing depth
Reset Resets your calculator settings to the default values
Update Overwrite the old settings in the Setting menu with new settings; saves your
calculated values
Begin Use Begin to start modeling stairs. Follow the steps in the “Using Stairs” section for
information on using Begin.
Template Shortcut to the Template menu; select a template from the menu, or type a template
name, and press (Enter)
Hide Perform hidden line removals; see “Hide” in the “3D Editing” chapter for more
information. See the “Viewing Your Model” chapter for more information on
templates, hidden line removals, and the 3D Views menu.
3D Views Shortcut to the 3D Views menu; see the “3D Viewing” chapter for more information
3. Look at the submenu that appears after some Calculat menu options. If this occurs,
choose an option to modify; if not, skip to step 5.
4. Choose a new value from the menu or type a different value. As you change the values of
a setting, the results are automatically calculated and displayed. The stair calculator only
accepts a whole number of treads or risers as a result. If the values you enter in a
calculation result in a fractional solution, the stair calculator modifies the values.
5. Modify other options by repeating steps 3 and 4.
6. Choose Update to update the settings in the 3DStairs/Settings menu.
 CUSTOMIZING STAIR SETTINGS | 545
7 Top Landing

6
Riser
Height 5
Total
Rise 4
3
2 Number of Risers = 7
1
Bottom Landing

Figure 29.2: Total rise, riser height, and number of risers

Figure 29.3: Total run, tread depth, and number of treads

For example, to calculate the number of risers through changing RiserHgt:

Initial Settings Modified Settings Stair Calculator Results
TotlRise 12’0” 12’0” 12’3”
RiserHgt 6” 7” 7”
#Risers 24 20.57 21

Because #Risers is a fractional number, the Stair Calculator automatically adjusts the TotlRise so
that the results are whole numbers. If you change TotlRise, Stair Calculator adjusts RiserHgt to
find a whole number solution.

Customizing Stair Settings

Use the Settings menu to change the settings for 3DStairs. Different options appear depending on
the stair type you selected from the 3DStairs menu.
The options in the top half of the menu are global settings that apply to all stair types. The bottom
half of the menu are stair component submenus. Each of these submenus contains the various
settings for that particular component.
When you choose any of the Settings options, a list of values appears. Choose a value or press
(Enter) to accept the given value.
 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS
546 Base Elevation
Use BaseElev to change the base elevation of a flight of stairs. Base elevation is the height, or
elevation, at which the flight of stairs begins.
Tread Depth

Top Landing
Riser
Height

Total
Rise

Base Elevation
Figure 29.4: Base Elevation

Treads
Use TrdLngth to change the tread length. The tread length is the horizontal distance from one side
of the tread to the other side. It does not include tread extension values. Any tread extensions are
added to the tread length and only apply to stairs modeled with open stringers.
Tread
Tread Length
Length

Open Stringer Closed Stringer

Figure 29.5: Tread length

Use Trd/Run1 to change the number of treads in the first run of stairs. This applies to all stair
types. The number of treads does not include the landing at the top of the run and is equal to one
less than the number of risers.
Use Trd/Run2 to change the number of treads in the second run of stairs. Trd/Run2 is only
available for straight, double-back, open-well, and L-shaped stairs.
Use Trd/Run3 to change the number of treads in the third run of stairs. Trd/Run3 is only available
for open-well stairs.

Radius of Curved Stairs

Use Radius to change the inner radius of curved and spiral stairs. Measure Radius from the exact
center point to the inside face of the stringer for curved stairs and the radius of the center pole for
spiral stairs.
 CUSTOMIZING STAIR SETTINGS | 547

Tread
Depth

Radius

Figure 29.6: Radius on a curved flight of stairs

Clockwise
Clockwise applies to all stair types except single and straight. You can place the stairs clockwise
or counterclockwise depending on your needs.

Chases
Use Chase to control the horizontal distance between the runs of a double-back flight of stairs.
This setting affects the width of the intermediate landing and the tread length.
Double Back Stairs,
Plan View

Intermediate Landing

Chase
Figure 29.7: Chase

Landings
The top, bottom, and in some cases, intermediate landings all have depth and thickness settings.
You can change the specific settings for each landing you create by using the Landing menu in the
3DStairs/Settings menu. (Changing the settings on the top landing does not affect the settings of
the bottom landing and vice versa.)
Toggle DoLndTp on to model a landing at the top of the flight of stairs; toggle DoLndBt on to
model a landing at the bottom of a flight of stairs.
548 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS
The Depth option sets the landing depth. The landing depth is the horizontal distance from the
front of the landing to the rear of the landing. When you model L-shaped or open-well stairs, you
cannot set a landing depth on the intermediate landing. The landing depth equals the width of the
run of stairs.
Thickness shows the current thickness of a landing. Measure the landing thickness vertically from
the underside to the top side. Thickness sets the top, intermediate, and bottom landing thicknesses.
For stair types that have intermediate landings, IntrLand is always on. It is available for straight,
double-back, open-well, or L-shaped stairs only. For rectangular or curved intermediate landings,
use the Rectangle/Curved option; this is available for L-shaped, double-back, or open-well stairs
only.

Double Back

Open Well

L-Shaped

Figure 29.8: Rectangular / curved intermediate landings

Use Color to set the landing color. All landings in a single flight of stairs are modeled using the
same color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information about how
to choose a color.

Risers
Use the Riser menu to set options that create risers and determine riser height, thickness, and
color. Toggle DoRiser on to model risers on your flight of stairs.
RiserHgt displays the current riser height in the Message toolbar and lets you reset it. The riser
height is the vertical distance from the top of one tread to the top of the next.
Tread Depth

Top Landing
Riser
Height

Total
Rise

Base Elevation
Figure 29.9: Riser height, total rise, and tread depth
 CUSTOMIZING STAIR SETTINGS | 549
The Thickness option displays the current riser thickness in the Message toolbar and lets you reset
it. The riser thickness is the horizontal distance from the front side of the riser to the backside of
the riser when you choose Thickness.
Use Color to set the landing color. All landings in a single flight of stairs are modeled using the
same color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information about how
to choose a color.

Treads
Use Tread to set options that model treads and determine the depth, thickness, and nosing of the
treads. Toggle DoTread on to automatically calculate and model treads on a flight of stairs.
Depth displays the current tread depth in the Message toolbar and lets you reset it. The tread depth
is the horizontal distance from the front of one tread to the front of the next tread. When you select
a spiral stair, TredDegs (tread degrees) appears in the menu in place of depth. Tread degrees
displays the inclusive angle of the treads on spiral stairs in the Message toolbar and lets you reset
it.
Thickness displays the current tread thickness in the Message toolbar and lets you reset it. The
tread thickness is the vertical distance from the top side of the tread to the bottom side of the tread.
LeftExtn and RghtExtn display the current left and right extension, respectively, of the tread in the
Message toolbar and lets you reset it. Left extension includes tread length, the distance from one
stringer to the next. LeftExtn controls the distance that the tread extends beyond the outside of the
stringer. LeftExtn is available only for stairs with open stringers.
Left Tread
Extension

Figure 29.10: Tread extension

When Nosing is toggled on, you can set the nosing length and type for treads. 3DStairs prompts
you for an overhang value when you toggle nosing on. Nosing controls the distance that the front
of the tread extends beyond the front of the riser.
To set the nosing type to square or round, click on the RndNosng/SqrNosng toggle. This Nosing
option changes between round and square just by clicking on it. If RndNosng appears in the
Nosing menu, round nosing will be drawn on the stair treads; if SqrNosng appears in the Nosing
menu, square nosing will be drawn on the stair treads.
550 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS
Square Round
Nosing Nosing

Figure 29.11: Nosing

Use Color to set the color for the treads. All treads in a flight of stairs are the same color. See
“Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information about how to choose a
color.

Stringers
Stringer allows you to set options that create stringers and determine where and what kind you
want to use. Toggle DoLeft on to model a stringer on the left side of the run of stairs, toggle DoCtr
on to model a stringer in the center of a run of stairs, or toggle DoRght on to model a stringer on
the right side of the stairs. When using DoCtr, the stringer is always modeled as an open stringer.
Use the ClosdStr/OpenStr toggle to set the stringer type to open or closed. When ClosdStr appears
in the Stringer menu, stringers will be modeled as closed; when OpenStr appears in the Stringer
menu, stringers will be modeled as open. Choose ClosdStr or OpenStr to toggle between the two
options.
Width displays the current width of the stringer in the Message toolbar and lets you reset it.
Measure the width from the top edge of the stringer to the bottom edge of the stringer.

Stringer Width,
Closed Stringer

Stringer Width,
Open Stringer

Figure 29.12: Stringer width (open or closed)

 CUSTOMIZING STAIR SETTINGS | 551
The stringer thickness is the horizontal distance from the inside of the stringer to the outside of the
same stringer. Choose Thickness from the Stringer menu and then choose or type a new thickness
value and press (Enter).
Stringer
Thickness

Figure 29.13: Stringer thickness

Use Color to set the color for the stringer. All stringers in a flight of stairs are modeled using the
same color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information about how
to choose a color.

Handrails
Toggle DoLeft on to model a handrail on the left side of the flight of stairs. Toggle DoRght on to
model a handrail on the right side of a flight of stairs. When either of these options is toggled off,
3DStairs does not model the handrails on that side of the stairs.
The Rectangle/Cylinder toggle lets you choose between modeling a cylindrical or rectangular
handrail. When you select Cylinder, the Radius and Division options appear for you to enter
settings. When you select Rectangle, the Width and Depth options appear for you to set.
The Radius/Width toggle displays the current radius or width of the handrail in the Message
toolbar, depending on whether you selected cylindrical or rectangular handrails. When you model
a cylindrical handrail, you can adjust the radius of the cylinder. When you model a rectangular
handrail, you can adjust the width of the rectangle. Measure the width from the top of the handrail
to the bottom of the handrail.

Figure 29.14: Handrail width and depth

552 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS
The Depth/Division toggle displays the current depth or number of divisions in the handrail in the
Message toolbar, depending on whether you select cylindrical or rectangular handrails. When you
model a cylindrical handrail, you can adjust the division of the cylinder, or the number of sides in
the cylinder. When you model a rectangular handrail, you can adjust the depth of the rectangle.
Measure the depth from one side of the handrail to the other side. You can use up to 36 divisions,
but the more divisions you have, the longer it takes DataCAD to redraw.
Use Height to see or reset the current height of the handrail. Measure the handrail height from the
top surface of the handrail to the top of the tread.

Handrail
Height

Figure 29. 15: Handrail height

Use Color to set the color for the handrails. All handrails in a flight of stairs are modeled using the
same color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information about how
to choose a color.

Balusters
Use the Baluster menu in the 3DStairs/Settings menu to choose what kind of balusters, if any, to
use for your stairs. Toggle DoBalus in the Baluster menu on to model balusters on your flight of
stairs.
The Baluster menu has three options for baluster placement. OnSide models balusters on the sides
of the stringers, OnTread models balusters on the treads, and OnStrng models balusters on the
center of the stringer. OnStrng is available only when you model a closed stringer.
Depending on whether you choose OnSide, OnTread, or OnStrngr for baluster placement, either
the Bal/Tred or Bal/Run1 option appears in the Baluster menu. The Bal/Tred option displays the
number of balusters per tread in the Message Window and lets you change the value. Bal/Tred is
only available when you use OnTread. The Bal/Run1 option displays the current number of
balusters in the first run of the stairs in the Message toolbar and lets you change that value.
Bal/Run1 is available only when you place the balusters on the side of the stringer (OnSide) or on
the stringer (OnStrng).
The Bal/Run2 option displays the current number of balusters in the second run of the stairs in the
Message toolbar and lets you change that value. Bal/Run2 is available only when you place the
balusters on the side of the stringer (OnSide) or on the stringer (OnStrng) on straight, double-back,
open-well, and L-shaped stairs.
The Bal/Run3 option displays the current number of balusters in the third run of the stairs in the
Message toolbar and lets you change that value. Bal/Run3 is available only when you place the
balusters on the side of the stringer (OnSide) or on the stringer (OnStrng) on open-well stairs.
 CUSTOMIZING STAIR SETTINGS | 553
Use Cylinder/Rectangle to choose between modeling a cylindrical or rectangular baluster. When
you select Cylinder, the Radius and Division options appear. When you select Rectangle, the
Width and Depth options appear.
The Radius/Width toggle displays the current radius or width of the baluster in the Message
toolbar, depending on whether you selected cylindrical or rectangular balusters. When you model
a cylindrical baluster, you can adjust the radius of the cylinder. When you model a rectangular
baluster, you can adjust the width of the rectangle. Measure the width from one side to the other of
one baluster.
The Depth/Division toggle displays the current depth or number of divisions in the baluster in the
Message toolbar, depending on whether you selected cylindrical or rectangular balusters. When
you model a cylindrical baluster, you can adjust the division of the cylinder, or the number of sides
in the cylinder. When you model a rectangular baluster, you can adjust the depth of the rectangle.
Measure the depth from the front to the back of the baluster. You can use up to 36 divisions, but
the more divisions you have, the longer it takes DataCAD to redraw

Width
Depth

Figure 29.16: Baluster width and depth

Use Symbol to model balusters as symbols. When balusters are symbols, you can replace the
balusters produced by 3DStairs with different, more detailed baluster symbols that you create.

To use custom balusters in stairs:

1. Create your detailed baluster in the DataCAD drawing window and save it as a symbol.
See “Creating and Editing Symbols” in the “Symbols, Images, and Objects” chapter for
more information
2. Choose 3DStairs from the Toolbox pull-down menu.
3. Set the baluster options as necessary.
4. Toggle Symbol on to draw the balusters as symbols.
5. Create your run of stairs.
6. Replace the existing balusters with the symbol you created in step 1 using the Replace
option in the Template menu. See “Replacing Symbols in Your Drawing” in the
“Symbols, Images, and Objects” chapter for more information.
554 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS

Balusters on Stringer Balusters on Side Balusters on Tread

Figure 29.17: Baluster placement

VertOfst shows the current vertical offset of the baluster. Vertical is the distance that the bottom
end of the balusters extends below the treads. Vertical offset appears only when you select OnSide.

Baluster
offset

Figure 29.18: Baluster vertical offset

HorzOfst shows the current horizontal offset of the baluster. When you model balusters on the
treads, measure the offset from the side edge of the tread to the middle of the baluster. HorzOfst
only appears when you select OnTread.

Baluster offset, Baluster offset,

Closed stringer Open stringer

Figure 29.19: Baluster horizontal offset

Use Color to set the color for the balusters. All balusters in a flight of stairs are modeled using the
same color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information about how
to choose a color.
 CUSTOMIZING STAIR SETTINGS | 555
Newel Posts
Use NewelPst to model newel posts on the stairs. Toggle DoNlPst on to model newel posts on a
flight of stairs. When DoNlPst is toggled off, 3DStairs models balusters in place of newel posts.

On Off
Figure 29.20: Newel posts on/off

Use Cylinder/Rectangle to choose between modeling a cylindrical or rectangular newel post.

When you select Cylinder, the Radius and Division options appear. When you select Rectangle,
the Width and Depth options appear.
The Radius/Width toggle displays the current radius or width of the newel post, depending on
whether you selected cylindrical or rectangular newel posts, in the Message toolbar. When you
model a cylindrical newel post, you can adjust the radius of the cylinder. When you model a
rectangular newel post, you can adjust the width of the rectangle. Measure width from one edge,
near a baluster, to the other edge, facing out, of the same newel post
The Depth/Division toggle displays the current depth or number of divisions in the newel post,
depending on which of the previous options you selected, in the Message toolbar. When you
model a cylindrical newel post, you can adjust the division of the cylinder, or the number of sides
in the cylinder. When you model a rectangular newel post, you can adjust the depth of the
rectangle. Measure the depth from the edge of the newel post near the handrail to the open edge.
You can use up to 36 divisions, but the more divisions you have, the longer it takes DataCAD to
redraw.

Depth Width

Figure 29.21: Newel post width and depth

Use Symbol to model newel posts as symbols. When newel posts are symbols, you can replace the
newel posts produced by 3DStairs with custom newel post symbols that you create.
556 | CHAPTER 29: MODELING STAIRS
To use custom newel posts in stairs:
1. Create your detailed newel post in the DataCAD drawing window and save it as a
symbol. See “Creating and Editing Symbols” in the “Symbols, Images, and Objects”
chapter for more information.
2. Choose 3DStairs from the Toolbox pull-down menu.
3. Set the newel post options as necessary.
4. Toggle Symbol on to draw the newel posts as symbols.
5. Create your run of stairs.
6. Replace the existing newel posts with the symbol you created in step 1 using the Replace
option in the Template menu. See “Replacing Symbols in Your Drawing” in the
“Symbols, Images, and Objects” chapter for more information.
Use Color to set the color for the newel posts. All newel posts in a flight of stairs are modeled
using the same color. See “Color Menus” in “The Drawing Board” chapter for more information
about how to choose a color.

Stair Form
To display values and settings for all stair types:
1. Choose StrForm from the 3DStairs menu.
2. Press (Tab) to move forward or (Shift) + (Tab) to move backward through each line of the
stair form.
3. Scroll through the two-page form by selecting Scroll Fwrd or Scroll Back from the menu.
4. Press (Esc) to save settings and exit the StrForm menu or choose Exit to leave the
StrForm menu without saving any changes. For settings with options, you can scroll
through them using (Spacebar).

Saving and Using Stair Settings

Use the StrFile option in the 3DStairs menu to save stair settings for future use, as well as load,
save, delete, and rename stair setting files:
LoadStr Loads a stair settings file; choose LoadStr from the StrFile menu and type the name of the file
to load
SaveStr Saves your current stair settings to a file; choose SaveStr from the StrFile menu and type the
name of the file to save
DelStr Deletes a stair settings file; choose DelStr from the StrFile menu and type the name of the file
to delete
Rename Renames an existing stair file; choose Rename from the StrFile menu, choose the file to
rename, and type a new name
StrForm Shortcut to the Stair Form menu. See “Stair Form” earlier in this chapter for more information
on using this menu.
 Appendix
This appendix contains additional information for advanced
users as well as tables defining such things as DataCAD’s In this chapter:
standard line types, hatch patterns, and keyboard shortcuts.
INI Settings
DWG/DXF translation
tables
Creating custom
toolbars
Creating line types
Standard hatch patterns
Creating keyboard
shortcuts
Standard keyboard
shortcuts
Standard fonts
Extended characters
558 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX

INI Settings
[General] Enables or disables the automatic purging
PurgeDrawingsOnExit=1 of unused drawing data upon exiting and
saving a drawing.
[General] Identifies the user, company, and serial
USER_NAME=John Doe number for the current DataCAD version.
USER_COMPANY=John Doe Architects,
USER_SERIAL=DCXIW00000
Inc.

[General] If TRUE, inserting doors and windows into

CAVWALL=FALSE cavity (4-line) walls trims the outer jamb
lines to the cavity lines.
[General] If TRUE, this forces the vertices on 3D
CoplanarCheck=FALSE polygons with more than three sides to be
coplanar, based on the first three
noncollinear vertices.
[General] If TRUE, it would activate the Windows
ShowWinCursor=FALSE system cross-hair cursor along with the
DataCAD cursor. This is useful for screen
capture programs that record the
movement of the Windows system cursor.
[General] If TRUE, accessing help from the pull
OldHelp=FALSE down menu or with [Ctrl]+[F1] opens the
old DCADWIN.HLP instead of the new
DataCAD11_Manual.PDF.
[General] If FALSE, the minus key will invoke direct
MinusKeyTogglesOvershoot=TRUE distance input.
[General] If FALSE, the comma key will invoke
CommaKeyErasesLastEntity=TRUE direct distance input.
[General] If FALSE, the period key will invoke
PeriodKeyRestoresLastEntity=TRUE direct distance input.
[General] If TRUE, the AllCaps toggle operates like
CapsLock=FALSE CapsLock instead of forcing all uppercase
letters.
[General] If TRUE, corrects fonts with zero width
FixFont=FALSE character definitions.
[General] If ALT, access hyperlinked views using
HYPERVIEW=ALT [Alt]+Left-click.
If ALT+SHIFT, access hyperlinked views
via [Alt]+[Shift]+Left-click.
 INI SETTINGS | 559
[General] Size (in whole numbers) of Symbol
SymbolCacheSize=2 Browser cache in megabytes.
[General] If FALSE, DataCAD will not auto
NoGridInSelect=TRUE matically disable grid snapping during
selection and Window In.
[Paths]
INSTALL_DIR=c:\Program
Files\DCADLT\
PATH_SWAP=Temporary Files\
PATH_SUPPORT=Support Files\
PATH_DEFAULTS=Support Files\
PATH_ICON=Support Files\Toolbars\
PATH_BMP=Support Files\Toolbars\
PATH_MSG=Support Files\
PATH_HELP=Help\
PATH_RECOVERY=Recover Archive\
PATH_PENTABLE=Support Files\
[PaletteFile] If TRUE, DataCAD will save the 16
DoCustomColors=TRUE custom colors that can be defined using the
Windows Color Picker from the Pen Table
dialog.
[o2cViewer] Distance between adjacent poly-gons to be
SmoothDistance=0 considered for smoothing.
[o2cViewer] Angle between adjacent polygons to be
SmoothAngle=30 considered for smoothing.
[Printer] Percentage (positive or negative whole
FitToAdjustment=0 number) to add or subtract from
DataCAD’s automatic FitTo calculation.
[Printer] If TRUE, DataCAD uses a more accurate
NewFitTo=TRUE method to determine the available print
area which may be incompatible with some
drivers. If FALSE, DataCAD uses the
original method to determine the available
print area.
[Alias] Width of command line alias popup
PopupWidth=300 window in pixels.
[Alias] Number of lines displayed in command
PopupLines=4 line alias window.
[MenuBtn] Set the number of pixels between menu
BTN_SPACING=2 buttons vertically; alternatively, set the
BTN_WIDTH=0 number of pixels to add or subtract from
the width of menu buttons.
[StatusArea] Width in pixels to add or subtract from
560 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
DropDownWidth=0 Status Panel.
[Undo] If TRUE, undo/redo system is disabled.
Disabled=FALSE
[TemplateWindow] Value in pixels to set the width of the
WIDTH= template window.
[Clipboard] If TRUE, entities copied to the Win-dows
CopyBitmap=TRUE clipboard will maintain a cor-responding
bitmap representation to paste into bitmap
applications.

DWG/DXF Translation Tables

Importing data from a DWG or DXF file to a DataCAD (.AEC) file is not always a one-to-one
translation. There are a few instances where data is handled differently in DataCAD. For instance,
entities in AutoCAD with a color-by-block attribute will be read into DataCAD as white.
Dimension arrowheads must also be changed in order to display in DataCAD. AutoCAD
arrowheads, which are blocks (symbols), will be replaced globally with the arrowhead style set
with the ArroStyl option of the Dimensions menus. When exported back to a DWG/DXF file, all
arrowheads will be set to the AutoCAD default. Dimension text and extension lines will remain
the same color, but dimension lines will be changed to the same color as the extension lines.
Text, in some cases, is also treated differently in DataCAD. A single instance of vertical text in a
DWG/DXF file will be translated to horizontal text. MText (AutoCAD’s multi-line text) is broken
into single lines; it is no longer a single entity.
Symbol Attributes appear as Block Attributes when you open a DWG file.
Third-party fonts may need to be scaled to display correctly. To adjust the scale and aspect of a
font, open the CHR2SHX.DAT in the \CHR subdirectory of your DataCAD directory, locate the
font in the list, and modify the values as necessary. Fonts can also be added to the list; remember
to update the total number of fonts in the file (value located on first line of file). Be sure to make
necessary adjustments before you import or export a file, so that the changes will appear in that
file.
The Importing and Exporting sections that follow provide translation tables showing how entities
are treated in “round-trip” scenarios, where a file would begin and end in AutoCAD or DataCAD.

Importing
AUTOCAD DATACAD AUTOCAD

2D Polyline Polyline 2D Polyline (rel.13 or 14)

(parallel to X,Y plane) Polyline (rel.12)

2D Polyline Polyline Symbol‡ 2D Polyline (rel.13 or 14)

(not parallel to X,Y plane) Polyline (rel.12)

2D Polyline Polyline† 2D Polyline (rel.13 or 14)

 DWG/DXF TRANSLATION TABLES | 561
(with width assigned to any Polyline (rel.12)
vertices)

3DFace Polygon 3DFace

3D Polyline 3D Line Line

(with varying Z values)

3D Polyline Polyline 2D Polyline

(planar--no varying Z (parallel to X,Y plane)
values) Polyline Symbol‡

Arc Arc Arc

(parallel to X,Y plane)

Arc 3D Arc Arc

(not parallel to X,Y plane;
thickness= 0)

Arc Cylinder† Arc

(not parallel to X,Y plane;
thickness ≠ 0)

Attribute Definition Text† (constant data is Attribute Definition

saved as attributes; variable
data is lost)

Block Symbol Block

Circle Circle Circle

(parallel to X,Y plane)

Circle 3D Arc† Circle

(not parallel to X,Y plane;
thickness = 0)

Circle Cylinder† Circle

(not parallel to X,Y plane;
thickness ≠ 0)

Dimensions Associative Dimensions Dimensions

Dimensions Lines and text Lines and text

(angular, radius, or
diameter dimensions and
leaders)

Donut Polyline† Donut

562 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
(parallel to X,Y plane)

Donut Polyline Symbol†‡ Donut

(not parallel to X,Y plane)

Ellipse Ellipse Ellipse (rel.13 or 14)

(parallel to X,Y plane) Lines (rel.12)

Ellipse Ellipse Symbol‡ Ellipse (rel.13 or 14)

(not parallel to X,Y plane) Lines (rel.12)
Hatch Associative Hatch (if hatch
boundary is LW polyline)
Associative Hatch Symbol‡
(if hatch boundary is LW
polyline but not parallel to
X,Y plane)
Lines (if hatch boundary
includes any other boundary
type besides LW polyline)

Leaders Lines and Text Lines and Text

Light-Weight Polyline (See 2D Polyline above)

Line Line Line

(parallel to X,Y plane)

Line 3D Line Line

(not parallel to X,Y plane;
thickness = 0)

Line Polygon† Line (if coordinates unchanged)

(not parallel to X,Y plane; Line, with changed thickness (if
thickness ≠ 0) polygon stretched along the
axis of thickness)
Polygon (if coordinates
changed in directions other than
axis of thickness)

MText Text Text

Mesh Polygons Polygons

Point Point₤ Point

(with no thickness)

Point 3D Line†₤ Point

(with thickness)
 DWG/DXF TRANSLATION TABLES | 563

Polyface Mesh Polygons Polygons

Spline Point† Spline (rel.13 or 14)

Solid Polygons, triangulated 3D Faces

Text, single line or multi Text Text

line

† AutoCAD entity is imported into DataCAD as an entity with attributes. If the entity is edited in
DataCAD, upon export it will return to its original (AutoCAD) entity type, incorporating the
changes you made in DataCAD. Exceptions to this are exploding an entity, which permanently
changes the entity type, or deleting an entity.
‡ AutoCAD entity is imported into DataCAD as a symbol. These symbols are like any other in
DataCAD; they cannot be edited unless they are first exploded. If you explode an entity in 3D
space, however, it will flatten to the X,Y plane. For instance, a Donut in a DWG file that is not
parallel to the X,Y plane will be imported into DataCAD as a Polyline Symbol. If this symbol is
not exploded, it will maintain its position when exported back to a DWG file. If the symbol is
exploded, however, it will flatten to the X,Y plane, even when exported back to a DWG file.
₤ Point shape is lost in translation.
A block comprised of entities on different layers will be imported into DataCAD as a symbol on
the layer where the block was inserted; that is, all entities for that Block will be moved to the
insertion layer. These entities will remain on this layer when exported back to a DXF or DWG file.
Also, anonymous (unnamed) blocks in AutoCAD will be given a unique, numeric name when
imported into DataCAD; this name will be saved with the block when exported.
There are a few AutoCAD entities that cannot be read, displayed, or otherwise saved during
translation. These include: XREFs, viewports, ACIS data (Body), Rays (XLines), Ole Frames,
Ole2 Frames, Tolerances, Images, Regions, Proxies, and named views.

Exporting
DATACAD AUTOCAD DATACAD
3D Arc Arc 3D Arc

3D Line Line 3D Line (if not parallel to

X,Y plane)
Line (if parallel to X,Y plane)

Arc Arc Arc

B-spline Polyline Polyline

Bezier Polyline Polyline

Circle Circle Circle

Cone Polyface Mesh Polygons

564 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
3D Faces (if Decompose in
Options dialog is on during
export)

Contour Polyline Polyline

Cylinder Polyface Mesh Polygons

3D Faces (if Decompose in
Options dialog is on during
export)

Dimensions (Associative) Dimensions Dimensions (Associative)

Ellipse Ellipse (rel.13 or 14) Ellipse

Lines (rel.12)

Hatch (Associative) Lines Lines

Line Line Line

Mesh Surface Polyface Mesh Polygons

3D Faces (if Decompose in
Options dialog is on during
export)

Point Point Point

Polygon 3D Face Polygon

(with 3-4 vertices and no
voids)

Polygon Triangulated into multiple 3D Multiple 3-sided polygons

(with 5 or more vertices Faces
and/or voids)

Polyline Lightweight Polyline (rel.14)

Polyline (<rel.14) Polyline

Sphere Polyface Mesh Polygons

3D Faces (if Decompose in
Options dialog is on during
export)

Surface of Revolution Polyface Mesh Polygons

3D Faces (if Decompose in
Options dialog is on during
export)
 Creating Custom Toolbars | 565
Symbol Block Symbol

Text Text Text

Torus Polyface Mesh Polygons

3D Faces (if Decompose in
Options dialog is on during
export)

Truncated Cone Polyface Mesh Polygons

3D Faces (if Decompose in
Options dialog is on during
export)

Creating Custom Toolbars

In versions prior to DataCAD 11, creating custom toolbars involved using complicated and
cumbersome .KEY files. Beginning with DataCAD 11, the former .KEY files were automatically
converted to the new DTB, INTbased DataCAD Toolbar format. The following examples show
the differences between the former KEY file and new DTB toolbar formats.

KEY File Format

!

* I 01

L | undo 119 UNDO last action

L | redo 120 REDO previous action

L LAYERS_S 23 Layers menu

L LINTYP_S 15 Line Type menu

L ARCTCT_S 11 Architect menu

A | 2DWALL_S XS3"F1' Toggle Walls on/off - Architect

menu
A| 2LWALL_S XS3AF2' Select 2 line walls - Architect
menu
A| 3LWALL_S XS3AF3' Select 3 line walls - Architect
menu
A| 4LWALL S XS3AF4' Select 4 line walls - Architect
menu
DTB File Format
[undo]
Hint=UNDO last action
Icon=undo
L=119

"redo]
566 | Chapter : Appendix
Hint=REDO previous action
Icon=redo
L=120

[LAYERS_S]
Hint=Layers menu
Icon=LAYERS_S
L=23

[LINTYP_S]
Hint=Line Type menu
Icon=LINTYP_S
L=15

[ARCTCT_S]
Hint=Architect menu
Icon=ARCTCT_S
L = ll

[2DWALL_S]
Hint=Toggle Walls on/off - Architect menu
Icon=2DWALL_S
A=A • AEA; AS3AF1A , AE

[2LWALL_S]
Hint=Select 2 line walls - Architect menu
Icon=2LWALL_S
A=A • AEA; AS3AF2A , AE

[3LWALL_S]
Hint=Select 3 line walls - Architect menu
Icon=3LWALL_S
A=A • AEA; AS3AF3A , AE

[4LWALL_S]
Hint=Select 4 line walls - Architect menu
Icon=4LWALL_S
A=A • AEA; AS3AF4A , AE

Creating New Icons

1. Create a 16-color, square bitmap in bitmap (.BMP) format.
2. Save it with a filename in the \DataCAD\Support Files\Toolbars\ directory.

Toolbar Icon Button Size

The default size of icon buttons used in toolbars is 16x16 pixels. However, if you'd like to use
larger icon buttons, you can select another size by using the Configure DataCAD for Windows
Settings dialog box.

■^ To change icon button size:

1. Select Program Preferences from the Tools pull-down menu to display the Configure
DataCAD for Windows Settings dialog box.
2. Click on the Interface tab.
 CREATING CUSTOM TOOLBARS | 567
3. Choose a different value in the Icon Size portion. Valid values are 16, 24, and 32. An
Information dialog box states that the changed icon size will not take effect until you
restart DataCAD.
This setting only changes the available button area for icon bitmaps. It does not make
small icons larger or large icons smaller.

4. Click on Ok to close the Information dialog box. Then click on OK to close the
Configure DataCAD for Windows Settings dialog box.
5. Exit from DataCAD; then restart the program.

Drop-Down Toolbar Items

You can add drop-down items to your own toolbars. To add a drop-down section to a toolbar use
the following format in the INI file.
[SECTION]
Icon= (insert the bitmap filename)
Hint= (insert the tool tip)
A= (insert the action form; e.g., Alt-???)

DropDownCount=3 (change the number if more or less than 3 new icons)

Icon00=
Hint00=
A00=

Icon01=
Hint01=
A01=

Icon02=
Hint02=
A02=the parent icon will perform the action if one is defined or will drop down the child
Selecting

icons if no action is defined. Hints for child icons will be used as menu labels.
568 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
Action Codes for Toolbars
The following action codes have been added for use in Toolbars:

Code
Action Number Action

L 171 Partial Erase menu

L 172 2D Polygon by rectangle
L 173 Arrows menu
L 174 Drop Mesh menu
L 175 Ruled Surface menu
L 176 TIN Surface menu
L 177 3D Mirror menu
A 1000# 2D Polygon Vertex On
A 1001# 2D Polygon Vertex Off
A 1002# 2D Polygon Diameter On
A 1003# 2D Polygon Diameter Off
A 1004# 2D Polygon Inscribe On
A 1005# 2D Polygon Inscribe Off
A 1006# 2D Polygon Rectangle On
A 1007# 2D Polygon Rectangle Off
A 1008# Polyline Rectangle On
A 1009# Polyline Rectangle Off
A 1010# Symbol Browser On
A 1011# Symbol Browser Off
 CREATING CUSTOM TOOLBARS | 569
Standard Line types

Name Pattern Line spacing values Defined by:

Solid N/A Center

Dotted 1=1'-0"oncenterdots Center

Dashed 1=1'-0"oncenterdashes Center

Dot-Dash 1=1'-0"oncenterdottodot Center

ElecLine 1=1'-0"oncenterEtoE Center

TelLine 1=1'-0"oncenterTtoT Center

Box 1=1'-0"oncenterboxtobox Center

PropLine 1 = 1'-0" on center double dashes Center

Insul 0.3 = 6" width insulation Center

Plywood1 0.0.3/4 = 3/4" width plywood Left edge at line angle of 90°

Plywood2 0.0.1/2 = 1/2" wide plywood Left edge at line angle of 90°

Hedge 1 = 4" wide line pattern Center

CentrLin 1=1'-0"dashtodash Center

Section 1=1'-0"oncenterbreaks Center

ShingleR 0.8 = 4" to the weather Left edge at line angle of 270°
(for line length divisable by set spacing)
LapSidR 0.4 = 4" to the weather Left edge at line angle of 270°
(for line length divisable by set spacing)

ShipLap 0.4 = 4" to the weather Left edge at line angle of 270°
(for line length divisable by set spacing)

Brick 0.8 = 4" nominal brick width Left edge at line angle of 90°

4Block 0.8 = 4" nominal brick width Left edge at line angle of 90°

8Block 0.8 = 8" nominal block width Left edge at line angle of 90°

12Block 0.8 = 12" nominal block width Left edge at line angle of 90°

RigidIns 0.2 = 2" thickness Left edge at line angle of 90°

Grass 0.5 = 3" high grass Lower edge at line angle of 90°

GroundLn 1 = 6" between pattern breaks Lower edge at line angle of 90°

ShingleL 0.8 = 4" to the weather Right edge at line angle of 270°
(for line length divisable by set spacing)
LapSidL 0.4 = 4" to the weather Right edge at line angle of 270°
(for line length divisable by set spacing)
570 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX

Standard Hatch Patterns

Hatch patterns included with DataCAD are pictured below.

Angle 31 32

33 34 35

36 37 38

Box Brass Brick

STANDARD HATCH PATTERNS | 571
572 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
STANDARD HATCH PATTERNS | 573
574 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX

Standard Keyboard Shortcuts

FUNCTION/MENU MNEMONIC KEY(S)
2 Line Trim menu Join (Alt) + (J)
3D Menus (J)
3D Entity menu (J) or (Alt) + (U)
3D Views menu Views (Y) or (Shift) + (V) or (Alt) +
(V)
Active layer, scroll backward (Shift) + (Tab)
to set
Active layer, scroll forward to (Tab)
set
Append selection set toggle Append (Shift) + (A)
Architect menu architect (A)
Cap wall ends toggle (|)
Center screen to cursor (Home)
location
Change menu Change (Alt) + (C)
Colors, scroll backward Kolors (Shift) + (K)
Colors, scroll forward kolors (K)
Coordinate entry (SpaceBar)
Copy to clipboard Copy (Ctrl) + (C)
Copy menu (2D/3D) Copy (C) or (Shift) + (C)
Cursor size toggle (big vs. (+)
regular)
Curves menu Arcs (Alt) + (A)
Cut to clipboard (Ctrl) + (X)
Digitizer digitIzer (I)
Dimensions menu Dimension (D) or (Shift) + (D)
Dimensions, Linear menu Dimension (Alt) + (D)
Directory of current drawing directorY (Alt) + (Y)
dialog box
Display list, regenerate (U) or (Shift) + (U)
Display associated saved view (Shift) + (1) to (0)
Edit menu (;)
Sel. Sets menu Selection sets (Shift) + (S)
Elevation, back (Ctrl) + (PgUp)
Elevation, front (Alt) + (=)
Elevation, left (F11)
Elevation, right (F12)
Enlarge menu Enlarge (Alt) + (E)
Erase last entity (,)
Erase last group (<)
Erase menu (2D/3D) Erase (E) or (Shift) + (E)
Exit (Ctrl) + (F4)
Fillets menu Fillets (Alt) + (F)
Freehand menu freeHand (Alt) + (H)
Geometry menu Geometry (Alt) + (G)
GoTo View menu View (V)
 STANDARD HATCH PATTERNS | 575
Grids menu Grids (G) or (Shift) + (G)
Hatching menu Hatch (H) or (Shift) + (H)
Help (Ctrl) + (F1)
Hide menu (Shift) + (Y)
Identify Identify (Shift) + (I) or (Alt) + (I)
Input mode: (Insert)
1 : Relative Polar (distance,
angle)
2 : Absolute Polar (distance,
angle)
3 : Relative Cartesian (x, y
coordinates)
4 : Absolute Cartesian (x, y
coordinates)
Layer search toggle (')
Layers menu Layers (L) or (Shift) + (L)
Line overshoot amount (_)
Line overshoot toggle (-)
Line spacing, set (F)
Line Type menu Line type (Alt) + (L)
Line types, scroll backward in (Shift) + (Q)
the Status Panel toolbar
Line types, scroll forward in (Q)
the Status Panel toolbar
Line weight, decrement BIG Weight to small (Shift) + (W)
Line weight, increment little Weight to big (W)
Group menu linK (Alt) + (K)
Measures menu (Alt) + (X)
Mirror menu (2D) Mirror (Alt) + (M)
Move menu (2D/3D) Move (M)
Multi-view windows multi-view Windows (Ctrl) + (W)
New drawing, create New (Ctrl) + (N) or (Alt) + (N)
Object snap sNap (N) or (Shift) + (N)
Object Snap menu (Shift) + (X)
Object Snap perpendicular Object snap (Alt) + (O)
toggle
Online Help (Ctrl) + (F1)
Open Files Open (Ctrl) + (O)
Ortho mode toggle Orthogonal (O) or (Shift) + (O)
Orthographic View orthographic (Alt) + (0)
Pan Arrow keys (up, down, right,
and left)
Parallel View, most recent (Alt) + (9)
Paste from clipboard (Ctrl) + (V)
Perspective View, most recent (Alt) + (-)
Plotter menu Plotter (Alt) + (P)
Polygons menu Rectangle (Alt) + (R)
Previous view, restore Previous (P) or (Shift) + (P)
576 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
Print Print (Ctrl) + (P)
Quit Quit (Alt) + (Q)
Redo (Ctrl) + (Y)
Reference point entry (`)
Restore last erased entity (.)
Restore last erased group (>)
Rotate menu (2D/3D) Rotate (R) or (Shift) + (R)
Save current drawing Save File (Ctrl) + (S) or (Shift) + (F)
Screen refresh (Esc)
Screen refresh by layer, stop (End)
Screen refresh, stop (Del)
Select sElect (Ctrl) + (E)
Selection set, change active (Alt) + (1) to (8)
Snap grid spacing, set spacing (S)
Snap grid toggle (X)
Snapping point entry (~)
Stretch menu Stretch (Alt) + (S)
Symbol, insert by name (")
Tangents menu (B) or (Shift) + (B)
Templates menu Template (T) or (Shift) + (T) or (Alt) +
(B)
Text menu Text (Alt) + (T)
Toolbox menu Macros (Shift) + (M)
Disp. Scale menu Zoom (Alt) + (Z)
Undo (Ctrl) + (Z)
Utility menu (:)
Wall T intersection clean-up (\)
toggle
Walls toggle and set new wall (=)
thickness
Weld Line menu Weld (Alt) + (W)
Zoom menu (/)
World coordinate identify (?)
Z-base or Z-height attribute Z-base/Z-height (Z) or (Shift) + (Z)
entry
Zoom Extents (Ctrl) + (-)
Zoom In (PgDn)
Zoom Out (PgUp)
Creating Keyboard Shortcuts for Pull-down Menu Options
You can create keyboard shortcuts for any of the 250+ pull-down menu selections by editing the
DCADWIN.MNU file. The format of the menu file is Label|Shortcut|Hint. Any shortcut you add
to the MNU file will supersede any existing DataCAD shortcut if they are the same. The following
key sequences are supported.
(0-9)
Example: Open|5|Open Existing File

(A-Z)
Example: Open|E|Open Existing File
 STANDARD HATCH PATTERNS | 577

(F1-F12)
Example: Open|F5|Open Existing File

([CTRL] + (0-9), (A-Z), (F1-F12))

Example: Open|CTRL+5|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+E|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+F5|Open Existing File

([CTRL] + [SHIFT] + (0-9), (A-Z), (F1-F12))

Example: Open|CTRL+SHIFT+5|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+SHIFT+E|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+SHIFT+F5|Open Existing File

([CTRL] + [ALT] + (0-9), (A-Z), (F1-F12))

Example: Open|CTRL+ALT+5|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+ALT+E|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+ALT+F5|Open Existing File

([SHIFT] + (0-9), (A-Z), (F1-F12))

Example: Open|SHIFT+5|Open Existing File
Example: Open|SHIFT+E|Open Existing File
Example: Open|SHIFT+F5|Open Existing File

([ALT] + (0-9), (A-Z), (F1-F12))

Example: Open|ALT+5|Open Existing File
Example: Open|ALT+E|Open Existing File
Example: Open|ALT+F5|Open Existing File

([ALT] + [SHIFT] + (0-9), (A-Z), (F1-F12))

Example: Open|ALT+SHIFT+5|Open Existing File
Example: Open|ALT+SHIFT+E|Open Existing File
Example: Open|ALT+SHIFT+F5|Open Existing File

([CTRL] + [ALT] + [SHIFT] + (0-9), (A-Z), (F1-F12))

Example: Open|CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+5|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+E|Open Existing File
Example: Open|CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+F5|Open Existing File
578 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX

Standard Fonts
DataCAD includes the following fonts; the first column lists the font name, while the second
column provides examples of upper- and lowercase characters.

Extended characters
Five DataCAD fonts feature extended characters. This allows you to include common drafting
symbols, fractions, and exponents in your text:
ARCDR2GP ArcDraft General Purpose
ARCWY2GP ArcWyde General Purpose
ARCWY2HC ArcWyde Heavy Chisel
ARCWY2LC ArcWyde Light Chisel
HLV_TPX Helvetica Thin Proportional with extended characters
The following chart shows the drafting symbols, exponents and fractions you can include in your
text.
 EXTENDED CHARACTERS | 579
To create drafting symbols and exponents:
1. Toggle NumLock on. The indicator light on your keyboard will be green if NumLock is
on. If NumLock is not toggled on, you will not be able to create the drafting symbols and
exponents.
2. Press (Alt) and hold it down while you type the corresponding four-digit number using
the numeric keypad. The four-digit number always begins with zero. Do not use the
number keys above the letters on your keyboard.
If you'd like to change your font but you've used extended characters in your text, make sure the
new font also includes the extended characters. If you choose a font that does not include the
extended characters, the content of your text may be changed.
To create fractions, use the Exponent/Numerator column of the chart to enter the numerator of
your fraction; use the Denominator column to draw the denominator and the division sign. For
example, to draw a fraction of 5/16 in your text, hold down (Alt) and type 0135 using the numeric
keypad. When you release (Alt), the 5 will appear. Depress (Alt) again and type 0153 on the
numeric keypad. The fraction is completed when you release (Alt).

Drafting Symbol Exponent/ Denominator

Numerator

Diameter 011440 011330 011550

Square Feet 011441 011331 011551

011332 011552
Property Line 01142
011333 011553

Center Line 011443 011334

011335
With 011444

011336
Degree 011445
011337

Plus-or-minus 011446
011338

Angle 011660 011339

580 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
Inserting Symbols in Drawings without the Symbol Browser
You can use two other symbol insertion methods; these existed prior to DataCAD 11. Using the
Insert pull-down menu is faster, but using the Utility/Templates menu offers you more options for
working with your symbols.
If you prefer to use this old-fashioned method, you should close your Symbol Browser to avoid
confusion. Just click on the “X” in the upper right corner of the Symbol Browser to make it
disappear.

To insert a symbol into your drawing using the Insert menu:

1. Click on Symbol in the Insert pull-down menu. A dialog box appears, listing all symbol
folders in your DataCAD\Symbols folder.
Shortcut: Press (“) (the double quotation key) to insert a symbol.

2. Double-click on a symbol folder to open it and display those symbols.

3. Click on the name of the symbol you want to use; if Show Preview is checked, a preview
of the selected symbol appears in the preview window on the right side of the dialog box.
The symbol preview displays in either orthographic (plan) or isometric view, depending
on either the Symbol Preview setting on the Misc tab of the Configure DataCAD for
Windows Settings dialog box, available from the Tools pull-down menu, or the Isometric
View checkbox in the Insert Symbol dialog box.
4. Click on Open or press (Enter). The dialog box closes and the left menu offers options for
editing the symbol. Notice that a box representing the extents of the symbol is now
attached to your cursor at the symbol’s insertion point.
5. Change the symbol’s size if necessary. Before you place the symbol in your drawing, you
can increase or decrease the size of an entity by entering specific enlargement values for
the X, Y, and Z axes:
• To resize the symbol while maintaining its original scale, increase the X Enlargmnt.,
Y Enlargmnt., and Z Enlargmnt. values equally
• To adjust the size of the symbol along the X axis, click on X Enlargmnt. Use the
value menu or type an enlargement factor and press (Enter).
• To adjust the size of the symbol along the Y axis, click on Y Enlargmnt. Use the
value menu or type an enlargement factor and press (Enter).
• To adjust the size of the symbol along the Z axis, click on Z Enlargmnt. Use the
value menu or type an enlargement factor and press (Enter).
6. Rotate the symbol either by dynamically positioning it or by setting a specific rotation
angle for the symbol. The symbol is rotated around the insertion point, the point where
the symbol is attached to your cursor.
• To dynamically rotate the symbol into position when you place it in your drawing,
toggle Dyn. Rotate on.
• To set a specific rotation angle, toggle Dyn. Rotate off. Use the value menu or type
an angle and press (Enter).
 INSERTING SYMBOLS IN DRAWINGS WITHOUT THE SYMBOL BROWSER | 581
7. Convert the symbol into standard and separate lines and arcs when you place it in your
drawing by toggling Explode on.
8. Place the symbol by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate entry, or object
snapping to a point in your drawing. The symbol is inserted into your drawing. For
details on coordinate entry, see “Drawing Using Coordinate Entry” in “The Drawing
Board” chapter. For details on object snapping, see “Object Snapping” in the “Drawing
Tools” chapter.
9. Repeat the previous step to continue placing the symbol in your drawing or right-click to
exit the menu.

Finding and Using Older Template and Symbol Files

Before using Templates, you need to configure DataCAD 11 to look into your previous version’s
installation folder to find the template and symbol files.

To configure DataCAD version 11 and higher to find template and symbol files from older
versions:
1. Select Program Preferences from the Tools pull-down menu anc click on the Pathnames
tab.
2. Set the path for Templates to C:\DataCAD\TPL\, assuming that is the folder in which the
earlier version is installed.
3. Set the path for Symbols to C:\DataCAD\, leaving the SYM part off because it is already
included in the symbol paths for each of the files associated with the template.

To insert a symbol into your drawing using the Templates menu:

1. Right-click until the Utility menu appears.
2. Click on Templates in the Utility menu. A dialog box appears.
Shortcut: Press (T) to open the Template menu.

3. Locate the template you’d like to use and click on it to select it. The templates that come
with DataCAD are in your DataCAD\Templates folder.
4. Click on Open or press (Enter). The template appears on the right side of the Drawing
Area and the Templates menu appears.
5. Rotate the symbol into position either dynamically or by setting a specific rotation angle.
The symbol is rotated around the insertion point, the point where the symbol is attached
to your cursor.
• To dynamically rotate the symbol into position when you place it in your drawing,
toggle Dyn. Rotate on.
• To set a specific rotation angle, toggle Dyn. Rotate off. Use the value menu or type
an angle and press (Enter).
6. Change the symbol size if necessary by clicking on Enlarge in the Templates menu.
Before you place a symbol in your drawing, you can increase or decrease the size of an
entity by entering specific enlargement values for the X, Y, and Z axes:
582 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
• To enlarge entities along the X axis, click on X Enlargmnt. Use the value menu or
type an enlargement factor and press (Enter).
• To enlarge entities along the Y axis, click on Y Enlargmnt. Use the value menu or
type an enlargement factor and press (Enter).
• To enlarge entities along the Z axis, click on Z Enlargmnt. Use the value menu or
type an enlargement factor and press (Enter).
• To set the line spacing enlargement factor for nonsolid line types, click on Line
Factor. Use the value menu or type a line factor and press (Enter). The Line Factor
setting affects how line types like Dashed are enlarged. A setting matching those of
the X, Y, and Z enlargement factors will maintain the line type’s spacing.
• To set all of these options to the same setting and enlarge the entity equally in all
directions, click on Set All. Use the value menu or type an enlargement factor and
press (Enter).
7. Decide if you need to place symbols above or below the current Z-base. For example,
when placing tree symbols on a 3D site plan, you can change the Z Offset option to enter
the trees at the proper elevation. To set the vertical distance above or below the correct Z-
base where you’d like to insert your symbols, click on Z Offset. Use the value menu or
type an offset value and press (Enter). Enter a positive value to place the symbol above
the current Z-base; enter a negative value to place the symbol below the current Z-base.
8. Decide if you want to change the symbol. Normally, symbols are placed in your drawing
as a single entity, so DataCAD doesn’t recognize the individual lines and arcs that make
up the symbol. To be able to edit a symbol in your drawing, you must explode (or
convert) the symbol into separate lines and arcs. To convert the symbol into separate lines
and arcs when you place it in your drawing, toggle Explode on.
Note: This will only explode those symbols entered into your drawing after Explode is
toggled on. Exploded symbols appear the same as standard symbols, but DataCAD
recognizes only the individual lines and arcs that make up the symbol and not necessarily
their relationship to each other.

9. Select a symbol from the template by moving your cursor over the symbol you want to
use and clicking. A box, representing the extents of the symbol, is attached to your cursor
at the symbol’s insertion point. The symbol’s insertion point is marked by a small “x”
once you place the symbol in your drawing.
You can object snap to any point on a symbol to select an insertion point other than the
one associated with the symbol definition. This is especially useful if you want to align a
symbol with another entity in your drawing. Simply snap to the symbol in the template and
then snap to the entity in your drawing to place the symbol.

10. Place the symbol in your drawing by clicking in the Drawing Area, using coordinate
entry, or object snapping to a point in your drawing. The symbol is inserted into your
drawing.
11. Repeat the previous step to continue placing the symbol in your drawing or right-click to
detach from the symbol.
 CREATING AND EDITING TEMPLATES | 583
12. Open a different template if necessary by clicking on New File and selecting another
template file from the dialog box.
13. Close the template window by clicking on Template Off.

More About Templates and Symbols

Each template is a graphic representation of the template (.TPL) file and appears with a number of
divisions, each containing a symbol. The template file itself is a simple text file containing the
name of the file, the number of rows and columns in the template, and the paths to the symbols
associated with that template. When you select a template, the symbols associated with that
template file appear in the template window.

Creating and Editing Templates

Templates are a very effective way to organize a library of predrawn items, which you can use in
many different projects. You can create a template with symbols that you use frequently or one
that supports office standards. See “More About Creating Templates” for details on defining
information fields.
Each template has information fields defined specifically for that template. Whenever you add a
symbol to that template, you can enter information describing that symbol in each field. There are
six standard information fields that are defined for every template, but you can define an unlimited
number of additional fields.

To create a template:
1. Click on Templates in the Utility menu; or if you’re already in the Template menu, click
on New File. A dialog box appears.
Type a name for your new template and click on Open or press (Enter). The dialog box
closes and you are prompted with Create new file?
3. Click on Yes to create the template. The Field 7 menu appears and you are prompted with
Field name. All templates have six standard fields automatically defined for them.
4. Decide whether you want to define additional information fields or simply create the
template with only the standard six fields. To use only the standard fields, right-click and
skip to step 7. To enter an additional field, type a name for the field (up to 20 characters)
and press (Enter). A list of field data types appears and you are prompted to Select field
type.
5. Notice that there are three field types available: Text, Number, and Dollar. To create a
field that you can enter letters and numbers into, click on Text. To create a field that you
can enter an integer into, click on Number. To create a field that you can enter a real
number with two fixed decimal places, click on Dollar. Numbers entered in a text field
cannot be used in any calculations.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to continue entering information fields.
7. Right-click when you’ve completed entering fields. The template is created and displayed
at the right side of the DataCAD window and the Templates menu appears. For
information on how to add symbols to your new template, see “Creating and Editing
Symbols” later in this chapter.
584 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
More About Creating Templates
When you create a template, DataCAD automatically defines six information fields:
Field Name Field Type
Item nam Text
Manufact Text
Model No Text
Remark 1 Text
Remark 2 Text
Cost Dollar

You can create an unlimited number of additional information fields when you create a template.
This is the only time you can define information fields; once the template is created, you can’t add
another field or delete a field, nor can you change the field’s name or type.
While you can’t change the fields themselves, you can always edit any information you’ve entered
into a field. All fields you create can accept up to 80 characters of information.

Editing Templates
Templates you create in DataCAD have a standard number of divisions: three columns and 12
rows. Once you’ve created a template, you can change the number of divisions to suit your needs.
The number of divisions in a template doesn’t have to equal the number of symbols associated
with that template. You can have more divisions than symbols, in which case some of the divisions
in your template will be empty. You can also have fewer divisions than symbols, so that not all
symbols associated with that template will be displayed at once. Displaying fewer symbols will
also increase refresh times.

To change the number of divisions in a template:

1. Create your template. Then click on Divisions in the Templates menu. You are prompted
to Enter number of columns.
2. Use the value menu or type the number of columns for your template and press (Enter).
You are prompted to Enter number of rows.
3. Use the value menu or type the number of rows for your template and press (Enter). The
template is updated with the new divisions and you are returned to the Templates menu.

Creating and Editing Symbols

Creating and editing symbols is a very effective way to build a library of predrawn items that you
can use in many different projects. You can draw a lighting fixture, create a symbol from the
fixture geometry and add it to a template, and then very quickly place several instances of that
fixture in your drawing.
To quickly determine the exact path and folder name of a symbol, click on Symbol Name in the
Templates menu and then click on the symbol.
You can also enter descriptive information about each symbol and then edit that information. You
can even replace symbols in your drawing with others in your symbol library.
 CREATING AND EDITING SYMBOLS | 585
To create a symbol and add it to a template:
1. Click on Templates in the Utility menu. The Templates menu appears.
Shortcut: Press (T) to display the Templates menu.

2. Click on Save Symbol. If the Attention toolbar informs you that a file doesn’t exist and
asks if you want to Create it?, click on Yes. A dialog box appears, prompting you to Enter
name of symbol file to be saved. Symbol folders are stored in your DataCAD\Symbols
folder.
3. Make sure the folder that’s open in the dialog box is the one you want to save the symbol
in. If it’s not, change to the proper folder.
4. Type a name for your symbol and click on Save or press (Enter). The Save Symbol menu
appears. Use Save Symbol to select either symbols already in your drawing or geometry
you want to make into a symbol; both types of selection will be added to the currently
displayed template.
5. Choose a selection method and then select the parts of your drawing you want to make
into a symbol. When you are finished selecting the entities to add to the symbol, click on
Continue. You are prompted to Select an insertion point for symbol.
6. Select the reference or insertion. You can click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate entry,
or object snap to a point in your drawing. The entities you selected are copied into the
first open space in the template; if there are no open spaces in the currently displayed
template, the symbol can’t be displayed in that template until you increase the number of
template divisions. A dialog box appears.
7. Enter a name for your symbol in the Item name field. Supply information for additional
fields. You can use the New button to add more fields; you can use the Delete button to
eliminate existing fields.
8. Click on Ok when you are finished supplying information about the symbol. A dialog box
appears and you are asked to Enter name of symbol file to be saved.
9. Supply a name in the File name field and click on Save or press (Enter).
10. Continue with step 3 above to save additional symbols.

Editing Symbols
To edit symbols, you must first explode or convert them into individual lines and arcs. You can do
this when you insert the symbol into your drawing or after the symbol has been inserted. Once the
symbol has been edited, you can reform the symbol lines and arcs into a single symbol entity, copy
it back into the template, and then update the symbols already in your drawing.

To explode a symbol when you place it in your drawing and edit it:
1. Click on Templates in the Utility menu. Then click on New File in the Templates menu. A
dialog box appears, allowing you to choose a template to open.
2. Click on the template you want to use and click on Open. The template appears on the
right side of the Drawing Area.
3. Toggle Explode on in the Templates menu.
586 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
4. Click on the symbol in the template that you want to insert into your drawing.
5. Place the symbol in your drawing. You can click in the Drawing Area, use coordinate
entry, or object snap to an entity in your drawing. The symbol is copied to your drawing
and automatically exploded into separate entities.
6. Edit the symbol geometry as necessary. For more information on editing lines and arcs,
see the “Editing Drawings” chapter.
7. Copy your changes back to the template. Click on Redefine in the Templates menu. You
are prompted to Select symbol in template to redefine.
8. Click on the symbol in the template that you just edited in the Drawing Area. A selection
menu appears and you are prompted to select the geometry you want to be your new
symbol.
9. Choose a selection method and then select the geometry for the symbol. Your selection is
highlighted with dashed lines. If necessary, continue selecting geometry until all entities
that you want to be included in the new symbol are highlighted.
10. Click on Continue to go on with the symbol definition process. You are prompted to
Select an insertion point for symbol.
11. Click in the Drawing Area or use coordinate entry to select the point that will be used to
insert the symbols in drawings. The edits to the symbol are copied to the template.
12. Update all instances of that symbol in your drawing. Click on Reload in the Templates
menu. You are prompted to Select symbol in template to reload.
13. Click on the symbol in the template that you want to reload or click on All in the Reload
menu to reload all symbols in your drawing.

Editing Information Fields

You can edit information associated with symbols by selecting a symbol in a template or one that’s
already in your drawing. Use the Reports option in the Templates menu to extract symbol
information for all symbols used in your drawing and create specification reports or cost estimates.

To edit symbol information:

1. Open the template that the symbol (whose information you want to edit) is associated
with.
2. Click on Edit Fields in the Templates menu.
3. Click on the symbol, either in the template or in your drawing, whose information you
want to edit. The fields for that symbol appear in the dialog box.
4. Click on the field you want to edit.
5. Type the new information for that field and press (Enter).
6. Repeat steps 4 –5 to continue changing field information as necessary.
7. Edit information for another symbol by right-clicking and continuing with step 3 above.
Right-click twice to exit back to the Templates menu.
 CREATING AND EDITING SYMBOLS | 587
To edit symbol information:
1. Click on FormAtr in the Toolbox pull-down menu. The FormAtr menu appears. If
FormAtr is not listed in your Toolbox menu, click Configure in the Macros menu and add
it to the Macros in Menu list.
2. Click on Symbols in the FormAtr menu. You are prompted to Select symbol to edit
attribute fields.
3. Click on the symbol. The symbol’s information appears in the Drawing Area.
4. Press (Tab) to move the edit box to the text you want to change.
5. Type the new text and press (Enter). The information is changed.
6. Repeat steps 4 – 5 to continue editing.
7. Press (Esc) to exit editing and return to your drawing. You are prompted with Do you
wish to update symbol file [symbol path and filename]?
8. Click on Yes to update the symbol information; click on No to cancel the changes.

Replacing Symbols in Your Drawing

You can replace one symbol in your drawing with another and choose whether to replace one
instance of that symbol or all instances throughout your drawing. This is useful if you’ve entered
one type of bathroom sink throughout your drawing and you need to replace it with another type.

To replace one symbol with another symbol:

1. Click on Templates in the Utility menu. The Templates menu appears.
2. Click on Replace in the Templates menu. The Replace menu appears and you are
prompted to Select symbol to replace.
3. Click on the symbol in your drawing that you want to replace. You are prompted to Select
symbol to replace with.
4. Choose the new symbol that will replace the original by clicking on a symbol in a
template or on one that’s already in your drawing. A selection menu appears.
5. Replace only particular instances of the symbol you selected in step 3 or replace all
instances of that symbol. To choose particular instances of the symbol, choose a selection
method from the menu and continue with the next step. To replace all instances of the
symbol, click on All; all instances of the symbol are immediately replaced and you can
skip to step 7.
6. Select each instance of the symbol that you want to replace. Each symbol is replaced as
you select it.
7. Finish replacing symbols. Right-click to return to the Templates menu.

To replace several different symbols with another symbol:

1. Click on Templates in the Utility menu. The Templates menu appears.
588 | CHAPTER : APPENDIX
2. Click on Replace in the Templates menu. The Replace menu appears and you are
prompted to Select symbol to replace.
3. Click on Any Symbol in the Replace menu. You are prompted to Select symbol to replace
with.
4. Choose the new symbol that will replace the original by clicking on a symbol in a
template or on one that’s already in your drawing. A selection menu appears.
5. Select each symbol you want to replace or replace every symbol in your drawing. To
choose each symbol, choose a selection method from the menu and continue with the
next step. To replace all symbols, click on All; all symbols in your drawing are
immediately replaced.
6. Select the symbols to be replaced. Each symbol is replaced as you select it.
7. Finish replacing symbols. Right-click to exit the Replace menu and return to the
Templates menu.

Deleting Symbols
You can erase symbols from your drawing or delete them from a template.

To erase a symbol:
1. Click on Erase in the Edit menu. The Erase menu appears.
2. Toggle Layer Search on if the symbols you want to erase are on a layer other than the
active layer.
3. Click on a selection method in the menu. You are prompted to select the entities you want
to erase.
4. Select the symbols; they are erased from the drawing. You can continue selecting
symbols to erase them. Avoid selecting a symbol where it crosses another entity because
it may be difficult for DataCAD to know which entity you want to select. Zoom in on
your drawing or change your view to select symbols more precisely.
5. Finish erasing symbols. Right-click to exit the Erase menu.

To delete a symbol from a template:

1. Click on Templates in the Utility menu. A dialog box appears, allowing you to choose a
template to open.
2. Click on the template with the symbol you want to delete and click on Open. The
template appears on the right side of the Drawing Area and the Templates menu appears.
3. Click on Del. Symbol in the Templates menu. You are prompted to Select symbol to
delete from this template file.
4. Click on the symbol you want to delete from the template. You are asked to confirm your
selection.
5. Click on Yes to delete the symbol; click on No to cancel the function.
 CREATING AND EDITING SYMBOLS | 589
6. Continue selecting symbols to delete them from the template or right-click to exit the
Del. Symbol menu.

More About Erasing Symbols

When you erase symbols from your drawing, it’s important to purge the symbol from your
drawing as well. When you add a symbol to your drawing, DataCAD associates that symbol with
your drawing. This association is not deleted when you erase the symbol and continues to take up
drawing file space. To delete the association as well, you must use the Purge Symbol option in the
Templates menu.

To purge symbol associations from your drawing:

1. Click on Purge Symbol in the Templates menu. You are asked Are you sure you want to
purge unused symbols?
2. Click on Yes to purge the associations with symbols that have been deleted; click on No
to cancel the function.
 Glossary

3D face
The surface of a solid specified with 3D points.

3D mesh
A polygon mesh composed of vertices connected by lines.

3D polyline
Polylines with segments oriented in 3D space.

arc
A continuous section of a curved line.

area
Any part of a drawing within a rectangular window that is temporarily drawn during the
selection process. All entities and groups enclosed completely within this rectangular window
are included in the area. All entities and groups partially enclosed or not enclosed within the
rectangular window are not included in the area.

Attention toolbar
A toolbar that supplies helpful information and/or hints pertaining to the DataCAD function
you are using. You can move this toolbar anywhere in the DataCAD screen or onto your
desktop.

attribute
A single value or characteristic associated with an entity.

bulge
A curved portion of a polyline.

center marks
Small marks displayed to define the exact center of arcs and circles. You can also use center
marks with object snapping.

click
To position the cursor over a selection and press and release a mouse button (usually the left
button). This command usually refers to selecting or deselecting an option.

choose
To select a command or option from the Menu Window.

command
An instruction from the user to the computer to perform a function. A command is usually
selected from the Menu Window or the Menu Bar.
592 | GLOSSARY
Context-sensitive toolbar
A toolbar that appears when you perform various functions. For example, it could provide
icons for Cleanup, Arctitect, Door swing, Window, Polyline, and Model options. You can also
create your own context-sensitive toolbar. You can move this toolbar anywhere in the
DataCAD screen or onto your desktop.

Coordinates/Hints toolbar
A toolbar that supplies helpful information and/or hints pertaining to the DataCAD function
you are using. The hints usually mirror the tooltips for DataCAD menu items. When it isn’t
displaying hints, this toolbar shows the coordinates that describe your cursor’s current
position. Additionally, this toolbar provides the Z-base and Z-height. You can move this
toolbar anywhere in the DataCAD screen or onto your desktop.

cursor
A graphic symbol displayed on the screen to show the location of the mouse.

default
Any setting or value that is preset by DataCAD.

Default toolbars
Two default user-definable toolbars can be active simultaneously. You can move these
toolbars anywhere in the DataCAD screen or onto your desktop.

dimension line
Also called the string line, the dimension line consists of a straight line parallel to the points
to dimension. The dimension line also contains text showing distance information and
termination marks, consisting of arrows or tick marks drawn at a 45° angle.

division
A graphical aid used in cylindrical balusters, newel posts, or hand rails to help you better
visualize the cylinder.
doughnut (donut)
A circular object with hole in the center, composed of two concentric circles and a filled
center.

Drawing Window
The area of the screen that is reserved for your drawing.

elevation
The height of an object. It defines the object's position in the direction of the Z-axis.
Also, an orthographic view that shows the front, back, right, or left sides of an object.

entity
A straight or curved geometric element defined by two endpoints. A circle, ellipse, or arc is an
entity, as is a B-spline or Bezier curve. A line of text is also considered an entity in editing
operations. Edit entities alone or when linked as a group.
 GLOSSARY | 593
extension line
Extension lines typically run from the object you dimension to the line where the dimension
appears. Extension lines are used only for linear and angular dimensioning. You can control
the length of the extension line. DataCAD typically draws one extension line at each end of a
dimension line, but you can suppress the line.

extents
The outer-most edges of a drawing. To “display a drawing at its extents” means to adjust the
view so that the drawing fills the Drawing Window as much as possible while still displaying
it in its entirety; the outer-most edges of the drawing will fit just inside the frame of the
Drawing Window. Clicking the E in the Navigation Pad does this automatically.

fence
Similar to an area but allowing more flexibility, a fence is any portion of a drawing within a
closed polygon that you draw during the selection process. You can select using a concave or
convex polygon having up to 36 sides.

fit
Specified fixed height of text that expands or contracts to the character width between
designated points only.

function keys
Function keys, (F1) through (F12), are located on the keyboard and are used to enter
commands. In DataCAD, they are associated with the commands that appear in the Menu
Window. You can select these commands by pressing the associated function key on the
keyboard.
(S1) through (S0) provide access to ten additional commands, selected on the keyboard by
holding down (Shift) while pressing the appropriate function key.

grids
Use display and snap grids to make cursor movement and positioning more accurate. The
flexibility and control of grids are critical to computer-aided design.
group
A group is a set of entities linked together logically but not necessarily graphically. Entities
that do not touch may be part of the same group, and entities that are contiguous may be part
of different groups. A group may contain any number of entities - as many as hundreds or
only one.
Entities are linked as a group in a number of ways. A group of entities drawn in succession
without disconnecting the cursor are linked as one group. Similarly a series of lines of text
entered at the same time are linked as one group. You can link any group of entities or groups
using the Group command. Entities are also linked or associated as one group when they are
created at the same time with the Copy command. When an existing entity is edited, with the
Change or Move commands, for example, it retains the same group associations.
594 | GLOSSARY
The grouping together of entities in DataCAD facilitates editing many related items without
affecting other entities in the same portion of a drawing. Because they are also easily
redefined, groups allow the designer to organize a drawing as a series of elements composed
of logically related pieces or entities.

keyboard shortcuts
These key combinations perform an operation or select a setting in the middle of another
command by interrupting the original command. Once the interrupt function is complete,
DataCAD automatically returns to the original function.

layers
In computer-aided design layers are the electronic equivalent of overlaid pieces of tracing
paper, each containing a small part of the drawing information. Each layer can also be saved
and loaded for use in other drawing files.

limits
The maximum and minimum sizes indicated by a toleranced dimension.

line
The most fundamental drawing entity; defined by two endpoints.

Menu Bar
An area of the screen, located along the top of the DataCAD screen, that contains pull-down
menus to give you quick access to many of DataCAD’s most used functions.

Menu toolbar
A toolbar that displays DataCAD’s primary menu structure. You can position this toolbar
anywhere on your DataCAD screen or on your desktop.

Message toolbar
This toolbar provides prompts and messages. The Message toolbar also provides an input
portion that supplies prompts and displays the information you are entering via the keyboard.

MultiView Windows toolbar

A toolbar that lets you display up to 10 GoTo View windows that you can tear off, reposition,
and resize.

Navigation toolbar
This toolbar displays buttons to pan around (left, right, up, and down), zoom in or out, zoom
to an area, view the drawing at its extents, and identify the properties of an entity.

ortho mode
Used to draw entities at any angle. Press (O) to toggle Ortho mode off. To draw entities
orthogonal to one another, press (O) again to toggle ortho mode back on. Modify this snap
angle by setting the number of divisions under the Snap Angle option of the Grids menu.

orthographic view
A parallel view whose lines of sight are parallel to each other and perpendicular to the plane
of projection. Orthographic views include plan views and elevations.
 GLOSSARY | 595
pan
Move observer's view of a drawing by using the arrow keys to the right of the keyboard. Set
the pan distance by using Scroll Dist. in the Settings menu.
point
Use the mouse to point to objects on the screen. Move the mouse to move the cursor to the
appropriate location on the screen.
Also, a point in space represented on the monitor as a dot, without width or height.

polyface
3D vertices connected in a specified order.

polyline
A connected sequence of lines and arc segments.
Projection toolbar
This toolbar controls the type of view (parallel, perspective, plan, isometric, oblique, and
elevations) that appears in your Drawing Window. You can place this toolbar anywhere on
your DataCAD screen or on your desktop.

prompt
A message that appears on the screen in the Message toolbar, providing information or
requesting a command or user action.

radius
The measurement used for a cylindrical baluster, newel post, or hand rail. The radius is the
distance from the center point of the cylinder to the side of the cylinder.

raster printing
The rendering of a graphic as an image composed of dots rather that of vectors, or lines.

reference point
An arbitrary point in the Drawing Window from which the next point entered will be
referenced.

right-click
To press and release the right mouse button.

right-hand rule
A rule that indicates the direction of angles. Point the thumb of your right hand in the
direction of the axis in question. Your fingers curl in the direction of positive rotation. The Y
axis goes up, so when you point your thumb up, your fingers curl toward you in the left to
right direction. Negative angles, therefore, go from right to left.

screen refresh
Updates or redraws the screen from the drawing file in order to display the current status of
your drawing. This is particularly useful to monitor your progress during editing operations.
 | GLOSSARY
596 scroll back
Use Scroll Back to view a previously-displayed portion of a list.

scroll forward
Use Scroll Forward to view more options when the list of available choices is too long to fit
on a menu.

select
To highlight or otherwise mark an entity, icon, or text.

selection set
A user-defined set of entities and/or groups that contains any number of entities or groups.
Selection sets provide increased efficiency during editing by reducing the time required to
select entities, groups, or define areas or fences.

setting
An option that is set to a particular value. You can change settings at any time, and they
remain in that state until you change them again.

solid
Solid filled figures, composed of quadrilateral (four-sided) or triangular (three-sided)
polygons.

SPB fills
A solid, pattern, or bitmap can be used to fill an area instead of the standard vector-based
hatch patterns.

Standard toolbar
A toolbar that provides access to common Windows-based functions (such as file open, save,
print, copy, paste, etc.) and some frequently used DataCAD ones (such as select a reference
file or bitmap). You can move this toolbar anywhere in the DataCAD screen or onto your
desktop.

Status toolbar
This toolbar is reserved for status information such as the current layer, layer color, line type,
scale, slection sets, go-to views, and input mode. You can more this toolbar anywhere in the
DataCAD screen or onto your desktop.

string
A series of characters.
swap file
A temporary file created when you enter DataCAD. It is the working file that constrains your
drawing during a work session. This working file is transferred to your drawing (.AEC) file
when you exit DataCAD.
 GLOSSARY | 597
SWOTHLUDFB toolbar
The Snap, Walls, Ortho, Text, Hatch, Line weight, User-line, Dimension, Fills, and Bitmap
toggles are located on this toolbar. You can move this toolbar anywhere in the DataCAD
screen or onto your desktop.

text
The alphabet, numerals, and special characters added to a drawing. It is created using fonts.

text leaders
Short, sometimes angled lines that are automatically drawn back to a point on the
circumference of the object when a dimension distance is too short to contain dimension text.

thickness
The projection of a surface into 3D space.

toggle
An option switch that you can turn on or off. When a toggle is on, the button label appears in
green; when a toggle is off, the button label appears in red.

tolerance
The total amount a specific dimension is allowed to vary, the difference between maximum
and minimum limits.

trace
A solid line with a specified width.

undo
An option that cancels the latest operation or command performed. It appears on the menu
only after an action has taken place.

vector printing
Line-based drawings produced with commands that are either native to or added to a laser
printer.

view center
The point in space at which the observer is looking. DataCAD places the view center in the
middle of the extents, halfway between Z-base and Z-height.

Viewer toolbar
This toolbar changes based on the type of view you select in the Projection toolbar. You can
move this toolbar anywhere in the DataCAD screen or onto your desktop.

void
An opening or hole created in a slab.

zoom
Displays objects at different scales for drawing tasks. To quickly focus on a portion of a
drawing for detailed work, press (/) to expand that section.
598 | INDEX

Index

dog-leg, 427 3D lines

drawing, 426 chaining, 405
. tangent, 426 curved, as contours, 455
.AEC. See Files, drawing vertical, 427 drawing, 404
.DSF. See Files, symbol 3D copying, 463–64 from Z-base to Z-height,
.INI settings, 68, 558 3D cursor, 456 405
3D Cursor. See Cursor, world 3D menus, selection, 45
snapping 3D models
1 3D doors adding to web page. See
as symbols, 530 o2c
1 Line Trim. See Cleanup, casings for, 530 as e-mail attachment. See
trimming to one line
cutting walls for, 529 o2c
files, 529 walking through, 496, 497
2 flush with wall, 534 3D moving, 292–96
forms, 530 3D polygons
2 Line Trim. See Cleanup, headers for, 532 adding vertices to, 420
trimming to one line hinge placement for, 534 creating drop mesh, 448
2 Line Walls. See Walls, 2- jambs, 532 deleting vertices from, 421
line knobs, 534 editing, 420
2 Pt. Arc. See Curves, sills, 533 horizontal, 410
drawing stops, 533 moving vertices in, 422
2-point arcs, tracing, 272 thickness for, 534 rectangular, 410
trim, 531 vertical, 412
types of, 530 3D roofs
3 3D drawing, 405 creating with inclined
3 Edge Bot. See Inclined 3D entities polygons, 414
polygons and slabs, 3- changing attributes of, 468 creating with inclined
edged bottom copying, 463 slabs, 414
3 Edge Poly. See Inclined editing rules, 460 defining boundaries for,
polygons and slabs, 3- enlarging, 467 516
edged vertical exploding, 468 joining, 518
3 Edge Top. See Inclined exporting, 39 modeling, 515
polygons and slabs, 3- mirroring, 465 polygonal, 517
edged top moving, 460 rectangular, 516
3 Line Walls. See Walls, 3- rotating, 464–65 settings for, 520
line rules for editing, 460 types of, 515
3 Pt. Arc. See Curves, selecting curved, 403 3D settings, 404
drawing stretching, 466 3D snapping
3 Pt. Circ. See Curves, 3D framing, 510–22 normal, 405
drawing , See Circles, floor, 510–11 world, 406
using 3 points roof, 513–22 3D stairs
3D arcs saving settings, 522 balusters for, 552
divisions of, 428 using settings, 522 base elevation of, 546
wall, 511–13 calculator, 544
 INDEX | 599
chases of, 547 using right-hand rule, 471
curved, radius of, 546
4 Aperture, of miss distance,
drawing, 542 4 Edge Gen. See Inclined 259
form, 556 polygons and slabs, 4- Application, launching
handrails for, 551 edged general external in DataCAD, 75
landings of, 547 4 Edge Para. See Inclined Arc factor, 196
newel posts for, 555 polygons and slabs, 4- Arc of curve
placement of, 547 edged parallelograms measuring length of, 269
risers of, 548 4 Edge Vert. See Inclined Arch. See Scales, setting
settings, 545 polygons and slabs, 4- types
stringers of, 550 edged vertical Architectural scales, 190
tread length of, 546 4 Line Walls. See Walls, 4- Arcs
treads in first run of, 546 line 2-point, 220
treads in second run of, 4EdgTrap. See Inclined 3-point. See Curves,
546 polygons and slabs, 4- drawing
treads in third run of, 546 edged trapezoid center angle of, 222
treads of, 546, 549 closed, 468
3D views, 471–77, 481–82 closing 2D, for hide, 487
changing center of, 472 A connecting two lines with,
changing center of 237, 280
Abs. Zero. See Reference dividing, 274
parallel, 472
point, fixed
changing to parallel view, divisions, for hide, 487
Absolute Cartesian entry, 55
401 drawing line with, 56 drawing based on chord
elevations, 471 Absolute polar entry, 55 length, 224
isometrics, 471 drawing line with, 55 drawing based on included
oblique, 481–82 Absolute zero, moving angle, 226
perspective, 477–81 drawing based on length,
entities to, 292
pespective (tutorial), 152 223
Active Only. See Layers,
rotation angles in, 471 drawing based on radius,
setting the active
saving an image, 494 225
Add Vertex. See Vertex,
shaded image, 488–92 adding drawing with tangent line,
using GoTo View, 494 Add View. See Elevations, 227
using o2c player with, 75 saving views measuring chord length of,
3D windows, 524–29 A-frame roofs, 415 269
as symbols, 524 tracing tangent, 273
All On. See Layers, toggling
casings of, 525 Area
all on
cutting walls for, 524 measuring circle or
And Copy. See Mirror, and
files, 524 polyline, 271
copy
forms, 524 Angles selection, 2D, 43
glass for, 529 calculating, 46, 47 selection, 3D, 45
headers for, 526 dimension of between two Area selection, 44
height of, 524 Arrays
jambs for, 527 lines, 335
copy rectangular, 248, 249
measure excluded between
muntins for, 528 copying circular, 250
two lines, 270
sashes for, 528 copying with, 246, 463
measure included between
sills for, 527 creating 3D rectangular,
two lines, 269
trim for, 526 463
types of, 525 of cone of vision, 479
of door openings, 210 rectangular, 463
wall thickness for, 524 of rotation, 465 using Z elevations in
3D world snapping cursor, rise, 403, 436, 440 rectangular, 251
406 Arrows
roll, 403, 438
3-point arcs, tracing, 273 arrowhead style, 317
setting types of, 187
drawing as text, 317
sweep, 430
on dimension line, 332
600| INDEX
style for dimensions, 327, Bal/Run2. See Balusters, Box Color. See Colors,
328 number of displaying box
style options for angle and Bal/Run3. See Balusters, B-spline curves, 232
curve dimensions, 335, number of
337 Bal/Tred. See Balusters,
style options for linear number of C
dimensions, 332 Balusters, 552 Calculating
text, drawing (tutorial), as symbols, 553 angles, 46, 47
113 color of, 554 distances, 46
AS1100. See Scales, setting cylindrical, 553 Calculator, online, 46
types depth of, 553 Calibrate
Attributes divisions of, 553 distance, 370
3D entities,changing, 468 horizontal offset of, 554 enlargement of imported
added with macro, modeling, 552 graphics, 370
displaying visible, 195 number of, 552 X/Y enlargement options,
changing text, 290 placement of, 552 370
editing for symbols, 324 radius of, 553 Camera, 479
for cavity in 4-line wall, rectangular, 553 Cancel
203 vertical offset of, 554 hidden line removal, 483
for center line of 3-line width of, 553 roof framing, 513
wall, 203 Base/Height. See Z-base, to saved hide image, 485
for exterior distance in 4- Z-height, See 3D lines, Casings
line wall, 203 from Z-base to Z-height of 3D doors, 530
for interior distance in 4- Base+Thk. See Z-base, to of 3D windows, 525
line wall, 203 thickness Cent. Angle. See Curves,
of text added to symbols, BaseElev. See 3D stairs, base drawing
320, 368 elevation of Cent. Chord. See Curves,
of text defined for Beams, standard, 538 drawing
symbols, 320 Bearing. See Angles, setting Center Cav. See Walls,
of text for symbols, 320 types of
defining by cavity center
wall, setting, 202 Bezier curves, 231 Center Line. See Walls, 3-
with wall styles, 204 Bi-fold doors, 208 line attributes
Automatic, style for Big Cursor. See Cursor, large
Center Point
dimensions, 329 displaying polygons, drawing, 219
Auto-recover files, 193 Bitmap
Center points of 2D curves,
Axonometrics inserting files into displaying, 195
isometric views, 471 drawings, 61 Center Wall. See Walls,
plan obliques, 481 saving image as, 66 defining by center
Bitmap Fills. See SPB Fills Center Z. See Center, of 3D
Blocks rotation
B drawing, 423 Center, of 3D rotation, 465
Backface. See Hidden line parallelogram, 424 CentiMtr. See Scales, setting
removal, increasing speed rectangular, 424 types
of Border Chain. See 3D lines, chaining
Background color, changing creating (tutorial), 131 creating vertical polygons
Drawing Window, 31 moving (tutorial), 132 in succession, 412
Backup Boundaries, hatch Chamfer, 237, 281
auto-recover file (.ARB), defining, 342 Changing, 289–91
70 defining rectangular, 342 attributes of 3D entities,
drawing files, 71 including arcs, 342
468
drawing files (.DBK), 70 including curves, 342
attributes to match another
Bal/Run1. See Balusters, using contour search to entity, 290
number of define, 342 entity attributes, 289
line overshoot, 58
 INDEX | 601
text attributes, 290 Close 2D Arc. See Arcs, Contours
text attributes to match closing 2D for hide control points for, 456
another text block, 291 Close Ellip. See Ellipses, creating topographical
Characters, extended, 578 closing for hide map with, 455
Check plot, 393 Closed, 468 cyclic, 456
Chord Color. See Layers, changing divisions of, 456
drawing arc based on color drawing, 455
length of, 224 changing on display grids, elevation of, 456
measuring length of arc, 160 natural, 456
269 Color mapping smoothing surface, 448
Circ. Array. See Copy, define materials for steadily rising, 457
circular array rendering with, 501 stiffness of, 448, 456, 468
Circles using Viewer/Shader color tangent, 456
3-point, 426 map, 501 tangent point, 456
dividing, 274 Colors Control points
measuring circumference changing, 48 displaying for associative
of, 269 changing background of dimensions, 195
using 3 points, 230 Drawing Window, 31 for contours, 455, 456
using diameter, 229, 426 changing for entities, 48 for mesh surfaces, 442
using radius, 228, 426 Color Palette, 31,48 Convert Void. See Voids,
Circumference, measuring copying entities to converting, See Voids,
circle, 269 clipboard, 41 converting to polygon
Clean, 201 custom, 48, 197 Coordinate entry
walls, 203 displaying box, 195 absolute Cartesian, 55, 56
Cleanup exporting with Translation absolute polar, 55
chamfers, 281 toggle, 38 choosing a method, 55
connecting two lines with matching, 48 distance direction, 55, 56
a line, 281 menu, 47 drawing with, 55
fillets, 280 of 3D stairs, 548, 549, placing dimensions with,
trimming to nearest, 283 550,551 327
trimming to one line, 282 of balusters, 554 relative Cartesian, 55
wall intersections, 203 of handrails, 552 relative polar, 55
wall intersections of hidden lines, 486 Coordinates
(tutorial), 89 of newel posts, 556 screen, 474
Clear Layer. See Layers, standard 15 DataCAD, 48 world, 474
erasing contents of Columns, drawing, 536 Copy, 59
Clip Cube Compass. See Angles, setting 3D entities, 463–64
activating, 492 types of and rotate entities, 298
creating, 492 Concrete forms, 536–39 circular array, 250
defining in XREF with drawing column, 536 entities, 242–52
Reference File drawing double tee, 537, new distance, 243, 245
Management, 493 538 one-dimensional array,
defining in XREF with drawing I-beam, 539 247
XREF Clip, 493 drawing inverted tee, 536 perpendicular to original,
display boundary of, 42 drawing single tee, 537 244
using with XREFs, 493 drawing standard beam, rectangular array, 248, 249
viewing selected entities in 538 specified distance and
3D model with, 492 Cone of vision, 478, 479 angle, 242
Clockwise. See Curves, width of, 479 to another layer, 245
drawing, See Angles, Cones to clipboard, setting, 42
setting types of closed, 468 using arrays, 246, 463
ClosdStr. See Stringers, drawing, 432 Copy to Clipboard
closed radius of, 433 entity color, 41
truncated, 433 line weight, 41
602| INDEX
Crossing selection, 44 Cyclic contours, 456 Delete Dbl. See Hidden line
Cursor Cylinder. See Newel posts, removal, deleting double
3D, 456 cylindrical, See Balusters, lines with
changes to New Elevation cylindrical, See Handrails, Delete Layer. See Layers,
Indicator, 401 cylindrical deleting
changing to New Cylinders Depth
Elevation Indicator, 475 closed, 468 of balusters, 553
large displaying, 192 horizontal, 429 of handrails, 552
setting accuracy of, 192 setting number of of landings, 548
text, 310 divisions for, 432 of newel posts, 555
world snapping, 406, 461, sweep angles, 430 of treads, 549
464 vertical, 428 Desktop
Curve Center. See Center vertical, divisions of, 429 classic, 22
points of 2D curves, vertical, thickness of, 429 Dia. Circ. See Circles, using
displaying diameter
Curve Data. See Curves, Dialog boxes, 22
drawing based on D Diameter
surveyor's data Ddrawing curve, dimension of, 336
Curves windows, 212–15 of circles, 229, 426
Bezier, 231,442 Dec. Degrees. See Angles, of curve, measuring, 268
B-spline, 232 setting types of of polygons when
drawing, 220–33 Decimal. See Scales, setting drawing, 219
drawing based on types Dim. Points. See Control
surveyor's data, 232 place setting, 187 points, displaying for
drawing with control place, setting, 188 associative dimensions
points, 230 Dimensions, 326–37
point, floating, 187, 188
measuring arc length of, Default aligned, 326
269 font, 41 angle between lines, 335
measuring diameter of, Definition list angle style for angle and
268 adding a value to, 189 curve, 337
measuring radius of, 269 angle, 189 angular, 326
Customizing changing a definition, 190 arrow style for, 332
colors, 196 deleting a value to, 189 arrows, 327, 328
display settings, 194 distance, 189 associative, 327, 328
drawing settings, 186 editing, 189 automatic, 328
macros, 40 loading a customized, 190 automatic (tutorial), 119
miscellaneous settings, 41 scale, 189 automatic style for, 333
toolbars, 15 Del. Vertex. See Vertex, automatic, style options
walk-through options, 497 deleting for, 329
Customizing DataCAD, 27 Delete baseline, 329, 331,333
DXF/DWG file door settings files, 529 center points, 333
translation, 36 double lines after hide, changing linear, 333
interface settings, 28, 35 486 curve diameter, 336
macros, 40 framing settings files, 510, curve radius, 336
menu buttons, 30 512,522 DIN Standard, 331
menu labels, 30 go-to-view, 495 displaying associative, 194
miscellaneous settings, 41 layer sets, 173 dots for, 332
pathnames, 27 layers, 168 drawing string of
screen calibration, 29 saved hide image, 485 (tutorial), 116
Cut, 59 stair settings files, 556 editing linear, 333
Cut Wall. See Walls, cutting text styles, 316 exploding linear
Cutout. See Windows, vertices, 421 associative, 334
drawing, See Doors, wall styles, 205 fixed distance of, 331
drawing window settings files, 524
 INDEX | 603
geometric tolerances for, direction entry, drawing adding 3D (tutorial), 146
331 line with, 56 drawing, 207–11
horizontal, 326 new, copy, 243 drawing (tutorial), 96
increment offset of, 331 Distances match swing color to, 210
limits for, 331 calculating, 46 opening angle, 210
line offset, 331 display, synchronizing, removing, 211
line style for, 327, 328, 194 styles of, 208
331 increment, 445 swing color of, 210
line style for angle and measuring between two swing styles of, 210
curve, 337 points, 268 DoRght. See Handrails, on
linear, 326 new, 3D move, 462 right side of stairs, See 3D
minimum distance, 333 previous stretch, 466 stairs, stringers of
miss distance, 333 previous, 3D move, 462 DoRiser. See 3D stairs, risers
moving linear, 334 stretch, in Z direction, 466 of
object snapping and, 327 Divide entities, 274–75 Dormers, drawing, 416, 417
overall, 329 Divisions DoTread. See 3D stairs,
overrun of extension lines, of 2D arcs, 487 treads of
331 of balusters, 553 Double doors, 208
parallel to entity, 326 of contours, 456 Double tee concrete forms,
rotated, 326 of handrails, 552 drawing, 537, 538
rounding, 331 of mesh surfaces, 444 Drafting symbols, creating,
settings (tutorial), 115 of newel posts, 555 579
stretching (tutorial), 120 primary, 468 Drag
stringline, 328, 329, 333 secondary, 468 copy entities using, 243
text offset for, 330 setting number for moving using, 294
text style for, 327, 328, cylinders, 432 moving using (tutorial),
330 setting primary and 132
text style for angle and secondary, 403 Draw Hidden. See Hidden
curve, 337 Do Float. See Decimal, point, line removal, drawing
tick marks for, 332 floating hidden lines in
vertical, 326 DoCtr. See 3D stairs, Draw Jamb. See Windows,
DIN. See Scales, setting types stringers of drawing, See Doors,
Direction distance, using with DoFloat. See Scales, setting drawing
reference point, 258 types Draw Marks. See Drawing,
Directories, changing, 27 Dog-leg. See 3D arcs, dog marks displaying
Disp. Grid 1. See Display, leg Drawing
grids DoLeft. See Handrails, on left and editing basic skills,
Disp. Grid 2. See Display, side of stairs, See 3D 54–60
grids stairs, stringers of cabinet elevations, 382,
Display DoLndBt. See 3D stairs, 384
customizing, 194 landing of creating a new, 10
grid, changing color, 160 DoLndTp. See 3D stairs, curves, 220–33
grids, 159 landing of door elevations, 377
list, 42 Domes doors, 207–11
negative coordinates, 193 primary divisions of, 437 doors (tutorial), 96
options, setting, 192 secondary divisions of, exterior elevations with
synchronizing distances, 437 EZ Tools macro, 375
194 DoNlPst. See Newel posts, line by selecting two
Dist. Sync. See Distances, modeling points, 54
display, synchronizing Door Style. See Doors, marks displaying, 192,
Distance drawing 211,214,256
copy, 244 Door Swing. See Doors, naming, 10
direction entry, 55 drawing opening an existing, 8
Doors polygons, 218–19
604| INDEX
polylines, 233–39 files, customizing exterior roof settings, 375
rectangles, 219 translation, 36 saving views, 476
set origin of, 43 importing drawing file, 10 window settings for, 380
sketching freehand, 253 saving entity assignments window styles for, 380,
walls, 200–207 when importing, 13 381
walls (tutorial), 81 DWG Translator, translation Ellipses, 230
window elevations, 379, tables, 560 closing, for hide, 487
381 DXF End Point. See Object
windows, 212 exporting files, 73 snapping, to nearest end
windows (tutorial), 102 files, customizing point
with coordinate entry, 55 translation, 36 End Pt. Ang. See Curves,
with line types, 57 importing drawing file, 10 drawing
with the mouse, 54 DXF Translator, translation End Pt. Rad. See Curves,
Drawing Area, 26 tables, 560 drawing
increasing size of, 49 Dynamic Engineering scales, 191
using two monitors for, 49 curves, drawing, 221 Engr. See Scales, setting
Drawing Window, changing polygons, drawing, 219 types
partitions in, 485 tangent curves, drawing, Enlarge, 301
Drawings 227 3D entities, 467
border, moving (tutorial), enlargement factor, 302
132 imported graphics, 370
changing entities in, 52 E in X direction, 467
copying parts of, 51 Edit Defs. See Editing, value in Y direction, 467
customizing settings, 186 definitions in Z direction, 467
laying out plot sheets for, Entities
Edit Defs.. See Definition
396 list, editing attributes of, 267
linking, 60 Edit menu, 51, 59 clipping with ClipIt, 306
mirroring parts of, 51 Edit Plane copying, 59, 242–52
moving entities in, 52 changing zero plane copying color of, 41
plotting, 388 orientation, 401 copying line weight of, 41
printing, 388 positioning zero plane copying perpendicular to
referencing, 60 with, 401 original, 244
saving, 65 Editing cropping with ClipIt, 306
stretching entities in, 51 dividing, 274–75
and drawing basic skills,
viewing, 63 enlarging, 301
54–60
Drop mesh, 448–55 drawings, 59 erasing, 303
controlling file size, 448 linear dimensions, 333 erasing partial, 303
created from survey data symbols, 364 grouping, 44, 304
file, 448 value definitions, 189 identifying, 266
creating, 448 Elevations, 374–84 linking, 44
importing survey data for, measuring, 267–73
cabinet settings for, 383
449 cabinet styles for, 382, 384 mirroring, 252–53
increases file size, 448 creating (tutorial), 155 moving, 59
over selected geometry, creating 3D views of, 475 moving specified distance
449 creating new, 475 and angle, 293
removing unused entities moving to absolute zero,
door, 377
from, 448 door settings for, 378 292
DWF, exporting files, 73 door styles for, 377, 379 offsetting and copying,
DWG drawing cabinets, 382, 384 244
block attributes in, 324 drawing doors, 377, 379 rotating, 298
DataCAD symbol drawing exterior, 375 rotating dynamically, 299
attributes in, 324 drawing windows, 380, selecting, 43, 44
exporting files, 73 381 stretching, 300
exterior, 374 trimming, 282, 283
 INDEX | 605
ungrouping, 305 converting to .AEC from Free Zooms, remembering,
Erase, 303 .DC3 or .DC5, 8 42
contents of layers, 168 customizing DXF/DWG Freehand, using to sketch,
partial, 303 translation, 36 253
Erase Void. See Voids, DataCAD User (.U$R), 69
erasing, See Voids, erasing door, 529
from a polyline drawing (.AEC), 4, 8 G
Explode Drawing Backup (.DBK), Gable roofs, 415
3D entities, 468 70 Geometry, 244
converting TrueType fonts drawing recover (.DRF), redrawing speed for, 42
to 3D, 320 70 Get-Snap, 264, See Snapping
linear associative drawing swap (.$WP), 70 Girders, drawing, 536
dimensions, 334 exporting, 38, 73, 563 Glass Thk. See Windows,
symbols, 581 exporting XREF, 39 glass thickness
Export icons used for DataCAD, Glass, for 3D windows, 529
3D entity, 39 68 Golden Mean, 274
DWF files, 73 importing, 560 dividing a line with, 275
DWG files, 73 naming conventions, 67 Go-to-views, 494
DXF files, 73 recover process, 71 adding current view to the
files, 38, 563 swap, 68 list, 495
files using Color symbol (.DSF), 5 changing an existing, 495
Translation toggle, 38 using archive to recover, deleting a view, 495
o2c objects, 74 73 displayed in toolbar, 20
reference files, 39 Fillets, 237, 280 moving a view, 495
text, 315 Filter. See Layers, filtering renaming a view, 496
using Line types toggle, 38 layers, 462 Grads. See Angles, setting
XREF files, 39 Filter Back. See Filter types of
Export Layer. See Layers, Filter Fwd. See Filter Grid Origin. See Grids,
saving Fix Text. See Mirror, text setting origin of
Extended characters, 578 position GridColr. See Display grid,
Extension Fixed Ref. See Reference changing color
left, of stair treads, 549 point, fixed Grids
right, of stair treads, 549 Floor framing, 510–11 changing size of, 160
Extents, viewing, 167 joist settings for, 511
changing the angle in, 161
Eye point, changing, 472 sill plate settings for, 511 display, changing color of,
subfloor settings for, 511 160
Fonts display, using, 159
F changing menu button, 32 matching an entity’s angle,
Fast 3D. See Object converting TrueType fonts 161
snapping, to center of 3D to 3D, 320 rotating, 161
circular entities setting default, 41 rotating with cursor, 194
Fast 3D snapping, 407 setting text parameters for setting origin of, 162, 472
Fast Symbol. See Object TrueType fonts, 318 setting snap angle of, 161
snapping, to symbol standard, 578 snap, setting angle of, 161
insertion point supplied by DataCAD, 310 snap, using, 159
Fence selection, 44 TrueType (TTF), 310, 318 GridSize. See Grids,
3D, 45 Fractions, 187 changing size of
Files stacked, 188 Group. See Entities, grouping
auto-recover (.ARF), 70, Framing, 3D, 510–22 Group selection, 43, 44, 304
193 roof, 513–22
auto-recover backup wall, 511–13
(.ARB), 70 Free Trim. See Cleanup, H
trimming to nearest
backup process, 71 Handrails
compressed format of, 68
606| INDEX
color of, 552 closing 2D arcs for, 487 calibrating enlargement of
cylindrical, 551 closing ellipses for, 487 imported, 301, 370
depth of, 552 colors of hidden lines, 486 enlarging, 370
divisions of, 552 deleting double lines with, importing files into
height of, 552 486 drawing, 369
on left side of stairs, 551 displaying outlines in, 487 inserting into drawings, 61
on right side of stairs, 551 drawing hidden lines in, preserving original
radius of, 551 486 dimensions of imported,
rectangular, 551 hidden line types for, 486 369
width of, 551 increasing speed of, 485, printing controls for .BMP
Hatch, 340–47 486 and .JPG files with Pen
angle, 341 joining lines during, 485 Table, 370
associative, 346 line spacing for hidden saving in a different file
boundaries, 342 lines, 486 format, 66
boundaries with curves maximizing performance Import
and/or arcs, 342 of, 484 and calibrate enlargement
defining a rectangular offsetting an image, 485 of imported graphics,
boundary, 342 performing, 483 301,370
displaying, 194 saving image of, 484 default settings for, 37
drawing (tutorial), 122 tutorial, 153 DWG or DXF file, 10
drawing associative, 347 Hidden Space. See Line entity assignments for, 11,
drawing standard patterns, spacing, for hidden lines 37
340 Hidden Style. See Line types, files, 37, 560
master polyline with voids, for hidden lines image, 369
238, 343 Highlight. See Walls, setting supported file formats, 369
origin of, 341 attributes of text, 315
patterns, 340, 341 Hip roofs, 415, 417 Import Layer. See Layers,
scale, 341 Hither clip, 478 loading
standard patterns, 570 Horizontal 3D polygons, 410 In Order. See Layers,
type of, 340 Horizontal cylinders refreshing in order of
using SPB fills instead of, bottom half of, 431 creation
344 closed, 432 In Sill. See Windows,
Head. See 3D windows, divisions of, 432 drawing
headers for full, 431 In Wall. See Windows,
Head height radius of, 431 drawing, See Doors,
of doors, 211 sweep angle for, 430 drawing
of windows, 214 sweep angles to draw half Inch/Dec. See Scales, setting
Headers, for 3D doors, 532 of, 432 types
Height. See Handrails, height top half of, 431 Inch/Frc. See Scales, setting
of Horizontal slabs, 411 types
Height+Thk. See Z-height, to HorzOfst. See Balusters, Inclined polygons and slabs
thickness horizontal offset of 3-edged bottom, 417
Help, online, 2 Hotkeys, for walk-through, 3-edged top, 417
Hidden Color. See Hidden 496 3-edged vertical, 419
line removal, colors of Hotspots, 19 4-edged general, 416
hidden lines 4-edged parallelograms,
Hidden line removal 415
adding retained image to I 4-edged trapezoid, 415
active layer, 484 I-beams, 539 4-edged vertical, 418
adding retained image to Identify entities, 266 Ins. Point. See Insertion point
layer file, 484 Images Inscribe. See Polygons
adding retained image to calibrating enlargement of, Inserting
new layer, 484 370 stamps, 369
arc divisions for, 487 symbols, 356
 INDEX | 607
Insertion point, 59 color of, 548 changing active (tutorial),
Installation of DataCAD, 2 depth of, 548 79
Interface intermediate, 548 changing color, 167
customizing settings for, modeling, 547 changing the active, 19,
35 thickness of, 548 164
Interface, customizing Layer Manager, 174–86 creating, 163
settings for, 28 adding layers with, 182 creating layer sets, 172
Intersect. See Object changing a layer’s color customizing settings for
snapping, to nearest with, 180 symbols, 368
intersection point changing a layer’s name defining materials for
Intersections with, 181 each, 174
cleaning L, 287 changing a layer’s number deleting, 168
cleaning T, 286 with, 176 deleting with Layer Sets,
cleaning wall, 203 changing layer settings 173
cleaning X, 288 with, 178 displaying, 165
marking, 276 changing on/off layer erasing contents of, 168
IntrLand. See 3D stairs, settings with, 178 filtering, 170, 462
intermediate landings of deleting layer(s) with, 184 loading, 171
Inverted tee concrete forms, designating the active loading with Layer Sets,
drawing, 536 layer with, 179 172
Isometric views, 475 erasing entities from a locking, 166
layer with, 183 moving 3D entity to, 462
exiting from, 186 moving entities to another,
J locking/unlocking layers 169, 295
Jamb Depth. See Windows, with, 179 moving SPB-filled entities
drawing, See Doors, moving layers with, 176 on same layer, 296
drawing opening, 175 naming convention for,
Jamb In. See Windows, reverting to previous layer 171
drawing, See Doors, settings with, 185 order of, 195
drawing sorting layers with, 176 planning, 50
Jamb Width. See Windows, turning all layers on with, refreshing, 165
width of jamb, See Doors, 179 refreshing in order of
drawing using Cancel in, 185 creation, 195
Jambs using Undo to restore old renaming, 166
for 3D doors, 532 layer settings, 185 renaming (tutorial), 78
Layer Ref. See Layers, saving, 170
for 3D windows, 527
Join. See Hidden line refreshing searching for, 169, 170
removal, joining lines Layer search, 45, 209, 213, seed, 164
during 403 setting the active, 164, 168
selection, 44 setting Z base and height
status of, 45 for, 174
K status toggle, 19 setting Z base for current
Layer Sets layer only, 400
Keyboard shortcuts, 25 creating, 172 setting Z height for current
creating for pull-down deleting, 173 layer only, 400
menu options, 576 loading, 172 swapping SPB-filled
standard, 574 Layer Snap. See Snapping, on entities on same layer,
Knobs, for 3D doors, 534 layers, See Obect 298
snapping, on layers toggling all on, 165
L Layers toggling on and off, 165
active, 19 unlocking, 166
L Intersect. See Intersections, adding (tutorial), 78 using Z By Layer, 400
cleaning L assigning colors (tutorial), viewing, 167
Landings 80 Z By Layer, 174
 | INDEX
608 Layout tool tips, 24
single-scale, 397
M Menus
using Quick Layout, 396 Macros 3D Menus, 402
LeftExtn. See 3D stairs, ClipIt, 305 3D Views, 401,402,471
treads of customizing menu in Angle Type, 188
Line spacing, for hidden Program Preferences, Architect, 200
lines, 486 40 Change, 289, 290, 291
Line Type Manager EZ Tools, 375, 377, 380, Cleanup, 237, 281
using, 57 382, 384 Color, 47
Line types, 57 FormAtr, 587 Copy, 242
displaying, 195 FrameIt, 510, 513 Curves, 220–33
exporting, 38 RoofIt, 515 Drag, 243
for hidden lines, 486 Mansard roofs, 415 Edit, 59
menu, 57 Marker, 408 Enlarge, 301
settings, 57 Marking, intersection of two Erase, 303
standard, 569 lines, 276 Freehand, 253
using, 51 Match GoTo View, 494
Line weight, 57 changing entities using, Grids, 159
copying, 41 290 Group, 44, 304
displaying, 195 changing text attributes Hatching, 340, 342, 344,
Lines using, 291 347
connecting two lines with, colors, 48 Identify, 266
237,281 moving 3D entities to Insert, 580
dividing, 274 another layer, 462 Layers, 163, 164
dividing with Golden moving entities to another Line type, 57
Mean, 275 layer with, 169 Measures, 259
marking intersection of, setting active layer using, Object Snap, 258, 260,
276 168 262, 263
maximum, 294 snap grid to an entity, 276 Plotter, 139
measure angle excluded Match Door. See Doors, Print/Plot, 388
between two, 270 match swing color to Ref. Point, 256
measure angle included Match Wall. See Windows, Rotate, 298
between two, 269 drawing, See Doors, selection (entity, group,
measuring angle of, 268 drawing area), 43
measuring length of, 268 Materials Settings, 186
measuring total length of, defining for each layer, Stretch, 300
270 174 Takeoffs, 270
style for dimensions, 327, Max Acceleration Templates, 581, 583, 585,
328 increasing display speeds 587
style options for angle and with, 42 Text, 310
curve dimensions, 335, Max. Lines. See Lines, Text Style, 316
337 maximum, See Drag:copy Toolbox, 515, 536
style options for linear entities using value, 45
dimensions, 331 Measure, 267–73 Walk Through, 497
welding, 284 Menu Bar, 14 Zoom, 64
LineWgt. See Line weight Menu buttons Mesh surfaces, 442
Load changing fonts of, 32 control points, 445
layer sets, 172 customizing, 30 creating with varying Z
text styles, 316 Menu labels elevations, 445
wall styles, 205 customizing, 30 divisions of, 444
Lock. See Layers, locking Menu Window, 23 drawing manually, 443
classic, 24 rectangular, 443
Edit and Utility, 24 setting values for Z-User 1
label options, 24 and Z-User 2, 445
 INDEX | 609
vertical, 444 view sphere, 473 Nosing
Mesh, drop, 448–55 MultiView windows, for stair treads, 549
Meters. See Scales, setting displayed in toolbar, 20 round, 549
types Muntins, for 3D windows, square, 549
Metric. See Scales, setting 528
types
Metric scales, 191 O
Mid Point. See Object N o2c
snapping, to nearest Natural contours, 456 adding 3D models as e-
midpoint of line
Navigation pad, toolbar, 16 mail attachment, 75
MilliMtr. See Scales, setting Navigation toolbar, viewing adding 3D models to web
types with, 65 page, 75
Mirror Nearest. See Obejct snapping, exporting objects, 74
3D entities, 465 to nearest point Objects to See, 75
and copy, 253 Neg. Dist. See Negative Object snapping, 258
defining reflection line, coordinates, displaying defining miss distance for,
252 Negative coordinates, 259
entities, 252–53 displaying, 193 drawing line perpendicular
text position, 253 New Distance. See Copy, to entity, 263
Miss Dist. See Cursor, setting new distance increasing speed of, 259
accuracy of New Elevation Indicator, on layers, 259
Miss Dist.. See Object 475, 476 placing dimensions with,
snapping, defining miss and Z-base and Z-height 327
distance for settings, 476 show point, 43
Monitor, working with two, and zero plane, 476 tangent to arc, 264
49 cursor changes to, 401 to center of 3D circular
Mouse, snapping with middle NewDist. See Copy, new entities, 259
button, 259 distance to dividing point, 260
MouseWheel, using for walk Newel posts to entities in active
through, 496 as symbols, 555 selection set, 259
Move Vertex. See Vertex, color of, 556 to hatch lines, 259
moving cylindrical, 555 to nearest center point, 262
MoveZ. See Moving, in Z depth of, 555 to nearest end point, 261
direction divisions of, 555 to nearest intersection
Moving point, 263
modeling, 555
3D entities, 461,292–96 radius of, 555 to nearest midpoint of line,
3D entities to another rectangular, 555 261
layer, 462 width of, 555 to nearest point, 260
dragging to, 294 NewelPst. See 3D stairs, to nearest quadrant point,
dragging to (tutorial), 132 newel posts for 262
entities to absolute zero, NewLayer. See Layers, to symbol insertion point,
292 creating 258
in Z direction, 293 NewLine. See Tangents, Object Viewer
linear dimensions, 334 drawing curves as checking Z offset of
new angle, 295 No Change. See Color, symbols with, 360
new distance, 293, 295 menus raytracing with, 500
previous distance, 293 No Prim Edge. See Hidden selecting from View menu,
SPB-filled entities on line removal, displaying 499
same layer, 296 outlines in using toolbar icons, 499
specified distance and No. of Sides. See Polygons using with Symbol
angle, 293 No. Points. See Object Browser, 355
to another layer, 295 snapping, to dividing point Oblique views, 481–82
using Match on 3D Normal. See Angles, setting axonometrics, 481
entities, 462 types of creating elevation, 481
610| INDEX
creating plan, 482 Pen width. See Printing, pen tracing, 272
elevation, 481 width tracing 2-point arcs, 272
plan, 481 Perimeter, measuring circle tracing 3-point arcs, 273
rotation angle for, 481 or polyline, 271 tracing tangent arcs, 273
settings for, 481 Perp. See Object snapping, PrevDist. See Distance,
Offset. See Entities,offsetting drawing line perpendicular previous
and copying to entity Preview
OnSide. See Balusters, Perspective views, 477–81 plots, 391,392
placement of 1-point, 479 Primary divisions
OnStrng. See Balusters, 2-point, 480 of spheres, 437
placement of 3-point, 481 of surfaces of revolution,
OnTread. See Balusters, camera settings for, 479 441
placement of cone of vision, 478, 479 of torus, 439
OpenStr. See Stringers, open eyepoint of, 477, 478 Printing
Orphans focal point of, 477, 478 check plot, 390, 393
using Reference File hither clip in, 478 color, 395, 396
Manager with, 60 tutorial, 152 effective plotting area for
XREF, resolving, 60 using view sphere for, 472 paper size, 389
Out Sill. See Windows, Picture plane, 478 gray scale, 395
drawing Plane snap, 401 laying out your drawing
Overhead doors, 208 changing zero plane for, 391, 396
Overshoot, 58, 195 orientation, 401 layout orientation, 390
adding to existing line, 58 positioning zero plane loading pen table settings
displaying, 58 with, 402 for, 396
setting, 58 Plane Snap. See Plane snap paper orientation, 389
Plotting. See Printing paper size for, 389
check plot, 393 Pen Table, 391,394–96
P scale, 391 in tutorial, 140
Palettes, using customized single-scale, 397 Pen Table settings for
colors, 196 tutorial, 138–42 .BMP and .JPG images,
Pan/Scrolls, remembering, 42 Plotting scale. See Printing, 370
plotting scale for Pen Table settings for SPB
Parallel views, 471–77
elevations, 475 Pocket doors, 208 fills, 346
isometric, 475 Point to Point, measuring, pen width, 391
268 plotting scale, 391
new view center as new
grid origin for snapping, Polygons, 218–19 preview of plot, 391, 392
472 converting from closed quick layouts for, 391, 397
polyline to, 236 rotating plot for, 391
using view sphere for, 472
Password, setting, 186 hide edge of, 422 saving pen table settings
Paste, 59, 60 normals, 491 for, 396
Paste Special, 59, 60 show edge of, 422 selecting printer for, 389
Pattern Fills. See SPB Fills Polylines tutorial, 138–42
Pen Table, 394–96 adding voids to, 238, 343 using pen table settings,
map to color, 395 converting to polygon, 236 396
save settings in .DPF file, converting to slab, 236 widths of pen passes, 395
396 converting voids to Program Preferences
set pen colors, 395 polygon, 239 background color, 31
set pen density, 395 covered, 236 DXF/DWG import, 36
set pen width, 395 drawing, 233–39 menu button font, 32
settings for .BMP and drawing by segments, 235 pathnames, 27
.JPG images, 370 erasing voids from, 239 Program, launching external
settings for SPB fills, 346 hatching master containing in DataCAD, 75
use settings saved in .DPF voids, 238, 343 Project
file, 396 rectangular, 234 drawing efficiently, 51
 INDEX | 611
managing, 158 Rectangle. See Polylines, thickness of, 549
planning entire, 49 drawing rectangular, See RndNosng. See Nosing, for
planning layers, 50 Drawing, rectangles stair treads
Project Directory, 158 drawing, 219 Roll angles, 438
sample, 52 drawing 3D polygons, 410 Roof framing, 513–22
Projection pad, toolbar, 17 drawing slabs, 410 overhang for, 514
Rectangular arrays, 463 pitch for, 514
Redo, 59 purlin height for, 514
Q Ref. Point. See Reference rafters for, 514
Quadrant. See Object point, floating sheathing for, 514
snapping, to nearest Reference point, 256–58 with FrameIt, 513
quadrant point fixed, 256 with RoofIt, 515
Quick. See Object snapping, floating, 256 Roofs
increasing speed of show current, 43 A-frame, 415
Quick Layout. See Printing, using with direction dormer, 416, 417
quick layouts for distance, 258 exterior elevations of, 375
Quick Search. See 3D Referencing framing, 513–22
image files, 369 gable, 415
entities, selecting curved
Quick snapping, 403, 407 Referencing drawings, 60 hip, 415, 417
disabling nested, 43 mansard, 415
orphaned, 60 rafters for, 418
R resolving orphaned, 60 shed, 415
retaining highlight Roofs, 3D
Radians. See Angles, setting settings, 43 adding (tutorial), 147
types of
using stamps, 369 boundaries for, 516
Radius Reflection line, defining, 252 joining, 518
curve, dimension of, 336 Relative Cartesian entry, 55 modeling, 515
draw circle based on, 228 Relative polar entry, 55 polygonal, 517
of 3D stair handrails, 551 drawing line with, 55 rectangular, 516
of balusters, 553 Remove settings for, 520
of circles, 426 cutouts in walls, 207 types of, 515
of cones, 433 doors, 211 Rotate
of curve, measuring, 269 windows, 215 3D entities, 464–65
of curved stairs, 546 Rename. See Layers, and copy entities, 298
of horizontal cylinders, renaming center of 3D, 465
429,431
Rendering, defining materials dynamically, 299
of newel posts, 555 for each layer, 174 entities, 298
of torus, 438 Reports setting new angle of, 300
Rafters, drawing, 418 about symbols, 366 Rotation angles
Raytrace, with Object generating for symbols, in 3D views, 471
Viewer, 500
366 setting, 474
Recovering using Report Forms
lost drawing, process for, dialog, 366
71 Rev. Surface. See Surfaces of S
Recovering lost drawing revolution
process for, 72 Sashes, for 3D windows, 528
RghtExtn. See 3D stairs,
Rect. Array. See Copy, Save All. See Drawings,
treads of saving
rectangular array Right-hand rule, 471
Rectangl. See Newel posts, Save As. See Drawings,
Rise angles, 436, 440 saving
rectangular, See Balusters, RiserHgt. See 3D stairs, riser
rectangular, See Handrails, Save Delay. See Saving
height of drawings, delay for
rectangular Risers, 548 automatic saves
color of, 549 Save Image. See Hidden line
height of, 548 removal, saving image of
612| INDEX
Saving angle type, 187 overshoot lines, 490
automatic, 193 change value definitions, rendering, 490
drawings, 66 190 saving settings, 491
drawings, delay for changing 3D, 404 settings for, 488
automatic saves, 193 cursor miss distance, 192 shadow plane, 490
layers, 170 delete value definitions, show lights, 490
Scale. See Printing, plotting 189 sun light source settings,
scale for display big cursor, 192 489
Scales display draw marks, 192 Shading, 488–92
architectural, 190 display negative Shed roofs, 415
engineering, 191 coordinates, 193 Shortcuts
metric, 191 edit angle definitions, 189 creating keyboard for pull
setting types, 187, 188 edit distance definitions, down menu options,
Screen calibration, 29 189 576
Screen coordinates, 474 edit scale definitions, 189 standard keyboard, 574
Scroll distance, 17,65, 193 for drawings, 186 Show Attrib. See Attributes,
Search Hatch. See Object load custom definitions, added with macro,
snapping, to hatch lines 190 displaying visible
Secondary divisions number of primary Show Dim. See Dimensions,
of spheres, 437 divisions, 403 displaying associative
of surfaces of revolution, number of secondary Show Hatch. See Hatch,
441 divisions, 403 displaying
of torus, 439 panning distance, 193 Show Ins. See Symbols,
Sections, 384–85 password, 186 insertion points displaying
cabinet, 384 save custom definitions, Show Text. See Text,
cabinet styles for, 385 190 displaying
Sel. Set. See Object snapping, scale type, 187 Show Values. See Text,
to entities in active scroll distance, 193 displaying styles
selection set smallest grid, 192 Show Weight. See Line
Select Fill Color/Pattern, 344 Z-elevations, 404 weight, displaying
Selection Setup program. See ShowVals. See Walls,
3D, by area, 45 Installation of DataCAD displaying styles
3D, by fence, 45 Shaded image, 488–92 ShowZ. See Z-base,
by area, 44 creating, 488 displaying, See Z-height,
by crossing, 44 saving, 492 displaying
by entity, 44 saving shader settings, 491 Sig. Digits. See Decimal,
by fence, 44 settings for, 488 place setting
by group, 44 using a .LIT file, 491 SigDigit. See Scales, setting
by layer search, 44 Shader types
by point, 44 background color of, 489 Sill Height. See Windows,
Set Active. See Layers, background image, 490 drawing
setting the active, See cast shadows, 490 Sills
Layers, changing the checking normals of for 3D doors, 533
active polygons, 490 for 3D windows, 527
Set Index, creating series of creating shaded image Single doors, 208
concentric contours with, with, 488 Single tee concrete forms,
457 draw edge lines, 490 drawing, 537
Set Snap. See Grids, edge type, 490 Site model with drop mesh,
changing size of entity receiving shadow, 448–55
Set Z User 2. See Z 491 Sketch, using Freehand to,
alternative elevations, highlight, 490 253
setting light settings, 489 Slab Refs.. See Slabs,
Settings loading light information, reference face markers
add value definitions, 189 491 Slabs
 INDEX | 613
adding vertices to, 420 using middle mouse button Start Ang. See Curves,
converting from closed for, 259 drawing
polyline to, 236 virtual, 266 Start Angle. See Angles,
deleting vertices from, 421 with Get-Snap, 264 setting types of
editing, 420 Solid Fills. See SPB Fills Status panel
hide edge of, 422 Sorting active layer, 19
horizontal, 411 layers, alphabetically, 177 layer search toggle, 19
moving vertices in, 422 layers, by color, 177 toolbar, 18
rectangular, 410 layers, by layer number, Stiffness. See Contours,
reference face markers, 177 stiffness of
413 layers, by lock status, 177 STL files
show edge of, 422 layers, by number of inserting into drawing, 61
thickness of, 410, 414 entities in, 178 Stops, for 3D doors, 533
vertical, 412 layers, by on/off status, Stretch, 300
Sliding doors, 208 177 3D entities, 466
Small Grid. See Display, using Layer Manager for, StrForm. See 3D stairs, form
options, setting 176 Stringers
Small Symbol. See Symbols, SPB Fills, 344 closed, 550
smallest display size choosing colors for fill and color of, 551
Small Text. See Text, pattern, 345 in center of stairs, 550
displaying smallest size choosing pattern, 345 on left side of stairs, 550
Smooth Pass. See Contours, controlling X/Y aspect of on right side of stairs, 550
smoothing surface bitmap fills, 345 open, 550
Snap grid moving entities on same thickness of, 551
changing size of, 160 layer, 296 width of, 550
matching to an entity, 276 moving filled entities, 346 Styles
new view center becomes printing controls with Pen arrow options for angle
new grid origin, 472 Table, 346 and curve dimensions,
setting (tutorial), 78 selecting .BMP or .JPG 335, 337
setting angle of, 161 image, 345 for automatic linear
using, 159 swapping entities on same dimension, 329
Snap Point. See Snapping, layer, 298 for automatic linear
point adding using instead of hatch dimensions, 333
SnapAngle. See Snap grid, patterns, 344 for linear dimension
setting angle of using Select Fill arrows, 327, 328, 332
Snapping, 258–66 Color/Pattern dialog, for linear dimension lines,
3D point, 408 344 327,328,331
adding to Get X distance, Spheres, 437 for linear dimension text,
265 beginning rise angle for, 327, 328, 330
grid origin for, 472 436 for walls, 204
object, 258 drawing, 436 line options for angle and
on layers, 403 ending rise angle for, 437 curve dimensions, 335,
plane, 401 SqrNosng. See Nosing, for 337
point, adding, 259 stair treads text options for angle and
quick, 403, 407 Stack Frac. See Fractions curve dimensions, 335,
subtracting from Get X Stairs 337
distance, 265 creating 3D with Z- Surfaces of revolution, 439
to add to or subtract from elevations in drawing, 440
defined angle, 265 rectangular arrays, 251 Survey data file
to define an angle, 265 Stamps creating drop mesh from,
to enter horizontal format exported, 42 448, 449
distance, 264 inserting in drawing, 369 Swapping, SPB-filled entities
to enter vertical distance, values updated on same layer, 298
264 automatically, 369
614| INDEX
Swing Color. See Doors, defining text attributes for, purging unused from
swing color of 320 drawing, 368
Swng Style. See Doors, definition of, 366 reducing, 359
swing style of deleting from drawing, replacing, 587
SWOTHLUDFB, 20 588 replacing several, 588
Symbol deleting from template, reports about, 366
attributes in DWG file, 10 588 rotating, 580
files, finding and using deleting unused from rotating dynamically, 359
older, 581 drawing, 368 saving, 362, 585
Symbol Browser dragging to position, 356 selecting, 353–57
deactivating Explode in, editing, 360, 585 selecting (tutorial), 127
362 editing information about, setting angle of rotation,
deleting symbol from, 365 364 359
docking, 351 editing information fields settings shown in
editing symbols with, 360, of, 586 Attention toolbar, 358
364 editing information fields smallest display size, 195
exploding symbol with, with FormAtr macro, text attributes for, 320, 368
360 587 using stamps, 369
opening symbol collection, editing text attributes of, System requirements, 3
353 324
placing symbols using, enlarging, 359, 582
356 erasing, 589 T
reloading symbol exploding, 360, 581 T Intersect. See Intersections,
definitions with, 366 exploding and editing cleaning T
replacing symbols with, while placing in your Takeoffs, 270
365 drawing, 586 Tangent arcs, tracing, 273
retaining settings for, 368 fixed rotation, 359 Tangents. See Obejct
selecting symbols from, inserting, 356, 580 snapping, tangent to arc
356 inserting in drawing contours, 456
undocking, 350 without Symbol drawing 3D arcs as, 426
using Object Viewer with, Browser, 580 temporary line, drawing
355 inserting with Template, arc using, 227
viewing symbols with, 355 581 Template files, finding and
X and Y divisions for, 352 inserting with Z offset, using older, 581
Symbols 582 Templates, 583–84
3D windows as, 524 insertion points displaying, changing number of
adding text attributes to, 195 divisions in, 584
320, 368 layer settings for, 368
creating, 583
angle of rotation, 359, 362 mirroring, 359 creating additional
balusters as, 553 naming, 585 information fields for,
changing size of, 580 newel posts as, 555 584
changing Z offset, 360 of 3D doors, 530 divisions, 583
converting to lines and offsetting insertion height editing, 584
arcs, 581 of, 360 fields, 583
copying (tutorial), 130 opening (tutorial), 125 naming, 583
creating, 362, 585 opening another (tutorial), opening another, 583
creating a handle for new, 129 selecting symbols from,
362 opening collection of, 353 582
creating text attributes for, placing, 353–57 Text
321 placing (tutorial), 127 adding attributes to
customizing layer settings placing in drawing, 356 symbols, 320, 368
for, 368 preview, 43 adding to drawing, 310
defining new, 362 previewing, 580 adjusting to fit in area, 313
purging from drawing, 589 aligning, 313
 INDEX | 615
arrows, drawing (tutorial), Thickness secondary divisions of,
113 of 3D stair landings, 548 439
attributes for symbols, of 3D stair risers, 549 Tracing
320, 368 of 3D stair stringers, 551 2-point arcs, 272
changing angle of, 311 of 3D stair treads, 549 3-point arcs, 273
changing appearance of, of doors, 211 polylines, 272
310 of slabs, 410, 414 tangent arcs, 273
changing aspect ratio of, of vertical cylinders, 429 Translator
311 Title block default settings for
changing attributes of, 290 creating (tutorial), 133 DXF/DWG files, 37
changing properties of To Layer. See Copy, to DWG/DXF, 560
TrueType font, 311, another layer, See Layers, importing DWG and DXF
318 moving entities to another files with, 10
changing size of, 311 Tool tip, 14 Trd/Run1. See 3D stairs,
changing style of Toolbars, 14 treads in first run of
TrueType font, 311, action codes for, 568 Trd/Run2. See 3D stairs,
318 Architect context- treads in second run of
changing weight of, 311 sensitive, 200 Trd/Run3. See 3D stairs,
creating attributes for attention, 20 treads in third run of
symbols, 320, 321 context-sensitive, 18 TrdLngth. See 3D stairs,
deleting styles, 316 coordinates, 20 tread length of
displaying, 194 creating custom, 565 Treads, 549
displaying smallest size, creating icons for, 566 color of, 550
195 customizing, 15 depth of, 549
displaying styles, 316 dialog box, 15 extensions of, 549
drawing arrows, 317 Draw, 35 nosing for, 549
editing (tutorial), 114 drop-down items, 567 thickness of, 549
editing symbol attributes, Edit, 35 Trim
324 hints, 20 for 3D doors, 531
entering directly into hotspots in status panel, 19 of 3D windows, 526
drawing, 311 icon button size, 566 Trimming, 280–84
exporting, 315 icons access menu entities, 282, 283
importing, 315 functions, 15 entities to end at a
inserting, 312 message, 20 specified line, 282
inserting notes (tutorial), multiview windows, 20 entities to intersection of
112 navigation pad, 16 two lines, 282
inserting room names projection pad, 17 entities, specified, 283
(tutorial), 111 selecting default, 34 TrueType fonts. See Fonts,
inserting TrueType text in standard, 16 TrueType (TTF)
drawing, 319 status panel, 18 converting to 3D, 320
justifying, 312 SWOTHLUDFB, 20 inserting text in drawing,
loading styles, 316 viewer, 17 319
setting attributes (tutorial), viewing with Navigation setting text parameters for,
110 icons, 65 318
setting parameters for view-sensitive, 17 using instead of CHR
TrueType fonts, 318 Toolbox fonts, 318
style for dimensions, 327, Concrete, 536 TrueType fonts (TTF), 318,
328 Torus, 438 See Text, using TrueType
style options for angle and beginning roll angle for, (TTF) fonts for
curve dimensions, 335, 438 TTF. See TrueType fonts
337 ending roll angle for, 438 Tutorial
styles of, 315 primary divisions of, 439 adding layers, 78
using TrueType (TTF) radius of, 438 assigning layer colors, 80
fonts for, 318
616| INDEX
automated 3D modeling, Vertical cylinders changing center of, 472
144–50 divisions of, 429 deleting an existing GoTo
border, creating, 131 thickness of, 429 View, 495
border, moving, 132 Vertical slabs, 412 isometric, 475
changing active layer, 79 VertOfst. See Balusters, moving an existing GoTo
cleaning wall vertical offset of View, 495
intersections, 89 View center parallel, 471–77
dimensions, automatic, changing with Edit Plane, perspective (tutorial), 152
119 472 remembering previous, 42
dimensions, drawing string changing with New Elev., renaming an existing
of, 116 472 GoTo View, 496
dimensions, setting, 115 repositioning, 472 shaded image, 488–92
dimensions, stretching, View Layer. See Layers, Virtual snapping, 266
120 viewing Visibility
drawing View sphere, 472 hide edge of polygon or
doors, 96 changing eye point for slab, 422
windows, 102 view, 472 show edge of polygon or
drawing text arrows, 113 formerly "globe", 472 slab, 422
drawing walls, 81 moving, 473 Voids
editing text, 114 operating, 473 adding, 419
hatching, 122 repositioning in Drawing adding to polyline, 238,
inserting notes, 112 Window, 473 343
inserting room names, 111 using for parallel views, converting, 420
printing, pen table, 140 472 converting to polygon, 239
renaming layers, 78 using for perspective erasing, 420
setting snap grid for, 78 views, 472 erasing from a polyline,
setting text attributes, 110 Viewer/Shader 239
symbols, copying, 130 defining materials with, hatching polyline that
symbols, opening, 125 502 contains, 343
title block, creating, 133 saving material Volume, measuring circle or
viewing 3D model, 150– assignments in .DMF polyline, 271
56 file, 505
using for color mapping,
501 W
U Viewing Walk through a model
Undo, 59 3D models (tutorial), 147 customizing options for,
Ungroup. See Entities, advanced 3D (tutorial), 497
ungrouping 151 looking, 498
Units. See Scales, setting changing, 151 perspective navigation
types layers, 167
controls, 496
UnitType. See 3D windows, selected entities in 3D perspective view, 496
types of model, 492 saving a view of, 498
User Line. See Line types, using arrow keys for, 65 stepping, 498
displaying using Clip Cube for, 492 turning, 497
using Navigation toolbar using hotkeys, 496
for, 65 using MouseWheel, 496
V Views Viewer toolbar, 496
3D oblique, 481–82 walking, 497
Vertex 3D perspective, 477–81
adding, 420 Wall framing, 511–13
adding current to GoTo plate settings for, 513
deleting, 421 View list, 495
moving, 422 stud settings for, 513
changing, 151 wall height for, 513
of polygons, 219 changing an existing GoTo
Vertical 3D polygons, 412 Wall Style Manager, 204
View, 495
 INDEX | 617
deleting wall styles with, of 3D stair handrails, 551 Z By Layer, 174
205 of balusters, 553 settings for current layer
displaying wall style of newel posts, 555 only, 400
settings, 206 of stair stringers, 550 Z Enlargmnt. See Enlarge, in
saving changes, 205 of walls, 202 Z direction
specifying options, 205 Windows Z Inc. X. See Arrays, using Z
using wall styles, 205 adding 3D (tutorial), 144 elevations in rectangular
Wall Thk. See 3D windows, drawing, 212–15 Z Inc. Y. See Arrays, using Z
wall thickness for drawing (tutorial), 102 elevations in rectangular
Walls drawing in elevations, 380 Z offset, for symbols, 360
2-line, 200, 201 modeling 3D, 524–29 Z-base
3-line, 200, 201 removing, 215 displaying, 193
3-line attributes, 201, 203 width of jamb, 213 for 3D lines, 400, 404
4-line, 200, 201 WndwFile. See 3D windows, setting for each layer, 174
4-line attributes, 203 files to thickness, 410
attributes, 202 WndwForm. See 3D to Z-height, 410
capping, 201, 204 windows, forms Z-Dist. See Distance, stretch
cleaning, 203 World coordintates, 474 in Z direction
cleaning (tutorial), 89 Z-elevations
cleaning intersections, 201 changing, 404
cutting, 206 X using in rectangular arrays,
cutting, for 3D doors, 529 X Enlargmnt. See Enlarge, in 251
cutting, for 3D windows, X direction Zero plane, 400–403, 405
524 X Intersect. See Intersections, and New Elevation
defining by cavity center, cleaning X Indicator, 476
201 XREF. See Referencing Z-height
defining by center, 201 drawings displaying, 193
deleting styles, 205 highlight settings, retain, for 3D lines, 400, 404
displaying styles, 206 43 setting for each layer, 174
drawing, 200–207 nested, disable, 43 to thickness, 410
drawing (tutorial), 81 resolving orphaned, 60 Zoom, 64
finishing for models XREF Clip. See Clip Cube, free zoom using menu, 64
(tutorial), 149 defining in XREF with to extents of drawing, 64
framing, 511–13 XREF Clip with Navigation toolbar,
loading styles, 205 65
removing opening from, Zoom options, 26
207 Y scroll wheel and, 43
setting attributes of, 201, Z-User 1. See Z alternative
202 Y Enlargmnt. See Enlarge, in elevations
styles, 204 Y direction Z-User 2. See Z alternative
welding, 211,284 elevations, setting, See Z
width of, 202 Z alternative elevations
WallStyl. See Walls, styles
Welding, 284 Z alternative elevations,
Width setting, 404
 □ATACAD LLC

Software for ABC Professionals since 19 S4

[email protected]
www.datacad.com
(860) 677-4004 Phone
(860) 677-2610 Fax
20 Tower Lane
Avon, CT 06001
USA

PN LTMR-1100